Ritz-Carlton Design Standards 2013

The Ritz-Carlton Hotels
Hotel
Design Standards
JANUARY 2013
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Ritz-Carlton Hotels Design Standards

GR1 Overview & Project Administration
GR2 Signage & Graphics
GR3 Material & Product Criteria
GR4 Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment (FF&E)
GR5 Typical Finish Schedule
1 Site / Building Exteriors
2 Public Entry
3 Food & Beverage
4A Recreation Facilities
4B Kids Programs
5 Retail Spaces
6 Function Spaces
7A Guestrooms & Suites
7B Guestroom Corridors / Support
7C Club Lounge
8A Administration Facilities
8B Employee Facilities
9 Engineering & Maintenance Facilities
10 Food Production
11A Laundry
11B Housekeeping
12 Elevators & Escalators
13A Information Technology Infrastructure
13B Telecommunications
13C Audio / Visual
14 Fire Protection & Life Safety
15A Mechanical
15B Plumbing
15C Electrical
16 Loss Prevention
Revised: January 2013

Supersedes: 2009 and previous editions
January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR
general requirements
GR1::Overview & Project Administration
GR2:: Signage & Graphics
GR3:: Material & Product Criteria
GR4:: Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment (FF&E)
GR5:: Typical Finish Schedule
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR1
Overview & Project Administration
GR1 - Overview & Project Administration THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
GR1.1 Concept of Ritz-Carlton Hotels 3 Overview
GR1.2 Scenography 4
GR1.3 Design Standards 5 Administration

GR1.4 Project Application 5
GR1.5 Interpretations 7
GR1.6 Code & Regulation Compliance 7
GR1.7 Accessibility 8
GR1.8 Green and Sustainable Design 9
GR1.9 Building Materials, Products and Equipment 10
GR1.10 Design Review Process Model 11 Design Review

GR1.11 Preliminary Design Phase 13
GR1.12 Design Phase Administration 15
GR1.13 Design Brief 16
GR1.14 Concept Design Phase Requirements 17
GR1.15 Schematic Design Phase Requirements 18
GR1.16 Design Development Phase Requirements 19
GR1.17 Construction Documents Phase Requirements 20 Construction Phase

GR1.18 Construction Phase Requirements 21
GR1.19 Turnover Schedule 22
GR1.20 Project Close Out Requirements 24
GR1.21 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations 26
Module Organization
7KLV0RGXOHLVDSDUWRIDQLQWHJUDWHGVHULHVRI0RGXOHV
&RRUGLQDWLRQZLWKLQIRUPDWLRQIURPRWKHU0RGXOHVLVUHTXLUHG
7KHUHIHUHQFHV\PERO;;!LVXVHGWRLQGLFDWHD0RGXOHUHIHUHQFHWKDW
LQFOXGHVUHODWHGLQIRUPDWLRQ Revised: January 2013
5LW]&DUOWRQ&RQILGHQWLDO 3URSULHWDU\,QIRUPDWLRQ Supersedes: 2009 and previous
7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKH'HVLJQ6WDQGDUGVDUHFRQILGHQWLDODQGSURSULHWDU\WRWKH editions
5LW]&DUOWRQ +RWHO &RPSDQ\ //& DQG PD\ QRW EH UHSURGXFHG GLVFORVHG
GLVWULEXWHGRUXVHGZLWKRXWWKHH[SUHVVSHUPLVVLRQRIDQDXWKRUL]HGUHSUHVHQWD-
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
&RS\ULJKWWKH5LW]&DUOWRQ+RWHO&RPSDQ\//&XQSXEOLVKHGPDWHULDO$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG
B Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Overview & Project Administration - GR1
CREDO
The Ritz-Carlton is a place
where the genuine care and
comfort of our guests is our
highest mission.
We pledge to provide the fin-
est personal service and facili-
ties for our guests who will
always enjoy a warm, relaxed
yet refined ambience.
The Ritz-Carlton experience
enlivens the senses, instills well-
being and fulfills even the unex-
pressed wishes and needs of our
guests.
Vision
To be the premier worldwide provider of luxury experiences.
Mission
The Mission of “Service, Product and Profit Leadership” defines
what Ritz-Carlton must accomplish to achieve our Vision. .
• Service is exceptional delivery of The Gold Standards.
• Product represents superior facilities and amenities.
• Profit is outstanding financial results necessary to operate and
grow our business.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 1

Overview
Ritz-Carlton’s strategic vision is to be recognized as the premier
worldwide creator of luxury lifestyle experiences. The Ritz-
Carlton will fulfill the vision of being a truly iconic, global luxury
lifestyle brand by engaging guests through unique, memorable
and personal experiences that transcend hospitality and create
indelible marks in their lives.
Ritz-Carlton creates experiences so exceptional that long after
the guest leave, the experience stays with them.
Legendary: With respect to iconic heritage, Ritz-Carlton
sets the standard for rare and special luxury experiences
the world over.
Gracious: The Ritz-Carlton is renowned for the mutuality
of respect between the Ladies & Gentlemen and guests. As
an oasis of civility, the Brand combines thoughtful service
and a personal connection to create an experience that will
last a life time.
Inspiring: The Ritz-Carlton encourages guests to be their
best self by co-creating personalized experiences that
capture their imagination and passions, creating indel-
ible memories through moments of artistry, surprise and
delight.
Ritz-Carlton believes....
• In speaking to wants and desires, not to rational needs
• In creating an enticing attraction, not in leading with reason
and value
• In standing out to a discerning eye, not in blending in with
the crowd
• In being extraordinary in the art of anticipating, not in being
merely competent
• In exceeding your highest expectations, not in just meeting
the most basic of them
• In the power of being timeless, not in following trends which
may quickly pass
2 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR1.1 Concept of Ritz-Carlton Hotels

A. Design Concepts: The Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH) Company
concept is that the hotel is a grand residence that focuses
its services on the individual guest.
Thus, the intent of the design is to provide a series of spaces
that maintain the focus on the individual guest rather than
large monumental spaces. These spaces are part of a cohe-
sive project design concept for interior and exterior spaces.
The following design concepts and relationships are fur-
ther defined in subsequent Design Standard Modules.
B. Guest Services: Service to the guest is provided in a similar
manner, complete and personalized. To this end, provide
services without infringing upon the guest’s environment.
Back-of-House (BOH) services do not cross the guest
areas and public spaces. Carefully screen service access
from the BOH to prevent views, lighting, and noise from
disturbing guests.
C. Hotel Systems: Mechanical, servicing equipment, systems,
and access to equipment areas are not visible from public
spaces. Similarly, design and conceal expansion joints,
panic hardware and related devices from view in public
and guest spaces.
Carefully coordinate emergency and fire systems to ensure
adequate protection for guests without conflicting with the
design of the guest’s environment.
D. Guest Circulation: Plan guest’s interior and exterior facilities
to avoid conflicts of function, circulation and dress attire.
The guest experience should not be infringed upon by the
work efforts of the employees.

GR1.2 Scenography
A. Concept: To enhance The Ritz-Carlton mystique, RCH fol-
lows a process called Scenography. The goal is to create
unique, personal and memorable experiences - emotional
experiences that the ladies and gentlemen will never for-
get and ensures that they are forever Ritz-Carlton guests.
Each Ritz-Carlton hotel follows a two step process for
Scenography.
1. Theme: The first step is to define the “theme” that ties
together the guest experience. The theme defines what
makes the hotel experience unique and memorable for
the guests. A theme could be a resort’s tranquil coastal
location or an urban hotel’s association with a hidden
food, art or history treasure.
2. Scene: The second step comes to life through the staging
of individual “scenes” - emotional, guest focused
experiences that are aligned with the hotel theme. A
scene can create a new iconic guest experience, such
as a special activity or ritual, that occurs to mark the
sunset or the start of the evening. Or a scene can be an
innovative approach to an existing hotel process, such
as creating a signature departure experience.
B. Scenography Time Line: Scenography is developed through-
out the design of the project. Information is shared and
communicated through each phase of the project design
process.
1. Sense of Place: At the project initiation, the design
team, the RCH Project Manager and SVP Operations
discuss and develop a “Sense of Place” to guide the
project design and identify opportunities to integrate
Scenography.
2. Positioning: The SVP Operations and Director
of Marketing, when assigned to the project, align
Scenography with the established Sense of Place.
3. Scenography: The General Manager and Operations
Guidance Team implement the Scenography scenes
and touch points.

Administration
GR1.3 Design Standards
A. Purpose: The Hotel Design Standards have been prepared
by Marriott International, Inc. (MI) to communicate hotel
product standards for the design of Ritz-Carlton Hotels and
Resorts. These Design Standards describe the building, fa-
cilities, exterior environment, the quality and types of fin-
ishes that define a RCH hotel. While the Design Standards
are used to gain an understanding of the hotel Brand and
obtain initial pricing and budgeting parameters, the facility
design and finishes for a specific project will vary.
B. Document Organization: The Design Standards are orga-
nized into 17 complementary Modules to facilitate the
integration of design requirements into the design process.
1. Module GR: This Module describes the General
Requirements applicable to the design process and
design.
2. Modules 1 - 16: These Modules provide design criteria,
facility requirements and general material qualities
that facilitate the development of the final design and
documentation.
C. Minimum Standards: The Standards in this Module are mini-
mum RCH requirements for developers, franchise partners
and market managers.
Where applicable codes, ordinances and laws take pre-
cedence and these are substantially different from RCH
requirements, review the differences with the responsible
design team consultant and the RCH Design Team to ob-
tain resolution.
GR1.4 Project Application

A. Design Integration: The integration of the RCH Brand and
Design Standards creates a unique hotel that provides the
consistency and quality that guests require of a leading
brand.
These Design Standards establish a consistent level of
quality for RCH without defining a singular design state-
ment or facility. It is desirable that each project embrace its
regional context while maintaining the focus of the brand
and RCH design concept.
3. A Ritz-Carlton Hotel typically includes the following,
unless modified by RCH and the project Facilities
Program:

• Lobby Lounge & Signature Bar

• Retail
• Fitness Center / Pool / Spa
• One 3 Meal per Day Restaurant
• Function / Meeting Space
• Business Center
• Application of the Design Standards to a substan-
tially different program requires modifications as
directed by RCH.
4. Resort and leisure property features are similar to the
business hotel model, except resorts require additional
guest features and amenities; see the project Facilities
Program for requirements and supplements such as the
following:
• Guestroom features such as larger bathrooms, clos-
ets and bedroom; balconies
• Spa and Golf
• Additional Recreation
• Additional Food and Beverage
• Additional Retail
B. “Star” Rating: In addition to the Hotel Design Standards,
comply with “Forbes (Mobil) - 5 Star” and “AAA - 5
Diamond” Standards.
In countries that maintain a luxury hotel rating system, to
qualify or register for a hotel classification, the services,
features and facilities must meet these standards in order
to obtain the rating or classification.
C. Multi-use Buildings: In order to maintain operational and ac-
cess control (as required by Loss Prevention Review <16>),
hotel exit stairs, utilities, facilities and services are not
shared or connected to office, retail, residential, entertain-
ment, recreational or other external uses.
1. If shared facilities can not be avoided, submit and
obtain acceptance from RCH of alternate facilities that
safeguard the hotel operations and access.
2. Entertainment Lounges, General and Service Retail, and
Recreational Facilities not associated with the Fitness
Center are only included in the hotel program under
limited conditions when reviewed and approved by RCH.
3. Facilities and services not approved or directly managed
by RCH are separate and independent of the property
and therefore are not located within, proximate to, or
associated with the hospitality facility.

D. Dimensions, Sizes & Measurements: Conversions from

English to metric (SI) units are approximate. Verify, co-
ordinate and confirm product and material dimensions for
required design applications.
E. Cost Responsibilities: The organization of the Design
Standards into 17 Modules and the organization of each
Module are not intended to assign design, control, procure-
ment or cost responsibility to project team members.
GR1.5 Interpretations
A. General: Project specific conditions may require additional
design direction for issues not specifically addressed by the
Design Standards. RCH will provide additional interpre-
tations and information to assist in integrating the Design
Standards into the project design.
B. Modifications: These Design Standards may be modified by
RCH to reflect and respond to changing design, market,
construction, operational conditions and regional operat-
ing needs and requirements.
C. Current Edition: Prior to relying on or implementing the
Design Standards, verify with RCH that this Design
Standard edition is current and contains the latest
modifications.
GR1.6 Code & Regulation Compliance

A. Architect / Engineer of Record: The project Owner and the
Architect and Engineers of Record and consultants (design
professionals) are responsible for compliance with govern-
ing laws, codes, and regulations.
1. These Design Standards are not intended to negate
the Design Professional’s legal responsibilities for the
protection of public health, safety or welfare. Nor,
are they intended to alter responsibilities for good
design practices such as accessibility, environmental
protection, energy conservation, weather tight, safe
buildings, etc.
2. RCH reserves the right to request that a variance be
requested for code requirements that are in conflict
with the RCH Design Standards and operations.
B. Selecting Codes and Standards: Prior to the project’s com-
mencement, the Design Team proposes to the Owner and
RCH a recognized building code and standards for the
building, finishes and furnishings.

1. Current Editions: MI uses current editions of codes and

technical references below as a basis for comments.
2. Minimum Standards: Comply with the current
requirements of NFPA 101 (National Fire Protection
Association) and the understanding and interpretation
of them by the Marriott Fire Protection & Life Safety
Department and the Zurich Services Corporation.
3. Recognized codes and standards include:
a. International Building Code
b. NFPA Standards
c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (US)
d. ANSI Standards
e. UL and ASTM Standards
4. Code Integration: Follow these Design Standards
when they exceed requirements of governing codes or
accessibility guidelines.
5. Refer conflicts with Design Standards to RCH for
resolution.
GR1.7 Accessibility
A. Meeting the Needs of All Guests: In keeping
with the best traditions of Ritz-Carlton Hotels
(RCH) hospitality, we extend hotel services to
all guests, including those with disabilities.
• We work diligently to apply the best current thinking on
accessibility features to each new hotel, and each hotel
renovation.
• Recognizing that we operate and acquire hotels originally
built under previous requirements, we constantly seek to
improve the physical accessibility of our hotels, removing
existing barriers wherever feasible, as well as extending
services where barriers remain.
B. Accessibility Standards Compliance: As a minimum, RCH’s
accessibility standards require compliance with accessibil-
ity regulations of the country where the hotel is located and
the following criteria using United States standards:
1. Hotel Access: Provide an accessible public path of
travel into the hotel and into all spaces accessible to
guests.
2. Service: Provide access to services generally available
to hotel guests.
3. Public Toilets: All public area restrooms have
accessible toilet compartments, urinals, and lavatories.
4. Guestrooms: Outside of the U.S., a minimum of 1%
of the total guestrooms is accessible. Increase quantity
based on market norms.

C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Within the United

States, the facilities comply with the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA). Outside the U.S., projects must not
only comply with the accessibility standards of the govern-
ing jurisdiction, but also accommodate the guest’s acces-
sibility expectations represented by The Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
1. Conflicts: In cases where the governing accessibility
laws conflict with ADA or where issues are not mutually
addressed, consult with RCH to develop a program that
accommodates the guest’s expectations.
2. ADA Resources: Available free from the United States
Department of Justice at http://www.usdoj.gov/crt/
ada/adahom1.htm
GR1.8 Green and Sustainable Design

The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company supports green and sustainable
practices as an integrated part of our hospitality business.
We have an important facilitating role to play, working in part-
nership with our hotel Owners to implement sustainable design
and operations, to conserve natural resources, protect indigenous
wildlife, enhance indoor environmental quality, and reduce and
recycle waste wherever possible.
Operating with a greater awareness of green and sustain-
able design, we strive to support the environmental interests
and concerns of our guests, associates, business partners and
communities.
Marriott International / The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is an
active member and supporter of the following organizations:
The U.S. Green Building Council and LEED
Accreditation Program
The Center for Environmental Leadership in Business
Conservation International
The International Tourism Partnership
Energy Star Rated Products - for hotel brands worldwide

GR1.9 Building Materials, Products and Equipment

A. General: These Design Standards identify criteria for ma-
terials, products and equipment and not specifications and
methods of workmanship.
It is understood that the work is performed by skilled
craftsmen of various trades that reflect the best quality de-
fined by applicable industry standards. The criteria are for
use by the design professionals to develop project specific
specifications.
Additionally, the Design Standards are used by the
Architect, and other design team members, Owner and
Contractor to assure the quality of a hotel project.
B. Standard of Quality: The Design Standards identify specific
products that meet the RCH requirements. However, it is
clearly not RCH’s intent to limit product use.
Alternate manufacturers will be considered by RCH for the
products identified in the Design Standard. RCH will base
the decision of acceptance when compared to products identi-
fied as the standard of quality.
The Owner and Project team are responsible for submitting
documentation and samples of required and alternate prod-
ucts to RCH for consideration. Base initial budget projections
on products defined in this Design Standard.
C. Labels and Nameplates: Omit manufacturer nameplates and
other graphics visible to guests, unless directed by RCH.
D. Toxic or Carcinogenic Materials: No known toxic or carcino-
genic materials are specified or provided for construction.
This includes concealed materials and products containing
or manufactured with formaldehyde and asbestos.
RCH reserves the right to reject materials, including prod-
ucts specified for the FF&E package, that may pose a health
risk to guests or hotel employees. It is the responsibility of
the Owner and the Owner’s team to identify non-compliant
materials and to provide RCH with qualified written test-
ing lab reports that certify safety.
E. Technical Institute References: Use current editions.
F. Environmental Impacts: Adjust design for sites with high hu-
midity, noise, etc. At ocean sites with salt exposure select
and provide applicable non-corrosive finishes, equipment
and plant materials.

Design Review
GR1.10 Design Review Process Model
A. Application: This model defines the design and review pro-
cess requirements summarized in the Technical Services
Agreement (TSA) or Design Review Agreement (DRA)
governing the project. Consult the governing Agreement
(TSA or DRA) for project specific requirements applicable
to the project.
B. Design Sequence: This model assumes the entire project is
designed and constructed in one focused process. Typically,
project designs are developed in a series of parallel efforts
(exterior, guestrooms, public areas, etc.) requiring adjust-
ments to the process to address the intent of the governing
Agreement.
C. Project Delivery: This model assumes a sequential evolution
of the design and construction process. For projects em-
ploying a non-sequential process (fast-track, phased, etc.)
adjustments to the process are required to conform to the
governing Agreement intent.
D. Project Coordination: Consult with RCH at the project kick-
off meeting to develop a project specific design and con-
struction review process based on the project’s scope, bud-
get, schedule and team composition organized to address
the requirements of the governing Agreement.
E. Quality Assurance: Project design conformance with RCH
requirements is verified by a series of meetings, submis-
sions and document reviews. The process includes the
following design and construction phases, milestones and
tasks.

Figure 1 - Design Review Process
PHASES MILESTONES & TASKS
x Criteria Summary
x Facilities Program
Preliminary Design x Establish Preliminary Budget & Schedule
x Hotel Development Committee (HDC)
x Consultant Selection
x Kick-Off Meetings
Concept Design
x Loss Prevention Risk Assessment
x Concept Design Presentation
x Review Meetings
Schematic Design
x Schematic Design Presentation
x Review Meetings
x Insurance Review
x SMDR Presentation
Design Development
x Design Development Formal Presentation

x Review Meetings
Construction Documents x Review – 30-50%

x Review – 90-100%
x Guestroom Model
x Site Observations
Construction x Submittal Reviews
x Turnover
x Project Close Out

GR1.11 Preliminary Design Phase

A. Criteria Summary & Facilities Program: An initial step in the
design process is the Criteria Summary and Facilities
Program creation.
1. Criteria Summary: A Criteria Summary is developed
by MI for each project to establish the number of
guestrooms, amount of food and beverage and meeting
space, and other hotel program requirements based on
a feasibility study.
2. Facilities Program: The Criteria Summary and resulting
project Facilities Program forms the foundation of
the hotel design and governs the application of the
Design Standards. Together, the dictates of the Criteria
Summary and project Facilities Program are integrated
with the customized application of Design Standards to
guide the hotel design. Additionally, governing laws,
building codes, regulations, site conditions and local
parameters influence the hotel design.
Figure 2 - Design Process - Diagram
Business Plan
- Business Parameters
- Market Demands
- Management Terms
- Criteria Summary
Facilities
Program
Requirements
Hotel
Design Project
Standards Design
Governings
- Laws
- Codes
- Regulations
Location
- Site
- Culture
- Technology
- Competition

3. Design Phase Submittal: At each phase of the design

process, the Architect submits a revised, as-designed
project Facilities Program reflecting the current state of the
project design.
B. Hotel Development Committee (HDC): Every project requires
HDC approval.
1. The HDC evaluates variations to standards and carefully
weighs the overall benefit the project offers RCH.
2. Once a project is approved by the HDC, the building and
interior designs are developed for the design review process.
C. Design Team Selection: The Owner is responsible to research and
contract competent design consultants and obtain RCH accep-
tance of the selected consultants. For the Owner’s reference
and consideration, consult RCH for a list of qualified design
consultants specific to each project. The consultants include
but are not limited to the following:
1. Project Management
2. Architect
3. Interior Designer
4. Graphics Designer
5. Lighting Designer
6. Acoustic Consultant
7. Purchasing Agent
8. Landscape Architect
9. Engineers - Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
10. Restaurant Designer
11. Spa Designer / Consultant
12. Retail Consultant
13. Kitchen Designer
14. Laundry Designer
15. Security System Designer
D. Initial Technical Service Conference: The initial meeting with the
Owner and RCH establishes the working process between
the Owner’s project management representative and the RCH
technical service staff. The purpose of this meeting is to re-
view the following:
1. Project status and scope
2. Owner’s Preliminary Project Schedule
3. Owner’s Preliminary Project Budget
4. Project Administration
E. Design Kick-off Meeting: After obtaining the required approvals
and appropriate agreements, design coordination commences
with a project kick-off meeting. The goal is to generate a com-
prehensive concept of the project that includes functional and
aesthetic space planning, architecture, interior design and ex-
terior environment.

GR1.12 Design Phase Administration

A. Overview: Design phase reviews (concept, schematic, design
development) require a series of sequential meetings, docu-
ment submissions and presentations. Follow the guidelines
below to ensure an efficient design review process.
B. Design Review Process
1. Design Kick-off Meeting: At the initial design kick-off
meeting, review project requirements and establish a
schedule and content for reviews, submissions and
presentations.
2. Sequence: Typically, interior design presentations are
scheduled after the building designs are approved.
3. Resource: “Interior Design Process Guide”
C. Schedule: The Owner establishes and maintains the
project schedule for tasks, meetings, presentations and
documentation.
D. Budget: The Owner establishes and monitors the project
budget. Project Owners and their professional consultants
are strongly encouraged to utilize MI’s Cost Code System
to establish a common language and understanding.
The categorization provides both a breakdown of various
project elements and a distinction of responsibilities for
control.
Category 1 Extraordinary site and building

Special Site Conditions conditions.
Site and building improvements
Category 2
(including fees and permits) not
Building
included in other Categories.
Category 3 Cost and design fees for security,
Communications Systems telephone and two-way radio systems.
Category 4 Cost and design fees for kitchen,
Trade Equipment laundry and housekeeping equipment.
Category 5 Cost and fees for fi xed asset supplies
Operating Supplies and Equip- and hotel systems required to open a
ment fully operational hotel.
Cost and design & procurement fees
Category 6 for decorative items including FF&E,
Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment interior landscaping, graphics and
decorative lighting.
Category 7 Professional design fees (not included in
Architectural / Engineering Fees other Categories).
Category 8 Cost of land (closing costs, insurance,
Land, Corporate Finances, Legal fees) and interest and finance fees.
Cost necessary to open a hotel (items
Category 9 not included in Category 5) including
Operations pre-opening costs, working capital and
project development costs.

E. Updates: At each design phase formal presentation, provide

a revised project schedule, budget and Facilities Program
reflecting the current status of the project design.
F. Loss Prevention Review – General: <16> A Loss Prevention
(LP) Review generates a project specific Risk Assessment
that generates Functional Requirements. The Functional
Requirements are integrated with Module <16> minimum
requirements to produce a comprehensive project design
that reasonably mitigates or eliminates risk factors associ-
ated with the property location, design and facilities.
1. Managed Properties: The LP Review for RCH Managed
projects are conducted and overseen by MI’s Global
Security & Safety Technical Services department.
Deviations from MI’s LP Review process requires
RCH acceptance.
2. Franchise Properties: MI does not manage a franchise
company’s operations. The franchise shall determine
the most effective method to develop proper measures
and to select systems that coincide with the franchise
operations. Module <16> is intended only as a guide
to assist franchise management to develop proper
measures based on the franchise company’s unique
methods of operations such as, personnel, staffing
levels, technology, operational policies and experience.
GR1.13 Design Brief

A. Intent: To insure that each project fulfills the vision of the
Brand, a design brief is created that defines the project’s
unique characteristics, establishes a unified design vocabu-
lary and provides a basis for appropriately integrating the
Design Standards into the project.
B. Process: As early in the design process as feasible, a select
group of project principals meet (preferably at the project
site) to review established project criteria, to observe exist-
ing site condition and to develop a design brief script and
story.
C. Content: At a minimum, the design brief includes the
following:
1. Vision: Verify compliance with the goals.
2. Facilities Program: Validate or recommend exceptions.
3. Sense of Place: Define elements of the locations history,
culture and heritage that support indigenous design
authenticity.
4. Competitive Set: Provide a strategy to manage
competitive differentiation.

5. Site Features: Identify opportunities to integrate and

benefit.
6. Material Vocabulary: Establish types and palette of
colors.
7. Design Theme: Develop a unique, locally inspired
theme.
8. Environmental: Identify approaches to integrate,
protect or sustain environmentally sensitive features.
D. Brand Immersion: Prior to the Concept Design Phase initia-
tion and when the principal design team has been selected,
attend a Brand immersion meeting to review the Brand
goals and how they will be integrated with the Design
Brief.
GR1.14 Concept Design Phase Requirements

A. Overview: The Concept Design phase generates a compre-
hensive concept of the hotel project that includes functional
and aesthetic space planning, architecture, interior design
and exterior environment. Provide documentation to de-
fine parameters and adequately convey design.
B. Architectural Documents: Provide exhibits and illustrative
sketches in full color, depicting the Project design theme
and project objectives.
1. Facilities Program: current as-designed
2. Project Schedule
3. Project Budget
4. Research & Market Studies (laundry, sun orientation,
sign, traffic, acoustics)
5. Vicinity Map showing access and major surrounding
developments.
6. Site Plans with boundaries, contours, parking, buildings
and recreation facilities
7. Landscape Plan
8. Floor Plans
9. Typical Guestroom Floor Plans
10. Exterior Elevations and Sections
11. Exterior Image Boards
C. Interiors Documents: The concept design entails a loose or
more formal presentation and includes mood photos, writ-
ten words, a color palette, and possibly other items such as
examples of lighting, architectural finishes, and FF&E to
convey intent. See the Interior Design Process Guide for
detailed requirements.

D. Engineering Documents:
1. Design Brief of the major building systems
2. Utility system locations and definitions
E. Governing Authority: Inform RCH Project Director of meet-
ings and drawing submissions for planning, building, fire
and governing authorities that have project development
jurisdiction.
At initial meetings with the Fire Department, include a
representative of the Marriott Fire Protection Department.
Allow adequate time in the project schedule to coordinate
this meeting.
GR1.15 Schematic Design Phase Requirements

A. Overview: Prepare a Schematic Design phase presentation
incorporating RCH’s concept design plan review com-
ments and accepted variances. Provide documentation re-
quired to clearly convey the design intent, project program
criteria and compliance with Brand Standards.
B. Architectural Documents: Provide professionally prepared
preliminary drawings and documents.
1. Facilities Program: as-designed
2. Schedule: updated
3. Budget: updated
4. Special Studies: laundry, elevator, acoustic, etc.
5. Vicinity Map: site access, surrounding development
6. Site Plan: site features, buildings, recreation, traffic,
etc.
7. Landscape Plan: exterior planting, paving and
recreation, in color
8. Building Plans: public spaces, guestrooms,
back-of-house
9. Elevations and Sections: materials, color
10. Model: physical or digital
11. Fire & Life Safety: exit plan, separations, features
12. Loss Prevention: risk assessment
C. Interiors Documents:
1. Areas: guestrooms, corridors, entry, lobby, food &
beverage, function, recreation, spa
2. Floor Plans: floor material, furniture, fixture, equipment
3. Reflected Ceiling Plans: materials, heights, lighting
4. Elevations: as required to define design intent
5. Perspectives: views required to define design intent;
professionally created
6. Guestrooms & Lounge: enlarged plans, room matrix
7. Color & Materials Boards: samples and images; framed

8. Interior Design Process Guide: consult for additional

details
1. Utility Confirmations
2. System Descriptions
3. Space Allocations
4. Alternate System Analysis
E. Building Insurance Reviews: Managed Projects: At the com-
pletion of Schematic Design, and prior to beginning Design
Development, contact the designated insurance reviewing
agency to establish the following:
1. Elements requiring review; wind, earthquake, roof, fire
protection, etc.
2. Design criteria
3. Submittal requirements
F. Interim Working Sessions: Following the acceptance of
Schematic Design documents, a series of informal meet-
ings and reviews are conducted with RCH and the Owner’s
design team to advance the design, offer design assis-
tance and prepare documents for Design Development
acceptance.
G. Senior Management Design Review (SMDR): At the end of the
Schematic Design phase, prior to initiating the Design
Development phase, projects are presented to senior man-
agers to confirm mutual acceptance of the design and con-
sistency with the project Brand and Design Standards.
The formal presentation consists of the Schematic Design
documentation rendered and enhanced with color, illus-
trations and samples to clearly convey the design intent.
Consult the RCH Project Director and the Interior Design
Process Guide for the presentation schedule, format and
deliverables as appropriate for the project type, scope and
location.
Provide copies of the presentation in a digital format to the
principal stakeholders.
GR1.16 Design Development Phase Requirements

A. Overview: Prepare a Design Development phase presenta-
tion incorporating RCH’s Schematic Design phase and
SMDR comments and accepted variances. Provide fully
developed design documentation required to clearly con-
vey the design intent, project program criteria and Brand
Standards.

B. Architectural Documents: Provide detailed development

drawings.
1. Facilities Program: as-designed
2. Budget & Schedule: updated
3. Vicinity, Site & Landscape Plans: all areas of the project
4. Building Plans, Elevations & Sections: all areas of the
project
5. Special Studies: laundry, elevator, acoustics, recreation,
etc.
6. Fire Protection & Life Safety: exit plan, separations,
features
7. Trade Equipment: kitchen, laundry, IT systems, etc.
C. Interiors Documents: See the Interior Design Process Guide
for requirements.
1. Design Concept: fully developed and illustrated
2. Floor Plans & Elevations: all public areas of the project
3. Reflected Ceiling & Lighting Plans: materials, heights,
lighting
4. Perspectives: views required to define design intent;
professionally created
5. Guestrooms & Guest Floor Lounge: enlarged plans,
room matrix
6. Materials, Finishes, Colors & FF&E: samples and
images; framed
7. Millwork Design
8. Flooded Floor Plans: carpet designs
1. Design Narrative of Systems: updated
2. Space Allocations: plant rooms and vertical shafts
3. Riser Diagrams
4. Equipment Schedules
5. Calculations including load and service connection
sizes
GR1.17 Construction Documents Phase Requirements

A. Overview: Prepare Construction Documents for review and
acceptance incorporating RCH’s Design Development
comments and accepted variances. Provide fully developed
construction documentation required to clearly convey the
design, project program criteria and Brand Standards.
B. Early Construction Document Submittal: Provide 30 to 50%
Construction Documents as scheduled by RCH.

C. Final Construction Document Submittal: Incorporate com-

ments and accepted variances from the early review and
provide 90% to 100% Construction Documents for review
and final acceptance by RCH. Provide updated project
Facilities Program, budget and schedule.
Construction Phase
GR1.18 Construction Phase Requirements
A. Overview: Construct the project in compliance with the ac-
cepted submittals and Brand Standards.
B. Model Guestrooms: When the guestroom design is fully de-
veloped, as early in the schedule as appropriate, prepare
model guestrooms and corridor for RCH’s review and
acceptance. Incorporate RCH’s review comments and
variances in the model guestrooms for review and final ac-
ceptance prior to ordering guestroom and guest corridor
FF&E.
Complete initial mock-up rooms at least 12 months prior
to the hotel scheduled opening. This schedule allows for
the incorporation of corrections into the project prior to
installation of interior walls, plumbing, HVAC and electri-
cal rough-ins. See the Interior Design Process Guide.
C. Site Observation: During the course of construction, pro-
vide RCH with access to the project site to determine if
the project is proceeding in compliance with the accepted
submittals and Brand Standards. Provide updates to the
schedule, budget and information RCH requires for opera-
tional coordination.
D. Submittals: Provide Construction Phase submittals (shop
drawings, product literature, samples, mock-ups, etc.)
necessary for RCH to review design and construction
compliance based on the accepted submittals and Brand
Standards. Consult with RCH to establish the scope of re-
quired Construction Phase submittals including submittals
outlined in the Design Standards Modules.
E. Substantial Completion: Inform RCH of the anticipated date
of Substantial Completion, as scheduled in the TSA or
DRA agreement, and provide a review schedule for RCH’s
final review process, turnover and opening operations.
Provide Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion
and verification that the project was constructed in compli-
ance with RCH’s accepted submittals.

GR1.19 Turnover Schedule

A. Overview: In order to facilitate orderly staffing and train-
ing in preparation for Substantial Completion and project
opening, turnover building areas in accordance with the
following schedule and priority.
Figure 3 - Turnover Schedule

Construction Phase (Weeks)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 Week Priority Group
Substantial Completion
Opening
B. Priority Sequence: Since the areas of the building in each

priority group are dependent on the areas in the previous
group, turnover areas complete (constructed, furnished,
punched-out, accepted) prior to proceeding to the next pri-
ority. Reevaluate the date of Substantial Completion and
revise the schedule, if appropriate, prior to proceeding to
the next priority.
C. Turnover Prerequisites: The following items are required for
areas of the project intended for turnover activities prior to
Substantial Completion.
1. Fire Sprinklers: Fully operational
2. Means of Egress: A minimum of 2 clear, remote paths
with adequate capacity
3. Toilet Facilities: Adequate men and women toilets and
lavatories
4. Safety: Area free of construction activity
5. Circulation: Provide access to stairs, elevators and
corridors required for staffing and training.
6. Sleeping Accommodations: Not permitted, unless
approved by MI Fire Protection & Life Safety.

D. Project Schedule: Develop a customized turnover schedule that

addresses the intent of this process and obtain acceptance by
RCH.
12 Weeks Out - Priority Facilities:
• Garage Storage
• Purchasing / Receiving Office / Temporary Storage
• Rough Landscaping
• Ancillary Building Construction
• Store Rooms: Liquor / Beverage / Wine / Food
• IT & Telecom System Room
• Engineering Office, Window Washing Equipment
• Guest Floor Service Elevators & Service Elevators
• Ballroom (Hiring & Orientation)
• Receiving Area
• Kitchen & Coolers / Freezers
• Executive / Admin. / Sales & Catering Offices / Human
Resources
• Call Center / Telephone System
• Security Office / Central Control Station (Fire Command)
• Electrical and Mechanical Rooms, Boilers / Chillers /
Pump Rooms
• Service Level & Storage Areas / Banquet Storage
• Ballroom Service Corridor / Pantry
• Meeting Rooms (employee training)
• Housekeeping / Laundry & Valet
• Guestrooms 25% (Sequence to be determined.)
• Employee Dining Room / Locker Rooms / Linen Closets
• Reception / Reception Desk / Concierge / Control Room
• F&B: Lounge / Cafe / Bar / Dining Room
• Public Area Restrooms
• Retail / Business Center / Fitness Center
• Pre-Function Areas / Meeting Rooms
• Entry / Porte Cochere / Parking Areas
• Guestrooms 66% / Guest Floor Lounge / Guest Elevators
• Room Service / Service Bars / Count Room
• Swimming Pool Decks / Pool Equipment
• Landscape Maintenance Building & Equipment

4 Weeks - Priority Facilities:

• Guest Floors 100%
• Safety Deposit Box Room / Luggage Storage / Coat
Room
• Window Washing
• Finish Landscaping / Fountains
• Recreational Facilities
GR1.20 Project Close Out Requirements

A. Record Documents - As-constructed: Provide Record
Documents (drawings and specifications) of the documents
used to construct and furnish the project including testing,
balance reports, fire protection certificates and governing
authority documents required for occupancy.
The documents shall include and integrate changes, sup-
plements and accepted variances that represent the “as-
constructed” (as-built) completed project status. Provide 2
copies of the documents to RCH on CD in CADD and pdf
formats and 2 half-size drawing sets.
B. Operations & Maintenance: Provide operating manuals, tech-
nical information, warranties and special tools required to
efficiently operate and maintain the project’s equipment,
systems, finishes and furnishings. Provide documents in
digital format defined by RCH.
C. Training: Provide operations and maintenance training (be-
fore and after turnover as appropriate) required to efficient-
ly operate and maintain the project’s equipment, systems,
finishes and furnishings. Instructors shall be qualified
manufacturer’s representatives, vendors, factory autho-
rized technicians and installation contractors. Coordinate
training scope and schedule with RCH.
D. Warranties: Consult the Owner, design team and RCH to
coordinate requirements for extending warranties for
equipment, materials and systems beyond the standard
warranties provided by governing law, offered by the
manufacturer or required by the construction contract.
Consider the following variables.
1. Governing laws and legal process in the country of
construction
2. Cost and benefit analysis of warranty terms
3. Exclusions, disclaimers, limitations and imposed
obligations of extended warranties
4. Risk of product or system failure
5. Reputation of the company supporting the warranty

E. Attic Stock: Provide attic stock in compliance with project

requirements to permit rapid and efficient replacement of
damaged furniture, fixtures and equipment during the first
one or two years of operation. Consult with the Owner,
design team and RCH to establish minimum criteria con-
sidering the following project variables that may suggest
limiting attic stock requirements.
1. Storage: Verify if a secure, on-site storage area is
available.
2. Remote Storage: Consider the operational cost of off-
site storage, if required.
3. Damage: In order to remain serviceable, materials
require a controlled environment such as heating (to
prevent freezing), cooling and ventilation (to prevent
mold and mildew) and shelving.
4. Cost: Carefully balance the cost of providing attic stock
(initial cost of materials, storage and handling) against
the cost of procuring materials on an as needed basis.
5. Security: To ensure the attic stock is available when
required, inventory control is required.
6. Custom Products: Attic stock is beneficial for the rapid
replacement of “custom” products but is typically not
critical for the replacement of “stock” products.
7. Remote Locations: Projects, such as resorts located a
distance from their supply chain, may depend on attic
stock to avoid long lead times for product replacements.
8. Safety Stock: Extra materials normally ordered to
account for installation breakage and waste are not
included as attic stock but, if available, may serve to
minimize replacement risks and dependence on attic
stock.
F. Operating Equipment & Supplies (OS&E) and Spare Parts: OS&E
and spare parts required to operate the property are de-
fined in <GR4>.

GR1.21 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations

A&E Architect and Engineer
A/C Air Conditioning
A/V Audio / Visual
AC Alternating Current
A&C Architecture & Construction; a business division at
Marriott headquarters that manages project design.
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guide
AFF Above Finish Floor; when measuring height distance
AGA American Gas Association
AHU Air Handling Unit
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air-
conditioning Engineers, Inc.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Professional Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ATC Automatic Temperature Control
ATM Automatic Teller Machine
AWI Architectural Woodworking Institute
BAS Building Automation Systems; the computer system
that coordinates and controls heating and cooling,
mechanical, electrical, plumbing and safety systems.
These systems typically include the EMS, ATC and
DDC.
Call Telephone system software that automatically charges
Accounting guests for telephone and fax use.
CCCTV Closed Circuit Color Television
CLTD Cooling Load Temperature Difference
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
CWM Construction Waste Management
DAS Distributed Antenna System
Day Tank Fuel oil tank, typically located with an emergency
generator (large storage tank would feed fuel to “day
tank”).
dBA Decibel level, measurement of sound.
DDC Direct Digital Control; an electronic control device;
part of the BAS.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (protocol for
automating the configuration of computers that use TCP
/ IP)

DNS Domain Name System

DOAS Dedicated Outdoor Air System
DX Direct Expansion
Dx Units Direct-Expansion (DX) Unitary HVAC System
EIFS Exterior Insulated Finish System
ETS Environmental Tobacco Smoke
EMS Energy Management System
FC Foot Candle; measuring unit for lighting illumination
FDB Fahrenheit Dry Bulb
FF&E Fixtures Furniture and Equipment
FM Factory Mutual is an insurance agency for building
industry material, product, and assembly testing. FM
publishes the Factory Mutual Data Handbook.
FRP Fire Rated Panels
GFI Ground Fault Interruptor (electrical)
GFS Global Field Services
HPL High Pressure Laminate
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
IAQ Indoor Air Quality
IBC International Building Code
IEQ Indoor Environmental Quality
IP International Protocol
IR Information Resources
LAN Local Area Network
LDN Level Day-Night
LEQ Equivalent Continuous Noise Level
LFM Lighting Fixture Matrix
LPD Lighting Power Density
JW JW Marriott; a MI Hotel Brand
MARSHA Marriott’s Hotel Reservation System for Hotel Accom-
modations
MCNC Marriott’s Computing & Networking Center
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MEP Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
MHR Marriott Hotels & Resorts
MERV Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value - a measurement
of air filter efficiency
MGS Marriott Global Source; a secure Intranet web site for
Marriott Associates (ID and password required for
access)
MI Marriott International
MRL Machine RoomLess

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet

NALO North America Lodging Operations refers to properties
within continental U.S. and Canada.
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIC Noise Index Coefficient
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NGS Next Generation System is a property automated com-
puterized management application integrated with the
PMS and used to record and manage food, beverage,
and gift sales; also see P.O.S. and PMS. <13>
NIC Noise Index Coefficient
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
OCTV Open Circuit Television
OS Occupancy Sensors
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PCB Poly Chlorinated Biphenyl; an environmental pollutant.
P.O.S. Point of Sale computerized recording equipment used
to manage food, beverage and gift sales; see PMS.
PABX Private Automated (telephone) Branch Exchange.
PI Property Internet
PMS Property Management System is the property manage-
ment computer application used to record and manage
food, beverage and retail sales; see P.O.S. and NGS.
<13>
PPV Pay Per View
PSI Pounds / Square Inch
RH Renaissance Hotels; a Marriott International Brand
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air-conditioning Contractors National
Association.
SOP Standard Operating Procedures
STC Sound Transmission Class
SRI Solar Reflectance Index
TCA Tile Council of America
TESC Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
UL Underwriters Laboratories; an independent testing
agency.
UTD Up To Date
VFD Variable Frequency Drive.
VSS Video Surveillance System
VVVF Variable Voltage, Variable Frequency

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR2
Signage & Graphics
GR2 - Signage & Graphics THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
GR2.1 Programming and Design Objectives 1
GR2.2 Assessment and Planning 2
GR2.3 Property Identity Signage 4
GR2.4 Directions - on Site 5
GR2.5 Entry Logos and Plaques 5
GR2.6 Interior Signage and Graphics 6

Module Organization
LQFOXGHVUHODWHGLQIRUPDWLRQ
5LW]&DUOWRQ&RQILGHQWLDO 3URSULHWDU\,QIRUPDWLRQ
7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKH'HVLJQ6WDQGDUGVDUHFRQILGHQWLDODQGSURSULHWDU\WRWKH
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Signage | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Signage & Graphics - GR2
Signage & Graphics

GR2.1 Programming and Design Objectives
A. Design Objectives: To maintain the Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH)
quality of service, guests are directed to destinations by the
RCH staff rather than by signage.
1. Extensive signage programs are not desired, or necessary.
2. Where signage is required, provide understated signage
that is decorative in nature while providing adequate di-
rection to Guests.
3. The Ritz-Carlton Logo is a registered trademark. Do not
modify the logo or the size / proportion of the Ritz-Carlton
name. Submit signage package for RCH approval.
4. Coordination: Ensure full coordination of graphic ele-
ments with other related disciplines (see Module <1>
for traffic signage, other Modules for applicable signage
requirements.
Ritz-Carlton Plaque
B. Signage / Graphics Program: Following the “Design

Objectives”, prepare an integrated graphics program that
complements and reinforces the RCH architectural and func-
tional features to include identifying devices for:
1. Property Identity Signage
2. Traffic Control - Regulation Signage <1>
3. Entry Logos and Plaques
4. Interior Signage and Graphics
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Signage 1

C. Sign Locations: Develop sign locations and graphic forms to

address Signage, Graphics and Traffic Control <1> program
according to the Assessment and Planning outline below.
As the project is developed, a generic signage package is
provided by RCH to the design team. Typically, the signage
package is divided into the following groups.
1. Site and Exterior of Hotel
2. Public Spaces
3. Guestroom Floors
4. Back-of-House
GR2.2 Assessment and Planning

A. Project Conditions: Review project site and building(s) (actual
site or architectural documents).
B. Governing Regulations: Research codes to determine neces-
sary regulation information.
1. Comply with governing codes and follow signage
standards established by highest quality properties in
the region including the intent of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines. Use
raised letters. Provide Braille if usage is prevalent in the
region.
2. RCH reviews signage and design team applied requests
for code variances where the signage is not consistent
with the design intent and operation of the RCH property.
C. Entry Points: Determine site and building entry points.
1. Evaluate primary and secondary approaches to the site
and buildings.
2. Signage that directs guests is reviewed by RCH.
3. Do not include signage that directs guests to other devel-
opment functions.
4. Develop a comprehensive design for exterior signage to
include:
a. Guest direction on pathways.
b. Signage at remote resort facilities such as beach and
water conditions.
c. Traffic signs <1>, limited parking directions.
d. Van accessible and other disabled parking spaces.
e. Valet parking numbered spaces with 250 mm (10
inch) high letters.
f. Direction for service vehicles.
D. Scale: Determine overall scale of signage according to site
and building relationships. Typically, distance is not a factor
for sign size.
2 Signage | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

E. Vehicles / Pedestrians: Address needs of vehicles or pedestri-

ans as required.
1. Provide for a safe, anticipated entry (vehicular or pedes-
trian maneuver).
2. Study circulation patterns of guests, employees, service
and visitors for pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
3. Clarify and reinforce primary circulation paths.
F. Circulation Intersections: Identify “decision points” (intersec-
tion points along circulation path).
1. Circulation route intersections in roadways, sidewalks or
interior walkways.
2. Consider travel path, whether to turn left, right or proceed
straight ahead.
3. Provide information that explains and clearly indicates
each possible choice.
4. Limit information to essential elements only.
G. Destinations: Based on project complexity and if applicable
to the signage scheme, identify destination points (the main
Entry, Lobby Lounge, Club Lounge, Restaurant, Fitness
Center, Spa Facilities, Function Spaces, etc.).
1. Guestrooms, Meeting Rooms, Fitness Center, Concierge
Desk or Lobby and other facilities are typical destination
points.
2. Establish hierarchy for destination points.
3. Provide lead-in information for each through established
decision points.
4. Limit information to essential elements only.
H. Amenities: Include helpful guidelines for use of amenities as
required.
I. Information Hierarchy: Establish hierarchy for various types
of information.
1. Plan and document sign locations.
2. Determine sign scale and formats.
J. Guestroom / Suite Numbering: Establish a logical number-
ing system compatible with the Property Management
System. See Module <7A> for RCH property conventions
and “Guestroom Identification” in this Module for physical
appearance, size, location and mounting.

GR2.3 Property Identity Signage

A. General Criteria: Established Brand Identity Standards are
available from RCH on request. Generally, distance is not a
factor nor consideration for property signage size.
B. Bronze Signage: Provide bronze signs and plaques by manu-
facturer’s model numbers indicated in this Module.
1. Material: Produce plaques from #385 bronze alloy in sand
castings.
2. Sizes: Vary for application / location. Follow the size re-
quirements for sign types.
3. Finish: #4 bronze with medium oxidized background.
4. Protective Coating: Two coats of clear lacquer.
C. Signage Manufacturer: EEC Industries
1. Address: Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada
2. Contact: Henning Buch, (604) 986-5633,
h-buch@eecind.com
D. Primary Signage - Site / Hotel Sign: As proposed by the archi-
tect and landscape architect, provide discreet exterior, site
and hotel building identification signage compatible with
the facility architecture. Include “The Ritz-Carlton Hotel”
with property name on plaque. Mount on hotel walls or
monuments.
1. Type: Bronze plaque, site sign, Series RC5-A by EEC
Industries.
2. Location: Typically, at main entrance / arrival; co-ordi-
nate with landscaping.
3. Size: 50 x 110 cm (19 ¾ (h) x 43 (w) inch).
4. Sign Lighting: Provide free standing lights.
Property Identity Signage

GR2.4 Directions - on Site

A. Traffic Control Regulation Signage: See Module <1> for ve-
hicle traffic control signage.
B. Pedestrian Identification & Directional Signs: Provide decision
point and destination point items only.
On-Site Directions
C. Example, Site Direction Signage: Typically, the sign example
is limited to a large and complex RCH site. Use larger or
smaller characters and or adjust overall sign shape and size
because of available space and required sight distances from
vehicle or pedestrian.
1. A variety of other roadside or pedestrian sign panels may
be required to effectively direct guests, visitors and ven-
dors through a more complex RCH resort property.
2. Because RCH desires to minimize this signage type, re-
view its use with Owner and RCH.
GR2.5 Entry Logos and Plaques

A. General: Strictly formal in nature, these signs identify im-
mediate points of entry and are most appropriate at the entry
points only. Other property, area entry points may require
formal or special treatment.
B. Sign Types: Cast bronze plaque with protective clear smooth
coating, similar to exterior bronze plaques.
C. Point of Entry - Plaque:
1. Size: 24 x 41 cm (9 ½ (h) x 16 (w) inch).
2. Materials / Finishes: See “Bronze Signage” for “Property
Identity Signage” above.
3. Mounting / Location: Mount to side of entry doors as lo-
cated by Interior Designer and placed in conjunction with
decorative lighting adjacent to doorways.
4. Manufacturer Model: Sign Series RC5-A by EEC
Industries.
D. Secondary Identification Plaques: Smaller scale plaques to
identify secondary building and minor site entry points such
as the following:
1. “Club Lounge”
2. “Ritz Spa” (if programmed).

Point of Entry - Plaque
GR2.6 Interior Signage and Graphics

A. Interior Facilities and Direction: Following review with RCH,
provide minimal but specific, bronze plaque signage to ap-
plicable locations of decision making.
1. Use decision point and destination points.
2. Locate signs at decision or destination points only.
3. Include frequently used facilities (destination points) only.
4. Provide for association between destination points.
5. Scale sign and message size according to intended use.
6. Arrange message items in logical order.
7. Numbers follow ascending order (or according to prevail-
ing local custom).
8. Alphabetize items of equal importance.
9. Nearby destination points, first; further destination
points, last in order.
10. Use repetition of messages.
11. Select primary facilities and identify them repeatedly
within the graphics program, rather than to identify a
great number of varied facilities throughout the program.
B. Primary Destination Points:
1. Include primary noted features for the RCH property.
2. Establish hierarchy of destination points.
3. Emphasize small quantity of primary destination point
repeatedly.

Interior Direction Signage 4. Determine primary features according to intended

service.
5. Scale identification according to viewing distance.
6. Alter scale for esthetic or operating requirements.
7. Position identification to maximize viewing distance.
8. Establish consistency for like-use destination points.
9. Impose unique format for unique, differentiated, destina-
tion points.
C. Directional Signage: Directional signage is not to compete
with the resort design, but blend for a timeless appeal.
1. Provide bronze plaque directional signage at elevator
lobby areas to guestroom levels.
2. Provide directional signage at pedestrian level to resort
amenities.
D. Building Directory (if needed): Arrange in floor-by-floor style
on bronze plaques, listing the spaces available at each floor
accessed by the elevator.
1. Directional information for persons emerging from the
elevator at each floor lobby.
2. Provide information explaining the use of special access
floors (Residences or Club Units in high-rise facility).
E. Secondary Service / Destination Points: Provide the following
bronze plaque signage:
1. Telephones
2. Restrooms
3. Concierge Desk
F. Public Restroom / Toilets: Provide sign Series RC3 C by EEC
Industries and mount at entry to area. Address the following
appropriate to the dictates of RCH:
1. “Men” use: “Gentlemen”
2. “Women” use: “Ladies”
Public Restroom Sign 3. Spa Treatment Rooms
G. Essential Services or Amenity: Provide essential service sig-
nage, consider guest needs and comfort.
1. General:
a. Establish hierarchy of secondary destination points.
b. Emphasize subordination to primary destination
points.
c. Scale identification according to viewing distance.
d. Alter scale for esthetic or operating requirements.
e. Position identification to maximize viewing
distance.
f. Establish consistency for like-use destination points.
g. Establish consistency for location of information.

2. Signage Types: Provide sign Series RC3 B by EEC

Industries for the following:
a. Telephones: Mount at entry to area <2> <6>
b. Restrooms: Mount at entry to area <2> <6>
c. Executive Office <6>
d. Club Lounge <7>
e. Business Center <2>
f. Fire Cabinet(s)
H. Other Destinations: Often, these signs are helpful and would
reinforce use of an obvious facility such as the Front Desk or
Concierge Desk.
1. General:
a. Provide where guests may need direction or
assistance.
b. Additionally, stairways, special entry areas and cir-
culation corridors may be identified to assist guests
in areas where directions are helpful.
2. Signage Types: Provide sign Series RC3 A by EEC
Industries for the following:
a. Retail: <5> May provide gold leaf on doors where
there are multiple shops.
b. Recreation <4>
c. Fitness Center <4>
d. Spa Spaces <4>
e. Beauty Salon <4> <5>
I. Elevator Graphics: Follow information prescribed by govern-
ing Life Safety standards, codes and regulations.
1. General:
a. Many jurisdictions have widely varied, strictly reg-
ulated requirements for sign size, format and text.
b. It is imperative that terminology used for elevators
and overall graphics program is carefully coordi-
nated (same floor numbers, parking garage level and
similar designations).
2. Elevator Cab:
a. Consult RCH for floor labeling. See Modules <12>
Elevators and <14> Fire Protection & Life Safety.
b. RCH desires minimal cab signage other than what
is required for operating buttons and “No Smoking”
sign.
3. Elevator Foyer: Provide sign in local language and
English on a single plaque with Braille when appropriate.
a. Wording Example: Confirm wording required by
code, “In Case of Fire Do Not Use The Elevators”
b. Material: 6 mm (¼ inch) #356 brass plaque with 6
mm (¼ inch) milled 45 degree bevel edge.

Elevator Signage
c. Lettering: 12 mm (½ inch) high Goudy Old Style.

d. Finish: Bright polished with 2 coats clear lacquer
seal. Pebbled background with raised polished let-
ters and Braille when appropriate.
e. Mounting: Mount with concealed brass studs.
f. Manufacturer Model: Series RC7 A by EEC
Industries.
J. Security and Life Safety Information: <16> Consult with build-
ing officials of project jurisdictions and governing codes for
property location.
1. General:
a. Code requirement messages are not altered or ex-
panded by the graphics program process.
b. Many jurisdictions have widely varied, strictly reg-
Security Information ulated requirements for sign size, format and text.
c. Provide specific messages required by Ritz-Carlton;
examples of various messages are listed below:
2. Building Emergency Evacuation information:
a. Standard
b. Standard, room opens to exterior
c. Earthquake standard
d. Earthquake standard, room opens to exterior
e. Fireplace use
f. Lodging Law card (if required). Determine proper
location for card and review with RCH.
g. Patio / balcony door safety notice
h. Whirl pool safety notice

Pool Information Plaque
3. Function Spaces & F&B (Restaurants) Service

Areas: Coordinate with the Facilities Program for spaces.
a. Maximum occupancy
b. Maximum occupancy diagram (include illustration)
c. Distilled spirits warning
4. Recreation & Pool Area Plaques: (consider using multi-
lingual signage as needed by region):
a. Sport Court use (such as tennis, basketball, etc.)
b. Pool area use and capacity
c. Pool Area use with maximum capacities
d. No Diving - warning (include illustration)
e. No Lifeguard
f. Exercise room use
g. Mouth-to-mouth resuscitation (include illustration)
h. Whirl pool use
i. Children’s Play Area use
j. Sauna use
k. Steam room use
l. Emergency shut-off
5. Vehicular Areas <1>: Typically, none required for valet
parking areas, except non-valet including public or other
self parking, if programmed.
a. Clearance
b. Park at Your Own Risk

K. Guestroom Floors - Public Area Signs: Provide signage for

Guestroom Floors Signage guestrooms, suites and corridors including applicable public
areas as follows:
L. General Signage Requirements: Provide installed signs with-
out surface imperfections, machine or tool marks.
1. Metals: Bronze alloy with clear sealer
2. Wood: Hardwoods; birch or maple, sanded smooth
3. Stone
4. Numbers / Names: 0.8 mm (1/32 inch) raised, tight reg-
istration, sharp image, 25 mm (1 inch) Goudy Old Style
with No. 2 Grade Braille centered below room numbers
and names.
5. Finishes: Match color of exterior door molding when ap-
plied. Provide two coats of clear, smooth lacquer.
6. Location: On wall at strike side of guestroom entry and
service doors. Do not place protruding objects in front of
signage.
7. Sign Mounting: 152 cm (60 inch) above the floor to cen-
ter-line of the sign. Mount with pressure sensitive double
sided tape and adhesive.
M. Directional Signage on Floors: Provide brass plaque signage
for guestroom direction from elevator foyer and signs for fire
extinguishers, hose reel or standpipe cabinets or other code
required signage.
N. Stairs and Services: Provide signs for stairs, ice and service
doors (only service doors on guestroom floors). Include local
language and English with raised letters and Braille.
1. Size: 25 (w) x 10 (h) x 1 cm thick (10 x 4 x ½ inch).
2. Manufacturer Model: Sign Series RC1 A by EEC
Industries.
Guestroom Entry Door Identification

O. Guestroom and Suite Identification Signage: Provide Guestroom

number plaques. See other requirements in Module <7A>;
coordinate designs closely with Interior Designer. Include
with raised numbers and Braille, as appropriate at property
location. Provide numerals with 70% contrast to background.
1. Size: 18 (W) x 9 (H) x 1 cm thick (7 x 3 ½ x ½ inch)
2. Manufacturer: Custom
P. Guestroom Emergency Exit & Security Signage: Clearly iden-
tify guest location and exit stairs. Confirm text content and
governing code requirements.
1. Location: If required, frame and mount on guestroom
door.
2. Size: 22 x 28 cm (8 ½ x 11 inch)
3. Assembly: Mount sign behind glass with wood frame
molding and paint to match door trim.
Q. Rate Card: If required by governing authority, mount in
guestroom entry closet. Confirm governing requirements for
rate card and review with RCH.
1. Size: 14 x 24 cm (5 ½ x 9 ½ inch).
2. Materials and Finish: Same as required for Emergency
Exit / Security Signage above.
3. Assembly: Mount in glass with wood frame molding and
paint to match door trim. Provide opening on topside to
allow card replacement.
R. Food & Beverage Identification & Service Signage: Obtain res-
taurant name, food theme and decor style from RCH.
Generally, this information sets the design direction for the
restaurant entrance identification.
Incorporate signage into parameters of the interiors and ar-
chitectural design. Physical form may be for interior or exte-
rior, freestanding, wall-mounted or above doors.
Guestroom Emergency Exit / Security Signage

1. Principal Signage: Provide EEC Industries sign Series RC3

A.
2. Refer to the Facilities Program. Obtain approved signage
from RCH.
3. Determine operating theme and features of the intended
service.
4. Where appropriate, scale identification according to view-
ing distance. Alter scale, if needed, for aesthetic or operating
requirements.
5. Position identification to maximize viewing distance.
6. Impose particular format for unique, differentiated, destina-
tion points.
7. Specialty Restaurants: If required, consider graphics consis-
tent with decor of restaurant.
8. Private Dining Rooms: Typically, signs are not required.
9. Menus: Displayed on freestanding stands.
S. Function Space Signage <6>: Determine hierarchy of facility
spaces according to the RCH Facilities Program.
1. Identification and Direction:
a. Scale identification according to viewing distance.
b. Alter scale, if needed, for aesthetic or operating
requirements.
c. Position identification to maximize viewing distance.
d. Establish consistency for like-use destination points.
e. Incorporate information into architectural trim where
possible.
f. Impose distinctive format for unique, differentiated,
destination points.
2. Plaques for Ballrooms, Meeting & Boardrooms: Provide
raised letters with Braille when appropriate. Manufacturer’s
sign Series RC4 A by EEC Industries.
a. Materials: 9.5 mm (⅜ inch) #365 Muntz metal.
b. Lettering: Goudy Old Style, handtooled, acid etched.
Comply with Interior Design scheme; room names pro-
vided by RCH.
c. Finish: Bright polished face and sides to #4 satin brass
finish. Pebbled background with raised polished letters
and Braille as appropriate. Provide 2 coats clear lacquer
seal.
d. Location: Placement as designated by the Interior
Designer. Typically, mount on wall adjacent to latch
side of door (not on door).
e. Mounting Height: 152 cm (60 inch) to centerline to
comply with disabled guidelines. Guest should be able
to approach within 8 cm (3 inch) of the sign without
encountering protruding objects or standing within the
swing of a door.

f. Mounting: Use 2 concealed brass studs per letter.

Provide full scale mounting templates. Provide 19
mm (¾ inch) thick wood blocking where signage is
mounted on padded fabric walls. Install after art,
antiques and furniture are in place.
3. Ballrooms: Identify spaces in a prominent, simple, often
architectural manner.
a. Mount individual characters to panels above or im-
mediately adjacent to various entry doors.
b. See examples; if this type of identification is not
possible, discuss alternate design with RCH.
4. Meeting and Boardrooms: Identify with room names
provided by RCH.
a. Generally, locate room name adjacent to entry door.
b. Provisions for individual event identification is
desirable. Include an insert window for a paper
card, or use L.E.D. presentation or other electronic
readouts.
c. Determine special consideration for large group
meetings and presentation of daily events.
d. If systems approach for display is required, coor-
dinate with applicable communication and data
systems.
T. Function Space Directional Signage: Provide direction with
arrow on plaques to principal functions of guest wings, pub-
lic spaces and between levels. Indicate essential direction to
Restaurants, Function Rooms, Restrooms and Guestrooms.
1. Manufacturer Model: Sign Series RC2 A by EEC
Industries
Wall Plaque

2. Material / Finish: 9.5 mm (⅜ inch) #365 Muntz metal with

polished face and sides to #4 satin brass finish. Bright
polished with two coats clear lacquer seal.
3. Lettering: Goudy Old Style, handtooled
4. Mounting: Provide full scale mounting templates. Mount
with 2 concealed brass studs.
U. Accessible Symbol Signage: Provide bronze plaques at appli-
cable ladies and gentlemen restrooms, public telephones and
other accessible facilities for persons with disabilities when
directed by RCH.
1. Comply with ADA Guidelines for size and proportion of
signage.
2. Provide signs with pebble background, raised polished
letters, 70% contrast between lettering and the back-
ground, and tactile Braille when appropriate.
V. Regulatory Signage: Design team identifies required signage
and design requirements. Comply with governing codes for
regulatory signage. Signs include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
2. Room Capacity Signage
3. No Smoking Signs
4. Maximum Occupancy Signs: Mount on back of service
doors leading to room. If governing code requires room
mounted occupancy signs, provide above the public
doors, such as in meeting rooms.
5. Provide bronze plaque signage, Series RC7 A by EEC
Industries, consistent with design for other signage in
public spaces.
6. Provide raised letters and Braille when appropriate.
7. Miscellaneous Signs: Generally, signs that might read,
“Door to Remain Unlocked During Business Hours” are
not required because restaurants, function rooms and
typical public spaces are not locked. If required, mount
sign on inside of room above entry door.
8. Elevator Cab and Foyer Signage: See section in this
Module, herein before, for elevator signage and require-
ments of Module <12>.
W. Displays: Provide for event announcements and guest in-
formation. This information is serviced in two methods as
follows:
1. Electronic: Electronic systems feed information to moni-
tors throughout the property. System details are included
in the audio / visual system Module <13C>.

2. Static Systems: If used, the graphics provider for project

would include display areas for overall information that
covers all areas and all meetings within the property.
Special design circumstances may require other formats.
X. Back-of-House (BOH) Areas: Generally, doors leading from
public spaces to BOH and pathways leading to BOH areas
do not require identification, unless specifically required by
governing regulation, or in the event that guests might inad-
vertently access a non-public door.
1. Application: BOH service corridors, service elevators,
machine rooms, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, el-
evator equipment rooms are identified on the BOH door
side with the applicable public area name.
2. Exit Stairs / Doors: Provide egress and life safety signage
consistent with governing regulations and code. Design
specific code required signage, to the greatest extent
possible, that blends with the project décor. Identify indi-
vidual floors / landings inside the stairwell.
3. Material: Provide acrylic or aluminum with 2 integral
color surfaces for production on a pantograph sign pro-
duction machine.
4. Lettering: Typically, engraved white, Helvetica medium
style 2.5 cm (1 inch) high on a 5 cm (2 inch) high reflex
blue background. Where two room names are required,
double the plaque height.
5. Braille: Provide raised letter signage with Braille at ladies
and gentlemen’s lockers and toilet / restrooms and exit
signs.
6. Mounting Height: 152 cm (60 inch) to center of sign
Y. Remote Facilities: For properties where remote facilities exist,
provide signage consistent with RCH design. Obtain RCH
approval for sign design and wording.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR3
Material & Product Criteria
GR3 - Material & Product Criteria THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
GR3.1 Overview 1
GR3.2 Project Manual 2
GR3.3 Division 01 - General Requirements 2
GR3.4 Division 30 - Site Work 3
GR3.5 Division 03 - Concrete 3
GR3.6 Division 04 - Masonry 4
GR3.7 Division 05 - Metals 6
GR3.8 Division 06 - Wood and Plastics 8
GR3.9 Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 12
GR3.10 Division 08 - Openings (Doors & Windows) 16
GR3.11 Division 09 - Finishes - General 27
GR3.12 Division 10 - Specialties 33
GR3.13 Division 11 - Equipment 37
GR3.14 Division 12 - Furnishings 37
GR3.15 Division 13 - Special Construction 37
GR3.16 Division 14 - Conveyances 37
GR3.17 Division 22 - Plumbing 37
GR3.18 Division 23 - Mechanical 37
GR3.19 Division 26 - Electrical 37
GR3.20 Division 33 - Utilities 37
Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Materials | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Material & Product Criteria - GR3
Material & Product Criteria

GR3.1 Overview
A. Content: This Module identifies criteria for materials, prod-
ucts and equipment, and does not include specifications and
methods of workmanship.
B. Standard of Quality: The Design Standards identify products
that meet minimum design criteria.
• Material, product and equipment manufacturers identi-
fied in the Design Standards are acceptable by The Ritz-
Carlton Hotel (RCH). Additionally, RCH will base their
decision of acceptance / approval when compared to
products identified as the standard of quality.
• It is understood that the work is performed by skilled
craftsmen of various trades that reflect the best quality
defined by applicable industry standards.
• The criteria are for use by the design professionals to
develop project specific specifications. Additionally, the
Design Standards are used by the Architect, and other
design team members, Owner and Contractor to assure
the quality of the hospitality property.
• References: Use current editions.
C. Material & Product Criteria: This Module, and Modules
<1> through <16> are intended to guide the Design Team
(Architects, Engineers, Interior Designers, Consultants, etc.)
with selection of materials, products and systems for The
Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH) project.
• The Design Team shall review the provisions and develop
specifications consistent with the project requirements.
• The material and product requirements, although not
inclusive, are important to RCH established quality, the
Brand and Operations. If design and specifying conflicts
arise, consult with RCH for interpretation.
• All material selections are natural, not synthetic or plastic.
D. Labels & Nameplates: Omit manufacturer nameplates and
other graphics visible to guests, unless directed by RCH.
E. Toxic or Carcinogenic Materials: No known toxic or carcinogen-
ic materials are required or included in the Design Standards
for design and construction. This includes concealed materi-
als and products containing or manufactured from formalde-
hyde foam and asbestos.
• The Owner and the Owner’s team has the responsibility
to identify non-compliant materials and to provide RCH
with qualified written testing lab reports that certify
compliance.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Materials 1

• RCH reserves the right to reject materials that may pose

a health risk to guests or employees.
F. Environmental Impacts: Adjust design for sites with high hu-
midity, noise, etc. At ocean sites with salt exposure, select
and provide applicable non-corrosive finishes, equipment and
plant materials.
GR3.2 Project Manual

A. Organization: RCH requires project specifications to be or-
ganized based on the Division and 3 part, numbered Section
format as described in the Construction Specification Institute
(CSI) “Manual of Practice”. The information in this Module,
generally follows the CSI format by Division in a schematic
outline form.
B. Module: The term “Module” is used to reference Modules
of this Design Standard and not the section organization as
described by the CSI manual.
GR3.3 Division 01 - General Requirements
A. Codes and Standards: Use approved, current editions of codes
and industry standards to produce the intended quality of
construction and finishes. In the schematic design phase,
identify an internationally accepted structural code, in ad-
dition to designing the project to meet applicable building
codes.
B. Structural Loads: Design and construct the facilities and
building components to safely accommodate structural loads
(dead, live, wind and impact loads) in compliance with the
current edition of the applicable building code. Also, see
Module <14> Fire Protection & Life Safety.
C. Seismic Loads: Prior to design, contact the Zurich Regional
Operations Office to obtain project criteria required by
Marriott’s “Customized Servicing Agreement” with
Zurich. At a minimum, comply with the current edition of
the International Building Code (IBC) for seismic design.
Comply with criteria contained in the governing edition of
the applicable code. Design and secure building systems,
utilities and equipment to prevent injury and disruption of
property functions.
D. Construction Tolerance: Install building elements “visually”
level, flat, straight and true to line, minimum 0.3 cm per 3 m
(⅛ inch per 10 ft.) unless specifically required otherwise for
operational reasons such as drainage.
2 Materials | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

E. Accessibility for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with gov-

erning requirements and the USA-DOJ Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
F. Walkway Surfaces: Provide slip resistant walkway surfaces.
Comply with Module <16> requirements.
G. Submittals – Shop Drawings and Data: Coordinate submittal
requirements with “General Requirements, Module GR1.
GR3.4 Division 30 - Site Work

A. General: See Module <1> for site requirements including the
following:
• Site Design - General Requirements
• Site Concepts
• Design Team
• Landscape Schedule
• Site Development
• Site Utilities, Drainage and Soil Treatment
• Traffic Circulation - Planning
• Traffic Control - Regulation Signage
• Paving and Hardscape
• Main Site Entrance
• Service / Delivery Entrance
• Parking Areas
• Structured Deck Parking
• Landscaping
• Irrigation
• Water Features, Fountains and Site Amenities
• Site and Landscape Lighting: For parking / landscape
lighting levels, see Electrical Criteria, Module <15C>.
GR3.5 Division 03 - Concrete

Post Tensioned Slab Buildings
A. Concrete Standards: Generally, comply with the Standards
When a high degree of interior architectural for formwork, cast-in-place concrete, and reinforcement
detailing at the wall-ceiling intersection and
on ceilings is designed and post tensioned established by the American Society for Testing Materials
slab building system is selected, the effect (ASTM) and the American Concrete Institute (ACI). Define
of slab deflection must be discussed in detail
between the Structural Engineer, Architect,
concrete finishes and provide concrete surfaces within stipu-
and Interior Designer. Normal tolerances for lated dimensional tolerances.
allowable deflection may not be acceptable to 1. Confirm and provide depressed floors for mud set floor
accommodate the intended design, and it may be
impossible to reduce the construction tolerances finishes, coolers, freezers, closers and trench drains.
at a reasonable structural cost. Therefore, a 2. Provide new form materials consistent with concrete fin-
greater than normal ceiling finish application
may be the only economical way to mitigate the
ish requirements.
effect, and higher cost should be anticipated.

GR3.6 Division 04 - Masonry

A. Masonry Units: Comply with national or international
standards.
Provide clay brick or concrete block. Provide specified unit
size and weight, and fire rated masonry as required by code.
Use masonry materials in the following areas where addi-
tional sound and / or moisture isolation is required:
1. Service corridor or Back-of-House walls adjacent to pub-
lic spaces.
2. Fire walls and exit stair walls
3. Laundry
4. Kitchen
B. Acoustic Control: See requirements in other Modules. Extend
masonry walls from floor to underside of roof or to floor
structure above and seal openings. Tool head and bed joints
of exposed masonry.
C. Tolerances: 10 mm (⅜ inch) at rough openings and 10 mm in
3 m (⅜ inch in 10 ft.) maximum for plumb and level in walls
between floors and ceilings.
Provide struck joint for walls to receive special coatings of
paint, without a plaster finish.
D. Insulation: Water repellent cavity type for exterior walls, and
masonry walls, with or without veneer, exposed to exterior
temperatures.
E. Anchors, Reinforcing and Mortar: Comply with applicable
code.
F. Stonework - Interior: Consider interior stonework as two
separate packages, Public Area and Guestroom stonework.
See Module <7A> for Guestroom Stone.
Public Area stonework is predominately mud set and installed
by the most qualified stone masons.
1. Natural Stone Quality: Selected by Interior Design for
locations, such as Public Areas <2>, Club Lounge <7C>
and Guestrooms <7A>.
2. Lobby: 600 x 600 x 20 mm (24 x 24 x ¾ inch) thick
minimum natural stone floor (mud set) and 225 x 20 mm
(9 x ¾ inch) base minimum.
3. Tops and Dies: Provide natural stone for Reception
Desks and food and beverage tops. Book-match panels
and tops as designed by Interior Designer. Provide panels
and exposed edges with carved profiles.

4. Thresholds: Where visible to Guests, provide natural

stone at interior door openings requiring thresholds.
Provide aluminum or brass at exterior thresholds of pub-
lic area doors (see Door Hardware in this Module).
5. Public Toilet Rooms / Toilet Stalls: Provide 300 x 300 x
10 mm (12 x 12 x ⅜ inch) thick stone tile, thin set on stall
and wall surfaces. No stone tile cuts of less than 225 mm
(9 inch). Provide wall tile with fiberglass reinforced
backing.
6. Public Toilet Rooms / Floors: 600 x 600 x 20 mm (24 x
24 x ¾ inch) stone, minimum 50 mm (2 inch) thick for
mud set. No tile cuts less than 225 mm (9 inch).
7. Public Toilet Rooms / Vanity: 32 mm (1 ¼ inch) thick
stone tops with 25 x 100 mm (1 x 4 inch) stone splashes
and mirror trim.
8. Stone Installation: Align units with veining and pattern
running in one direction, unless specifically approved
otherwise.
9. Sealers: Select appropriate to location and comply with
governing environment controls. Obtain RCH approval.
10. Slip Resistance: 0.6 minimum wet or dry for stone floors.
G. Stonework – Exterior:
1. Samples: Provide and install in mock-up panel with other
exterior materials.
2. Stone Cladding: Saw-cut, textured natural stone for ex-
terior use.
3. Pointing Mortar: ASTM Type I, white cement, ASTM
C207 Type S hydrated lime and integral colored aggre-
gate of stonework.
4. Anchors: Provide stainless steel back-up anchors and
stone anchors.
5. Setting Buttons: Plastic or lead buttons of thickness to
maintain uniform joint width.

GR3.7 Division 05 - Metals

A. Structural Steel, Open-Web Joists and Metal Deck: Comply with
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), American
Welding Society (AWS) and the American Society for Testing
Materials (ASTM).
1. Industry Standards: AISC “Specifications for the Metal Framing
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Because RCH projects receive a high degree
for Buildings”, including the "Commentary of AISC of interior architectural detailing on walls
and ceilings, the construction installation
Specification" and American Welding Society (AWS) phase may necessitate greater than normal
“Code for Welding in Building Construction”, “Standard preparation for these surfaces where detailing
is attached. Additionally, the construction
Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Open coordination process inherently causes some
Web Steel Joist Girders” and “Standard Specifications for building components to be damaged or altered.
Joist Girders.” Submit shop drawings to the Structural Therefore, the Architect may need to incorporate
additional measures to accommodate interior
Engineer for review. detailing including heavier gage studs, thicker
2. Structural Steel: ASTM A-36 or ASTM A572; fabricate drywall, blocking, structural supports, etc. In
these cases, the Architect requires early in-depth
and erect in compliance with AISC “Manual of Steel discussions with the Interior Designer to clearly
Construction”. understand what provisions are needed to
3. Steel Joists: Provide joist series appropriate to applica- accommodate the intended design. Provide the
resulting information in bid documents to ensure
tion and fabricate and erect in compliance with the “Steel the cost impact is included.
Joist Institute”.
4. Roof Deck: Provide appropriate gauge, intermediate rib
metal roof deck and connections to framing with welding
washers at required centers or approved equal method.
B. Cold Formed Metal Framing:
1. Standards: ASTM, AISI and AISC for materials, fabrica-
tion and erection.
2. Typical Framing: Extend steel stud framing from floor to
structure above, except Back-of-House spaces and offices
where acoustics and fire protection requirements are not
violated.
3. Above Operable Partitions: Extend steel framing from
top of operable partitions to structure above and close
voids.
4. Corrosive Environments: Protect metal surfaces with
coatings to provide a one year guarantee against corrosion.
5. Prime paint miscellaneous metal items, except pre-fin-
ished items.
C. Miscellaneous Metals: ASTM A36.
1. Provide decorative and pipe railings, vertical ladders,
protective angles, access panels, trench gratings, window
washing davits and sockets, operable partitions and sus-
pended and ceiling mounted light fixture supports, mis-
cellaneous bracing and framing steel.
2. Prime paint or prepare steel materials for protective coat-
ings, except pre-finished items.

D. Non-ferrous Materials: In environments where airborne salts

or other elements are present, provide metal components /
assemblies (in whole or in part) that are non-ferrous, such as
aluminum with Kynar finish, designed to resist deterioration
and corrosion.
E. Decorative Metal Fixtures: Provide a cast fabricated fin-
ish appearance, free of weld fillets and voids at connec-
tions. Typically, locate on site work, in public spaces and in
Guestrooms.
F. Brass: Where exposed to view, provide polished brass finish
with corrosion protective coating.
G. Ornamental Metal Railings: Provide handrails and railing sys-
tems capable of withstanding the following minimum struc-
tural loads without exceeding the allowable design working
stress of materials involved. Designer of Record to verify
compliance with governing codes.
1. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Concentrated load
of 90 kilograms per 0.3 meter (200 lbs per ft.) applied at
any point and a uniform load of 75 kg per linear meter (50
lbs per linear ft.) with each load applied non-concurrently
with respect to direction and each other, vertically down-
ward or horizontally.
2. Guardrail System In-fill Areas: Horizontal concen-
trated load of 300 kg per meter (200 lbs per ft.) applied
to 0.1 square meter (one square foot) at any point in the
system including panels, intermediate rails balusters or
other elements composing the in-fill area.
3. Railings: Provide at balconies and terraces minimum of
107 cm (42 inch) high with maximum opening between
vertical or horizontal rails not to exceed 10 cm (4 inch).
At public spaces and Guestrooms balconies, avoid ladder
type (horizontal picket) railing designs.
4. Railing Elements: Rectangular shape and a top rail with
a decorative shape. Provide escutcheons at balcony or
walls. Use decorative shaped cast elements as design
elements.
5. Fabrication: Construct rails to provide a cast appearance,
free of weld fillets and voids at connections. Minimize
splices.
6. Locate required splices away from railing center, prefer-
ably to sides, away from portions of the rail that a Guest
is likely to see, or approach.
7. Provide adequate internal bracing at joints to maintain a
tight, smooth appearance at the joint.
8. Materials and Finishes: Select as appropriate for project
and site environment.

H. Expansion Control:
1. Expansion Joints: Place only in non-Public Spaces and
not visible. Extend finish materials over joints to reduce
visible impact.
2. Fire Rating: Provide fire rated expansion joints as re-
quired by applicable construction assembly.
I. Access Panels: Avoid in Public and Guestroom spaces unless
located in closet spaces. Otherwise, design recessed access
metal doors to accept gypsum board insert or trim access
doors to match interior design details. Follow the following
fabrication requirements:
1. Fabricate metal decorative work with mitered exposed
corners and angles.
2. Form exposed non-welded connections with hairline
joints flush and smooth.
3. Grind and finish brazed and welded surfaces flush and
free of weld marks.
4. Conceal fastenings wherever possible. Use exposed fas-
teners of the same material and finish as adjacent surfaces.
5. Finish / trim to match adjacent wall surfaces.
GR3.8 Division 06 - Wood and Plastics

A. Architectural Woodwork:
1. General Requirements:
a. Submittals: Indicate desired joint locations such as
connection details and at high-pressure laminates.
b. Furniture and Casework: These items are provided
under FF&E requirements. See Module <GR4>.
c. Shipping: Provide complete fabrication before ship-
ping to project site to the maximum extent possible.
Disassemble products only as needed for shipping
and installing.
d. Installation: For fitting at project site, provide scrib-
ing and trimming.
e. Glass: Provide in compliance with FGMA -
“Glazing Manual.” For glass in wood frames, secure
glass with removable stops.
2. Hardware: Submittals are required to define proposed
hardware product, model number, finishes for casegoods,
millwork and other installation attributes; obtain RCH
approval.
3. Standards: Comply with American Woodworking
Institute (AWI) Sections for trade definitions, grade of
millwork materials, fabrication, finishing and installation.

a. Custom Grade: Opaque millwork finishes.

• Section 300: Standing and running trim.
• Section 700: Ornamental work.
• Section 900: Interior frames and jambs.
b. Premium Grade: Transparent millwork finishes.
• Section 300: Standing and running trim.
• Section 500: Flush wood paneling and wainscots.
• Section 700: Ornamental work.
• Section 800: Wood stairs and railings.
• Section 900: Interior frames and jambs.
4. Back-of-House Areas: Custom Grade for Opaque mill-
work finishes.
B. Rough Carpentry: Pressure treat and/or fire protect wood
grounds, sleepers, blocking and nailers including, blocking
for toilet accessories, partitions, draperies and window cov-
erings, millwork, etc.
C. Finish Carpentry: Consider as three separate millwork pack-
ages (see AWI millwork standards):
1. Public Areas
2. Guestrooms and Club Lounge
3. Guestroom Tower Corridors and Back-of-House
D. Public Area Millwork: Includes millwork for doors and frames
in public view. For fire rated doors, apply millwork to frames
and doors compatible with adjacent surfaces. Provide exterior
windows with interior wood trim and casing. Public spaces
include the following areas:
• Street level Lobby or grade entrance
• Entry / Vestibule
• Lobby
• Lobby Lounge
• Safety Deposit Boxes
• Safety Deposit Box Viewing
• Retail Spaces
• Food & Beverage Areas
• Telephone Booths
• Public Toilets
• Coat Rooms (if included)
• Pre-Function
• Ballroom(s)
• Meeting Rooms
• Board Room
• Public Circulation
• Club Lounge

E. Cabinetry and Millwork:

1. Satisfy requirements of governing fire and building code
for supplied, installed and finished materials.
2. Advise RCH in writing of unsuitable conditions.
3. Take field dimensions and verify project conditions as
necessary before start of fabrication.
4. Make cutouts and provide tolerances necessary for the
millwork.
5. Provide specialty finishes attached to or part of millwork
as millwork. Include glass, mirror, metal and plaster trim.
Provide related hardware, closers, catches, locks, etc., at-
tached to millwork. Provide “hardware supplier” door
hardware.
6. Where specialty lighting or mirrors are required within
cabinet and millwork, pre-wire fabrications during shop
fabrication.
F. Public Spaces Millwork: If painted, provide face and back
primed or with one coat of paint. If stained, provide
pre-finished.
G. Guestroom Millwork: Provide full length sections including
base and ceiling trim.
1. Finger jointed wood is not acceptable.
2. Prime all sides.
3. Dependent on Interior Design requirements, provide
opaque grade or transparent grade millwork.
H. Casework Fabrication – General: Fabricate trim and connec-
tions with tolerances to allow movement for building air /
moisture conditions during and after installation.
1. Bar: <3> Provide millwork for main bars, service bars
and pool bars.
2. Guestroom Closets: See Module <7A>.
3. Lobby, Front Desk and Back-of-House (BOH): <2> <3>
<10> Provide front desk, office cabinetry and counters
including other BOH services, food and beverage service,
service stations, etc.
4. Environment: Temper casework for project site environ-
ment a minimum of seven days in an enclosed, on-site en-
vironment that approximates the final in-place conditions.
5. Protection: Following installation, protect project work
until accepted and turned over to RCH. Hotel HVAC
system shall be operational to maintain correct design
temperature and humidity. Provide protective baffles,
barriers and screens. Include field touch-up and refinish
work.

I. Shop-Finishing of Interior Casework and Millwork: Comply with

AWI Section 1500.
J. Casework and Millwork Materials and Finishes: Provide finishes
for each material and submit samples including alternates for
RCH approval.
1. Wood Veneers: Provide high quality architectural cabi-
net grade selected from flitch samples and provide proper
quantity for each area.
Provide veneers of lengths necessary for full, unbroken
uniformity of graining and medium light coloration, typi-
cal of each species.
2. Wood Paneling and Wainscots: Provide AWI premium
veneers for transparent wood finish. Book match adjacent
veneer leaves, veneer match within panels and sequence
match for uniform size. Within paneling, include match-
ing doors and access panels.
3. Panels: Class ‘A’ core plywood for design thickness and
sizes. Provide bound edges where required.
4. Solid Millwork: Same general characteristics as adjacent
veneers. Paint poplar, maple or other solids species ap-
propriate to application.
5. Finishing for Millwork: Include staining, painting and
antiquing. Perform stained finishes in millwork contrac-
tor's shop. Shop prime and field paint millwork scheduled
for painting.
6. Staining: Provide transparent and opaque stains to match
design samples, seal when appropriate and apply multiple
coats (minimum of two) of lacquer to achieve a finish void
of any grain crevices, imperfections or lacquer residue.
7. Painted Moldings: In public spaces, provide approxi-
mately three paint color cuts.
8. Antiqued Finishes: Protect built-up antiqued finishes
with clear satin luster lacquer seal.
9. Back-of-House: Provide materials and finishes as indi-
cated on the Contract Documents.
K. Woodwork Installation - General: Require conditioning of ma-
terials for prevailing conditions before installation.
1. For grade specified, comply with AWI Section 1700 or
WIC Section 26. Install woodwork level and plumb with-
in tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm (⅛ inch in 96 inch) and
securely anchor to substrate.
2. Require installation with scribe and cut woodwork to fit
adjoining work, seal cut surfaces and repair damaged fin-
ish at cuts.

3. Require installation of trim with minimum number of

joints, using full-length pieces. Stagger joints in adjacent
and related members.
L. Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide vertical grain hardwood
tolerant to environmental conditions of the site.
1. Painted (Opaque) or Stained Finish (Transparent): For
door frames, trims and railings.
GR3.9 Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

A. Waterproofing, Sealants, Insulation and Roofing - General: Select
products and systems having a proven record of success
(minimum of 5 years) for the application.
1. Service Life: Provide systems for low maintenance and
minimum service life of 20 years.
2. Building Insulation: Provide for efficient thermal control
from exterior heat and cold.
3. Design structures to receive waterproofing with positive
slope to drains to avoid standing water.
4. Roof areas exposed to Guest views shall be part of the
architectural design having a visually clean, attractive,
and uniform appearance.
5. Roofing System Warranty: Minimum 15 years depen-
dent on RCH’s approval of system type selected.
B. Waterproofing: Provide waterproofing for below grade walls
and basement concrete slabs on grade consistent with recom-
mendations of a soils engineer.
1. Suspended Slabs: Provide membrane waterproofing
for kitchen, laundry, dishwashing pantries, mechanical
rooms, steam rooms, locker room shower areas and pub-
lic toilets on suspended slab.
2. Guestroom Shower Pans: Provide minimum 40 mil
membrane formed in monolithic sheets complete with
preformed corners.
3. Seal exterior building balconies at public spaces.
C. Dampproofing: Provide on the following surfaces:
1. Exterior Face of Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Damp-
proof back-up CMU used at public levels.
2. Exposed Exterior Wall Surfaces: Provide water repellent
coating.
D. Building Insulation: Provide insulation types in thickness,
compatible with construction assembly and location to pro-
duce an “R” value as required by governing energy codes, but
not less than the following:

1. Exterior Wall Insulation: R-11 minimum; provide roll,

batt, rigid, loose fill, etc.
2. Roof Insulation: R-19 minimum.
E. Acoustic Insulation: Provide insulation between steel stud
walls of Guestrooms <7A>, between public and administra-
tion spaces to achieve the required STC ratings. Identify
laboratory tested assemblies on design drawings.
F. Fireproofing / Fire Stopping: Comply with building code.
1. Structural Members: Fireproof with asbestos free fire-
proofing materials.
2. Fire Stopping: Provide at penetrations through fire rated
walls and floors, except for conduits cast solid in concrete.
G. Sealant Joints: Design joints between building elements to
accept sealants and to accommodate expansion and contrac-
tion of materials.
1. Exterior Sealants:
a. Type: Polyurethane or silicone.
b. Material: High performance; minimum 50%
elongation.
c. Backer Rod: Required for installation.
d. Life Cycle: Minimum 10 years service life.
2. Sanitary Sealant:
a. Required locations at bath, toilets and Food
Preparation / Service areas.
b. Edges of vanity and counters.
c. Perimeter of bathtubs, water closets, and drains.
d. Bottom of mirrors.
e. Junction of wallcovering with doorframe and stone
or tile.
f. Type: One part silicone; mildew resistant; NSF ap-
proved at Food Service areas.
3. Interior Sealants:
a. Type: Acrylic, paintable.
b. Location: Interior non-moving joints and at perim-
eter of vinyl wall covering. Do not use at sanitary
joints or food service areas.
4. Acoustical Sealants: Required at perimeter of field as-
sembled Guestroom, public areas, other sound-rated wall
construction and around penetrations and items built-into
walls such as electrical receptacle boxes.
H. Roofing:
1. Requirements: Select roofing based on location, design
character, project theme, material technology and skill of
craftsmanship available.

a. Select roofing system that meets project aesthetic re-

quirements and physical material requirements.
b. Consider roof types for a project including flat, sloped,
etc.
c. Design roof for water management from the highest roof
to the ground. Provide details at intersections, joints and
flashing.
d. Submit alternate systems to RCH and obtain approval.
2. Roofing Conferences:
a. Require a preliminary roofing conference before start-
ing roofing deck construction to review submittal sta-
tus, coordination of work and warranty compliance.
b. Require a pre-installation roofing conference before
installing roofing system to review inspection require-
ments, installation requirements and construction
details.
3. Membrane Roofing: Provide a 20 year, 3 ply, built-up, hot
applied and aggregate surfaced roof (on low-slope roofs) or
single membrane system or equal as approved by RCH.
a. Provide a complete system including flashing, counter
flashing, cants, drains, etc., consistent with manufac-
turer’s printed instructions.
b. Provide a 10 year roofing and 5 year sheet metal guar-
antee to include a 3 year labor guarantee.
4. Installation: Require complete inspection of substrates and
approval of same by the roofing contractor prior to installa-
tion of roofing.
a. Test concrete moisture content as recommended by
roofing material manufacturer.
b. Install roofing on clean and prepared substrates.
c. Wood Nailers: Provide level, plumb, true, straight and
securely anchored to structure.
5. Warranty - Roofing: Provide warranty without monetary
limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing
to promptly repair leaks in roof system and base flashing re-
sulting in defects in materials or workmanship for 15 to 20
years. Verify warranty period with RCH.
I. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:
1. Standards: Comply with SMACNA Standards for
Architectural Sheet Metal. Comply with building code.
a. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind
loads, structural movement, thermally induced move-
ment, and exposure to weather without failing. Consider
project location and materials to withstand climate and
wind loads.

b. Submit shop drawings to show fabrication and installa-

tion details, material size, gauge, method of fastening,
joints and connections.
2. Warranty - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Provide not less
than 2 year installation warranty. Warrant the product for not
less than 10 years.
J. Tile Roofing: Provide vitrified natural clay tile. Provide ridge,
gable, flashing, booster, birdstop and accessories for a watertight
installation.
1. Provide 2 course membrane of 30 lb. minimum asphalt satu-
rated felt below tile.
2. Fabricate flashing and counter-flashing from stainless steel
sheet, type 302 / 304, 26 gauge, 2D finish. Provide stainless
steel fasteners.
3. Provide flashing and counter-flashing at valleys, roofing to
wall intersections, concealed gutter locations, etc.
4. Installation: Generally, comply with manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
K. Traffic Coatings:
1. General: Manufacturer shall certify applicator experience
applicable to project. Include single product source provisions.
2. Performance Requirements - Traffic Coatings: Meet or ex-
ceed the following physical requirements:
a. ASTM C957, Low-Temperature Flexibility and Crack
Bridging: No cracking.
b. ASTM C957, Adhesion-in-Peel after Water Immersion:
5 lb. / inch (875 N / m) on concrete; 3 lb. / inch (525
N / m) on plywood.
c. ASTM C957, Chemical Resistance: Tensile retention of
base, intermediate, and top coats; minimum 70 percent
in water, 70 percent in ethylene glycol and 45 percent in
mineral spirits.
d. ASTM C957, Weathering Resistance and Recovery
from Elongation: Average recovery from elongation not
less than 90 percent; average tensile retention not less
than 80 percent; average elongation retention not less
than 90 percent.
e. ASTM C957, Abrasion Resistance: Weight loss no
greater than 50 mg.
3. Slip Resistance / Bare Feet Abrasion: Provide slip resistance
with a static coefficient of friction equal to a minimum of 0.6
wet / dry on flat surfaces and 0.8 wet / dry on ramps without
abrasion to Guests’ bare feet while walking.

4. Material Requirement - Traffic Coatings: Provide water-

tight pedestrian and vehicular traffic coatings that will
not deteriorate when exposed to ice and snow-melting
compounds, sun, weather, wheel traffic, oil or other motor
vehicle operating compounds. Include manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning procedures.
GR3.10 Division 08 - Openings (Doors & Windows)

A. Wood Doors - Millwork:
1. Doors (visible to Guests / Public): Minimum of 45 mm
(1 ¾ inch) for doors to 2100 mm (7 ft.) high and 55 mm
(2 ¼ inch) for doors over 2100 mm (7 ft.). Provide raised
panel doors, stain grade and solid core.
2. Guestroom Doors: See Module <7A>.
3. Frames (for wood doors): 16 gauge welded hollow steel
encased with wood trim (when in public view) or wood
frames only, depending on location, construction details
and code requirements.
4. Public Area Doors and Frames: Other than code man-
dated metal doors and frames visible to public, provide
wood doors and frames. Include applied wood moldings,
trim and casing attached to steel doors and frames.
B. Metal Doors & Frames:
1. Standards: Generally, comply with ANSI / SDI 100
“Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames”, unless project requires more stringent
requirements.
a. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with
NFPA 80. Provide labeled doors / frames as listed
by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and in-
specting agency acceptable to governing authority.
b. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For doors
and frames exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
require certification by a testing agency acceptable
to governing authority that products comply with
standard construction requirements of tested and
labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
c. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450º F (250º C) maxi-
mum in 30 minutes of fire exposure as required for
code compliance.
d. Consider ocean site and extreme weather conditions
that cause corrosion.

2. Metal Doors: 16 gauge hollow steel, 1 ¾ inch (44 mm)

thick, heavy duty rating, G90 galvanized for exterior,
service, exit, back-of-house doors. Provide wood veneer
with applied moldings on doors and frames where visible
to Guests and public.
3. Metal Frames: 16 gauge interior and 14 gauge exterior
steel frames; welded corners, transoms, sidelights, bor-
rowed lights and other openings; use concealed fasten-
ings. Anchor and reinforce to prevent deforming, deflec-
tion and maximum security.
C. Door Types:
1. Door Louvers: Comply with SDI 111C for interior doors;
blades or baffles formed of 0.6 mm (0.0239 inch) cold-
rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch)
steel frame.
2. Guestroom Doors and Frames: See Module <7A>
for entry, bathroom, patio / terrace, closet and other
Guestroom passage doors and frames.
3. Exit Stair Doors:
a. Type: Hollow steel, US 16 gauge.
b. Rating: 1 ½ hour fire rating in 2 hour fire rated
wall; closer required.
c. Lockset: Mortised passage set or panic hardware.
d. Frame: Hollow steel, US 16 gauge.
4. Office Doors:
a. Type: Solid core wood construction; fully bonded.
b. Face / Finish: Selected by Interior Designer.
c. Frame: Metal or wood; sufficient to prevent forced
entry.
5. Counting Room Doors: Dutch type door with 20 cm (8
inch) shelf and 91 cm (36 inch) wide.
6. Executive Office Doors:
a. Type: Door and frame type, profile, finish as se-
lected by Interior Designer.
b. Acoustics: Provide full perimeter sound-seals.
7. Ballroom Room(s) Doors: See Module <6>.
8. Meeting Room(s): Includes Public Areas of high abuse.
a. Type: Solid wood with finish selected by Interior
Designer.
b. Rating: As required by referenced standards. Panic
hardware required if occupant load greater than 100.
c. Frame: Hollow steel, minimum US 16 gauge with
fully welded joints.

9. Service Doors (Back-of-House):

a. Type: Hollow steel, 1.52 mm (U.S. 16 gauge) with di-
agonal shaped Kraft paper type core.
b. Frame: Hollow steel, 1.52 mm (U.S. 16 gauge).
10. Custom Wood Doors:
a. Location: Boardroom, Club Lounge, Food and
Beverage, Public Areas.
b. Type: Door and frame type, profile, finish as selected
by Interior Designer.
D. Door Hardware:
1. Standards: Comply with U.S. standards published by
the National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) and the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and Builder
Hardware Manufacturer Association (BHMA) as follows:
a. NFPA 80
b. NFPA 101
c. ANSI / BHMA
d. Compliance: Comply with fire ratings, accessibility,
codes and operational requirements for each opening.
e. Installation Standard - Door Hardware: Comply with
Door Hardware Institute and NWT I.S.1.7 Standard.
2. Hardware - General Requirements: Select hardware for long-
term durability, appearance, low maintenance, operational
efficiency and security dependability.
a. Coordinate requirements of door weight, swing, stop
and hold open configurations with the Interior Designer.
b. Provide hardware compatible with building code re-
quirements, ADA accessibility guidelines.
c. Provide hardware suitable for site weather and exposure
conditions. For entry systems with electronic locks ex-
posed to salt ocean air, provide to function under severe
weather conditions.
d. RCH approved entry lock manufacturer Saflok for
electronic Guestroom entrance locks with decorative
escutcheon plate and lever handle.
e. Obtain RCH approval for hardware manufacturers and
keying system.
f. Hardware Schedule – General: Provide hardware
grouped in like sets of door opening types. The follow-
ing is an example list:
• Guestroom Entry: Electronic RFID operated lock;
guard with striker plate; viewer; floor stop; acoustical
seals; silencers; hinges; door closer.
• Guestroom Baths: Privacy latchset; hinges; stop;
silencers.

• Guestroom Bedrooms: Latchset; hinges; stop;

silencers.
• Balcony, or Patio: Latchset; sliders; acoustical seals;
bottom seal; threshold; security device.
• Exit Stair: Latch set; hinges; closer; stop; silencer.
• Meeting Rooms: Panic exit device; concealed flush-
bolts; closer; continuous architectural type hinge;
kick plate at service doors; door seal; viewer; bottom
seal; threshold; astragal; electro magnetic hold open;
cylinder lock.
• Offices: Lockset; hinges; stop; silencers.
• Loading Dock Entry: Continuous architectural
type hinge; push plate; pulls; kickplate; door posi-
tion switch; closures; seals; bottom seals; electronic
operated remote control lock; power supply; motion
detector; astragal.
g. Hardware Verification: Hardware supplier provides
field check of hardware installation. Review products,
maintenance and operation with RCH. Provide RCH
with a replacement parts kit for each hardware set by
type.
3. Hardware - Architectural & Interior Design Requirements:
a. Panic Devices: For doors not visible to Guests in Public
Areas and the occupancy exit loading requires panic
devices, provide a reconfigured occupancy and area
separations consistent with RCH concepts.
b. Hardware: Select, design and size pulls and plates, in-
cluding elevator call buttons and indicator lamp plates.
Provide work of quality equal to other RCH properties.
Obtain RCH approval. Designate hardware mounting
heights.
c. Accessible Hardware: For accessible spaces, provide
lever style trim by Baldwin, Savannah series as modi-
fied for RCH. Mount latchset / locksets at 850 mm to
950 mm (36 to 38 inch).
d. Hardware Fasteners: Provide with concealed fasteners
unless approved otherwise by RCH.
e. Warranty: Provide from hardware manufacturer, a sin-
gle warranty source for compatibility between lockset /
latchset and decorative trim.
f. Security Hardware: Obtain RCH approval for locking
schemes.
g. Logos: Provide hardware without visible manufac-
turer's logo.

4. Hardware Manufacturers: For hardware standard of quality

and design, visible to Guests and public, provide decorative
designer series. Obtain RCH’s approval for manufacturer’s
series.
The following hardware manufacturer’s products and devices
indicate the minimum standard of quality:
a. Floor Closers Rixson-Firemark, Dorma (and electro
magnetic hold-open floor closers)
b. Concealed Overhead Closers LCN
c. Surface Closers LCN
d. Pivots Rixson-Firemark
e. Hinges Stanley, Hager, McKinney
f. Wall Stop Baldwin, HB Ives, 3M
g. Button Stop HB Ives, Baldwin
h. Flush Bolts HB Ives, Door Controls
i. Security Bar HB Ives
j. Weatherstrip, Nat'l Guard Products, Pemko, Hager
k. Sound Seals, Nat'l Guard Products, Pemko, Hager
l. Electric Strikes, Security Door Control, Folger Adam
m. Silencers, HB Ives, Quality Hardware
n. Surface Bolts, Baldwin
o. Cabinet Hinges, Hafele
p. Cabinet Pulls, Baldwin, Hafele
5. Hardware Finishes: Obtain RCH’s approval for proposed
finishes in compliance with ANSI / BHMA numeric designa-
tion for base materials and finishes, and RCH demarcation
between brass and chrome finishes. For example, door entry
latch side of Guestroom bath is bright brass, and bath latch
side and strike is chrome finish.
a. Brass: 605, uncoated premium polished brass
b. Chrome: 625, provide the following moisture exposed
areas with polished chrome.
• Interior public toilet rooms
• Interior Fitness Center, indoor pool room and spa
• Guestroom baths
c. Painted: Not acceptable unless RCH approves.
d. Project Environment: For projects located on an ocean
or other harsh environments (salt environment), con-
sider alternate hardware finishes such as stainless steel
or other similarly durable surfaces. Alternate finishes
are available from Baldwin and Broadway.
6. Guestroom Hardware:
a. General Requirements: The following hardware re-
quirements are RCH examples but do not identify a
complete hardware and accessory list.

b. Guestroom Hardware: See Module <7A> for entry;

bathroom; powder room; toilet compartment; closets;
balcony, patio or terrace; shower; bedroom and pantry
etc. doors in Guestrooms.
c. Elevator Cabs: See Module <12> Elevators / Escalators.
d. Club Lounge: See Module <7C>.
e. Toilet Rooms: Identical to typical Guestroom bathroom
<7A> except as follows:
• Privacy Mortise Latchset: ANSI F22 function, 605
finish outside, 625 (polished chrome) finish inside;
escutcheons with levers on both sides and 5048 rose
with 6734 decorative thumbturn inside (no 2 side
dead-bolt application allowed).
f. Pantry:
• Hinges: Five knuckle, ball bearing, 115 x 115 mm
(4 ½ x 4 ½ inch), 626 finish; Hager BB1279 or
McKinney TB2714.
• Mortise Lockset: Storeroom mortise, ANSI F07
function, 605 finish. Provide standard building hard-
ware, 626 finish on inside, if door opens into pantry;
Baldwin C201 escutcheon and C101 Ritz-Carlton
logo knobs with 6727 decorative thumbturn.
g. Guestroom Balcony and Patio Doors: See Module
<7A>.
h. Connecting Stair: Similar to Entrance door; no dummy
trim.
7. Other Hardware:
a. Corridor to Service Lobby: Door swings into service
area.
• Hinges: Ball bearing 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch),
626 finish; Hager BB1279 or McKinney TB2714
• Mortise Lockset: Electronic lockset. Provide exte-
rior with standard building hardware, 626 finish and
on inside, Baldwin C201 escutcheon with C101 Ritz-
Carlton logo knob.
• Surface Closer: LCN 4010
• Wall Stop: 626 finish; HB Ives 407 ½
b. Corridor to Service: (Door swings into Public Area)
Same as door swings into service lobby except as noted.
Provide linen storage, housekeeping cart storage closets
and similar spaces on Guestroom floors with lockable
doors.
• Hinges: Painted finish
• Concealed Overhead Closer: Frame mounted with
internal stop; LCN 2030
• Wall Stop: Not required

c. Corridor to Fire Stair:

• Hinges: Ball bearing, 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch),
626 finish; Hager BB1279 or McKinney TB2714
• Mortise Latchset: Passage mortise, ANSI F01 func-
tion with 605 finish on corridor side and 626 build-
ing standard hardware on stair side; Baldwin C201
escutcheon with 8724 lever on both sides
• Surface Closer: Mounted on stair side of door; LCN
4010
8. Public Space Hardware:
a. Hinges: Provide size and quantity appropriate for door
size and location. Hinges visible to Guest or public, pro-
vide brass ball tip (minimum 2 pair).
b. Push / Pulls: Provide custom design push / pulls for each
project. Locate on public space doors where Guests pass
without locking or latching function, or service doors
that are visible from public spaces. Use custom push /
pulls for push and pull functions.
c. Size push / pulls as determined by the Interior Designer.
Provide for the following:
• Main entrance and entry vestibules
• Club Lounge, see Module <7C>.
• Restaurants and other food and beverage facilities (if
required)
• Boardrooms, meeting and other function spaces (if
required)
• Public restroom entrances
• Fitness center entrance / change room entrances (if
required)
d. Levers: Provide on latchsets visible from public areas
on mortise and tubular latch / lock sets with escutcheons.
e. Cylinders: Corbin Lock Company, or as approved by
RCH
f. Door Stops: Do not use wall or floor door stops in
Public Spaces.
g. Closers: Include stop function in closers. Provide clos-
ers with adequate capacity for door sizes and expected
frequency of use. Door closer capacity at principal
doors shall be 550 kg (1,200 lb). Typical door opening
force shall be 2.5 kg (5 lbs), or less. Provide finishes
to match adjacent metal finishes. Architect shall verify
door weight stop and hold open configurations with
Interior Designer.
h. Floor Closers: Design floor recess not to interfere
with structural members. Provide fully concealed floor
mounted closers as manufactured by Rixson-Firemark
for the following doors:

• Clubhouse Entrance and Entry Vestibules: No hold

open
• Restaurants and Lounge: Automatic hold open
• Ballrooms, Boardrooms, Meeting (other Function
Rooms): Automatic hold open
• Sundry and Gift Shops: Automatic hold open (when
in project)
i. Closure: Provide offset hinge type. Keep door adjust-
ment out of the threshold. Recess floor closers below
thresholds with a special cover pan.
j. Concealed in Frame: When concealed in the frame,
expose only the brass cover plate and closure arm with
door in open position. Use this closer type on the fol-
lowing doors:
• Retail spaces
• Office and service rooms off public spaces
• Public restroom entrances and vestibules
9. Back-of-House (BOH) Hardware: Service or access doors
from Back-of-House that swing into public spaces, provide
with public space hardware on both sides.
a. BOH Hardware Sets: Provide hinges, lock and latch-
sets, push/pull and kickplates, stops, silencers and other
accessories as appropriate for the door function.
• Hinges: Stanley or Hager
• Latch, Locksets & Dead Bolt: Corbin
• Removable Core Cylinder: Corbin with 6 pin inter-
changeable core
• Closers: Yale, Sargent or LCN
• Stops: Wall type where possible; Ives or Quality
• Sound stripping, thresholds and door bottom: Pemko
• Kickplates: Minimum US 16 gauge; Ives or Quality
• Keying: As defined for Guestroom and public space
hardware
• Finish: Brushed chrome 626, except provide
Production Kitchen <10> with satin stainless steel
630.
10. Entrances and Storefronts: Provide lobby entrance system
with 2 pairs of 900 mm (3 ft.) manually operated doors with
transoms above. Form an entry vestibule using combination
of exterior and interior storefronts. Design as a custom entry
by the Interior Designer.
a. Exterior Storefront: Provide with steel tube mullions,
heads, transoms, sills and stops.
b. Exterior Cladding: Stain grade treated hardwood. Clad
interior with stain grade hardwood.
c. Steel Mullions: Size for appropriate wind loads.

d. Doors: Custom fabricated hardwood with beveled glass

e. Interior Storefront: Custom fabricated hardwood sup-
plied as part of the public space millwork. Provide hard-
ware and accessories in polished brass finish.
11. Locking Functions: Provide electronic RFID locks as the
preferred locking function. For decorative hardware, provide
products by Baldwin or approved equal as indicated by hard-
ware model numbers below:
a. Toilet Stall Door: Privacy tubular latchset, 625 finish;
8520 latchset with levers and 5148 privacy roses.
b. Sundry, Gift Shops and Retail: Dormitory / exit mor-
tise, ANSI F13 function, 605 finish; C201 escutcheons
with cylinder collar and 8724 lever on outside and lever
with 5048 rose and 6727 decorative thumbturn.
c. Safety Deposit Viewing: Fail secure, electric mortise,
605 finish outside lever always locked, interior lever
always free. Lock may be opened electrically from the
Front Desk, power off locks outside knob; C201 es-
cutcheon with cylinder collar and 8724 levers on both
sides with 6727 decorative thumbturn.
d. Safety Deposit Boxes, Front Office Storage, Baggage
Storage, Bar Pantry: When accessed from public areas,
provide storeroom mortise, ANSI F07 function, 605 fin-
ish; C201 escutcheon and C101 Ritz-Carlton lever on
both sides if visible to Guests.
e. Executive, General and Reception Entry Doors: If vis-
ible from public areas, provide decorative hardware on
public area side with building standard hardware inside.
Use office mortise, ANSI F04 function, 605 finish; C201
escutcheon and 8724 lever on public side (BOH lever on
back side), or both sides, if door opens into public area.
f. Fitness Center Entrance: Entrance mortise, ANSI F12
function, 605 finish (for fire rated door; door must
latch); C201 escutcheons with cylinder collar and 8724
lever on outside and lever with 5048 rose and 6727
decorative thumbturn inside. Mortise dead lock ANSI
F17 function, 605 finish (for use with decorative pull);
6734 mortise thumbturn.
g. Massage & Treatment Rooms: Privacy Tubular latch-
set, 625 finish; 8520 latchset with 8724 levers and 5148
privacy roses.
12. Special Function Hardware:
a. Administrative Area Entrances: Provide electronic
RFID lockset by Saflok.
b. Guestroom Entry Locksets: See Modules <7A> and
<16> Loss Prevention: Provide RFID Encoder.

13. Keying: Provide electronic RFID locks for each project

Guestroom, Guest accessible and non-Guest accessible
doors. The following is a general keying concept if keys
are required:
a. Guestroom Lock Operation: Electronic RFID.
b. Food & Beverage: Operated by Grandmaster Key.
c. Other Departments: Operated by Grandmaster
Key.
14. Master Keys: Established as follows:
a. Non-Guestroom doors on Guestroom Tower
Floors: Several separate submasters.
b. Maintenance, Mechanical
c. Ballroom / Boardroom / Meeting Rooms
d. Food and Beverage Storeroom
e. Food and Beverage Outlets
f. Personnel
g. Accounting
h. Executive Office
15. Keying Configuration: Provide locks with the following:
a. Construction master keyed
b. Three each cut change keys for non-Guestroom
locks
c. Ten each change keys
d. Cut on a nickel / silver alloy special large bow key
with pebble finish
16. Special Keysets: Doors to the following areas typically
are not on project key system, but designated with special
keysets.
a. Retail spaces
b. Other rooms as designated by the RCH
17. Attic Stock: Review with RCH Operations for keying
requirements applicable to non-Guestrooms:
a. Key Blanks: 1 per lock of nickel / silver alloy, spe-
cial large bow key with pebble finish; 250 blanks for
each other key type.
• Mortise Locksets: 3 each (includes storeroom
mortise and for both hand operations)
• Tubular Latchsets: 12 each
• Logo and Non-Logo Knobs: 10 each
• Levers: 10 each per finish
• Escutcheon Plates: 10 of each piece
• Lock Parts
• Scores: 12
18. Key Cabinet: Include cabinets for each project.
19. Windows & Storefront:
a. Guestroom Windows: See Module <7A>.

b. Window Frames: Wood with aluminum exterior clad-

ding or only aluminum construction.
c. Finishes: Provide exterior with a custom color by
Kynar or a fluorocarbon finish. Provide another interior
coordinated color / finish as selected by the Interior
Designer. Provide wood trim casing for doors and win-
dows in Public Spaces.
d. Manufacturers: Provide aluminum windows and store-
fronts by Kawneer, 1600 Series or equal quality or
WinDoor, Series 8000 SGD and Series 2000; Orlando
contact / tel: (407) 481-8400.
20. Glass and Glazing – General: Install glass in compliance
with recommendations of manufacturer of glass and metal
framing.
a. Guestrooms: See Module <7A>.
b. Public Area: Exterior Low-E glass, 25 mm (1 inch)
clear, insulated and tempered where required by code,
otherwise provide clear plate glass.
c. Glazing: Double glazed. Consider using varying thick-
ness of laminated glass as part of the double-glazing to
control noise if required.
d. Insulated Glass: Thickness may vary when dictated by
energy or governing codes.
e. Interior Storefront: Tempered clear glass when required
subject to human impact, otherwise provide clear plate
glass.
f. Installation: Comply with glazing standards and rec-
ommendations of manufacturer of glass and metal
framing.
g. Beveled Tempered Glass: Bevel to exterior sides.
Provide in Clubhouse entry doors and at other locations
selected by the Interior Designer.
h. Overhead: Laminated glazing above occupied areas.
i. Safety Glazing: See Module <16>. Tempered or lami-
nated at showers, bathtubs, entrance doors and side-
lights, full-length mirrors and other locations subject to
human impact.
j. Special Glazing: Provide “decorative” glass, such as
beveled, cut, leaded, frosted, etc., as required by interior
design drawings.
21. Mirror Glazing: ASTM C 1036 type 1, quality g1, coated
mirror glass in compliance with FS DD-M-00411. Set mir-
rors in compliance with National Association of Mirror
Manufacturers recommendations.
a. Provide a minimum of three-layer coating consisting of
silver, copper and protective coating.

b. Provide mirrors with moisture resistant back seal

and edge seal.
c. Provide 10 year guarantee against defective
de-silvering.
d. Do not install mirrors on new plaster, new masonry
or freshly painted walls. Dry and cure substrates for
a minimum of 72 hours.
e. Vanity Mirror Installation: Install with adhesive
and minimum of two clips at top and continuous
angle at bottom. Securely fasten clips and angle to
wall substrate.
f. Safety Backing: Required at sliding mirror doors
and for Fitness Center mirrors.
GR3.11 Division 09 - Finishes - General

A. Ceiling Materials - General:
1. Gypsum Board: 15 mm (⅝ inch) minimum supported at
0.61 m (2 ft.) to avoid deflection.
a. Public Areas: 15 mm (⅝ inch) gypsum board, cof-
fered arrangement or in decorative combination with
millwork as selected by Interior Designer. Provide
required access panels concealed from guest view.
b. Guestrooms: See Module <7A>.
2. Acoustical Ceilings:
a. Service Corridors / BOH Areas: Accessible, com-
mercial duty, exposed suspended grid, except me-
chanical room and general storage areas, provide 60
cm x 120 cm (2 ft. x 4 ft.) acoustical tile of composi-
tion to resist cupping and deflection from moisture.
b. Employee Cafeteria: Provide 60 x 120 cm (2 ft. x 4
ft.) acoustical tile with aluminum suspended grid.
When Cafeteria includes food service line, provide
with washable ceiling surfaces same as for food
preparation areas.
c. Food Preparation Areas: Accessible, commercial
duty 60 x 120 cm (2 x 4 ft.) vinyl gypsum board
or non-corroding panels that are capable of being
repeatedly washed without damage in aluminum or
galvanized / painted suspension system.
d. Administrative Offices and Non-Public
Areas: Accessible, commercial duty, exposed grid,
acoustical 60 x 120 cm (2 x 4 ft.), tegular-edge tile
system.

B. Lath and Plaster: For system types, additives and accessories,

comply with recommendations of the Lath & Plaster Institute.
Provide galvanized steel studs, framing and fasteners at exterior
systems.
C. Gypsum Board Systems: Consult local codes to verify product ap-
plication and code requirements for the following minimum wall
assemblies:
1. Typical Application: 15 mm (5/8 inch) thick gypsum board
on each side of galvanized metal studs.
2. Acoustic Control: Comply with galvanized steel stud and
gypsum board construction assembly standards that meet
minimum acoustic requirements; see other Modules for
minimum wall assembly STC ratings.
3. Chases: 2 hour fire rated, gypsum board "shaft wall" or
equal.
4. Finish Level: Provide level 4 finish system in areas exposed
to view as outlined in Gypsum Association GA 214. Comply
with GA 214 for critical viewing areas, concealed areas and
to achieve performance rating for fire and asbestos.
5. Wet Areas: Provide water resistant substrate wall material
(such as cement board) for toilet, food preparation and other
wet areas.
6. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: 12 mm (½ inch) minimum
thickness, meeting ASTM C79-78 for water resistant gypsum
sheathing board, type X, where indicated.
D. Cement Board: Provide cement (not gypsum) board (Densglas or
Dur-o-Rock products) behind Guestroom showers, toilets, steam
rooms, locker room wet areas and other wet areas as substrate
(or backerboard) to install ceramic tile, thin stone and stone tile.
E. Exterior Stucco: Provide 20 mm (¾ inch) thick 3 coat system over
1 kg (2.4 lb) membrane, backed-expanded metal lath on 12 mm
(½ inch) minimum exterior gypsum sheathing. Provide neces-
sary accessories such as control and expansion joints and metal
trim. Submit for approval, texture and color samples.
1. Expansion and Control Joints: Coordinate with the building
elevations.
2. Mesh: Glass fiber reinforced concrete (GFRC) is acceptable;
reinforced fiberglass sections are not.
3. Exterior Coating: Provide an acrylic polymer elastomeric
coating to stucco work on mid and high-rise buildings (not
required on buildings of 2 story and less).
4. Guarantee: Provide a 2 year waterproofing guarantee for the
stucco work.
5. Finish Color: Integral stucco color not required. Paint exte-
rior building stucco.

F. Ceramic Tile:
1. Standard: Comply with Tile Council of America (TCA)
Handbook for ceramic tile installation, materials, workman-
ship and installation.
2. Provide floor materials with surface slip resistance of 0.6
minimum wet / dry.
3. Product Locations: Provide ceramic tile floors and walls
for the following areas. See Module <GR4>, “Typical Finish
Schedule” for acceptable finishes including, but not limited to
the following areas:
a. Food Production and Service Areas: <10> Coordinate
wall and finish heights with equipment and Kitchen
Consultant.
b. Fitness Center: See Module <4>.
c. Guestroom Balcony: See Module <7A>. Employee
Areas: See Module <8B>.
G. Stone Work: In Public spaces, see this Module, “Division 04 –
Masonry Stonework”.
1. Stone Slabs Selection: Provide as selected by Interior
Designer.
a. Acceptable range of color & pattern is submitted and
approved by RCH prior to arrival on site.
b. Mark each carton "F" for floors and "W" for walls for
each selection. Marks shall be visible.
2. Marble Tiles and Bases: Comply with requirements for
marble:
a. Samples: Cull selected materials into similar groups
and for adjacent surfaces without drastic contrast in
veining or coloration. Obtain samples for RCH approval.
b. Tile Size: 30 x 30 x 1 cm (12 x 12 inch x ⅜ inch) with a
clear polished surface and eased edges. Maximum tol-
erance for deviation for size, squareness and thickness
is + 0.8 mm (1/32 inch).
c. Finish Face: Provide polished tiles to ensure good grout
joints. Provide from quarry, tiles designated for bath-
room with exposed finely polished edges of same finish
as tile face. Only wall tiles require a quarry polished
edge.
d. Packaging: Plainly mark cartons of polished edge tiles.
Display on exterior of crate, one tile representative of
range each crate contents. Background color of pack-
aged tiles shall be the same for each carton. Do not mix
white backgrounds with others of slightly more egg-
shell or cream color in same carton.

e. Base Tiles: 30 x 10 x 1 cm (12 x 4 inch x ⅜ inch) with

fine polish on top edge and 1 cm (⅜ inch) polished bevel,
unless otherwise directed by RCH.
f. Base may be produced from floor and wall tile as re-
quired and cut from imperfect tile production to maxi-
mize material utilization.
g. Clearly mark cartons and crates with “Base”.
h. Guestroom / Bath Marble: See Module <7A>.
3. Stone Thresholds: 2 cm (¾ inch) thick.
4. Stone Setting: Set floors normally with veining parallel to
vanity top and walls with veining vertical.
H. Resilient Flooring: Vinyl composition tile with 100 mm (4 inch)
vinyl or rubber base in 25 m (100 ft.) lengths.
I. Seamless Flooring: At front bars, provide seamless flooring and
covebase; confirm requirements with RCH.
J. Carpet and Carpet Pad: For Guestrooms see <7A> and <7B> and
Public area FF&E requirements in Module <GR4>. Contractor
shall provide a carpet quantity take-off and vouch as accurate.
K. Painting:
1. Preparation:
a. Caulk with joint sealant, fill voids, seal, and sand sub-
strate and coatings to provide tight, smooth surface for
application of paint and stain.
b. Prime unfinished surfaces prior to finish.
2. Painting Includes:
a. Exposed surfaces unless surfaces are pre-finished with
desired color or finish.
b. Do not paint controls, sprinkler heads and covers, fire
alarms and detectors, electrical fixtures or any other
item that will be adversely affected by coating.
c. Access doors, panels, diffusers trims and grilles the
same finish as adjacent surfaces.
d. Interior of ducts showing through registers and grilles
flat black.
e. Protect adjacent surfaces from paint and damage.
3. Paint Systems: In BOH areas, provide paint or coating sys-
tems for exposed materials and surfaces as appropriate for
the material and exposure. Provide with long lasting durable,
non-corrosive finish. Include field painting of exposed bare
and covered pipes (include color coding), hangers, exposed
steel and ironwork and primed metal surfaces of mechanical
and electrical equipment if visible from a public areas and as
directed by Architect / Interior Designer.

4. Paint Products: Provide paint by Sherwin Williams, or

equally performing product.
a. Obtain RCH approval for products by other
manufacturers.
b. Obtain RCH pre-approved paint color list for review.
c. Provide coating materials for each coating system from
same manufacturer delivered to project in manufactur-
er’s original, unopened packages and containers bear-
ing manufacturer’s name and label.
d. Provide full-coat benchmark finish sample of each coat-
ing and substrate type. Comply with procedures speci-
fied in PDCA P5.
e. Provide appropriate mold / mildew resistant additive in
exterior paint.
f. Provide warranty based on RCH’s 7 to 10 year exterior
repaint cycle.
g. Provide extra paint materials from same production as
project materials in two, 5 gallon containers. Package
same as required for original project paints.
5. Paint Finish: Paint and stain surfaces with multi-coat finish
systems. In general, finish levels are as follows:
a. Flat: Ceilings and walls not accessible to contact with
Guests / RCH Staff.
b. Semi-Gloss: Service areas, back-of-house and toilet
areas.
c. Gloss: Food preparation, utility areas, primary service
corridor and wet areas.
6. Painting - Exterior: Obtain approved color scheme from
RCH.
a. Equipment / Exterior: Paint exposed equipment and de-
vices. Field paint rooftop and other exterior equipment
with a rust-prohibitive paint to match adjacent surfaces.
b. Exterior / Stucco: Paint exterior surfaces, including
trim and flashing. See Site requirements for finish on
exterior landscape and recreation facilities <1>.
7. Painting - Interior: Obtain approved color scheme from RCH.
a. Environment: Maintain building HVAC at proper tem-
perature and humidity levels for interior painting.
b. Preparation: Caulked, filled, sanded, and completely
prepared in proper manner to provide tight, smooth sur-
faces prior to final painting.
c. Millwork Painting: Perform on-site after millwork
installation and acceptance. Provide antique finish on
painted materials in public areas.

8. Painting - Public Areas: Paint ceiling, base and detailed

moldings in public areas and Club Lounge <7C> with ap-
proved colors of finish painting. Provide a minimum of two
coats of solid color oil based semiglossed enamel paint.
a. Finish door and door moldings in public areas visible
to Guestroom with a multi-coated staining, painting or
antiquing process. Provide semigloss paint with 30%
reflectability.
b. Ceilings: Flat.
9. Painting - Guestrooms and Guestroom Tower Corridors: See
Modules <7A> and <7B>.
10. Antiquing: Assume a minimum of three colors for antique
finishes.
11. Stained Millwork: Provide factory finishes by millwork
supplier.
a. Supplier provides on-site expertise to complete required
refinishes for consistent, blended finishes.
b. Install a minimum of two coats of stain and seal with
two coats of low luster clear lacquer.
12. Elevator Doors: <12> On bronze finish, lobby side of eleva-
tor doors at public levels, provide a custom finish as directed
by interior design scheme.
L. Wall Coverings (FF&E): For Guestrooms and Guestroom Building
Corridors, see Modules <7A> and <7B>.
1. Vinyl and Fabric Wall Coverings: Typically, FF&E supplied
and Contractor installed. Provide quantity take-off and vouch
adequate.
a. Standard: ASTM F793, Category 5.
b. Fire Characteristics: ASTM E 84; flame spread of 25
or less and a smoke development of 450 or less. Submit
data on surface burning characteristics for product and
as a part of wall assembly.
c. Provide mockup and obtain RCH approval.
d. Provide mildew resistant products and “strippable”
adhesive. Include adhesive and manufacturer’s recom-
mendations for primer coating, sizing, etc.
e. Provide non-plastic corner guards at outside corners
and seal edges in contact with adjoining materials using
silicone sealant.
2. Upholstered Walls: See Module <GR4>.

GR3.12 Division 10 - Specialties

A. Flagpoles: See Module <1>
B. Signage / Traffic Controls / Graphics: See Module <GR2>.
C. Toilet Partitions: In Back-of-House Areas:
1. Provide plastic laminate, floor mounted toilet partitions and
wall mounted cubicles.
2. Provide mock-up to show partition material, color and hard-
ware consistent with RCH approved design. Provide partition
blocking and support as recommended by partition manufac-
turer for project conditions.
3. Coordinate field measurements with toilet partitions, toilet
accessories and fixtures.
4. Provide manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant anchor-
ing assemblies complete with concealed leveling adjustment.
5. Provide privacy seals at door rails to prevent sight into stalls.
D. Toilet Compartments: In Public Spaces, provide the following:
1. Type: Floor to ceiling height, same finish as in lavatory area
2. Doors: Solid wood, full louver style, stained or painted
3. Hardware: Chrome plated hinges, brackets, latch with bum-
per, coat hook and bumper
E. Lockers & Benches - General: See the Facilities Program for spe-
cific project requirements.
1. Guest Lockers: See Module <4> Recreation Facilities.
2. Employee Lockers: See Module <8B> Employee Facilities.
3. Public Area Lockers: Provide custom, pre-finished 300 mm
(12 inch) wide / double tiered 500 mm (20 inch) deep lock-
ers with finished paneled doors, end walls and trim, locker
numbers and electronic locks with digital pads. Custom
stained wood finish (cherry, oak, etc.) as selected by Interior
Designer.
a. Locker Interior: Laminate interior surfaces and provide
with clothes hooks, mirror on door interior and jewelry
(box) storage.
b. Locker Hardware: Provide polished chrome hardware
and number plaques.
c. Coordination: See Module <4> Recreation for program
requirements.
d. Acceptable Locker Manufacturers: Penco, Delta and
All American Lockers.
e. Warranty: 3 years.
4. Guest Benches: Provide FFE decorative benches in Change
areas adjacent to lockers.

F. Toilet and Bath Accessories:

1. Materials & Finishes:
a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304, 22 gauge mini-
mum for sheet materials.
b. Backplates: For wall mounted accessories, provide
concealed heavy duty cadmium plated steel backplate.
c. Finish: Provide accessories with polished finish unless
otherwise specified.
d. Fasteners: Use concealed mounting brackets where
possible; secure with non-corrosive fasteners. Where
exposed fasteners are used, provide non-corrosive types
with heads finished to match finish of accessory unit.
e. Installation: Provide level, plumb and securely an-
chored. Mount toilet accessories within range of reach
limits of applicable accessibility regulations. Provide
wood blocking to secure installation.
2. Guestroom Toilet Accessories: See Module <7A>.
3. Public Toilet Accessories: Provide accessories from one ac-
ceptable manufacturer including A&J Washroom Accessories,
Inc., American Specialties Inc., Ginger or Bradley.
a. Robe Hook
b. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Decorative surface mounted,
twin paper holder
c. Toilet Lever: Polished chrome lever to match other trim
d. Toilet-Seat-Cover Dispensers
e. Sanitary Napkin Disposal
f. Grab bars
g. Warranty: 1 year
G. Back-of-House Employee Restrooms: Typically, toilet room accesso-
ries for employee and BOH areas include the following products:
• Paper Towel Dispenser
• Waste Receptacle
• Combination Products
• Toilet-Seat-Cover Dispensers
• Sanitary Napkin Disposal
• Toilet Tissue Holders
• Electric Hand Dryer
• Grab Bars
• Mirror
• Soap Dispenser
1. Paper Towel Dispenser / Waste Receptacle: Bobrick,
B-36907; combination recessed:
a. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, welded construc-
tion, with exposed surfaces satin finish. Provide drawn
flange, one-piece seamless beveled construction.

b. Door: 5/16 inch solid, high pressure laminate with con-

cealed full length stainless steel piano hinge and two
friction catches.
2. Napkin / Tampon Vendor Dispenser: Bobrick B3507 x 2;
recessed type without brand name advertising. Combine two
dispensing mechanisms in one cabinet to provide napkins or
tampons at user’s option.
a. Dispensing Mechanism: Convertible to allow change
of coin denomination without purchasing new mecha-
nisms or removing unit from wall
b. Material / Finish: Type 304 stainless steel; satin finish
at exposed surfaces
c. Construction: All welded; 22 gauge cabinet; 18 gauge
door
d. Door Facing: 5/16 inch solid high pressure laminate
(Wilson Art No. 4615-60 Sand Finesse) with concealed
full length stainless steel piano hinge and cable door
swing limiter
3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Similar to Bobrick B 357 without
components of the toilet seat cover / toilet tissue dispenser;
see above.
4. Grab Bars: Heavy duty, having 1 ¼ inch diameter stainless
steel tubular frame with 0.125 mil PVC cover and flangeplate
bolted to end of frame with snap-on nylon cover.
a. 36 inch, Sparling Model No. PLC-36-B-CH; on wall
behind water closet at accessible toilet stalls
b. 42 inch, Sparling Model No. PLC-42-B-CH; on wall at
side of water closet at accessible toilet stalls
c. Supplier: Lodging Bathware Specialties
5. Installer: Obtain written approval from Manufacturer
6. Warranty: Provide one year warranty to the Owner.
7. Approved Manufacturers: A&J Washroom Accessories,
Inc., American Specialties Inc., Bobrick or Bradley. Owner
may approve alternate manufacturers.
H. Guestroom Shower Door: See Module <7A>.
I. Fireplaces, Prefabricated Gas - Product Requirements:
1. Guestrooms: See Module <7A> for Guestroom fireplace se-
lection and design.
2. Flue: Coordinate fireplace flue routing during Design
Development phase.
3. Rating: A.F.U.E. (Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency) with
65% or above rating
4. High Altitude Locations: Requires special care to select
product
5. Starter Control: Remote electric on wall
6. Gas Piping Loop: Include in design.

7. Accessories: Include manufacturer’s installed glass window

and screen, remote starters, draft prevention devices and be
designed for high altitude applications when appropriate.
8. Carbon Monoxide Detector <14>: Required for fuel burning
locations
9. Installer: Gas appliance licensed to include documented
experience with installation of pre-fabricated fireplaces and
having manufacturer’s written approval.
10. Inspection: Show compliance with National Gas Codes be-
fore the product is installed.
11. Location: Select Public Areas <2> and Guestrooms <7A>.
For wood burning fireplace requirements, see Module <7A>.
12. Approved Manufacturers: Heat-N-Glow, Majestic and
Superior
13. Warranty: Manufacturer’s written warranty with Owner’s
option, following warranty expiration, to select Manufacturer’s
service agreement
J. Storage Shelving: Included as part of the Owner supplied package
(OS&E category). Provide metal shelving system of type suit-
able for guest luggage and RCH equipment, material and product
storage.
1. Submittals: Submit manufacturer’s name, and data for mate-
rial gauge (shelves and supports), fasteners and load carrying
capacity of system in pounds per square foot.
2. Provide freestanding wall braced or wall supported type
with fixed or adjustable shelving. Flange the running edge of
shelves. Provide solid, grated or perforated shelves depend-
ing on required use and stored material.
3. Finish: Painted, G 90 galvanized, 16 gauge steel (unless oth-
erwise noted), ASTM A-527
4. See Modules <9> and <11> for maintenance and housekeep-
ing storage shelving requirements.
5. Alternate material such as plastic may be acceptable if per-
formance equals galvanized steel. Obtain RCH approval.
6. Warranty: 1 year
K. Miscellaneous Specialties:
1. Walk-off Mat: Decorative type; included in OS&E package
L. Fire Protection Specialties: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets and
installation accessories.
1. Type: Fully recessed extinguisher cabinets
2. Guestrooms: Cabinets in Guestroom tower corridors and ad-
jacent to Public Spaces, provide without glass (if code com-
pliant), frameless and with touch latch operation.
3. Finish: Match adjoining wall finish and wrap material to
cabinet edges.

GR3.13 Division 11 - Equipment

A. Safes: For Guestroom Safe, see Module <7A>. For Drop Safe,
House / Cash and Safe Deposit Boxes, see Modules <8A> and
<8B>.
B. Appliances - Guestrooms: See Module <7A>.
C. Receiving Area Equipment: See Module <9>.
D. F&B Production Equipment: See Module <10> for kitchen and
other food and beverage service areas.
E. Wash and Dry Cleaning Equipment: See Module <11A>.
GR3.14 Division 12 - Furnishings

A. FF&E: See Module <GR4> Furnishings, Fixtures & Equipment.
GR3.15 Division 13 - Special Construction

A. Saunas: See Module <4> Recreation.
B. Steam Rooms: See Module <4>
C. Swimming Pools and Whirl Pools: See Module <4>.
GR3.16 Division 14 - Conveyances

A. Elevators and Escalators: See Module <12>.
GR3.17 Division 22 - Plumbing

A. Plumbing: See Module <15B>.
GR3.18 Division 23 - Mechanical

A. HVAC & Mechanical: See Module <15A>.
GR3.19 Division 26 - Electrical

A. Electrical Systems & Lighting: See Modules <1>, <15C>.
GR3.20 Division 33 - Utilities

A. Utilities: See Modules <1>, <15A>, <15B>.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR4
Furniture, Fixtures &
Equipment (FF&E)
GR4 - Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
GR4.1 General Requirements for FF&E 1
GR4.2 Public Spaces 3
GR4.3 Outdoor & Pool Furniture 18
GR4.4 Boardrooms & Meeting Rooms 20
GR4.5 Administrative / Staff Furnishings 20
GR4.6 Guestroom & Guestroom Corridor Furnishings 23
GR4.7 Operating Supplies and Equipment 24

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B FF&E | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment - GR4
Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment

GR4.1 General Requirements for FF&E
A. Overview: This Module provides the Project Design Team,
the Interior Designer and other consultants general criteria
information and standards to prepare FF&E design docu-
ments and specifications.
B. Introduction: This Module defines the required minimum
criteria for FF&E for Ritz-Carlton Hotels & Resorts and
MI Project Contact serves as a Brand reference and guideline. However, the
Marriott International - “MI” - is the application of this Module may vary for RCH proper-
corporate entity that manages this
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. ties based on the project design theme developed by the
Architect and Interior Designer. The renovation and de-
velopment principles are based on MI’s hotel industry ex-
perience and product development research. This section
supplements the Design Standards for FF&E construction
and fabrication including Modules:
• <2> - Public Spaces
• <3> - Food and Beverage
• <6> - Function Spaces
• <7> - Guest Accommodations
The criteria for Public Spaces and Guestroom décor includes,
but are not limited to, flooring, carpet and padding, area
rugs, wall finish, window treatments, casegoods, upholstered
furniture, bedding, artwork, artifacts and decorative light
fixtures.
C. Governing Codes: When governing codes exceed the re-
quirements contained herein, the governing codes are
understood as minimum prerequisites. During the project
approval process, RCH may waive the Design Standards
to comply with the project’s governing provisions, market
customs or practices.
D. Deviations or Exceptions: When market customs or existing
property conversions are in non-compliance with these
Design Standards, obtain RCH review, interpretation and
approval. Exceptions require submission to RCH prior to
material or product purchase and installation.
E. Slip Resistance: <16> On hard floor walking surfaces, pro-
vide minimum of 0.6 wet/dry coefficient of friction on flat
surfaces and minimum of 0.8 wet/dry on ramps.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | FF&E 1

F. Attic Stock: <GR1> Provide material and product stock over

and above initial FF&E installation quantities. The attic
stock list may be amended by RCH to respond to the spe-
cific project requirements. Define products in sufficient
time for project purchase. Generally, attic stock is deliv-
ered near project completion.
1. Public Spaces: Attic stock is required for public spaces
in the following minimum quantities:
a. Carpets: 7% over quantity ordered
b. Wallcovering: 10 to 20% depending upon pattern
and repeats
c. Fabric Wallcovering: 3% non-custom, 7% custom.
d. Picture Lights: 5% over quantity ordered
e. Light Fixture Lamps: 5% over quantity ordered
2. Guestrooms: Provide attic stock minimum quantities for
guestrooms as follows:
a. Mirrors: 2% of total quantity (minimum of 2)
b. Lamps & Ceiling Fixtures: 2% of total quantity
(minimum of 2)
c. Lamp Shades & Crystal Lenses: 2 to 5% of total
quantity ordered (minimum of 2 of each type)
d. Artwork: 2% of total quantity (minimum of 2)
e. TVs, Radios, CD Players & Cooler Units: 2 to 5%
of total quantity (minimum of 5 each)
f. Casegoods: Minimum 1 for each piece, 2 each for
pairs of headboards
g. Upholstered Seating: Minimum of 1 each
h. Wallcovering: 5% of total quantity ordered
i. Carpet: 5% of total quantity ordered
j. Shower Curtains: 1 to 5%
k. Bed Skirts: 5% of total quantity ordered
l. Decorative Bed Pillow Covers: 5% base on PAR
level of property (3.5 to 5 par is typical)
m. Decorative Pillows: 2% of total quantity ordered
(minimum of 2)
n. Bed Textiles: 5% of total quantity ordered, mini-
mum 2 of each type
2 FF&E | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR4.2 Public Spaces

A. General: This section includes the FF&E criteria and
finishes for Public Areas in Marriott Hotels & Resorts.
Obtain RCH acceptance for product, material and fabrica-
tion exceptions.
B. Floor Finishes:
1. Area Rugs: Provide combination of hand-tufted, cut
pile, loop and tip shear construction.
a. Hand Tufted: 88 oz. weight minimum, skein dyed
b. Yarn Content: 100% semi-worsted or New
Zealand wool. A maximum of 15% silk is permit-
ted in low traffic areas. Obtain RCH acceptance
for exceptions.
c. Minimum 31 stitches per square inch.
d. Total Pile Height: .48 inch;
e. Total Rug Thickness .49 - .59 inch
f. Total Carpet Weight: Minimum 123 oz per yd2
g. Primary Backing: 65% Cotton / 35% Poly
h. Secondary Backing: Cotton, natural latex with
fire retardant compound
i. Rug Edges: Bevel with a slope no greater than 1:2
j. Padding: Provide manufacturer’s recommenda-
tion for non-slip padding.
2. Carpet:
a. Weave Type: Woven Axminster. See chart for
weights.
b. Pile Yarn: 80% wool 20% nylon
c. Yarn Count: R674/2, 2/46s
d. Backing Material: Polyester, polypropylene, con-
ductive latex with superior film strength proper-
ties or suitable material
e. Pitch: 27.6 per dm (7 per inch)
f. Rows: See chart.
g. Tuft Density: See chart.
h. Pile Height Above Back: Cut-pile 7.1 mm
(0.27 inch)
i. Total Carpet Thickness: 9.6 mm (0.38 inch)
j. Pile Weight: See chart.
k. Total Weight: See chart.
l. Flammability: Pass ASTM E-648-91, Class 1
flammability rating, DOCFF 1-70 Pill Test or
equivalent, or governing codes that meet or ex-
ceed these requirements.
m. Soil Inhibitors: Apply during fiber production; not
topically applied after carpet fabrication.

n. Carpet Colors: Custom dyed to match design

samples. State dye methods in writing to the
Designer and RCH.
o. Dye Lot: Minimal. Do not separate dye lots and
do not inter-mix in one area unless approved by
the RCH.
p. Padding: Tred-Mor series quality, 2580QL (quick
release) or equal.
Level I Level II Level III Level IV
Guestroom Corridors,
Lobby, Lobby Lounge,
Concierge Lounge,
Guestrooms: Ballrooms, Prefunction
Meeting Room,
Circulation, Gift Shops
Public Spaces, Grand Stair
Public Restroom, Entries:
Dining Rooms: Wilton Quality, Level III; Ax-
36 oz., 7 row, 0.270 pile height
minster or Hand-woven; 1701 g
Tuft Density: 49 per in2 10 row 0.270 pile height (60 oz)
9 row 0.270 pile height
Pile Weight: 32 oz Tuft Density: 70 per in2
Tuft Density: 63 per in2
Total Wieght: 65 oz Pile Weight: 45 oz
Pile Weight: 41 oz
Total Wieght: 75 oz
Total Wieght: 72 oz
3. Carpet Installation:
a. Materials and methods for installation are ac-
cepted by carpet manufacturer and performed in
compliance with carpet manufacturer’s recom-
mendations and written instructions.
b. General Contractor receives materials, inspects
for damage, documents damages, stores and pre-
cuts installation materials off-site.
c. Carpet installers are required to achieve timely
installation completion and allow same for other
installers following carpet installation.
d. Carpet areas receive wall to wall padding unless
specified otherwise.
e. Provide double padding at stair nosings.
f. Provide hot glue seaming and stretched tack strip
installation in Guestrooms and Suites. Exposed
screws, glue down and double glue installation
are not acceptable.
g. Public Areas and corridors: Undercarpet padding,
double-stick installation method.
• Seams: Install with commercial hot melt tape.
• Carpet Edges: Apply seam sealer to edges where
carpet meets other floor materials.
• Adhesive: Parachem #902 or equal
4. Hard Floor Finishes: Provide slip resistant floor and
ramp walking surfaces <16>.

a. Stone: Provide non-porous, natural stone. Obtain

MI approval on a project case-by-case basis for
exceptions.
b. Tile: Not permitted. Obtain RCH acceptance on a
project case-by-case basis for exceptions. Provide
full body porcelain unless otherwise approved.
c. Wood: Provide commercial grade, solid hardwood
with inherent stain resistance throughout.
• Engineered Wood: Obtain RCH acceptance.
• Technical Review: Project interior designer
reviews technical information with owner and
RCH Interior Design. Obtain RCH acceptance.
• Faux Wood or Laminate Flooring: Not
acceptable
d. Concrete Finish: Provide impregnated concrete
color, not topically stained.
5. Rubber Flooring: Provide in fitness centers where ap-
plicable. Obtain RCH acceptance.
6. Other Flooring: Cork, bamboo and leather flooring
may be acceptable if approval is obtained from RCH.
C. Wall Finishes:
1. Wallcoverings: Provide Owner and RCH the approved
high quality wallcoverings, adhesives and installation
materials as shown on approved Designer documents.
a. Vinyl Wallcovering Materials: Generally, Public
Areas require minimal amounts of vinyl wall-
covering applications unless more material is ac-
cepted by RCH.
• Fabrication: Support wallcovering with vinyl
material consisting of a pigmented polyvinyl
chloride adhered to pre-shrunk cotton or cotton
blend fabric backing surfaced with a delustered
resin liquid top coating.
• Width: 1370 mm (54 inch) for Public Areas
and Guest Corridors walls, unless otherwise
specified.
• Total weight: 600 g (21 oz.), Type II, or more,
per yard.
• Average Thickness: 0.025
• Fire Rating: Class ‘A’
• Backing: Osnaberg
2. Adhesive: For application of vinyl wallcovering, pro-
vide mold and mildew resistant product recommended
by wallcovering manufacturer considering that the
application surface for vinyl and adhesive is product
compatible.

3. Fabric Wallcovering: Provide backing as needed.

a. Preferred method of installation is site fabricated
panels over either an acoustic core or a tackable
core. See http://www.whisperwalls.com for details
and specifications.
b. If project conditions do not permit, use sewn pan-
els over pad.
• Provide 20 mm (¾ inch) double welt with wall
fabric and apply to perimeter of wall panels to
cover attachments.
• Sew material widths into blanket panels or as
specified by Designer.
• Match patterns at seams.
• Center fabrics on walls to avoid center seams,
however, panels at sides should not be less than
half the fabric width.
c. Match threads to background fabric color.
d. Install wall fabric when temperature and humid-
ity are approximate to conditions when the build-
ing is occupied.
e. Where patterns with repeats are specified and
are within more than one millwork panel, match
patterns identically in each millwork panel both
horizontally and vertically.
f. Stitch seams with proper tension without pucker-
ing and no stitching showing on fabric face.
g. Press open seams before installing over pad.
h. Upholster fabric tight and smooth over pad.
i. Back tack corner seams and match patterns to
eliminate outside corner welt.
j. Installer determines if surface to which fabric
and pad is installed is appropriate for installation,
and if fabric is appropriate for the specific project
location.
4. Special Finishes: Contract quality wood, stone, tile,
glass, and specialty wall finishes are encouraged for uti-
lization in feature areas and in food and beverage outlets.
a. Millwork & Stone: As per Interior Designer or
Architect’s specifications and drawings, and ac-
cepted by RCH. Provide finished samples in a
minimum 12 x 12 inch format.
b. Paint may be acceptable based on market condi-
tions. Obtain RCH acceptance.
c. Base Height: Minimum of 10 cm (4 inch). Large
scaled bases are appropriate in large areas.
d. Installation Hardware: Conceal, not visible.

D. Casegoods Furniture:
1. Casegoods - General: Fabricate furniture for commer-
cial hospitality applications.
a. Casegoods other than antiques are custom repro-
ductions as specified by Designer and accepted by
RCH.
b. Supplier is responsible for the structural integrity,
finish durability and construction.
c. Project interior designer reviews shop drawings
and finish samples prior to production.
d. Warranty: Warrant casegoods for commercial use.
2. Materials: Provide new materials of premium quality.
a. Lumber: Kiln dried to average moisture content
appropriate to climatic conditions of the project
site. Take proper precautions to maintain speci-
fied moisture content during manufacturing.
b. Solid Wood: Provide elements that are clear,
straight grain lumber of the best grade of speci-
fied species. Lumber is free of defects that might
impair serviceability, aesthetics and finish. Do not
use ‘short grain’ wood.
c. Veneer Core Elements: Clear, straight grain, best
species grade recommended, free of defects that
might impair serviceability, aesthetics and finish.
d. Core: 45 lb. density, industrial grade fiberboard or
flakeboard with balancing backer to face material.
e. Hardwood Veneers: Premium, kiln dried, solid
stock with multiple coats of clear gloss furniture
lacquer, semi-gloss 40 to 45% reflective finish or
Lilly finish stain and top coat with catalyzed lac-
quer at 60% sheen.
f. Edge and Trim: Exposed hardwood solids, neatly
mitered, sanded, and splinter free; hardwood edge
bumper; items with toe kick rail flush to carpet;
trim frames matching the wood veneer. Hardwood
edge, provide No. 1 common or better grade.
g. Drawers: Fabricate sides from 11 mm (7/16 inch)
wood with 3 mm (⅛ inch) wood bottom. Sand
wood for smooth and splinter free surfaces and
seal interior drawer boxes completely with vinyl
wrap wood construction or treated with moisture
protective coating.
h. Provide drawer stop with load capacity of 75 lb.
and silent under mounted (not visible) drawer
glide components of contract quality (Knapp &
Vogt #1300 minimum).

i. Provide dust drawers.

j. Tops: Natural wood, smooth grain, premium
quality or stone tops (granite or marble). Use tem-
pered glass with polished beveled edges to protect
wood tops and other fragile surfaces. Provide
glass free of decals, embossed labels or stamps.
Protect stone tops with anti-staining finish / sealer.
k. Protective Glides: ⅝ inch diameter nylon or plas-
tic glides on legs, self leveling where appropriate,
and protective strip on bottom edges to prevent
moisture damage.
l. Fabrication: Mortise and tenon and / or double
wood dowel strengthened with screw cleats,
and glued and screwed corner blocks in both
directions.
m. Glue: Best quality.
n. Finishes: Factory applied. Gloss, 60 sheen with
topcoat of pre-catalyzed lacquer. On vertical
Residence casegoods provide matching finish.
o. Substitutions: Obtain RCH review and written
acceptance.
3. Hardware and Accessories: Provide premium quality
casegood hardware and accessories and installed in com-
pliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Hardware: Finish metal hardware and details
with coorsion protective coating. Provide with
locking facilities when specified. Furnish locks
with two keys.
b. Fabrication Hardware: Manufacturer supplies
hardware brackets, cleats, toggle bolts and other
parts required for installation.
c. Glides or Levellers: Provide by manufacturer on
items specified or supplied. Include appropriate
glides for each specific floor finish (such as, wool
carpet, hardwood, marble, etc.).
d. Breakfronts: Line in fabric, with corner finished
with a gimp as specified by designer. Provide
lighted breakfronts with glass shelves at least
10 mm (3/8 inch) thick.
E. Dining Tables for Food Outlets: Review tables with chair prior
to production.
1. Table Bases:
a. Provide custom pedestal bases in sizes to support
various tabletops.
b. Provide firm, stable, even support for top sizes.
Include added weights for additional stability on
carpeted surfaces.

2. Tabletops: For tables with permanent tablecloths, provide

high density core panels with rounded edges, covered with
ivory / white tone heavyweight vinyl and ivory / white
vinyl edge.
a. Tables that receive runners or placemats, provide first
quality hardwood or stone as specified by Designer
and approved by RCH.
b. Provide wood tops with suitable F&B use protective
finish.
c. Where applicable, provide knee clearance of 690 mm
(27 inch) at desks and tables; see applicable accessi-
bility regulations.
d. Tabletop thickness: 32 mm (1 ¼ inch).
3. Tabletops Sizes: Unless otherwise approved by RCH, pro-
vide the following in food outlets:
a. Round:
• (36 inch) diameter for seating two
• 40 inch) diameter for seating four
• 56 inch) diameter for seating six
b. Square / Rectangular:
• (34 x 50 inch) for seating four at banquettes
• (34 x 34 inch) for seating two at banquettes
c. Leaf or Flip Tops:
• (40 x 40 to 56 inch) for seating four to six
• (42 x 42 to 60 inch) for seating six to eight
4. Beverage Outlets: Size and shape are dictated by the room
and seating arrangement. Smallest size is 610 mm (30 inch)
diameter or 610 x 610 mm (24 x 24 inch) square.
F. Upholstered Furniture - General: Fabricate furniture for commer-
cial hospitality use.
1. Submittals: Project interior designer reviews shop draw-
ings and finish samples prior to production.
2. Warranty: Warrant fabrication for commercial use.
3. Frames: Solid hardwood, #1 common grade, kiln dry to a
moisture content of 7 to 9%.
a. Provide solid hardwoods suitable for finishing free of
knots and blemishes for exposed wood frames.
b. Provide frames of steam bent plywood construction
for curved areas, and solid kiln dried hardwood
frames for other applications.
c. Provide stretchers to support legs (dining and side
chairs).
d. Corner block and screw frames.
4. Joints: At major joints, double dowel with corner blocks
and screw and glue.

a. Lag bolts are recommended to join seat frames to

legs.
b. Reinforce other joints with glue blocks or cleats.
5. Frame Finish: Provide catalyzed type finishes to match
approved finish samples. Test and warrant finishes for
commercial use.
6. Springs: Provide sinuous wire springs for seats and
seating backs.
a. Provide springs of sufficient quality to retain 95%
memory for five years.
b. Provide a sufficient quantity of springs to ensure
even weight distribution during use.
c. Seat Springs: 8 gauge
d. Back Springs: 11 gauge
e. Attach springs with steel clips.
f. Cover seat springs with steel wire flexolator or
equal product.
7. Seat Decking: Provide under seat cushions (not self
decked). Provide woven synthetic material to cover
back springs and apply foam on top.
8. Foam: Comply with US CA117 minimum requirements
(or equivalent) or governing codes that meet or exceed
the following requirements.
a. Seat Cushions: 29.2 kg/m³ (1.8 lbs./ft ³) minimum
foam density, ILD (compression) 11.8 to 13.6 kg
(26 to 30 lbs)
b. Backs: 24.3 kg/m³ (1.5 lbs/ft³) minimum foam
density, ILD (compression) 6.8 kg (15 lbs)
c. Solid Foam Core: Cover with 2.5 cm (1 inch) layer
of polyester batting.
d. Memory Quality: Provide sufficient foam quality
to retain 85% memory for five years.
9. Loose Cushions: Reversible
10. Foam & Fabric Flammability: Comply with US CA117
minimum requirements (or equivalent) or governing
codes that meet or exceed these standards.
11. Seams:
a. Depth & Stitches: Provide sufficient depth and
stitches to eliminate seam slippage (opening).
b. Thread Quality: Provide thread of sufficient qual-
ity for contract use.
c. Fabric Test: Seating supplier shall test fabrics for
seam slippage prior to production sewing.
12. Upholstered Arms:
a. Reinforce inside arms with cardboard or synthetic
woven fabric padded with 2.5 cm (1 inch) of foam.

b. Cover outside arms with synthetic woven fabric

covered by fabric.
13. Upholstered Outside Back: Provide foam pad and cover
with fabric.
14. Glides: Provide cushion stainless steel glides for furni-
ture on wood floors and heavy duty nylon glides for other
floor finishes.
15. Upholstery Fabric:
a. Abrasion Resistance: Pass minimum test
requirement of 30,000 double rubs using
Wyzenbeck (back and forth) or Martindale
(circular).
b. Flammability: Comply with US CA117 minimum
requirements (or equivalent) or governing codes
that meet or exceed these requirements.
c. Finish Protection: Treat with water and soil
treatment. Provide acrylic or latex backing and
lamination for stability.
d. Colorfastness to Light: Pass AATCC 16 Option 1
or 3-2003: 40 Hours, Grade 4.
e. Crocking: 4.0 dry 3.5 wet or better
f. Pil: Brush Pill ASTM D3511-02, Class 4.5
g. Seam Slippage: ASTM D3597-02-D434-95 for
upholstery and panel fabrics: 35 lbs./inch2
h. Tensile Strength: Upholstery 3.5 kg/cm² (50 lbs
per inch²), panel 2.4 kg/cm² (35 lbs/inch²)
i. Latex or Acrylic Backing: Back fabrics with an
exposed seam in seat cushion for stability.
j. Fabric Cleaning: Clean with water based methods.
16. Leather: Provide top quality, aniline dyed leather, free of
blemishes, scratches, and holes for upholstery. Obtain MI
approval for other leather products and applications.
G. Window Treatments :
1. Drapery Materials: Make draperies at required widths
of fabric specified, no less than one-half of width for
panels.Provide drapery at 250% fullness unless other-
wise specified.
2. Drapery Assembly: Fabricate continuous drapery pan-
els from same weaving or dye lots. Where widths are
joined, remove selvage edge and provide French seam.
Fabricate to hang straight and even, with no pulling
or puckering of fabric or loose threads and no panels
showing defects or horizontal seams.
a. Match patterns exactly at each vertical seam. Join
vertical seams by overlock stitch without pucker-
ing and position vertical seam behind pleats from
top to bottom. Seams shall be serged.

b. Sew French pleats / pinch pleats evenly spaced

with 100 mm (4 inch) minimum pleat spacing and
tack at 65 mm (2 ½ inch) to 90 mm (3 ½ inch)
from the top. If necessary, provide a second tack-
ing at pleat tops for appearance retention depend-
ing on fabric used.
c. Match threads with background color of fabric.
d. For the headings, insert buckram between face
fabric and the lining and stitch across top. On
overlaps and returns use double fold back over
the buckram by 12 inches. Extend lining to top of
finished drapery (pillow case top).
e. Sew drapery lining so only lining material is seen
from the exterior of building. Line drapery with
200 mm (8 inches) double fold hem and blind-
stitch uniformly and evenly with covered weights
at each vertical seam and side hem. Provide side
hems with 38 mm (1½ inch) double turned and
blind-stitched without puckering. Hems and side
hems are not visible overlock stitching
f. Provide drapery weights of appropriate size and
weight to ensure proper hanging of drapery with-
out sagging or pulling.
g. Close open ends of hems by hand with blind
stitching.
h. Provide overdrapery length from floor to ceil-
ing, unless otherwise specified, with maximum
of ¾ inch and minimum of ½ inch from carpet
or other finished floor surface, unless otherwise
noted on construction documents.
i. Match patterns at seams and align across win-
dows, vertically and horizontally, in same room.
j. Fabricate in compliance with contract quality to
withstand dry cleaning and hospitality use.
k. Extend drapery for full length of tracks. On two-
way draw, provide overlap of 75 mm (3 inch) min-
imum at opening to create a black-out condition.
3. Drapery Hardware: Provide Kirsch Architrac or equal
series products for the following components:
a. Track: 90 / 95 series, ball bearing
b. Tension Pulleys: 9923
c. End Pulleys: 9287
d. Rod Locks: 9494
e. Masters (center draw): 9487
f. End Stops: 9915
g. Masters (one-way): 9492
h. Cord: 9932-5 (solid braided #5)

i. Slides: 9495 (with fiberglass core)

j. Beaded Chain: 13 (nickel plate finish with cou-
plings if applicable).
k. Provide one-way or center draw master as divider
for purpose of hooking overdrapes and sheers
when both are hung on same track.
l. Prior to installation, spray Lucite rod parts with
silicone to prevent from drying-out.
4. Hanging of Finished Draperies:
a. Forward crease buckram heading between pleats
before hanging.
b. Pin and hang draperies evenly with Kirsch 1036
pin-on.
c. Because “Tenter Hooks” pull-out from wall, pro-
vide an angle bracket attached to wall with screw
to support return.
5. Installation:
a. Contractor shall make site measurements and
take-offs and verify required hardware showing
finished size, type of draw and projection and that
adequate blocking is planned to support the drap-
ery system as a whole.
b. Custom traverse rods are ceiling mounted, un-
less noted in drawings or if blocking is missing in
ceiling, using 1 ¼ inch raw fiber plugs, #6 or #8
and 1 ¼ inch, #6 or #8 cadmium plated screws.
Anchor points at both ends of rods shall not ex-
ceed 16 inches. Center mounts shall not exceed
32 inches.
c. Fabricate drapery to operate smoothly within
track.
6. Sheer Fabrication: Fabricate sheers with specified
fabric widths and never less than one-half of width in
panels. Unless otherwise specified, provide drapery at
250% fullness.
a. Provide continuous sheer panels fabricated from
same weaving or dye lots. Where widths are
joined, remove the selvage edge and use a French
seam. Fabricate sheers to hang straight and even,
without pulling, fabric puckering and loose
threads. Present drapery without panel defects
and no visible horizontal seams.
b. Match patterns exactly at each vertical seam. Join
vertical seams by overlock stitch and free of puck-
ering. Position vertical seam behind pleats from
top to bottom. Seams are serged.

c. Unless otherwise specified, provide sheers with

triple fold sewn French pleats / pinch pleats, even-
ly spaced with less than 100 mm (4 inch) pleat
spacing and tack at 65 mm (2 ½ inch) to 90 mm
(3 ½ inch) from the top. If necessary, a second
tacking is required at tops of pleats for appearance
retention depending on fabric type.
d. Provide 100 mm (4 inch) headings for sheers,
single turn over buckram.
e. Provide sheers with 200 mm (8 inch) double fold
hem, blind stitch uniformly and evenly with chain
weight across entire bottom edge. Assemble side
hems with 38 mm (1 ½ inch), double turned and
blind-stitched without puckering, sagging and
pulling.
f. Provide sheer length measured from floor to ceil-
ing, unless otherwise specified with 1 inch maxi-
mum and ¾ inch minimum from carpet and other
finished floor surface, unless otherwise indicated
on design documents.
g. Do not install sheers to hang below overdrapery.
h. Fabricate sheers of contract quality to withstand
dry cleaning and hard usage.
i. Pre-pin and hang sheers evenly with Kirsch 1036
pin-on.
7. Window Top Treatment Fabrication and Installation:
a. Window top treatments are made with wood,
metal fabrics or other decorative materials. Place
seams and match pattern, grain and repeats as
appropriate for the design.
b. Match patterns at seams and across windows, ver-
tically and horizontally, in the same room.
c. Unless otherwise specified in project specific
documents, window treatments are mounted into
the top treatment, from the ceiling or off the wall
as required.
d. Provide cornice with sufficient depth to accom-
modate easy operation of drapery.
e. Upholstered top treatments require 13 mm (½
inch) of five ounce flame retardant batting as a
minimum.
f. Face fabric is on face, sides and bottom edge of
cornice. Lining shall not be visible from room.
g. Welting is ¼ inch, self welt, unless otherwise
specified in project specific documents.

h. Properly anchor cornices to structure to effec-

tively support weight of installed cornice and
drapery components.
i. Unless specified otherwise in project specific
documents, cornice lining is bleached white 50 /
poly 50 / cotton lining.
j. Provide ½ inch thick flame retardant particle-
board that is not warped. Plywood is not allowed.
Provide 2.5 cm x 5 cm (1 x 2 inch) header board.
k. Install cornice with “L” brackets for attachment to
walls and ceilings.
8. Soft Valance:
a. Fabricate soft valances in compliance with project
specific documents.
b. Mount valances to ceiling at sufficient depth to
accommodate easy drapery operation. Conceal
drapery hardware fastened behind valance.
H. Lighting for Public Spaces : See Module <15C> for lamp types
and lighting levels; coordinate with the following:
1. Design Consultant: RCH requires providing a lighting
designer on each project. Review full lighting drawings
with RCH.
2. Standards: Comply with governing codes. Provide UL
approval and labeled products.
3. Fixtures: Provide a combination of ambient, decorative,
and task lighting.
4. Lighting Controls:
a. Provide dimmable lighting in front of house public
areas, except restrooms and recreation facilities.
b. Locate programmable dimming panel in back of
house space for public spaces.
I. Decorative Lamp Fixtures: Provide U.L. listed and approved
lamp and shade fixtures. Before ordering lamps check re-
quired voltages, cycles, phase and electrical requirements
for project.
1. “Cord and Plug”: Means to provide sufficient length
(from fixture to receptacle) of insulated cord with po-
larized cap of sufficient size and capacity to carry con-
nected load. Provide plug to match receptacles. Unless
specified otherwise, cord is clear and 2.5 m (8 ft.) long.
2. Lamp Shades: Custom design or as specified by
Designer and accepted by Owner and RCH. Provide
fabric lamp shades.
3. Harps / Horizontal Spokes: Polished brass or nickel,
except in ocean-side project locations provide custom
color, powder coat finish.

4. Floor Lamps: Provide weighted bases for stability on plush

carpeting with minimum 4.5 kg (10 lb.) load. Cover weight
with felt to prevent corrosion damage to carpets.
5. Lamp Control: Dimmer switches are preferred. Locate in
line dimmer switch for lamp control or at socket cup. In
ocean-side project locations, provide sockets with custom
color, powder coat finish.
6. Light Bulb Types: Coordinate light bulb types with RCH.
a. When CFLs are used, provide 2700K covered bulbs.
Provide 3-way (12W/20W/28W) switching, not dim-
mer switch. Minimum 12W for lamp fixtures.
J. Ceiling Mounted, Decorative Light Fixtures and Sconces: Provide
UL listed and approved fixtures.
1. Before ordering fixtures, check required voltages, cycles,
phase and electrical requirements for project. Provide uni-
versal voltage ballast for fluorescent fixtures.
2. Provide and coordinate blocking or support requirements
for anchoring or supporting decorative light fixtures and
sconces.
3. Shades and Fabrics: Custom design as determined by the
Designer and accepted by RCH.
4. Ceiling Fixtures:
a. Trim: Selection by Interior Designer; obtain RCH ac-
ceptance. Acrylic and plastic are not acceptable.
b. Bulbs: Unless otherwise required, where bulbs are
visible, provide fixtures to receive clear blunt flame-
tip bulbs.
c. For decorative light fixtures mounted over display
tables, provide LED or MR16 series spotlights.
5. Use minimum 7W CFL for wall sconces.
K. Ceiling Mounted and Suspended Decorative Light Fixtures: Provide
UL approved fixtures completely pre-wired, frame assembled
and lamped.
1. Fixture Size: 1830 mm (72 inch) maximum width, unless
approved by RCH.
2. Trim: Highest quality optically clear cut prisms / glass,
unless otherwise specified and approved. Acrylic and plas-
tic not acceptable.
3. Base Sockets: Provide candelabra off-white sockets, plain
candle covers, unless otherwise accepted by RCH.
4. Color and Finish: Within the same room provide fixtures
of same color and finish.
5. Chain and Canopies: Include with decorative light fixtures
of same material and finish as fixture body.
6. Bases: Provide decorative fixture bases.

7. Mounting Assemblage: Include with fixtures delivered

to project site. Select decorative light fixtures designed
substantially so they may be raised and lowered by
electric winch (electrical quick disconnect) and stain-
less steel support cable.
8. Shades and Fabrics: Custom design as determined by
the Designer and accepted by RCH.
9. Light Bulbs: Unless otherwise required, provide with
each fixture, clear blunt flame-tip in candelabra base.
10. For decorative light fixtures mounted over display tables,
provide LED or MR16 series spotlights in fixture bottom.
11. Delivered / Installed Fixtures: Match applicable ap-
proved samples and shop drawings. Ship as completely
assembled as possible with final assembly on site. Provide
assembly instructions.
12. Replacement Parts: Provide readily available replace-
ment parts from selected source of fixtures. See attic
stock, Module <GR4>.
13. Technical Representative: Provide qualified manufac-
turer’s representative to project site to advise installer of
proper fixture installation and dressing procedures.
L. Picture Lights: Provide UL approved fixtures completely
pre-wired and lamped.
1. Picture Lights - Optional: Use sparingly and dimension
locations carefully. Illuminate framed artwork, such as
oil paintings, using “picture light” fixtures or recessed
art lighting fixtures selected by Interior Designer.
a. Fixture Finish: As selected by Interior Designer.
b. Fixture Size: Determine by artwork or framed
art dimensions such as an illuminated oil paint-
ing. The following are required sizes:
• 1 light: 8 inch
• 2 lights: 14 inch
M. Antiques, Artwork and Accessories:
1. Public spaces require original works of art that are ap-
propriate for both the concept and the quality of other
Ritz-Carlton Hotels. Provide a very high caliber of art
work in a variety of media. Explore the use of local
artists. If work is not available that meets the quality
criteria, select appropriate pieces from other sources.
Submit all work to RCH for acceptance. Provide the
following:
a. Frame Corners: Miter cut, glue and join with
V-nail.

b. Security Hardware: Provide artwork with 3 point

security hardware for secure mounting.
c. Quality: Archival quality for all components,
framing, matting, backing, etc.
d. Glass: Provide anti-reflective glass or plexiglas.
Non-glare glass that is frosted is not permitted.
2. Provide sufficient quantity and size for a sophisticated
residential feel.
3. Provide art work in each public toilet stall unless a
decorative wall treament is designed.
4. Select accessories and artifacts with originality, sense
of place and security in mind. Do not use small or frag-
ile items.
N. Pianos: Provide in Public Areas, Ritz-Carlton Suites, one
in Ballroom and one for Meeting Rooms. Confirm quantity
with RCH Operations.
1. Manufacturer: Produced by Baldwin Pianos or equal.
2. Finishes: Mahogany or satin black pianos and benches.
Provide padded top seat for bench.
3. Size: Determined by Designer for room location and
approved by RCH.
4. Installation: Place pianos after the public areas have
been installed and the day before hotel operations will
use, or as specified by RCH.
a. Tune and test pianos before installation on project
site.
b. Transport pianos to project site by crews experi-
enced in piano transportation and installation.
GR4.3 Outdoor & Pool Furniture

A. General: This section includes the FF&E criteria for outdoor
and pool furniture in The Ritz-Carlton Hotels & Resorts.
Obtain RCH acceptance for product, material and fabrica-
tion exceptions.
Depending on the Program, seating may be a combination
of lounge and dining seating. Design for compfort in warm
climates and for withstanding all weather conditions.
B. Aluminum Frames:
1. Frames: Extruded aluminum welded frames, 360 degree
radius heli-arc welds (not riveted)
2. Weld Joints: Smooth and free of burrs
3. Screws: Buried in the frame
4. Finish: Electrostatic powder coated
5. Plastic Glides: On leg bottoms

C. Wood Frames: Provide mahogany or other hardwood suit-

able for outdoors. Avoid teak for maintenance reasons.
D. Seat & Back:
1. Rattan or Wicker: Provide synthetic woven HDPE (pre-
ferred over PVS). Provide UV protection and warrant
against fading for 5 years.
2. Slings: Field replaceable; firmly attach in channels and
warrant against tearing.
3. Cushions: No concealed zippers. Attach to frames with
loops; 100% solution dyed acrylic fabric, UV resistant,
mildew resistant, exceed 50,000 double rubs (Sunbrella
or equal) and construct for outdoors.
a. Filling is quick-drain fiberfill or reticulated foam
construction for outdoors.
b. Provide drain holes if required.
c. Removable. Allow for cushion storage in inclement
weather.
E. Tables:
1. Provide at heights to accommodate the food service an-
ticipated; coordinate with Food and Beverage consultant
and RCH operations.
2. Table Tops: Provide acrylic or fiberglass at pools areas.
Fully rimmed tempered glass is appropriate in other
applications.
3. Outdoor Dining Tables: Provide umbrella holes with
grommets in table center to support umbrellas.
F. Chaise Lounges:
1. Arms: When required, brace with vertical supports. To
avoid hand and finger pinching, locate the adjustable
latching bar, that positions the chaise back, away from
the frame edge.
2. Weighted: Design for wind conditions to minimize
roll-over.
G. Chair Back Legs: Provide fillers to minimize tipping.
H. Umbrellas:
1. Fabric: 100% solution dyed acrylic, Sunbrella or equal,
8 ounce per square yard.
2. Base: Provide weighted concrete filled aluminum bases,
as heavy as necessary to support umbrella and to prevent
roll-over (minimum 90 pounds). Include wheels.
3. Provide a wind vent, a minimum of 1 1/2” diameter
aluminum pole with crank opening with closing brake
assist and auto tilt mechanism.

GR4.4 Boardrooms & Meeting Rooms

1. Executive Style Arm Chairs: Provide ergonomic chairs
in leather with a 5 prong spider base, swivel / tilt &
height adjustment mechanics and dual wheel casters.
2. Chairs: Provide stackable chairs in Meeting Rooms
with ganging devices; MTS Elan BE-155A or equal.
3. F&B Service: Provide console, or built-in millwork for
food and beverage service.
4. Televisions: Mount TVs on a millwork panel, finished
recessed application, or within enclosed cabinet mill-
work. Where TVs are wall mounted, locate the installa-
tion to prevent sound transmission outside of the room.
5. Connectivity: <13> Provide in Boardroom to accom-
modate TV, A/V, data, PI, phone and computer cables
and wires.
6. Wires: Conceal from view.
7. Lighting: Provide a combination of architectural and
decorative lighting fixtures.
8. Controls: Locate light dimming control and media
audio panels easily accessible to guests.
GR4.5 Administrative / Staff Furnishings

A. Office Furniture: Typically, provide office furniture for the
three project levels described below.
B. Level 1 - Requirements: Select furniture style that is consis-
tent with hotel interior design, walnut solids and matching
veneer. Provide file drawers that operate on full extension,
progressive metal glides equipped for hanging files. Provide
center and box drawers that operate on metal guides with
nylon rollers. Provide drawer locks for desks, credenzas
and files.
1. Level 1 Furniture: Provide in the following Executive
Offices:
a. General Manager's Office Specified by Interior
Designer.
b. Food & Beverage Executive
c. Assistant F&B Executive
d. Rooms Executive
e. Assistant Room Executive
f. Administrative Assistants in the Executive Office
g. Guest waiting in the Executive Office
h. Director of Sales and Marketing
i. Executive Chef
j. Director of Human Resources
k. Director of Quality

l. Controller
m. Director of Engineering
2. Level 1 Casegoods: Include the following pieces:
a. Desk
b. Return for Administrative Assistants
c. Credenza for Executives
d. Clerical chair for Administrative Assistants
e. Swivel tilt chair for Executives
f. Lamp table for Executives
g. Lamp for Executives
h. Two armed chairs for Executives
i. Two framed prints
3. General Manager’s Office: Provide the following ad-
ditional pieces:
a. Sofa
b. One additional lamp tables
c. Two high-grade lamps
d. Swivel tilt chair with upgraded upholstery
e. Three framed prints
4. Executive Office Area Reception: Include the follow-
ing pieces:
a. Desk
c. Sofa
d. Two lamp tables
e. One coffee table
f. Four armed chairs
g. Two lamps
h. Four framed prints
C. Level 2 - Requirements: Walnut and walnut veneer with
matching high-pressure laminate tops, finished in mahog-
any. Provide box drawers in desks and returns equipped
with drawer glides that operate on ball bearing suspen-
sion. Equip desk, credenzas and lateral files with locking
devices.
1. Level 2 Furniture: Provide for the following offices:
a. Sales Directors and Managers
b. Catering Directors and Managers
c. Public Relations Manager
d. Market Research, Guest History
e. Other Staff & Administrative Assistants in the
General Offices
f. General Cashier, Credit Manager, Paymaster
g. Human Resources Offices
h. Engineering Offices
i. Chef's Office

2. Level 2 Casegoods: Provide the following pieces:

a. Desk
c. Credenza for Managers
d. Swivel tilt chair for Managers
e. Clerical chair for Administrative Assistants
f. Lamp table for Managers
g. Two armed chairs for Managers
h. Lamp for Managers
i. One framed print for each office
D. Level 3 - Requirements: Walnut and walnut veneer with
high-pressure laminate tops finished in walnut. Provide
box drawers that operate on metal guides with nylon rollers
and file drawers that operate on full extension, progres-
sive metal guides. Equip drawers, credenzas and files with
locks.
1. Level 3 Furniture: Provide in the following areas:
a. Executive Housekeepers Office
b. Director of Laundry and Valet
c. Purchasing and Receiving
d. Security
e. Front Desk workroom and offices
f. Accounting Clerks, System Manager
g. Reservation Offices, PABX
h. Restaurant, Retail, Fitness & Banqueting
Managers
2. Level 3 Casegoods: Provide the following (spaces may
be work cubicles – confirm with RCH) pieces:
a. Desk for Manager
c. Credenza for Manager
d. Tilt Swivel Chair for Manager
e. Clerical Chair for other positions
f. Two Armed Chairs for Manager
g. One Framed Print for Manager
E. Miscellaneous Office Furniture and Finishes:
1. Storage File Types: RCH will determine space and
quantity for vertical and horizontal files. Provide in
off-white color.
2. Upholstery Colors: Obtain RCH acceptance before
seating orders are placed.
3. Artwork / Lamps: Style to complement standard of
artwork and lamps established for guestrooms and cor-
ridors <7A> <7B>.
4. Office Finishes: See Modules <8A> <16D> for wallcov-
ering and carpet.

F. Administrative Office Equipment: As determined by RCH.

During the Design Development Phase through the
Construction Phase RCH will develop and provide equip-
ment lists.
G. Employee Cafeteria & Training Area: Provide, design and fur-
nish tables, chairs and furniture used employees under the
FF&E budget.
H. Kitchen Equipment: See Module <10> for design criteria
and equipment list and Module <GR> for budgeting, pro-
curement and installation.
I. Laundry / Valet Equipment: See Module <11A> for design
criteria and typical laundry facility equipment list and
Module <GR> for budgeting, procurement and installation.
GR4.6 Guestroom & Guestroom Corridor Furnishings

A. General: See Module <7> for each of the following items
and Categories of FF&E applicable to guestrooms and
suites. The General Requirements for FF&E, stated herein
before apply to this Section for Guestroom Furnishings
in addition to the following and referenced Module <7>
requirements.
B. Carpeting:
1. Carpet & Pad: <7A>.
2. Carpet & Pad for Guestroom Area Corridors: <7B>.
C. Vinyl and Fabric Wallcoverings and Adhesives:
1. Guestrooms and Suites: <7A>.
2. Guestroom Building Corridors: See Module <7B>.
D. Bedding and Frames: <7A> Includes the following FF&E
items:
1. Bedset
2. Metal Frame with Glides
3. Headboard Brackets
4. Mattress and Innerspring Unit
5. Upholstery and Bedding
6. Dust Cover / Corner Guards.
E. Casegoods: <7A>.
F. Seating: <7A>.
G. Drapery: <7A>.
H. Bedspreads and Dust Ruffles: <7A>.
I. Lamps and Lighting Fixtures: <7A> <7B>.
J. Artwork - Prints: <7A> <7B>.

K. Equipment: <7A> Includes the following equipment items:

1. Televisions (TV)
2. Honor Bar Refrigerator
3. Appliances
4. Lighted Vanity Makeup Mirror
GR4.7 Operating Supplies and Equipment

A. Budget Estimate: RCH provides a budget estimate for ini-
tial project estimating. A preliminary list of the Operating
Supplies and Equipment, OS&E is provided in the Design
Development Phase and a complete listing upon comple-
tion of the Contract Document Phase.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
GR5
Typical Finish Schedule
GR5 - Typical Finish Schedule THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
GR5.1 Statement of Purpose 1
GR5.2 Offices <8> 3
GR5.3 Employee Facilities <8> Maintenance, Mechanical & 3
GR5.4 Electrical Rooms <9> 3
GR5.5 Human Resources <8> Dock / Receiving & Purchasing <9> 4
GR5.6 Loss Prevention <16> 4
GR5.7 Food Service Areas <10> 5
GR5.8 Housekeeping / Laundry <11> 6
GR5.9 Circulation - Miscellaneous 6

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Finish Schedule | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Typical Finish Schedule - GR5
Typical Finish Schedule

GR4.1 Statement of Purpose
A. Purpose: The purpose of this Back of House (BOH) Finish
Schedule is to describe the level and type of finishes gener-
ally found by area in a Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH).
a. While this typical finish schedule can be used to
gain an understanding of a Ritz-Carlton Hotel level
of finish, it can also be used to obtain initial pric-
ing and budgeting parameters. However, the level of
finish for a specific RCH will vary.
b. Front of House: See the following Modules for
Public Space finishes:
• Module GR4 - Public Areas, Function Areas
• Module 1 - Exterior Hardscape
• Module 7 - Guestrooms and Corridors, Club
Lounge
B. General Notes:
1. Coefficient of friction .06 wet / dry required minimum
for all hard surface floor finishes.
2. Comply with governing codes.
3. Comply with the Department of Justice (DOJ) of the
United States requirements for persons with disabilities.
4. Provide appropriate finishes for regional locations and
conditions.
5. Verify required finishes by code.
6. Provide acoustical underlayment for hard surface floors
above guestrooms and as required.
7. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Paint or epoxy seal.
8. Exposed Concrete Floors: Paint or seal.
9. Exposed Structure: Paint areas exposed to view.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Finish Schedule 1
C. Abbreviations:
ACT Acoustical Ceiling Tile
AFF Above Finished Floor
BE Building Exterior
BOH Back Of House
CMU Concrete Masonry Unit
CONC Concrete
CPT Carpet
CT Ceramic Tile
EP Epoxy Paint
ES Exposed Structure
GYP. BD Gypsum Board
GT Glass Tile
LAM Laminate
MF Monolithic Flooring
MIN Minimum
O.C On Center
PL Plaster
PLAM Plastic Laminate
PT Paint
P. TILE Porcelain Tile
QT Quarry Tile
RF Resilient Flooring
SS Stainless Steel
ST Stone (marble, granite)
VCT Vinyl Composition Tile
VB Vinyl Base
VF Vinyl Fencing
VIP Elastomeric Waterproofing
VWC Vinyl Wall Covering
WC Wall Covering
2 Finish Schedule | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
GR4.2 Offices <8>
Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Ceiling Height Notes
Executive Offices CPT VB GB / VWC 2 x 2 ft. ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.)

General Offices CPT VB GB / VWC ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.)
Accounting Offices CPT VB GB / VWC ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.)
Counting Room CPT VB GB / VWC ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.)
Raised Computer GB / PT or ¾ inch
Computer Room VB ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 1
floor VCT / CPT Plywood / PT
GB / PT or ¾ inch
Telephone Equipment Room VCT VB ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 1, 2
Plywood / PT
GB / PT or ¾ inch
Cable Head-In Equipment Room VCT VB ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 1, 2
Plywood / PT
Storage VCT VB GB / PT ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.)
Notes:
1. Computer Room Flooring: Provide anti-static carpet or VCT floor tile.
2. Telephone Equipment Room: Provide phone backboard painted plywood panel with fire retardant paint anchored to wall.
GR4.3 Employee Facilities <8> Maintenance, Mechanical &

Electrical Rooms <9>

Employee Facilities
Men’s Locker Room P. TILE CT GB / EP ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 3, 4, 6
Women’s Locker Room P. TILE CT GB / EP ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 3, 5, 6
Employee Dining VCT VB GB / VWC ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2
Training Room VCT VB GB / VWC ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3

Maintenance
Director (Office) VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3
Assistant (Office) VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3
General PT --- CMU / EP ES /PT ---
Mechanical & Electrical Rooms PT --- CMU / EP ES / PT ---
Notes: Maintenance, Employee Facilities, Mechanical & Electrical

1. Number not used.
2. Washable Ceilings: Cerma-Guard 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 inch) vinyl coated lay in, washable ceiling tiles or vinyl coated gypsum board.
3. Fissured Ceiling Tiles: 600 x 1200 mm (24 x 48 inch) lay-in tiles in suspended ceiling system.
4. Tile Walls – Men: Provide ceramic wall wainscot at toilet stall and full height at urinals and shower stalls.
5. Tile Walls – Women: Ceramic wall tile wainscot at toilet stall and full height at shower stalls.
6. Toilet Partitions: Enameled metal or solid surface, floor mounted.
GR4.4 Human Resources <8> Dock / Receiving & Purchasing <9>
Loss Prevention <16>
Human Resources Offices CPT VB GB / VWC ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 4

Waiting VCT VB GB / VWC ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 4
Storage VCT VB GB / PT ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 4
Truck Bay Compactor CONC - CMU / EP ES / PT 4600 mm (15 ft.) 2
Receiving Dock CONC - CMU / EP ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2

Breakdown Area
VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 5, 6
Temporary Storage
Refrigerated Garbage QT QT CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2, 3
Can Wash QT QT CMU / EP ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.)
Dry Trash CONC CONC CMU / EP ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2
Receiving & Purchasing Offices VCT VB GB / EP ACT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 4
Security Office VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4

Fire Control Room <2> VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4
Notes:
1. Number not used.
2. Quarry Tile Floor: Recess floor slab 75 mm (3 inch) to receive mortar bed setting.
3. Washable Ceilings: Cerma-Guard 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 inch) vinyl coated lay in,
washable ceiling tiles or vinyl coated gypsum board.
4. Fissured Ceiling Tiles: 600 x 1200 mm (24 x 48 inch) lay-in tiles in suspended ceiling
system.
5. Recess Floor Slab: Recess slab 100 mm (4 inch) at prefabricated cooler / freezer floors.
Provide insulation under freezers.
6. Walls Above Freezers / Coolers: Build walls above prefabricated units to underside of
roof structure.
GR4.5 Food Service Areas <10>
Kitchen QT QT CT ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4, 5, 8, 9, 11
Butcher Shop Fish Prep QT QT CT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4, 7, 9, 11

ACT
Bakery Garde Manger QT / MF QT / MF CT SAT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4, 7, 9, 11
Room Service QT / MF QT / MF Epoxy Paint ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4, 7, 9
Refrigerated Storage
Freezer Storage QT QT ----- ES / PT 2450 mm (8 ft.) 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
Wine / Beer Cooler
Liquor Storage
VCT VB CMU / Epoxy Paint ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.)
Honor Bar Storage
Dry Storage
Soda Room VCT VB Epoxy Paint ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 9
Chef’s Office
Silver Storage /
VCT VB CMU / Epoxy Paint ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 10
Burnishing
China / Glass Storage VCT VB CMU / Epoxy Paint ES / PT 3050 mm (10 ft.)
Pantries QT or MF QT or MF CT ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 4
Service Corridors Sealed concrete CMU / Epoxy Paint ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 12
Notes:
1. Depressed Slab: Recess floor slab 100 mm (4 inch) to receive prefabricated coolers and freezers.
2. Prefabricated Freezer: See kitchen drawings.
3. Prefabricated Cooler: See kitchen drawings.
4. Washable Ceilings: Cerma-Guard 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 inch) vinyl coated lay in, washable ceiling tiles or vinyl coated gypsum board.
5. Exhaust Hoods: 600 x 1200 mm (2 x 4 ft.) fire rated panels 1200 mm (4 ft.) wide around hoods.
6. Walls Above Freezers / Coolers: Build walls above prefabricated units to underside of roof structure.
7. Floor Insulation: Provide insulation below freezer units.
8. Quarry Tile Floor: Recess slab to receive mudset quarry tile floors,
9. Walls: Where food service walls adjoin dining rooms, function or other public spaces, provide CMU walls. Otherwise walls may be ce-
mentitious gypsum board.
10. Silver Burnishing: Locate in area where noise and vibration will not disturb persons in public spaces and F&B facilities.
11. Tile Walls: Coordinate wall tile height with Kitchen Equipment Consultant and local Health Authorities, minimum 1800 mm (6’-0”)
high. FR-FRFP may be used in areas with no guest view.
12. Stainless steel hat channel bumper rails at 900 mm (36 inch) and 200 mm (8 ft.) AFF with diamond plate aluminum between. Bubble
mirrors in ceiling panels at each corridor intersection.
GR4.6 Housekeeping / Laundry <11>

Foot
Room Name Floor Base Walls Ceiling Ceiling Height
Notes
Housekeeping VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Director (Office) VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Assistants (Office) VCT VP EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Housekeepers Stock Room VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Secured Storage VCT VB CMU / EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3

Uniform Issue VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2, 4
Sewing Dressing Rooms VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Lost & Found VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Laundry Area
VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2, 4
Valet (Dry Cleaning) Area
Sorting VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 2, 4
Detergent Storage VCT VB EP ACT 3050 mm (10 ft.) 3, 4
Laundry Mechanical
VCT --- EP ES/ PT --- 4
Equipment Room
Notes: Housekeeping / Laundry:

1. Number not used.
2. Washable Ceilings: Cerma-Guard 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 inch) vinyl coated lay in,
washable ceiling tiles or vinyl coated gypsum board.
system.
4. Walls: Provide CMU for perimeter walls of Housekeeping and Laundry. Otherwise walls
may be cementitious gypsum board in wet areas.
5. Other Partitions: Those away from wet areas may be standard gypsum board.
GR4.7 Circulation - Miscellaneous

Public CPT / ST WD / ST WP / FWC GB / WD Varies 1, 2
Back of House VCT / CPT VB GB / PT SAT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 3, 4, 5

Stairs (Back of House) CONC or Steel --- CONC / GB / PT CONC / PT --- 6
Janitor Closet VCT / QT VB GB / PT GB / PT 2750 mm (9 ft.)
Flower Shop VCT VB GB / PT GB / PT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 3
Nurse / First Aid VCT VB GB / PT GB / PT 2750 mm (9 ft.) 3
Footnotes: Circulation - Miscellaneous:

1. Ceiling Molding: Apply at ceiling.
2. Ceilings: Provide coffered ceilings.
system.
4. Wall Protection: 50 x 150 mm (2 x 6 inch) rub rail at base and approximately 1.2 m (4
feet) above floor finish in BOH corridors. See Module <8B>
5. Corridors Walls: Primary back of house corridors (behind public spaces) is CMU. Sec-
ondary, minor access corridors may be gypsum board / stud wall construction.
6. Exposed Surfaces: Paint.
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
1
Site / Building Exteriors
1 - Site / Building Exteriors THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
1.1 Site Design - General Requirements 1
1.2 Site Concepts 1
1.3 Design Team <GR1> 2
1.4 Landscape Schedule <GR1> 4
1.5 Site Utilities, Drainage and Soil Treatment 5
1.6 Traffic Circulation - Planning 6
1.7 Traffic Control - Regulation Signage 7
1.8 Paving and Hardscape 7
1.9 Main Site Entrance 10
1.10 Service / Delivery Entrance 11
1.11 Parking Areas 12
1.12 Structured Deck Parking 12
1.13 Landscaping 13
1.14 Irrigation 15
1.15 Water Features, Fountains and Site Amenities 16
1.16 Site and Landscape Lighting 17
1.17 Building Structure 20
1.18 Building and Fire Codes <14> 20
1.19 Building Area Takeoffs 20
1.20 Building Exteriors and Features 21
1.21 Hotel Entrance - Porte Cochere 24
1.22 Exterior Signage and Awnings 27
1.23 Exterior Building Lighting 27
1.24 System Features 28
Module Organization
LQFOXGHVUHODWHGLQIRUPDWLRQ Revised: January 2013
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Site / Exterior | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Site / Building Exteriors - 1
Site / Building Exteriors

1.1 Site Design - General Requirements
A. Site Planning: On projects where a Ritz-Carlton Hotel
(RCH) is co-located with other Ritz-Carlton Brands,
develop design solutions that provide a selective level of
connectivity and separation as is appropriate between
buildings for public and service circulation. Consult with
RCH to establish priorities.
B. Residential: When a hotel is co-located with a residential
use, facilities and operations are segregated by use. In order
to address the differing expectations of the “transient” hotel
guest amid residents, the following are provided separately
or managed to minimize conflicts:
• Site Access
• Parking
• Building Entry
• Elevators
• Management and Front-of-House Staff
• Utilities
• Services
1.2 Site Concepts
A. Exterior: Ritz-Carlton hotels are located in prestigious
surroundings in major cities and select resort destinations.
1. Urban Site: Generally, an urban site is a high-density
property and has limited exterior environment
opportunities where outdoor guest amenities can
be developed. Typically, design focus is on the hotel
facility such as the entrance, motor court area of entry
driveway and entry canopy, planters, limited site areas
such as the roof area and courtyard, etc. Also, see
Module <4> - Recreation Facilities.
2. Resort Sites: Generally, these sites are low-density
and inspire more opportunities for site development.
Amenities typically include hotel entry, driveway,
courtyard and garden areas, terraces, walkways,
screen and planter walls, rails, fences, retaining walls
and revetments, gazebos, plantings, lighting, irrigation
systems, water features, ponds, fountains, etc. See
Module <4> - Recreation, for swimming and spa pools,
beach interface, pool bars, etc.
3. Entrances: Provide for separate access for hotel,
function area <6>, and service circulation to avoid
conflicts.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Site / Exterior 1
B. Exterior Design: A project site concept is created to define

the approach for both the landscape design and the interior
planting.
The landscape design is coordinated with the interior planting
to reflect a contemporary, tenacious and sophisticated green
environment that complements the architecture.
1. Exterior Environment: This term, often referred to as
“landscape / hardscape”, is defined as site amenities
and improvements such as plantings, structures and
finish site grading developed for the hotel.
2. Provide an exterior environment to reflect the project’s Example: Resort Site
regional context showing consideration and sensitivity
to indigenous plant and hardscape materials.
3. Design with special attention to flowering shrubs,
groundcover and vines. A requisite standard landscape
feature planting element for RCH properties is the
design of seasonal flowerbeds for rotation several times
a year to provide flower bloom throughout the year.
4. Color foliage plants are not considered a substitute for
flowering plants. If used in the design, color foliage
plants should receive consideration separate and apart
from flowering plants.
C. Landscape Product: The finished landscaping product and
the overall image and atmosphere of the exterior property
environment are critical to the hotel opening schedule and
operation.
Incorporate and use the types and species of plant materials
recommended by the landscape architect and the design
team with consideration for plant quality, size, spacing and
quantity to maximize the color and visual impact of plant
foliage to meet the Owner’s and the RCH standards.
1.3 Design Team <GR1>
A. Design Team: Include the landscape architect, along with
the architect and the interior designer, as key members of
the design team.
1. Develop the exterior environment conceptual design
concurrent with the project conceptual plan.
2. The team process allows for site design considerations
and cost estimate formulations to begin at the earliest
stage of planning.
B. Landscape Architect: The exterior environment design
is developed by a professional landscape architect who
prepares design and construction documents.
2 Site / Exterior | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
1. The landscape design professional complies with

governing laws, codes, accessibility regulations of
public authorities applicable to the Project design and
the landscape construction.
2. Provide the Owner and RCH with projected landscape
construction cost estimates for each phase of the design
process.
C. Engineering Review / Coordination: The civil, mechanical and
electrical engineers review and identify to the landscape
architect the design requirements from governing codes,
utilities and agencies that affect the exterior environment
design.
1. Engineers review, coordinate and integrate into their
respective documents, the engineering design for the
exterior based on the design direction provided by the
landscape architect.
2. Engineering disciplines are responsible for the design
of service and connection sizes and to certify that their
portion of the construction documents meet governing
regulations and codes.
3. Engineers confirm that the design meets the lighting
levels required in this document and applicable codes.
D. Presentation: Prepare a presentation package consisting
of an illustrative landscape / hardscape plan in full color,
consistent with the project design theme and Owner’s and
RCH’s project objectives.
1. On a general concept plan, show and delineate the
motor court area, hotel entry, swimming pool(s),
whirlpool(s), beach interface, courtyards and garden
areas, walkways, terraces, gazebos, planters, landscape
plantings and lighting, water features, ponds and
fountains, other site amenities, etc.
2. See Module <4> - Recreation for outdoor recreation
amenities.
E. Project Cost: Present the final preliminary pricing for
landscape, hardscape, water features, fountains, pools,
irrigation, landscape lighting, other site amenities and
improvements from drawings and specification documents
at the Design Development (DD) Phase.
F. DD Phase Documents:
1. Provide sufficient construction detail and labeling to
clearly communicate the landscape / hardscape intent,
accuracy of scale and to provide credible pricing for
Owner and RCH acceptance prior to commencement
of construction documents.
2. See Module <GR1> - General Requirements for drawing

requirements.
G. Landscape Maintenance: The landscape architect reviews the
qualifications of local landscape maintenance companies
and submits written qualification recommendations
regarding landscape maintenance service and replacement
of property nursery stock. This recommendation is intended
to advise the Owner of the need for an on-site maintenance
facility (see below) if not previously requested by the RCH.
1.4 Landscape Schedule <GR1>
A. General Contractor’s (GC) Schedule: Provide a detailed
landscape, hardscape, irrigation and lighting schedule for
review and obtain acceptance from the Owner and RCH to
assure adequate coordination of site construction tasks and
landscape installation prior to planting of turf grass.
1. Turf Grass Schedule: Establish turf grass prior to hotel
opening. Schedule construction tasks to accommodate
the time required for turf grass establishment.
2. Turf Planting Time: Solid sod turf planting requires
30 days minimum to establish. To establish sprig or
seed planting, provide 84 days (12 weeks) minimum in
optimum climate growing conditions.
3. Water Supply: Make available to the landscape
contractor the main water supply for the project to
permit irrigation system main tie-in at the time of
commencement of landscape activities.
B. Contractor Turnover: The design team develops and
prepares a site development sequence plan to illustrate
the development from nursery organization to final
landscaping.
1. The GC incorporates the sequence plan into the
construction schedule for site turnover and landscaping.
2. Obtain the Owner and RCH’s acceptance for the
landscape installation sequence and site inspection
prior to commencement of landscaping.
3. Make provision for tree watering where trees are
installed early or existing landscaped areas are to be
maintained through construction.
1.5 Site Utilities, Drainage and Soil Treatment

A. Utility Infrastructure: <15> Design and provide underground
utilities and piping.
1. Exercise sensitivity to site aesthetics, select location of
surface devices and obtain RCH acceptance for drain
inlets, electric load centers and transformers, backflow
devices, utility vaults, cleanouts, water meters, etc.
2. Locate utility valves and accessories to prevent
disruption of site aesthetics. Provide finish surfaces
for utility accessories equal to, and compatible with,
surrounding hardscape finishes.
3. Install utilities underground. Relocate existing
overhead utilities underground with the intent of
removing negative effects on the project.
4. Comply with requirements of the utility district
or governing authority, subject to obtaining RCH
acceptance.
B. Utility Metering: Coordinate with Module <15>.
C. Utility Materials: <15B> Conceal utility devices and vaults,
service areas and utility equipment from guests and public
view.
1. Electrical Load Centers / Transformers: Provide in
service areas.
2. Water Meter / Backflow Prevention: Provide devices in
vaults and finish surfaces compatible with surrounding
hardscape.
3. Submeter: Provide with backflow preventer for
metering irrigation water consumption and pool make-
up water.
D. Site Drainage: Establish final grades for exterior areas.
Design site infrastructure and drainage to comply with
codes and drainage criteria for 100 year flood protection.
1. Provide for storm water runoff under normal rainfall
conditions and prohibit pockets of standing water in
paved surfaces, planted landscape and lawn areas.
2. Include subsurface drainage in areas of poor internal
soil moisture percolation.
3. For over-structure planters, planting beds and tight
soil areas where poor internal water percolation
exists, provide subsurface drainage and connect to site
drainage system.
4. Slopes:
• Earth slopes not to exceed 2:1.
• Seeded grassed sloped areas not to exceed 3:1.
• Sodded grassed slopes not to exceed 4:1.

• Fill slopes not to exceed 3:1 (unless compacted).
5. Retaining Walls: Generally, minimize the use and
quantity of retaining walls in the site design.
6. Guardrail: In areas accessible to public, provide 1.07 m
(42 inch) high, architecturally designed guardrails,
concealed by landscaping.
a. Space between railing elements to restrict a 10 cm
(4 inch) ball.
b. Maximum between the bottom horizontal bar and
structure 5 cm (2 inch).
c. Comply with governing codes.
d. A horizontal rail design is not acceptable as it may
allow children to climb over.
E. Soil Treatment / Pest Control: Provide soil treatment to
prevent infestation of termite and subterranean pests.
1. Certify that products comply with U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) regulations for termiticides.
2. Do not use fuel oil as dilutent.
1.6 Traffic Circulation - Planning
A. General: When planning for traffic circulation, design the
site to complement either an urban or resort hotel.
B. Driveways: Provide driveways to the hotel and other major
amenities.
1. Curbs, Curb Cuts and Ramps: Design from parking
areas to meet guidelines of ADA and applicable
governing codes.
2. Bollards: Provide bollards or similar protection devices
around columns, planters, signs, trash enclosures,
utility mains and other features vulnerable to damage
by vehicular traffic.
3. Snow Storage: In areas of high snowfall, carefully analyze
parking layout to ensure proper snow storage in parking lot
if impossible or impractical to completely remove snow.
C. Traffic Circulation Features: Provide 2-way circulation with
90° parking in the following widths:
1. Curb-to-Curb: 19.5 m (64 ft.); subject to utilization of
front overhang design.
2. Wall-to-Wall: 19.5 m (64 ft.).
3. Two-Way Drives: Minimum of 7 m (24 ft.) wide.
4. Single-Lane Driveways (exclusive of parking):
Minimum width of 3.6 m (12 ft.).
1.7 Traffic Control - Regulation Signage

Examples: Signs that comply A. Traffic Control on Site: Provide normal traffic control signage
with MUTCD to avoid electronic signaling devices.
1. Find and use applicable local and regional regulations.
Verify requirements with fire department having
jurisdiction and other governing officials.
2. Indicate traffic direction, parking restrictions, roadway
intersection regulations and speed and other limitations.
3. Altering standard symbols, conventional symbol size,
or conventional regulatory colors and configurations is
not recommended.
4. If allowed by governing authority, custom design
“standard” type traffic control signage consistent with
the image of the project. Typically, provide raised letters
(such as carved letters) on RCH selected and approved
background (generally, solid wood for resorts) signage
material.
B. Symbol Standards: Use symbol standards generally
prescribed by the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (MUTCD) of the Federal Department of
Transportation (FDOT).
1. Examples of sign panels that comply with MUTCD:
See examples on this page.
Examples: International Signs 2. Examples of International sign panels: See examples
on this page.
C. Exterior Vehicular and Directional Signs: Coordinate vehicle
signage with pedestrian and the overall project signage
planning requirements in Module <GR>.
1. Minimize information items; limit to three items
whenever possible.
2. Provide decision point and destination point items only.
3. Scale / distance for vehicular use.
4. Signage at Porte Cochere indicating fire lanes, etc. are
not desired. RCH valet staff will provide direction.
1.8 Paving and Hardscape
A. Finish Surfaces: Design for clean appearance and easy
maintenance and ability to be cleaned (to acceptable limits)
of stains from motor oil, food spillage and other spotting
substances.
B. Submittals: Obtain acceptance from Owner and RCH for
sample colors, materials and finishes:
1. Field Samples: 2 x 2 m (6 x 6 ft.) minimum.
2. Mock-ups: As required by Owner / RCH for project by
project conditions.
3. Concrete Finishes: Exposed aggregate, broom, etc.

4. Paving Patterns: For selected finish materials.
5. Stone: For color, pattern, joints, surface, application, etc.
6. Grout: Colors with sample mock-up.
7. Sealers: For selected finish materials.
C. Paving Materials: Select base materials in compliance with
the approved Soils Report. Provide the following minimum
thickness of finish course materials:
1. Entry (site entry to hotel): Natural stone if length is limited;
size / thickness determined by stone type and setting bed
method. Decorative or exposed aggregate concrete if drive
is extensive.
2. Parking Lots: 6 cm (2 ½ inch) asphalt concrete.
3. Service Drives: 10 cm (4 inch) asphalt concrete.
4. Dock: 13 cm (5 inch) reinforced concrete.
D. Concrete: Natural color, air entrained ready mix, typically with
color admixture and exposed aggregate or broom finish.
E. Stone: Natural, stone materials with grouted joints from 3
mm (⅛ inch) to 10 mm (⅜ inch) wide dependent on material
and paving pattern. Typically, selected to minimize staining.
Provide stone at food services terraces, courtyards, pool and
spa decks <4>, pool bar terrace and entry drive.
F. Stone Curbs: Provide stone curbs to match entry paving from
site entrance to hotel entry.
Along outside edges of entry drive, provide rolled curb with
matching curb / drive finishes.
G. Concrete Curbs: Concrete curbs and gutter with tooled joints as
follows:
1. Integral curb and gutter at paved areas including site
periphery, landscaping, lighting islands and parking.
2. Consider curb designs as dictated by local construction
practices.
3. At parking areas and parking medians, provide with 60 cm
(2 ft.) wide aggregate band to prevent automobile radiators
overhanging plants.
H. Sealers: Provide penetrating type with a chemical composition
that does not change finish surface color, slip resistance or
visual qualities. Natural stone density and degree of porosity
are critical considerations for selection of sealers.
I. Drainage: Slope paving to infall drain structures in center of
paving (unless otherwise dictated by code), not in pedestrian
pathways, and connect to site storm piping. Locate at perimeter
of terrace decks to avoid conflicts with deck furniture.
J. Walkway Designs: Designate pedestrian crosswalks, if

required by code, establish throughout parking areas and
identify accordingly.
1. Sidewalks: 1.5 m (w) (5 ft.) at parking stalls and for
primary circulation routes and 1.2 m (w) (4 ft.) minimum
elsewhere and as dictated by governing codes.
2. Accessible Walkways: At ramps, provide slope and
texture that complies with governing codes / guidelines.
3. Ramps: When changes in elevation are required at
walkways, accommodate by ramps wherever possible.
Design ramps with sufficient shallow slope so those
handrails are not necessary, typically with a slope no
greater than 1:20.
4. Steps: If steps are required, provide a minimum of
three risers, slip resistant nosings and handrails on each
side.
5. Lighting: Pole lights or bollards. See below in this
Module for Lighting Controls.
K. Walkway Materials: Create a hierarchy of walkway paving
finishes that increase in detail and quality near hotel primary
entrance, secondary entrances, hotel exits, recreation areas
and as appropriate for garden areas:
1. Service Areas: Concrete, light broom finish.
2. Parking Areas: Exposed aggregate.
3. Site Circulation: Exposed aggregate and decorative
concrete, masonry paving or stone.
4. Landscape Walkways: Natural stone; exposed aggregate
concrete, etc.
5. Garden / Recreation: Decorative stone.
6. Concrete Finish: Exposed aggregate concrete surface,
integrally mixed color, finish created by surface retardant
or sandblasting and sealed with penetrating sealer.
7. Wood: Do not use protected wood products containing
chemicals, which may irritate skin. When wood
walkways are used, attach with galvanized screws
and install decking perpendicular to walking path to
minimize splintering.
8. Wood Alternative: Review with RCH.
L. Vehicle Driveways: Provide driveways to access the hotel
and other major amenities.
1. Pavement: Medium duty asphalt paving, unless heavy
duty asphalt or concrete is required because of soil
conditions or service delivery demands.
2. Hotel Entrance: See Porte Cochere in this Module.
Provide transition paving and walkway to a roll curb
design beyond covered Porte Cochere.
3. Curbs, Curb Cuts and Ramps: Design from parking

areas to meet guidelines of ADA and applicable
governing codes.
4. Bollards: Design to minimize the need for bollards or
similar protection devices around columns, planters,
signs, trash enclosures, utility mains and other features
vulnerable to damage by vehicular traffic. Comply
with RCH standard design details.
5. Speed Control: Consider vehicle speed control devices
and normal traffic control signage to avoid electronic
signaling devices. Verify requirements with governing
fire department and other officials.
6. Snow Storage: In areas of high snowfall, carefully
analyze parking layout to ensure proper snow storage
in parking lot if impossible or impractical to completely
remove snow.
M. Queuing and Vehicle Holding Areas: Provide adequate queuing
and holding areas at locations such as the Entry Canopy (or
Porte Cochere), Ballrooms, Restaurants, Retail (if in the
Facilities Program), building service elevators and other
concentrated access and loading.
N. Terraces: Design and provide grade and above grade
terraces. Show locations on landscape drawings with
details of paving material and pattern.
O. Pool Decks: See Module <4> Recreation Amenities.
1.9 Main Site Entrance
A. Program: Provide entrance design that complements the
site requirements as described above. Hotel guests, and Example: Main Site Entrance
other non-service visitors will use the main site entrance.
Provide with the following features:
1. Entrance walls with RCH signage <GR> integrated with
the wall design (comply with governing code).
2. Separate ingress and egress lanes with island.
3. An inconspicuous parking space for security vehicle
adjacent to road.
4. Turnaround area for vehicles directed to exit the
property. Locate to avoid passing through security gate
if possible. Also provide a turn back area beyond the
Gatehouse.
5. Queuing space for vehicles within site to prevent traffic
back-up on public street.
6. Place and coordinate site irrigation system to ensure
passing automobiles are not sprayed when entering.
7. Holding areas for plowed snow accumulation away from

normal traffic circulation, in climates where heavy snowfall
occurs.
8. Snow / ice melt system at the entrance drive, in the queuing
lanes (when gatehouse is provided) and adjacent walkways
that are susceptible to snow buildup, ice formation, or
other climate hazards in climates of heavy snowfall. See
requirements for site walkways in this Module.
9. Water feature (if in Facilities Program).
10. Lighting to emphasize entrance wall graphics, landscape
materials, water features and (if included) the Gatehouse.
Avoid illumination into adjacent areas.
B. Site Entrance Gatehouse: In master planned sites (may include
hotel and community facilities), where required or included
in the project Facilities Program, provide a property entrance
gatehouse to control guest ingress and egress to and from the
resort property. In guard area, provide working desk area for
two guards and the following:
• Mount on walls, two surveillance cameras and video
monitors.
• Computer monitor and keyboard
• One telephone with two lines for each guard
• One emergency phone with 60dB “whoop” ring
Example: Site Entrance Gatehouse • Gooseneck microphone with foot pedal
• Storage for supplies and first aid
• Fire control and annunciation panels
1. Administrative desk with one telephone with two lines and
lateral file.
2. If code requires or if a public facility is not in reasonable
proximity to the Gatehouse, provide utilities and fixtures
for unisex toilet.
C. Miscellaneous Traffic Requirements: Coordinate requirements for
fire lanes and hydrants with local code authorities.
1. See above Traffic Control - Regulation Signage for
regulatory signs and graphics in compliance with codes.
2. Submit design to RCH for acceptance and local authorities
(if required) for review and approval.
1.10 Service / Delivery Entrance
A. Program: A separate service entrance is required.
1. Provide dedicated service access to prevent vehicular
conflict with guests.
2. Provide controlled access and egress.
B. Miscellaneous Service Entrance Requirements: Similar to Main
Site Entrance; see above.
1.11 Parking Areas

A. Traffic and Parking Analysis: Obtain Owner’s traffic and
parking analysis for the proposed property and obtain
acceptance from RCH for parking quantities.
1. Define traffic circulation to and around hotel property.
2. Accommodate valet service, cars with personal drivers
and self-parking.
3. Design valet return route to Porte Cochere (or Entry
canopy) for reduced guest waiting.
4. See Porte Cochere for other vehicle access, lane,
driveway requirements, etc.
B. Slopes: 4% maximum; level at accessible parking spaces.
C. Traffic Flow: Two way traffic.
D. Parking Spaces: 90 degree parking for two-way lot traffic.
1. Self-Parking: 2.7 x 5.8 m (9 x 19 ft.) spaces, 7.6 m
(25 ft.) aisles.
2. Accessible Spaces: Provide in self-parking areas
in compliance with governing accessibility codes.
Review current demand and provisions at other hotel
properties and public buildings and provide accessibility
recommendation to the Owner.
3. Valet: 2.7 m (9 ft.) wide, 18.9 m (62 ft.) bays and may be
stacked multi-spaced valet parking. Accessible parking
spaces not required for valet parking.
4. Compact Vehicle Spaces: Generally, not desired.
Review vehicle mix or space reduction with RCH.
E. Lighting: A concept is created with the Lighting Consultant
to define the approach for the landscape lighting design.
Coordinate parking design with lighting and landscape
consultants.
1. Fixtures: 6 m (20 ft.) maximum height and 3.6 m
(12 ft.) maximum height in high profile areas such as
hotel entry; consult RCH for other locations.
2. Parking Lot Fixtures: 100% down-shielded
3. Lighting Levels: See Module <15C> for Electrical
Criteria.
1.12 Structured Deck Parking
A. Parking Bays: 2.6 m (8'-6") wide by 19.5 m (64 ft.) long.
B. Oversize Vehicles: Design structure to accommodate
oversize vehicles. Provide 2.5 m (8'-2") minimum clear
height for van type vehicles.
C. Slope: 12% maximum garage ramps; level at accessible
parking spaces.
D. Security: Provide for security and movement control devices

to include rolling shutters, gates, booths, communications,
guest and valet access devices.
E. Utility Devices: Locate storm drains, hydrants and other
services away from building and pedestrian routes.
F. Lighting: Coordinate with lighting consultant. See lighting
levels in Module <15C>.
1.13 Landscaping
A. Standards for Exterior Environment: The Landscape architect
recommends standards for landscape material selection
and installation.
B. Reviews and Acceptance: Obtain RCH acceptance for the
following:
1. Hardscape design pattern and materials selection
2. Water feature design
3. Recreational facility <4> review and input for
swimming pools, spa pools, tennis court complexes
and golf course development, etc.
4. Theme art selection for fountains and sculpture
5. Interiorscape plans, specifications and material
selections. Coordinate with the interior designer for
selection and placement of interior plants.
C. Soils and Plant Bed Preparation: Landscape architect approves
soils and plant bed soil preparation and installation for
contract compliance.
D. Plant Areas: Provide planting bed and pit excavation and
backfill for trees, shrubs, groundcover and annuals. Clearly
address planting plan details and specifications to include
specific location conditions for diameter of planting pits,
depths of planting beds, usability of natural site soil and
recommended soil amendments.
E. Site Landscape Grading and Drainage: Site grading in
compliance with civil engineering documents and
landscape finish grades are the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
F. Plant Materials:
1. Approvals: Landscape architect approves plant
material used on the project, prior to shipment from the
nursery. Owner and RCH may accept different plant
spacing as indicated below or required by landscape
drawings. Reject plant materials that do not meet the
landscape document standards and aesthetic quality,
form and consistency as evaluated by the landscape
architect, Owner and RCH.
2. Standards: Comply with the American Association

of Nurserymen Standards (AANS) for quality in
developing project plant material specifications for size,
height, spread, caliper, rootball, etc. and for container-
grown and B&B trees, shrubs, groundcover and annual
flowers. The following plant sizes are minimum.
G. Contract Growing, Special Procurement and On-Site
Nursery: Because plant availability shortages often exist
in remote resort / property locations, provide contract
growing of shrubs, groundcover and annual flowers.
1. Procure tree plant materials early and provide on-site
nursery arrangements when necessary.
2. Have project plant materials available for acceptable
quality, size and species to comply with the installation
schedule.
3. The landscape architect approves the procedures and
outlines a schedule to accomplish the tasks. Develop
this procedure very early in the project construction
process to allow sufficient time for growing plants.
H. Lawn Installation:
1. Site Grading: Prior to planting grass, alleviate pockets
of standing water.
2. Selection of Species: Fine textured, free of noxious
weeds and disease, capable of being developed into
manicured turf of refined finish and type conducive
to climate of region for planting, capable of vigorous
growth and development of a thick turf cover.
3. Installation: Provide solid sod, laid on the finished
graded surface, rolled for smoothness and compaction.
4. Hydrosprigging or Hydro-Seeding: Provide as
alternative to sod only on a project-by-project basis in
areas greater than 30 m (100 ft.) from outer face of the
building. Obtain Owner and RCH acceptance.
5. Established Turf: Provide 100% fully established turf
a minimum of 30 days prior to the opening of the hotel.
Established turf is 100% ground coverage, matted
together sufficiently to support pedestrian foot traffic,
growing in a vigorous manner without noxious weeds
and disease, and free of erosion, standing water, wet-
slow to drain areas. To be considered established, mow
the newly planted grass every week with the proper type
mower for at least 30 days prior to final acceptance.
I. Interior Plants: Design interior planters for drainage, water
proofing and natural lighting.
1. Interior Planters: 45 cm (18 inch) minimum depth with

a permanent drain connected to the building sewer
system. Provide a 12 mm (½ inch) drain mat with filter
fabric on bottom and sides of planter with 2% grade
planter floor slope toward the drain outlet.
2. Lighting: Provide natural light to support plant growth.
Artificial light for plant growth is not acceptable.
Rotate and replace plants to maintain a vigorous, viable
condition.
1.14 Irrigation
A. System Design: Provide landscape irrigation design using
services of a landscape irrigator under the direction of the
Landscape Architect. Obtain Owner and RCH acceptance.
1. Provide system that accommodates prevailing winds
and static pressure reading to keep spray off of walks,
terraces and tennis courts.
2. Design with sufficient quick coupler valves in irrigated
areas to be reached with 30 m (100 ft.) of water hose.
3. Separate irrigation system from the domestic water
system. Determine if irrigation system should be
metered separately.
4. Consider "grey water" from water treatment facilities,
if available.
B. System Features: Fully automated and controlled by an
electrical controller with 100% coverage of landscaped
areas. Space heads in triangular pattern with overlapping
head-to-head trajectory.
C. Control Valves: Electrically activated remote control valves.
Provide separate valving for turf and planting beds because
of different water requirements.
D. Automatic Controller: Electromechanical repeat cycle with a
master control valve to prevent errant operation. Place in
concealed locations.
E. Turf Heads: 10 cm (4 inch) minimum pop-up spray heads in
small cut-up areas of turf and rotary gear-driven heads in
large expanse areas of turf.
F. Shrub and Groundcover: 30 cm (12 inch) pop-up spray heads
along turf borders, sidewalks and other areas along exterior
perimeters without interference from vegetative growth.
1. At interior areas of the beds, provide shrub sprays on
stationary copper risers with a flex pipe connection to
lateral line.
2. Provide brass nozzles on the copper risers.
1.15 Water Features, Fountains and Site Amenities

A. Water Features: Fountains and water features must not be
add-on features but born out of the intrinsic characteristics
of the location. These features are treated on a case-by-
case basis, and must be submitted for acceptance.
1. Design is generally a “hands-on” subjective process with
mechanical and hydraulic requirements for water effect
and movement with solutions for water quality control.
2. Create a naturalistic human-scale water feature of
aesthetic character with grade changes for pleasant
water sounds, splash and serene atmosphere.
3. Include rock boulders, stones and rock outcroppings that
are natural and representative of the geographic region.
4. Blend lake or pond edges naturally into the garden
setting to virtually disappear when viewed by guests.
Where a water feature edge abuts plazas, walkways or
other spaces, design the edge treatment in compliance
with accessibility codes.
B. Fountains: Designed by the landscape architect, in
conjunction with a sculptor as necessary, with the intent
of creating a special theme compatible with the geographic
region, area, culture or other circumstance of significance
Example: Fountain
unique to the hotel.
C. Site Amenities: Incorporate site fountains, gazebos,
pavilions, etc. exterior environment design as appropriate
to project for creating special spaces, function areas and
features of interest.
D. Furniture: Provide seating layouts for exterior food and
beverage <3> areas, furniture layouts and plant containers
at pool areas and terraces.
1. Coordinate requirements with landscape architect and
interior designer.
2. Locate plant containers (pottery) and site furniture as
required by landscape documents.
3. Submit cut sheets and physical sample to obtain Owner
and RCH acceptance.
E. Exterior (Outdoor) Recreational Facilities: The location of
exterior recreational facilities is a principal consideration
of resort site planning. See Module <4> - Recreation for
the following:
• Swimming Pools
• Spa Pool (hydrotherapy pool)
• Tennis Courts
• Golf Course Development
• Beach Improvement and Development

• Other Recreation Facilities
F. Exterior Maintenance Facility: See Module <9>. When the
landscape architect’s recommendation indicates that
contract maintenance and replacement services may not
be feasible, provide a Grounds Maintenance Facility when
accepted by the Owner and RCH.
1.16 Site and Landscape Lighting
A. GeneralRequirements: <15C> The ambience afforded by landscape
lighting is especially important in transforming landscaped
gardens into a pleasant, special experience for guests.
1. Design Concept: A concept is created with the lighting
consultant and landscape architect to define the
approach for the landscape lighting design.
2. Design Coordination: Carefully coordinate with
the exterior building lighting. See exterior building
requirements in this Module.
3. Atmosphere: Create a soft, serene nighttime
atmosphere. Lighting design is governed by the light
quality to create the desired atmosphere, fixture style
and equipment durability.
4. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations for
exterior lighting.
5. Acceptance: Obtain from Owner and RCH.
B. Environmental: In coastal and environmentally sensitive
areas, research and comply with regulations governing
environmental issues such as sea turtle nesting areas or
migratory bird routes, etc.
C. Electrical Service: See Module <15C> for landscape lighting
and exterior electrical service requirements.
D. Lighting Control: Provide site lighting controls on separate
circuits from landscape lighting through either time clocks
and/or photocells.
1. Provide photocell controls for each building or area of
exterior lighting, which is separately circuited.
2. Place photocells relative to natural light and shadow
exposure for simultaneous operation.
E. Lighting for Driveways and Parking Lots: A concept is created
with the lighting consultant and landscape architect to
define the approach for the landscape lighting design.
Generally, low height, residential scale parking lot lighting
fixtures are preferred over tall commercial type.
1. Provide lamps having a uniform soft white or 3000 K color
range (not orange) color. Metal Halide lighting is preferred.
2. Locate light fixtures adjacent to perpendicular parking

spaces a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from the face of curb
or wheel stop to avoid conflicts with vehicular overhangs.
3. Provide hinged type fixtures for lamp access and locate
in landscaped areas where possible.
4. Light poles not to exceed 6 m (20 ft.) high; 3.5 meters
(12 ft.) in high profile areas such as Entry Canopy.
5. Locate light poles to minimize the need for impact
protection. If required, mount on 0.8 m (30 inch) high
concrete pedestals or protect with bollards (see RCH
standard detail).
F. Walkway Lighting: Illuminate paved pathways. Provide,
very subtle and discreet lighting. Use the surrounding
landscape illumination to serve the purpose of walkway
lighting wherever possible.
1. Pathway Light: Provide with damage resistant
protective lens to prevent intrusion of water to lamp.
2. Junction Boxes: Locate accessible type below finished
grade and mount in concrete pad for stability.
3. Path Lights: Architecturally compatible with hotel
entry wall sconce fixtures, 100% down shielded below
the horizontal plane, clean flat lens to protect the lamp
from irrigation water spray.
G. Fixtures: Include fixture requirements and quantities on
lighting drawings.
1. Alternative Fixtures: Provide durable and corrosive
resistant fixtures that meet or exceed the specified
fixture as approved for design by the Owner and RCH.
2. Logo: Provide ground mounted fixtures without
manufacturer's logo visible on fixture housings.
3. Lamps: 3000 Kº color temperature range. Lighting
fixture lamp colors are the same or compatible as
accepted by the Owner and RCH.
4. Fixture Shielding: Maximize concealment of light
source.
5. Uplights: Provide attached flat lens, internal louver (if
available) and rock guard louver.
6. Bullet Lights: Provide hex louver and eyebrow shield.
7. Niche Lights: Provide flush mount lens, flat bronze
down louvered grilles for such fixtures as step lights,
garden walls, or bridge rails.
8. Function Lighting: Provide Cadab light fixtures.
9. Quantum Fixtures: Shroud to prevent and control
spillage of light source into areas not intended to be lit.
H. Tennis Court Lights: 100% down shielded below the

horizontal plane and back shielded to prevent light spillage
away from the tennis courts.
I. Sign Lighting: Shroud to prevent spillage of light into areas
other than lighted sign.
J. Underwater Fountain Fixtures: Permanently affix to bottom
of fountain pool or recess within pool bottom.
1. Conceal electrical cords and wires 100% under pool
bottom and route in conduits to light locations.
2. Underwater Fixtures: Comply with the NEC Article
680.
K. Special Features: Provide lighting for special feature items
or holiday seasonal displays and points of interest through
landscape lighting circuits. Provide additional circuit
capacity at Entry Canopy and terraces.
L. Installation: Locate landscape lighting fixtures in the field
as determined by lighting consultant after tree pits are dug.
Coordinate locations with landscape architect.
1. Transformers and Junction Boxes: Locate in exterior
areas concealed from the public. Landscape architect,
Owner and RCH identify locations.
2. Junction Boxes: Exterior weatherproof Junction Boxes
rated for NEMA 4X. Paint above grade boxes to
match adjacent surface as specified by the Landscape
Architect.
3. Ballast and Junction Boxes: Landscape architect
locates.
4. Conduit: Paint exposed conduit to match the adjacent
surface specified by the landscape architect.
5. Adjustments: Provide as service included in the
landscape architects contract. Final adjustment and
focus of landscape lighting fixtures are accepted by the
Owner and RCH.
Building Exterior
1.17 Building Structure
A. Guestroom Towers – Preferred System: Design for flat plate
structural concrete systems without beams projecting into
spaces, including slab perimeter.
1. Ceiling Height: 2.6 m (8'-6") minimum in sleeping
area.
2. Top Floor: 30 cm (12 inch) minimum of additional
structural height.
B. Public Space: Design structure to accommodate coffered
ceilings and mechanical systems. Use mild steel reinforced
concrete designs at public and Back-of-House areas.
C. Long Span Roofs: Provide structural steel designs.
D. Expansion Joints: Position outside perimeter of public
spaces and at Foyers or other areas where they can be fully
concealed.
E. Slab Depressions: Design structural floor slab depressions
and slopes to accommodate public space stone flooring,
public restrooms, kitchen, cooler / freezer unit flooring,
public space slab concealed door closers, fitness center,
pools, RCH Suite entry, and bath and exterior guestroom
balconies.
1.18 Building and Fire Codes <14>
A. Code Conflicts: Prior to start of the schematic design phase,
see the Statement of Purpose <GR1> of these Design
Standards. The design team identifies conflicts between
governing codes and RCH Standards and representative
projects.
B. Area Separations: Plan and carefully design area separations
away from public spaces or in the Back-of-House areas.
Fire doors, if required in public spaces, provide flush with
adjacent walls and with concealed electromagnetic hold-
open mechanisms.
C. Hardware: See Module <GR> for general product
requirements for doors and frames.
1.19 Building Area Takeoffs
A. Program Criteria: The total Program Criteria shown in
square meters (square feet) is equal to the gross building
area. To calculate the area, measure to centerline of interior
walls and outside face of exterior walls.
1. Building Area: Gross floor area includes shafts, stairs
and elevators.
2. Guestroom Area: <7A> Measure from finish side of

corridor wall, include entry door alcove.
3. Function Area: <6> Measure net rentable; inside finish
wall to wall.
4. Restaurant Foyers: <3> Calculate as public circulation.
5. Dock Area: <9> Measure from face of loading dock
wall to dock edge, exclude truck and trash bays.
6. Mechanical and Elevator Penthouses: Include enclosed
mechanical spaces in area calculations. Include
mechanical mezzanine slabs that occur between normal
floor levels.
B. Non-Hotel Levels: Circulation / service areas through
non-hotel levels of multi-use projects are excluded from
calculations. However, document areas for budgeting
purposes.
C. Design Submittal Calculations: Provide comparisons of “As
Designed” areas to Program Criteria with each design
submittal. Provide area calculations for the following:
1. Exterior Building Elevations: Total elevation areas
organized by materials.
2. Floor Plates: Total floor plate areas including roofs and
area of sloped roof along the roof plane.
3. Recreation Areas: <4> Pools, swimming pool and
whirlpool, pool decks and exterior recreation areas.
4. Food & Beverage: <3> Dining areas for indoor and
outdoor.
5. Parking: Surface and garage parking areas.
6. Program Summary: Include number of dining and
lounge seats in the design. Identify terrace seating
separately.
1.20 Building Exteriors and Features
A. General: Reflect an image consistent with RCH and design
the facilities sensitive to the regional context.
1. Ritz-Carlton Hotels are highly residential using a
limited palette of natural materials and finishes.
2. Design with a focus on the arrival point of the hotel.
B. Overall Plan Organization: RCH will identify the following:
1. Representative project for plan organization.
2. Project Facilities Program.
C. Design Concepts: Design the building exteriors with an
image respectful of the natural characteristics of the site.
D. Exterior Materials: Select exterior materials that support the
RCH reputation of providing superior service.
1. Focus high quality finishes at guest Entry and circulation

locations.
2. Use specific color palette conducive to, and complementary
with, the architectural style.
3. Articulate roof lines, balconies and other building features.
4. Unacceptable finish materials include synthetic stucco
systems, exterior insulated finish systems (EIFS) and
panelized systems.
E. Acoustic Control: Select building envelope materials, building
systems (including roof, doors, windows, louvers, etc.) and
mechanical equipment based on the criteria below.
1. Environmental Noise Sources: If the project site is near a
source of noise (airport, highway, trains, industrial activity,
mechanical equipment, etc.) that could be disruptive
to guests, employ an acoustic consultant to conduct an
acoustics survey and define acoustic criteria and controls.
Consider project location, day / evening operations and
adjacency to noise sources.
2. Guestroom Areas: <7A> Limit highway noise intrusion
levels to Hourly Equivalent Levels (LEQ) of 45 dBA for
day; 40 dBA at night.
a. Short Term Noise: 50 dBA for short term (day / night)
noise such as sirens and low level helicopter flights.
b. Day - Night Level (LDN) of 45 dBA for aircraft noise
level intrusion.
3. Meeting Spaces: Limit noise intrusion levels to 40 dBA
minimum or as determined by consultant’s report and
accepted by RCH.
F. Windows and Glazing: Review exterior glazing types for energy
compliance, wind loads, acoustic ratings and resistance to
condensation.
1. Provide clear insulated glass / glazing. Reflective or
mirror glazing is not acceptable. Where glazing must have
obscuring properties, tinted glazing may be used when
approved by RCH.
2. Provide double glazing unless acoustic comfort and energy
efficiency dictates additional criteria.
3. Area of exterior glazing, 60% minimum of primary
exterior elevations.
4. Operable windows: <16> Comply with Owner / RCH’s
Loss Prevention requirements and limitations and provide
safety stops to restrict opening to 4 inches, unless opening
onto a balcony.
5. Operable windows are beneficial where natural breezes or
ocean sounds are desirable amenities to the location.
6. Use impact resistant window assemblies in regions that

experience high velocity wind events and as required by
code.
G. Skylights: Avoid where sunlight distracts from the Public
Spaces. Typically, glass skylights at indoor pools are
acceptable.
H. Window Washing - Maintenance: Provide for window washing
and exterior building maintenance. Comply with governing
regulations.
1. Typically, window washing is provided by a hotel service
contract.
2. Contact local window washing companies to determine
their standard for scaffold equipment arrangements and
support requirements.
3. Design only for the equipment required to accommodate
the selected contract equipment.
4. Provide window washing equipment supports such as
davits, anchorage and power service.
I. Insulation & Vapor Barrier: Required to provide long-term energy
efficiency and guest comfort.
J. Weather Resistance: Avoid reliance on a single stage (barrier)
system for water and moisture resistance. Consider cold roof
design in ski areas where lower levels of site are susceptible
to snow and ice falling or provide for roof snow melt system.
K. Roofs: See material and product requirements in Module <GR>
1. Long term, low maintenance service life; neat appearance.
2. Positive slope to drain water without “ponding”.
3. Insulate to provide long-term energy economy.
4. Screen flat roofs, facility service and mechanical equipment,
including roof top units from guest and public view.
5. Develop designs to prevent snow and ice build-up and
subsequent hazard below.
L. Building Drainage: Design roofs for positive drainage to include
gutters, downspouts and internal water collection and piping
to storm drainage system.
M. Service and Mechanical Equipment: Screen the equipment from
public and guest views, including rooftop locations.
N. Energy Compliance: Design building envelope / exteriors to
comply with energy code and HVAC standards. Review exterior
glazing for acoustical ratings, and resistance to condensation.
See “Glass and Glazing” requirements above.
O. Air Intake: Locate outside air intakes minimum 10 m (30 ft.)
above grade and away from public or accessible areas. See
Module <15A>.
P. Building Utilities: <15> Locate primary building utilities

(water, electric, gas, etc.) to limit unauthorized access to
mitigate the opportunity to contaminate or disrupt building
activities.
Example: Porte Cochere
1.21 Hotel Entrance - Porte Cochere
A. General: Facilitate the ability of RCH to provide excellent
guest service and create positive first and last impressions.
Provide a well-lighted, covered Porte Cochere that
complements the building and architectural style of the
region.
B. Location: Vehicle arrival at the primary hotel entrance <2>.
C. Entry Canopy - Historic Buildings: Where a RCH hotel
occupies a historical city location it may be impossible to
accommodate a covered structure due to strict façade and
exterior modification restrictions. Therefore, consider the
entry structure design on a case-by-case basis, dependent
on existing historic context.
D. Space Planning: Avoid circulation conflicts between
vehicles and guests, and waiting, arriving and departing
guests. Identify reception entrance locations.
1. Provide cover to protect guests from rain and snow at
the hotel entrance.
2. Provide separate path for luggage handling by staff to
a separate building entrance, away from guests’ view,
preferably near luggage storage room.
3. Allow space for taxi and airport shuttle queuing within
visual sight of hotel entry <2>, but away from vehicle
and guest entrance.
4. Provide bus routing and parking away from main entry
Porte Cochere. Provide direction toward group arrival
area for remote check-in. See “Function / Tour Group
Entrance and Desk” in Module <6> - Function Space.
5. Accommodate 10 to 12 valet parking pick-up and drop-
off and short term parking spaces at or adjacent to the
Porte Cochere to avoid congestion at the hotel entrance
area.
6. Include space for ash and trash receptacles; coordinate
with landscape amenities.
7. Provide a protected entrance and drop off area at a
secondary hotel entrance such as an exterior entry to
large function and meeting area, restaurants and spa.
8. Provide exterior zones discreetly located for public and
staff smoking.
E. Size / Area: Under the Porte Cochere, provide a holding area

for a minimum of 4 unloading vehicles plus an uncovered by-
pass lane for oversized vehicles such as trucks, shuttle bus,
emergency vehicles, etc.
1. Traffic Lanes: Typically, provide four lanes total, three
3.7 m (12 ft.) wide minimum covered traffic lanes through
the Porte Cochere and one uncovered by-pass lane.
2. Vehicle Clearance: Sufficient to accommodate tallest fire
truck, shuttle bus or emergency vehicle anticipated to use
the facility, typically 4.5 m (14 ft.) overhead clearance.
3. Protection: Design to provide protection from the elements
for 12 m (40 ft.) length of sidewalk drop-off area and for
the width of traffic lanes.
4. Curb to Entrance Distance: Minimum 3 m (10 ft.) by
length of protected drop-off area.
5. Supporting Columns: Position columns 0.9 m (3 ft.) in
from curb lines (both sides) to prevent obstruction when
opening vehicle doors.
F. Entrance - Porte Cochere Paving:
1. Paving Type: Minimize material types and patterns.
Use products appropriate to the property location. If the
entrance drive is not too extensive, the preferred paving
is natural stone. The minimum paving type is colored
(integrally mixed admixture) concrete with exposed
aggregate finish and sealed with a penetrating sealer.
Provide paving system approved by the Owner and RCH.
Example: Porte Cochere 2. Rolled Curb: Provide rolled curb (to match paving) along
both outside edges of entrance drive finished to match
Entry Drive. Provide rolled curb at the entry side of drive.
The intent is to avoid tire rub marks and damage to cars
being quickly maneuvered in the Entry area.
3. Distinguish Entry Drive from walkway in material texture
and color. Minimize material types and styles using paving
appropriate for project site without elaborate patterns.
4. Paving Transition at Entry: Level and flush with walkway
for full length of protected drop-off area to facilitate
luggage carts and allow for disabled guest accessibility.
Steps are not permitted.
Warp shape of curb at ends of drop-off to avoid tripping
hazard and to permit easy movement of luggage.
5. Slip Resistance: Provide 0.6 wet / dry.
6. Joints: Where exterior entry stone meets adjacent
walkways, provide a 20 mm (¾ inch) wide brass bar
expansion joint. Avoid placement of expansion joint
near entrance. For caulked joints, use Owner / RCH

approved material and color.
7. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to avoid ponding
water. Slope paved surfaces to area storm drains.
G. Porte Cochere Features: Provide the following:
1. See Module <2> for doorman and valet stations.
2. At Entry walkway, use non-slip natural stone and
provide a custom exterior welcome carpet.
3. Provide natural stone walls surrounding and adjacent
to, main entry doors. Extend stone for width of Porte
Cochere. Avoid duplicating or matching adjacent
material coursing with natural stone.
4. Use stone to surround vertical supports of Porte
Cochere columns.
5. Provide concealed hose bib adjacent to drive to maintain
area.
6. Light the Porte Cochere (Entry Canopy) with ambient
lighting consistent with the Entry and Reception area
interior design.
7. Provide electrical receptacles to operate cleaning
equipment.
8. Provide receptacles for holiday and seasonal lighting.
9. Provide at least one receptacle on emergency power to
assist staff with arrivals and departures during power
failures.
10. When the project is in a ski area or area with frequent
snowfall, provide a snow / ice melt system at entrance
drive.
11. In cold climates, provide radiant heating units integrated
with the Porte Cochere or Entry Canopy. Design for
the comfort of waiting guests.
12. Provide electric, telephone and data lines, suitable for
check-in as required by the RCH.
H. Flagpoles: Provide three, 12 m (40 ft.) flag poles of anodized
aluminum, medium bronze finish with internal halyards.
1. Locate as directed by Landscape Architect in the
vicinity of the Porte Cochere.
2. Provide finished concrete footings compatible to
surrounding hardscape.
3. Design footing elevation flush with surrounding
hardscape surface with a landscaped green space
between footing finish.
4. Provide lighting for night flag flying. Use four 250
watt, metal halide fixtures, with flat lens, shielded and
louvered. Place fixtures in line with poles, outside the
two end poles and between center pole and end poles.
1.22 Exterior Signage and Awnings

A. Signage - General: Provide design to minimize signage
<GR> wherever possible; requires input from Owner and
RCH.
1. When required, design signage in keeping with the
project style.
2. Comply with RCH graphics program.
3. Identify property at the entrance area.
B. Site Signage: Compatible with the project architecture and
approved by Owner and RCH. Provide bronze plaques
mounted on walls or monuments as follows:
Example: Building Signage 1. Primary Property Identification.
2. Front Door: Mount adjacent to door.
3. Pool and Spa: Develop on a project by project basis.
Provide custom sizes, with raised lettering.
4. Comply with governing codes, regulations and rules of
RCH; obtain Owner and RCH acceptance.
C. Awnings: Design awnings, structural framing, support for
signage, lighting and awnings. Submit the awning designs and
locations for review by RCH during the schematic phase.
1. Awning Canopy: Cover bottom with fabric to create a
soffit and contain recessed, flush mounted downlights.
2. Downlights: Provide fixture types to allow light
spillage upward into canopy volume to create a gentle
illumination of logo at night.
3. Building Signage: Primarily the canvas awning at the
Entry Canopy, if used.
4. Additional Awnings: Where approved, mount at
secondary entrances or windows.
1.23 Exterior Building Lighting
A. Environmental: See requirements above for Site Lighting.
B. Building Entry: See awning and Entry Canopy requirements
above. Provide unique style, custom designs by the Interior
Designer and lighting designer.
1. Type: Establish architectural styles for project
decorative light fixtures.
2. Locations: Building exterior at terraces, pilasters,
function entrance, landscaped pathways, etc. Emphasize
entrances and architectural features using decorative
down lighting and / or up lighting.
3. Screen 100% of fixture light source with shields or
louver attachments.
C. Wall and Column Sconce Fixtures: Do not duplicate the entry

fixture design.
1. Type: Flush mounted decorative wall fixtures,
compatible with entry fixtures.
2. Locations: Provide on columns, arcades, pool bar
areas, etc. Design to obtain simple elegant lighting
without calling attention to the fixture.
D. Monumental Lighting: Understated and subtle fixture design
providing ambient light and architectural illumination.
1. Use: As determined on a project by project basis and
obtain Owner and RCH acceptance.
2. Location: Coordinate fixture placement with the
architecture, landscaping, interior design, and Owner
and RCH requirements.
3. Light Screening: Screen fixtures 100% from guest
view with light source concealed by shield and louver
attachments.
4. Review design applications with RCH for each project.
E. Parking Structure Lighting: Design lighting to provide the
appropriate level of illumination <15C> at the vehicle
entrance, traffic lanes, parking areas and pedestrian
circulation areas.
1. Provide clear sight lines and illumination at
indoor / outdoor traffic transition areas to mitigate sun
blindness effect.
2. At indoor / outdoor transition areas use light colored
wall and ceiling finishes to minimize light contrast.
3. Provide light fixture protection from vehicle antennas.
4. Design light fixtures without visible light sources
(glare) from the garage exterior.
F. Lighting Levels: See Module <15C> for minimum
illumination requirements.
1.24 Systems Coordination
A. Reference: Coordinate with requirements of other Modules
including:
• 13A Information Technology Infrastructure
• 13B Telecommunications
• 13C Audio / Visual
• 14 Fire Protection & Life Safety
• 15 Mechanical - Plumbing - Electrical
• 16 Loss Prevention
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
2
Public Entry
2 - Public Entry THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
2.1 Program 1
2.2 Protected Entry - Canopy or Porte Cochere 3
2.3 Doorman Station 4
2.4 Valet Parking / Limousine Desk 4
2.5 Lobby Entrance / Vestibule 6
2.6 Bell Captain’s Station 6
2.7 Luggage Room 7
2.8 Fire Command Room (Central Control Station) <14> 8
2.9 Street Lobby 8
2.10 Reception Lobby 9
2.11 Front Desk 11
2.12 Concierge Station 14
2.13 Safe Deposit Boxes and Viewing Room 15
2.14 Public Phones 15
2.15 Public Toilets / Janitor Closet 16
2.16 Coatroom 18
2.17 Fixtures, Furniture & Equipment (FF&E) 18
2.18 Systems Coordination 19

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Public Entry | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Public Entry - 2
Public Entry
2.1 Program
A. Concept: Provide a procession of spaces that give an elegant
sense of arrival, conveying a high level of personal service
and distinctive first impression.
1. Design the entrance to provide a protected and exclusive
image, highlighted by distinctive, inviting visual
features and focal points.
2. Design spaces to assist guests with their arrival and
departure.
3. Facilitate the RCH ability to provide excellent service
and to create a positive first and last guest impression.
B. Space Planning: The Entry Area character is of residential
scale, formed by a series of rooms, rather than monumental
spaces.
1. Typically, rooms are entered through a foyer from the
Entry Areas.
2. Provide Entry Areas with Back-of-House (BOH)
service, without that service crossing Entry and
Reception Areas.
3. Carefully screen sight lines from Entry Areas to BOH
to avoid sound and light.
4. Identify, carefully consider and incorporate the support
spaces (Janitor Closet, Luggage, MEP, etc.) necessary
to complete the Public Entry area design.
C. Business Center: See Module <6> for requirements.
D. Interior Design:
1. Signage and Graphics: <GR> Carefully study and
determine which emergency, fire and graphics elements
are necessary. Coordinate their design and placement
with the Interior Designer and illustrate these elements
on the Interior Design drawings.
2. Doors and Glass: Design the entry spaces to accommodate
non-rated doors and clear, non-wire glass in retail windows
and displays. This may be accomplished with dedicated
fire sprinkler <14> coverage.
E. Accessibility:
1. Provide an accessible route to Entry Areas (typically
corresponding to the primary route used by the public).
2. Design 50% of public entrances, at least one ground
floor entrance and one pedestrian entrance from an
enclosed garage, for access by guest with disabilities.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Public Entry 1
3. At exterior and interior doorways, provide an 82 cm

(32 inch) clear opening with approach and strike side
clearance to comply with the applicable accessibility
regulations. Typically, provide 46 cm (18 inch) clear at
the strike side to adjacent wall for an in-swinging door.
F. Stair Criteria: Make stairs apparent through use of the
following design elements:
1. Steps: Avoid one and two riser steps - use ramps (1:12
or 8% maximum slope) with handrails or flight of stairs.
2. Contrast: Change floor color or materials to identify
stair location.
3. Lighting: Provide general illumination to identify
stairs.
Figure 1 - Example: Public Entry Adjacency Diagram
To Ballrooms & Executive Offices

Meeting Rooms
<6>
Section Hotel Front

2.15 Sundry & Offices
Gift Shop
<5>
Section
2.15 Safety Deposit Boxes
& Viewing
Section 2.13
Front Desk
Section 2.11 Bell Captain
Lobby Lounge Section 2.9
Public Corridor 3.5 m (11 ft.) Wide Section 8B.9
Section 3.2
3 Lanes
Reception Lobby Port Cochere
Section 2.10
Views
Vestibule
Section 2.7
Concierge Valet
Section 2.12 Section 2.4
Service
Bar
Lobby (3.5m Wide) Public Telephones

Section 2.14
Service Elevators <12>
To Restaurant
<3>
2 Public Entry | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
4. Stair Lights: Provide step lights or tread edge lights (if

appropriate).
5. Handrails: Provide handrails at both sides of stair as a
visible queue to announce stairs and to assist users.
6. Tread: 31 cm (11 inch) minimum depth
7. Riser: 10 cm (4 inch) minimum and 18 cm (7 inch)
maximum height
8. Nosings: Identify tread edge for full width of stair
tread.
9. Slip Resistance: 0.6 (wet or dry)
G. Spaces: Accommodate the following Public Entry spaces:
• Protected Entry - Canopy or Porte Cochere
• Doorman Station
• Valet Parking / Limousine Desk
• Lobby Entrance / Vestibule
• Bell Station
• Luggage Room
• Luggage Cart Staging Area
• Fire Command Room (Central Control Station)
• Street Lobby
• Reception Lobby
• Front Desk
• Concierge Station
• Public Toilets / Janitor Closet
• Telephones
• Coat Room
2.2 Protected Entry - Canopy or Porte Cochere

A. Program: Provide an entrance canopy (or Porte Cochere) to
protect guests from weather at main hotel entrance.
1. See Module <1> - Site / Building Exterior.
2. Determine entrance canopy or porte cochere needs
on a case-by-case basis. Heating elements or heated
sidewalks are required in some locations.
3. Design complementary to the building and architecture
of the region.
4. Lanterns, decorative ceiling fixtures, planters, benches,
trash and ask receptacles are specified by interior
designer.
5. Provide a designated smoking area with ash receptacles
adjacent to main hotel entrance.
6. Provide a convenient, but concealed luggage cart
staging area adjacent to the Porte Cochere.
2.3 Doorman Station

A. Program: Provide concealed space such as an alcove in the
Entry Vestibule design that allows visual supervision of
arriving vehicles and the Lobby Entrance.
B. Location: At Entry Vestibule. Contiguous with Luggage
Room and adjacent to luggage cart staging area.
C. Size / Area: See the project Facilities Program.
D. Features: Provide doorman’s station with stand to include
the following:
1. Drawers for pens, pencils and baggage tags
2. Lockable key cabinet for car keys
3. Task lighting
4. Telephone, power and data outlet. <13B> <13A> Install
telephone out of guest view.
E. Finishes: <GR> Consistent with interior design
2.4 Valet Parking / Limousine Desk

A. Program: Provide for a small secure valet office with pay
window in route to the Lobby Entrance.
1. Typically, the valet service is provided by a leased
operation.
2. Valet service is provided for guests arriving by private
auto and short term public parking for dining and
function guest.
3. Provide location for a cashier at the valet that is
accessible from exterior and discreetly positioned near
the main hotel entrance. Design the cashier / valet with
Front of House finishes for all areas in guest view.
4. Incorporate etched glass into pay window to screen
view into office. Ensure lighting is a color and level
compatible with surrounding area.
B. Space Planning:
1. Provide attendant space or station out of guest view and
/ or an attendant station with telephone in parking area
dependent on facility size.
2. Consider separate drop-off space for hotels with large
function facilities <6>.
3. Design vehicle return route and pick-up area considering
positions of guests, vehicles and attendants, and where
hotel has large function facilities.
C. Location: Exterior, adjacent to Lobby Entrance, accessible
to guest, if necessary, but isolated from hotel service
corridors.
1. In proximity to entrance of Luggage Room for efficient

handling of luggage.
2. Contiguous with interior Limousine Desk at locations
requiring limousine service or valet and limousine
service desk may be combined at one location.
D. Size / Area: Valet station; 0.6 x 1 m (2 ft. x 3’-4”) minimum.
For limousine desk and valet, refer to the project Facilities
Program for area.
E. Limousine Desk: Include a lobby counter and support
area at hotel locations where guest local travel depends
predominately on limousine service (chauffeured vehicle).
1. Facility is usually a concession that includes combined
car valet and limousine type service.
2. While convenient guest access at the Lobby is critical,
shared resources, visual contact, and operational
efficiency may dictate a combined location with the
exterior valet parking station.
3. Provide chauffeurs’ waiting / lounge room near parking
garage or other RCH designated space to include a
control station, communications and toilets.
F. Security: Review parking facilities with RCH Loss
Prevention Operations.
G. Features:
1. P.O.S. terminal
2. Lockable vehicle key storage space
3. Task lighting and telephone outlet <13B>
4. Drawers for luggage tags, pens, pencils and paper,
shelves and racks to secure receipts
H. Finishes: <GR3>
1. Valet Stands: Stone counter with detailed wood base or
combination of high quality materials complementary
to the hotel entrance design. Select and detail finishes
to resist exterior exposure.
2. Provide valet stands for international projects. Include
valet stands for domestic projects if defined by the
Facilities Program.
3. Limousine Desk: Consistent with Lobby Entrance
4. Chauffeurs’ Waiting: Consistent with BOH areas
2.5 Lobby Entrance / Vestibule

A. Program: Design a distinctive entrance and transition area
vestibule between exterior (Porte Cochere) and Lobby.
1. Create an exclusive, protected image at the hotel
entrance by developing a decorative focal point and
integrating distinctive and dramatic architectural
elements.
2. Incorporate high quality, durable floor and wall
treatments, lighting and landscaping (seasonal greenery
and flowers) to create a positive first and last impression.
B. Space Planning:
1. Vestibule: Provide doors with a minimum of 2.5 m (8
ft.) between sets of doors.
2. Accommodate arriving and departing guests, guests
with disabilities and emergency exiting requirements.
3. Luggage handling and valet service staff, use separate
entrance concealed from guest view.
4. Protect space and persons from regional temperate and
cold climates with temperature extremes.
5. Provide FF&E area to accommodate water and towels
for joggers.
C. Size / Area: Refer to the project Facilities Program.
D. Features: Provide an enclosed vestibule for guest comfort.
1. Provide separate, dedicated HVAC in vestibule to
reduce climatic impact in Lobby.
2. Address vestibule enclosure design considering
potential for “stack effect” drafts in high-rise buildings.
3. Doors: Provide single, pair of swing, custom hardwood
doors with beveled glass at each end. Leaf size is 0.9 m
(3 ft.) wide minimum.
4. Signage: See Module <GR> for applicable entry
signage and graphics.
E. Finishes: <GR> Extend lobby finishes into exterior entrance.
2.6 Bell Captain’s Station

A. Program: Provide a podium stand near the interior of the
Lobby Entrance to support hotel staff assisting guests with
arrivals, departure and luggage.
B. Location: Position station for visual supervision of arriving
/ departing guests at Lobby Entrance / Vestibule.
1. Immediately adjacent to interior entrance to Luggage
Room for efficient handling of luggage.
2. Locate for visual contact with Front Desk.
C. Size: Minimum 0.6 m (2 ft.) wide by 1 m (3’-4”) long

D. Features:
1. Design freestanding bell stand with lockable drawers,
shelves, and include spaces for luggage tags, pens,
pencils, paper, and small trash container.
2. Task light at counter
3. Telephone outlet. <13B> Install telephone out of guest
view.
E. Workstation: Provide a BOH workstation space for the Bell
Captain’s use. Locate adjacent to Front Desk Workroom
<8A>.
F. Finishes: <GR3> Millwork stand with granite top to
complement entrance and lobby finishes.
2.7 Luggage Room

A. Program: Provide a secure room for temporary storage of
guest luggage.
B. Size / Area: Refer to the project Facilities Program.
1. Luggage Carts: 60 x 120 cm (2 x 4 ft.). Maintain
clearance and stacking capacity in room and adjacent
space.
2. Increase capacity at resorts.
3. Door: 1.0 m (3'-6") wide access door
C. Space Planning: Accessible direct from exterior (Porte
Cochere) and interior from Lobby.
1. Position directly adjacent to Bell Captain Station
accessible through interior service doors.
2. Conceal guest views from Lobby area into room.
3. Where possible, provide a service corridor from
the Luggage Room to the service elevator to avoid
transporting luggage through the Lobby.
4. Luggage Cart Storage: Total carts = 3 per 100
guestrooms; typically ⅓ in Porte Cochere and other ⅔
of carts in storage.
5. Provide a space or alcove, adjacent to luggage room and
near Bell Captain Station, to conceal empty luggage
carts to avoid visual clutter at Lobby Entrance.
D. Features:
1. Door Locks: Similar to guestroom electronic locks <GR>
2. Incorporate lockable wall shelving for luggage.
3. At resorts, provide additional capacity to include sports
equipment and refrigerator for complimentary welcome
drinks, flowers such as leis, and gift storage.
E. Finishes for Luggage Room: <GR>

1. Floors: Vinyl composition tile with resilient base
2. Walls: Painted
3. Ceiling: Suspended acoustic tile
2.8 Fire Command Room (Central Control Station) <14>

A. Program: Provide in high-rise buildings, an enclosed
room for fire department personnel to access fire alarms,
annunciators, controls and hotel emergency systems.
B. Size / Area: Coordinate size to accommodate equipment
and fire department’s requirements. Refer to the project
Facilities Program.
C. Location: Coordinate location with fire department.
Typically, located at Security Office (receiving dock <9>)
or engineering area <9> or main hotel entrance.
D. Access: Typically, provide a door with direct exterior access.
2.9 Street Lobby

A. Program:
1. Provide a Street Lobby when the Reception Lobby is
on another level.
2. Access to multi-use projects best occur from this Lobby.
B. Space Planning:
1. Design the Street Lobby with the shuttle elevator lobby.
See “Vertical Transportation” below, under “Reception
Lobby” section.
2. Typically, the space may contain a guest waiting area
and retail vitrines.
3. Provide the Street Lobby with a Bell Captain desk.
4. Valet parking and Luggage Storage are service areas
off this lobby. Luggage is taken to service elevators to
Reception area.
C. Features:
1. When required by Facilities Program, provide a Grand
Stair (see under “Reception Lobby” section) to connect
Reception or Function areas one level up or down.
2. Avoid locating phones, toilets and other services at the
Street Lobby.
2.10 Reception Lobby

A. Program: Provide an inviting, upscale, warm and gracious
sense of arrival, just large enough to serve as reception,
orientation and transition to and between public areas.
1. Upon entering through the hotel entrance and Reception
Lobby, amplify the hotel’s distinctive signature with an
architectural and / or decorative focal point. Examples
include the following:
a. Unique and detailed architectural millwork, and /
or stone wall.
b. Dramatically detailed grand staircase; large
scaled windows featuring dramatic / spectacular
view that incorporates the lobby features.
c. Distinctive or unique furniture with art used to
create or reflect the dramatic features.
B. Location: Lobby entrance, near public and guest elevator.
Accessible to Lobby Lounge, Restaurant and Front Desk
on the same level.
C. Size / Area: Provide a Reception Lobby that creates an
upscale introduction to the hotel.
1. Incorporate architectural and decorative focal points
noted above. Incorporate sense of place into the design.
2. Utilize multi-level high ceiling spaces.
3. Market conditions may dictate greater vertical height /
volume space. In Asia for example, typically provide 2
to 3 story space, minimum.
D. Space Planning:
1. Provide an inviting Lobby plan for sequential and clear
reception invitation to hotel functions such as Front
Desk, Lobby Lounge, Food and Beverage, Function
Facilities, Guestrooms and circulation.
2. Provide minimal seating / waiting area in Reception
area per the Facilities Program.
3. Use luxurious, rich area rugs at seating areas and
feature tables.
4. If separate Lobby Lounge is not provided because of
program limitations, provide some additional seating
in Reception Lobby.
5. Avoid service circulation through Lobby.
6. Guests proceeding to guestroom levels transfer to hotel
passenger elevators only after being exposed to Front
Desk observation in the Reception Lobby.
7. In order to provide effective access and control, parking
garage entrances to the Lobby are planned as dedicated
garage, shuttle elevators and stairs that deliver guests
directly to the hotel Lobby.
8. At lobby transitional areas (public corridors, staircases,

elevator lobbies, etc.), extend finishes, furnishings and
design treatment similar to Lobby area as appropriate.
9. Design Lobby to incorporate artwork and artifacts that
reflect the local culture, are presented in a grand and
artful manner, and artistically presented with "museum"
type lighting.
10. For urban hotels, provide a mini sundry shop adjacent
to the Concierge desk which can be supported by the
Concierge staffing. The hotel requires either the mini
sundry shop or the Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop, but not
both. Resort hotels requires the Ritz-Carlton Signature
Shop. Refer to the Facilities Program for designated
areas.
E. Water Features: When proposed for the Lobby or Public
Area, employ a consultant familiar with the water
feature proposed and able to address water filtration,
aeration, treatment, maintenance, acoustics, aquatic life,
waterproofing and safety.
F. Grand Stair:
1. If required in the Facilities Program or appropriate for
the architectural style of the hotel, provide a Grand Stair
to connect the main Entry Area with dining or function
areas but not to connect more than two levels.
2. At Resorts, several Grand Stairs may be used to provide
a variety of guest routes and experiences.
G. Vertical Transportation:
1. Shuttle Elevators take guests and public to the Reception
level or Function areas.
2. Guestroom Elevators stop at the Reception level and do
not extend to the Street Lobby.
3. Provide Shuttle and Guestroom Elevators with separate
vestibules at the Reception level.
4. Do not use escalators as vertical transportation.
5. Provide a passenger elevator designed for persons with
disabilities.
H. Public Phones: See requirements in this Module for
telephones.
Provide one public pay phone in Lobby with a house
phone.
I. Vitrines: Provide a minimum of 2 free standing or casework
vitrines in locations with high guest traffic. Vitrines are
lockable, lit and lined with fabric with trimmed / finished
edges.
J. Finishes for Reception Lobby: <GR3>

1. Floor: Use sophisticated combination of materials to
create a luxurious appearance. As a minimum, provide
multi-colored and beautifully patterned stone floors
accented by handmade area rugs.
2. Stone: Provide high quality grade marble, granite or
similar natural stone.
3. Carpets: Antique or new hand knotted rugs, or hand
tufted area rugs. Inset rugs are not acceptable. <GR4>
4. Base: Use high profile, 2 piece wood base or provide
detailed stone base throughout consistent with floor
material.
5. Walls: Beautifully treated surfaces with richly finished
sophisticated and detailed wood paneling, stone or
upholstered panels finished and framed with large scale
moldings.
6. Millwork: Provide detailed millwork, comprised of
high quality woods, stones and top quality finishes,
incorporating ceiling molding, chair rail, and cabinetry
throughout lobby area and at front desk, concierge
desk, valet, bell station and at feature walls and similar
areas.
7. Use architectural elements such as columns and similar
decorative features.
8. Integrate decorative wall sconces and accent lights;
artwork and artifacts.
9. Ceilings: Multi-level gypsum board or plaster ceilings
with dramatic decorative design such as coffers, domes
and domed light coves above seating groups; soffit and
similar details accented with millwork and elegant
decorative fixtures and recessed lighting.
2.11 Front Desk

A. Program: Create an inviting, personal feeling, not in direct
path of entry and avoid an impersonal monumental “check-
in” type atmosphere.
1. Front Desk is not the focal point of the hotel Lobby, but
location is obvious to guests upon entry to Reception
area.
2. Provide a design complementary to Lobby, but
understated with residential character.
3. Registration and cashier functions are integrated in one
desk and not zoned.
4. Group check-in requirements are typically associated
with function spaces where similar configurations are
used; see “Tour Desk” below and Module <6>.
B. Location: Immediately adjacent to Reception Lobby, in

a separate foyer, off the Reception area (not a principal
greeting element for arriving guests). Provide visual
contact with Bell Captain’s Station.
C. Size / Area:
1. Front Desk Length: Typically, RCH will determine
quantity of Front Desk Workstations.
2. Workstation Module: Generally, each station includes
112 cm (3'-8") for computer terminal (monitor) and
printer plus 60 cm (2 ft.) for storage that equals 1.7 m
(5'-8") for single workstation minimum. Example: 300
keys / (75 keys / station) = 4 stations x 1.7 m = 6.8 m
(22 ft.) total Front Desk length.
3. Clear Work Space: 1.5 m (5 ft.) minimum, measured
from staff work edge of counter to parallel back wall.
Do not provide a work counter at the back wall of the
front desk.
4. Guest Queuing: Provide 4 m (12 ft.) area in front of desk.
5. Accessible Registration Counter (or Desk): 86 cm
(2’-10”) maximum height with 68.5 cm (27 inch)
knee clearance. Comply with governing accessibility
regulations.
D. Space Planning:
1. Front Desk stations serve as registration and cashier
spaces.
2. Provide minimum of one open side or end of counter to
allow staff to attend guests from Reception side.
3. Locate administrative front desk support activities
immediately adjacent to Front Desk.
4. Separate the Front Desk from the Front Office Area
<8A> service activities, including Workroom, by a wall
and door(s) in end walls leading to BOH service areas
and Workroom.
5. In large properties, where the Front Desk requires
several workstations that would create an excessive
scale and less residential, additional stations may be
concealed from view behind screen walls at Front Desk
ends.
E. Features:
1. Equipment: Coordinate and locate equipment in Front
Desk for convenient use by hotel employees, but conceal
wires, task lights, and equipment from guest view.
2. Accommodate guest registration, electronic key system
with computer and printer; check-out counter, cashier
and support equipment. <13A> <13B>
3. Loss Prevention Equipment: <16> Provide and

incorporate the following:
a. Duress alarm below front desk counter
b. Fixed camera to monitor front desk area
c. Door access to administrative support areas con-
trolled by electronic or push-button combination
door lock
F. Finishes: <GR3>
1. Front Desk: Provide Reception side or front die
designed by Interior Designer using marble front and
top. Use wood, millwork and finishes consistent with
Reception Lobby for remaining areas of Front Desk.
Design to conceal equipment on employee side from
guest view on Reception side. Work side has stone and
wood finishes as well.
2. Floor (behind Front Desk): Highly durable and easily
cleaned 80 / 20 Axminster carpet, complementary to
Lobby finishes, with pad material, or other anti-fatigue
floor materials and finish combinations acceptable
to RCH Interior Design. Design carpet for long term
comfort of standing attendants.
3. Rear Wall: Provide an uncluttered feature wall behind
Front Desk to form a back-drop for the Front Desk
employees and features only focal, fine artwork or
sophisticated decorative elements. Avoid property
logos, clocks, credenzas or sideboards where staff tend
to stack items.
4. Lighting: Provide architectural, incandescent lighting
that does not conflict with Reception area and
appropriately and dramatically accents the space.
G. Tour Desk: Include tour desk when required by the project
Facilities Program to avoid congestion at Lobby / Front
Desk when tour groups register. Design and location of tour
entrance and desk provides guests with a level of service
and image equal to the main entrance.
1. Location: Tour desk may be located as a secondary lobby
entrance (see Module <6> Function Spaces). Arrange to
avoid circulation congestion at Lobby Entrance.
2. Design: Replicate Front Desk registration facilities.
H. Boarding Pass Room: Provide a boarding pass room adjacent
to the Front Desk that can also contain a built-in ATM, pay
phone, data station and house phone. A sidelite or door lite
is provided for security.
These facilities may be integrated into the guest Safe
Deposit Box Viewing Room.
2.12 Concierge Station

A. Program: Provide to assist guests with information and
services, excluding guest registration and currency
transactions (cashier) that occur at Front Desk.
1. Follow the Front Desk design, materials and
configuration.
2. Coordinate design with Lobby and Front Desk design,
materials and configuration.
B. Location:
1. Convenient to hotel Reception Lobby, next to, but apart
from Front Desk for guest privacy.
2. In the guest path, between Guest Elevators and Front
Desk.
3. Concierge is able to view Reception area and Lobby
Entrance.
C. Size / Area: Refer to the project Facilities Program. No
smaller than a two person counter or desk in any area or
market.
1. Counter: Configure as freestanding or open on one
end and without door; similar to Front Desk.
2. Carefully examine size by region and determine amount
and type of services provided in each area.
D. Space Planning: Place counter or desk so that it is readily
identifiable and convenient to guests.
1. Concierge Desk: At hotel locations where guest service
requirements are limited, a business desk with two
guest chairs may be appropriate.
2. Work / Storage Area: Provide sufficient space adjacent
to counter or desk for the Concierge and placement
of computer printers and fax machines, support
information, storage, communications and travel
planning.
3. Bell Station facilities may be integrated with the
Concierge Station.
E. Features: Configure similar to Front Desk.
1. Locate equipment for convenient use by concierge but
concealed from direct guest view.
2. Coordinate with equipment and systems. <13A> <13B>
<13C>
3. Provide two electronic lock encoders at this location.
2.13 Safe Deposit Boxes and Viewing Room

A. Program: Provide enclosed rooms to permit guests to store
and privately view valuables.
B. Space Planning:
1. Guest enters the Viewing Room controlled by an
electronic locked door adjacent to Front Desk from the
Reception side.
2. A glass window and pass-through connects the Viewing
Room to the Safe Deposit Box Room. Design the room
so that guest maintains visual contact (visual custody)
of their box as it is removed from the bank of boxes to
when it is passed through the pass window to the guest.
3. Design guest access doors with an 82 cm (32 inch) clear
opening and a maximum threshold height of 1.2 cm
(½ inch).
4. Arrange the Viewing Room to provide the guest with
privacy.
5. Coordinate Safe Deposit Boxes and Viewing Room
design with Front Office Areas <8A> and Front Desk
requirements in this Module above.
C. Features:
1. In Viewing Room, provide a table and chair with mirror
and a telephone.
2. Include a number of fur garment storage boxes as
appropriate for each property.
3. In designated properties, an ATM is placed in the
Viewing Room. Locate the machine so that it is serviced
from the Safe Deposit Box Room side.
D. Finishes: Provide finishes in Viewing Room similar to
Lobby Area; see for Safe Deposit Room. <8A> <GR>
2.14 Public Phones

A. Program: <13B> Provide house telephone and (public) pay
phone as called for in the project Facilities Program.
B. Location:
1. Position telephones for easy identification but discreetly
located for privacy in heavy traffic areas, otherwise
wall phones in vestibules may be provided in other
areas.
2. Generally, group in foyers positioned with coat rooms
and toilet rooms in an area serving public spaces.
C. Phone Booths: Enclosed spaces are preferred; in the Reception

Area, 120 x 165 cm (4'-0" x 4'-6") booth; provide chair and
stone counter with back splash at 82 cm (32 inch) above floor
and phone book shelf below. Allow for chair and knee space.
Phones in function zone may be a stand-up counter.
D. Features:
1. Provide house phones on shelf and lead cord through
hole at back of shelf to phone jack below.
2. Provide phone areas, counter and seat with millwork /
finishes equal to public area design.
3. Include electrical outlet for one phone near front desk
and one outlet in each bank of phones. Mount below
shelf to connect portable TTY device and credit card
reader device to phone.
4. Comply with governing accessibility regulations
including quantity, clearance and reach.
5. Booths for airline boarding passes and ATMs may be
required, refer to the project Facilities Program.
2.15 Public Toilets / Janitor Closet

A. Program: Provide toilet facilities with janitor closet to serve
public and guests at three primary areas:
1. Food & Beverage facilities <3>
2. Function spaces <6>
3. Lobby area circulation
B. Location: Base quantity and proximity of toilet facilities on
the following criteria:
1. Provide separate facilities for male and female.
2. Provide at least one public toilet (male / female) at each
public area level.
3. Do not exceed 40 m (130 ft.) travel distance to a public
toilet.
C. Size / Area: Accommodate calculated toilet fixture
quantities and adjust quantities, if necessary, to meet region
requirements and governing regulations.
D. Fixture Quantities: At a minimum, provide fixtures based
on compliance with governing building codes, accessibility
laws and sanitation regulations.
1. Food & Beverage: 1 toilet fixture for male and one for
female for every 40 seats.
2. Function Space: 1 toilet fixture for every 100 m2
(1,000 sq. ft.), divide equally between male and female
toilet rooms.
3. Lobby: 2 toilet fixtures for male and female, minimum.
E. Fixture Types: See “Plumbing Fixture Schedule” in Module

<15B>.
F. Space Planning:
1. Locate Public Toilets to serve primarily the Food &
Beverage facilities and secondarily the Lobby.
2. Some floor plans may require two separate toilet rooms
if distance between areas is too great or if areas are
located on separate levels.
3. Generally, a separate toilet facility is required to serve
the Function areas.
4. Entrances for male and female rooms are distinct and
separate.
5. Include baffled entries, with minimum 0.91 m (3 ft.)
wide doors.
6. At female toilet room, include a powder room / space
immediately inside entrance with lounge seating,
vanity and framed mirrors, sconces, rich wallcovering,
artwork and full length mirror.
7. Provide a central Janitor Closet with shelf and service
sink. Arrange entry door in a foyer, not visible from
public spaces and housekeeping does not need to cross
Reception Lobby area.
G. Features:
1. Lavatory: Continuous granite vanity with under
counter mounted bowls. <15B>
2. Mirrors: Decorative wood framed wall mirrors for
each vanity; provide wall sconces.
3. Provide residential style (not “institutional”) fixtures,
accessories and finishes.
4. Toilet Rooms: Full height walls of stone or sealed wood
with carved or applied molding details.
5. Privacy Screens: Provide stone modesty panels at
men's urinals.
6. Light Switch: Provide keyed switch. <15C>
H. Finishes: <GR3>
1. Floor / Base: Stone; two colors minimum (base, one
color)
2. Walls: Stone finishes preferred. At a minimum,
stone vanity wall with other walls in top quality vinyl
wallcovering (15 oz. minimum)
3. Ceiling: Smooth painted gypsum board or plaster
2.16 Coatroom
A. Program: Provide within a securable area, adjacent to Pre-
function near its entry circulation and pedestrian flow.
1. See Module <6> Function Spaces.
2. Coatroom(s) may not be required in certain regions or
warm climates.
3. Coat hanging area is concealed from guest view.
2.17 Fixtures, Furniture & Equipment (FF&E)

A. Public Space FF&E - General: See <GR4>. Provide a casually
elegant and relevant interior vernacular with an elegant
eclectic mix and scale of furniture appropriately sized for
the Reception Lobby with the following features:
1. Incorporate beautiful and unusual feature pieces or
antiques used as focal points.
2. Warm finishes are desired for products such as wood,
colored stone, colored metals, etc.
3. Select materials for durability, maintenance, guest
comfort and commercial application.
4. Accent and complement the Public Spaces with a
unique collection of fine art and artifacts that reinforce
the property’s location.
5. Accent framed art with high quality matting and
frames presented in an appropriate style for the relevant
interior vernacular.
B. Carpet: See <GR4>.
C. Area Rugs: <GR4> Accepted weaving techniques include
Axminster, Wilton, hand-tufted, hand-knotted, and hand
woven that are intended for high traffic locations.
1. Resorts: Solution dyed nylon and other synthetic fiber
area rugs are acceptable for resort locations where
humidity is a factor, and must meet the minimum
standards for high traffic durability.
2. Installation: Area rugs require a finished edge and are
installed with area rug padding material sized to fit the
entire rug to within 1" of the area rug dimensions
3. Avoid tassels or yarn borders.
D. Stair Finishes in Public Areas: Use wood or stone finish.
Incorporate hard edge stair nosing with double pad for
use with carpet runners. See “Stair Criteria” section at the
front of this Module.
E. Furnishings: High-end residential look, but of commercial
grade construction for public use.
1. Comfortable and intimate groupings of lounge seating

for waiting. Provide ample quantity of end tables with
table lamps to create warm, intimate and inviting
seating groups.
2. Upholstered overstuffed seating with rich, textured
fabrics or leathers.
F. Feature Items: Elegant and grand decorative focal point
such as grand scale display table, water feature, decorative
columns or similar attribute with elaborate live floral
arrangements.
G. Window Drapery: Elegant drapery treatments where
appropriate; include natural light through grand
architecturally detailed windows.
H. Planters and Plants: Grand scaled elegant planters with live
plants that introduce green and flowering plants or ground
covering for warmth and color.
I. Art and Artifact Displays: Collection of high quality original
artwork, accent light, and high-end accessories that reflect
the property’s location and design theme.
J. Lighting: See Module <15C>.
1. Coordinate use of decorative and grand scale ceiling
fixtures, architectural downlights and wall sconces
throughout.
2. Ample use of table lamp to provide generous low level
ambiance lighting for residential feel and to create
intimate gathering areas.

A. Mechanical & Electrical Devices: Conceal or carefully
incorporate into wall and ceiling designs, HVAC grilles,
sprinkler heads, smoke detectors, alarms, access panels
and similar exposed devices; do not randomly place.
B. Reference: Coordinate with requirements of other Modules
including:
• GR General Requirements
• 12 Elevators & Escalators
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
3
Food & Beverage
3 - Food & Beverage THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
3.1 Program - Design Process 1
3.2 Lobby Lounge 3
3.3 Finishes (Lobby Lounge) 7
3.4 All Day Dining Restaurant - Focused Concept 8
3.5 Private Dining Rooms 15
3.6 Regional / Specialty Restaurant(s) 15
3.7 Finishes - General for Restaurants 16
3.8 FF&E – General for Restaurants 17
3.9 Terrace Dining 19
3.10 Poolside Dining & Bar 20
3.11 Ritz-Carlton Bar 21
3.12 Entertainment Lounge 22

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B F&B| January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Food & Beverage - 3
Food & Beverage

3.1 Program - Design Process
A. Food & Beverage (F&B) Criteria: Development of a food and
beverage program for each Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH)
project requires a market analysis that evaluates a variety
of factors. RCH and Owner mutually agree on an Owner
provided, third party consultant to conduct a market analy-
sis at the beginning of the project and an updated analysis
one year out from opening. RCH can provide recommen-
dations. A project Facilities Program is then developed to
outline the food and beverage program criteria.
B. Restaurant Design: An Owner provided restaurant interior
designer is required for food & beverage facilities. RCH
provides a list of acceptable designers. RCH must accept
designers not on the list prior to start of design.
Design restaurants and lounges to offer unique and imagi-
native dining experiences that are competitive with external
restaurants in the market of the project. A third party opera-
tor may be suggested depending on the market requirements.
C. Dining Experience Variety: Design food and beverage outlets
to accommodate a variety of food and beverage experi-
ences by organizing the area in a series of choreographed
zones that complement guest’s moods or activities. The
experiences and zones include:
• Lounge seating as a transition from the Lobby
• Street entrance, if appropriate
• Reception
• Bar
• Banquette seating
• Table seating
• Private dining
• Terrace dining
• Food preparation: display, exhibition, buffet,
etc.
Ideally, in the spirit of the “Great Room” concept, the food

and beverage experiences offer energy and life to the hotel
public area without detracting from the casual elegance of a
luxury hotel reception.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 |F&B 1

D. Facilities Program: The following factors influence the

market analysis and the development of a project specific
Facilities Program:
• Hotel size and type (business, resort, etc.)
• Availability of competitive facilities
• Hotel location / region
• Quantity of function space
• Availability of program area within the project
• Regional / cultural influences
• Potential for use by the general public
E. Food & Beverage Program: The project specific Facilities
Program provided by RCH outlines the Food & Beverage
facilities required for the project as follows:
1. Brand Requirements:
a. Lobby Lounge with coffee bar
b. Focused All Day Dining Restaurant with bar
c. Private Dining Area: (Included as part of, or as-
sociated with, one restaurant)
d. Club Lounge: See Module <7C> Club Lounge.
2. Additional Requirements: Provide the following when
required by the project Facilities Program or as noted:
a. Regional / Specialty Restaurant: Required where
defined by the project Facilities Program.
b. Terrace Dining: Required at resorts.
c. Poolside Dining: Required at resorts.
d. Ritz-Carlton Bar: Required where defined by the
project Facilities Program.
e. Entertainment Lounge: Only if accepted by RCH.
F. F&B Concepts: Food and beverage concepts for proposed
outlets are provided by the Ritz-Carlton Vice President
Food & Beverage for approval by Ownership. Based on a
RCH acceptable F&B program, F&B concepts and menus
are selected that guide the design of food and beverage fa-
cilities. The F&B concept development process is defined
in the “Momentum” concept book provided by RCH.
G. Licensed & Leased Restaurants: Are reviewed as required for
hotel restaurants.
2 F&B| January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

3.2 Lobby Lounge

A. Program: A great informal socializing space and the pri-
mary focal point of the hotel’s public area; a place to see
and to be seen by others.
1. Provide an atmosphere of casual elegance using wood
molding, wood and stone paneled walls, upholstered
panels, stone bar and table tops for light food and
beverage service.
2. Define areas by changes in floor materials that
differentiate the Lounge from transactional areas
(Reception, Concierge Desk).
3. Intimate seating and low lighting provides a comfortable
venue for socializing, relaxing or light, live musical
entertainment.
4. Food & Beverage: The Lobby Lounge F&B program
includes light snacks and afternoon tea and may
accommodate breakfast and lunch services.
B. Location:
1. If the Entry and Foyer exist at all, minimize the space
to maintain the atmosphere of the RCH. The entry
welcomes guests without barriers or obstacles to their
participation.
2. Integral part of main Lobby area but passively separated
by planters, water features, floor level changes or cased
openings.
3. Position the space within immediate view of main
entrance to Lobby.
4. Exploit exterior views, if present.
5. Positioned or organized around a focal point appropriate
to the locale (fireplace, library wall, significant furniture
piece, bar or unique feature or view, such as a grand
staircase) to serve as a queue or point of interest for
guests entering from the Lobby.
6. Bar Location: Position within sight of Lounge entry to
serve as a point to welcome guests.
7. Adjacency to restaurant to serve as holding lounge is
beneficial.
8. Asia and the Middle East: Position the Lounge seating
to be visible in the main Lobby to promote social
activity within the Entry and Lobby areas.
9. Adjacent to Kitchen access or service corridors.
10. Near public Restrooms.
C. Size / Area: Refer to the project Facilities Program. Verify
size and concept with RCH.
1. Seating: Refer to the project Facilities Program.
2. Ceiling Height: 4 m (13'-0") plus ceiling coffer

D. Functional Spaces: Locate for guests to relax, meet with

other guests or wait for hotel functions. Accommodate the
following spaces.
• Reception Podium
• Seating Areas
• Bar / Pantry with storage space
• Food Service (limited)
• Entertainment (limited)
E. Reception Podium: Provide a podium that is portable for use
when controlled access seating is required, such as when
formal tea service is offered.
1. Location: At Lobby entrance to Lounge.
2. Design: The size and shape should not intimidate or
form a barrier. Curved, elegant profiles are inviting.
3. Features: Include light, telephone, writing surface,
shelves, storage, reservations and seating computer.
4. Utilities: Provide concealed power and telephone
outlets at floor or wall at podium position.
5. Finishes: Stone or wood, complementary to finish of
Lounge.
F. Seating Area: Provide a variety of seating arrangements
to permit guests a choice between quiet, private or open
visible seating locations and to accommodate the solitary
guest or small business group.
1. Seating Arrangement: 50% deuce seating and a mixture
of larger groupings. Regional and cultural norms may
suggest an adjustment to this percentage particularly
in Asia and Middle East where small business groups
may form a higher percentage.
2. Provide a variety of seat groupings to accommodate
lounge seating, seating with tables for tea and light
food service and bar service seating.
3. Bar Area: In addition to seating at the Bar, plan the
seating area to accommodate informal circulation
and socializing space adjacent to the Bar. Consider
a variety of table configurations such as high top
tables to accommodate standing guests and to support
informal socializing and a desk height communal table,
equipped to support informal socializing and social
business (laptops, power outlets, etc.). Avoid a business
center appearance.
4. Library Lounge: At larger hotels, an additional alcove
or room with feature millwork may provide a semi-
private seating area away from the Lounge seating.
5. Lobby Lounge seating may be used as supplemental
seating for the Lobby.

G. Lobby Lounge Bar: Self contained and independent facility

dedicated to serving Lounge guests. This bar does not pro-
vide service to other food and beverage outlets.
1. Location: Position within sight of Lounge entry to
serve as a point to welcome guests.
a. The Bar benefits from convenient access to the
Kitchen area through the Pantry or, indirectly,
through a service corridor.
b. In the Middle East, the bar is not the focal point of
the Lounge and may need to be in a secluded area.
c. Local laws and customs regarding alcoholic
drinks may influence the Bar location.
2. Bar Equipment: See Module <10> for equipment
requirements. Provide one bartender station for every
50 to 75 seats. Provide telephone and P.O.S. <13>.
Coordinate equipment requirements with bar design
and program. See <10> for bar design criteria.
3. Telephone: Provide at Bar <13B>.
4. Bar Access: Avoid bar top lift gates.
5. Back Bar: Provide liquor bottle display that is lockable
with bottles in place. Design cabinets or panels to look
like an integral part of the back bar when closed. provide
additional lockable cabinet storage for trays and other
bottles when bar is not in use. Coordinate requirements
with operations and food facilities consultant.
6. Wait Station: Typically located at the end of the Bar
near the Pantry. The Wait Station is the location where
servers pick up guest beverages and complete service
transactions (P.O.S.).
7. P.O.S.: <13A> Dedicate service space for P.O.S.
equipment. Locate the P.O.S station so that servers
using the P.O.S station do not block servers picking up
drink orders and vice versa. Conceal from direct view
of guests.
8. Side Stands: At larger Lounges, provide additional
service stands for P.O.S. transactions and typical
service activities to reduce the distance to the Wait
Station. Conceal from direct view of guests.
9. Discreetly locate built-in T.V.s (wall or casegood)
behind the bar to permit guests the option of viewing
or avoiding the T.V.. Avoid making the T.V. the focus of
the back bar. Locate small LCD T.V.s at the sides rather
than one large T.V. dominating the center.

H. Pantry: Provide a room adjacent to the bar to support food &

beverage service. Provide facilities for coffee and beverage,
clean and soiled dish storage, bar support and wait station.
1. Avoid direct views into Pantry. Baffle light, noise and
views at Pantry.
2. Lighting: Provide incandescent on dimmer to minimize
impact on Lobby Lounge area.
3. Size: As required to accommodate equipment;
approximately 15 to 20 m² (150 to 220 sq. ft.).
4. Pantry Equipment: Coordinate with Module <10>.
5. Bar Support: Depending on size of Bar and proximity
to kitchen, lockable stroage for additional liquor bottles
and lockable refrigerated wine and beer may be needed.
Coordinate requirements with operations ans food facilities
consultant.
I. Entertainment: Provide limited space for entertainment that
may include a two to three musical instrument setup, soloist,
and / or baby grand piano. <13C>
1. Provide independent sound system with built-in speakers
<13C> and lighting <15C> controlled at the Lobby Lounge.
2. Utilities: Provide power and sound system outlets at floor
or wall concealed from guest view.
J. FF&E (Lobby Lounge) General:
1. FF&E: See Module <GR4> for typical FF&E criteria.
2. Focal Point: Feature a grand, significant furniture piece,
buffet, bar, library wall or unique architectural signature
such as a grand staircase.
3. Furniture: Appropriate to the location and design theme of
the project. Enclose T.V.s in wood cabinets.
4. Bar: Finish bar, back bar, and cabinetry with granite top,
extensive and richly appointed stone or millwork details to
match Lobby finishes and decor.
5. Seating: Combination of inviting, cozy, and intimate
lounge seating such as sofas, lounge chairs with end tables,
low coffee tables, and cocktail tables with 2 and 4 seats.
a. Mix with some overstuffed seating and high-back
lounge seating for drinking and eating. Provide leath-
er seats for exposed frame seating.
b. Provide bar stools at bar with upholstered backs and
foot rail. Avoid swivel seats.
c. Fully upholstered fabric and leather seating is accept-
able provided that colors, patterns, and textures are
durable and easy to maintain.
d. Provide many low level table lamps for intimate
lounge lighting.

6. Tables:
a. Cocktail tables should be tea or continental height
for food and beverage service as well as informal
business meetings.
b. Provide ample side tables for guest convenience to
accommodate lamps.
c. Granite tops (do not use marble due to staining)
or durable protected (glass top) finished wood;
durable scratch and damage resistant finish.
d. At Bar area, provide high top tables for standing
guests.
7. Lighting: Predominately table lamps for low level,
intimate lighting.
8. Artwork / Artifacts: Type and quality coordinated
with Lobby for arrangement, display and focal points.
10. Planters and Plants: Built-in detailed millwork planters
with live plants or large scale free standing planter pots.
Silk or artificial flowers are not acceptable.
3.3 Finishes (Lobby Lounge)

A. General: Typically, the interior Lobby Lounge is an exten-
sion of the Lobby and requires the same materials, finishes
and design as the Lobby.
B. Finish Schedule: See <GR3> for typical criteria and Module
<GR4>.
1. Floor Finishes: Compatible and coordinated with finishes
and colors selected for Lobby. <2>
a. Entrance, Buffet, and Bar Area: Stone or wood;
area behind bar with minimum slip resistance of
0.6 wet / dry – may be provided by rubber mats.
b. Area Rugs: Best quality 100% wool. <GR>
c. Carpet: Top quality, Axminster carpet with bor-
ders in multi-colored dramatic patterns.
C. Ceiling and Walls: Coordinate with Lobby finishes. See <2>
for Lobby requirements.

3.4 All Day Dining Restaurant - Focused Concept

A. Program Concept: Serves 3 meals a day with buffet in an
upgraded, informal setting, consistent with the restaurant
concept. The restaurant is the primary dining facility in
small hotels and is the only dining room serving breakfast.
1. Developing concepts for the restaurant requires
coordination with the Facilities Program, market
studies and RCH.
2. Provide high quality, food and beverage service in
environments that guests and the public will consistently
frequent.
3. Buffet may be utilized for breakfast only or for three
meals a day. Provide flexible design so the buffet area
can be concealed or transformed during off hours.
4. In Asia and Middle East, a buffet and exhibition kitchen
with multiple live stations are required.
5. Terrace Dining: The restaurant concept or location
may require Terrace seating. See “Terrace Dining &
Poolside Dining” below for criteria.
B. Location: The restaurant’s success is critically dependent
on its location and visibility to the guests. Locate in com-
pliance with the following criteria:
1. Visibility: Easily visible or intuitively located from the
Lobby with frontage at public circulation paths from
Lobby to elevators and Function spaces.
2. Signage: Provide exterior signage where appropriate
and unique signage consistent with the restaurant
theme.
3. Daylight: Allow for as much natural day lighting as
possible to create a bright, less formal atmosphere.
4. Kitchen: Direct access required.
5. Entrance: Design entrance to make a statement
consistent with restaurant theme.
6. Street Entrance: The restaurant will typically benefit
from a street entrance or visibility / exposure to the
general public.
7. Wait Area: If possible, locate restaurant adjacent to
Lobby Lounge / Bar or Ritz-Carlton Bar to serve as a
waiting area for restaurant guests.
8. Buffet: Provide direct access from Kitchen.
9. Toilet Rooms: Provide at Lobby in close proximity to
Restaurant and Lobby Lounge entrance. <2>
C. Size / Area: Space includes seating, circulation and buffet.
Refer to the project Facilities Program.
Ceiling Height: 4 m (13'-0") minimum plus ceiling coffers

D. Space Planning Considerations:

1. Level Changes: Design restaurants so that entrance,
buffet, kitchen and a portion of seating is on one building
floor level to accommodate food service equipment and
guests with disabilities.
2. Provide guardrail at open area level changes to prevent
guests from accidentally stepping off or moving off the
upper floor level.
3. Floor Level Changes: If seating areas incorporate
small changes in floor levels within or connecting to
other spaces, comply with government regulations and
the following:
a. Avoid one and two riser stairs.
b. Handrails: Required at both sides; graspable
shape.
c. Ramp(s): Include for guests with disabilities.
d. See “Stair Criteria” in front of Module <2>.
E. Egress: At facilities with 50 or more seats, include emer-
gency egress <14> as follows:
1. Provide a minimum of two exits.
2. Front (entry) exit may connect to the Lobby.
3. Rear exit must allow egress directly to the exterior
through a door, a protected corridor or stair enclosure.
4. Second exit shall not allow egress to or through the
Lobby.
5. Exiting through Kitchen is not permitted.
6. Equip rear exit doors with local alarms <16> and
graphics / signage. <GR2>

F. Functional Spaces: Accommodate the following guest

spaces; service includes a variety of different menus that
generally consist of breakfast, lunch, and dinner.
• Entrance Foyer
• Lounge Seating
• Reception Station
• Waiting Area
• Seating Area - variety
• Buffet / Exhibition Cooking / Semi-open Kitchen
• Service Station (1 per 50 seats)
• Storage Space
• Cashier Station (only where required by code)
• Private Dining Area as per the Facilities Program
• Bar and Cocktail Area
G. Entrance Foyer: Access to restaurants is typically through
a Foyer.
1. Foyer is typically not more than 3600 mm (12 ft.) in the
largest dimension.
2. Easy access from public flow areas with graphics to
identify entrance. <GR>
3. Once inside, the Foyer sets the mood for the facility.
4. Include Reception Station and coat hanging (based on
climate and custom) with reasonable security.
5. If restaurant is enclosed with a perimeter wall, design
entrance to be securable when not in use. Coordinate
closure with interior design.
6. Street Entrance: When a street entrance is provided,
design entry to channel street entry guests directly to
the hotel guest reception, to avoid two points of entry
and reception to the restaurant.
H. Reception Station: (may be Host or Maitre’d)
1. Accommodate two reception positions.
2. Locate one reception point to greet guests, to control
access to room sections, handle guest checks, and Example: Reception Stand
supervise coat check area. Avoid barrier type of hostess
desks.
3. Position to permit good eye contact with arriving
guests.
4. Provide opportunity to observe menu, restaurant
interior and buffet, if possible.
5. Telephone: Provide at desk <13B>.
6. Computer: Provide at desk.
7. Menu storage

I. Waiting Area: Accommodate waiting restaurant guests

at an adjacent Lobby Lounge or Ritz-Carlton Bar. If not
possible, provide a bar and seating area for 20 guests inte-
grated with the restaurant.
J. Seating Area: Divide seating into two or more sections that
can be closed for slow periods and to accommodate private
dining.
1. Provide a variety of table seating choices. Percentages
may vary by region, demand and concept.
50% 2 top tables (deuces)
40% 4 top tables
10% 6 top tables
--% 8 top tables (per regional requirements)
2. Accessibility: Provide table access for guests with
disabilities.
3. Layout of seating should provide views of the buffet
and the exhibition kitchen, as well as easy access from
seating to the buffet and back. Avoid placing tables too
close to the buffet so as to be disturbed by traffic to and
from the buffet.
4. Consider arranging seating with divider and or level
changes to create intimate, semi-private groups of
tables.
5. Avoid “institutional” seating arrangements. Use both
single seat and banquette seating based on food concept.
6. Consider using display shelves, cabinets or different
floor elevations or a combination of these spatial
features as room dividers.
K. Private Dining Area: Provide a seating area to accommo-
date small groups that wish to be acoustically and visually
separated from the main dining area.

1. Location: Preferred location integrates seating with

restaurant seating so that private dining area can be opened
when not in use to accommodate restaurant guests during
peak use.
2. Entry: Preferred location is adjacent to the restaurant entry
foyer so guests do not have to traverse the main seating
area. Typically, the entry includes a wood and glass door.
3. Exterior View / Location: The private dining room might
also be located to take advantage of a prime exterior view
or terrace location.
4. Size: Provide seat count as required by the Facilities
Program.
5. Table: Provide one large table for small rooms or multiple
four tops in lieu of one large table at larger rooms as
determined by RCH.
6. Wine Display: Typically, incorporate wine display walls,
rooms and racks as an amenity in the area.
7. Food Finishing: Consider providing a small chef’s counter
at the end of the table for display preparation and finishing
food offerings.
8. Service: Provide a dedicated Service Station with direct
access to the Kitchen.
L. Food Preparation and Service: <10> All Day Dining Restaurant
food service is provided by a variety of methods based on the
F&B program variables listed in this section. Unless noted
otherwise, food service is provided in one or a combination of
the following in compliance with health regulations:
1. A la Carte / Buffet: An enclosed a la carte kitchen supports
a la carte service and the buffet service presented on
feature tables, credenzas or temporary tables coordinated
with the dining area plan. The breakfast buffet is provided
as defined in the “Buffet Service” section below.
2. A la Carte: An enclosed a la carte kitchen supports a la
carte service.
3. Exhibition Kitchen: An exhibition kitchen is integrated
with a buffet line to support a self-serve guest buffet or a
la carte service.
M. Food Delivery / Service: In general, food is delivered utilizing
one or more of the following service types:
1. A la carte Service
2. Buffet Service (Breakfast and Grand)
3. Exhibition Cooking
4. Exhibition Kitchen
N. A La Carte Service: Guest selected menu items are prepared in a
concealed and enclosed kitchen and served by a waiter.

O. Buffet Service: Use of high quality residential tables and fur-

niture pieces as the base buffet design is highly encouraged.
Recognize ADA requirements in areas where required.
1. It is preferred to break up buffet counters to provide better
customer access and avoid queuing.
2. For preparing food items in the room, a chef’s station
is typically incorporated, built-in or portable including
induction food preparation equipment.
3. Avoid the use of exposed chafing dish service. Prepared
food is served to guests in a self-service or semi-assisted
service mode by one or combination of the buffet service
types described below.
P. Breakfast Buffet: Breakfast only is served from this type buf-
fet; service for lunch and dinner is served “a la carte” from
the kitchen. For evening dinner service, the breakfast buffet
is concealed or arranged into a feature display area as follows:
1. Concealed: If the breakfast buffet will be concealed when
not in use for evening meals, locate the buffet in an alcove,
provide architectural screens or provide an acceptable
alternate solution to RCH. Food service equipment and
heating elements<10> typically are built into a granite
counter as recommended by RCH.
2. Feature Display: If the breakfast buffet will be exposed to
view when not in use for evening dinner, arrange the buffet
for conversion into an attractive counter or credenza with
the addition of a floral display or F&B theme items.
a. Food service equipment for this buffet typically is not
built in the granite counter. Provide an undercounter
refrigerated top to chill food display without use of
ice pans.
b. If space is limited, the buffet may be supplemented
with movable casework or table set for beverage or
food service.
c. For preparing food items such as omelets and waffles,
a chef’s station typically is included.
Q. Grand Buffet: Typically, required in the Middle East and Asia.
Arrangement used to serve breakfast, lunch and dinner in buf-
fet style with the following features:
1. Typically, position as the focal point of the restaurant.
2. Prominent feature of the Three Meal a Day Restaurant
intended to be used and seen throughout the day.
3. Arranged as combination of counters, islands or free
standing cabinets.
4. Arrange buffet in zones and separate counters for hot
entries, cold service, and desert table.

5. Design typically incorporates built-in food service

equipment and live exhibition cooking stations based on
cooking method. <10>
R. Exhibition Cooking: In conjunction with and in support of the
buffet, food is custom prepared to the guest’s request or freshly
cooked to replenish the buffet. At a minimum, this service can
include a single chef’s station for preparing eggs at a breakfast
buffet to an entire cooking line supporting a grand buffet.
S. Exhibition Kitchen: Certain restaurant concepts expose the food
preparation and cooking areas to the guests to showcase the
facility’s menu, culinary talents, and sanitation conditions.
Exhibition kitchens may be integrated with a buffet, support a
buffet or exist as a stand alone feature.
Coordinate finishes and details to verify that interior finishes,
kitchen equipment, lighting and mechanical equipment are
integrated.
T. Service Entrance:
1. Avoid views into Kitchen from dining areas (unless concept
is an exhibition kitchen).
2. Provide one entry and one exit door.
3. Include doors to Kitchen with 0.9 m (3 ft.) wide clear opening
and door vision panel; door swing not to exceed 90 degrees.
4. Doors are power operated on a motion sensor or wall
mounted switch.
5. Provide entrance baffle to prevent kitchen noise, views and
light from entering dining area.
6. Extend dining area finishes into any area exposed to guest view.
7. Lighting: Controlled by dimmers to minimize impact on
dining area.
U. Service Stations:
1. Service station required for every 50 seats (see <10>
Service Stations); including supply of water, coffee, linen,
tableware and soiled dish area. Some food concepts can be
accommodated with one service station and several wait
stands.
2. Base size on selected food service equipment.
3. Avoid cross circulation with public.
4. Design to integrate with restaurant interior design. Extend
dining area finishes into any area exposed to guest view.
5. Fully screen area without exposure to guests or discreetly
control exposed stations.
6. Configure walls enclosing service stations to conceal food
service equipment.
7. Lighting: Controlled by dimmers to minimize impact on
dining area.

8. Include POS as required by Operations.

V. Silver Accessories:
1. Include lockable storage room in Kitchen.
2. Provide electronic door lock compatible with guestroom
lock. <16> <GR>
W. Storage Space:
1. Large enough to accommodate child seats, trays, extra
chairs and similar furniture.
2. Locate to avoid obstruction to exits and general circulation.
3. Possible locations: At reception; at service stations;
near kitchen entry.
X. Entertainment: Provide utilities for a two to three musical
instrument setup, soloist and piano. <13C>
1. Provide independent sound system with built-in
speakers <13C> and lighting <15C> controlled at the
restaurant.
2. Utilities: Provide power and sound system outlets at
floor or wall concealed from guest view.
3. Elevated Area: Provide ramp access; may be located
in back-of-house.
4. Dedicated Space: If the market dictates entertainment
on a frequent schedule, design area to accommodate
setup.
3.5 Private Dining Rooms

A. Program: A Private Dining room may be required in at
least one of the restaurants in the hotel. Refer to the project
Facilities Program.
The criteria noted in All Day Dining section above also applies
to the Private Dining Rooms. Consult Operations for any
differences.
3.6 Regional / Specialty Restaurant(s)

A. Program Concepts: Regional and specialty restaurants en-
compass a wide variety of menus, seating styles, food ser-
vice displays and decor.
1. Developing concepts for specialty restaurants require
coordination with the Facilities Program, market
studies and RCH.
2. Food and Beverage concept documents for a select group
of facilities are available from RCH on request after
market concepts for the project have been determined.
3. Concession: When reviewed and accepted by RCH,
restaurant may be a concession with a stand-alone kitchen.

B. Facilities & Criteria: Comply with the requirements for All

Day Dining Restaurants above.
C. Location: Locate in compliance with the following criteria:
1. Easily visible or located from Lobby with frontage at
public circulation paths.
2. Kitchen: Direct access; multiple restaurants to share
kitchen facilities where possible. Concession requires
a satellite kitchen.
3. Visible from circulation paths from lobby to elevator
and function spaces.
4. Restaurant may benefit from a street entrance or
visibility / exposure to the public and exterior.
D. Size / Area: Area includes seating, circulation, and features.
Refer to the Project Facilities Program.
Ceiling Height: 4 m (13'-0") minimum.
E. Spaces: Accommodate functional spaces to provide guests
with the appropriate experience for having lunch and din-
ner consistent with the F&B concept.
• Entrance
• Reception Station
• Bar / Waiting Area
• Coat Area
• Seating Area
• Private Dining Area (if not provided at Three Meal a
Day restaurant)
• Exhibition Cooking
• Service Station / Wait Side Stations
• Storage Space
• Wine Display
F. Bar / Waiting Area: Specialty restaurant concepts benefit by
including a small bar / waiting area in the reception area.
G. Service Station: One Service Station required for every 50
seats to incorporate supply of water, coffee, linen, table-
ware, and soiled dish area.
3.7 Finishes - General for Restaurants

A. Floor / Base: Combination of hard surface and carpet, de-
pending on food concept.
1. Hard surface, natural stone or other high quality and
durable material at major traffic circulation areas, main
entry, surround at bar and buffet areas.
2. Marble: Do not use marble for buffet floors because of
food staining.
3. Carpet (main dining areas): Good coverage, dramatic
pattern, bright and cheerful with rich contrasting colors.

4. Base: Match floor and décor.

B. Walls: On walls, include architectural articulation in a va-
riety of high-end luxury materials to provide interest and
thematic / design relevance.
C. Ceiling: Design ceilings to include such design elements as
millwork details and multi-level ceilings (coffers, domes or
soffits).
3.8 FF&E – General for Restaurants

A. FF&E: See Module <GR4> for typical criteria.
B. Furniture: Appropriate for location and design direction.
1. Dining Chairs: Provide chairs with upholstered backs,
arms and stretchers.
2. Table Sizes (Standard): Sizes vary based on menu,
place setting, food concept, restaurant type, size and
regional culture. Consult with RCH to define table
sizes. Typical sizes are as follows:
Dimensions Number of Places
76 x 76 cm (30 x 30 inch) 2
76 x 90 cm (30 x 36 inch) 2
90 x 90 cm (36 x 36 inch) 4
90 x 140 cm (36 x 54 inch) 6
90 to 96 cm (36 to 38 inch) round café & bar
100 cm (40 inch) square 4 (Asia)
a. Larger table sizes require a proportionally larger

restaurant area.
b. Asian countries typically require larger table sizes
to accommodate larger place settings.
3. Table Top: Stone or protected durable finished wood.
4. Table Bases: Durable finish; resistant to scratching and
marring.
5. Hardware: Conceal in millwork.
C. Seating: Percentage varies by design and concept.
D. Service Stations: Locate to avoid views and noise at adjacent
dining area. See Three Meal a Day Restaurant.
E. Buffet: (see Food Service requirements above).
1. Granite top (avoid marble because of staining);
extensive millwork / casework base and details.
2. Coordinate buffet millwork and casework design with
the design and theme of the restaurant concept.
3. Avoid a “cafeteria food service” image by integrating
lighting, ceiling, floor, wall, and casework design to
form a food service “show case” display.

4. Where exhaust hoods are required, conceal the hood

elevations into casework or ceiling design.
5. At “grand buffet”, consider high intensity halogen pin spots
to highlight the display.
6. Provide and integrate design of sneeze guards into the
buffet design to protect exposed food on the buffet.
7. Integrate below counter storage and food service equipment
into buffet casework. <10> Front panels of buffet cabinet
are required to be removable to facilitate cleaning.
8. If a concealed buffet is required during evening dinner,
provide detailed, high quality sliding screens or doors on
concealed tracks or provide another acceptable solution to
RCH.
F. Artwork / Artifacts:
1. High quality for various arrangements and displays.
2. Provide a variety of mediums for interest.
3. Select artwork for theme of restaurant or regional influence.
G. Planters and Plants:
1. Detailed millwork for built-in planters with live plants or
large scale, free standing planter pots.
2. Artificial floral arrangements are not acceptable.
H. Decorative Lighting Fixtures:
1. Include decorative ceiling fixtures, wall sconces, recessed
lighting, wall washers and directional pin spotting at dining
tables.
2. Lighting control; three scene, pre-set dimmers. <15C>
3. Locate light controls out of guest view in service entrance.
4. Fluorescent lighting is not acceptable.

3.9 Terrace Dining

A. Program: Provide supplemental food & beverage seating
associated with a restaurant. Refer to the project Facilities
Program.
1. Resort: Terrace Dining is required.
2. Facilities Program: The specific program for exterior
seating is reviewed after the schematic design
establishes the locations and relationships with the
primary food & beverage facilities.
B. Location:
1. Guest & Service Access: Provide from the associated
restaurant.
2. Views: Locate to benefit from exterior views.
3. Supply and Trash: Design service circulation to
accommodate supply and trash management and
temporary trash storage.
C. Features:
1. Service Stations: Provide dedicated Service Stations to
service Terrace seating. Screen Service Stations from
guest view. Comply with restaurant Service Station
criteria.
2. Protection: Provide rain / weather covering and
umbrellas to protect seating as appropriate to the
climate and location. Design coverings and umbrellas
to avoid obstructing views from the restaurant interior
to the exterior.
3. Bird Protection: Design to avoid creating roosts for
birds above dining area. At seaside locations, consider
netting or covering to protect diners from seagull
droppings.
4. Utilities: Provide lighting, power and heaters as
appropriate for the location. Provide water misting
system in hot climates where appropriate.
5. Drainage: Provide positive pavement slope to avoid
ponding water. Design slope with perimeter drains to
keep tables and furniture level.
D. Finishes:
1. Floor: Tile, stone or a combination, with a minimum
coefficient of friction factor of 0.6 wet/dry. Avoid porous
stone and tile subject to absorption of grease and other
food or beverage stains. Ensure grout joints and nature
of floor material do not cause a tripping hazard.
2. Walls: Design space to mitigate building exterior scale
by use of canopies, pergolas, etc. Include wall sconces,
planters and other FF&E to soften the building exterior.

3.10 Poolside Dining & Bar

A. Program: Provide food & beverage service and seating as-
sociated with a swimming pool or water feature.
1. Resort: Poolside Dining & Bar is required.
2. Facilities Program: The project Facilities Program
outlines the requirements for exterior seating and
facilities. Facilities are located after the schematic
design establishes the locations and relationships with
the primary food & beverage facilities.
B. Location:
1. Related Facilities: Poolside Dining & Bar facilities
may be combined with other poolside or beach facilities
including restrooms, pool equipment and recreation
sport facilities.
2. Protection: Provide the appropriate weather and theft
protection and finishes when facilities are exposed.
3. Kitchen Access: Provide access from the kitchen out
to the poolside facility. The Main Kitchen typically
provides service to the poolside dining.
4. Satellite Kitchen <10>: A separate, remote kitchen
may be established to serve the Poolside Dining area
depending on the overall site design, facility size and
location.
C. Design: Develop the area with the food & beverage consul-
tant and RCH operations.
1. Coodrinate with the landscaping to create smaller areas
within a large poolscape.
2. Use sculpture, smaller water features or fire features
for interest and drama.
D. Dining Area: Provide in compliance with “Terrace Dining”
above.
E. Bar: Provide full service bar for beverage service.
1. See Module <10> for equipment requirements.
2. Security: Provide security screens or partitions to
secure bar and liquor when Bar is not in use.
3. T.V.: Provide one or more televisions for bar viewing.
Protect from weather and theft.
4. Telephone: Provide at Bar <13B>.
F. Kitchen: When Poolside Dining & Bar is not directly served
by the hotel kitchen, provide a satellite kitchen.
1. See Module <10> for equipment requirements.
2. Entrance: Provide one “in” and one “out” door for
server entry at kitchen.

3.11 Ritz-Carlton Bar

A. Program: Provide additional lounge seating with bar and
pantry for limited food service. See project Facilities
Program for size and seat count.
B. Location:
1. Adjacent to Lobby and public circulation and associated
with Lobby Lounge and Three Meal a Day Restaurant.
2. May serve as a waiting area for restaurant guests.
3. Provide Back-of-House service and a pantry.
C. Features:
1. Bar: Provide a decorative bar similar to the Lobby
Lounge serving wine and cocktails.
2. Bar Equipment: See Module <10>.
3. Pantry: Provide a full service pantry and wait station,
approximately 32 m² (350 sq. ft.) See Module <10> for
equipment.
4. Entertainment: Provide entertainment utilities similar
to Lobby Lounge. Provide an entertainment / dance
floor area based on the market study.
5. Fireplace: Provide a fireplace similar to the Lobby
Lounge based on the market study.
Example: Bar

3.12 Entertainment Lounge

A. Program: Entertainment Lounges are only included in the
hotel program under limited conditions when reviewed and
accepted by RCH.
Customarily, Entertainment Lounge facilities are “open to
the public” and offer social activities (singing, dancing, meet-
ing, etc.) in addition to F&B menus.
B. Management Approval: Facilities and services of an
Entertainment Lounge not approved or directly managed
by RCH shall be separate and independent of the hotel and
therefore shall not be located within, proximate to, or as-
sociated with the hotel.
C. Location: When provided, base the facility location on the
following factors:
1. Acoustically isolate the Entertainment Lounge from
guestroom, function space, and other public spaces
where noise and audio entertainment would adversely
disturb occupants.
2. Acoustics: Provide Entertainment Lounge envelope of
a minimum of STC 60. Provide design by an acoustic
consultant for review by RCH.
3. Locate exterior entrance based on analysis of users,
such as hotel guests and public.
4. Avoid visually or acoustically disrupting the Lobby.

A. Reference: Coordinate with the requirements of other
Modules including:
• GR2 Signage & Graphics
• GR3 Material & Product Criteria
• GR4 Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment (FF&E)

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
4
Recreation
4A:: Recreation Facilities
4B:: Kids Programs
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
4A
Recreation Facilities
4A - Recreation Facilities THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
4A.1 Overview 1
4A.2 Circulation, Corridors and Service Areas 2
4A.3 Fitness Center 3
4A.4 Reception for Fitness Center 6
4A.5 Exercise Areas 7
4A.6 Locker / Dressing, Grooming, Shower & Toilet Areas 8
4A.7 Sauna 10
4A.8 Steam Room 11
4A.9 Steam Generator Room 12
4A.10 Spa Services 13
4A.11 Treatment Rooms 14
4A.12 Dispensary 16
4A.13 Storage – Attendant 16
4A.14 Swimming and Whirl Pools 17
4A.15 Tennis Courts 28
4A.16 Beach (Resort) 30
4A.17 Golf (Resort) 31
4A.18 Other Outdoor Recreation Facilities 32
4A.19 Systems Coordination 32

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Recreation | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Recreation Facilities - 4A
4A.1 Overview
A. Concept: Provide Recreation Facilities and guest amenities to
offer The Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH) guests a variety of fitness,
wellness and relaxing spaces in a controlled environment.
B. Criteria: Typically, Recreation Facilities and amenities
are dictated by the Facilities Program and require special
consultants for Recreation, Fitness and Spa. The following
factors will influence the Recreation program development
and amenity offerings:
• Hotel size and facilities.
• Memberships – special facilities.
• Availability of competitive facilities.
• Relationship to swimming pool and outdoor activities
• Availability of building area.
• Relationship to full service Ritz-Carlton Spa facility.
• Relationship to a Ritz-Carlton Club or Residence
C. Brand Essentials: Provide the following Recreation Facilities
and guest amenities as required by the Facilities Program:
• Fitness Center with cardio and weight training
• Exercise Areas with Movement Studio
• Locker / Dressing, Grooming, Shower & Toilet Areas
• Relaxation Area
• Sauna and Steam Rooms
• Treatment Rooms
• Swimming and Whirl Pools
• Children’s Pool (Tot Pool)
• Ambassadors of the Environment
• Tennis (Resort)
• Beach
• Golf
D. Size / Area: At a minimum, size facilities to comply with
the project Facilities Program. The exact size and type of
facilities and services are based on the following:
• RCH approved Facilities Program
• Market analysis
• Membership opportunities
• Climate
• Property location
E. Spa Requirements: If the Fitness Center is related to a
hotel spa or is being designed to include a full range of
spa activities, design the facilities in compliance with the
“RCH Spa Design Standards Supplement”.
Spa Services: When a full service spa is not programmed,
provide within the Fitness Center, at a minimum, 2 to 4
Treatment Rooms configured for both genders.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Recreation 1

F. Location: In order of priority, use the following criteria to

generally position the Recreation Facilities:
1. A principal consideration of site planning is the location
of exterior recreation facilities.
2. Convenient and directly accessible by guest elevator
from guestroom areas.
3. In close proximity to or contiguous with other recreation
facilities such as swimming pool and other indoor and
outdoor recreational areas.
4. Do not allow access to recreation facilities from or
through formal public areas, such as Lobbies, Pre-
function or Function assembly spaces and Food &
Beverage areas.
5. Avoid placing exercise areas adjacent to guestrooms,
function areas or other areas that would be disrupted
by exercise activity.
6. As an independent / destination facility.
7. Direct exterior entrance if outside memberships are
planned.
G. Accessibility for Guests with Disabilities: Locate recreation
facilities and guest amenities along accessible routes and
design facilities for access for guests with disabilities.
H. Steps, Stairs & Ramps: See module <16> - Loss Prevention.
I. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR3> and <16>
for window, glass / glazing criteria, restricting window
opening to 10 cm (4 inch) and safety glass requirements.
4A.2 Circulation, Corridors and Service Areas
A. Program: Provide inviting, clear circulation paths
(corridors) between reception, locker areas, lounge and
treatment.
B. Space Planning:
1. Avoid institutional looking, monotonous corridor
configurations.
2. Design corridors with alcoves, archways, enlarged
intersections and knuckles to provide visual relieve and
interest.
3. Ceilings: Provide visual interest by integrating
coffered or domed ceilings with skylights, special paint
finishes, murals and special lighting details.
C. Size:
1. Corridor Width: 1.5 m (5 ft.) minimum.
2. Ceiling Height: 2.75 m (9 ft.) minimum; higher preferred.
2 Recreation | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

D. Features: Consistent with the design theme, incorporate

elements of visual and acoustical interest such as water
features, artwork and artifacts, interesting finishes, lighting
features and natural light.
1. Design: Utilize architectural millwork (ceiling
moldings, base and details), decorative lights, focal
casework, mirrors, etc.
2. Floors: A combination of wood, tile, carpet or stone.
3. Ceilings: Coffers with millwork trim, recessed lighting
and skylights (where possible).
E. Service Areas:
1. Service Closet: Provide a janitor closet containing floor
sink and shelves for cleaning products and equipment
to maintain the common areas and adjoining corridors.
Locate adjacent to the common circulation path.
2. Storage Room: Provide a secure room for storage of
equipment, supplies and retail product.
a. Clean / Soil Areas: Provide a separate area for
storage of clean towels and for storage of soiled
towels.
b. Service Entry: Where possible, provide service
entry direct to storage and laundry storage to
avoid traffic through public areas.
4A.3 Fitness Center
A. Program: Provide a Fitness Center for RCH as defined by
the Facilities Program.
1. The Fitness Center provides services to guests and, if
programmed, limited executive memberships.
2. Representative layouts are provided by RCH.
3. Layouts and finishes are prepared by the Interior
Designer.
4. The facility is designed with finishes consistent with
upscale health clubs.
B. Planning - General: Plan and design for the following:
1. Locate the Fitness Center so guests do not have to
cross Public Areas to arrive from guestrooms or go to
exterior recreation.
2. Acoustics: Acoustically separate relaxation areas
(quiet) from exercise and public circulation areas (high
activity). Design and construct separation enclosures
with STC rating of 55.
3. Circulation: To the extent possible, the Fitness Center
plan provides for staff visual observation of Fitness
Center circulation, a clear division of male and female
facilities and clear paths of travel to emergency exits.

4. Fitness Center Exercise Area: Do not locate exercise

equipment next to or in the indoor pool environment
because moisture, condensation, chlorine and wet
bathing suits corrode equipment.
5. Wet / Dry Areas: Consolidate wet functions (sauna,
steam and shower) into zones to minimize the migration
of water to dry areas.
6. Natural Light: Incorporate natural daylight and
views into the plan wherever possible through the
use of windows, skylights and outdoor areas (while
safeguarding the privacy of lockers, showers and
bathing areas).
7. Privacy: Sensitively design locker, toilet, and
shower areas to minimize views. Generally, provide
separate sauna and locker areas for male and females.
Accommodate regional laws, customs, and cultural
norms regarding privacy.
8. Sanitation: Plan facilities, detail materials and select
finishes with a high priority for durability, ease of
maintenance and sanitation. Avoid use of white grout
for floors.
C. Management Control: Facilities and services of Recreation
Facilities not approved or directly managed by MI shall be
separate and independent of the hotel and therefore shall
not be located within, proximate to, or associated with the
hotel.
1. There shall be no contractual relationship between the
hotel or hotel manager and the unapproved Recreation
Facility, including for example, any ownership interest
or profit sharing.
2. The hotel will not provide, promote, support, assist,
reimburse, barter, or share the hotel operational services
or facilities listed in Module <3> Food & Beverage
for Entertainment Lounges or any others of a similar
nature.
3. If hotel support facilities or services are requested by
a Recreation Facility vendor, the hotel’s facilities or
services may be offered at non-preferential, market
rates at Marriott’s sole discretion.
4. For Recreation Facilities approved by RCH, base the
facility on the program criteria and factors previously
stated.

D. Exercise Support & Technology: The following support and

technology is required throughout the Fitness Center:
1. Television: 42 to 50 inch flat panel TVs; located
throughout the facility (circuit training, free weight and
core / stretching areas).
2. Artwork and Accents: Wellness inspired to express
focus and strength. Avoid literal references to sporting
activities.
3. USB connectivity and iPod access.
4. Clock: Provide with second hand and mount on wall in
each room of the facility.
E. Lighting: A lighting designer is strongly recommended
to coordinate requirements for the lighting design and
installation. Demarcate the various zones through multi-
layered lighting for ambient and task lighting, unique
ceiling coffers, recessed and accent fixtures. General
illumination of locker, exercise, and service areas utilize
recessed, warm tone lights for good skin tones.
1. In Relaxation and Reception areas, use incandescent
wall and ceiling lights on dimmers.
2. Use halogen spotlights to highlight focal points and to
increase light levels at grooming and vanity areas.
F. Speakers: Provide throughout the exercise areas;
architecturally conceal speakers in reception area and
treatment areas.
G. Emergency Phones: Provide house phones with direct dial to
front desk and security within the pool and exercise areas.
H. Programmed Spaces: Provide the following Fitness Center
spaces as required by the Facilities Program:
• Reception
• Circulation / Corridors / Service Areas
• Exercise (cardiovascular, weight, movement studio)
• Locker, Shower, Grooming & Toilet Areas
• Sauna
• Steam Room
• Steam Generation Room
• Food & Beverage
• Spa Services
• General storage

4A.4 Reception for Fitness Center

A. Program: Provide an area that is an inviting introduction to
the Fitness Center to arrange appointments and to serve as
a control point for Fitness Center activities.
B. Entrance / Foyer: Announce the Fitness Center location with
an entrance portal.
1. Identify the entrance with a combination of signage,
millwork, lighting and a pair of glass doors with a
direct view to the Reception.
2. Plan circulation to avoid service traffic through the
Reception area.
3. Include a sense of privacy but with fitness activities
viewable from entering beyond the Reception area.
4. Control entry at entrance door with electronic remote
access reader compatible with guestroom lock <16> to
permit controlled guest / membership access.
C. Reception Space - Area: Waiting and greeting area with
informal seating for approximately 2 to 3 guests. Provide
upholstered seating.
D. Retail (optional):
1. Location: When market conditions prevail, the Fitness
Center Reception area may serve as an entry or
circulation path to related health and beauty retail such
as hair styling, facial, barber or nail care.
2. Ventilation: Facilities that use chemicals with strong
or offensive odors; provide a self-contained ventilation
system to prevent chemical odors from migrating
through the Fitness Center, food and beverage and
other hotel areas.
3. Design retail areas of Fitness Center to comply with
the approval process and retail design criteria in Retail
Module <5>.
E. Reception Desk: Focal point of the Reception area.
1. Position generous reception desk to accommodate two
attendants comfortably, and to accommodate arriving
guests and passive surveillance of the exercise areas.
2. Reception Desk finishes typically include a combination
of millwork and stone with granite counter to
accommodate standing guests and work surfaces for
seated and standing attendants.
3. Reception Desk or adjacent cabinet includes an
opportunity to merchandise logo and sports related items.
4. Accommodate equipment such as computer and P.O.S.
<13A> and telephone <13B> for sales transactions, out
of guests’ view.

5. Provide controls for the Fitness Center TV, speaker and

video <13C> systems.
F. Office: Immediately common to the Reception Desk.
1. Include a management office for back-of-house activities,
storage of equipment, supplies and retail products.
2. Where possible, provide service entry direct to storage
and laundry storage to avoid traffic through public areas.
4A.5 Exercise Areas
A. Program: Assigned areas will generally accommodate the
following core functions:
1. Cardiovascular Area
2. Movement Studio / Stretching and Aerobics Area
3. General Exercise Area
4. Attendants Station / Office (at larger facilities if not
provided at Fitness Reception)
B. Cardiovascular Area: First area accessible from Reception
and Locker facilities.
1. Position and orient area to benefit from exterior views;
visible to / from Reception and Waiting Area.
2. Equipment use is not hampered by external distractions.
3. Provide passive entertainment features, such as built-in
televisions <13C>, video with headphones at each piece of
equipment, large screen audio / video presentations <13C>
and views to the swimming or other recreational terraces.
4. Provide towel distribution and drop.
5. Provide complimentary beverage station.
C. Movement Studio, Stretching and Aerobics Area: Reasonably
isolate the area with passive acoustical separation from
other spaces.
1. Activities generally are group supervised and typically
do not benefit from distractions but benefit from sense
of privacy.
2. Maximize introduction of controlled exterior views and
introduction of natural light.
3. Provide storage closet for mats and other loose
equipment.
4. Provide adjustable light levels for different mood
requirements.
5. Mirror Wall: Provide at one wall.
6. Wall Blocking: Provide blocking in wall to support
equipment and ballet bar attachment.

D. Circuit Training & Free Weight Area: Provide exercise areas to

support many work out opportunities, such as selectionized
weight stack machines, plate load machines, and free
weights; benches with dumbells / barbells.
1. Area Activities: Generally, activities in this area
are individual and typically require a high level of
concentration and self monitoring.
2. Lighting: Provide high lighting levels.
3. Down Lights: Do not locate directly above stations
where guests are reclining and lights shine in their eyes.
4. Mirrors: Provide full height wall mirrors.
5. Sound System: Include background music <13C>
(without video).
6. Views: Great exterior views are preferred, ideally over
lush landscaping.
7. Natural Lighting: Maximize natural lighting into the
space through full-height windows and skylights.
E. Accepted Equipment Manufacturers: Matrix Fitness, Life
Fitness, and Technogym.
4A.6 Locker / Dressing, Grooming, Shower & Toilet Areas
A. Locker / Dressing Areas: Include separate and complete men’s
and women’s locker and dressing facilities.
1. Location: Adjacent to Grooming, Shower, Toilet areas,
Sauna and Steam Rooms.
2. Locker Type: Custom, pre-finished with finished wood
end walls and trim as selected by Interior Designer.
Include locker numbers, electronic locks and polished
chrome or brass hardware and number plaques.
Laminate interior surfaces and provide with clothes
hooks, door mounted mirrors and jewelry shelf.
3. Locker Sizes: 38 cm (15 inch) wide / double tiered
500 mm (20 inch) deep. If designated for outside
members, provide 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inch) storage
lockers.
4. Quantity: Confirm quantity with RCH and
requirements of full service spas, if programmed.
Typically, provide 15% of the key count plus lockers
required for membership. In business hotels, provide
minimum of 10 double-tiered, wood lockers. Resort
locker quantities are determined by RCH.
5. Accessibility: Provide a minimum of 5% of the lockers
that are within the range of reach limits required by
governing accessible regulations.
6. Seating: Upholstered decorative benches or ottomans.

7. Mirrors: Provide a minimum of one, framed, full length

mirror mounted on wall.
8. Towels: Locate towel dispensing and return hamper near
entry in an alcove custom designed to integrate with
interiors. Do not use free standing bins (rattan, plastic, etc.)
for soiled towels and trash.
9. Changing Room: Where feasible, minimum of one private
changing room complete with bench, mirror, robe hook
and decorative lighting.
10. Audio: <13C> Provide central sound system.
B. Grooming: Include separate and complete men’s and women’s
grooming areas.
C. Location: Position as a transition area between shower and
locker area.
D. Features:
1. Vanity Area: Arrange as individual alcoves or as a continuous
stone counter on millwork base cabinets with well defined
grooming stations. At each station include a framed mirror,
wall light sconce, recessed ceiling light, lavatory bowl, electric
outlet (GFI) located below the grommeted counter top for the
hand held hair dryer.
2. Towels: Provide open shelves, alcove or cabinet for
dispensing and displaying clean towels.
3. Swimsuit Dryer - Provide in a location convenient to the
changing area.
E. Shower Areas: Include separate and complete men’s and
women’s shower facilities. Provide decorative or millwork
element to display towels and amenities.
1. Showers: Individual, two-chamber enclosures
approximately 1 x 2 m (3'-4" x 6'-6"), minimum.
2. Quantity: Provide a minimum of one shower for each 100
keys for men and equal quantity for women plus showers
required for membership use.
3. Features: Include privacy door at entry. At drying chamber,
provide bench seat and robe hook and frameless glass door
to shower chamber. If space allows, direct shower and
arrange drying chamber to function without a door.
F. Toilets: Include separate and complete men’s and women’s
toilet and facilities.
1. Location: Strictly separate from, but contiguous to dressing
and wet areas.
2. Directly accessible from Foyer to Locker Rooms to allow
guest access without traversing the dressing and wet areas.
3. Where feasible, position spaces to permit joint usage by
swimming pool users and other outdoor activity areas.

4. Features:
a. Include vestibules to toilet and urinal area, vanity
and lavatory functions.
b. Control views (garden courts or architectural
glass walls and screens).
c. Toilet Compartments: Enclosed, with louvered
wood doors and stone finish.
d. Urinal Screens: Stone; floor and wall supported.
e. Vanity: Stone top with under-counter supported
bowls.
f. Mirror: Framed mirror at each vanity station with
lights above.
G. Service Closet: Provide a janitor closet containing floor
sink and shelves for cleaning products and equipment to
maintain Locker Rooms, Grooming, Shower, Toilet areas,
Sauna and Steam Rooms.
4A.7 Sauna
A. Program: Provide separate Saunas in men’s and women’s
wet lounge area for guest relaxation prior to treatments or
as a relaxation amenity to be enjoyed in combination with
adjacent Steam Room and cool plunge pool facilities.
B. Space Planning:
1. Wet Lounge: Locate Sauna in a common “wet area”
adjacent to steam room, whirl pool, cool plunge pools
and aromatherapy steam room, if programmed.
2. Shower: Position Sauna near locker room showers
within a common wet zone to avoid traversing dry
areas.
3. ADA: Accessible.
C. Size / Area:
1. 7.5 m2 (80 sq. ft.) minimum.
2. Ceiling: 2.2 m to 2.4 m (7 ft. to 8 ft.) maximum.
D. Features:
1. Construction: Commercial; prefabricated redwood or
cedar walls, ceiling, two tiered benches, heater guard
and removable ductboard floor by Helo or equal.
2. Insulation: Minimum of R11; continuous foil faced
vapor barrier.
3. Floor: Waterproof, when above occupied area.
4. Door and Frame: Prefabricated wood with insulated,
tempered glass vision panel for passive surveillance of
interior.
5. Controls: Time and temperature; programmable. High
temperature alert control to limit system.

6. Heater: Commercial grade, wall mounted, electric,

stainless construction with rocks; sized per sauna
volume. Typically, size to maintain 65º to 82º C (150º
to 180º F).
7. Signage: See <GR> for applicable safety signage.
Provide equipment operation signage and safety
signage adjacent to timer and temperature control at
exterior of sauna.
8. Robe Hooks: Immediately outside door, provide robe
/ towel hooks to accommodate the capacity of the
sauna.
E. Duress Alarm: <16> Security alarm; locate mushroom
button at interior of room near entrance door.
F. Utilities:
1. Floor Drain: For cleaning floor.
2. Lights: Waterproof.
3. Ventilation: Passive fresh air intake below heater and
exhaust near ceiling.
G. Finishes - Sauna: Floor: Ceramic tile floor with removable
wood ductboard walking surface in front of bench area.
4A.8 Steam Room
A. Program: Provide separate Steam Rooms in the men’s
and women’s wet lounge area for guest relaxation prior to
treatments or as a wet relaxation amenity to be enjoyed in
combination with adjacent sauna and dip pool facilities.
B. Space Planning:
1. Wet Area: Locate Steam Room in a common “wet
area” adjacent to sauna, whirl pool, cool plunge pools
and aromatherapy steam room, if programmed.
2. Shower: Position Steam Room near locker room
showers within a common wet zone to avoid traversing
dry areas.
3. ADA: Accessible.
C. Size / Area: 7.5 m2 (80 sq. ft.) minimum.
D. Construction:
1. Bench: Typically field constructed similar to wall
construction. Two tiered (to permit seating at different
temperatures); 45 cm (18 inch) high; Slope seat 3 cm /
m (⅜ inch per ft.) to avoid ponding condensation.
2. Floor: Water proof membrane if above occupied area;
positive slope 4 cm / m (½ inch per ft.) to floor drains.
3. Walls: Typically field constructed of masonry; vapor-
proof construction to prevent migration of moisture.

4. Ceiling: Sloped: 6 cm / m (¾ inch per ft.), domed or

vaulted (not flat) to prevent condensation from dripping
on occupants. Cement plaster; vapor-proof construction
to prevent migration of moisture into ceiling structure.
E. Features:
1. Nozzles: Position steam outlet nozzles to avoid contact
with occupants.
2. Signage: See <GR> for applicable safety signage.
3. Controls: Remote at steam generator to maintain room
at 43º to 49º C. (110º to 120º F.).
4. High Temperature Alert: Provide to limit system.
5. Shower: Optional at larger steam rooms.
6. Robe Hooks: Immediately outside door, provide robe /
towel hooks to accommodate the capacity of the steam
room.
F. Door and Frame:
1. Frame: Aluminum
2. Door: Frameless glass; Kallista “Imperial” series or equal.
3. Seal: Vapor proof, to avoid steam in adjacent areas.
4. Threshold: Ceramic tile or marble; to contain water.
G. Duress Alarm: <16> Security alarm; locate mushroom
button at interior of each room near entrance door.
H. Utilities: <15>
1. Ventilation: <15A> Provide exhaust from above ceiling
area (not from steam room).
2. Steam Generator: Locate in adjacent room.
3. Drains: Place at low points of sloped floor and at
exterior side of entrance door to collect condensate.
4. Lighting: <15C> Waterproof type; under bench and
wall sconces.
I. Finishes: <GR>
1. Floor: Stone or porcelain tile. Slip resistant (wet / 0.6).
2. Walls: Stone, glass or porcelain wall tile. Consider
incorporating a decorative design with the tiles,
consistent with the project design theme, to provide
visual interest.
3. Ceiling: Stone, glass or porcelain wall tile.
4A.9 Steam Generator Room
A. Program: Provide a utility room to remotely locate the
steam generator equipment that produces steam for the
Steam Rooms.
B. Space Planning:
1. Locate Steam Generator Rooms as close as possible to
Steam Rooms being served and within manufacturer’s
recommendations.

2. Provide access from a common corridor or from locker

/ attendant area for maintenance and to adjust controls.
C. Size / Area: As required to locate equipment and provide
maintenance clearance.
D. Features:
1. Steam Generators: Commercial grade for continuous
use.
2. Controls: Independent thermostat to control each
room, automatic flush, high temperature limit, sight
glass, low water cut-off, pressure gauge.
3. Door and Frame: Wood; provide louver if required for
ventilation.
E. Utilities: Provide water and electric service, and access to
drain.
4A.10 Spa Services
A. Program: Provide facilities required by the Facilities
Program. At a minimum, provide 2 to 4 treatment rooms
and spaces described below. Refer to RCH Spa Design
Standards for spas larger than 375 m² (4,000 sq. ft.)
1. Shower facilities (either the locker shower or a dedicated
shower) are required adjacent to sauna, steam and
plunge pool areas.
2. Provide Treatment facilities, if programmed, with a
shared common vestibule or gallery. Design route with
a direct link to Locker Rooms.
Figure 1 - Spa Adjacency Diagram
Service Connection
Salon
To Indoor Reception Hotel Lobby

Pool
Spa Functions Access From

B. Programmed Spaces: Provide the following Spa Services

spaces as required by the Facilities Program:
• Treatment Room(s)
• Dispensary
• Storage - Attendant
4A.11 Treatment Rooms
A. Program: Provide a quiet, soothing, functional room(s) for
performing massage and facial treatments.
1. The environmental comfort of the patron is essential
and requires adjustable control of temperature, lighting
and audio.
2. Treatment rooms are scheduled by appointment and
may be used by either sex.
B. Space Planning:
1. Provide access to Treatment Rooms from the locker
rooms and a screened corridor.
2. Type: Group Treatment Rooms together for efficient
operation by attendants.
3. Acoustics: Treatment Rooms require an absolutely
quiet environment. Avoid locations near noise sources.
Provide walls with STC 55.
C. Size / Area: 11 m² (120 sq. ft.) minimum.
D. Features:
1. Treatment area for adjustable massage, facial table and
OS&E.
2. Robe hooks.
E. Window(s): Natural light from exterior window is
beneficial.
1. Provide operable or fixed operation based on location
and climate.
2. Provide an appropriate block-out treatment such as
interior shades, shutters, blinds, etc; selection by
Interior Design.
F. Door: Solid core wood with the following:
1. Acoustical seal.
2. Latch set only (no lock) with quiet operation.
3. Solid door frame of wood (preferred) or filled hollow
metal to minimize noise.
G. Cabinets: Wall and base cabinets 0.91 m (3'-0") high; 0.61
m (2'-0") deep; length, 1.8 to 2.4 m (6 to 8 ft.) with stone
top and the following components:
1. High quality stained or painted wood.
2. Adjustable shelves with locks at drawers and doors.
3. Door and drawer silencers (felt or rubber).

4. One section of the wall cabinet with glass doors and

light for product display.
5. Section for laundry hamper; covered.
6. Section for trash; covered.
7. Sink: Porcelain with hot and cold water with mixing
valve and gooseneck spout.
8. Section behind doors to conceal hot towel warmer and
hot stone unit.
H. Ceiling: Patrons view the ceiling for most of their treatment,
so every design aspect of the ceiling requires review.
Integrate the design features to reinforce the patron’s
relaxation.
1. Lights: Avoid harsh, direct lights above treatment
area.
2. Speakers, sprinklers: Control placement.
3. Diffusers and Grilles: Avoid direct drafts on patrons.
Integrate or conceal diffusers and grilles with ceiling
design.
4. Design: Include interesting features (coffers, vaults,
Chroma Therapy lights).
I. Audio: Equip each treatment room with a sound system with
individually controlled channel and sound level selection.
<13C>.
J. Thermostat: Provide each room with individual controls
<15A>.
K. Electrical: <15C>
1. Floor outlet for massage table.
2. Counter outlets; 4 for related appliances.
3. Wall outlet; 2 near head for steamer and product trolley
(so that room can also accommodate facials).
4. Controls: Organize audio, temperature and lighting
controls in one location with a unified appearance.
L. Lighting:
1. Decorative and indirect lighting on dimmer controls.
2. Under cabinet lights for counter work area.
M. Finishes: <GR3>
1. Floors: Wood or stone as appropriate by area (unless
prohibited by code). Do not use rubber mats.
2. Walls: Paint or vinyl wallcovering.

4A.12 Dispensary
A. Program: Provide a “kitchen” style facility for the storage,
mixing and conditioning of spa treatment preparations
by employees (aestheticians, therapists). The area is also
used to store, prepare and clean treatment equipment and
utensils and manage clean and soiled linen and terry.
B. Location: Centrally locate near treatment room area to
provide employees with convenient access to Dispensary
before and after each spa treatment.
C. Size: Refer to the Spa Facilities Program.
D. Features / Equipment:
1. Work Counter
2. Telephone
3. Computer Workstation: Provide with printer for
employees to monitor treatment schedules and
appointments.
4. Base and Wall Cabinets: Adjustable shelves; drawers
with locks; cabinet doors with locks. Wall cabinet
doors with glass windows permit visual observation of
contents without signage.
5. Refrigerator: Residential style with freezer.
6. Microwave / Large Capacity Hot Towel / Hydrocullator.
7. Dishwasher: Commercial grade may be required.
Provide sound attenuation.
8. Sink: Two compartment, stainless steel with hot and
cold faucet set with swivel, gooseneck spout.
E. Finishes: <GR>
1. Floor and Base: Vinyl composition tile or ceramic tile
2. Walls: Painted
3. Ceiling: Acoustical, lay-in tile
F. Lighting: Ceiling and undercabinet fluorescent. Verify that
the undercabinet lighting does not produce heat that can
ruin spa products in the cabinet on the bottom shelf.
G. Electrical Outlets: Provide a minimum of one duplex outlet
for every (2 ft.) of counter.
4A.13 Storage – Attendant
A. Program: Provide a storage area to accommodate bulk
storage of supplies (towels, robes, slippers, etc.) required
by the attendant and general equipment, supplies and
accessories for grooming and locker area.
B. Space Planning: Adjacent to Locker Area to conveniently
re-supply lockers and to passively supervise access to the
room.

C. Size: At small facility – large closet. At larger facility –

based on RCH operations.
D. Features:
1. Shelving for towels, robes, slippers and equipment.
2. Door: Lockable.
3. Security: Provide solid ceiling or walls to underside of
structure above to deter theft.
E. Finishes: <GR>
1. Floor and Base: Vinyl tile with resilient wall base.
2. Walls: Painted.
3. Ceiling: Painted or acoustical tile.
4A.14 Swimming and Whirl Pools
A. Program: Provide swimming and whirl pools as the
Facilities Program dictates. Always enlist a certified pool
consultant.
1. Contiguous indoor / outdoor swimming pools may be
considered in seasonal locations.
2. Larger facilities may require separate pools, especially
where the outdoor pool is the center of a resort
environment.
3. At urban sites with limited recreation area, provide
“motion” pool to accommodate 2 or more swimmers.
B. Standards & Codes: Comply with the current edition of IBC
(International Building Code) including governing building,
structural, mechanical, electrical, health regulations and
codes, considering climate and soil requirements.
C. Location: The main swimming pool location is of prime
importance. Place in prominent focal location.
1. At ocean properties, place between the hotel public
spaces and the beach.
2. In resort projects, two pools may be required, a
recreation pool and a secondary pool adjacent to
function facilities that may be used for recreation and
functions. RCH provides input and direction regarding
this matter.
3. Where feasible, position recreation decks and
swimming pools near the Fitness Center, which are
jointly accessed from guestroom elevator core and
Fitness Center.
4. Provide indoor pools with exterior views, if possible.
5. Outdoor pools require a location with exposure to
direct sun light.

D. Pool Area Controlled Access: Develop a program to secure the

perimeter of swimming pool and whirl pool areas during after
hours and unauthorized use based on the following:
1. RCH Loss Prevention review <16>.
2. Governing codes and regulations.
3. Operational logistics and location of pools and recreation
areas.
4. No path of building emergency egress through the
swimming pool and whirl pool area.
5. Primary access point for guest arrival at pool is toward
shallow end of pool. Provide to pool, 1.5 m (5 ft.) wide
paths to allow two persons to pass or walk side-by-side.
E. Control Features: Based on the control program, provide
controlled access to pool perimeters and recreation areas using
one or more of the following features:
1. Barrier: Provide 1.2 m (4 ft.) high barrier (fence or
landscape hedge) when the pool is within the confines of the
hotel or 1.5 m (5 ft.) high barrier when bordering adjacent
properties. Comply with the Loss Prevention Program and
governing regulations.
2. Doors: To limit access by unauthorized persons or control
access at unauthorized times, provide electronic operated
lock reader mechanism <16> to pool enclosure and whirl
pool areas.
3. Gates: To limit entry by small children, provide child
resistant gate hardware in compliance with the following:
a. Provide self-closing / latching gate with release
hardware.
b. Locate the hardware on the poolside of gate and install
137 cm (54 inch) minimum from bottom of gate.
c. When the hardware is located less than 137 cm (54
inch) from the bottom of the gate, install the device at
least 8 cm (3 inch) below top of gate.
d. Design gate and barrier without an opening greater
than 13 mm (½ inch) within 46 cm (18 inch) of the
self-latching hardware.

F. Safety: Safety is of prime importance in pool design and

associated areas.
G. Signage: Provide regulatory / safety and “No Diving” signage.
<GR> <16>
H. Pool Designs: Mechanical and structural engineers or a
qualified swimming pool design / build contractor, develops
the swimming pool mechanical operation and structural
design.
1. Accessibility: See ADA requiremetns. Provide a
permanent transfer lift at each pool and whirl pool. See
ADA requirements for additional pool access criteria.
2. Structure: Gunnite concrete structure with pool plaster or
tile selected by the interior designer.
3. Configure primary swimming pool to facilitate
simultaneous usage by lap swimmers and recreational
bathing. See the Facilities Program.
a. Water Surface Area: 40 m2 (1,500 sq. ft.) min.
b. Minimum Pool Depth: 1.0 m (3’-4”)
c. Maximum Pool Depth: 1.5 m (5 ft.)
d. Maximum Slope of Pool Bottom: 1 to 10
4. Diving is prohibited.
5. Minimum Pool Depth Area: Approximately 15 to 20
percent of the total pool area.
6. Shallow Area: Set visually apart from remaining pool by
means of removable floating lifeline or contrasting tiles
from pool edges and extend across bottom.
7. Pool Perimeters: 1.2 m (4'-0") minimum, fully accessible
for general maintenance and life saving / rescue purposes.
8. Access: Include stair access with handrails at shallow end
of pool with additional stairs or ladders every 23 m (75 ft.)
around pool perimeter. Include railings on both sides of
stairs.
9. Steps: Provide 0.05 m (2 inch) slip resistant edge,
contrasting in color on vertical and horizontal nose of each
pool step and bench.
10. Skimmers: Provide NSF approved, in-wall skimmers.
a. Quantity: 2 minimum; 1 for every 38 to 45m2 (400 to
500 sq. ft.) of water surface, typical.
b. Use skimmers for surface return water as opposed to a
continuous scum gutter at the pool and spa perimeter,
except as required by code.
c. Covers: Provide cover to match pool deck to conceal
skimmer cover.
d. Equalizer Lines: Design in compliance with the
Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act.
e. Gutter: Larger pools may require a continuous
perimeter gutter by code.

11. Coping: Interior Designer selects a continuous coping

band with integral hand / finger grip at the pool edge
consistent with the project paving and hardscape
materials. Use pool coping compatible with the
finish texture and material used for the slip resistant,
pool deck paving. Decks with coping receive, as a
minimum treatment, a natural stone paving, using
materials conducive to pool operation and sealed with a
penetrating sealer to minimize staining and maximize
cleaning ability. Slip resistant of 0.6 wet / dry. Select
stone, approved by the RCH, for its resistance to
staining and heat absorption.
12. Return Inlets: Locate at 4.5 m (15 ft.) intervals along
the pool perimeter wall.
13. Floor: Select floor tile with minimum coefficient of
friction factor of 0.6 wet / dry.
14. Accessories: Slides, swimming tunnels and bridges
are prohibited unless reviewed and approved by RCH.
15. Lighting: <15C> Provide underwater incandescent
lights of 5 Watts / m2 (0.5 watts / sq. ft.) or equal
intensity by energy efficient LED lights.
a. Protection: GFCI
b. Circuit: Emergency
I. Pool Deck Design:
1. Deck Width: Provide a minimum of 1.2 m (4 ft.) at pool
perimeters for rescue assistance circulation. Provide
1.5 m (5 ft.) at ADA required access paths. Not less
than 3 m (10 ft.) at any point with seating.
2. Deck Slope: Slope away from pool to perimeter drains
or deck drains at a minimum of 2% (2:100) (¼ inch per
foot) and a maximum of 4%. Standing water on pool
deck is not permitted.
3. Deck Drains: Install flush to deck finish surface.
4. Deck: Provide deck finish with minimum coefficient of
friction factor of 0.6 wet / dry.
5. Concrete & Carpet: Smooth troweled concrete finishes
and carpet are not permitted at patios, walkways, pool
decks or areas where people are circulating with wet
feet.
6. Deck Joints: Seal deck joints with color matching
polysulfide sealant rated for pool use. Do not use wood
divider strips.
7. Decorative Fittings & Nozzles: If exposed to view,
provide stainless steel, corrosion resistant metal or
bronze plumbing fittings and nozzles.

8. Shower / Footbath: Provide shower / footbath on the

pool deck adjacent to the pool when a shower is not
accessible in the locker / changing area. Provide a
shower head and drain as follows:
a. Provide when required by the governing authority.
b. Provide when pool is adjacent to a beach or play
area to avoid sand and soil on pool deck and in
pool.
c. Provide when a shower is not available at an
adjacent facility (locker, guestroom, etc.).
9. Toilets: If not immediately accessible to the Fitness Center,
include separate men’s and women’s toilet facilities.
10. Lighting: Locate lighting at pool perimeter to avoid
maintenance / replacement activities over the water
surface.
J. Outdoor Pool - Resort:
1. Design Criteria for exterior resort Swimming Pool:
a. 1.5 m2 (18 sq. ft.) of pool water surface per key,
minimum 375 m² (4,000 sq. ft.)
b. 2.75 m2 (30 sq. ft.) of pool deck per key.
c. 1, each 20 m² (200 sq. ft.) whirl pool area per 250
keys.
2. Place exterior pools at the focal location at resorts.
Place in the most prominent position such as between
the public areas and beach at ocean side properties.
3. The primary pool is the guests’ recreation pool. Locate
to provide access from guestroom wings.
4. A second pool, when required, is positioned so that it may
be used by guests or by functions adjacent to meeting
spaces.
5. Provide decorative solution for code required shower.
6. Pools to have water temperature controls as dictated
by the property’s location to compensate for the area’s
typical or extreme climatic conditions.
K. Indoor Pool: Heated: Maintain 29º C ( 84º F).
1. Indoor lap pools are typically 6 x 12 m (20 x 40 ft.),
1.2 m (4 ft.) deep with an adjacent whirl pool; see the
Facilities Program.
2. At urban sites with limited recreation area, provide
“motion” pool to accommodate 2 or more swimmers.
3. A whirl pool may be co-located with this pool. When a
whirl pool does not adjoin the pool, consider a design
that places the whirl pool above the pool deck to permit
seating around the edge or more closely at eye level of
surrounding seating.

4. Enclosure:
• Floor: See Pool DeckCeramic tile with coved base; slip
resistant 0.6 wet / dry
• Walls: Ceramic tile wainscot with high performance
epoxy paint above
• Ceiling: Exposed structure (skylights, concrete deck,
etc.) with high performance epoxy paint with areas
of gypsum board or plaster soffits. Avoid suspended
ceilings and opportunities for corrosion.
• Windows & Skylights: Aluminum frame, thermally
broken with insulated glass
5. Heating, Ventilation and Cooling: See Module <15A>.
6. Acoustics: Pool enclosure Reverberation Time (RT) 60
Max = 4 seconds.
L. Whirl Pool: Heated whirl pool is 3 m (10 ft.) diameter minimum.
1. Location: Typically, locate in close proximity to deep end
of Swimming Pool. Provide a minimum of 1.2 m (4'-0") of
deck area around pool for rescue access and maintenance.
2. Pool Heating: Include heating equipment to maintain 40º C
(104º F) water temperature with an in-line thermometer
graded in 1° C (2ºF) intervals installed in the Filter Room
between the liner and heater.
3. Equipment: Locate whirl pool mechanical equipment in
a designated, programmed room within the Pool Bar <3>
building unless otherwise approved by the Owner and
RCH.
4. Slip Resistance Factor: 0.6 dry / wet for decks, copings,
benches, and pool floors.
5. Pumps: Provide separate pumps for circulation and jet supply.
Equip pumps with programmable, variable frequency drives
(VFD) for energy savings.

6. Suction Outlets: To avoid entrapment install suction outlets

in accord with the U.S. Pool Safety Act (Virginia Graeme
Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act).
7. Decorative Fittings & Nozzles; Provide chrome plated,
non-corrosive metal or bronze plumbing fittings and
nozzles if exposed to guest view.
8. Air Injector: Installed for jet action during whirl pool use.
9. Jet Timer: Provide a 15 minute time switch to permit
users to activate whirl pool jets. If air blower is provided,
interlock timer with air blower and jet pump. Locate timer
so that the whirl pool user is required to exit the pool to
reactivate.
10. Stop Button: Provide emergency stop button adjacent to
jet timer, interlocked to the whirl pool pump and jet pump.
11. Signs: Include regulatory and safety signage. <GR2> <16>
M. Splash Pad (option) or Children’s Pool (alternate): Provide in
compliance with the Facilities Program. Resorts and leisure
markets may require one of the following water play areas for
children:
1. Splash Pad: An MI preferred accessible water play amenity
for children.
a. Pad & Base: Reinforced concrete with a durable,
slip resistant <16> finish of 0.6 (wet / dry). Provide
a resilient material flooring approved for use in pool
environments.
b. Features: Provide a variety of splash pad water
experiences (water jets, showers, fountains, etc.)
proportioned to the facility.
c. Sanitation & Filtration: Provide a system dedicated
to the splash pad. See “Pool Mechanical Operation
- General”.
• Turnover Rate: Less than 2 hours
• Sanitation: Traditional system with an ultra violet
(UV) bacteria mitigation system on the water
supply at the pump.
d. Diverter Valve: Provide on the drain line to divert
rain water, wash-down water and run-off to the storm
water system.
e. Controls: Consider an activation bollard and computer
system that allows guests to turn the features on and
off.
f. Disability Access: Typically, provide if the pad is a
single level design.
2. Children’s Pool: An alternate to the splash pad if appropriate
and facilities are designed for persons with disabilities.
a. Filtration: Provide a system dedicated to the children’s
pool.

b. Depth: Typically 46 cm (1′- 6″) maximum.

c. Access for the Disabled: Provide a sloped entry with
a maximum slope of 1:12 to a depth of 46 cm (1′-6″).
d. Finishes for Children’s Pool: Exterior ceramic tile
finish for bottom and sides. On bottom, set mosaic
tiles in mural pattern.
e. Deck Space: Design adequate deck space for
observation of the children and to provide deck
furniture (chaises / chairs); see additional requirements
below for pool deck and terrace criteria.
N. Depth Markings: Indicate water depth in meters and feet at
swimming and whirl pools.
1. Letters / Characters: Minimum 10 cm (4 inch) high; in
contrasting color to tile.
a. Incorporate NO DIVING international logo tile signs
adjacent to each depth marker.
b. Incorporate pool depth and no diving signage <16B>
into the coping.
c. Paint-on characters are not acceptable.
2. Marking Placement: Spacing: Space markers no more
than 7.6 m (25 ft.) intervals and arranged to be uniformly
located at irregularly shaped pools.
a. Vertical Pool Walls: Place in upper most position;
easily readable from water side.
b. Horizontal Surface or Deck Facing Water: Place
within 46 cm (18 inch) of water's edge and positioned
to be read while standing on deck facing the water.
c. Depths / Shapes: Place pool markings at maximum
and minimum depths, all points of slope change, and
at every 30 cm (1 ft.) of depth increment; also place at
major deviations in shape.
d. Slip Resistance: Provide 0.6 wet / dry for horizontal
depth markers.
O. Pool Mechanical Operation - General:
1. Safety Features: Design and construct pool details and
equipment to prohibit hazards from tripping and slipping.
Design to avoid entrapment of clothes, hair and people in
compliance with the U.S. Pool Safety Act (Virginia Graeme
Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act)
2. Pumps:
a. Provide recirculation, filtration, water treatment and
pumping system to maintain water in a clear, sanitary
condition with a minimum amount of maintenance.
b. Provide energy efficient pumps in standard sizes to
simplify pump procurement and replacement.

3. Filtration: Provide a separate system for each pool and whirl

pool. Include NSF approved sand filters. Provide a minimum
system filter flow rate of one water turnover in 5 hours for
pools and in 20 minutes for whirl pools.
4. Treatment: Saline treatment is the preferred water
sanitation system. Verify type with RCH. Do not use
chlorine gas.
5. Heater: Natural gas type required for whirl pool. Heating
required for swimming pools unless outdoor climate
maintains water above design temperature.
a. Provide high efficiency heaters (with sealed
combustion chamber and ducted, exterior combustion
air to avoid pool chemical corrosion) integrated with
heat recovery system using the pool dehumidification
system <15A>.
b. Provide constant design temperatures:
• Pools: 29º C (84º F)
• Whirl Pool: 40º C (104º F).
• Temperature Rise: 0.25º C (0.5º F) per hour.
6. Signage: See <GR2> <16> for applicable signage.
P. Plumbing – General
1. Pipes and Fittings: Provide Schedule 40 PVC for pools and
whirl pools
2. Fresh Water Supply: Copper or CPVC Schedule 80
3. Heater Supply and Return: Copper or CPVC Schedule 80
4. Pipe Size: Do not exceed flow velocities required by codes
and the following:
a. Velocity through open area of return: not to exceed
3 m / sec. (10 ft. / sec.)
b. Velocity through suction lines: not to exceed 1.8 m /
sec. (6 ft. / sec.)
5. Underground Pipe: Solvent welded connection only.
Threaded or flanged connection are not permitted.
6. Testing: Prior to back filling, pressure test at a minimum
of 1.7 bars (25 psi) for a minimum of 24 hours. Maintain
pressure on pipes during back filling to verify pipes are not
damaged.
Q. Swimming / Whirl Pool Equipment Room:
1. Location: Locate the Pool Equipment rooms close as
feasible to pool and whirl pool, and away from guestrooms,
residences, meeting rooms and other public spaces to avoid
the transfer of noise and vibration.
2. Drainage: Provide a sump or other positive drainage.
3. Storage / Maintenance: Provide storage space for maintenance
supplies and equipment. Avoid moving pool equipment and
water treatment materials through public spaces.

4. Chemical Storage: Store and separate liquid chlorine from

acid in ventilated, corrosion resistant rooms or cabinets
away from pool equipment.
5. Eye Wash Station: Connect to tepid, piped water
system. <15B> <16> Locate near chemical handling with
unobstructed access.
6. Construction:
a. Floor: Concrete, hardened and sealed
b. Secure and mount pumps and heaters on raised
housekeeping pads.
c. Walls & Ceiling: Provide water resistant materials
and epoxy painted finish.
7. Plumbing:
a. Support and secure with corrosion resistant fasteners
and accessories.
b. Clearly label and color code with flow direction
arrows.
c. Install to avoid tripping hazards, head height
obstructions and obstructions to equipment service.
R. Swimming / Whirl Pool Accessories:
1. Deck Equipment: Include the following:
• Grab Rails
• Stair Hand Rails
• Life Guard Chair (only if required by Code)
• Rope and Float Depth Divider
• Deck Mounted Stair Rails
• Permanent Accessibility Lift (each pool)
• Deck Anchors
• Escutcheon Plates
• Pool Cover & Deck Anchors: Provide in cold climates
where outdoor pools are typically closed for the season.
• Thermal Cover: Provide thermal covers and racks for
pools if the pool is intended to continue in service during
cold weather.
2. Maintenance Equipment: Include the following:
• Pool Cleaning System - vacuum with hose and robotic
cleaner (dedicated vacuum ports - not recommended)
• NylonBrush
• Telescopic Pole
• Stainless Steel Brush
• Zinc Anodes (cathodic protection)
3. Safety Equipment: Include the following:
• Life Buoy with throw line equal to the pool width
• Life Hook (Sheperd’s hook) and pole
• First Aid Kit

4. House Phone: see <13B>

S. Pool Decks and Terraces Amenities: Provide design compatible
with the design concept and quality level of project.
1. Landscape: Provide sophisticated landscaping at outdoor
pool and sunbathing deck areas that is appropriate to the
climate, space available, and project concept.
a. Use landscaping to provide quiet and public areas and
shady and sunny zones.
b. At indoor pools limit landscaping to natural light
available to support live plants.
2. Walkway Access: Paths to pool; 1 5 m (5 ft.) wide to allow
two persons to pass or walk side-by-side.
3. Attendant Kiosk: Provide pool attendant's, towel and sundry
issuance kiosk at primary point of access to pool compound;
this position should permit general surveillance of the
swimming pool, children's pool, and whirl pool.
4. F&B Facilities: Consider opportunities for pool terrace food
and beverage outlets and function / catering facilities.
5. Provide chrome plated, non-corrosive metal or bronze
plumbing fittings and nozzles if exposed to guest view.
6. Lighting: Locate lighting at pool perimeter to avoid
maintenance / replacement activities above water surface.
7. Deck / Terrace / Beach Furniture: See <GR4>. Provide
aluminum chaise lounge furniture with sling seat
construction that is stackable for pool deck and other beach
use as follows:
a. Chaise Lounge Quantity: 1.1 to 2 per key. RCH
designates specific count. Warm climates and resorts
may require higher quantity based on demand. Typically,
provide distribution as follows:
• 50% Pool deck. Reversible, solution dyed, covered,
upholstered cushion is required.
• 20% Lawn. Reversible, solution dyed, covered,
upholstered cushion is required.
• 30% Beach (when applicable, otherwise 80%
on deck). Beach chairs require a sled base and
reversible, solution dyed, covered, upholstered
cushions.
b. Beach Cabana Lounge Chair Unit: 1 per 15 keys;
provide Ritz-Carlton blue umbrella with 2 lounge
racks or couples chaise with canopy.
c. Additional chairs, tables, and umbrellas; quantity
based on facility size, market demand, food and
beverage type, and location.

4A.15 Tennis Courts

A. Program: Provide Tennis Court complex, including tennis
pro shop, number of tennis courts and type of construction
and surface finish as determined by RCH.
1. Design Criteria for resort Tennis Courts is:
a. 2 courts minimum
b. Refer to the Project Facilities Program.
2. Unless structurally impractical, courts are accessible to
guests with disabilities.
B. Planning:
1. Avoid East / West orientation to reduce chance of
sunlight in players’ eyes during mornings and evenings.
2. Avoid conflicts (view, lights and noise) with guestroom
wing.
3. Size: 36.6 x 18.3 m (120 x 60 ft.) for one court, unless
otherwise specified by the Owner and RCH. Multiple
courts; provide a minimum of 3.6 m (12 ft.) to adjacent
court playing surface.
4. Shade Structure: Provide in hot, humid climates.
C. Court Finish:
1. The Landscape Architect reviews types of courts used
at tennis facilities for the project locale and recommends
court surfaces for review and approval by the Owner
and RCH.

2. Acceptable surfaces include clay, simulated clay,

concrete with emulsion coat or asphalt with special
layered flexible coating.
3. Alternate surfaces are considered on an individual
basis.
D. Fence: Provide fence as follows:
1. Ends and sides: 3 m (10 ft.) high.
2. Center section of the nets: 1.2 m (4 ft.) high.
3. Provide 3 m (10 ft.) fences at sides that require protection
from prevailing winds.
4. Provide mesh for additional protection from winds or
distractions.
5. Fabric: Black; PVC coated wire fabric.
6. Posts and Rails: Black color.
7. Gates: Minimum opening width of 82 cm (32 inch).
E. Features: Provide the following:
1. Courtside shade structures between pairs of courts.
2. Power and water for drinking fountains.
3. Water to courtside for maintenance.
4. Power for ball machines and video equipment at side
viewing pads.
5. Empty conduit for future power and communications
requirements.
6. Removable, black finish net posts.
F. Lighting:
1. RCH designates quantity of lighted courts.
2. Tennis court light fixture type and lighting levels,
whether Club or Championship level, are accepted by
RCH.
3. Provide 8 light fixtures per lighted court as follows:
a. Type: Metal halide
b. Shielded: 100% below the horizontal plane of the
fixture housing.
c. Poles: 6 m (20 ft.) high.
d. Finish: Black
e. Install light poles in line with the fence posts; not
on court or surrounding surface.
f. Surface mount pole lights at base to anchor bolts
set in a concrete footing.
4. Provide lighting for access to courts.
5. Provide timer switch controls to permit automatic light
shutoff and to permit limits on nighttime play.

4A.16 Beach (Resort)

A. Site Improvement: At resort locations, improve the beach
by cleaning, shaping and grading to refine the beach area
to a condition conducive for RCH guest utilization.
1. In areas where a natural beach does not exist it is necessary
(if allowed by governing law) to design and construct a
man-made beach in the form of an excavated lagoon.
To design this element, the Landscape Architect shall
engage the services of a hydrography specialist with
expertise in ocean and tide water current behavior.
2. Provide beach sand of aggregate size and texture
satisfactory for beach use. Obtain material acceptance
from RCH.
3. In the event the ocean shoreline is rough and rugged,
grade or smooth a portion of shoreline to provide guest
access to the water.
4. Where a boardwalk or similar beach access is provided,
no less than one, and preferably all routes are accessible
for guests with disabilities.
B. Beach Facilities: Provide Beach and Pool facilities as follows:
1. Provide beach shower to remove sand prior to entering
RCH facilities.
2. At beach locations, place the swimming pool between
the hotel and the beach.
3. For properties where RCH controls the beach, the ratio
of 2 chaise lounges per guestroom + cabana lounge
chair unit (umbrella with two lounge racks), 1 per 15
keys is discussed and resolved during programming.
See schedule at Pool Deck and Terraces above.

4. Provide adequate and accessible support facilities for

equipment, toilet rooms, beach attendant station, towel
issue, storage of beach chaise lounges, retail sales of
essential items, umbrellas, boats and other recreation
equipment. Include electric service and outlets.
5. Beach Bar: Provide Beach Bar facility to service guest
at beach.
6. Provide a secure storage area for miscellaneous exterior
recreation equipment, such as rental bicycles for guests.
Typically, locate the storage with the tennis facility to
accommodate rental maintenance and cleaning.
C. Shade Structures: Provide cost effective structures and
areas such as trellises, awnings and cabanas that provide
true shade for guests to avoid full sun. Use selected and
approved logo colors for fabrics.
D. Security: If permitted, define the beach security perimeter
to accommodate the privacy of guests.
4A.17 Golf (Resort)
A. Program: Provide as required by the Facilities Program.
Design facilities in compliance with the “Ritz-Carlton Golf
Design Standards Supplement”.
B. Support Facilities: Refer to Facilities Program. When a golf
course is part of the project, provide support facilities for
a guest to play golf; store, clean, maintain clubs; deliver
clubs / equipment by golf car to course to be played, either
separate or with the guest.
C. Valet Service: Typically, required if golf course is remote
from the hotel. Service includes the following:
1. Valet service to receive and hold “active” golf equipment
from time of guests’ arrival to time of use.
2. Unload, clean and store golf equipment until needed
next time by Guest.

4A.18 Other Outdoor Recreation Facilities

A. Program: Provide if required in the Facilities Program.
B. Facilities: The following may be included:
• Volley and Basketball Court(s)
• Outdoor Hand and Squash Ball Court(s)
• Golf Putting Greens and Practice Driving Cage
• Running / Jogging Path (where feasible)
• General Lawn Area
4A.19 Systems Coordination
including:
• GR2 Signage & Graphics
• GR3 Material & Product Criteria
• GR4 Furniture, Fixtures & Equipment (FF&E)
• 14 Fire Protection / Life Safety

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
4B
Kids Programs
4B - Kids Programs THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
4B.1 Ambassadors of the Environment 1

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Kids Programs | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Kids Programs - 4B
4B.1 Ambassadors of the Environment

A. Application: Jean-Michel Cousteau’s Ambassadors of
the Environment program is a partnership between The
Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company (RCH) and Jean-Michel
Cousteau’s Ocean Futures Society. The program is an
innovative educational experience designed to promote
better understanding of how nature works.
If the Market & Feasibility Study indicates the project
is viable, the planning team develops a comprehensive
strategy for addressing the market driven demands with a
corresponding facility and schedule of services. Typically,
a 230 m2 (2,500 sq. ft.) facility is required.
B. Facility Location: At resort properties, the Ambassadors of
the Environment program is a Brand essential.
1. Remote: Ideally, a stand alone facility allows
Ambassadors of the Environment to be located in a
natural environment with views and direct access to
the outdoor activity areas.
2. Integrated: When Ambassadors of the Environment
facilities are located within a Ritz-Carlton resort hotel,
locate so facility is visible to arriving guests and from
main guest walkways.
3. Adjacent: Provide visibility to arriving guests and access
to circulation paths.
C. Resource: See Jean-Michel Cousteau’s Ambassadors of the
Environment Design Standard for design criteria.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Kids Programs 1
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
5
Retail Spaces
5 - Retail Spaces THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
5.1 Program 1
5.2 The Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop 2
5.3 Hotel (Foodservice) Retail Outlets (option) 5
5.4 General and Service Retail (optional) 6

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Retail | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Retail Spaces - 5
Retail Spaces
5.1 Program
A. Criteria: The Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH) Signature Shop is
the required minimum RCH retail program.
1. RCH operates the Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop.
2. Market analysis may dictate requirements for additional
retail outlets as outlined in the project Facilities
Program.
B. Additional Retail: Market analysis may dictate requirements
for other retail outlets as outlined in the project Facilities
Program.
• Hotel (Foodservice) Retail Outlets (option)
• General and Service Retail (option)
C. Retail Review and Approvals: In order to avoid operational
conflicts with the hotel, submit the following associated
retail program features to and obtain approval of RCH for
any additional retail outlets beyond the signature shop.
1. Retail market concept(s)
2. Location of assigned retail areas
3. Retail mix and placement of concession spaces
4. Retail design consultant
5. Merchandise assortment
6. Operating hours / time
7. Lease agreements - additional conditions and retail
requirements
D. Retail Design Coordination: Coordinate retail entrances
and storefront designs with the hotel public area interior
design. Submit the following retail design concepts and
obtain acceptance from RCH:
1. Entrance / storefront designs and visible retail features.
2. Retail graphics / merchandising signage visible in
public areas.
3. Illuminated signage / lighting designs, permanent and
temporary.
4. Graphic and merchandising signage controls required
to avoid visual clutter (sales stickers, banners, etc.) at
storefronts and windows.
5. Proposed finish millwork and cabinetry design features
for built-in and freestanding displays.
E. Interior Retail Design Requirements and Coordination:
1. Provide custom retail interiors consistent with theme
and design / finishes of public spaces.
2. Coordinate retail space finishes and lighting with public
and adjoining areas.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Retail 1

3. One or two entry points that are wide enough to encourage

casual entry into the space at 1.8 m (6 ft.) minimum.
4. Adjustable shelving conducive to merchandising along
perimeter walls.
5. Recessed fluorescent or incandescent can lights in
addition to accent lighting in focal areas.
6. Necessary power and data lines with light switches,
thermostats and alarm system controls located in the
office / storage area. <15> <13>
7. Water lines, if needed in the design concept.
8. Compliance to ADA guidelines.
F. Loss Prevention: <16> Provide per Loss Prevention Review:
1. Surveillance Cameras (VSS): When required, locate
per Loss Prevention Review. Prohibited in changing
areas.
2. Theft Deterrent System: When required, conceal under
floor magnetic product tagging theft deterrent system
(no exposed pedestals).
G. Retail Outlets: Typically, provide one or a combination of
the following:
1. The Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop and Retail Vitrines
2. Hotel (Foodservice) Retail Outlets (option)
3. General and Service Retail (optional)
5.2 The Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop
A. Program:
1. The Ritz-Carlton Signature Shop provides guests with
signature and gift items associated with the hotel and
region.
2. Sundry & Personal Items: Typically available at the
RCH Signature Shop but discreetly displayed. At small
hotels, without a Signature Shop, sundry and personal
items are available at the Concierge or Reception Desk
from a separate closet or armoire, on request. At larger
hotels and resorts, sundry and personal items may be
provided by additional retail stores.
B. Relationship: The following criteria guides the RCH
Signature Shop positioning:
1. Locate in the path of travel between the Lobby entrance,
Front Desk and passenger elevators.
2. Locate near the Reception Lobby, visually apparent,
but not the focal point that would distract from the
Lobby <2> design.
2 Retail | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

C. Retail Products: Accommodate guest needs with products

from the following categories:
1. The Ritz-Carlton Signature merchandise
2. Basic travel items / clothing
3. Gift certificates
4. Gifts related to regional location
D. Size / Area: As required by the project Facilities Program.
E. Features:
1. Provide with complete finishes including millwork,
fixtures and equipment.
2. Arrange and design customized storefront to provide
discreet, visual exposure of merchandise from the
public circulation area.
3. Utilize finish materials consistent with the public Lobby
design <2> for storefront and merchandising display.
4. Coordinate glazed storefronts with merchandising
display to avoid unsightly views.
5. A freely operable guest entrance may include swing or
side slide millwork or glazed doors compatible with the
public area interior design.
6. Consider outward opening or side sliding guest
entrance doors to avoid obstructing retail display or
internal circulation.
7. Provide well lit merchandising opportunities for:
a. Magazine / book / newspaper display
b. Toiletry display
c. Folded and hanging display
d. Lockable jewelry display
e. Souvenir display
8. Provide merchandise storage in overhead or under
counter cabinets without compromising merchandising
area.
9. Dressing Room: Provide when clothing is offered for
sale.
10. Directional retail lighting and shelf illumination is
required.
F. Construction:
1. Walls: Three solid perimeter walls that extend to
structure above, for controlled access.
2. Doors: Secure wide openings with sliding grill. Secure
narrow openings with hinged full light glass door.
3. Store Front: Limit glazed walls to entry and front
of the store and coordinate open or glazed portions
of storefronts with merchandising display to avoid
unsightly views.

G. Dressing Room: If apparel is offered for sale.

1. Location: Near Cash Wrap area to permit convenient
sales assistance and to permit passive observation of
Dressing Room use.
2. Size: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities
Act requirements.
3. Mirror: Full length
4. Seating: Bench or chair
5. Clothes Hooks: Required
6. Door: With privacy latch
7. Lighting: Incandescent
H. Cash Wrap Desk: Provide to support retail transactions and
manage customer activity. Include the following:
1. Location: Position to provide visual observation and
control of the shop and to provide guest service impact.
2. Computer (conceal from direct guest view)
3. P.O.S. Station with printer, card swipe, cash drawer,
barcode scanner (recessed, conceal from direct guest
view)
4. Telephone
5. Counter for wrapping and bagging products at 90 cm
(36 inch) height.
6. Audio controls (unless in office)
7. Lighting controls (unless in office)
I. Retail Manager’s Office & Storage: Provide a desk workstation
at the retail shop for activities associated with managing
the retail programs and storing inventory.
1. Size: 15% of retail area or 5 m2 (50 sq. ft.), minimum.
2. Storage Area: Provide for retail inventory and
additional locked storage for bulk deliveries, if required.
3. Furniture: Desk, chair, file cabinets and storage
shelves.
4. Computer / PMS <13A>: Provide data connection.
5. Telephone / Fax <13B>: Provide device connections.
J. Retail Vitrines:
1. Provide retail vitrines to display RCH Signature Shop
products remote from the retail store.
2. Locate in public circulation corridors or elevator lobbies
(not in Reception Lobby).
3. Hotel Interior Designer to design and integrate with
interior design and finishes.
K. Service: Provide Back-of-House access for deliveries to
avoid circulation conflicts at guest entry.

L. Finishes:
1. Floor: Complement The Lobby experience with natural
materials - wood, stone or terrazzo.
2. Ceiling: Gypsum board, painted
3. Walls: Gypsum board, painted
5.3 Hotel (Foodservice) Retail Outlets (option)
A. Program: Purpose is to generate additional revenue and
to provide guest options for food and beverage items.
Secondarily, the program supports and promotes the
reputation of the hotel and culinary talents of the hotel’s
food and beverage outlets and catering department.
1. Facilities are limited to complementary extensions of
the hotel's adjacent food and beverage outlets.
2. Merchandising Program:
a. Bakery
b. Beverages
c. Cheeses
d. Fruits
e. Gourmet coffee
f. Liquor, wine and beer (if allowed)
g. Salads
h. Sandwiches
B. Relationship: In order of priority, the following criteria will
typically guide positioning of the spaces.
1. Tangent to and in conjunction with the reception area
of the Three Meal a Day Restaurant <3>. This position
permits shared utilization of personnel and in particular,
cashiering functions.
2. At a position close to, however, not directly associated
with the Lobby Lounge or High Tea Lounge. This
location may also permit direct exterior exposure that
could be advantageous to direct outside marketing and
sales programs.
3. In conjunction with any hotel retail arcade.
4. Locate retail spaces with direct access to Back-of-
House servicing and circulation.
D. Features:
1. Architectural Configuration: Retail outlet may be an
enclosed shop concept or an open front design.
2. Product Displays: In refrigerated and non-refrigerated
display cases, self serve and attendant assisted bins,
canisters and shelving kiosks that complement store /
shop interior.

5.4 General and Service Retail (optional)

A. Program: Occasionally, and in response to a market
analysis of location and commercial opportunities and
demands, the hotel may support additional managed or
leased retail shops, services, and / or independent retail
arcade of concession shops. Additional retail shops may
include the following:
1. Jewelry and accessories
2. Rental counters
3. Travel agency
4. Florist
5. Business / Shipping Center
B. Review and Approvals: Location, type, and size is subject to
RCH approval as indicated in this Module, “Program”.
C. Retail Management:
1. RCH Management: If RCH manages leased retail
concessions, at a minimum, provide unfinished “shell”
space with access to mechanical, plumbing and
electrical.
a. Access to and dependence of the hotel's facilities,
services, and employees is restricted.
b. Leased Retail must complement the overall
property retail program and not compete with
other outlets.
2. Non-RCH Management: General and Service Retail
spaces are only included in the hotel program under
limited conditions when reviewed and approved by
RCH.
a. Facilities and services of any such General Retail
space not approved or directly managed by RCH
are separate and independent of the hotel and
therefore not located within, proximate to, or
associated with the hotel.
b. There shall be no contractual relationship
between the property or property manager and the
unapproved General and Service Retail operation,
including for example, any ownership interest
or profit sharing. The property will not provide,
promote, support, assist, reimburse, barter, and
share any of the operational services or facilities
or any others of a similar nature.
c. If such hotel support facilities or services are
requested for General and Service Retail spaces,
they will be offered at non-preferential, market
rates at RCH's sole discretion.

D. Relationship: The following criteria will generally guide

the design of leased retail arcade facilities:
1. Shopping Arcade: Position and design as independent
and self-contained facilities. Restrict access to and
dependence on the hotel's Back-of-House, service and
dock areas.
2. Guest Access: From connecting gallery from Main
Reception and Lobby; securable and controlled by
hotel management.
3. General Public Access: From an independent arcade
entrance, separate from the hotel.
4. Facades: Design layouts and facades to maintain
consistent and uniform merchandising.
E. Retail Features: MI normally leases additional retail.
1. Storefronts: Provide complete storefronts and shell
space.
2. P.O.S.: <13A> Leased spaces are not connected to
property P.O.S. system.
3. Telephones: <13B> Provide a minimum of two outside
phone lines per tenant.
4. Loss Prevention: <16> Provide conduit and wire for
duress alarm to each tenant.
5. HVAC: <15A> Provide dedicated HVAC unit.
6. Electric Service: <15C> Provide 40 amp minimum
electrical panel for each tenant space. Design Team
provides a recommendation for separate metering of
each tenant space.
7. Retail Displays: Provide lighted retail displays, when
approved by MI, as desirable revenue producing
fixtures, either built-in or as freestanding fixtures as
designed by the Interior Designer.
5.5 System Features
A. Hotel Systems:
1. Point of Sales: At sales counter. <13A>
2. Telephone: <13B>
3. Computer: <13A>
4. Audio / Visual: <13C> Provide background music.
Provide sound system as either an independent retail
system with concealed ceiling speakers.
5. HVAC: Locate requisite thermostats, vent ducts,
receptacles and alarms discreetly in non-merchandise
spaces.
6. Utilities: Conceal utilities in the wall or floor. Vertical
utility poles are unacceptable. <13> <15>

7. Discreetly locate power and data lines, light switches,

thermostats and alarm system controls in non-
merchandise spaces. <15> <13>
8. Water lines: Coordinate if needed in the design concept
B. Lighting: <15C> Essential for merchandizing. Coordinate
high end retail lighting ambience with surrounding light
levels and interior design.
1. General Lighting: Provide pleasing light levels while
spot lighting products.
a. Ambient lighting: Include recessed fluorescent or
incandescent lighting with 480 to 540 lux (45 to
50 FC) at 76 cm (30 inch) AFF.
b. Accent Lighting: Provide surface mounted
track lighting at 1500 to 2000 vertical lux (150
to 200 vertical foot-candles) to highlight retail
presentations.
2. Perimeter Lighting: Provide recessed fluorescent or
halogen adjustable downlights at 700 to 1000 lux (70
to 100 FC).
3. Decorative Lighting: Provide pendant lighting, located
for maximum effect in display windows and at key
points in the space.
4. Task Lighting: Provide task lighting over the register
area.
5. Dimmers: Provide lighting on dimmers to enable light
levels to transition throughout the day in sync with
adjacent public space.
6. Controls: Locate lighting controls behind the desk or
in the office. Do not locate in public areas or within
display walls.
C. Coordination: Coordinate with requirements of other
Modules including:
• 2 Public Entry
• 13 Property Systems

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
6
Function Spaces
6 - Function Spaces THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
6.1 Program 1 Function Spaces
6.2 Ballrooms - Design 4
6.3 Pre-function - Design 14
6.4 Meeting Rooms - Design 15
6.5 Boardrooms - Design 17
6.6 Function Space - Interior Design - General 19
6.7 Function Space FF&E - General 20
6.8 Business Center 21
6.9 Catering Showroom 24
6.10 Public Support Spaces 24 Function Space Support
6.11 BOH Function Service Spaces 25
6.12 Banquet Storage 25
6.13 Banquet Beverage Storage 26
6.14 Sound Equipment 26
6.15 Audio / Visual Equipment Storage Room 27
6.16 Banquet Service Manager’s Office 28
6.17 Florist / Floral Preparation 29
6.18 Operable Partitions 29
6.19 Function Space Entrance 32
6.20 Tour Desk 33

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Function | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Function Spaces - 6
Function Spaces
6.1 Program
A. General: Provide adequate function space in the Ritz-
Carlton Hotel (RCH) to meet market demands and include
a series of rooms that accommodate a variety of guest
meetings, conferences and social gatherings.
B. Occupancy Load Factor: <14> In order to accommodate a
variety of function activities, utilize 0.65 m2 (7 sq. ft.)
per person for emergency exit capacity in Ballrooms and
Meeting Rooms (assume non-simultaneous exiting of Pre-
function Area).
C. Space Planning: Organize function areas around an
architectural feature or distinctive interior design theme.
1. Separate function areas from Guestrooms, Guestroom
Corridors, Public Areas and from primary guest entry
and lobby space to minimize the impact on hotel guests
check-in. Generally, this arrangement provides more
efficient circulation and building design.
Figure 1 - Function Spaces Adjacency Diagram
Beverage Banquet Sound
Storage Manager Equipment A / V Storage
Section 6.13 Section 6.16 Section 6.14 Section 6.15
Banquet Service Corridor Kitchen

Storage <10>
Section 6.12
Ballroom Meeting Rooms

VIP/Bridal Pre-function Catering Showroom

Section 2.15 Toilets

Circulation to
Exit / Entry Hotel Lobby
Section 2.16 Coats Foyer <2>
Valet Parking
Va g
Section 2.14 Phones
Porte Cochere
<2>
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Function 1

2. Provide dedicated shuttle elevators <12> when elevators

are required to access function space from public areas.
Avoid using the guestroom tower elevators for function
level access because of delays, guest level security and
circulation conflicts between guest and public.
3. Provide function rooms with access to Back-of-House
(BOH) service <8> <9>. Overall plan concept requires
separate function Service Corridor access and avoiding
BOH corridors designed for heavy traffic or service
access to other non-function rooms.
4. In addition to providing a series of functional spaces,
the design integrates a distinctive design organization
that focus on elements such as a prominent view, garden,
grand stair, fountain or market responsive theme.
D. Natural Light: Where possible, locate and orient the function
space program (Ballroom, Meeting Room, Boardroom) to
provide exterior windows for natural light as an amenity
into function spaces. Coordinate the following:
1. HVAC: Verify that heating and cooling capacities
account for window loads.
2. Blackout Drapery: provide motorized window blackout
curtains that effectively block daylight and are easy to
operate when required for A/V presentations.
3. Skylights: Daylight from skylights is difficult to control
and exclude, and typically not recommended.
E. Design Features - General: <GR4> Provide high quality
finishes consistent with the public spaces.
1. Floors: Carpet (80% wool, 20% nylon Axminster)
with grand large-scale patterns, good coverage and
significant borders or combination of carpet with stone
accents.
2. Walls: Elegant and beautifully detailed stained or
painted wood paneled walls consisting of grand scaled
wall base, details and ceiling molding integrated with
mirrored, upholstered, stone, and / or wood panels with
decorative wall sconces.
3. Doors: Incorporate heavy articulated millwork
details, wood panels, applied moldings and finishes to
complement the wall design.
4. Windows: Dress with opulent window coverings that
include blackout capabilities.
5. Ceilings: Multi-leveled coffered or domed ceilings
(no acoustical tile ceilings) accented with millwork
trim and integrated with recessed and cove lighting
and grand elegant decorative light fixtures of crystal
or glass.
2 Function | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Conceal and integrate grills, diffusers, access panels,

sprinkler heads, hang points and cove lighting into the
coffered ceiling design.
6. Open Ceiling (option): An open ceiling system may be
acceptable with decorative gypsum board articulations
suspended beneath an open (black field) ceiling
for grills, diffusers, sprinkler heads, hang points
(decorative or architectural lighting) and appropriate
acoustic treatment to create a unique design statement.
7. Decorative Chandeliers & Pendant Light Fixtures:
Locate in a field or area of smooth ceiling (gypsum
board, plaster, etc.) to avoid having a ceiling grid or
pattern visually distract from the light fixtures.
F. Audio / Visual Equipment <13C>: Provide concealed ceiling
speakers in rooms 185 m2 (2,000 sq. ft.) and larger.
1. Projection Screens: Recessed projection screens are not
required in Ballrooms.
Example: Ballroom 2. Assisted Listening: Provide portable (not built-in)
listening equipment for the hearing impaired in
compliance with governing accessibility regulations.
3. Audio / Visual <13C>: Provide state-of-the-art
technology in keeping with current RCH Standards.
G. Property Systems: See Modules <13A> <13B>. Provide Wi-Fi,
cell phone coverage, sound and teleconferencing equipment
for guest access. Consult the CTR for wired PI criteria.
H. Stairs, Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> - Loss
Prevention.
I. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR3> and <16>
opening to 10 cm (4 inch) and for safety glass requirements.
J. Exterior Function Spaces: Generally, spaces such as
terraces, pools or other external areas may be used
for uncovered outdoor functions or may incorporate
multipurpose pavilions (see below). Provide the
following:
1. Level areas for tables and chairs, service equipment,
entertainment platform or portable stage.
2. Comply with all accessibility requirements.
3. Provide area drainage to direct water away from
Function areas.
4. Service areas, utilities and electrical power <15C> to
support Function space services.
K. Building Systems: Conceal electrical outlets <15C>, phone
jacks, microphone jacks and similar devices <13> in panels
integrated into wall millwork.

L. Spaces / Rooms: Accommodate the following functional

spaces:
1. Ballrooms (and Junior Ballroom)
2. Pre-function
3. Meeting Rooms
4. Boardrooms
5. Business Center
6. Catering Showroom
7. Public Support Spaces Example: Ballroom
8. BOH Function Service Spaces
9. Banquet Storage
10. Sound Equipment
11. A/V Equipment Storage
6.2 Ballrooms - Design
A. Program: Typically, the Ballroom is the tallest hotel public
space accomodating floor to ceiling height and mechanical
/ HVAC space and access above ceiling.
1. Generally, Ballrooms have five or more divisions (see
Facilities Program) unless otherwise directed by RCH.
2. RCH reviews and studies Ballroom proportion as
divided and undivided rectangular spaces and confirms
quantity of operable partitions.
3. See Figure 4.
B. Relationships: See Figure 2 and size / area requirements
below.
1. Access to primary circulation route
2. Pre-function
3. Banquet Service Corridor and catering <10>
4. Receiving Area <9>
5. Storage <9>
C. Location:
1. Ballroom: Typically, locate Ballroom outside of
guestroom tower footprint. This arrangement allows
for column free function space.
2. Junior Ballroom: Normally, locate off end of main
Ballroom to share portion of Pre-function area. Provide
direct access to Service Corridor. In the main Ballroom
provide additional demising partitions towards the
Junior Ballroom side to form a second Pre-function
area, separate from the main Ballroom Pre-function.
D. Size / Area: Floor area is determined by the project Facilities
Program to meet market demands.

Figure 2 - Ballroom Adjacency Diagram
Storage
Prefunction
Se
ervice Station
For preferred Ballroom proportions,
see Example: Ballroom Plan and Section - General Salon A
S Salon B Salon C
Planning Criteria.
Operable
O
P
Partition
L
S
Storage
BOH Service Corridor

Pre-function Salon D
40% of Net
Ballroom Ballroom
Area
(Preferred W
Shape)
Salon E
Salon F
S Salon G Salon H
Prefunction D
Dishwashing /
Pantry /
P
Beverage /
B
C
Coolers
Foyer <
<10>
See Figure 4
General Planning Criteria
Service for preferred Ballroom
Elevators proportions.
Meeting Rooms <12>
E. Features: Include subdivisions; operable partitions; pocket

doors; exhibit entry; service entries.
1. Area: Column free, high ceiling, rectangular space
2. Millwork: Stained / painted finish wood paneling
3. Artwork: Place original artwork in featured locations.
4. Refer to Module <15C> for electrical / data floor boxes.
5. Natural Light: Where possible introduce natural light
at windows; views preferred.

F. Acoustics: Provide acoustic separation of the Ballroom,

Salons, and Meeting Room areas to provide a serviceable
facility.
1. Acoustical Ratings: To obtain the listed acoustical STC
design ratings, coordinate and construct assemblies
to form a continuous sound barrier around operable
partitions, at the floor, wall above partition and at
partition storage pocket details.
2. Permanent Walls: STC 55 minimum to structure above. Figure 3 - Example: Ballroom Breakout
3. Wall Above Operable Partitions: Provide STC not less (Salon) Shown with Banquet Style Seating
than the operable partition. Coordinate wall detail with
operable partition track to provide continuous acoustic
rating with joints and penetrations sealed. See Operable
Partition requirements.
4. Reverberation Time (RT): 60 maximum = 1.2
seconds for each combination of Ballroom and salon
arrangement.
G. Ballroom Breakouts (Salons) - Subdivisions: Plan Ballroom
breakout or subdivision rooms based on the following:
1. Capacity: At a minimum, plan rooms to accommodate
six, ten person round tables and seating with service
circulation.
2. Exits: Provide two exits for each room 32 m² (350 sq. ft.)
and larger. Partition pass-doors are not permitted.
3. Configuration: Rectangular room plan. Refer to Figure
3 for proportions.
4. Ballroom Subdivisions: Refer to the Example: Ballroom
Plan and Section in this Module.
H. Doors - Ballrooms: Provide fire and acoustic rated doors,
frames and hardware as required by related Modules. Provide
hollow steel (for durability and hardware coordination) or
solid wood (do not use gypsum core doors).
1. Entry Door: Minimum of 1 pair of 0.9 m (3 ft.) wide
doors to each salon (Ballroom subdivision).
2. Door Swing: 180 degrees lay flat against wall in open
position. Example: Ballroom Seating Layout
3. Door Frame: Hollow steel, minimum 1.52 mm (U.S.
16 gauge) with fully welded joints.
4. Door Finish: Match door materials with the interior
design theme. Include applied finish or decorative
laminate, or painted finish and raised moldings at
public and service entrance doors selected by Interior
Designer.
5. Door / Frame Moldings: Provide heavily articulated
applied moldings on both sides of frame and as selected
by Interior Designer to match décor.

Figure 4 - Example: Ballroom Plan and Section

Partition Storage
BOH Service Corridor Enclosure (required)
See: Figure 15
Service Vestibules,
Salon C See: Figure 6 Typical Operable Salon F
Partition System
See: Figure 14
Section Section
A-A Salon B Salon D Salon E Salon G A-A
Ballroom Ballroom
Salon H
Salon A
Example Salon Plan,
see: Figure 3
Consider transfer track to

provide double partition in Ballroom Doors Figure 5
2325 m2 (25,000 sq. ft.)
Ballrooms and larger.
Prefunction
Plan
See Module <13C>, for Audio / Visual I / O Panel Layout
5.5 m 4.8 m 6.1 m Exhibit hang points,

(18 ft.) (16 ft.) (20 ft.) Ballroom see: Figures 7 & 8
See <13C> for Audio / Visual I / O Section A - A

Panel Layout
Preferred Ballroom Area Proportions

General Planning Criteria Metric (SI) English (U.S.)
Proportions (width to length) 1:1.8 to 1:2.2
Pre-function 40% of meeting net area. Area Size (W x L) Area Size (W x L)
Ballroom area: m²(sq. ft.) 1,500 m2 30.6 x 49.0 m 16,000 sq. ft. 100 x 160 ft
Ceiling heights
*up to 465 m² (5,000) 5.48 m (18 ft.) 1,400 m2 29 x 48.3 m 15,000 sq. ft. 94 x 160 ft
465 to 930 m² (5 to 10 k) 6.10 m (20 ft.)
over 930 m² (10,000) 6.70 m (22 ft.) 1,300 m2 27 x 48.0 m 14,000 sq. ft. 88 x 160 ft
* Minimum ceiling height at movable partition soffits: 4.3
m (16 ft.) 1,100 m2 25 x 44.0 m 12,000 sq. ft. 80 x 150 ft
750 m2 21 x 35 m 8,000 sq. ft. 70 x 114 ft

I. Door Hardware: See Figure 5 and Module <GR> for typical

hardware requirements and recommended installation
locations. Example: Ballroom
1. Locks: Electronic lock system (same as guestroom)
preferred. Key operated locks are acceptable if provided
with removable cylinders for convenient security
cylinder replacements.
2. Viewport (Peep-Hole): Looking into Ballroom from
Pre-function and Service Corridor side.
3. Kick Plate: Allow 25 cm (10 inch) minimum below
trim molding for kick plate at Ballroom side.
4. Edge Angle: Provide protective meeting stile brass
edge angle at Ballroom side of service and Ballroom
doors.
5. Egress: See Module <14>. Provide panic hardware,
closers and electromagnetic door holders, regardless of
the doors’ fire or smoke rating.
6. Door Holders: Provide electromagnetic door holder
devices with built-in 24 Volt controller.
a. Fire Alarm System: Connect to FACP <14> and to
power <15C> to automatically release doors by a
signal from the FACP.
b. Release Switch: Provide a wall mounted, momen-
tary release switch, adjacent to each door.
Figure 5 - Example: Ballroom Doors
3
1 Lock (key or electronic)
15 Salon A
2 Continuous Architectural Hinge
2 3 Magnetic Hold Open
14 4
(Connect to fire alarm)
12
4 Viewport
10 1 10
5 Closer (concealed)
6 Door (wood or metal - rated)
7 Frame Type (metal w/ wood trim)
8 Panic Hardware (/100 People)
9 Acoustical Seal
10 Door in Open Position (verify that
graphics, lights, etc. are not obscured)
11 Acoustical Seal
5
12 Edge Protector
7 6 13 Internal
9 4 14 Digital Signage
11 15 Room Identification (static) with ADA
13

c. Mounting & Blocking: Mount the door holder to

substantial and permanently secured, built-in wood
blocking or steel reinforcement in stud wall framing
(not just attached to gypsum board) or anchor into
masonry walls.
J. Door Hardware Finish: Match hardware with the interior design
theme.
K. Signage & Graphics: Coordinate room identification signage and
graphic <GR2> locations to avoid obstruction when doors are
held in open position.
L. Service Vestibule: Create service vestibules to control sound
from migrating from Service Corridor into function space and
to manage associates moving in and out of service area to and
from guest side of function space.
1. Configuration: The minimum preferred door configuration
in Ballrooms is a vestibule with a door opening into the
service corridor as shown in Figure 5. See the Event Space
Design Supplement for other vestibule configurations.
2. Door: Provide 1.2 m (4 ft.) wide minimum.
a. Lock: To secure room, provide same lock type re-
Figure 5 - Example: quired for Pre-function doors.
Single Door Service Vestibule b. Hardware: See “Ballroom”.
c. Hold Open: Not required.
 3. Views: Conceal Guest view into BOH from function spaces.
4. Finishes: Continue Ballroom wall and ceiling finishes into
“
vestibule space (beyond opening from Ballroom side).

5. Service Light: Provide “In Service” warning light and
‘
switch. Locate light in Service Corridor adjacent to service

‘ “ door.
 6. Lighting: Ensure lighting in vestibule is not directly
visible to guests on Ballroom side.
M. Service Corridor: Connected by Service Vestibules behind
Ballroom.
 1. Clearance: Provide 3 m (10 ft.) clear width minimum
between operable partition storage enclosure space, food
service equipment space and service vestibules walls.
a. Larger ballrooms require additional width.
b. Allow 5 m (16 ft.) minimum from Ballroom back
wall to face of Service Corridor wall.
 2. Shelving: Provide double stacked, flip up shelves in 1.2 m
(4 ft) long x .3 m (12 inch) deep sections. Coordinate height
and quantity with equipment.
3. Finishes: See Module <8> for wall protection, corner
 Ballroom Area guards and finishes.
 Service Corridor

N. Production Entry: Large function areas may benefit from

utilizing a large door opening direct to the service corridor to
expedite the movement of event production equipment, tables,
chairs, etc. The door is closed when events are in progress.
1. Location: Between function space direct to service corridor
at rear wall or service vestibule.
2. Door Widths: 1.2 m (4 ft.), single; and 1.8 (6 ft.).
O. Exhibit Entrance: Provide an exhibit entrance door based on
ballroom size and market when required by the project Facilities
Program.
1. Location: Coordinate opening location with Ballroom
Interior Design and finishes.
a. Design doors and access inconspicuous as possible
and to withstand repeated use.
b. Typically, place door in back wall connected to ser-
vice vestibule.
2. Door Size: 3 (w) x 3 m (h) (10 x 10 ft.) minimum.
3. Door Rating: Maintain fire rating of Ballroom wall.
4. Pathway: Provide 3 m (10 ft.) wide clear path from exterior
to Ballroom.
5. Vehicle Routing: In Ballroom, provide vehicle / equipment
routing to clear suspended decorative light fixtures, into
and around planned exhibits.
P. Ceiling Hang Facilities: Event participants and their production
companies typically customize the function space to suit their
needs by temporarily installing lights, speakers, projectors,
banners and a variety of other props at the ceiling, walls and
on the floor.
By providing permanent hang points and tracks at the ceiling,
the following advantages are created.
• Damage to ceilings and walls is reduced.
• Production costs can be reduced.
• Event turn times can be reduced.
• Event space flexibility produces higher quality events.
• Floor mounted equipment and wires are minimized, resulting
in fewer tripping opportunities.
• A wider variety of events can be accommodated.
• Permanent hang points are more dependable than temporary
rigging.
Utilizing the above attributes results in an event venue that is
more competitive and attractive to event customers. The fol-
lowing five hang utilities are typical:
• Fixed exhibit hang points
• Powered hang points
• Light weight hang track
• Operable partition hang points (steel track only)
• Light pipes

Q. Fixed Exhibit Hang Points: At a minimum, provide structural

hang points to accommodate electric power, exhibit lighting,
displays, and equipment and comply with the following:
1. Load Capacities: Involve a structural engineer (preferably
the firm that designed the original structure) to determine
maximum hang point load capacities.
a. Hang points are rated at 227, 340 and 454 kg (500, 750
and 1,000 lbs.) live load.
b. Utilized only by exhibit riggers to hang displays or
equipment.
c. Do not provide hang points to support operable
partition track or sound baffle components.
2. Location: Coordinate hang point locations with RCH.
a. Install from structure above ceiling line.
b. In an accessible open ceiling design, the hang points
are integrated with the ceiling design.
c. Install in rows and on both sides of the operable
partition to just above finish ceiling material.
d. Do not place visible marks on ceiling to locate hang
points above ceiling - use a dimensioned ceiling plan.
e. Determine possible locations for head table or stage
setup. Locate approximately 9.1 m (30 ft.) from back
of table / stage.
f. Coordinate locations with ceiling fixture sizes and
placement.
Figure 6 - Primary Head Table Locations Figure 7 - Example: Ballroom

Figure 8
Hang Points Section
A A
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
30-458
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
A Hang Point Locations
+ +
Hang Facilities Rules-of-Thumb
Resource: Fixed & Powered Hang Point Location (Examples) + - As many as 12 to 18 in large salons
See the Event Space Primary Head Table Locations
Design Supplement for - 15’ - 20’ apart
additional information. - 4 to 6 per head table location in large salons

3. Quantity: At a minimum, provide four hang points per

Ballroom Salon and at primary, Ballroom head table
positions. Based on the facility size, configuration and
market being served, utilize the following as a guide and
coordinate quantities with RCH:
a. Small Ballrooms: 1 per 18.5 m² (200 sq. ft.)
b. Large Ballrooms: 1 per 37.2 m² (400 sq. ft.)
c. Dead hang tamper proof supports:
• 226 kg (500 lbs.) minimum, 4.6 m (15 ft.) on center
• 135 kg (300 lbs.) minimum, around space perimeter
for cable support
R. Outdoor Multipurpose Pavilions: If required for resorts in warm
climates and by the project Facilities Program, accommodate
outdoor areas for pavilions (such as portable enclosures with
side awnings or tents) or semi-external function areas in
proximity to Ballroom.
1. Functions may occur at secondary swimming pools,
terraces and level areas.
2. Provide level areas for tables and chairs, service equipment,
entertainment platforms or portable stages.
3. Comply with governing accessibility requirements.
4. Provide area drainage to direct water away from Function
areas.
5. Provide service areas, utilities and electrical power <15C>
to support event area services.
S. Systems: Minimize guest views of the following system devices
and coordinate locations with interior design.
1. Communications: Telephone and data port outlets for
computer use. <13B> <13C>
a. Telephone service for Ballroom exhibitors, see
Module <13C>.
b. Locate telephone, microphone, power, TV, auxiliary
power sleeve and other outlets behind hinged, mill-
work access doors on Ballroom walls.
2. A/V Controls: <13C> Coordinate with Module <15C>.
3. Electric: <15C> Include supplementary electrical service
pass-through openings with acoustical protection in
banquet Service Corridor walls. Provide required electrical
service for Ballroom exhibitors.
4. Lighting Controls: Coordinate with Module <15C>. Locate
slide dimmers for Ballroom lighting at service vestibule
with a secondary control at Ballroom entry in concealed
hinged panel with touch release hardware.

T. HVAC / Building Services: <15> Design building HVAC

system and services to minimize acoustical interference:
1. Layout HVAC system ductwork 1.2 m (4 ft.) minimum
from operable partitions.
2. Extend ductwork from above and behind Ballroom
Service Corridor, above and into subdivision ceiling
spaces.
3. Route ductwork and other building services to avoid
penetrating partitions above operable partitions.
4. Locate supply ducts low and return ducts high and do
not obstruct millwork.
Figure 8- Ballroom Ductwork Schematic

Return Air
Service
Supply Air
Prefunction
U. Lighting: See Module <15C> for lighting requirements.

1. Provide lighting with flexibility to accommodate social
gatherings, business meetings and presentations.
2. Lighting is provided by a combination of cove, recessed,
suspended decorative light fixtures and wall lighting.
3. Lighting is controlled by dimmers readily accessible to
employees (see above).
4. Table Lighting: Provide pin-spot lights to highlight banquet
tables as required by Ritz-Carlton to accommodate the
market requirement for social functions:
• Typically, provide 4, 4 fixture (quad) units at every ceiling
coffer.
• Locate 1 fixture unit at each corner.
• Switch each coffer on one circuit.
• Integrate location with Interior Design.

6.3 Pre-function - Design

A. Program: Accommodate space for assembly, reception
and function registration, intermission activities, Internet
access and Wi-Fi <13A>, Public Telephones, Public Toilets
<2>, Coat Room.
1. Avoid use as circulation path to other facilities, such as
Meeting Rooms.
2. Provide service access from BOH Service Area to
Pre-function and to exterior function terraces.
3. At large Ballrooms, provide an exterior Pre-function
Porte Cochere, Entrance and Foyer similar, but
secondary to main hotel entrance (to avoid confusing
guests) if it is anticipated that function traffic (cars and
guests) will congest the main hotel entrance.
B. Relationships:
1. Primary: Ballroom; Meeting Rooms; Banquet Service
Corridors.
2. Secondary: Elevators, Lobby and circulation routes.
C. Location: Easily accessible from main hotel Entrance and
Lobby.
1. Extend along front and sides of Ballroom to serve
Salons.
D. Size / Area: Typically, the Pre-function area is 40% of net
Ballroom area with adequate space for each division of the
Ballroom.
1. Accommodate space for temporary set-up of buffet
tables and portable bars.
2. Corridor Width: 7.3 m (24 ft.) minimum for main
Ballroom but not full length of Ballroom. For large
Ballrooms, wider spaces may be required.
3. Ceiling: 3.3 m (11 ft.) above floor minimum. Higher
ceilings required for larger facilities.
E. Features:
1. Provide service niches that are recessed in walls and
concealed behind decorative millwork in strategic
locations. Niches serve as back bars with shelves for
glass storage.
2. Credenza: Focal point casepiece with artwork and side
chairs. Design a number of credenzas to serve as buffet
for food and beverage service. Provide designs that
discourage relocation.
3. Artwork: Illuminated wall mounted artwork.
4. Services <13>: Provide concealed power, microphone,
A/V control and telephone voice / data connections in
access panels at the walls (interior and exterior) of the
Pre-function area.

5. Seating Areas: Minimum seating and furniture in Pre-

function areas are dependent on and scaled to size of
Pre-function space.
a. Avoid obstruction of emergency egress.
b. Size seating groups for ease of repositioning by
hotel staff.
c. Provide minimal seating groups for conversation
activities of guests.
6. Based on market, provide access to a private phone
room with a door, chair and small work counter with
house phone and data connection. Private phone rooms
can be shared with Meeting Rooms, Executive Lounge
or Business Center.
7. Signage: LCD screen signage for salons is approved if
appropriate for the style of the hotel.
6.4 Meeting Rooms - Design
A. Program: Quantity and size of Meeting Rooms are dictated
by the project Facilities Program.
B. Relationships:
1. Primary: Public circulation routes.
2. Secondary: Service Corridor.
3. Provide foyers for Meeting Rooms when not adjacent
to usable Pre-function space.
C. Size / Area: 46.5 m2 (500 sq. ft.) minimum net.
1. Ceiling Height: 3 m (10 ft.) above floor plus coffers.
Example: Meeting Room 2. Room Layouts: Various, but provide good design
proportions; no room narrower than 5.5 m (18 ft.).
D. Features: Similar to Ballroom.
1. Provide foyers if Pre-function space is not available.
2. Design Meeting Rooms to open to Pre-function space
separate from Ballroom(s).
3. Acoustics: Follow Ballroom criteria above for
Acoustics and Operable Partitions.
4. Doors - Meeting Rooms: See Ballroom doors.
5. Door Hardware: See Ballroom and Module <14>.
a. Panic Fire Exit Hardware: Required for occupant
loads greater than 100 persons.
b. Door Hold Open Mechanism: Required for
doors from assembly areas greater than 32.5 m2
(350 sq. ft.).
E. Natural Light: Where possible, introduce natural light at
windows; views preferred.
F. Audio / Visual: <13C> In order to provide flexibility in
placement, the type, and size of projection screen, marker
and tack board, A/V equipment is typically not “built-in”.

Figure 9 - Meeting Room Adjacency Diagram
Passenger To Ballroom Service Elevators

Elevators Section 6.2 <12>
<12>
Pantry
Foyer
Coat Section 2.15

Section 2.16 Meeting Room
Section 2.14
Public Circulation 3.35 m Wide
To Hotel Lobby <2>
Back-of-House Corridor
Pre-function Meeting Room
Section 6.3
Catering
Showroom Meeting Room Meeting Room
Business Center
Section 6.8
Meeting Room
To Function Porte Cochere <2>
G. Communications: <13B>
1. Provide telephones.
2. Include a minimum of two computer data ports and
power outlets.
H. Lighting Controls: Conceal dimmers for lighting in paneling
at public / guest door.
I. Finishes: Refer to Module <GR>. See “Design Features”
and FF&E requirements in this Module.

Example: Boardroom 6.5 Boardrooms - Design

A. Program: Locate Boardrooms in proximity to Meeting
Rooms with adequate Pre-function space.
B. Relationships:
1. Primary: Public circulation routes
2. Secondary: Service corridor
C. Size / Area:
1. Area dictated by the project Facilities Program.
2. Room Configuration: 4.9 x 8.5 m (16 x 28 ft.) for fixed
table seating for 14 persons, minimum.
D. Acoustics: Perimeter walls; STC 55 to structure.
1. Furniture: Permanent executive quality conference
table with centrally located concealed electrical and
computer access. Provide leather finished executive
chairs on casters with adjustable seating height.
2. Credenza: Built-in credenza style casepiece with
granite top and stained millwork cabinetry.
3. Artwork: Distinctive prints and original artwork, matted
and framed. Artifacts lighted in feature locations.
4. Provide concealed LCD television, HD cable and
integral component capability.
5. Refer to Module <15C> for electrical / data floor boxes.
6. Natural Light: Where possible, introduce natural light
at windows; views preferred.
F. Finishes - Boardrooms: Generally, provide higher quality
finish materials in Boardrooms than Meeting Rooms.
1. Walls: Stained wood paneling with upholstered
insets; decorative wood door casing with matching
architectural features, niches for accented accessories
and lighted artwork.
Figure 10 - Boardroom Adjacency Diagram
Lounge Seating Pantry
Boardroom
Foyer

2. Ceiling Details: Coffer or dome with recessed lights

and light coves. Conceal HVAC diffusers in ceiling
details. Integrate the location of sprinkler heads
into ceiling design. Acoustical tile ceilings are not
acceptable.
3. Floor: Carpet Boardroom Meeting Setup
4. Windows: Provide decorative window treatment with
blackout capabilities.
G. Communications, Audio / Visual & Power: Boardroom
technology is “HD video teleconference ready”. See <13C>.
1. Flat panel TV screen and DVD (consult with RCH to
determine type): Provide as built-in millwork A/V unit
with inputs at the front of the room and table.
2. Projector and Projection Screen: Provide built-in,
retractable projector and screen concealed at ceiling.
Hardwire remote control is wall mounted.
3. Power Outlets: Provide electrical outlets to serve the
following:
a. Counter space at credenza
b. Throughout the room for maintenance and guest
use.
c. Boardroom Table: Outlets in center of table.
4. Voice & Data Ports: Provide voice and data ports in the
room and at the center of the Boardroom table for guest use.
5. Digital Signage: Provide at entrance.
6. Sound System: Built-in
7. PI Access: Provide wired to network and wireless.
Figure 11 - Example: Boardroom Plan
1 Object Wall
3
2 Credenza
3 Executive Conference Table With
Seating for 10-12
1
4 Service Entrance

H. Lighting: Provide a combination of the following:

1. Cove: Concealed area lighting integrated into ceiling
coffers.
2. Recessed: Recessed lights focused on table and
Example: Boardroom credenza.
3. Feature: Ceiling mounted or suspended decorative light
fixture centered on table. Coordinate ceiling height,
fixture size and ceiling detail to avoid having suspended
light fixtures interfere with visual presentations.
4. Controls: Lighting controlled by concealed dimmers
readily accessible to RCH staff.
6.6 Function Space - Interior Design - General
A. Application: Pre-function; Ballroom; Meeting Rooms;
Boardrooms.
B. Level of Quality: Select high quality finishes and materials
similar in quality and design theme of public spaces.
1. Coordinate selection of decorative furnishings,
millwork, lighting, artwork and interior landscaping.
2. In order to maintain guest comfort, verify that heating
and cooling variations caused by natural light, artificial
light, heat and humidity from users are considered in
the environmental control design. <15>
C. Signage / Graphics: <GR>
1. Coordinate signs and graphic locations with lighting,
wall millwork and detailing; allow for door swing and
door clearance.
2. Occupancy Loads: Posted according to local code.
3. Ballroom Salons: Non-illuminated signs or LCD
screens.
D. Interior Landscaping: Emphasize use of live flowering
plants.
E. Lighting: <15C> Feature decorative suspended light
fixtures, decorative ceiling fixtures and wall sconces mixed
with architectural lighting to provide adequate light levels.
1. Locations: Light fixture locations have priority over
location of speakers, grilles, fire protection devices, and
similar exposed items. Coordinate fixture placement to
create aesthetically pleasing patterns.
2. Decorative Light Fixtures: Generally, these fixtures
weigh 400 kg (900 lbs) maximum and are 2.5 m (8 ft.)
diameter maximum.
a. Review load and structural support details with
structural engineer and RCH.
b. Determine details required for seismic loads and
acoustic control such as spring mounting details.

c. Secure fixtures to structure above with stainless

steel safety cable.
d. Provide electric winch control equipment to lower
/ raise fixtures for service and maintenance.
3. Wall Sconces: Mount to walls with maximum 10 cm
(4 inch) projection when less than 2.03 m (6'-8") above
finish floor.
F. Mechanical & Electrical Accessories: Conceal electric outlets,
telephone, audio, cable TV, etc., connections in walls or
baseboards. For mechanical and electrical grilles, plates,
doors, accessories, etc., match or conceal devices within
surrounding wall and ceiling finish.
G. Fire Protection & Life Safety Devices and Equipment:
1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: If required, solid front,
paint to match background color, if permitted by
governing code.
2. Exit Signs: Recess in walls, if permitted by governing
code.
3. See additional requirements in Module <14>.
6.7 Function Space FF&E - General
A. Design Concept: Appropriate for the locale while projecting
a warm comfortable ambiance with bright, cheerful and
contrasting colors.
B. FF&E Criteria: See Module <GR4> for Public Area FF&E
products criteria.
C. Carpet: Focal point featuring large scale, dramatic patterns,
minimum of 12 different colors.
1. Minimum Quality: 80% wool; 20% nylon Axminster
carpet with no less than 10 rows.
2. Scale of Carpet Pattern:
a. Pre-function: Minimum of 23 cm (9 inch) visual
repeat; 35 cm (13 inch) wide border; larger for
large area.
b. Ballroom: Minimum of 91 cm (36 inch) visual
repeat; 60 cm (27 inch) wide border.
c. Meeting Rooms / Boardroom: Maximum of
23 cm (9 inch) visual repeat; 35 cm (13 inch) wide
border.
D. Window Treatment: Sheer, stationary side panel with tie-
back, over drapery, valance or cornice.
1. Black-out lining in Meeting Rooms and Boardroom.
2. Style should be appropriate for the grand scale of the
space.
E. Seating: Provided under FF&E package. See <GR4>.

1. Upholstery Materials: Leather and fabrics suitable for

heavy commercial use.
2. Fabric Pattern: Select patterns with good coverage;
avoid fragile weaves and materials such as velvets and
satins.
3. Provide small seating groups in Pre-function spaces
and directly outside Meeting Rooms and Board Room
foyers.
4. Banquet Chairs: Chair is provided under OS&E
package. Provide chair ganging (interlocking) device.
<14>
Designer specifies leather or fabrics intended for heavy-
duty commercial use.
F. Softgoods: Treat material with required and appropriate
fire retardant treatment and soil protection treatments.
G. Casegoods:
1. Select furniture pieces that are scaled and of a high
quality adequate for public space use.
2. Include stone or beveled glass finish top protection for
credenzas, console tables, and side tables.
3. Polished and Sealed Stone Tops: Millwork and built-in
cabinet counters.
H. Art and Artifacts: Provide original artwork in featured
locations. Framed and matted prints are acceptable in
locations of secondary importance.
6.8 Business Center
A. Concept: The RCH (Ritz-Carlton Hotel) Business Center
provides the business guest with an array of business
services.
Provide space and state-of-the-art technologies for guest
convenience in a business environment to support business
activities such as faxing, copying, reading, writing, com-
puting, telecommunicating, posting and other activities.
B. Location: Locate the Business Center function area adjacent
to Pre-function and meeting areas to support meeting room
activities. Adjacency to the executive offices or off a main
circulation corridor is recommended.
C. Space / Area: Accommodate the following functional spaces
(net areas) in the Business Center for each region:
1. Entrance / Foyer
2. Reception
3. Attendant Work Area
4. Computer Work Stations

D. Entrance / Foyer: Provide an attractive and inviting entrance

portal to announce the location of the Business Center (and
hotel’s Administration Office if serving both functions).
1. Generally, provide elegant glass doors or millwork
doors and glass / millwork storefront to introduce the
Business Center from public circulation.
2. Design a securable and business like entrance with a
formal sophisticated appearance and simple, graphic
identification.
3. As appropriate to the location, provide an entrance that
allows privacy and acoustically separates the Business
Center from adjoining activities that may disrupt
patrons in the center.
E. Guest Lounge Seating: Adjacent to reception station;
provide lounge seating and waiting area to accommodate a
minimum of 2 to 4 people.
F. Reception: Provide a sophisticated, professional and
handsomely appointed reception area with a distinctive
reception station.
Location: Position and locate to assure passive surveillance
of the Business Center and provide easy and convenient
guest reception and greeting area.
G. Reception Station: Dependent on size of Business Center,
provide a receptionist desks or a multi-station counter.
1. Desk Construction: Rich wood or stone or a
combination of materials; stone top.
2. Equipment: Conceal and/or position out of view from
guests.
3. Back Wall: Behind desk, keep clear and simple. Use
wall space for property logo / identification, focal art
or artifacts. Construct wall of rich material such as
paneled wood, fine upholstery, etc.
4. Lighting: Provide recessed ceiling fixtures for accent
on art and to highlight back wall. Provide sufficient
light for desk attendants to work.
H. Features: Include the following features and devices at
Reception Station:
1. Computer (with PMS). <13A> Work stations may share
single common printer at other stations.
2. Printers: Dedicated or conveniently shared.
3. Digital phones; fax machines; Call Accounting. <13B>
printer for billing.
I. Attendant Work Area: Provide work area with direct access
by Business Center attendant with fax machine, copy
machine, and other necessary business equipment.

1. Location: Place out of direct view from entrance and

reception area.
2. Features: Include the following features and devices:
a. Fax Machines: Full feature, minimum of two
b. Copier: Commercial, mid-size with collating, as-
sembly and binding
c. Printer: Dedicated or conveniently shared laser
printer; color and black / white
d. Postal and courier scales and equipment
e. Storage cabinets for securing office equipment and
supplies
f. Access to staff toilets if remote from public toilet,
and access to a small beverage pantry.
g. Convenience outlets at countertop height and gen-
eral illumination from ceiling fixtures and under
wall cabinets.
J. Computer Work Stations: Provide 3 compartmentalized
work station booths for private use by guests. In the U.S. /
Canada, 2 are required.
Features: Provide the following with state-of-the-art
technology:
1. Work Stations: Digital phone; fax <13B>; PC work
station (at least one station with dedicated printer; one
with desktop publishing options).
2. Dataport for PCs; allow for Internet connection.
3. Printers: Dedicated or conveniently shared; may share
single common printer at attendant work area.
K. Interior Design – Finishes for Business Center:
1. General: <GR> Coordinate interior design concepts,
styles and materials with other hotel Public Spaces.
<2>
2. Floors: Carpet with anti-static properties or a
combination of stone or wood with area rugs.
3. Walls:
a. Entrance Reception: Wood panels or combination
of wood paneling and high quality wallcoverings.
b. Work Areas / Meeting Rooms: High quality wall-
coverings; trim with base and ceiling molding.
4. Ceilings: Gypsum board required throughout; multi-
level in reception area. Conceal grilles, vents, registers
and similar devices in coffered ceilings.
5. Lighting: Provide a combination of recessed
architectural lighting, decorative lighting and
decorative lamps.

6.9 Catering Showroom

A. Program: Design to display various table settings and
banqueting options for key social functions such as
weddings and Bar Mitzvahs.
1. Design is by the project’s Interior Designer.
2. Refer to the Facilities Program for size requirements
and location.
3. Catering Showroom and Business Center should have
some adjacency.
B. Location: When required, locate off the circulation between
the Pre-function and hotel lobby.
C. Features:
1. Lockable and lit millwork cabinets for display and
storage of place settings, linens and catalogues.
2. Round table for table top display.
3. Desk with seats for 2 guests to review catalogues with
sales associate.
D. Finishes: Equal to that of the Ballroom / Pre-function.
Function Space Support

6.10 Public Support Spaces
A. Program: Comply with the project Facilities Program for
requirements of Public Toilets, Internet / phone rooms and
Coatroom. Provide in compliance with the following:
B. Location: Support Facilities are located off a foyer leading
to the Pre-function area.
C. Public Toilets:
1. See Module <2> for toilet requirements.
2. Provide toilet facilities dedicated to Function space.
D. Public Telephones: <13B> Provide the following:
1. One house phone
2. Consult with RCH to determine Public Telephone
requirements since mobile phones and computers are
minimizing public phone use.
E. Cell Phones: <13B> Verify that area location and hotel
construction permits cell phone reception and use
throughout.
F. Computer Connectivity: <13A> Provide wireless connectivity.
G. Coat Room: Position room within a securable area, adjacent
to Pre-function, entry circulation, but within sight of guest
circulation. A coat room may not be required in warm
climate locations.

1. Size space based on regional requirements, but normally

not less than 0.027 m2 (0.3 sq. ft.) by anticipated
occupancy.
2. Provide sufficient coat / garment hanging racks with
equipment based on market analysis and the Facilities
Program.
3. Provide minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft.) long by 0.6 m (2 ft.)
deep counter space for two attendants adjacent to Coat
Room entry door.
4. Coat racks and shelves are concealed from guest view.
6.11 BOH Function Service Spaces
A. Program: Design and provide for the following BOH
(Back-of-House) spaces that serve Function areas:
1. Service Corridor(s): 2 m (6.5 ft.) minimum at Meeting
Rooms. See Section 6.2 for Ballroom Service Corridors.
2. Banquet Storage
3. Beverage Storage
4. Sound Equipment
5. Audio / Visual Equipment Storage Room
6. Banquet Service Manager’s Office
6.12 Banquet Storage
A. Program: Provide an enclosed, secure room for storage
of Ballroom and Meeting Room chairs, table, stages,
podiums, decorations, and equipment associated with
Figure 12 - Example: Banquet Storage
function activities.
B. Relationships:
1. Primary: Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms and Service
Corridors
A B
2. Secondary: Pre-function
C. Size / Area:
1. 15% minimum of Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms / net
area required.
2. Where configurations do not permit single space,
B include multiple storage areas in close proximity to
respective rooms being served.
A 3. Ceiling: 3 m (10 ft.) minimum height
D. Steward’s Room: Within the Banquet Storage Area, provide
a separate, secure, lockable room of 19 m2 (200 sq. ft.) to
store banquet food service equipment and silver storage.
E. Doors: See Module <GR> for additional general
A Event Services
B Banquet Services
requirements for BOH doors, frames and hardware.
1. Access to and from Banquet Storage through pair of
0.9 m (3 ft.) wide doors.

2. Secondary access through single door, minimum of

1.07 m (3'-6") width.
3. Hardware: Lockable
F. Finishes: Refer to Module <GR>. Provide the following:
1. Floor: Concrete with heavy duty sealer
2. Walls: Painted
3. Base: 15 cm (6 inch) resilient base
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure, painted white
6.13 Banquet Beverage Storage
A. Program: Provide a secure space to store beverages for
access to various function spaces. Include refrigerated
units for holding bottled wine and dairy products.
6.14 Sound Equipment
A. Program: Provide an enclosed, secure room for audio /
visual, <13C> electronic equipment racks and distribution
associated primarily with Ballroom and Meeting Room
activities.
B. Location:
1. Centrally locate room adjacent to Ballroom and
Meeting area.
2. Locate entrance door at Service Corridor of function
area to permit direct access for convenient adjustment
of audio / visual equipment.
3. Avoid locations subject to water damage.
4. Avoid sources of electronic interference.
5. If function spaces are remotely divided, provide
multiple sound rooms.
C. Size / Area: 7.4 m2 (80 sq. ft.) gross minimum. <13C>
1. Plan: 2.6 x 2.75 m (8'-6" by 9 ft.)
2. Ceiling: 2.7 m (9 ft.) minimum height
D. Door: See Module <GR> for additional general requirements
for back-of-house doors, frames and hardware.
1. Seal: Perimeter seal to limit dust
2. Size: 0.9 x 2 m (3'-0" by 6'-8") minimum
E. Air Conditioning: Continuous air conditioning <15A>
1. Heat Load: 5,000 BTU / hr. (verify)
F. Finishes: Refer to Module <GR>. Provide the following:
1. Floor: Vinyl composition tile
3. Walls: Painted
4. Ceiling: Accessible acoustical tile

6.15 Audio / Visual Equipment Storage Room

A. Program: Provide an enclosed, secure room for storage
and control of audio / visual equipment associated with
function spaces. Provide storage for equipment such as TVs,
DVDs, projectors, microphones, flip charts and computer
equipment.
B. Location:
1. Centrally locate in function space.
2. Door access from Service Corridor.
C. Size / Area:
1. Plan: 14 m2 (150 sq. ft.) typical size
2. Ceiling: 2.5 m (8 ft.) minimum height
for BOH doors, frames and hardware.
1. Size: 0.9 x 2 m (3'-0" x 6'-8") minimum
2. Type: "Dutch" door with shelf
3. Lock: Electronic operated RFID lock. <16>
E. Features:
1. Desk and chair
2. Telephone / computer. <13B> <13A>
3. Storage racks
F. Finishes: Refer to Module <GR>.
3. Walls: Painted
Figure 13 - Example: A / V Equipment Storage

6.16 Banquet Service Manager’s Office

A. Program: Public access to Banquet Service Manager’s
Office is not essential but desirable at properties with large
function facilities.
B. Location: When required (see project Facilities Program),
locate the Banquet Service Manager’s Office off a foyer,
behind the Ballroom.
for BOH doors, frames and hardware.
1. Size: 0.9 x 2 m (3'-0" x 6'-8") minimum
2. Lock: Electronic operated RFID lock <16>
E. Features:
1. Office desk and chair
2. Telephone / computer <13B> <13A>
F. Finishes: Refer to Module <GR>.
3. Walls: Painted
Figure 14 - Example: Banquet

Service Manager’s Office

6.17 Florist / Floral Preparation

A. Program: When required, provide a Floral Preparation Room
to support and supplement the hotel marketing programs for
catering, reception and banqueting activities.
Figure 15 - Example: Partition No requirement to provide a retail and display outlet nor to sup-
Storage Enclosure port guests’ request for floral and specialty gift items.
Plan View
6.18 Operable Partitions
A. Program: Provide operable partitions to divide large function
spaces into smaller areas, and to acoustically and visually
isolate spaces.
B. Design Requirements:
• Operable Partition: STC 54
• Field Test: NIC 46
 • Floor: Dead Level
• Track: Programmable
• Adjacent Walls: STC 55
• Wall Above Operable Partition: STC not less than operable
  partition
• Storage Enclosures: STC 55
C. Acceptable Operable Partition Manufacturers & Models:
• Advanced Equipment Co., Alpha Series 5MR8, Fullerton,
CA; 714-635-5350
• Hufcor Inc., Model #641, Janesville, WI; 800 356-6968 or
542-2371
 • Modernfold by Dorma, Acousti-Seal Encore, Greenfield, IN;
800-869-9685
D. Acoustics: Design adjoining wall construction for required
Plan View acoustical sealing of operable partitions to walls.
 Ballroom Interior Wall 1. Wall above Operable Partition: Acoustically rated, no
 Service Corridor less than operable partition system. Seal joints, around
penetrations and wall perimeter.
 Enclosure Access Doors
2. Enclosures for Operable Partitions: Acoustically rated
walls and ceiling, no less than operable partition system.
3. Spaces Above & Below: Provide acoustic control of ceiling
and floor system if occupied spaces are planned above or
below Ballroom.
4. Mechanical Systems: See “HVAC / Building Services”
section in this Module and Module <15A> for Ballroom
and Salon supply and return air systems and ductwork
 arrangements to avoid penetrating acoustic rated wall
above operable partition.

Iso View

E. Operable Partition System: Provide and detail operable

partitions to complement and complete the fixed wall
design and finish.
1. Panels:
a. Acoustics: STC 54 (lab test) minimum
b. Fabrication: Fully welded steel frame with
lock formed welded steel faces (no mechanical
fasteners and rivets) and sound backing. Prepare
faces for finish selected by Interior Designer.
2. Type: Provide manually operated partitions with top Figure
g 16 - Examplep :
hung, full height, single panel system. Operable
p Partition - Detail
Motor Operated: Verify with RCH if motorized operation
is acceptable when Ballrooms are over 1000 m2
(10,800 sq. ft.) or partitions are taller than 5 m (16 ft.).
(Motorized partitions involve a higher initial cost,  
higher maintenance, and operational controls. Verify
that dependable, immediate service is available to
repair motorized partitions to avoid disruptions to
function schedules). 
3. Deflection Loads: Review partition system loading
with structural engineer to verify that allowable

deflection of supporting structure will not restrict
partition operation nor effect partition acoustics. 
a. Allow for overhead deflection loads.
b. At floor, provide dead level surface along path of  Ballroom Interior Wall
partition operation.  Service Corridor
c. Maximum Deflection: L / 360 for any component  Enclosure Access Doors
4. Trolley & Track: Heavy duty steel or aluminum track  Operable Panel Continues Fully to
system with two sets of hardened ball bearing steel tire Seal at Wall with Solid Blocking
wheeled trolleys at each panel for smooth and easy
operation.
a. Provide metal track with programmable (curve
and diverter) design to accommodate ease of
partition movement. Right angle track is not
permitted.
b. Extend overhead structure and track into partition
storage enclosure for designated ballroom and
salon dividing partitions.
c. Acceptable Manufacturer’s track system:
• Advanced Equipment: #8
• Hufcor: #11
• Modernfold: #14
5. Panel Seals: Provide mechanically operated top and
bottom panel seals.
a. Automatic top and bottom seals may be considered
by RCH during project review process.

b. Provide 827 kp (120 psi) bottom seals for continuous

contact to finish floor surface.
c. Provide continuous side panel seals and at partition
storage enclosures.
d. Coordinate floor seal contact with floor finishing
requirements.
6. Pass Doors: Partition pass doors are not permitted because
they are an acoustic weak point and do not qualify as exits;
see Module <14>.
F. Enclosures for Operable Partition Storage: Acoustically seal
enclosure walls and ceilings. See Figures 16 and 17.
1. Enclosure Configuration:
Provide recessed (typically, outside of Ballroom and
Meeting spaces), operable partition storage enclosures
with access doors at perimeter wall.
2. Operable Partitions Inside Enclosures:
a. Seal partition panel edge to rear of enclosure at
continuous solid blocking to avoid sound transmission
through wall cavity.
When partition is extended to full position to divide spaces,
partition fits tight to rear wall of storage enclosure.
b. Provide dedicated stacking for partitions that further
subdivide Ballroom segments. Panel mixing is avoided
by utilizing continuous overhead track provided only
for the designated partition and its storage enclosure.
c. Position operable partition tracks flush in ceiling or
visually minimize by millwork trim consistent with
interior design.
3. Walls: Provide acoustic rated wall assemblies. Reinforce
stud framed wall cavities with continuous wood blocking
where operable partition seals press against stationary
walls to provide a tight seal.
a. Avoid wall chair rails, base, moldings or other interior
trim that will not allow a tight seal.
b. Review flanking construction for proper seal around
partitions and especially the wall assembly above
ceiling.
4. Doors: Provide type 4 (single panel) or type 3 (paired panel)
pocket door systems of sufficient width, in no less than
91 cm (3 ft.) wide opening, to allow ease of panel movement
into enclosure and to reduce the chance of damaging jambs
and partitions. Conceal access door hardware from view in
public areas.
a. Reinforce access door to form a tight fit with partition
gasket when door is in closed position.
b. Do not rely on storage enclosure access doors for
acoustic separation.

c. Provide door drop and perimeter door seals for

tight top, side, jamb and bottom seal.
d. Extend Ballroom carpet under access door.
e. If recommended by operable partition
manufacturer, provide a staff service, personnel
door to enter operable partition storage enclosure
and to guide partitions on track at Service
Corridor side, opposite, partition access door.
G. Finish Surfaces: Coordinate panel finishes with finish
details and interior architectural design requirements of
permanent walls.
H. Operable Partition Installation: See ASTM E557 Standard
Guide for the Installation of Operable Partitions and
references for recommended installation practices.
I. Testing of Operable Partition System (Required by
RCH): Following complete installation, field test the operable
partition system for acoustic compliance in closed, sealed
position including adjoining walls (sides and above).
1. Color code each panel and number by location for test
documentation.
2. Visually review for proper panel fit, to abutting
construction, and complete required adjustments.
3. Check for light leaks between each panel contact
segment. Inspect partitions for gaps between seals and
adjoining surfaces. One square inch of gap (6.5 cm2)
equals a sound loss of 20 db.
4. Test each partition assembly for Noise Isolation Class
(NIC) with noise reduction of NIC 46 or greater.
Calculate NIC rating in compliance with ASTM
E413 10.
5. Test assembly for Noise Reduction in compliance with
ASTM E336 11 applicable to measurement of isolation
between rooms.
6. Modify, adjust and retest assemblies that do not meet
field tests until accepted without additional cost to
Owner or Marriott.
7. Submit completed test results to Marriott for review in
compliance with the Design Standards
6.19 Function Space Entrance
A. Program: When required by the project Facilities Program.
Provide an exterior Pre-function, Porte Cochere and
Entrance similar, but secondary to main hotel entrance (to
avoid confusing guests) if it is anticipated that function
traffic (cars and guests) will congest the main entrance and
Lobby.

B. Location: Locate and design tour entrance and desk to

provide guests with a high level of service and image equal
to the main entrance and lobby.
C. Features:
1. Architecturally, the scale and image of the Function /
Tour Group entrance is secondary to the main Entrance
/ Porte Cochere (see Module <1>) to avoid confusing
arriving guests.
2. Standards for this entrance area are similar to Lobby
Entrance. <2A>
6.20 Tour Desk
A. Program: Establish requirements based on the project
Facilities Program.
1. Include tour desk in the project to avoid congestion at
Front Desk when tour groups register.
2. Design the tour desk with the same quality level and
image equal to the hotel Lobby entrance.
B. Location: Utilize Function Space (bus) drop off area entrance
and circulation area or provide a secondary lobby entrance
location.
1. Tour desk may be located as a secondary lobby entrance
arranged to avoid circulation congestion with Lobby
Entrance.
2. Locate facility to avoid disruption to Lobby circulation
and Function Space.
C. Size / Area: 9 m² (100 sq. ft.) counter / work area.
D. Finishes:
1. Coordinate finishes with Public Space design concept.
2. Replicate Front Desk check-in facilities. <2A>
including:
• 2A Public Spaces
• 9 Engineering
• 10 Food & Beverage Production Facilities

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
7
Guest Accommodations
7A:: Guestrooms
7B:: Guestroom Corridors
7C:: Club Lounge
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
7A
Guestrooms & Suites
7A - Guestrooms & Suites THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
7A.1 Program 1
7A.2 Acoustic Control 3
7A.3 Windows 4
7A.4 Guestroom Numbering / Signage 6
7A.5 Examples - Diagrams and Drawings 7
7A.6 Guest Bathroom 8
7A.7 Guestroom Closet 12
7A.8 Balconies, Patios and Terraces 13
7A.9 Doors, Frames and Hardware 15
7A.10 Interior Design & Finishes for Guestrooms 18
7A.11 Furniture and Fixtures for Guestrooms 21
7A.12 Guestroom / Suite Pantries 36
7A.13 Equipment for Guestrooms 37
7A.14 Attic Stock for Guestrooms and Suites 39
7A.15 System Features 39

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Guestrooms | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Guestrooms & Suites - 7A
Guestrooms & Suites

7A.1 Program
A. General: The Ritz-Carlton Hotel (RCH) designs convey
a high quality “residential” feel and provide distinct
relaxing, sleeping, grooming, refreshment and working
zones. Guestrooms and Suites are spacious with elegant
appointments and amenities. Provide a high level of sound
attenuation to ensure guest privacy.
B. Rating Criteria: Design RCH Guestrooms to comply with
the current Forbes (Mobil) 5 Star and AAA 5 Diamond
(Automobile Association of America) criteria, Luxury
Hotel Ratings criteria for International locations.
C. Standard Guestroom Plans: Representative guestroom plans
are provided to the Design Team.
1. Standard guestroom plans may be modified by RCH to
competitively place this hotel in the marketplace.
2. Design project guestroom plans to accommodate the
furniture and functions included in this module and the
D. Location: Separate from public / function spaces.
1. Guestroom Elevators: Dedicate to guestroom circula-
tion and avoid service to function, parking and non-
hotel use to control access.
2. Elevator Location: Minimize walking distance to el-
evators on guestroom floors.
E. Size / Area / Arrangements:
1. Guestroom Sizes: Refer to the project Facilities
Program for the minimum RCH guestroom bay, net
area by hotel / region type.
2. Ceiling Heights (minimum above floor):
a. Sleeping & Living Area: 2.6 m (8'-6").
b. Guest Entry, Bath and Closet: 2.33 m (7'-8").
c. Ritz-Carlton Suite – Sleep & Living: 2.9 m (9'-6").
F. Room Types: It is desirable to vertically stack guestroom
types. RCH reviews and adjusts room type mix and location
based on competitive market.
1. Queen / Queen and Kings: Refer to the project Facilities
Program for types.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Guestrooms 1

2. Club Level Guestrooms: Upgraded guestrooms with

access to Club Lounge / Floor and service ameni-
ties are differentiate with different color schemes.
Upgrades can include more interior architectural case-
work, stained versus painted finishes, steam showers,
body sprays, hot towel bars, additional relevant furni-
ture pieces, additional artwork; and upgraded faucet /
fixtures.
Percentage of Club Guestrooms 15% of guestroom
keys or as dictated by the Facilities Program.
3. Suites: See the Facilities Program for quantity.
a. Executive Suite: 2 bays with living room and
bedroom connected by French doors.
b. Deluxe Suite: 3 bays total; 2 parlor, 1 master
bedroom.
c. Ritz-Carlton Suite: (Referred to as the Presidential
Suite in some locations) 5 bays total; 2 living, 1
dining and pantry and 2 for bedroom. Connect to
Queen / Queen guestroom or Executive Suite to
access second bedroom. In key locations, RCH
will request hardened Presidential Suite compo-
nents for loss prevention purposes. <16E>
4. Accessible Guestrooms: Design all guestrooms to
comply with general accessibility requirements of
the governing code and the ADA (Americans with
Disabilities Act).
ADA defines the following fully accessible
criteria. The architect of record is respon-
sible for meeting local code requirements.
a. Distribute the fully accessible guest-
rooms among the various types of
guestrooms including at least one
suite.
b. Connect accessible guestrooms to an
adjacent guestroom.
c. Identify modifications required for
accessibility and submit to RCH for
review and acceptance.
2 Guestrooms | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

G. Connected Rooms: Provide the following percentage of

connected guestrooms. RCH may adjust percentage, room
mix and location based on market.
1. Typically, connect 10% of guestrooms.
2. Resorts typically connect 18% of guestrooms.
3. King rooms connect to Queen / Queen.
4. Queen / Queen connect to Suites.
5. Percentage of connected rooms includes the total num-
ber of connected guestrooms (keys) including standard,
accessible and suite guestrooms.
7A.2 Acoustic Control
A. Design Coordination: Coordinate acoustic criteria with the
following:
1. Exterior Environmental Noise Intrusion: See Module
<1> for Exterior Design, Acoustic requirements.
2. Mechanical Equipment: See <15A> for Noise Criteria.
3. HVAC Return Air: Provide sheet metal, ducted return
air. <15A>
B. Acoustic Consultant: Acoustic performance of walls, floors
and equipment is subject to many variables. Therefore,
retaining a qualified acoustic consultant, a member of
the National Council of Acoustical Consultants, is highly
recommended.
C. Construction Criteria: Provide interior wall, floor and ceiling
construction to achieve the following minimum Sound
Transmission Classification (STC) and Impact Insulation
Class (IIC):
Space Min. STC

Guestroom party walls in masonry 50+
Guestroom party walls in gypsum on stud system 55+
Guestroom shaft and chase walls at bath 50+
Guestroom / elevator shaft walls (double stud) 60+
Guestroom corridor walls 48+
Floor / ceiling construction - concrete 50+
Floor / ceiling construction - wood frame system 55+
Space / Area Min. IIC
Guestroom floor to ceiling 55
D. Elevators: Locate guestrooms away from and not adjacent

to elevators and elevator machine rooms. If guestrooms
are adjacent to elevator shafts and machine rooms, provide
double wall construction (STC 60 minimum) to minimize
and isolate vibration noise.

E. Acoustic Sealants: Provide non-hardening, flexible sealants

designed for acoustic applications to close perimeter joints
and openings in acoustic rated walls such as outlet box
penetrations.
F. Construction Details: Provide acoustic rated installations and
comply with acoustic construction details in this Module.
These details typically include the following:
1. Following the manufacturer’s recommended products
for acoustic wall assemblies. See Figure 1.
2. Design to mitigate plumbing and mechanical generated
noise above ceilings and in chases.
3. Locate HVAC <15A> supply, transfer return grills and
exhaust, and provide sound and acoustic baffles in duc-
twork to prevent noise migration between guestrooms.
4. See http://www.stcratings.com/assemblies.html.
G. Door / Frame Details: Provide door and frame construction
in compliance with the following:
1. Entry Door: STC 32 minimum for wood or composite
solid door fabrication.
2. Connector Doors: STC 32 minimum (each door) for
pair of back-to-back solid doors in double rabbeted
metal frames.
3. Metal Frames: Provide welded corners.
4. Seals: Provide non-visible door perimeter seals and
door bottom seals.
5. Thresholds: Provide stone thresholds with positive
door seal contact at entry and connector doors to com-
ply with door STC rating above.
7A.3 Windows
A. General: Provide exterior windows and glazing to comply
with RCH design / construction features, governing code
and the following.
B. Window Area: Approximately 45% of guestroom exterior
wall (urban). Maximize area at resorts.
1. Large windows are desirable when other design re-
quirements are considered, such as wind loads, earth-
quake, energy efficiency, building design, etc.
2. Use impact resistant window assemblies in regions that
experience high velocity wind events and as required
by governing authority.
3. Sill Height: 76 cm (30 inch) - preferred / maximum.
C. Window Operation: Operable windows are preferred.
1. Provide 10 cm (4 inch) maximum operable window
opening with manufacturer’s restrictive safety stop in-
tegrated with the window construction.

Figure 1 - Example: Acoustic Wall - Plan / Section
 
Failure to seal wall penetrations as noted

below will completely negate the wall's
acoustic performance.
 Studs: Perimeter and wall framing

members

 Sealant: Apply continuous acoustic
sealant on both sides of base, head
and wall framing members that adjoin 
floor, structure above and adjoining
walls.
At masonry walls, seal wall perimeter
at floor, structure above and adjoining

walls.
 Outlet Boxes: <15C> Offset and
stagger outlet boxes between studs

(not back-to-back). Fully seal boxes in
putty packs (or pads), close off wiring
conduits and cable openings with
putty, and seal around boxes.
 Acoustic Insulation: Batt insulation;
fit tightly between framing members.

 Wall Type: Materials vary (gypsum
board panels, acoustic panels, plaster,
etc.)



2. If windows are required for secondary escape route

(typically not required in fully sprinklered hotel build-
ings), review safety stop requirements with RCH.
3. Provide with “key” for maintenance operation.
D. Glass / Glazing: Provide double-glazed clear glass (avoid
reflective / tinted glass).
1. Provide insulated, low-‘E’ value glass / glazing, unless
acoustic comfort, energy efficiency or code dictates
otherwise.
2. Use tempered glass at sliding glass doors and full height
windows subject to human impact and where required
by code.
E. Interior & Finish Details: Provide casing and trim materials
and finish (typically to match interior doors) selected by
Interior Design.
7A.4 Guestroom Numbering / Signage
A. General: Guestroom numbers and characters are assigned
at the beginning of the project’s development to identify
rooms and spaces.
B. Number System: RCH Technical Services provides
numbering consistent with the hotel’s keyed guestroom
or suite numbering system. Do not use combination of
characters such as alpha-numeric or numbering schemes
that may conflict with building systems such as:
1. Telecommunications (telephones / Internet access).
2. PMS (property computer systems; see <13A>).
3. Electronic entry door locks. <16>
4. Avoid use of 13th floor numbering series (typically in
Americas) or other numbers / characters in conflict
with regional culture or practice.
5. Obtain RCH acceptance for recommended hotel room
and guestroom or suite numbering system.
C. Signage: Obtain examples provided by RCH. If required,
provide the following signage, install as inconspicuously
as possible and confirm sign locations with RCH.
1. Code and Accessibility: Provide required information.
2. Evacuation Plan: Provide in frame / glass and mount
to comply with governing authority.
3. Guestroom Rate / Checkout: If required by governing
authority, mount frame / glass sign in entry closet and
as directed by RCH.
D. Coordination: See Module <GR2> for signage types,
materials and mounting locations.

7A.5 Examples - Diagrams and Drawings

A. Convention for Calculating Guestroom Area: The gross and
net area criteria are useful factors to evaluate guestroom
performance. RCH guestroom standards are also based on
critical guestroom dimensions that define the functional
adequacy of the room design.
In order to provide a common vocabulary for guestroom
space planning, the following area designations are defined
(example plans are only diagrammatic):
B. Standard Guestroom Plans: Example floor plan diagrams are
provided to the Design Team.
Guestroom Area Calculation Diagram
Gross Area: A simple, rectangular Net Area: A simple, rectangular area

area defined by the following width defined by the following width and
and length (includes the guestroom length (includes a portion of the
corridor alcove). corridor alcove).
Width: Center of guestroom common Width: Face of guestroom common

wall to center of opposite wall. Length: wall to face of opposite wall (wall to
Corridor side of the corridor wall to wall dimension). Length: Inside face of
exterior face of stud at exterior wall (or bathroom/corridor wall to inside face of
to the interior face of glass at curtain exterior wall.
walls).

7A.6 Guest Bathroom

A. General Description: Spacious, upscale, residential style,
with distinctive vanity feature.
1. 5 fixtures required, including bathtub, shower enclo-
sure, double lavatory and enclosed toilet.
2. Bidet: Required in the Middle East and some other
countries. Verify with RCH if bidets or other fixtures
are required by the Facilities Program.
3. Other Fixtures: Market demand may require more than
5 fixtures, particularly at resort and “international”
locations.
4. Coordination: See Module <15B> for a listing of
plumbing fixture requirements.
5. Finishes:
a. Floor: Stone with 0.6 wet / dry slip resistant fin-
ish; stone base
b. Walls: Stone, vinyl wall covering, or paint
c. Ceiling: Detailed gypsum board, painted
B. Bathtub: Free-standing or undermount cast-iron, full size
soaking tub with single-control mixing valve and hand
shower. Fiberglass and acrylic tubs are not allowed.
1. Size: 168 cm by 80 cm by 40 cm (5’-6” long by 2’-8”
wide by 1’-4” deep).
2. Fixture Color: White.
3. Plumbing Fixtures & Fittings: See Module <15B>.
Example: The Ritz-Carlton Guest Bathroom

4. Fitting Finishes: Recommended by Interior Designer.

5. Region Size Option: Deeper, shorter and wider tubs
are preferred in some locations (coordinate with RCH).
6. Provide a discreet, decorative grab bar handle mounted
on the deck or near the tub entry.
C. Shower Enclosure: An enclosed shower (separate from the
bathtub) is required.
Example: The Ritz-Carlton 1. Glazed Enclosure: Create a sense of a clean, large bath-
Guest Bathroom room area. Provide larger shower predicated on guest-
room module dimensions in the Facilities Program.
a. Size; Minimum size to be 91 x 107 cm (36” x
42”). Larger showers with integral stone bench
are preferred.
b. Shower Finish: Stone.
c. Door and enclosure: Frameless, clear, 10 mm (⅜
inch) minimum thickness, tempered glass. Detail
mounting without top rail or jamb sections.
d. Door Size: Minimum of 700 x 1800 mm (2’-4” x
5’-10”)
e. Hinges: Brass alloy with finish matching the fau-
cet fixtures finish.
f. Edge Trims: At jamb and sill.
g. Gaskets: At jamb and sill.
h. Door Pull: Custom design with both sides of
door to match finish and style of hardware and
bath trim. Provide a dual purpose door pull that
includes a towel bar on the outside of the door.
Example: The Ritz-Carlton Guest Bathroom

i. Sill: Mount door on a raised, sloping (10%) sill to

divert water into shower basin.
j. Quality Standard: Ryadon Inc. # S-GG & S-WG
or Dorma Glass Inc.
k. Shower Floors / Walls: Stone with 0.6 wet / dry
slip resistant floor finish sloped to drain. Do not
locate drain in the center of shower.
2. Grab Bars: Provide 12” vertical grab bar mounted 5’-0”
on center at shower entry.
3. Shower Device: See Module <15B>
4. Shower Soap niche or Shelf: Built-in 20 mm (¾ inch)
thick x 200 mm (8 inch) long marble shelf for soap and
shampoo. Minimum niche size is 7,079 cm3 (432 cubic
inch) and 8 cm (3 inch) deep.
5. Foot Shelf: At the opposite back corner provide a 20
mm (¾ inch) thick marble shelf or bench (similar to
soap dish) for women’s shaving. Mount shelf approxi- Example: The Ritz-Carlton
mately 40 cm (16 inch) above floor. Not required if an Guest Bathroom
integral bench is provided.
6. Shaving Mirror: Mount a 30 x 60 cm (12 x 24 inch)
at 48” aff, fog free treated mirror with shaped stone
trim on the valve side for men’s shaving. Seal perimeter
joint with silicone.
D. Vanity: Provide double undermount lavatory bowls on
counters.
1. Size: Minimum 168 cm (5'-6") width by 56 to 60 cm
(22 to 24 inch) deep, 10 cm (4 inch) back and side splash
with same material to match vanity top. Allow 0.6 m2
(6 sqft) of counter space for guest use.
2. Top and Splash: 30 mm (1 ¼ inch) thick marble or
granite with shaped edge.
3. Amenities Shelf: Stone or glass at back or sides of
lavatory counter.
4. Lavatory Bowl: China, white color; see Module <15B>.
5. Vanity Apron: Provide to conceal vanity bowl and
piping from view with generous apron of wood and /
or stone to create the feel of built-in cabinetry. Include
drawers and shelves in the vanity front for storage or
within easy reach of the vanity area. Provide legroom
at accessible rooms.
6. Fitting Finishes: Selected by Interior Design.
7. Mirrors: Provide decorative wood or marble framed
mirror(s) on wall above lavatory counter. Provide light-
ed, hardwired make up mirror on adjustable bar at a
minimum of 163 cm (5’-4”) aff.

8. Fog Free Mirror: Provide a heating element behind a

portion of the vanity mirror.
9. Lighting: Provide lighting levels required by Module
<15C>. Provide overhead and side lighting at each
vanity bowl. Provide dimmer controls for night light
settings.
E. Toilet Room:
1. Toilet Fixture and Fittings: See Module <15B>.
Elongated bowl with full contoured seat and lid.
2. Fixture Color: White
3. Fitting Finishes: Selected by Interior Design.
4. Walls: Stone, antimicrobial vinyl wallcovering or paint
(humid regions) or obscure glass
5. Ceiling: Detailed as per bathroom design.
Example: The Ritz-Carlton 6. Door: Fixed wood louvered, solid wood panel or un-
Guest Bathroom dercut glass door. See 7A.9 for Door Hardware.
7. Floor: Stone with 0.6 wet / dry slip resistant finish, with
stone wall base
8. Artwork
F. Bidet:
1. Required in Middle East and where required by gov-
erning authority or Facilities Program or where it is the
cultural norm.
2. Locate immediately adjacent to toilet in a single
enclosure.
3. Selection: Refer to Module <15B> for fitting guidelines.
4. Accessories: Provide hand towel bar and soap dish as
required at bidet.
5. Fitting Finishes: Selected by Interior Designer.
G. Bath Accessories:
1. Grab Bar: Set grab bar vertically at bathtub and fasten
to withstand 180 kg (400 lbs.) force in any direction.
Provide silicone caulk in wall grommets. Locate grab
bars as recommended for guest safety.
2. Double Robe Hook: Preferably locate double robe
hooks on walls, adjacent to shower or tub.
3. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Decorative surface mount
twin paper holder, with finish to match.
4. Towel Bars: Provide adequate length of towel bar in
each bathroom, minimum 183 cm (72 inch). Verify
quantity, type and size of guestroom linen with the
RCH project Interior Design manager.

5. Towel Storage: Provide adequate visible or not visible

bath linen storage for each bathroom. Verify quantity,
type and size of guestroom linen with the RCH project
Interior Design manager.
6. Quality Standard: Kohler, Ginger, Kalista and
Waterworks meet minimum standards.
H. Hair Dryer: Handheld; portable (not wall mounted). Verify
current OS&E standards for the project location. Provide
storage location as required.
I. Make-up Mirror: Lighted, adjustable height with high quality
minimum 3x magnification. Wall mount at one side of the
lavatory counter.
J. Television: Provide flat screen television appropriately sized
and located with remote control stored at lavatory. Other
locations are in shower wall or at foot of the tub with
remote control or touch screen panel.
1. Screen Size: 15" diagonal, minimum
2. Refer to Module <13A> for television guidelines.
K. Lighting: See Module <15C>. Request current lamping
information from the RC Interior Design manager. Provide
a color temperature of 27000K and a color rendition index
of 85 minimum.
1. When lamps are exposed to guest view, provide appear-
ance similar to an incandescent. No spiral type lamps.
2. Provide dimmer switches for bathroom lighting.
7A.7 Guestroom Closet
A. Size / Area: 1.67 m (5’-6”) minimum of hanging rod. Provide
single and double rod hanging. If possible, a walk-in closet
configuration is preferred.
1. Suite Closets: 20 sq. ft. walk-in minimum.
2. Resort locations are larger to accommodate longer stay
guests.
B. Closet Features: Provide a compartmentalized “personal”
closet with a wood finish.
1. Hangers: Minimum of 15 wooden hangers (6 men’s; 6
women’s; 3 satin).
2. Equipment: Include guest safe, luggage rack (built-in),
iron and ironing board space (do not use wall support
bracket). Iron and ironing board not typically required
in Asia.
3. Shelving and Drawers: Vertical bank of built-in open
shelves and drawers 46 cm (1’-6”) wide. One drawer for
inserted guest safe, conveniently located for guest use.

4. Clothes Rod: 60 cm (24 inch) wide minimum area for

long hanging items; 120 cm (48 inch) wide area for
short hanging items. Provide shelf above full length of
closet.
5. Mirror: Full length mirror on back (inside) of one door
with framed edge.
6. Lighting: Provide closet light, automatically controlled
by door operated contact switch at each door.
7. Accessories: Provide closet organizer for umbrella,
shoe horn and brush.
C. Closet Doors: Millwork doors with hinged or sliding
operation required; paint or wood stained finish. For
hinged doors, provide latch hardware to hold doors in a
closed position. For barn doors, provide pulls and bumpers
to keep doors from damaging frame. See 7A.9 for Door
Hardware.
7A.8 Balconies, Patios and Terraces
A. Program: See the project Facilities Program. If Guestrooms
include an exterior balcony, patio or terrace, provide the
following design features.
B. Balcony Size / Area: See standard guestroom example floor
plans in this Module.
C. Door / Frame: Design exterior doors and frames to comply
with air and water infiltration requirements for project
environment. Obtain RCH acceptance for the following
fabrication options:
1. Exterior metal with Kynar or equal exterior finish or
solid wood fabrication with metal cladding and Kynar
finish.
2. Stain or paint (factory finish preferred) interior face of
wood doors to match door trim and casings.
3. In marine environments, provide aluminum exterior
with Kynar finish using same color selected for interior
jamb, casing and trim finish.
D. Door Hardware: Provide the following applicable to door
operation:
1. Decorative Pull: Polished finish (interior). Back-to-
back mounting. Custom design to match finish and
style of other hardware.
2. Mortise Thumbturn: At interior; no exterior operation.

3. Secondary Lock: Provide type that is easy to operate, vi-

sually obvious and secure. Provide hinge door with night-
guard bar and sliding doors with a hinged “Charley Bar” or
“Engert” device (“U” shaped hasp lock).
4. Threshold: Brass or aluminum
E. Balcony Guardrail: Protect the open sides of balconies to include
a continuous guardrail with the following features:
1. Rail Height: 1.1 m (42 inch) minimum
2. Openings: Capable of restricting a 10 cm (4 inch) ball with
configurations that limit climbing, such as vertical pickets.
Horizontal rails are not acceptable.
3. Floor Clearance: 5 cm (2 inch) maximum to minimize ob-
jects from falling off edge.
4. Graphics: Include signage regarding balcony safety <GR2>.
5. Provide rail design that allows maximum views.
F. Furnishings: Provide good quality, corrosion resistant,
comfortable seating group designed for outdoor use.
Provide two chairs and one table, minimum.
G. Lighting and Power: See Lighting Matrix in Module <15C> for
lighting attributes.
1. Provide GFI convenience outlet. Mount near table location.
2. Select fixtures that conceal the light source. Verify with
RCH Operations if light fixtures may be omitted.
3. Avoid exterior light fixtures where insects are attracted
and fixture lights create erratic, conflicting and poor exte-
rior lighting.
4. At beach resorts, comply with environmental laws. See
Module <1>.
5. Consider ceiling fans in regions of hot / humid environments.
H. Snow Melting: At ski resort or RCH sites with heavy snow
accumulation, provide snow melting system for on grade
patios and terraces.
I. Finishes - Balconies: Finish walls as required for exterior
building finishes.
1. Provide membrane waterproofing below ceramic tile or
other selected finish material on suspended slabs above oc-
cupied areas.
2. Provide finish deck surface such as stone or unglazed 200
x 200 mm (8 x 8 inch) or larger ceramic tile pavers with
minimum 0.6 wet / dry slip resistance.
3. Seal tile / grouted joints with penetrating sealer finish.
4. Slope decks away from building to drain surface water to
storm water collection system <15B>.

7A.9 Doors, Frames and Hardware

A. Submittals and General Product Requirements: See Module
<GR3>.
B. Door Sizes: Provide door widths that meet accessibility
requirements for “standard” and “accessible” Guestrooms
and Suites unless other sizes are required.
1. Width: 0.9 m (3 ft.) with minimum 0.81 m (2’-8”) clear
opening
2. Thickness: 45 mm (1 ¾ inch)
3. Height: 2.1 m (7 ft.) at guestroom / suite entry doors
and 2.0 m (6'-8") minimum or 2.1 m (7 ft.) is acceptable
at interior guestroom doors.
C. Door Frames: Provide metal or wood frames including
wood molding, trim and paint or stain finish by Interior:
1. Metal: Hollow steel, 1.52 mm (U.S. 16 gage); fully
welded joints; factory prime for selected paint finish.
2. Wood: Solid wood frame and trim
3. Trim / Molding: Solid wood to encase wood or metal
frames.
D. Hardware Materials and Finishes: See Module <GR3> for
general hardware requirements including base metal and
required finishes.
1. For “accessible” guestrooms, provide same door hard-
ware as required for “standard” guestrooms.
2. Generally, provide non-corrosive metal / metal finishes,
non-painted door hinges, locksets and related exposed
hardware.
E. Guestroom Entry Door: 20 minute fire rating, minimum in
rated firewalls of 1 hour; closer required.
1. Door: Solid core wood construction; fully bonded.
2. Door Details: Raised wood panel type or applied
molding to flush door on both sides.
3. Face: Stain grade or painted wood veneer; coordinate
finish with Interior Design.
4. Evacuation Plaque: <GR2> Framed and located on in-
terior side of door as directed by RCH.
5. Frame: Provide details for wood or metal frames to
resist forced entry with hand tools and are compatible
with security, code and climate.
6. Fastening / Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement,
anchors and fasteners to secure frame to perimeter
construction. Reinforce frame at latch strike to resist
forced entry with a pry bar type hand tool.

F. Hardware – Entry Door:

1. Hinges: Spring type with concealed bearings, 115 x 115
mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch). Painted hinges are not allowed.
2. Closer: When required by governing code, provide closer
type concealed in door head (not spring hinges). Stanley
1900 non-spring or McKinney #TA 714 non-spring or
equal.
3. Door Latch: Position door frame so that interior latch side
of door edge is 46 cm (18 inch) minimum clear distance
from adjoining guestroom wall at right angle to corridor
wall.
4. Entrance Lock: <16> Provide Saflok card entry or prox-
imity operated lock with, 25 mm (1 inch) automatic dead
bolt (ADB). Verify current standard with RC.
a. Provide Saflok Odyssey with decorative RCH plate or
Quantum MT proximity hardware.
b. Provide lever handle style and finish to complement
project finishes and interior décor.
c. In marine environments, provide chrome, stainless or
bronze finish when approved by RCH.
5. Door Viewer: HB Ives 698, minimum 160 degree; install at
1.5 m (5 ft.). For second viewer at “accessible” Guestrooms,
mount at accessible height.
6. Door Bell Button / Chime: If required at suites or accessi-
ble rooms, provide button at accessible height below guest-
room number on corridor side; locate flush style chime
device on entry wall. Provide on / off switch in room.
7. Sound Seal / Gasket: Coordinate color with Interior
Designer; Pemko S88 or Hager 7265
8. Exterior: Weather and sound seals
9. Door Guards: Bar type. Coordinate with hardware finish,
door / frame trim without need to route or cut door edge.
10. Threshold: Marble
G. Connector Door(s): Provide to connect guestrooms.
1. Door: Solid core wood construction; fully bonded; two
door arrangement (pair of doors back to back) in single
frame with perimeter acoustical seal for privacy and
security.
2. Rating: Typically not required, but not less than rating re-
quirements for doors / frames in rated party wall.
3. Face: Selected by Interior Designer.
4. Frame: Provide metal or wood with wood trim that meets
applicable rating and security requirements above.
5. Hardware: Provide with communicating (connector) door
latch and deadbolt (thumb turn only); latchset; stop; door
seal; bottom seal; bronze or stone threshold; hinges; fin-
ishes similar to entry door.

H. Bathroom Door:
1. Door: Solid core wood construction; fully bonded with
face finish selected by Interior Designer.
2. Frame: Wood or metal with wood trim
3. Door Hardware:
a. Hinges: 5 knuckle, 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch),
Hager 279 or McKinney T2714 or equal
b. Tubular Privacy Latchset: Exterior lever knob and
rose, interior lever, rose and strike
c. Door Stop: Provide door stop hardware.
d. Threshold: Provide stone for floor finish transition,
color selected by Interior Designer.
4. Toilet Enclosure Door: See above for “Bathroom”.
5. Hardware for Toilet Enclosure Door:
a. Hinges: 5 knuckle, 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch);
Hager 1279 or McKinney T2714 or equal
b. Tubular Passage Latchset: Levers, rose and strike,
(polished chrome finish); Baldwin 8520 with 8724 or
equal levers (or 5107) and 5048 (or 5002) roses
c. Wall Stop: 25 mm (1 inch) diameter button stop; HB
Ives 404
I. Hardware - Closet Doors: Provide the following or equal for
single closet doors:
1. Hinges: 5 knuckle, 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch); Hager
1279 or McKinney T2714
2. Tubular Passage Latchset: Levers, roses and strike.
Baldwin 8520 with 8724 levers (or 5107) and 5048 (or
5002) roses both sides
3. Wall Stop: 25 mm (1 inch) button stop; HB Ives 404
4. Concealed Overhead Stop: (if there is no wall for stop);
Rixson-Firemark 5-331 or Sargent 1530 or Glynn Johnson
GJ510
J. French Doors: Typically, required in suites between bedroom
and living space. Provide in solid wood / glazing of design
selected by Interior Design.
K. Hardware - French Doors: See Master Bathroom.
1. Hinges: 5 knuckle, 115 x 115 mm (4 ½ x 4 ½ inch), Hager
1279 or McKinney T2714
2. Tubular Passage Set: Levers, rose and strike (active leaf);
Baldwin 8520 with 8724 levers and 5048 roses
3. Dummy Trim: Lever and rose (second leaf); Baldwin
8724 levers (or 5107) and 5048 (or 5002) roses and 6734
thumbturn
4. Wall Stop: 25 mm (1 inch) button stop; HB Ives 404
5. Flush Bolt: At top of second leaf; HB Ives 457 ½

L. Balcony, Patio and Terrace Doors: See “Balconies, Patios

and Terraces” above for doors, frames and hardware
requirements.
7A.10 Interior Design & Finishes for Guestrooms
A. Submittals and General Product Requirements: See Module
<GR3>.
B. Style: Design for a well balanced, regional ambiance
reflecting the written concept statement generated by the
Design Firm at the beginning of a project.
1. Materials: Specify aesthetically appropriate, function-
al, durable and easy to maintain hospitality products
and finishes.
2. Sense of Place: Select materials and furniture reflect-
ing the region and culture.
3. Color Schemes: Required color schemes include one
scheme for the typical guestrooms (QQ and King); and
one scheme for the Club Floor guestroom. The Club
guestroom color scheme can be used in the Executive
Suites. Premium suites such as the Presidential, Ritz-
Carlton and Deluxe Suites each require a specific color
scheme and FF&E selections, different from the typical
guestroom, Club guestrooms and Executive Suites.
C. Finishes - Primary Living Areas: See above for guest bath and
closet finishes.
1. Floor: Carpet (see FF&E requirements in this Module);
wall-to-wall or area rugs over hard surface finish floor-
ing. Area rugs or carpets are free-lay over a flush sur-
face floor. For tropical resort locations, use hard surface
flooring with area rugs.
2. Entry Area: Carpet or hard surface flooring such as
stone or wood with compatible base and acoustical
underlayer.
3. Walls: Vinyl wall covering; specify paint in high hu-
midity climates.
4. Millwork / Moldings: Decorative millwork, base and
ceiling moldings scaled and proportioned to create an
elegant, residential image.
5. Ceiling: Provide detailed ceiling design and lighting at
guestroom entry. A smooth painted finish is preferred.
Lay-in or concealed grid acoustical ceilings are not
allowed.
D. FF&E Finish Materials: During installation of interior finishes,
provide and maintain proper building HVAC system
temperature and humidity levels.

E. Paint and Painting:

1. Paint Products: Provide Sherwin Williams or RCH ap-
proved equal.
2. Preparation: After millwork has been completed and
accepted, caulk, fill, sand, and completely prepare to
provide tight, smooth surfaces prior to painting. Avoid
visible cracks, joints, nail heads or holes.
3. Painted Surfaces: Walls, millwork and trim; provide
semi-gloss with 30% reflectability and ceilings with
flat finish.
4. Installation: Apply two coats minimum of solid color
oil based semi-gloss enamel or acrylic semi-gloss
enamel paint. Provide second color for moldings and
frames. In suites, provide three separate colors.
5. Antiquing: When antiquing finishes are required, pro-
vide three colors minimum. Include final glaze coat to
protect antiquing.
6. Stained Millwork: When required by Interior Design,
provide factory finished millwork. Include two coats
minimum of stain and seal with two coats of low luster
clear lacquer.
F. Carpeting:
1. Carpet Material and Fabrication:
a. Type: Tufted, cut, cut and loop or loop
b. Content: Tufted, 100% solution dyed virgin
nylon, or wool 80 / 20 Axminster
c. Finished Face Weight: 1079 g (38 oz.) minimum
d. Size: To be determined by width of each
guestroom.
e. Pile Height: 0.280 maximum
f. Stitch Rate: Tufted, 25 mm (9.5 stitches / inch),
10th gauge
g. Seams: Locate one seam maximum at headboard
side of guestroom. Provide hot melt tape, 6 inch
wide, if required.
h. Soil Treatment: Inherent; obtain RCH acceptance
for other treatment.
i. Selvage: Leave on carpet.
j. Surplus: 10% maximum allowable
k. Carpet Colors: As appropriate for the property
location and approved by RCH. Minimum of 3
colors.
l. Wear Warranty: 5 years minimum
m. Carpet Alternates: Requires RCH review and
acceptance.

2. Carpet Padding and Installation: RCH Standard is

Hartex, or RCH approved equal.
a. 40 oz. / sq. yd. minimum; 100% synthetic fiber
b. Install wall-to-wall, using appropriate power
stretching methods as outlined by CRI (Carpet
and Rug Institute) Guidelines and power stretch
per manufacturer instructions.
c. Provide tackless stripping; no exposed screws or
nails.
d. Provide wall-to wall padding at 1.9 m (6 ft.)
widths.
e. Loose lay padding up to carpet tack strips and
tape padding at seam edges.
f. Provide transition strips between carpet and solid
surface areas.
g. Bend nails sufficiently at tack strips abutting tran-
sition areas to another surface to ensure points of
nails cannot be felt through carpet.
h. Direct glue down installation is not permitted.
3. Area Rugs: Accepted weaving techniques include
Axminster, Wilton, hand-tufted, hand-knotted, and
hand woven that are intended for high traffic locations.
4. Construction: Area rugs can be loop or cut pile virgin
wool, 80/20 wool nylon, natural fibers (i.e. abaca), and
wool / silk (silk limited to 15% maximum of field, not
border or edge).
Example: Guestroom

5. Resorts: Solution dyed nylon and other synthetic fiber

area rugs are acceptable for resort locations, where
humidity is a factor and must meet the minimum stan-
dards for high traffic durability as identified for Levels
I - IV of Module <GR4>, FF&E, Carpeting.
6. Installation: Area rugs require a finished edge and are
installed with area rug padding material sized to fit the
entire rug to within 1” of the area rug dimensions
7. Avoid tassels or yarn borders.
G. Vinyl Wallcovering - Materials: See above room requirements
for application.
1. Do not use fabric and paper wall coverings.
2. Size: 137 cm (54 inch), 600 g (21 oz.) scrim backed in
the guestroom
Size: 68.5 cm (27 inch), 510 g (18 oz.) scrim backed in
water closet
3. Fire Rating. Class “A”, Type II
4. Pattern: Selected by Interior Designer and approved by
RCH.
5. Generally, small pattern with minimal to no emboss-
ing. Fabricate for butt joint or double cut installation.
6. Trim Borders: Provide highest quality.
7. Adhesive for Vinyl Wallcovering: Compatible with
substrate surface, mildew resistant, strippable adhesive
and recommended by the wallcovering manufacturer.
7A.11 Furniture and Fixtures for Guestrooms
A. General:
1. See Module <GR4> for additional Furniture, Fixtures and
Equipment (FF&E) requirements including submittals
and warranties.
2. Obtain Operating Supplies & Equipment (OS&E)
product requirements from RCH.
B. Equipment: See requirements in 7A.12 for guestrooms and
suites.
C. Casegoods (Furniture) and Fixtures: Provide new premium
quality casegoods, fixtures and furnishings.
1. Style: An approved style that complements the property
location.
2. Fabrication - General: Assemble in single and complete
units considering shipment to project site. Consideration
is given for size limitations of door openings and elevator
capacity.
a. Avoid fragile / delicate materials and finishes such
as high gloss lacquers and similar light and non-
durable products.

b. Design and fabricate for 7 to 10 years of service.

c. Carefully select furniture appropriate to scale and
configuration of rooms.
d. Provide, as applicable, knee clearance of 27 inches
at desks and tables for guests with disabilities.
3. Lumber: Kiln dried to average moisture content of
6 to 8%. Maintain specified moisture content during
manufacturing. Provide lumber acclimated to the
project’s regional requirements.
4. Solid Wood: Clear, straight (not short) grain, solid
hardwood free of defects that might impair serviceability,
aesthetics and finish.
When solids and veneers are used on the same piece of
furniture that will receive the same stain color, select
a solid and veneer species that are compatible when
stained.
5. Veneer Core Elements: Clear, straight grain, best species
grade recommended, free of defects that might impair
serviceability, aesthetics and / or finish.
6. Core: 45 lb. density, industrial grade fiberboard or
particleboard with balancing backer to face material.
7. Hardwood and Veneers: Premium, kiln dried, stock.
8. Edge and Trim: Where required for the design detail,
exposed hardwood solids, neatly mitered, sanded, and
splinter free; hardwood edge bumper; items with toe
kick rail flush to carpet; trim frames matching the wood
veneer. Hardwood edge, provide No. 1 common or better
grade.
Example: Guestroom

9. Drawers: Fabricate sides from 11 mm (7/16 inch) wood

with 3 - 5 mm (⅛ - 3/16 inch) wood veneer plywood bottom.
Sand wood for smooth and splinter free surfaces and seal
interior drawer boxes completely.
10. Provide drawer stop with load capacity of 75 lb. and silent
under mounted (not visible) drawer glide components of
contract quality (Blum, Hafele or equal).
11. Tops: Natural wood, smooth grain, premium quality or
stone tops (granite or marble) on nightstands, desks, etc. Use
tempered glass with polished beveled edges to protect wood
top night stands, dressers, consoles, tables and desks. Provide
glass free of decals, embossed labels or stamps. Protect stone
tops with anti-staining finish / sealer.
12. Protective Glides: ⅝ inch diameter nylon or plastic glides on
legs, self leveling where appropriate, and protective strip on
bottom edges to prevent moisture damage.
13. Fabrication: Mortise and tenon and / or double wood dowel
strengthened with screw cleats, and glued and screwed corner
blocks in both directions.
14. Glue: Best quality. All joints to be thoroughly glued.
15. Finishes: Factory applied; catalyzed, high quality top coat
for contract use.
16. Substitutions: Obtain RCH review and acceptance.
D. Hardware / Accessories for Casegoods: Manufacturer supplies
accessories and hardware for complete fabrication and
installation to include brackets, cleats, toggle bolts, glides and
fasteners for wall installation where required.
1. Quality: High quality, fine furniture hardware designed
for high volume hospitality use.
2. Drawer Guides: Undermount drawer and tray glides that
can carry a minimum of 34 kg. (75 lb.)
3. Locks: Generally not required. If applicable to casegood
requirements, provide locks with two keys.
E. Credenza / Dresser: Supports the television.
1. Secure television to the top of the credenza using specific
mounting plates or cable / cord designed to prevent tele-
vision removal. Design cable / cord management into the
casepiece and conceal from guest view.
2. Review all equipment and OS&E included in the guest-
rooms with RC Interior Design to determine the items
located in the credenza. Items may include DVD player,
gaming accessories, mini-bar, ice bucket & glassware, dry
snack drawer, coffee and tea service drawer, audio system
equipment and possible retail items. Provide sliding tray
drawers for beverage service items as required.

3. Guest drawers: Provide protective dust covers. Guest draw-

ers are not located below the beverage product tray.
4. Locate remote connectivity panel or accessible outlets
within the credenza or on an adjacent wall, convenient to
guest.
F. Mini-Bar Cabinet: This millwork or decorative FF&E piece is
ideally located in the foyer of a guestroom or living area of a
suite as space allows.
1. Review with RCH all equipment and OS&E required in
this casepiece for customization.
2. Provide the following attributes:
a. Mini-bar and snack drawer behind locked door(s)
b. Pull-out shelf for tea or coffee service
c. Shelf for tray, ice bucket, tongs, etc
d. Provide granite or glass work surface
e. Integral outlet for tea / coffee service appliances lo-
cated convenient to guest
f. Ventilation: Comply with mini-bar manufacturer’s
requirements.
G. Work Desk: Provide with the following functional attributes:
1. Size: Desk is a minimum of .76 x 1.2 m (32 x 50 inch) with
stretchers and pencil drawer that accommodates RC guest
directory and pencil tray.
2. Accessible Power and Data Panel: Provide integrated panel
to accommodate a minimum of 2 power outlets and data
port; mount at desk height for convenient guest use. See
Module <13A>. Conceal other utilitarian power outlets
from guest view. (2 phone lines, duplex for lamp)
3. Specify top with protective glass or stone.
4. Provide minimum knee clearance of 69 cm (27 inch) high.
H. Nightstands: Provide the following:
1. Size: King rooms a minimum of 60 cm (24 inch) wide;
Double room a minimum of 69 cm (27 inch) wide.
2. Provide a guestroom control panel above each nightstand
to control drapery, master lighting, reading light, night
light, do not disturb and make up room. The design and
location of this feature depends on the manufacturer of the
panel and is discreet, neat and easy to read and use.
3. Include an outlet for guest use in conjunction with the
control panel.
4. Specify beveled edge, tempered glass for wood and painted
top finishes.

I. Seating and Materials: Design to fit needs of guests and seating

use. Provide teflon glides.
1. Frames: Fabricate from solid hardwoods, kiln dried to a
moisture content of 7 to 9%.
a. Solid hardwoods: #1 common grade
b. Curved frames: Steam bent hardwood construction
(or plywood in non-exposed areas) in curved areas of
frame with kiln dried hardwood frame used in other
frame components.
c. Frame Warranty: Provide for commercial application.
d. Stretchers: Include, where necessary, to provide
support to legs such as dining and desk chairs.
e. Frame Species: For exposed wood frame, provide
maple or European beech.
f. Pressboard, fiberboard and flakeboard are not
acceptable.
2. Finish: Catalyzed lacquer or ultraviolet cured to match
approved finish samples. Test finishes and warrant for
commercial use.
3. Joints: Provide double doweled or mortise and tenon
construction with corner blocks secured with lag bolts at
primary joints. Use metal fasteners where appropriate to
ensure commercial frame strength.
4. Springs: Provide sinuous 8 gage wire springs in seats and
10 to 12 gage in seating backs. Attach springs with steel
clips.
a. Cover seat springs with steel wire flexolator or equal
product.
b. Provide sufficient quantity of springs to ensure even
weight distribution during use.
c. Provide seat decking (not self-deck). Cover back
springs with woven synthetic material and apply
foam on top.
d. Provide sufficient quality springs to retain 95% mem-
ory for five years.
5. Webbing: An acceptable seat suspension system for small
chairs such as dining or desk companion chair. Meet FNE
83-258-B and BIFMA.
6. Foam: Pass the requirements of California Bulletin 117.
a. For seat cushions, provide 1.8 minimum density, ILD
26-30.
b. On backs, provide minimum of 1.5 density, ILD 15.
c. Cover foam with 1 inch layer of Dacron batting.
d. Provide sufficient foam quality to retain 85% memory
for five years.
e. “Loaded” foam is prohibited.

7. Ergonomic Desk Chair: With or without arms; upholstered

leather; five prong base on casters or glides as appropriate,
with wood finish preferred. Include swivel tilt and
pneumatic lift mechanisms. Consult with RC for approved
styles.
8. Companion Desk Chair: Provide a standard desk chair
compatible with the ergonomic desk chair. Meet design
standard requirements for upholstered chair with sinuous
wire springs, foam, batting and upholstery fabric.
9. Convertible Sofa Bed: Provide a state of the art, com-
mercial grade convertible sofa mechanism that supports a
sofa bed innerspring mattress. Provide in living room of
Executive Suites
10. Throw Pillows and Cushions for Seating: Provide loose,
reversible and soft. Color coordinate zippers with back-
ground color of fabric. Avoid white zippers.
a. Seams: Provide double stitch seams of sufficient
depth and stitches within industry standards. Provide
stitching thread of sufficient quality for contract use.
Provide concealed zippers.
b. Fabrics: Designer ensures that proposed fabrics are
suitable for contract upholstery.
c. Throw pillow fill: Sufficient quantity of feather /
down combination to retain shape.
J. Softgoods - General:
1. Material Durability, Protection and Maintenance: Treat
finish materials to protect from water and soil, fire / smoke
and similar types of damage.
2. Protection Standards: Comply with governing fire code
and RCH requirements for material treatments.
K. Bedding:
1. General: Provide commercial construction specifications
and details to obtain RCH acceptance.
a. Comply with governing fire codes and RCH
requirements.
b. Mattress, mattress foundations (box spring) and bed
frame components are manufactured differently
from region to region. Provide materials to meet the
following:
2. Bedding and Frames: RCH uses the following bedset sizes:
a. 1800 x 2000 mm (72 x 80 inch) King
b. 1525 x 2000 mm (60 x 80 inch) Queen
3. Bed Frames: Consult RCH Interior Design manager.
a. Provide a standard metal bed frame with glides con-
cealed with a tailored fitted bed skirt(s). Provide a
frame that assembles without tools.

• Size: 44 x 35 x 1803 mm (1 ¾ x 1 ⅜ x 71 inch)

ribbed angle steel side rails
• Height: 184 mm (7 ¼ inch) from floor to horizon-
tal flange
• Support System: Six leg Queen and King with
double angle center support. Cannot come apart.
• Legs: Wedge-lock patented. Position to maximize
side rail strength.
• Glides: Exclusive steel glides
b. Bed Base: Custom base with wood or upholstered
finish, a plinth base with toe space or bed furniture
(sleigh bed).
4. Headboard Brackets: Wall mounted for both offset and
oversized styles. Brackets may be omitted on request.
a. End Caps: To protect bedding
b. Finish: Brown enamel
c. Warranty: Lifetime limited warranty
5. Mattress - Innerspring Unit: Provide the current RCH bed-
ding and verify with the project’s Interior Design manager.
6. Upholstery - Bedding:
a. Flammability: FF4-72, Consumer Product Safety
Commission flammability standard as amended.
b. Ticking Selection: 70% polyester / 30% cotton chintz,
cream color, standard cover material. Chemically
treat ticking to meet Federal Flammability Standard
16 CFR 1632. Comply with governing fire standards.
7. Foundation Unit: Provide the current RCH foundation
unit, compatible with the current RCH mattress. Current
bedding standards are available from the project’s Interior
Design manager.
a. Mattress Labels: Provide manufacturer’s product
label on both sides and include manufacturer’s legal
tag on foundation unit.
b. Warranty: Provide 10 year manufacturer’s warranty.
8. Bed Textile: Based on property market and overall room
design, a custom decorative element used on the bed is op-
tional. Meet the following criteria.
a. Provide double sided, reversible, edged with minimal
fill.
b. Fabricate with materials and construction methods to
withstand dry cleaning and hard usage.
c. Verify with the project’s Interior Design manager for
dimensions and intent.
9. Bed Textile Standards Certification: Submit written certi-
fication that fabrics comply with the following:

a. Abrasion Resistance: Wyzenbeek 20,000 double

rubs; Martindale 25,000 double rubs
b. Flammability: Cal 117
c. Colorfastness to Light: 40 hours, Class 4, ASTM
D3691, 1974 or 16E
d. Wet and Dry Crocking: 4.0 dry, 3.5 wet
e. Pil: ASTM D3511, Class 4.5
f. Seam Slippage: 35 lbs.
g. Soil Release: Appropriate soil release, not Scotchgard
h. Patterns: Match at seams.
i. Attic Stock Yardage: 3% per fabric
j. Backing Fabric: Decorative to compliment face
fabric
k. Thread: Appropriate for the fabric content, non-
shrinking, match overall background fabric color.
10. Tailored Bed Skirt: Fit over top of box spring with bottom 19
mm (¾ inch) above floor covering.
a. Allow 10 cm (4 inch) of decorative fabric on deck pe-
rimeter outlining the muslin.
b. Line bed skirt with poly / cotton and use blind stitched
hem. Tailor with inverted double corner pleats.
11. Box Spring Cover: Decorative cover that fits over top of the
box spring (foundation) and is required with a wood, metal or
upholstered bed furniture to conceal box springs (foundation)
ticking from guest view.
a. Allow 10 cm (4 inch) of decorative fabric on the deck
perimeter.
b. Provide removable, fitted cover for cleaning and
replacement.
12. Softgoods - General Requirements: Provide distinctive and
luxurious products (applies to all guestroom softgoods and
bedding fabrics).
a. Meet local fire code requirements and RCH standards
for material treatments.
b. Material Durability, Protection and Maintenance:
Treat finish materials to protect from water and soil
and flame spread.
L. Upholstery Fabrics:
1. General: Appropriate patterns with good pattern coverage
for heavy duty.
a. Provide in-line patterns and colors for quantities less
than 500 yards.
b. Plan and provide for sufficient attic stock for
Operation’s replacement of all products. See “Attic
Stock” below.
c. Avoid fragile weaves, solids and velvets.

2. Fabric Standards and Compliance Tests: Provide written certi-

fication that fabrics comply with the following standards.
Submit exceptions in writing to obtain RCH acceptance
prior to submission of final design boards.
a. Abrasion Resistance: Wyzenbeek 30,000 double
rubs; Martindale 40,000 double rubs
b. Flammability: Minimum Cal 117 Upholstered
Seating, or more stringent per governing authority.
Label products with required certification.
c. Colorfastness to Light: 40 hours typically; 60 hours
for extreme UV exposure
g. Tensile Strength: 50 lbs. warp and fill (no knits)
h. Latex or Acrylic Backing: For fabrics with an ex-
posed seat seam, including a welted seam, provide
backing to seat fabrics. Self-backed vinylized fabrics
do not require backing.
i. Soil Release: Treat fabrics with appropriate soil re-
lease, not Scotchgard. Fabrics with inherent soil resis-
tance (Crypton) do not require treatment.
j. Leathers: Required for desk chairs, luggage benches
and upholstered headboards.
M. Decorative Lamps and Lighting Fixtures: Provide UL listed
products in compliance with approved UL Standard and affix
UL label on fixtures. Coordinate Interior Design and electrical
<15C> with lighting illumination dimmable requirements:
1. Cord and Plug:
a. Provide clear, silver lined and of sufficient insulated
cord length with polarized cap for sufficient size and
capacity to carry the connected load.
b. Provide plugs to match receptacles and 3 way switch
or dimmable switch.
c. Unless otherwise specified, provide cord 2.5 m (8 ft.)
in length.
2. Shade: Eggshell / off-white, silk look polyester shirred or
pleated fabric to smallest dimension and stretched or stretch
panel shade. Paper and other organic material shades are
not acceptable. Size shade to avoid damage by lamp size
and heat.
3. Floor Lamps: Locate 3 way switch or dimmable switch at
socket. Provide stable weighted 4.5 kg (10 lb.) minimum
base. Cover weighted base with felt.
4. Lamp / Bulbs: See Module <15C>.

5. Sconces: 10 cm (4 inch) maximum projection, if mounted

within 203 cm (80 inch) from finished floor.
6. Harps: Harp finish to match fixture finish.
7. Fixture Finishes: In high humidity and ocean-side (salt
air) sites, provide custom color, powder coated socket on
exposed metal parts including harp. Protect brass and
nickel fixtures with a humidity resistant clear coat. Obtain
RCH acceptance.
N. Window Treatments: Window treatments must provide complete
black-out of light.
1. Window Treatment Components: Provide in compliance
with luxury design standards and appropriate for the de-
sign theme. A minimum of two components are required
to achieve blackout conditions and create a luxury look.
Components include blackout lined overdrapery, sheer
drapery, shutters, blinds, shades and screens.
2. Window Treatment Materials: Provide draperies (includ-
ing drapery fabrics, sheer and trim) that are vertically and
horizontally stable and complies with the following RCH
and ACT Standards.
a. Abrasion Resistance: Provide fabrics that meet
20,000 double rubs Wyzenbeek method or 25,000
double rubs Martindale method.
b. Flammability: NFPA 701-04 Small Scale & BFD1X-
1 Boston
c. Colorfastness to Light: 60 hours, Grade 4, ASTM
D3691, 1974 or 16E
g. Tensile Strength: 15 lbs. for less than 6 ounces / yard;
25 lbs for over 6 oz. / yd.
3. French-Pleated Drapery Fabrication: Fabricate draperies for
specified fabric widths and never less than one-half of
width for use in panels. Unless otherwise specified, pro-
vide drapery at 250% fullness.
a. Unless otherwise specified, provide lined drapery
with triple fold sewn French pleats / pinch pleats
evenly spaced with less than 100 mm (4 inch) pleat
spacing and tack at 65 mm (2 ½ inch) to 90 mm (3
½ inch) from the top. If necessary, provide a second
tacking at tops of pleats for appearance retention de-
pending on fabric.
b. Provide 100 mm (4 inch) headings for lined and un-
lined sheer drapery, single turned over buckram.

c. Sew drapery lining so only lining material is seen

from building exterior. Provide lined drapery with
100 mm (4 inch) double fold hem and blind stitch
uniformly and evenly with covered weights at each
vertical seam and side hem. Provide 38 mm (1 ½ inch)
side hems, double turned and blind stitched without
puckering.
d. Provide drapery weights of appropriate size and
weight to assure proper drapery hanging without sag-
ging or pulling.
e. Provide overdrapery length measured from floor to
ceiling, unless otherwise specified, with a maximum
of ¾ inch with minimum of ½ inch from carpet and
other finished floor surface, unless otherwise indi-
cated on design documents.
f. Match patterns at seams and align patterns across
windows, vertically and horizontally, in the same
room.
g. Fabricate draperies to contract quality and to with-
stand dry cleaning and hard usage.
h. When requested, submit fittings and supplies such
as buckram, weights, thread and samples to obtain
Owner’s approval prior to fabrication.
i. Install drapery to extend full length of tracks with
returns as required. Provide two way draw overlap
at least 75 mm (3 inch) at opening to create black out
condition.
j. Pre-pin and hang draperies evenly with Kirsch 1036
pin-on.
4. Sheer Fabrication: Fabricate sheers with specified fabric
widths and never less than one-half of width in panels.
Unless otherwise specified, provide drapery at 250%
fullness.
a. Provide continuous sheer panels fabricated from same
weaving or dye lots. Where widths are joined, remove
the selvage edge and use a French seam. Fabricate
sheers to hang straight and even, without pulling,
fabric puckering and loose threads. Present drapery
without panel defects and no visible horizontal seams.
b. Match patterns exactly at each vertical seam. Join
vertical seams by overlock stitch and free of pucker-
ing. Position vertical seam behind pleats from top to
bottom. Seams are serged.

c. Provide sheers with triple fold sewn French pleats /

pinch pleats, evenly spaced with less than 100 mm (4
inch) pleat spacing and tack at 65 mm (2 ½ inch) to
90 mm (3 ½ inch) from the top. If necessary, a second
tacking is required at tops of pleats for appearance
retention depending on fabric type.
d. Provide 100 mm (4 inch) headings for sheers, single
turn over buckram.
e. Provide sheers with 100 mm (4 inch) double fold hem,
blind stitch uniformly and evenly with chain weight
across entire bottom edge. Assemble side hems with
38 mm (1 ½ inch), double turned and blind-stitched
without puckering, sagging and pulling.
f. Provide sheer length measured from floor to ceiling,
unless otherwise specified with 1 inch maximum
and ¾ inch minimum from carpet and other finished
floor surface, unless otherwise indicated on design
documents.
g. Do not install sheers to hang below overdrapery.
h. Fabricate sheers of contract quality to withstand dry
cleaning and hard usage.
i. Pre-pin and hang sheers evenly with Kirsch 1036
pin-on.
5. Window Top Treatment Fabrication and Installation:
a. Contractor makes site measurements and take-offs to
verify required hardware showing finished size, and
type of draw and projection.
b. Contractor field verifies hardware mounting instruc-
tions and verifies adequate blocking of wall / ceiling
is available. Contractor notifies Owner’s Agent im-
mediately concerning deviations so that pertinent
changes are made.
c. Window top treatments are made with wood, metal
fabrics or other decorative materials. Place seams and
match pattern, grain and repeats as appropriate for
the design.
d. Match patterns at seams and across windows, verti-
cally and horizontally, in the same room.
e. Unless otherwise specified in project specific docu-
ments, window treatments are mounted into the top
treatment, from the ceiling or off the wall as required.
f. Provide cornice with sufficient depth to accommo-
date easy operation of drapery.
g. Upholstered top treatments require 13 mm (½ inch)
of five ounce flame retardant batting as a minimum.
h. Face fabric is on face, sides and bottom edge of cor-
nice. Lining shall not be visible from room.

i. Welting is ¼ inch, self welt, unless otherwise speci-

fied in project specific documents.
j. Properly anchor cornices to structure to effectively
support weight of installed cornice and drapery
components.
k. Unless specified otherwise in project specific docu-
ments, cornice lining is bleached white 50 / poly 50 /
cotton lining.
l. Provide ½ inch thick flame retardant particleboard
that is not warped. Plywood is not allowed. Provide
2.5 cm x 5 cm (1 x 2 inch) header board.
m. Install cornice with “L” brackets for attachment to
walls and ceilings.
6. Soft Valance:
a. Fabricate soft valances in compliance with project
specific documents.
b. Mount valances to ceiling at sufficient depth to ac-
commodate easy drapery operation. Conceal drapery
hardware fastened behind valance.
7. Drapery Hardware and Installation:
a. Contractor shall make site measurements and take-
offs and verify required hardware showing finished
size, type of draw and projection and that adequate
blocking is planned to support the drapery system as
a whole.
b. Custom traverse rods are ceiling mounted, unless
noted in drawings or if blocking is missing in ceiling,
using 1 ¼ inch raw fiber plugs, #6 or #8 and 1 ¼ inch,
#6 or #8 cadmium plated screws. Anchor points at
both ends of rods shall not exceed 16 inches. Center
mounts shall not exceed 32 inches.
c. Fabricate drapery to operate smoothly within track.
8. Electronic Window Treatment Systems:
a. Electrical: Line voltage components of the system are
either UL / CE listed or UL / CL recognized. Low
voltage components within the system are powered
by UL listed or UL recognized class 2 transformers
or power supplies and wired as NEC® Class 2 cir-
cuits or RC approved wireless technology.
b. Electronic components within the system shall meet
IEC801-2, tested to withstand a 15 kV electrostatic
discharge without damage or loss of memory.
• Include installation, programming and mainte-
nance instructions.
• Provide local override buttons that activate the
window treatments for wiring verification.

• Control shall be capable of simultaneously

controlling one or more treatments, up to the
maximum number of treatments in the system
without affecting the lights. Include full-open
and full-close positions.
• Furnish keypad engraving to RCDM prior to
fabrication. Size and style of engraving type is
determined by the Design Professional.
• Apply engraved artwork specified for controls,
such as borders and logos, in a method to resist
removal by scratching, cleaning, etc.
c. Configure keypad(s) functions through the light-
ing control system.
d. Keypad(s) require a backlighting option.
e. Remote controls are not acceptable.
9. Baton System: Architrac 94003, 94004, 94005, (alu-
minum) or 94008 steel (steel not allowed near and in
salt water or high humidity environments).
a. Multi-wheeled baton masters 94105, 94106, 94165
clear plastic baton holder
b. 94166 #8X.312 hex washer head, shoulder screw
c. Overlap stiffener with eyelet 94145
d. Ball bearing carriers 9670
e. End stops 6983
f. Baton, 48 inch long, white fiberglass
g. Baton 91234
h. One-way or center draw Master is used as divider
for purpose of hooking overdrapes and sheets
when both are hung on the same track.
i. Prior to installation, rod parts are sprayed with
silicone to prevent drying out of Lucite parts.
j. Provide draperies with 48 inch white or clear fi-
berglass baton, mounted on the back side of lead
carriers (mount baton at end of operable drape
section).
10. French-Pleated Blackout Drapery Liner:
a. Cut Length: Add 18 inches to the finished length.
b. French Seam: Put fabric panels face-to-face,
serge (overlock) one time down the length of the
drapery. Turn the seam to the textured window
side and stitch down seam again.
c. Side Hem: With (smooth) room side of blackout
facing up, sew a 1 ½ inch single side hem. Then
turn back to 1 ½ inches to textured window side
and sew again.

d. Bottom Hems and Corners: With (smooth) room

side of fabric turned up 8 inches from the bot-
tom, fold ½ inch to the inside. Stitch remaining 7
inches across the panels. Turn back the 4 inches
to the textured window side and sew across again
and finish the corners.
e. Blackout Liner Pleating: With (smooth) room side
of fabric, put on the table facing UP. Place buck-
ram 4 inches down from the top of the drapery
panel. Then fold fabric over the buckram twice
and stapled into place. Proceed with pleating the
blackout liner and completing the drapery. Hems
and side hems are completed before tabling with
the buckram.
11. Hanging of Finished Draperies:
a. Buckram heading is forward creased between
pleats before hanging.
b. Pin draperies and hang evenly with Kirsch 1036
pin-on.
c. Provide an angle bracket or other means of attach-
ment as required to anchor window treatment to
walls to achieve complete black out of the room.
12. Acceptable Window Treatment Styles:
a. Plantation shutters, ripplefold drapery, reverse-
pleat drapery, Mecho-shades and other shade
products (remote controlled preferred)
b. Provide specification for other unique types of
window treatments not defined in these design
standards.
O. Art, Artifacts, Planters and Decorative Accessories: Select with
consideration for the geographic location of the hotel.
1. Planters: Include recommendation for plant material to
coordinate with planter design. Actual plant materials
are selected, supplied and maintained by the property
floral designer.
2. Guestrooms: Provide a minimum of 4 art or decora-
tive items. A bed textile, decorative framed mirror and
a decorative pillow are each examples of a decorative
item.
3. Suites, Corridors and Public Spaces: Obtain RCH
acceptance.

7A.12 Guestroom / Suite Pantries

A. Program: Provide limited foodservice pantry in Presidential
Suites and other Suites / Guestrooms as required by the
project Facilities Program. Include catering equipment
storage space.
1. Size / Area: Varies by region; see Module <7A>.
2. Location: Adjacent to guestroom / suite corridor with
controlled door access from corridor using electronic
entry lock system.
B. Equipment: Provide the following:
1. Ice Machine: Low volume, under counter model, resi-
dential style
2. Refrigerator: Upright, residential style with freezer.
3. Sink: In counter top with single lever faucet set, built-
in spray wand and garbage disposal.
4. Microwave Oven: For light reheating
5. Dish Washer: Provide under counter, residential style
with low noise option is preferred.
6. Coffee Brewer: Residential style, 10 to 12 cup capacity
with cord and plug attached.
7. Toaster
8. Water Filter: If potable water <15B> supply has more
than 7 grains of hardness, consider installing cartridge
type water filter for icemaker and at kitchen sink.
C. Features: Provide the following:
1. Cabinets: Provide custom wood, high quality residen-
tial cabinetry. Provide wall cabinets as required to
complement storage requirements by Interior Design.
2. Counter Top: Granite work surface and back splash.
3. Bar Supply: Provide lockable, cabinet storage for back-
up liquor bottles and beer.
4. Storage: Provide for guest goods and service items,
dishes, paper goods, silverware, glassware, etc.
5. Hardware: Provide concealed hinges and decorative
pulls as selected by Interior Designer.
D. Lighting: Recessed lighting and undercabinet task lights.
E. Finishes: See Module <7A>.
1. Floor / Base: Stone or porcelain tile
2. Walls: Vinyl wall covering and stone or ceramic tile
trim
3. Counter Top: Stone
4. Ceiling: Smooth surface, painted

7A.13 Equipment for Guestrooms

A. General: See standard guestroom floor plans provided by
Ritz-Carlton for equipment and furniture layouts.
1. See Module <GR4> for additional Furniture, Fixtures
and Equipment (FF&E) requirements.
2. Obtain Operating Supplies & Equipment (OS&E)
product requirements from RCH.
B. Furniture (Casegoods) and Fixtures: See above requirements
for “Furniture and Fixtures for Guestrooms” in this
Module.
C. Telecommunications: <13B>
1. Guestroom Telephone: Provide 2, single line tele-
phones; one corded at bed; one cordless at the desk.
2. Suite Telephones: Provide a minimum of 2, two line
telephones; one corded at bed; one cordless at the desk.
Additional telephones are required at living areas.
3. Suite Pantry: Provide a corded wall phone.
4. Guest Bathroom: Premium suites and some markets
may require a corded wall telephone.
5. Cell Phone Access: Required
6. Wireless PI: Required. Consult the CTR for wired PI
criteria.
D. Television <13>: Install flat panel LCD or LED televisions
on wall or anchored to a credenza or other furniture item.
Consult with RCH to determine technology and mounting.
See “Guest Bathroom” in this Module for bathroom TV
requirements.
1. Screen Size: 42 inch diagonal minimum; color. Larger
screens (47 inch diagonal minimum) are required for
suites – consult with RCH. Provide 15 inch television
at bathrooms.
Large rooms may require larger TVs based on the room
scale and distance from TV to viewing position. Verify
size and manufacturer requirements for each property
including companion hardware and accessories (remote
speakers, connectivity panels, headsets).
2. Special Suites: Provide 50 inch diagonal screen
minimum.
3. DVD player: Required for suites.
4. Remote Control: Non-affixed remote control unit.
5. Quality: Commercial with radio, video and computer
network access.
6. Input Plug: Smart plug system for compatible movie
system.
7. Base: Locking, swivel base with concealed mounting
plate to anchor to casepiece.

8. Wall mounted installation is acceptable with concrete

block construction only. Include sound proofing and vi-
bration isolation provisions. Provide articulating arms
to angle television for viewing. Provide finished mount-
ing hardware or detail to conceal cables and cords.
9. Remote Connectivity Panel (optional): Provide connec-
tion to desk to permit integration with computer.
E. Audio: Manual alarm clock and iPod clock radio.
F. Safe - Guestroom: Drawer or door safe style capable of
securing a laptop computer; internal charging outlet not
required.
1. Confirm current RCH approved manufacturers and
initiative for optional safe locations.
2. Display: LED
3. Interior: Line with black / gray felt.
4. Mounting: Inside casepiece drawer or door; or on a
shelf, inside of closet and provide secure attachment to
wall structure.
G. Mini-Bar: Build mini-bar enclosed in millwork. Confirm
mini-bar requirements with RCH.
1. RCH to provide current specification.
2. Mini Bar: 40 liter capacity
3. Service Reporting: At a minimum, provide electronic
system to report at a central location if the unit has
been opened.
4. Location: Millwork or decorative cabinet adjacent to
wardrobe closets, but not in closet. Coordinate location
with RCH Interior Design manager.
5. Features: Include dry bar / snack drawer, coffee &
tea service pull out shelf and counter above. Provide
storage for RCH standard beverage service items
(OS&E) determined by RCH operations. Discreetly
located guest accessible outlet included for coffee and
tea preparation.
H. Bedside Control Panel: Typically, required to operate lights,
master lighting, reading light, night light, do not disturb,
TV, window treatment, make up room and in some
locations the room temperature controls for the following
situations:
1. In Asia
2. At Club Level rooms
3. At Suites
4. When required to equal the competitive market.
5. When required to obtain the “star” rating for which the
hotel is designed

I. Hair Dryer: Hand held, portable, model hair dryer (part of

guestroom OS&E package) at bathroom lavatory counter.
Provide without manufacturer’s name with the following
minimum characteristics:
1. Wire to meet site voltage requirements.
2. Medium size, portable or folding style (not wall
mounted).
3. Wattage: 1875 W; low fan noise
4. Color: Off-white, silver or black as appropriate to color
scheme.
J. Vanity Makeup Mirror: Lighted, UL listed, hard wired (not
portable), wall mounted, lighted, 3x magnification, 9 inch
round mirror and the following:
1. Location: In wall next to vanity (confirm mounting
height location with RCH).
2. Extension Feature: Provide wall extension fixture arm
to reach approximately 380 mm (15 inch) from wall
with full 180 degree mobility.
3. Light: Position light source in bottom portion of mir-
ror lens.
4. Finish: Chrome
5. Manufacturer: Verify current model options with RC
Interior Design manager.
K. Doorbell: Provide at suites and accessible guestrooms.
7A.14 Attic Stock for Guestrooms and Suites
A. General: See Module <GR4> and contact RCH Interior
Design manager for Attic Stock requirements.
7A.15 System Features
A. HVAC: <15A> Provide HVAC system capable of providing
guest selectable heating or cooling.
Make-up Air: Direct ducted conditioned air to each
guestroom.
B. Lighting: <15C> Illuminate using a combination of four
to five lighting sources of 2200 lumens each (floor lamp,
guest desk, nightstand, credenza and wall) in addition to
the entry welcome light. Contact RC for current foot candle
requirements and revisions to the lighting standards.

Lamp Standards Table

Space Fixture Footcandles
Bathroom Vanity 40
Toilet Room 30
Bath Tub / Shower 15
Guestrooms
Bedroom Desk 35
Bedroom Lounge Chair 25
Bed Pillow 20
C. Fire Protection Devices: <14> Coordinate and accommodate

the location of fire sprinklers, smoke detectors, alarms,
grilles, devices and controls into the interior design.
D. MEP Coordination: <15>
1. Coordinate and accommodate mechanical supply and
return air grilles, mechanical, HVAC and electrical
devices and controls into the interior design and finish.
2. Position electrical receptacles in compliance with
government regulations. Unless noted otherwise or re-
quired by regulations, locate centerline of receptacles
at 46 cm (18 inch) above floor.
3. Avoid back-to-back outlets between guestrooms to
maintain acoustic rating. See “Acoustic Control” above
in this Module.
4. Coordinate electrical outlets, light locations, switches
and furniture / casegood locations to minimize ex-
posed cords.
5. Locate off / on wall switches with cord plug, if remote
wall switching is provided to wall receptacle for light-
ing decorative lamp fixtures.
E. Coordination: Coordinate with requirements of other
Modules including:
GR General Requirements
13C Audio / Visual
15 Mechanical - Plumbing - Electrical
16 Loss Prevention

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
7B
Guestroom Corridors / Support
7B - Guestroom Corridors / Support THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
7B.1 Program 1
7B.2 Guestroom Corridor 2
7B.3 Guest Elevator Foyers 3
7B.4 Ice Service 4
7B.5 Butler’s Pantry 5
7B.6 Housekeeping / Linen Management 5
7B.7 Service Elevator Foyers 8
7B.8 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) 8
7B.9 Electric Distribution 8
7B.10 Exit Stairs 9
7B.11 FF&E - General 10
7B.12 Attic Stock for Guestroom Corridors 10
7B.13 System Features - Corridors 11

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Corridors | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Guestroom Corridors / Support - 7B
Guestroom Corridors / Support

7B.1 Program
A. Relationships: The Guestroom Corridor and Support areas
serve three primary functions.
1. Guest Circulation: The corridor provides a transition be-
tween the hotel public areas and the guest’s room.
2. Service Circulation: The corridor enables hotel employ-
ees to access guest areas to provide services.
3. Emergency Egress: The corridor provides emergency
exiting from the guestroom areas to the exterior.
Guestroom Wing Relationship Diagram
Passenger Elevators <12>
Lobby 3.5 m Wide
Service Elevators <12>
Linen Storage Section 7B.3 & 7B.6
Guestrooms Guestrooms
Corridor 1.52 m Wide
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Corridors 1

B. Spaces: Accommodate the following functional spaces:

1. Guestroom Corridors
2. Guest Elevator Foyers
3. Service Elevator Foyers
4. Ice Service
5. Butler's Pantry
6. Housekeeping / Linen (Toilet Rooms / Storage)
7. Exit Stairs
7B.2 Guestroom Corridor

A. Program: Vary corridor widths and orientations to establish Guestroom Entry Diagram
a residential character and to “de-institutionalize” the guest
experience.
1. Introduce, if possible, natural light and exterior views
into Guest Corridors and Guest Elevator Foyers.
2. Create comfortable and inviting space rather than a zone Guestroom
that must be crossed.
3. Privacy: Segregate guestroom corridors from other hotel
functions.
4. Level changes are not permitted.
B. Size / Area: 1.6 m (5 ft.) minimum corridor width; 1.8 m (6
ft.) preferred.
1. Corridor Exit Dead-end <14>: Maximum 15 m (50 ft.) n n o
distance.
2. Ceiling Height: 2.6 m (8'-6") minimum. Portion may be
lower to provide visual variation and utility space.
C. Door Drops: At Guestroom Entry, form a wall alcove, 0.30
m (1 ft.) deep at each side of Corridor.
D. House Telephones: Single phone at elevator vestibule table;
locate additional house phones at logical nodes where guest
corridors are excessively long or convoluted. <13B>
E. Finishes: Provide luxury residential appearance.
1. Floors: Carpet 80 / 20 Axminster <GR>; produce carpet
on an electronic Jacquard Machine and include unique n Entry Door Drop 2.15 m wide
door drops and designs composed of out-fill and feature o 1.6 m wide Corridor
field design. Minimum 8 colors.
2. Base: Wood (painted or stained).
3. Walls: Vinyl wallcovering accented by architectural
detailing including architectural details and ceiling
moldings.
2 Corridors | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

4. Corner Protection: At outside corners, provide detail

integrated with millwork. Design millwork corner from
built-up elements to permit easy replacement of simple,
corner millwork element, when damaged. This detail is
required throughout guestroom corridors, specifically at
guestroom entry alcoves / door drops. Rubber and PVC
corner guards are not acceptable.
5. Utility devices are not visually apparent to the guest in
the corridor. Carefully locate and detail access panels,
grilles and diffusers and similar devices to conceal or
disguise them in the wall and ceiling details.
6. Doors / Frames: Painted or stained to coordinate with
adjacent moldings.
7. Wainscot: Architectural wall chair rail integrated with
millwork details; painted or stained wood paneling or
upholstered wall panels.
8. Ceilings: Smooth painted substrate; no ceiling tiles.
Provide coffered ceiling or stepped millwork trim at cor-
ridor and at corridor alcove at guest entry door area.
F. Lighting: See Module <15C>.
Lamp Standards Table
Space Fixture Lamp Lumens
Wall Sconce 25W Decorative Halogen 280
Corridors
Ceiling Mount 25W Decorative Halogen 280
Table Lamp 60W A-Line Halogen 900
Lobby / Entry Recessed 50W PAR30 Halogen 580
Cove Lighting LED --
7B.3 Guest Elevator Foyers

A. Size / Area: Minimum width of 3.4 m (11 ft.).
B. Interior Design Features:
1. Furniture: Accommodate and include areas for furnish-
ings such as credenza, framed mirror, decorative items
and guest seating. Decorative items include framed mir-
rors or artwork; artifacts.
2. Telephones: Include house telephone. <13B>
3. Lighting: Decorative ceiling fixtures combined with up-
scale decorative and recessed lights.
C. Finishes:
1. Floors: Carpet <GR> at typical guestroom levels. Provide
stone / wood floors and base with area rugs at Club eleva-
tor lobbies. Coordinate final finish direction with RCH
Interior Design.

2. Walls: Wood paneling or wood trim with upholstered

wall panels. Extend millwork details from corridors.
Integrate into the design corner guards and bases same as
in guest corridor.
3. Ceilings: Smooth painted substrate; no ceiling tiles.
Provide coffered ceiling or stepped millwork design with
feature lighting.
7B.4 Ice Service

A. Program: Provide guests with accessible and convenient,
potable, small cubed ice by one of the following methods
dependent on property location.
1. Ice Dispenser: At a minimum, provide ice dispenser (not
bin type) on every third floor.
2. U.S. / Canada: Provide one guest self-serve ice dispens-
ing (not bin type) unit per 36 guestrooms on each guest-
room floor adjacent to corridor.
3. Room Service: Ice to guest on request; delivered from
Butler’s Pantry.
B. Size / Area: 2 m2 (20 sq. ft.) for ice machine / dispenser when
required as noted above.
C. Alcove Enclosure: Sensitively plan and provide an enclosed
alcove to minimize exposure (noise and views) from guest
corridors and include a 0.9 m (36 inch) minimum, wide
glazed entry door to ice dispenser alcove. Typically located
in a vestibule between the Guest Corridor and the service
area.
D. Utilities: Provide water cooled unit.
1. Electric outlet
2. Floor drain
E. Vending: Not provided or required.
F. Finishes: <GR>
1. Floors: Hard surface, easy to clean material such as stone
tiles (0.6 wet / dry slip resistance). Coordinate stone with
stone flooring implemented at Club Level elevator land-
ings or with other stone found in hotel public area.
2. Base: Marble or painted wood matching adjacent finishes.
3. Walls: Vinyl wallcovering
4. Ceilings: Same as Corridor

7B.5 Butler’s Pantry

A. Program: Provide as required by the Facilities Program.
Typically required in the Middle East and Asia. May be
co-located with housekeeping / linen.
B. Size / Area: 6 m2 (64 sq. ft.); minimum of one pantry at
each guest level served.
C. Features: Where pantry is required, provide with the
following features:
1. Work counter, chair and electronic butler pager
2. Sink, refrigerator, cabinets, shelving
3. Telephone: See Module <13B>.
4. Locate dispensing ice machine at pantry in lieu of provid-
ing in service alcove.
D. Finishes: <GR>
1. Floors: Hard surface, easy to clean material such as
composition ceramic or stone tiles (0.6 wet / dry slip
resistance).
2. Base: Ceramic tile or painted wood
3. Walls: Vinyl wallcovering
4. Ceilings: Same as Corridor
7B.6 Housekeeping / Linen Management

A. Program: There are two options for managing linen storage
and guestroom housekeeping. Verify the choice of linen
management with RCH.
Centralized: The preferred method centralizes guestroom
housekeeping service in one central housekeeping area com-
bined with the service elevator.
Housekeeping staff service rooms from housekeeping
carts used to transport linens, cleaning supplies, and used
laundry.
Decentralized: This method is only used in special cases (typ-
ically floors with very few guestrooms) when approved by
RCH. The alternate method locates linen storage in casework
cabinets located at intervals along the guestroom corridors in
recessed alcoves or located in nodes while maintaining the
minimum corridor width of 1.5 m (5 ft.).
1. Housekeeping staff service rooms utilizing hand carried
baskets for cleaning supplies and relying on the corridor
cabinets for clean linens and towels.
2. A central housekeeping room is required for miscella-
neous storage and floor sink.
3. Corridor casework cabinet is integrated with the corridor
design and includes shelves and locked doors.

Service Area Foyer Diagram

3.35 m ± 3.05 m ± 0.61 m ±
(11’±) (10’±) (2’±)
s m Service Elevator <12>

n Sink / Glass washer / Electrical Panels / Phone
m u
o Smoke Exhaust Louver
p Linen Chute
m q q Linen Carts
r Ice Machine
n
s Housekeeping Cart(s) / Amenities Storage
t p
o t Mech. & Elec. Shaft / Area
r u Storage (Honor Bar, Cribs, Boxes)

v w
v IDF Closet <13>
w Service Vestibule
Guest Corridor
B. Housekeeping Area: At each guestroom level, accommodate

the following features:
1. Location: Integrate with the Service Elevator vestibule.
A vestibule from the Guest Corridor provides a buffer to
minimize noise and sight to BOH. Do not swing door into
the Guest Corridor.
2. Floor Sink: 0.76 m x 0.76 m (30 inch x 30 inch) <15B>;
back and side-splash protected with ceramic wall tile.
3. Glass Washing: Provide one commercial quality ma-
chine at each level. See Module <10>. Include dish table
dump sink and shelving.
4. Linen / Terry Management: Clean linen and terry is pro-
vided to each floor in carts. Provide cart staging area to
accommodate one cart for 13 guestrooms. Cart Size: 150
(l) x 72 (w) cm (60 x 28 inch). If a linen chute is not pro-
vided, provide staging area for soiled linen carts.
5. Robes: Provide area to stage a “Z-Bar” for clean robe
distribution.
6. Cart Storage: Provide storage for one housekeeper cart
for every 15 guestrooms (2 minimum). One cart measures
76 x 125 cm (30 x 49 inch).

7. Housekeeping Storage: Provide closet and shelving to ac-

commodate storage of housekeeping items such as cribs,
amenities and spare guestroom equipment. Categories of
storage items may be alternated on floors and integrated
with Honor Bar storage.
8. Honor Bar: Verify if Honor Bar carts are required to be
stored at each floor.
9. Phone: Provide one house phone.
C. Linen Chute: Provide chute with separate enclosed vestibule
space.
1. Vestibule Size: 1.2 x 1.2 m (4 x 4 ft.) accessible through
fire rated door from Housekeeping or large enough to
permit the cart in the room to empty; one space per floor.
2. Chute: 0.76 m (30 inch) diameter; metal with smooth in-
terior to avoid damage to linens; comply with fire protec-
tion and life safety standards. <14>
D. Toilet Rooms: Provide unisex, ADA accessible toilet rooms
with lavatory for housekeeping personnel.
1. Locate at every fourth floor beginning at the second floor
and arranged accessible from one floor below and one
floor above.
2. On floors without toilet rooms, design spaces for house-
keeping storage.
E. Finishes: Refer to <GR>.
1. Floors: Hard surface, easy to clean material such as vinyl
tile or ceramic tile (0.6 wet / dry slip resistance).
2. Base: Ceramic tile base
F. Walls: Paint; ceramic tile at wet areas
G. Ceilings: Paint exposed structure, but if visible from guest
corridor, provide smooth painted gypsum board or smooth
finish on concrete substrate.

7B.7 Service Elevator Foyers

A. Program: Screen and “sensitively” armor service elevator
foyers and service doors.
1. Do not permit service elevators to open directly into
guest corridor.
2. Provide service foyer size similar to guest elevator foyer
and combine with housekeeping and linen management
services.
B. Finishes:
1. Floor: Vinyl composition tile; extend corridor flooring
and base into these areas if visible from Guest Corridor.
2. Base: If walls are concrete or concrete block, paint to
intersection of floor line.
3. Walls: Paint: Architecturally finished where visible from
guest corridor.
4. Doors and Frames: Stainless steel elevator doors and
frames.
5. Ceilings: Paint exposed structure however, if visible
from guest corridor, provide smooth painted gypsum
board or smooth finish on concrete substrate.
7B.8 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

A. General:
1. IDF Closets house the wiring and electronic equipment
used to connect guestrooms to the RCH communications
network. See Module <13A>.
2. Closets are designed for the intra-building distribution of
centrally managed telephone, data communications and
video services and are not used to support other building
utilities.
3. Ideally, locate IDF Closets with direct access from ser-
vice areas to avoid conflicts with guests.
7B.9 Electric Distribution

A. Program:
1. Provide centrally located area or closet for distribution of
electric power and equipment. See Module <15C>.
2. To avoid interference with electronic equipment, do not
co-locate with the IDF room.
3. Ideally, locate with direct access from service areas to
avoid conflicts with guests.

7B.10 Exit Stairs

A. Program: Minimum of 2 remote stairs serving guestroom
floors above and below grade.
B. Security Control: In multi-use facilities, in order to maintain
operational and security control, hotel exit stairs are not
shared or connected to office, retail, residential, or other
non-hotel uses.
C. Size / Area: Comply with RCH fire and safety standards
<14> for size, location and stair pressurization (if required).
D. Signage and Graphics:<GR2>
1. Floor numbering and emergency information at each
landing.
2. Comply with governing code and bilingual designations.
E. Features:
1. Fire Protection / Life Safety: See Module <14>.
2. Mechanical: Provide heating and ventilation only.
Provide stair pressurization when required by Module
<14>, <15A>.
F. Finishes: Guestroom corridor finishes do not typically
extend into exit stairs unless normally visible to guests in
the Guest Corridor. Provide improved finishes, appropriate
to the use, when stairs provide guest access to the exterior
or other guest services.
1. Floor: Concrete, sealed or painted landings and treads;
extend corridor flooring and base into these areas if vis-
ible from Guest Corridor.
2. Base: Resilient base. If walls are concrete or masonry,
paint to intersection of floor line.
3. Walls: Paint; architecturally finish where visible from
guest corridor.
4. Other Surfaces: Paint stair handrails, stringers, fire hose
cabinets and similar exposed surfaces.

7B.11 FF&E - General

A. Program: Applicable to Guestroom Corridors, Alcoves and
Guest Elevator Foyers.
1. Color Palette: Fully coordinated with guestrooms and
related areas.
2. Provide decorative layered window treatments (valance
with decorative side panels and sheers), with sheer drap-
ery at corridor and elevator foyer windows as coordinated
with RCH ID.
3. At enlarged corridor nodes and elevator foyer, use accent
furnishings, artifacts, framed artwork, mirrors, and pot-
ted landscape material.
4. Guest elevator lobbies require a console for house phone,
accent chairs, mirror and decorative lighting including
ceiling fixture, sconces or lamps.
B. Carpeting: Provide the following carpet, padding and
installation method for Public Areas and Suites. <GR>
1. Carpet: 80/20 Axminster; produce carpet on an elec-
tronic Jacquard Machine. Include unique door drop de-
signs composed of out-fill and feature field design. Avoid
extremely long continuous carpet runners that appear
“under designed.” Install to create an area rug effect at
Guest Corridors and Elevator Foyers. Minimum 8 colors.
2. Avoid extremely long continuous runners that appear
“institutional”.
3. Padding: As required for Public Areas. See Module
<GR4>.
7B.12 Attic Stock for Guestroom Corridors

A. General: Coordinate property storage requirements to store
attic stock in good condition (also, see Modules <7A> &
<GR>).
1. Light Fixtures: 2% of total quantity ordered; minimum
of 2 of each type.
2. Wall Vinyl: 5%
3. Carpet: 5%
4. Artwork: Minimum of 1 of each piece if repeated floor
to floor.
5. Light Bulbs: 5% of each type
6. Consoles: 1 of each type if repeated floor to floor
7. Fabrics (window textiles, trims and upholstery): If re-
peated floor to floor, 5%

7B.13 System Features - Corridors

A. Signage and Graphics: <GR2>
1. Graphics: Coordinate with surrounding materials and
minimize wherever possible to maintain residential atmo-
sphere. No acrylic. Use natural materials appropriate for
the project (i.e. wood, metal, stone, glass).
2. Typical Locations: Guestroom numbers (see Module
<7A>, directional signs, emergency evacuations, ice ma-
chine area, and exit signs.
3. Do not mount guestroom graphics on doors. Install on
wall at latch side of door, 1.5 m (5 ft.) above finish floor.
4. Exit Signs: Green color lighted, if approved by govern-
ment regulations.
B. Fire Protection & Life Safety: <14>
1. Include fire sprinklers, standpipes, smoke detectors,
alarms, annunciators and other Life Safety devices.
Exercise care and coordination in selection and place-
ment of devices.
2. Locate required fire extinguishers, hose cabinets, stand-
pipes and accessories at stair and service elevator vesti-
bules if permitted by code.
3. Fire Sprinkler Heads:
a. Corridor: Wall or ceiling mount. Symmetrically
locate with millwork.
b. Elevator Foyers: Semi-recessed (but not concealed).
C. Mechanical: <15A>
1. HVAC: Include heating, ventilation, cooling and smoke
control (if required).
2. HVAC Devices: Exercise care and coordinate design,
placement and selection of wall and ceiling grilles and
diffusers to conceal or integrate them into the interior
design.
D. Power Outlets: Provide Housekeeping convenience outlets
at 15 m (50 ft.) on center for corridors and one convenience
outlet at each elevator foyer. <15C>
E. Lighting: <15C>
1. Vary general corridor lighting levels and sources.
2. Coordinate combinations of coffer and ceiling mounted
fixtures, decorative wall sconces, artifact lighting and
lamps.
3. Include decorative sconces and decorative ceiling fixtures
in glass or crystal in guest elevator foyers and corridors.

4. Highlight and standardize light levels and methods at

typical guestroom entry alcoves; provide special or fea-
ture lighting at Suite alcove entries.
5. Corridor lighting fixtures located below 203 cm (80 inch)
may not protrude more than 10 cm (4 inch) into the cor-
ridor’s path of travel.
F. Coordination: Coordinate with requirements of other
Modules including:
12 Elevators & Escalators
13C Audio / Visual
16 Loss Prevention

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
7C
Club Lounge
7C - Club Lounge THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
7C.1 Program 1
7C.2 Entrance / Foyer 3
7C.3 Reception Area 3
7C.4 Support Work Area 4
7C.5 Guest Lounge 4
7C.6 Service Pantry 7
7C.7 Toilet Room 8
7C.8 Children’s Area 8
7C.9 Library (option) 8
7C.10 Meeting Room (region option) 8
7C.11 Club Board Room (region option) 9
7C.12 Interior Design - Finishes 9
7C.13 System Features 10

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Club Lounge | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Club Lounge - 7C
Club Lounge
7C.1 Program
Example: Club Lounge A. General: Provide a residential style Club Lounge (Guest
Floor Lounge) with a relaxing environment and a
high quality, buffet food and beverage service. The
Club Lounge offers guests the following amenities
and services:
1. Relaxation – a place for guests to relax, away from
their guestroom and public circulation.
2. Business – a place to conduct informal business ac-
tivities without compromising guestroom privacy.
3. Concierge – access to personalized services.
4. Food & Beverage – convenient access to a variety of
food and beverage buffet offerings throughout the day.
5. Privacy - a place to meet, away from the hotel Lobby.
6. Socializing – the opportunity to meet other guests in
an exclusive environment.
B. Space Planning: Locate the Club Lounge in a centralized
location with easy access for Club guests, a premier view
and convenient access to service circulation.
In order of priority, position the Club Lounge based on the
following:
1. Elevator: Adjacent to and with direct visibility and ac-
cess from the Guest Elevator vestibule. Avoid long cor-
ridor circulation to the Club Lounge to avoid guest con-
fusion and to minimize Club guest circulation past Club
guestrooms.
2. View: Secondary view or architectural and spatial op-
portunity. Premier views are provided for guestrooms.
3. Level: Locate at the highest hotel level without compro-
mising the location or importance of special suites.
4. Service Elevator: Ideally, locate the Club Lounge pantry
adjacent to or near the Service Elevator to minimize ser-
vice circulation in the guest corridor.
5. Multi Level: For multiple Club guestroom floors, locate
the Club Lounge on the first (lower) or middle level of
guestrooms. If feasible, provide an architectural, lock-
able, interconnecting stair.
6. Ritz-Carlton Suite: Do not locate The Ritz-Carlton Suite
on the same level as the Club guestrooms to avoid privacy
conflicts.
7. Balcony or Terrace: The opportunity to offer additional
seating at exterior balconies or terraces is beneficial based
on the climate and location.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Club Lounge 1
8. Building Architecture: Locate where premier exterior

or facade position is critical for the development of an
architectural image and building massing.
C. Size / Area: Meet the following Club Lounge area minimums
and as dictated by the project Facilities Program:
1. Club Lounge guestrooms typically comprise 15% of hotel
guestrooms. (Club guestrooms per hotel varies from 35 to
50 depending on hotel size and location.)
2. Club Lounge Area: Plan for 3.7 m² (40 sq. ft.) per seat for
the primary areas (reception, pantry, toilet, seating) using
the following seating criteria. Optional areas require ad-
ditional area.
3. Seating Criteria: Provide a minimum of one seat for each
Club Lounge guestroom.
a. Resorts: Typically require a higher seat count of 1.5
seats per Club guestroom.
b. Urban Hotels: Typically require 1.25 seats per Club
guestroom.
D. Spaces: Accommodate the following functional spaces:
1. Entrance / Foyer
2. Reception Area
3. Support Work Area
4. Main Guest Lounge
5. Main Buffet and Dining Area
6. Service Pantry
7. Toilet Room
8. Guest Computer Station Area
9. Meeting / Quiet Area
10. Meeting Room (region option)
11. Club Board Room (region option)
Example: Club Lounge
2 Club Lounge | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
7C.2 Entrance / Foyer

A. Program: Readily identify the Club Lounge entrance from
the principal point of guest arrival, such as the Guest
Elevator vestibule.
B. Entry Doors: Provide decorative wood and glass panel doors
at entrance to Club Lounge to secure area when not in use.
Decorative glass doors may be provided based on market
conditions.
• Provide swing doors with hold open devices when Club
Lounge is occupied. Verify fire separation requirements.
C. Guest Access: Provide controlled access to floor to limit
unauthorized use of Club Lounge services. Provide inside
elevator cab, at entry door and at interconnecting stairs
(when provided) using electronic lock compatible with
guestroom lock system.
D. Pantry Signal: Provide a discreet, electronic signal device at
the Entry to signal a Club Attendant in the Pantry when a
guest enters the Club Lounge.
7C.3 Reception Area

A. Program: Provide a defined reception space to accommodate
arriving guests.
B. Reception Desk: Position to passively supervise guest
arrivals and maximize supervision of principal service
areas of the Lounge.
1. Within the Reception Area, include a minimum of 1 agent
station (2 at larger Club Lounges).
2. Lock Encoder: Provide electronic lock encoder to permit
guest check-in.
3. Locate within the principal lounge and its after-hours se-
curity closure.
4. Does not need to be directly positioned at or within
foyer, but locate to supervise patron arrivals and lounge
activities.
5. Low height desk; design to accommodate seated agent
and multiple front seating for guests.
6. Provide duress alarm at desk. <16>
C. Reception Equipment: Provide in reception desk or in an
adjacent credenza.
1. Equipment: Provide computer equipment to view guest
registrations and facilitate check-outs. Integrate computer
equipment with desk to minimize view of keyboard,
printer and related equipment.
2. Cashiering and currency exchanges are not accommo-

dated at this desk, and guests are directed to Front or
Concierge Desk in hotel Lobby.
3. Desk agents provide guest services, essentially duplicat-
ing those of main reception, concierge desks, and busi-
ness center. <13A> <13B>
4. Telephone: Cordless phone at desk.
5. After Hours Security: Verify that equipment and sup-
plies can be secured when Club Lounge is closed.
D. Features: A premier view, architectural feature or fireplace,
as appropriate for the locale, is placed in a focal position to
the arriving guest.
7C.4 Support Work Area

A. Program: Include support work area to facilitate business
center type clerical requests.
B. Location: Immediately common to Reception Desk; spaces
contiguous with F & B service pantry to lounge.
C. Equipment: Include support work area to facilitate business
center type clerical requests; with the following equipment:
1. Commercial desktop photocopier; binding equipment.
2. Fax machine. <13B>
3. Computer (PC) and laser printer. <13A>
4. Desk and chair.
5. Cabinets and counter to manage concierge materials.
6. File cabinet.
7C.5 Guest Lounge

A. Program: Plan the Lounge area to accommodate a variety
of guest relaxing, dining and socializing activities.
Design the Lounge to convey an image of a residential living
and dining room, and not a restaurant.
B. Seating Areas: Organize seating in zones to accommodate
the different activities of Club guests. Generally, provide
seating for the following 3 core guest activities.
1. Relaxation Area - 25%: General relaxation and quiet
socializing.
2. Dining & Buffet Area – 65%: Complimentary food and
beverage service.
3. Socializing Area – 10%: Impromptu small meeting / dis-
cussions; light business activities; quiet table game / card
playing.
C. Relaxation Area: Position seating groups close to point of

main arrival and / or to provide a buffer at the main dining
area and business conversation area.
1. Seating: Casual sofas and chairs.
Example: Guest Lounge 2. End and Coffee Tables: Continental table height.
3. Library Wall Display: For general reading and refer-
ence materials, international and local periodicals and
newspapers.
D. Dining & Buffet Area: This area typically supports two
primary activities, complimentary buffet and general
socializing.
1. Dining Area: Capitalize on best view and / or best archi-
tectural space.
2. Buffet: Main feature and focal point for complimentary
buffet and self-service beverage bar. Provide up to 5 food
stations.
3. Customize a series of millwork stations and FF&E pieces
for buffet display in each hotel to accommodate food and
beverage service.
4. Seating: Provide seating with tables suitable for working,
eating and relaxing. Principal seating to facilitate groups
of 2 to 4.
5. Dining seating proportions:
a. Table Seating: 80%
b. Lounge type seating: 20%
E. Buffet: Customize for each installation to include:
1. Permanent main segments with built-in features with
auxiliary credenza and display tables utilized to comple-
ment and support the function.
2. Accommodate periods of full and light service. As an
example, during off-peak periods, beverage service may
be provided and unused portions of buffet must be ap-
propriately decorated.
3. If provided, architecturally trim or conceal food service
equipment.
4. Cabinets: Provide lockable undercounter cabinets for se-
curing liquor and lounge amenities.
5. Hot Buffet: Millwork casepiece includes induction heat-
ing units. Provide doors, shelves and drawers below for
storage. All hardware is heavy duty and suitable for com-
mercial use.
6. Cooking Station: Millwork casepiece either included in
the hot buffet station or independent of it allowing the
chef to stand behind the counter and face the guests while
preparing specialty dishes. Provide plate and condiment
storage on working side of casepiece.
7. Cold Station: Provide a separate millwork or FF&E piece

with tiered display for cold salads.
8. Beverage Station: Incorporated into the bar area or into a
separate FF&E or millwork piece to provide for this func-
tion. Provide space for coffee, teas, soft drinks, wines and
spirits, glassware and garnishes.
9. Dessert Station: Provide a separate millwork or FF&E
piece with tiered display.
10. Lighting: Provide ambient and accent lighting above buf-
fet areas to highlight buffet presentations.
11. Power: Provide electric outlets for small appliances at
buffet stations integrated with millwork.
F. Socializing Area:
1. Program: Accommodate impromptu small meeting / dis-
cussions; light business activities; quiet table game / card
playing.
2. Seating: Sofa, lounge and side chairs, coffee and side
tables and card tables.
3. Bar: Provide highboy, alcove or full-service front and
back bar (double door refrigerator incorporated into
front bar detail) depending on property requirements and
restrictions. Provide space for coffee, teas, soft drinks,
wines and spirits, glassware, ice and garnishes. Alcohol
is attractively displayed in a lockable area.
Example: Club Lounge Reading Room
G. Features:
1. Background Music: <13C> Provide speakers and local
radio / CD system with controls at reception desk.
2. Televisions: <13C> At a minimum, provide TV cable
outlet only to accommodate a portable TV when desired.
TV may be designed into millwork or casework at larger
Lounges.
Example: Club Lounge - Plan 3. Computers: <13B> Provide Property Internet (PI) wire-
less access. Power outlets provided at guest computer
work desk and next to all seating in the lounge for remote
lap top computer usage.
4. Telephones: <13B> Provided at elevator lobby and avail-
able at Reception Desk and cell phone coverage.
H. Balconies and Terraces: If feasible, include exterior balconies
and dining terraces tangent and / or contiguous to dining
areas.
1. Design furniture layouts to permit attendant service cir-
culation to and from balconies and terraces.
2. Accommodate overflow seating and possibly smoking
patrons.
3. See <7A> for balcony design details.
7C.6 Service Pantry

A. Program: Provide for food service; storage; light food prep;
cleaning and trash holding; related equipment.
B. Location:
1. Situated behind or tangent to buffet.
2. Adjacent to Receptionist Area.
3. Directly accessible from service circulation corridor or
Service Elevator vestibule. Service pantry must be acces-
sible to Service Elevator and Lounge.
C. Features:
1. Entrance to Buffet Area: Automatic door opener.
2. Telephone: Provide one cordless set.
3. Floor drains
D. Pantry Equipment / Features: See Module <10> for criteria.
Typical equipment includes the following:
1. Commercial reach-in refrigeration and freezer storage.
2. Ice production and storage.
3. Commercial hot beverage brewing equipment.
4. Dishwashing equipment and sinks.
5. Light duty re-heating equipment.
6. Storage area for parking of roll-away carts.
7. Wet and dry trash holding.
8. Pass through undercounter refrigerated cabinet between
Pantry and Buffet to permit servicing of buffet.
9. Cupboards, shelves and silverware drawers for storage

and OS&E and condiments.
10. All pantries designed and coordinated by a kitchen
consultant.
7C.7 Toilet Room

A. Program: Provide a “powder room” for use by Club Lounge
guests.
B. Size: Accommodate guests with disabilities.
C. Features: Toilet, sink, framed mirror, sconces, decorative
ceiling fixture, console with lamp and accessories similar
to a high-end residential powder room.
7C.8 Children’s Area

A. Program: In order to accommodate small children, provide
an alcove or remote area as part of the lounge area for a
“flex” area with a small assortment of games and toys.
Include a television and furniture to shelving unit to
conceal toys, books and games. If possible, provide doors
to separate from the larger lounge area. As a flexible
area, this should be designed for adults first with optional
amenities for children.
7C.9 Library (option)

A. Program: In conjunction with Socializing Area, and
possibly separated by it, include a semi-isolated “quiet”
seating area or room that could facilitate an impromptu
meeting or table game.
B. Features: Include small conference / game table to seat 4 to
6 with adjoining lounge seating group.
7C.10 Meeting Room (region option)

A. Program:
1. Provide as required by the Facilities Program.
2. Accommodate light food and beverage service from Club
Lounge pantry.
B. Location:
1. Tangent to Club Lounge and service pantry.
2. Include foyer with vestibule area; accessible to guest
toilets.
C. Seating: 8 to 10 guests at conference table; facilitate
complete meeting requirements.
D. Interior Decor and Fittings: Featuring high quality with
“state-of-the-art” meeting accessories.
7C.11 Club Board Room (region option)

A. Program: Recommended in Middle East and Asia.
Otherwise, provide if dictated by the Facilities Program.
B. Location:
1. Tangent to Club Lounge and close to receptionist and
service pantry.
2. Accessible from Guest Corridor through dedicated foyer.
3. Include foyer with vestibule area, coat / storage closet,
private telephone booth, and guest toilets.
C. Service: Light food and beverage from Club Lounge service
pantry.
D. Seating: Minimum 10 guests; Facilitate complete executive
meeting requirements.
E. Features:
1. Interior Decor and Fittings: Highest quality with "state-
of-the-art" meeting accessories.
2. Secondary Entrance: Directly from Club Lounge.
7C.12 Interior Design - Finishes

A. Character of Space: Warm and residential; coordinate with
Club Elevator Lobby, connected Club Corridor, and design
theme of public spaces.
B. Floors: <GR>
1. Stone or Wood: Required at entry and food service line
at buffet areas as a minimum requirement. Stone floor
and base at entry foyer with area carpet / rugs.
2. Area Rugs / Carpet: Dining and seating areas; best qual-
ity hand tufted loop or cut pile / semi-worsted wool or
80/20 Axminster carpet with good pattern / color cover-
age, minimum 8 colors.
3. Ceramic Tile: Provide in closed Pantry and Storage areas.
C. Walls: <GR>
1. Decorative millwork; stone; stained wood panels; applied
wood moldings
2. Fabric wall covering
3. Wall sconces and lighting fixtures
D. Ceilings: Multi-level painted gypsum board; accent
millwork and molding.
1. HVAC Grilles: Conceal in layout of ceiling features; not
randomly placed.
2. Light Fixtures: Cove lighting; down lights; ceiling
mounted decorative fixtures of glass or crystal.
3. Gypsum Board: Painted. Limit to closed areas such as
Pantry and Storage.
E. Furnishings: Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment:

1. Windows: Combination of drapery panels or valences
in combination with sheers, wood blinds, fabric shades
or shutters with corresponding tie backs or decorative
hardware depending on the design appropriateness of the
project.
2. Lounge Chairs: Light weight, wood frame; fully padded
seat and back; leather or equivalent covering.
3. Sofa; Loveseat; Chair: Fully upholstered with durable,
bright, cheerful, contrasting color, and pattern fabric.
4. Small Tables: Complement deuce seating; 70 cm (27
inch) high
5. Dining Chairs: Scale / size to fit under table. Padded
leather seat
6. Dining Table: Complement 4 dining chairs
7. Landscaping: Live plants in pots
8. Decorative Lighting: Include lamps, sconces, picture
lights and decorative ceiling fixtures.
9. Floor Covering: Carpet and area rugs to complement ad-
jacent corridor areas.
10. Casepieces: Credenza, consoles feature tables
11. Mirrors, Art and Accessories
F. Furnishing Layout: Flexible; easily moved furniture to
accommodate guests.
1. Tables: Arrange with seating for food and drink.
2. Deuces: 50% to 60%
3. Dining Set-up with Dining Table: 20% to 25%
4. Sofa, Loveseat and Lounge Seating: 20% to 25%
7C.13 System Features

A. Coordination: Coordinate with requirements of other
Modules including:
13C Audio / Visual
16 Loss Prevention
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
8
Administration & Employee
Facilities
8A:: Administration Facilities
8B:: Employee Facilities
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
8A
Administration Facilities
8A - Administration Facilities THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
8A.1 Overview 1
8A.2 Front Offices / Support Areas 4
8A.3 “Call Center” 8
8A.4 Executive Offices 10
8A.5 Sales & Catering 11
8A.6 Accounting 12

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Admin. | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Administration Facilities - 8A
Administration Facilities
8A.1 Overview
A. Administrative Areas: The criteria and “example” plan included in
this Module models a generic administrative area.
1. Staff: Staffing levels and responsibilities vary based on
MI Project Contact property type, size, and location and the specific staff
Marriott International - “MI” - is the assignments and organization for a proposed office.
corporate entity that manages this Administrative programs are verified by MI.
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. 2. Accessibility: Administrative spaces are also accessed
Contact the MI Design Manager for the
project specific manager referenced by the public and are required to be accessible to guests,
by the term “MI” throughout this clients and service providers with disabilities.
Module. B. Space Planning: Provide the following or as required by the
projects Facilities Program:
1. Location: Adjacent to the front desk. Locating the
Administrative Area (Front Office, “Call Center,”
Executive Offices and Accounting) in one office suite
is administratively desirable but contiguous space may
not be achievable.
2. Size / Area (Overall): See the project Facilities Program
for the Administrative Areas, including Guest Services
“Call Center.” Typical administrative suite, including
Call Center, requires approximately 435 m² (4,685 sq. ft.)
total gross area (includes 20% for circulation and build-
out). For larger properties, additional space is required.
Verify program requirements with MI.
a. The Interior Designer and Architect prepare and co-
ordinate office and administrative layouts. Interior
Designer prepares initial space planning for offices
and furniture plans.
b. MI determines office requirements for Front and
Back of House spaces after the schematic design
and project staffing guide has been prepared.
C. Separate Spaces: Space priorities at public areas may require
divided administrative spaces. When administrative spaces
must be separate, comply with the following guidelines:
1. Front Office: The location of front office functions
adjacent to the front desk is essential and the highest
priority. Provide separate access from public circulation
space to avoid circulation through the front desk area.
2. “Call Center”: Locate near Front Office to beneficially
share information and resources.
3. Sales, Catering & Events: If separate, these offices
are usually positioned near the Ballroom / Meeting
Area, the focus of sales, catering and events activities.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Admin. 1

For larger properties (more than 300 guestrooms),

additional space is required.
4. Accounting: Accounting offices generally have the fewest
functional relationships and adapt best to remote locations.
5. Separate Levels: Include dedicated communicating
stairs when programmed administrative spaces are on
separate levels.
6. Business Center: Locating the Business Center space
adjacent to Function and Meeting spaces <6> with internal
access to administrative spaces of Sales and Catering
provides an opportunity to beneficially share staff, services,
and meeting space, especially if 24 hour Business Center
service is anticipated.
7. Convention Office: Add convention services office for
projects with more than 1300 m² (14,000 sq. ft.) net of
meeting area.
D. Steps, Stairs, Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> -
Loss Prevention.
E. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR> and <16>
F. Natural Light / Views:
1. Verify code requirements for daylight / natural light in
offices.
2. Exterior Views: Whenever possible, provide exterior
views for the well being of Employees.
G. Acoustics: Office partitions, minimum STC 48.
H. Office Doors: Provide 0.9 x 2 m (3'-0" x 6'-8") minimum;
provide in sidelite frames with 30 cm (12 inch) wide glass
lite. <GR>
1. Finishes: Use durable finishes to enhance a stable work
environment.
2. Lighting Requirements: See Module <15C>.
I. Enclosure / Security Walls: Enclose Cashier’s Area, Counting,
Safe Deposit Boxes and Guest Safe Deposit. Provide
concrete or clay masonry walls extending to underside of
building structure above (or provide security expanded
metal lath ceiling and wall construction of equal protection).
J. Access Control: At employee entry to administrative area,
provide electronic operated lock access. <16>
K. Toilet Rooms: Provide toilet facilities at personnel office and
at other remote locations when travel to central employee
toilets is excessive.
1. Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories: See Module
<15B> for BOH plumbing fixtures.
2 Admin. | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

2. Toilet Room Accessories: See Module <GR> for BOH

toilet / bath accessories.
L. Circulation: Add 20% to net administrative area totals to
allow for corridors and internal circulation space.
M. Finishes: <GR> Use durable finishes to enhance a stable
work environment.
N. Lighting Levels: See <15C> for minimum requirements.
O. Administrative Spaces: Area shown for spaces is minimum
net. Provide required space for circulation and partition /
walls. Accommodate the following:
Net Area:
Program Areas
m2 sq. ft.
Front Offices / Support 86.9 936
“Call Center” 46.5 500
Executive Offices 85.4 919
Sales & Catering Offices 96.8 1043
Accounting 44.0 474
Totals 359.6 3872

8A.2 Front Offices / Support Areas

A. Program: Include the following offices and spaces to support
front office functions:
Spaces Size
Private Open
(see example) m 2
sq. ft.
Front Desk - Pods A See Module <2> -- --
Front Desk Work Area B 16.4 176 X
Copy / fax C 7.8 84 X
PMS Equipment D 11.1 120 X
Front Office Manager E 8.4 90 X
Reservations (3) F 16.7 180 X
Reservations Manager F1 6.7 72 X
Counting Room G 4.2 45 X
Cashier H 6.7 72 X
Deposit Boxes J 3.3 36 X
Guest Deposit K 3.3 36 X
Storage L 2.3 25 X
Totals 86.9 936
B. Front Desk - Pods (A): See requirements in Module <2>.
C. Front Desk Working Area (B): Include a staff work space to
support front desk activities; provide work counter, wall
shelving, below counter file cabinets, and horizontal file
space; not visible from front desk.
D. Copy - Fax (C): Provide space for medium size copy machine
and facsimile (fax) equipment accessible to Front Desk,
adjoining Working Area and Executive Offices receptionist.
E. Main Computer (PMS) Equipment: Enclosed room with
dedicated air conditioning system. See Module <13A> and
the CTR for details.
F. Front Office Manager (E): Position office in close proximity to
Front Desk. Usually, the front office manager works at the
front desk and requires a private office.
G. Reservations (F): The facility for reservations is typically
located in a separate Reservations Center that serves
several properties by region or country. Room reservations
are typically not conducted at the property. At international
locations, verify criteria with MI Operations.
1. Space Planning: The “example” plan and following
description is based on locating the Reservation
personnel separate from the “Call Center” Department.
2. Reservation Operators prefer a quiet environment and
deal solely with guest reservations.

Figure 1 - Administrative Spaces - Example Plan
Front Office Areas

A Front Desk - Pods
B Front Desk - Work Area
C Copy - Fax
D MEP
E Front Office Manager
F Reservations
F1 Reservations Manager
G Counting Room
H Cashier
J Safe Deposit Boxes
K Guest Safe Deposit Viewing Room
L Storage
Executive / Catering Offices

M Reception Area
M1 Conference / Meeting Room
N Galley - Coffee / Tea
O Storage - General
P Coat Closet
Q General Manager
R Director of Operations
S Food & Beverage Director
T Director of Marketing
U Director of Sales
V Event Manager
W Manager of Sales / Events
X Director of Event Management
Y Administration Support
Accounting
Z Accounting Work Stations
AA Controller
A1 Assistant Controller
BB File / Archive Storage
“Call Center”
CC Agent
DD Runner
EE Supervisor
FF Storage
GG Manager
HH Commons

3. MI verifies plan configuration based on the operational plan

for the project.
4. Work Space: Design a continuous counter top space for work
surfaces (custom millwork or system furniture); minimum
60 cm (2 ft.) in depth; divide work spaces with acoustic
partitions.
5. Separate enclosed work area with door to access administrative
area. Provide file cabinets and overhead shelves.
6. A minimum of two or three PMS <13A> PC stations for
Reservation Operators with ergonomic chairs.
7. Telephone: ACD digital with display. <13B>
8. Reservations Manager (F1): Adjacent to Reservations
Operator space. Provide 2-way window in half height glazed
door to monitor work activity.
H. Counting Room (G): Receipts and cash for property services are
brought to the Counting Room. Provide employee route to this
area through Back of House and avoid routes through Public
Areas.
1. Location: At entry to accounting offices, adjacent to the General
Cashiers. Entry is through door with half-glazed safety glass
view panel; with card reader with audit trail.
2. Deposit Safe: Provide between Counting Room and Cashier’s
Office with through-wall employee rotary deposit connected
to a 2 compartment, Class “C” construction rated safe
accessible to cashier.
3. Counting Area: Include small counter top space at
approximately 90 to 180 cm (3 to 6 ft.) long x 56 to 61 cm
(22 to 24 inch) deep to perform counting before depositing
food and beverage receipts and money into deposit safe
drop. Resort and large properties may require a wider station
counter and more cash boxes.
4. Cash Banks: Locate cash safety deposit boxes below counting
countertop; MI to verify quantity. Safe Deposit Box: Model SS-2,
24 box unit by Corporate Security Products 301-251-0960. May
require multiple units.
5. Video Surveillance System (V.S.S.) Cameras: Space is
monitored by fixed camera with view of counting counter,
safe and cashier’s room through half-height glazed door. <16>
I. Cashier (H): Provide deposit safe accessible from cashier’s side
adjacent to Counting Room.
1. House Safe: UL Class “B”, 2 hour rated. Locate separate
large floor safe in corner of cashier’s room.
2. Entry Door: Design with teller type window and small
cash / envelope pass-thru below safety glass view window in
door. Provide asylum type lock (keyed both sides; not master
keyed).

3. Access Control Devices: Provide duress alarm, motion

detector. <16>
J. Safe Deposit Boxes (J): Accessible to Front Desk <2>
employees to issue or receive deposit boxes from the
adjoining Guest Safe Deposit Room at guest / staff pass
thru.
1. Safe Deposit Box Type: Model SS-2 & SS-5 (Corporate
Security Products 301-251-0960). Recess in wall
construction.
Fur Vault: 2. Deposit Box Quantity: Provide one 17 box unit for
Provide secure closet to every increment of 200 guestrooms. Based on the Loss
store guest furs on hangers Prevention Review, locations may require a higher
in protective covers. quantity. Additional boxes are required for employee
Counting Room adjacent to Cashier’s Office.
3. Door: Include 12.7 x 50.8 cm (5 x 20 inch) safety glazed
sidelite view panel in entry door. Entry by electronic
lock with audit trail.
4. Loss Prevention: Camera to view safe deposit boxes
and counter in guest area. <16>
K. Guest Safe Deposit Viewing Room (K): Locate room adjacent to
front desk and visible to guest from Reception area.
1. Door: Accessible to guest when employee depresses
electric door lock button at front desk. Guest may exit
without waiting for electric door lock to be activated.
2. Pass-thru Window: Include safety glazed pass-thru
window to Safe Deposit Boxes for transfer of safe
deposit box to guest. Position window to permit guest to
continually view safe deposit box from stored position
to pass thru window.
3. Counter: Provide counter with chair for guest use.
L. ATM: When an automated teller machine (ATM) is required,
consider locating in an enlarged Safe Deposit Box Room with
guest controls located in Safe Deposit Box Viewing Room.
M. Storage (L): Include space for employee coats and storage,
first aid items and fire extinguisher.
N. Finishes: Generally,
See <GR5>. provide the following:

8A.3 “Call Center”

A. Program: (CC to HH) The Call Center is the hub of
communications providing a single contact for guest
services and PBX (telephone) operations.
B. Area / Spaces: 46 m² (500 sq. ft.) total typical; consult MI to
define the following quantity of program position, See also
Module <13>:
Spaces Size
Private Open
(see example) m2 sq. ft.
Agents (2) CC 13.0 140 X
Runner DD 6.5 70 X
Supervisor EE 6.5 70 X
Storage FF 9.3 100 X
Manager GG 7.0 75 X
Commons/Circulation HH 4.2 45 X
Totals 46.5 500
C. Location:
1. Front Desk: Adjacent to the Front Desk support area.
2. It’s a critical area for guest contact and permits
opportunities to share staff, information and resources
such as fax, copiers and office equipment.
3. Elevator: Provide convenient back-of-house access to
service elevator to reduce “runner” travel and increase
guest service response times.
D. Equipment & Systems: Connect systems and equipment to
emergency back-up power and lighting <15C> and UPS
system. Provide the following:
1. Fire Panel: Fire annunciator panel with acoustical
alarm notice. <14>
2. Clocks: Wall clock or series of time zone clocks.
3. White Board: 1.2 to 2 m² (12 to 20 sq. ft.) wall mounted,
marker board to post daily status of property and guest
events.
4. V.S.S. Monitor: with keyboard controller at stations
(may be shared). <16>
5. Chair, ergonomic
6. File cabinets, undercounter
7. Intercom (if used): Base station at each station (may be
shared). <16>
8. Overhead, enclosed shelves
9. PBX telephone console <13B>
10. Pager base station (may be shared) <16>
11. PMS / PC Computer (monitor, processor, keyboard)
<13A> <13B>

12. Micros
13. Radio Base Station <16>
14. Alarm System: Alpha numeric keypad (may be shared)
<16>
15. Task lighting
16. Work desk
17. Refrigerator: small unit to keep mini bar items cold
18. Storage Cabinets / Shelves: with lockable doors
19. Clipboard Rack: for 7 daily status clipboards
20. Counter: for fax and printer with paper and supply
storage below
21. Copier: Small capacity (desktop) or access to copier
22. Fax Machines: 2 minimum
23. Printer: Color laser
24. Status Board: mount on wall
E. Finishes: Generally, provide the following:
1. Floors: Carpet (vinyl composition flooring in commons
and closed storage space).
2. Base: Resilient base.
3. Walls: Vinyl wallcovering.
4. Ceiling: Accessible acoustical tile.
F. Mechanical / Electrical: Provide the “Call Center” with heat
and cooling for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week from a
dedicated heating and cooling system supported by the
emergency back-up electrical systems <15C>.

8A.4 Executive Offices

A. Program: Provide offices for the General Manager /
Director of Operations, other executive office positions,
and space for Administrative Assistants as required by the
1. Plan Executive Offices accessible to the public. Also,
these offices may be at a remote location rather than
near Front Desk.
2. Provide communicating stairs where Executive and
General Offices occur at levels away from other
administrative spaces or the Front Desk.
Size:
Executive Offices / Support Spaces Private Open
m 2 sq. ft.
Reception Area M 23.8 256 X
Conference / Meeting M1 16.4 176 X
Galley – Coffee / Tea (2) N 1.9 20 X
Storage - File O 3.3 36 X
Coat Closet P 1.1 12 X
General Manager Q 16.7 180 X
Director of Operations R 13.3 143
Administrative Support (2) Y 8.9 96 X
Totals 85.4 919
B. Waiting / Reception Area (M):

1. Provide reception desk / chair and guest waiting space
for guests visiting executive staff.
2. Include coat closets and a coffee alcove adjacent to
Reception Area for visitors and staff.
C. Access Control: Provide duress alarms at GM desk, GM’s
administrative assistant and at Executive Office reception
desk. At staff entry to administrative area, provide
electronic operated lock access. <16>
D. Conference / Meeting (M1): Provide access to meeting facilities
within the Administrative Area (preferred), in conjunction
with an adjacent Business Center <6>, or in association
with Function Areas.
Generally,
E. Finishes: See <GR5>. provide the following materials:

8A.5 Sales & Catering

A. Program: Provide offices for Catering and Conference
Services, Sales, Marketing, Public Relations, assistant
managers and workstations for administrative assistance
and support staff.
1. General Offices are secondary to Executive Offices.
2. Provide Reception, Waiting area and other administra-
tive support spaces.
3. Design offices accessible to the public and particularly
for marketing.
B. Planning Criteria - General:
1. Position Sales, Catering and Event management offices
near Reception Area to facilitate easy access from
public areas.
2. Layout offices along perimeter of space with
administrative / accounting support areas placed in
“open” office spaces.
3. Locate storage space adjacent to Sales, Catering and
Reception Area.
Size:
Sales & Catering / Support Spaces Private Open
m2 sq. ft.
Food & Beverage Director S 13.3 143
Director of Marketing T 14.5 156 X
Director of Sales U 14.5 156 X
Event Manager V 11.1 120 X
Manager of Sales / Events W 11.1 120 X
Director of Event Management X 14.5 156 X
Administrative Support (4) Y 17.8 192 X
Totals 96.8 1043

8A.6 Accounting
A. Program: Offices and spaces for accounting may be in a
separate area from other administrative offices dependent
on allowable space.
Spaces Size
Private Open
(see example) m2 sq. ft.
Controller AA 11.1 120 X
Asst. Controller A1 8.4 90 X
Archives Storage - Files BB 11.1 120 X
Accounts Receivable (2) Z 8.9 96 X
Accounts Payable (1) Z 4.5 48 X
Totals 44.0 474
1. Avoid cabling distances greater than 91 m (300 ft.); see
Module <13A> for computer systems.
2. Provide high level of acoustic control for work areas.
3. Position away from significant employee and visitor
traffic areas.
4. Typically, the primary access for accounting employees
is through the Back of House.
5. Accounting offices can be in a separate area from
Executive and General Offices, dependent on allowable
space and distance to main computer room.
B. Area / Spaces: Refer to the project Facilities Program.
C. File Area: Design for 12 legal, lateral active file cabinets;
minimum of 4 drawer height. Typically, circulation areas
accommodate cabinets.
D. Archives Storage Area: Design to accommodate 175 inactive
files that can be boxed and stacked seven boxes high.
Typically, 12 m² (120 sq. ft.) is required.
See <GR5>. provide the following:
E. Finishes: Generally,


including:
• 2 Public Space
• 6 Function Spaces
• 13A Technology Infrastructure
• 15 Mechanical, Plumbing & Electrical

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
8B
Employee Facilities
8B - Employee Facilities THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
8B.1 Overview 1
8B.2 Employee Entrance 2
8B.3 Human Resource (HR) Offices 4
8B.4 Training Room - Multi-Media 6
8B.5 Nurse / First Aid Station 7
8B.6 Locker / Change Area, Shower & Toilet Rooms 8
8B.7 Employee Cafeteria <10> 11
8B.8 Service Corridors 12
8B.9 Employee Area Service Corridors 13
8B.10 Systems Coordination 13

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Employees | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Employee Facilities - 8B
Employee Facilities
8B.1 Overview
A. Program: Design spaces for Employee use to promote
excellent employee relations and guest services.
1. Incorporate management, administrative, training and
MI Project Contact other ancillary spaces required for the staff.
Marriott International - “MI” - is the 2. Comply with regional customs, labor laws, social factors
corporate entity that manages this and religious customs that may impact employee facilities.
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands.
Contact the MI Design Manager for the B. Steps, Stairs, Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> - Loss
project specific manager referenced Prevention.
by the term “MI” throughout this C. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR3> and <16>
Module.
D. Spaces: As required by the project Facilities Program,
accommodate the following employee spaces:
• Employee Entrance
• Human Resource (HR) Offices
• Training Room - multi-media
• Nurse / First Aid Station (regional)
• Locker, Change Rooms and Shower & Toilet Areas
• Employee Cafeteria
• Service Corridors
• Employee Area Service Corridors
• Payroll Office (regional)
• Religious Facilities (regional)
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Employees 1

8B.2 Employee Entrance

A. Program: Provide point of control to verify entry and welcome
employees. Circulation is monitored by Security.
1. Location: Close to Security Dispatcher Office <16>
that provides controlled access to Service Areas.
• Where possible design separate building entrance for
employees and applicants.
• Avoid integrating with loading dock and requiring
employees to cross the loading dock.
2. Signage: Define with direction signage to HR offices
from visitor or applicant and employee parking / bike
rack to building exterior entrance. <GR2>
B. Space Planning: Provide the following:
1. Entrance: Arrange so that employees do not cross or
otherwise interfere with the receiving and loading
activities.
• Immediately adjacent to and in visual contact with
the Security Dispatcher Desk.
• If possible, visually separate Employee entrance from
receiving and loading area to provide employees
with a positive welcome and applicants with better
first impression.
2. Exterior Area: If applicable, provide the following:
a. Dependent on climate and region requirements,
provide a weather protected space for smokers at
a minimum of 7.6 m (25 ft.) from any entrance to
keep smoke from entering property facility. Provide
trash and ash receptacles, tables and benches.
b. Consider bike storage and ski racks for employees
dependent on project location and Facilities
Program.
3. Time Clock Station: Locate in Service Corridor alcove
near the Employee Entrance (additional locations may
be requested by MI.
2 Employees | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Figure 1 - Employee Facilities - Example Plan
Ramp width min 4’-6”
Receiving Area H.R.

<8>
Security Security Office Employee

Director <16> Application
<16> Time
Card Nurse
<8>
Tr
Dir.
Drinking Fountain
Training
Vending <8>
Secure Storage
External
Terrace
Women’s Lockers Cafeteria
<8> <8>
Baffle
Entry
Showers Food Service Wash

Line Line
Showers
Baffle
Entry
Uniform Issue
<11>
Men’s Lockers
<8> Laundry
<11>
10 ft. Service Corridors

min. <8>

8B.3 Human Resource (HR) Offices

A. Program: Provide HR offices for employee services,
employment testing, interviews, employee relations, related
management offices and administrative support spaces.
Provisions may include a Payroll Office when required by
governing regulations. Verify with MI.
1. Location: Near Employee Entrance on accessible route
and within visual control of Security Dispatcher.
2. Employee Access: Direct from Service Corridor
3. Size / Area: Provide the following spaces:
Spaces Size:
Private Open
(see example plan) m2 sq. ft.
Reception C 8.0 86 X
Secretary/ Receptionist D 8.0 86 X
Admin. Assistant (Payroll) E 8.0 86 X
Interview Room F 6.0 65 X
Testing G 7.0 75 X
HR Director’s Office H 12.5 135 X
Storage Space J 9.0 97 X
Total 58.5 630
C. Space Planning:
1. Reception: Include a reception desk or counter with
area for supporting clerical facilities and space to
welcome employees and applicants, and process
applications. Arrange office furnishings and computer
workstation / desk chair area so that HR managers face
and greet applicants on arrival.
2. Testing: Locate 3 semiprivate work stations near
reception space for applicants’ use in completing
applications and computer testing.
3. Storage Space: Accommodate personnel records,
benefit materials and related files and securable storage.
4. HR Forms Access: For after hours (when HR office
is closed), provide a recessed forms holder with 15 to
20 slots for 8½ x 11 inch size documents, near office
entrance, facing corridor.
• Mount the form holder, flush to wall and design not
to interfere with moving carts in corridor.
• Ensure design does not violate fire wall rating, if any.
5. Offices: Provide private spaces with minimum of 48
STC acoustical rating at Director’s Office, Interview
rooms and other spaces for confidential meetings. Extend
walls to underside of structure above and seal joints.
6. Administrative Assistant / Receptionist: Secretary:
Part of Reception Area to support Director and Admin.

Assistant; include facilities for copy machine, fax and

clerical equipment. <13A>
D. Applicant Waiting Area: In a vestibule off corridor, provide
minimum of one writing surface space to process employee
applications.
1. Consider a separate room with TV / monitor to present
corporate videos / presentations such as company
philosophy, grooming standard, etc.
2. Include additional seating and table with chairs to complete
employment applications.
E. Features:
1. Entrance Door: Provide interior door to HR suite with
fire rated view window, sized and configured to comply
with rating requirement.
2. View: Provide fixed glass windows to view corridor
and administrative assistance area.
3. Bulletin / Notice Boards: Provide sufficient space in
area for employee viewing bulletins as required by
governing authority.
F. Equipment: Provide the following office and administration
equipment:
1. Telephones <13B>
2. Copier with sorting features
3. Fax machine
4. Other clerical equipment accepted by MI
G. Finishes for HR Offices: See <GR5>.
1. Floor: Nylon tufted cut pile carpet
2. Base: Resilient base
H. Paymaster Office: Verify with RCH Operations how payroll
will be managed and the methods of pay distribution (cash,
check, direct deposit, bankcard). Methods of payment may
effect the location and room size for the paymaster.
1. Adjacency: Corridor
2. Location: Near Service Corridor of Accounting.
3. Space Planning:
a. Accommodate single workstation; desk, chair, files
and safe.
b. Locate a glazed-framed pass-through opening from
office to corridor.

8B.4 Training Room - Multi-Media

A. Program: Provide conference room space for employee
training and learning experience in a conference room
setting and with easy access to separate A/V storage and
setup space for multi-media equipment.
1. Location: Near Human Resource (HR) Office to permit
flexible use for a variety of employee training and
related personnel activities.
a. Avoid positioning adjacent to Employee Dining or
as an extended partitioned space off dining area.
b. If located adjacent to Employee Dining, provide
doors and partitions to acoustically isolate training
areas.
2. Size / Area: 20 m² (215 sq. ft.)
B. Space Planning: Accommodate the following:
1. Small conference and classroom type arrangements to
support 25 to 30 personnel.
2. Rectangular plan
3. Secure storage area for A/V equipment
C. Acoustics: Protect space acoustically; STC 48; construct
partitions for full height between floor slab to underside of
structure above.
D. Equipment: <13> Provide secure storage room with lock
built into Training Room.
1. TV with DVD and connected to MATV system. <13>
2. Computer Work Stations: Provide 3 computer work
stations for self learning program.
3. Include A/V facilities for training activities such
as projector, retractable screen; power and network
connections built into or under tables; laptop PC setups
for presentations; flip charts; white boards; scene
lighting; sound system.
E. Finishes: See <GR5>.
1. Floor: Nylon tufted cut pile carpet
3. Walls: Vinyl wallcovering or paint
F. FF&E:
1. Millwork credenza
2. Classroom style table and chairs

8B.5 Nurse / First Aid Station

A. Program: Verify with MI if these spaces are required for
emergency medical care of employees and guests.
1. Location: Near HR Office to allow shared clerical and
staffing support.
2. Size / Area: See the project Facilities Program.
Spaces Size:
(see example plan) Private Open
m2 sq. ft.
Nurse’s Office L 5.7 64 X
First Aid / Exam M 10.9 117 X
Toilet (accessible unisex) - 4.0 43 X
Totals 20.6 224
C. Space Planning: Barrier free to accommodate people with
disabilities.
1. First Aid / Exam Room: Controlled access by nurse;
accommodate single bed, chair and secure storage of
medical supplies and limited medications.
2. Nurse’s Office: Single desk arrangement to allow for 2
seated interviewees.
3. Toilet Room: Locate immediately adjacent to First
Aid / Exam. Accessible, single unisex toilet, lavatory
and accessories.
D. Finishes for Nurse / First Aid Station: See
<GR> : .
<GR5>

8B.6 Locker / Change Area, Shower & Toilet Rooms

A. Program: Provide separate men and women spaces where
employees may secure clothing, change into uniforms
and street clothes with a place to shower and groom with
adjoining toilets and lavatory areas.
1. Adjacency: Uniform Distribution if included; Primary
Service Corridor.
2. Location: Connect to primary Service Corridor with
baffled entrance (no doors) into Locker and Change
spaces.
B. Space Planning: Accommodate separate male and female
spaces (MI to verify the maximum employee work shifts
and male / female divisions).
Other program amenities may increase the employee
count if additional space is required for employees of
spas, salons, residences, club facilities, golf, etc. Typically,
employees assigned to these amenity facilities do not share
hotel employee spaces because of their distance from the
hotel; review project criteria with MI.
C. Shower Areas: 1 shower to 50 staff. Divide between male
(50%) and female (50%) unless indicated otherwise.
1. Location: Arrange entrance through Locker and
Change spaces; not Toilet Area.
2. Shower Enclosure: Provide two compartment shower
enclosure with door (frosted or opaque glass for privacy).
3. Fixtures: See Module <15B>.
D. Toilet Areas: Include toilets, urinals and lavatories fixtures
in compliance with codes.
1. Additional Facilities: Provide additional toilet facilities
when travel distance to central toilets is excessive or to
meet governing laws and customs.
2. Fixtures: See Module <15B> for BOH fixtures and
plumbing accessories.
3. Toilet Room / Bath Accessories: See Module <GR3>
for typical BOH products.
4. Toilet Partitions: Provide with a high priority for
durability, sanitation and privacy.
a. Partition Height: 178 cm (70 inch) minimum
b. Floor Clearance: 18 cm (7 inch) maximum
c. Privacy: Provide “no sight line” or “gap less”
design at doors, pilasters and side partition.
d. Urinals: Provide privacy dividers.
5. Manufacturer: Hadrian; Bobrick; Bradley

Figure 2 - Locker Facilities - Example Plan
 Secure Storage
 Women’s Lounge
 Women’s Locker / Change
 Footwash (Regional)
 Religious Facility (Regional)
 Janitor’s Closet 
 Men’s Locker / Change
 Baffled Entrance 


Service Corridor




E. Lockers & Benches: See general locker requirements in

Module <GR3> and provide the following:
1. Lockers:
a. Type: Double tiered
b. Size: 300 (wide) x 500 mm (deep) (12 x 20 inch)
deep
c. Quantities: Review and confirm quantities with
MI.
• Business Hotels: 1.0 lockers per guestroom
• Resorts: 1.3 lockers per guestrooms.
• Male & Female: Plan locker areas in back to
back layout that allows unequal distribution
between men and women where the design
assumes equal distribution of lockers. Divide
locker quantities between male (50%) and fe-
male (50%) unless indicated otherwise.
2. Benches: Wood top change benches
3. Aisles: 1.53 m (5 ft.) wide minimum
4. Accessibility: Comply with applicable accessibility
regulations for aisles and reach design by persons with
disabilities.
F. Lounge: Consider private space for single cot and chair
for employees not feeling well or for mothers that need
to pump breast milk. Consider separate male and female
spaces or locate as an adjacency to Nurse’s Station.
G. Finishes: Provide the following:
1. Shower & Toilet Rooms: Provide HPL and solid surface
materials.
a. Floor: Porcelain tile
b. Base: Porcelain tile
c. Walls: Porcelain tile
d. Ceiling: Accessible acoustical tile
2. Locker / Change Areas: See <GR5>.
a. Floor: Vinyl composition tile
b. Base: Rubber base
c. Walls: Semi gloss or gloss painted

8B.7 Employee Cafeteria <10>

A. Program: Provide employee dining space and food service
area. Employee meal requirements vary from region to
region, review scope of required food service and FF&E
with MI on a project by project basis. <10>
1. Location: Central to employee spaces and adjacent to
Primary Service Corridor.
2. Size / Area: (Quantity of guestrooms) ÷ 3 = m² required
for gross dining space; for 300 room hotel: 300 ÷ 3 =
100 m² (1,076 sq. ft.)
B. Space Planning: Consider retaining a commercial food
service / kitchen consultant for project.
1. Food Preparation: Typically, food is prepared in main
kitchen of property.
2. Food Line: 4 m (13 ft.) long; one attendant for self
serve; hot meal and grille cooking service; dish drop
and wash area.
Work Stations: 3. Food Service: Accommodate equipment and food
service standards outlined in Module <10> Food &
Provide 2 computer work
Beverage Production Facilities.
stations for employees to
4. Service Options: Grille cooking; salad bar; friendly
access the internet.
soup station; employee refrigerator for food brought in;
toaster; microwave; ice dispenser.
5. Seating: Individual style seating (no booths) with tables
to seat minimum of 6 employees.
6. Exits: Second means of egress may be required from
dining area.
7. Bussing: Self dish drop and counter to wash area.
Provide sufficient stewarding area to manage waste, wash
service items and provide sanitary eating environment.
8. Provide electric water cooler accessible to employees. <15B>.
C. Features:
1. Audio: Provide speakers for music output.
2. TV: Provide cable and power connections.
3. Natural Light: Provide window wall to exterior, if possible.
D. Finishes: See <GR5>.

8B.8 Service Corridors

A. Program: Provide Back of House (BOH) circulation
corridors to service various guest function areas, connecting
to other service spaces, receiving area and dock.
B. Size / Area:
1. Banquet / Service Corridor: See <6>
2. Receiving Area Service Corridor: See <9>
3. Commercial Kitchen Corridors: See <10>
4. Employee Area Service Corridor (BOH): See
“Employee Area Service Corridors” below.
5. Ceiling Height: 2.7 m (9 ft.) minimum
6. Width: Dimensions are net, clear of equipment, columns
or obstructions.
C. Service Alcove: Consider an area to place public coin operated
telephone, vending and bulletin board for employee use and
announcements. Locate central to employee facilities layout.
D. Wall Protection: Provide durable, low maintenance high
and low wall bumpers with infill of heavy duty plastic or
metal sheets.
Avoid wood and painted surfaces that require frequent
maintenance.
1. Wall Bumpers: 5 x 15 cm (2 x 6 inch) synthetic wood or
stainless steel clad wood.
2. Infill: Heavy-duty plastic or non-corroding metal sheets.
E. Corner Guards: 10 x 10 cm x 2 m (4 x 4 inch x 6 ft) high,
16 gauge stainless steel guards at outside wall corners.
F. Finishes:
1. Floor: Colored concrete, hardened and sealed (minimum)
in Service Corridor rated for vehicle traffic.
2. Provide smooth surface floors adjacent to meeting and
function areas to avoid noise from wheeled carts on
floor joints.
3. Base: Epoxy painted masonry or vinyl base.
4. Walls: Protect with continuous double (high and low)
railing and infill. Provide durable walls and protection to
resist cart and material handling traffic. Examples include:
epoxy painted masonry; continuous double (high and low)
railing, diamond plate wainscot, thermo plastic sheeting.
5. Ceiling: Accessible acoustical tile.

8B.9 Employee Area Service Corridors

A. Program: Provide BOH employee circulation corridors
between employee functions and to access other building
areas.
• Employee Service corridors primarily serve personnel
and light cart traffic (Housekeeping, Laundry, F&B
Service, etc.).
• Corridor finishes provide a bright, clean, durable
environment to support employee moral and minimize
maintenance and damage to floors and walls.
B. Corridor Width: 23mm(6'-6")
(10 ft) minimum
minimum
C. Finishes:
1. Floor: Vinyl composition tile (VCT) or integrally
colored and hardened concrete finish
2. Base: Vinyl
3. Walls: Painted
4. Wall Protection: Provide continuous 2 x 6 inch synthetic
wood (recycled PVC / wood composite that will not
splinter and does not need painting such as Trex) high
and low bumpers.
a. Low Bumper: Locate above base
b. High Bumper: Locate at 0.9 m (3 ft.) above floor
5. Ceiling: Accessible acoustical lay-in tile (ACT)
8B.10 Systems Coordination
including:
• 11 Laundry / Housekeeping
• 13A Technology Infrastructure

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
9
Engineering & Maintenance
Facilities
9 - Engineering & Maintenance Facilities THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
9.1 Overview 1
9.2 Engineering & Maintenance Shops & Offices 2
9.3 Receiving Area - Dock 4
9.4 Receiving & Service Corridors 5
9.5 Ancillary Receiving Area Facilities 6
9.6 Purchasing & Receiving Offices 7
9.7 Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP) Equipment 8
9.8 Exterior Maintenance Facilities 9

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Engineering | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Engineering & Maintenance Facilities - 9
Engineering & Maintenance

9.1 Overview
A. Program: The criteria and “examples” included in this Module
model generic plans for Engineering and Maintenance spaces.
1. Employee positions and responsibilities vary based
MI Project Contact on property type, size, location, the specific employee
Marriott International - “MI” - is the assignments and organization for the proposed spaces.
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. 2. Regional customs, social factors, labor laws etc. may
Contact the MI Design Manager for the impact the program. Verify the applicable program
project specific manager referenced requirements with MI.
by the term “MI” throughout this
Module. B. Related Areas & Spaces: Coordinate the following program
areas with applicable Modules and the requirements in this
Module. Generally, these spaces relate to engineering and
maintenance management of the property:
• Laundry Holding <11A>
• Computer Room <13A>
• Telephone Equipment and Room <13B>
• T.V. / Video Equipment and Room <13C>
• Lighting Controls / Dimming <15C>
C. Steps, Stairs, & Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> -
Loss Prevention.
D. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR> and <16>
E. Spaces: As required by the project Facilities Program,
accommodate the following:
• Engineering / Maintenance Shops and Offices
• Receiving Dock
• Receiving & Service Corridors
• Ancillary Facilities
• Purchasing and Receiving Offices
• Lighting Controls / Dimming
• Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) Equipment
• Exterior Maintenance Facilities
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Engineering 1

9.2 Engineering & Maintenance Shops & Offices

A. Program: Include office, shop and storage spaces to support
engineering / maintenance functions of the property.
Spaces Size: Pri-
Open
(see example plan) m2 sq. ft. vate
Director of Engineering 10.0 108 X
Reception 13.4 144 X
Plan / File / Storage 3.3 36 alcove
Carpentry Shop 23.7 256 X
Workshop - M & E 23.7 256 X
Tool Storage 9.3 100 X
Electrical Storage 8.9 96 X
Electronics Repair 8.6 93 X
Locked Storage 15.6 168 X
Landscape Equipment 7.4 80 X
B. Location: Access to exterior receiving areas and dock for
moving materials, supplies and equipment to and from the
property.
1. Access to guestroom service elevators to give service
employees a convenient route to guestrooms.
2. Adjacent to BOH MEP areas to allow convenient passage
to monitor building systems.
Figure 1 - Engineering &

Maintenance - Example Plan
u v q s
t m Director of Engineering
n Chief Engineer
m o Reception
p Files
q Carpentry Shop
p r w r M + E Workshop
s Tool Storage
o t Electrical Storage
u Exterior Maintenance
v Electric Repair
n w Parts Storage
Service Corridor
2 Engineering | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

C. Maintenance Shops:
1. Access: Entry through pair of 90 cm (3 ft.) wide doors
at carpentry shop and landscape equipment. Easily
accessible spaces with clear path of entry.
2. Doors: Hollow steel, except tool storage. See Module
<GR> for additional general requirements for BOH
doors, frames and hardware.
3. Electronic Lock: Provide electronic lock encoder at
office area. <16>
4. Work Counters: Include counter and storage shelving
space along interior perimeter with electrical service
and cable testing outlets for T.V.’s and equipment.
5. Charging Stations: Provide power for radios and
pagers at designated work bench stations
6. Storage: Wire mesh or chain link to store tools and
electrical service parts.
7. Eye Wash Station: Centrally locate one emergency eye
wash station in shop area. <15B> <16>
8. BAS: Provide location for Building Automation
System
9. Landscape Equipment: Space accessible to exterior or
in separate building if site area is large. Project area
is determined on a case by case basis; see “Exterior
Maintenance Facilities” below.
D. Finishes: Provide the following in Maintenance Shops
except as noted for office spaces.
1. Floor: Concrete, sealed (carpet in office spaces)
2. Base: Painted same as walls (resilient base at carpeted
office floors)
3. Walls: Painted
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure, painted (accessible
acoustical tile in office spaces)

9.3 Receiving Area - Dock

A. Program: Provide for receipt of supplies, equipment,
furnishings and other deliveries. Where possible and site
allows, design area to accommodate largest truck turning
radius such as typical over the road tractor trailer truck
equipment.
B. Location: Locate convenient to food storage / preparation,
Security Office, and BOH service circulation areas.
C. Size / Area: Sufficient space for storing carts, in addition to
loading and unloading activities.
1. Bays (minimum): Three at 3.66 m (12 ft.) wide as
follows:
• One for 16.76 m (55 ft.) long tractor trailer
• One for 10.67 m (35 ft.) long delivery truck
• One for trash compactor / recycling
2. Dock Height: Typically 1.07 m (3'-6") from driveway
surface to dock surface or design for proposed delivery
vehicles serving the property.
3. Finish Dock Elevation: Same to meet BOH service
corridor entry doors.
4. Dock Depth: 3 m (10 ft.) minimum, measured from
dock front edge to building wall.
5. Overhead Clearance: 4.27 m (14 ft.) to underside of
roof structure, except 5.5 to 6.1 m (18 to 20 ft.) at trash
compactor bay (verify height if required).
D. Dock Finish: Hard steel troweled concrete with slip resistance
of 0.6 wet / dry and sealed with material rated for wheeled
traffic. Provide positive drainage slope away from building
to dock edge.
E. Dock Leveler: Provide manually operated dock leveler at
edge of one bay; no scissor lift.
F. Compactor: Locate at grade with direct access from the dock
level. Design for largest, transportable refuge container
that can be supplied to the project. Include steel rails at
compactor to slide container into position without damage
to pavement during hauling and delivery operation.
G. Access Ramp: Provide for persons with disabilities with
ramp slope at 8% maximum or per governing authority and
sufficiently wide to transport a pallet.
H. Service Paving: Heavy duty paving; slope to area trench
drain away from dock.

I. Roof: Provide roof covering over entire dock area with

clearance as noted above.
J. Air Curtains: <15A> Provide at high traffic Receiving and
Trash Handling entrance doors.
K. Heating: <15A> In very cold climates, provide radiant
heating units at exterior doors to moderate temperatures
for receiving dock employees.
L. Water: Provide hose bibb for washing down dock area.
Locate in area that protects it from freezing.
M. Electric: Provide power for compactor, when required.
N. Finishes: Provide the following:
1. Floor: Concrete, sealed (see “Dock Finish” above)
2. Base: Painted
3. Walls: Painted
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure, painted
9.4 Receiving & Service Corridors

A. Program: The corridor from the Receiving Area to central
storage areas and large Function Areas <6> is subject to
heavy use and traffic by pallet jacks, fork lifts and heavy
wheeled vehicles.
B. Wall Protection: Provide continuous 2 x 6 inch synthetic
wood (recycled PVC / wood composite that will not splinter
and does not need painting such as Trex) high and low
bumpers and wall protection infill.
1. Low Bumper: Locate above base.
2. High Bumper: Locate at 0.9 m (3 ft.) above floor
3. Infill: At a minimum, protect the lower portion of walls
(between bumpers) with:
• epoxy (or industrial enamel) paint on masonry
• heavy duty thermo plastic sheet on gypsum walls or
• diamond plate sheet on gypsum walls
C. Corner Guards: 10 x 10 cm x 2 m (4 x 4 inch x 6 ft) high,
16 gauge stainless steel guards at outside wall corners.
D. Finishes: Provide durable corridor finishes to limit damage
and maintenance.
1. Floors: Concrete hardened and sealed; rated for heavy
wheeled traffic.
2. Base: Epoxy painted masonry; vinyl base at gypsum
walls.
3. Walls: Masonry preferred with wall protection.
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure or accessible, suspended
lay-in system; consider corrosive resistant supports and
panels.

9.5 Ancillary Receiving Area Facilities

A. Program: Provide the following programmed spaces to
support property service and receiving area.
B. Storage Areas: Provide secure storage areas located between
receiving and access to main kitchen. When property
materials and products, including foods (coordinate with
Module <10>) are delivered, they require immediate
removal from the receiving area to storage. Include the
following storage facilities:
1. General Property Storage: General store (non-food
items).
2. Refrigerated Storage: Provide for food items as
required by Module <10>.
3. Guest Package Storage: Provide a secure room
or lockable enclosure to temporarily store guest
items forwarded to the property for functions and
presentations.
4. Contract Service Storage: If programmed, see require-
ments below.
5. Design Coordination:
a. Avoid locating transformers, electrical panels or
mechanical equipment in storage spaces.
b. Construct storage area walls full height (from floor to
underside of structure) using masonry or equivalent
materials.
C. Related Storage: Coordinate the location of the above and
following storage spaces related to the Receiving Area.
1. Main dry food storage <10>
2. Freezers and coolers <10>
3. Beverage coolers, liquor storage and refrigerated wine
storage <10>
D. Can Wash: See Module <10>. Locate within contained area
to avoid waste water flowing across receiving area.
E. Recycling Facility: Design this facility adjacent to the
receiving area and comply with requirements developed
by a principal recycling company that would service the
property and review proposed design with MI.
1. Determine recycling needs for material types, holding
bins / containers for cardboard, cardboard bales, paper,
paper, cans, plastics, various glass colors, etc.
2. See above for compactor at dock area. Determine
requirements, if any, applicable to recycling program.

F. Laundry Holding: At properties without an on-site laundry

(see Module <11A>), include space for soiled and clean
linen storage.
G. Standby Generator: See “MEP Equipment” below and
Module <15C>.
H. Contract Service Storage: Consult with MI to determine if
cleaning or maintenance services are provided by external
service contractors. If on-site service storage is required,
provide the following:
1. Enclosed, secure room for storing contractor’s
equipment and activity staging items.
2. Size: 38 m² (400 sq. ft.)
3. Utilities: Floor sink with hot and cold water
4. Finishes: Paint walls; vinyl composition tile on floor
9.6 Purchasing & Receiving Offices

A. Program: At large properties, provide private spaces for
Purchasing Manager <8B>, shared office for Purchasing
and Receiving employees, and shared work spaces for
Storeroom Manager and Storeroom employees; see project
Facilities Program.
B. Location: Adjacent to Receiving Area and within proximity
to Security Offices <16>.
Size:
Spaces Private Open
m2 sq. ft.
Purchasing Manager 6.5 70 X
Purchasing & Receiving Staff (3) 9.3 100 X
Storeroom Manager & Staff (2) 4.6 50 X
Total Area 20.4 220
C. Equipment: Provide typical office furniture, desk and chair,
visitor chair, workstation counters and chairs, file cabinets,
telephone and desktop PC with printer, in designated
manager’s office.
D. Finishes: See
Provide the following:
<GR5>.

9.7 Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP) Equipment

A. Program: Provide space for building MEP equipment,
system components and convenient access for equipment
service and maintenance. <15>
B. Size / Area: Provide space for the following based on
the project design requirements for MEP systems and
equipment:
1. Configuration: Most efficient space for equipment is
square or rectangular (1 to 2) and column free areas.
Other geometries may require larger building areas.
2. Clearances: Provide sufficient area to enclose and
efficiently maintain, service, and repair equipment.
3. Ceiling Height: 5 m (16 ft.) minimum is recommended.
4. Views: Locate facilities to avoid or minimize guest
views of equipment. If equipment is visible, screen
equipment.
C. Lighting Controls / Dimming: Provide areas such as, closets or
alcoves for placement and concealment of lighting controls
and dimming equipment associated with function space
<6>, food and beverage <3> and public spaces <2A>.
1. Location: Generally, multiple locations are required
to permit equipment placement near lighting being
controlled.
a. See <15C> for electrical systems.
b. Review concealment requirements with interior
design and supplier of equipment to determine ap-
plicable design that allows easy access but main-
tains concealment from guest view.
2. Size / Area: 15 to 25m² (162 to 269 sq. ft.)
D. Standby Generator: Provide generator area and generator
access.
1. Review proposed design and location with MI.
2. Design generator location that meets project’s acoustical
safety and environmental standards (noise, fuel storage
/ fueling, engine exhaust away from fresh air intakes,
vibration, etc.)
3. See electrical design requirements in Module <15C>.
E. Features:
1. Exterior Access: Provide facilities (doors, panel,
corridors) to permit convenient installation, service,
and replacement of equipment.
2. Sound / Vibration: Locate vibrating equipment away
from adjacent occupied areas to avoid occupant
disruption. If adjacency is required, provide vibration
isolation or barriers to control sound / vibration.

3. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation. <15A>

4. Access: Provide controlled access to equipment.
F. Finishes: Provide the following:
1. Floor: Concrete, sealed
2. Walls: Painted
3. Base: Painted (same as walls)
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure, painted
9.8 Exterior Maintenance Facilities

A. Program: When required, exterior, site and landscape
maintenance may be performed under contracted services
with the property. However, for properties that may not have
satisfactory contract services available, provide adequate
on-site ground maintenance, operational and storage space
that may include the following:
1. Landscape maintenance carts, mowers, tools and
material storage.
2. Gasoline / fuel storage tanks, fuel pump from storage
tank, electric cart charging stations, etc.
3. At resorts, other equipment may include backhoe
and beach grading equipment. Additionally, beach
recreation equipment, boats and other equipment may
be stored at this facility.
B. Location: In proximity to Receiving Dock and Engineering
/ Maintenance facilities with vehicle routes away from
guest and public areas.
C. Grounds Maintenance Facilities: <1> If contract maintenance
and replacement services are not feasible, provide on-site
facilities.

including:
• 8A Administration Facilities
• 11 Laundry & Housekeeping

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
10
Food & Beverage
Production Facilities
10 - Food & Beverage Production Facilities THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
Overview 1 General
Foodservice Planning - General 2
Space Planning 3
Code Compliance & Standards 8
Mechanical / HVAC 9
Plumbing 10
Electrical 12
Property Systems (Data & Telephone) 13
Construction Requirements - General 13
Kitchen Equipment 15
Walk-in Refrigerated / Frozen Storage Units 32
Type 1 - Grease Hoods 35
Commercial F&B Fixture Materials & Fabrication 36
Receiving 38 Kitchen
Pre-Processing (Commissary) 39
Contents Continued on Next Page >>

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B F & B Production | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Food & Beverage Production Facilities - 10
Contents
Storage 40
Garde Manger (Cold Preparation) 42
Bakery 42
Beverage Storage 43
Pot Washing 44
Warewashing 44
Silver Burnishing Room 45
Ice Production - Main Kitchen 46
Trash Holding - Refrigerated 46
“In Room Dining” Service 47
Pool Kitchen / Pantry 48
Commercial Kitchen Offices 48
Closing Room 50
Bars Bars 52
Restaurant Three Meal Restaurant Production Line 56
Food Pickup Line (Chef’s Counter) 57
Buffet 59
Server’s Stations 59
Specialty Restaurant Kitchen 62
Function Spaces Function Space Kitchen 62
Function Space Beverage Area 63
Function Space Pantries 64

Guest Accommodations Club Lounge Pantry 64
Ice / Vending 65
Housekeeping 65
Employee Employee Dining 65
System Coordination 66
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | F & B Production C
D F & B Production | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
Food & Beverage General

10.1 Overview
A. Module Objectives: This Module guides the Ritz-Carlton
(RCH) project design team with the coordination, develop-
ment, design and installation of foodservice facilities and
MI Project Contact the following criteria.
Marriott International - “MI” - is the 1. Outlines the parameters established for minimum
corporate entity that manages this standard requirements and components of foodservice
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. operations.
project specific manager referenced 2. Defines design standards and ensure quality and con-
by the term “MI” throughout this sistency among foodservice operations worldwide.
Module. 3. Identifies the coordination required in other Modules.
B. Foodservice Objectives:
1. Design and construct foodservice facilities with a high
priority for sanitation and food safe materials.
2. Provide foodservice facilities with heavy duty equip-
ment considering factors such as:
• Labor efficient design with appropriate work flows
• Life cycle value
• Low maintenance
• Ease of use
• Cleanability and sanitation
• Safety
3. Comply with RCH designs and standards regardless of
less stringent governing interpretations or practices at
site locations.
C. Design Assumptions for Typical Facility:
1. 300 Guestroom business hotel
2. One Lobby Lounge with beverage service
3. All Day Dining Restaurant
4. Possible Leased Restaurant
5. Specialty Restaurant
6. 929 m² (10,000 sq. ft) of Function spaces; see Module
<6>
7. Adjust quantities of larger or smaller facilities propor-
tionally as appropriate.
D. Equipment Specification Packages: Contact RCH for current
4KE and 5SU Package requirements and list.
1. 4KE Package: Permanent equipment, hard wired and
hard plumbed is part of the “4KE Kitchen Equipment
Package”; examples include espresso machine, storage
shelf, oven, etc. (see RCH property list for examples).
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | F & B Production 1
2. 5SU Package (OS&E): Attachments and accessories or-

dered with the supplies package.
a. Mobile or temporary equipment considered as part
of the 5SU smallwares; examples include banquet
carts, glass racks, blenders, etc.
b. Design and plan for 5SU equipment supplies.
3. Coordination:
a. Point of Sales (P.O.S.): See Module <13A> for
systems equipment.
b. Electrical Service: Indicate location of terminals
and printers on plan and verify electrical outlets
to accommodate equipment.
E. Warranty: <GR1> Provide one year (warranty begins when
MI occupies facility) on parts and labor for foodservice
equipment. Provide a five year warranty on refrigeration
components (compressor, condenser, evaporators, etc.)
10.2 Foodservice Planning - General

A. Market Study: Analyze market conditions, demand, compe-
tition and other influences to determine appropriate res-
taurant and menu concepts.
1. Prior to design, perform analysis of market specific
conditions to determine relevant operations and space
allocation requirements.
2. From the market study, identify the following site
characteristics:
• Import laws
• Availability of products
• Labor cost and wage rate
B. Impact on Planning & Space Allocation: Geographic locations
(effecting products) and markets (effecting wages), drive
the kitchen size and support facilities.
1. Wages: Wage rates determine the flow of service and
design of kitchen spaces and adjacencies.
2. Efficiencies:
a. Minimize full time equivalent (FTE) Employees.
b. Automate processes.
c. Minimize number of trips with increased capacity
of hot and cold holding equipment for service
items.
d. Plan for close adjacencies of related functions.
3. Other Factors:
a. Where wages are low, design larger facilities as
required to support more personnel.
2 F & B Production | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
b. Where wages are low, consider impact on

Employee housing and dining requirements.
4. Products & Imports: Availability of product and import
laws determines the need to make or buy certain prod-
ucts, including prepared breads and packaged meats.
5. High availability of products require:
a. Preference to buy products
b. Eliminate relevant pre-prep functions
c. Storage facility sizes that are dependent on deliv-
ery frequency
6. Low availability of prepared and packaged products
require:
a. Preparing products on site from raw state
b. Modular units required for additional processes
such as Butchery, Fish Processing, Bakery, etc.
c. Storage facility capacities typically increase
accordingly
7. Energy Conservation: Provide energy saving and
proven innovations wherever possible. Coordinate with
Module <15>. Areas to provide energy saving equip-
ment include:
• Variable speed exhaust fans
• Low volume exhaust hoods
• Efficient refrigeration and monitoring systems
• Low water consuming ware washers
• Energy efficient (Energy Star) listed equipment
10.3 Space Planning

A. Process Flow: See the example, “Main Kitchen Relationship
Diagram”, Figure 1.
1. Functions and Adjacencies: Arrange kitchen functions
and adjacencies to follow flow of products from receiv-
ing through to kitchen finished product areas.
2. Kitchen: Provide one centralized, main kitchen used
for common processes.
3. Bakery & Pastry: Locate Bakery and Pastry as an ex-
tension of the main kitchen Commissary.
4. Butchery: Locate Butchery in decentralized extension
of main kitchen when market study deems necessary.
B. Spatial Parameters - General: Use the following “Table:
Kitchen Planning”, Table 1, to estimate the initial space
programming requirements (in meters or square feet) for
foodservice, preparation and storage.
Figure 1 - Foodservice Process Flow Diagrams
Suites
Honor Bar
Beverage Storage Non-Alcoholic

In Room Dining
Liquor
Bars
Bakery / Pastry
Receiving Main Kitchen
Function
G d M
Garde Manger
Commissary
Banquet Kitchen
Employee Dining 3 Meal / Day
Leased Restaurant
Meat Prep
Fish Prep Specialty
Vegetable Prep
Dry Storage
Refrigerated Storage
Frozen Storage
Food and Beverage Processing Relationship Diagram
SService
ervice Elev
Elevators
vators
Storage
Warewash
(Dry, Refrigerated, Frozen)
Employee
Locker & Receiving
Toilets In Room
Banquet / Bulk Potwash Dining
Production
Chef’s Kitchen
Service Corridor
Liquor / Office
Wine /
Beer
Storage
Banquet Cold
Finished Storage
Cooler Pantry /
Silver / Meat Prep (Refrigerated, Frozen)
Dessert
China /
Glass Storage /
Silver
Burnishing Restaurant Hot Line
Pastry Production Garde Manger

Restaurant
Refrigerator
Table 1 - Kitchen Planning (square feet)

Note: Use the Facilities Summary values to fill-in the formulas below. Calculations for 1A, B, C, D, E & 2
produce numeric factors used in the calculation below and not true area sub-totals.
1A - Food Outlets
seats x 5 sf / seat if connected to main kitchen = sf
seats x 10 sf / seat if not connected to main kitchen = sf
1B - Beverage Outlets
seats x 1 sf / seat if no separate kitchen required = sf
seats x 3 sf / seat if small kitchen / pantry is required = sf
= Total seats (use Food Outlet 1A count in 3A & 3B below)
1C - Function Areas
total sf x 0.15 1C = sf
1D - Employee Dining (includes seating area)
staff count x 3 sf / staff member 1D = sf
(enter total staff count for property)
1E - Room Service
keys x 1 sf / key 1E = sf
(add all items above) Sub-Total: 1 = sf
2 - Main Kitchen Factor
sf x 1.2 2 = sf
(enter sub-total sf from 1 above)
3A - Bakery (if included)
seats x 2 sf / seat = sf
(enter dining seat count from 1A)
sf x 0.03 sf = sf
(enter total function area from 1C)
Bakery sub-total area (add above two sums) 3A = sf
3B - Butcher (if included)
seats x 0.5 sf / seat = sf
(enter dining seat count from 1A)
sf x 0.01 sf = sf
(enter total function area from 1C)
Butcher sub-total (add above two factors) 3B = sf
4 - Kitchen (add four items above: 1, 2, 3A & 3B) * Project Total: = sf
* Note: in low skill labor regions overall size may increase by 10 to 15%
Food and Beverage Storage: Typically, 25% of the Kitchen project total (from 3 above) is F&B storage with 75%
dedicated to production space (in areas of limited product availability storage needs may increase by up to 25%).
Imperial to Metric Conversion Program Area Exclusions

1 sf = 0.0929 sm The program areas calculated above
are “net” usable areas that exclude the
following:
• Columns, shafts and utility spaces
• Cart and can washing
• Service corridors
• Trash, garbage and recycling facilities
1. Rooms / Areas: Provide the following:

a. Rectangular shaped rooms
b. Spaces without “dead” corners
c. Straight and even wall lines
d. Open spaces without unnecessary partitions and
walls
e. Maximize usable wall space for kitchen equipment.
f. Ceiling Heights: 3 m (10 ft.) minimum
2. Columns / Shafts: Minimize quantity and size of
column and shaft protrusions in kitchen space where
possible.
3. Corridor / Door / Elevator Widths:
a. Provide circulation paths capable of accommodat-
ing pallet size deliveries.
b. Usually requires double doors.
4. Aisle Widths:
a. Maintain 0.91 m (3 ft) minimum marked aisle
widths in compliance with code and governing
regulations for kitchen area exit corridors and
pathways without obstructions from carts, warm-
ers, chairs, storage items, etc.
b. Maintain minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) aisles for 2 way
traffic, cart traffic and back-to-back processes.
C. Adjacencies of Processes: Adjacency or location is based on
flow of product through facility.
D. Entrance at Main Kitchen / Dining: Design entrance with
baffled vestibule to prohibit light, noise and views from the
kitchen to the dining area.
1. Traffic Flow: Circular flow into dish washing then to
Service Line and out past Service Station. Avoid traffic
cross flow.
2. Doors: Where possible, minimize doors within
the kitchen circulation areas. Provide doors for the
following:
a. Fire / Smoke / Exit Doors: Provide rated doors for
fire and life safety. If a fire rated wall separation
is required by code between the main kitchen and
dining area, then plan the vestibule to include an
additional set of fire rated doors held open during
normal operating conditions by an automatic hold
open / release device. Fire rated doors require the
following:
• Self closing device
• Latching mechanism
• Automatic electric hold open / release device
reporting to fire alarm system
b. Dining Entrance (non-rated doors): Provide push

/ pull function and vision window. If automatic
function, electric eye door activation is required.
c. Kitchen Entrance (non-rated doors): Provide dou-
ble acting pass doors with vision window when
doors do not require a functional rating.
d. Temperature: Provide doors between rooms with
different design temperatures.
e. Storage and Security: Provide doors with locks at
rooms and areas requiring security.
f. Size: To accommodate bulk material and pallet
movement, provide door and opening widths of
1.07 m (3'-6") or larger.
E. Office Spaces: Adjacent to or in kitchen area, provide dedi-
cated offices for the following:
Office Area Required
Executive Chef: 13 m² (140 sq. ft.)
Executive Steward 7.4 m² (80 sq. ft.)
7.4 m² (80 sq. ft.)
Pastry Chef
within Pastry Shop, if applicable
Sous Chef 7.4 m 2 (80 sq.ft.)
In-Room Dining Office 7.4 m² (80 sq. ft.)
Chef’s Office / Closing Room See Section 10.18
F. Banquet Kitchen: Banquet areas are preferred on the same

level as the Main Kitchen. Provide separate A’ La Carte
food production facilities to service Ballroom with banquet
prep, banquet plating and food preparation line, dry and
refrigerated storage, warewashing and pot and silver wash-
ing area when one or more of the following occur:
1. Ballroom is located on a different floor than main
kitchen (not preferred).
2. Main Kitchen size, capacity, design, location, or opera-
tion is not capable of efficiently servicing the Ballroom.
3. Banquet seating capacity exceeds 1,500 seats.
G. Employee Lavatory: See Module <8B>. Locate facilities
near [not to exceed 60 m (200 ft)] and accessible to kitchen
space.
1. Provide 1 lavatory per floor minimum with sink and
toilet, when foodservice facilities are located on mul-
tiple floors; 1 for each men and women, preferred.
2. Provide stainless steel sink with touchless, hot and cold
water mixing valve control (foot or sensor operation)
with drain connected direct to waste system.
3. Provide soap and towel dispensers at each sink.
10.4 Code Compliance & Standards

A. Architectural and Design Standards - General: Provide design,
equipment and construction of facilities, at a minimum, in
compliance with, or comparable to, foodservice sanitation
and safety codes practiced in the United States by RCH
and as required by the governing codes. Submit conflicts
concerning codes and standards compliance provisions to
RCH for resolution.
1. Material Standards: Recognized building material,
testing and fabrication standards:
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
• Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
2. Foodservice Code Standards: Recognized foodservice
code and fabrication standard:
• National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
3. Construction / Design Code Standards: Recognized
construction and design code standards:
• International Building Code (IBC)
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
• American Gas Association (AGA)
• American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
• Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
4. Health Department: Design facilities in compliance
with governing Department of Health provisions.
B. Foodservice Health Provisions:
1. Hand Sinks: Stainless steel; locate within a 6 m (20 ft)
radius of food preparation, production and warewashing
areas.
a. Connect hand sinks direct to waste system.
b. Provide touchless hot and cold water controls
(electronic sensor operation).
c. Isolate from work surfaces to avoid contamination.
2. Soap / Towels: Provide soap and towel dispensers at
hand sinks. Coordinate with Operations to identify
type and supplier. Provide trash bin top with foot ped-
dle operation..
3. Grease Disposal: See <15B>. Connect pot sinks and
other grease wastes (not grinders / disposal waste ma-
chines) to grease traps.
4. Back Splashes: 15 cm (6 inch) high for worktables and
counters against walls. Seal to wall with food safe,
100% silicone sealant.
5. Cleaning Clearance: Provide 10 cm (4 inch) minimum

clearance for cleaning at stationary equipment not
sealed to walls.
Maintain 15 cm (6 inch) minimum clearance for equip-
ment above floor (including undershelves) for cleaning.
6. Exhaust Ventilators: Provide stainless steel wall finish
on walls to tile floor base, behind cooking appliances
and adjacent to exhaust ventilators.
7. Storage: Lockable; separate chemical from food storage.
8. Finishes: Provide safe, easy to clean finishes for floors,
ceilings and walls of food prep and production areas.
Behind cooking appliances and adjacent to exhaust
ventilators, provide stainless steel wall finish extending
from tile wall base to ceiling.
9. Paint / Coatings: Provide durable, non-toxic, non-dust-
ing, non-flaking, mildew resistant, NSF approved coat-
ings; suitable for foodservice areas.
10.5 Mechanical / HVAC

A. Utilities: <15A> Choose utility based on the following:
1. Use natural gas when available.
2. If municipal gas service is not available, provide cen-
tral liquid petroleum tank size for one week capacity of
gas with pressure as required for the equipment served.
3. Provide combination of utilities to reduce impact of
utility system failure.
4. Prefer induction in buffet areas.
5. Conceal utility lines in walls and stub-out of walls as
required for connections. Do not stub out from floor or
expose runs on face of walls and ceiling.
B. Gas: Comply with NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. Do
not use or store gas bottles or containers larger than 1.1 kg
(2½ pounds), normally used for portable warmer / cookers
within building.
C. Exhaust Ducts: See Module <15A>.
D. Operating Temperatures: See Module <15A> for the design
temperatures for each area of the kitchen.
10.6 Plumbing
A. Requirements - General: <15B>
1. Conceal plumbing utilities within walls. If concealed
installation is not possible, use stainless steel or chrome
plated covers if in prep and production spaces.
2. Horizontal piping runs extended and connected to
equipment shall be at the highest practical elevation
but not less than 150 mm (6 inches) above the floor to
provide clearance for cleaning.
3. Conceal exhaust ventilator drain lines in walls and ex-
tend to building drains.
B. Hot Water:
1. Provide 60º C (140º F) degree water for preparation,
pot sinks, warewashing machines and general kitchen
use.
2. Provide 49º C (120º F) water for hand sinks.
C. Waste Requirements:
1. Direct Waste: Use only when required by code or rec-
ommended by equipment manufacturer.
2. Indirect Waste: Provide indirect waste from kitchen
equipment that is not required to be directly connected.
a. Avoid placement of drains in traffic areas.
b. Use funnel floor drain vs. recessed floor sink
based on capacity, cost and use.
c. As a general rule, provide air gap (Josam 88900
or equivalent) for indirect wastes equal to 2 times
the diameter size of drainpipe to prevent back
siphonage and contamination.
d. Provide funnel floor drains for low volume, indirect
waste locations. Place in easily accessible locations
for service.
e. Provide recessed floor sinks for high volume ,
indirect waste locations.
D. Waste Disposers (Grinders): Provide at scrap sinks of
dishwashing areas. Provide in major pot wash and prep sink
drainboards (not in sinks) with the following motor sizes:
1. 2 hp minimum
2. 5 hp at dish washing
3. Provide waste collectors or pulpers if disposers are not
permitted.
E. Area Floor Drains:
1. Location - General: Locate area floor drains throughout
facility to assist with floor washing and specifically in wet
areas such as pot washing, warewashing and trash room.
2. Provide floor trench drains in regions where customary.

3. Slope: Pitch floor to area drains at a minimum of 10 mm/m
(⅛ inch/ft) and maximum of 20 mm / m (¼ inch/ft).
4. Grate Cover: Flush with finished floor. Minimum 15 mm
(½ inch) grate opening to prevent clogging.
F. Floor Troughs and Grates: Locate in areas of high volume water
pouring such as in front of tilt kettles and ice machines.
1. Size floor trough to accommodate full pour path of
equipment.
2. Provide 10 cm (4 inch) deep depression from rough slab to
finished floor to receive stainless steel floor trough lining
and grating.
3. Size floor grate openings to prevent equipment caster
(wheels) entrapment in grates with grates flush to floor.
4. Provide grates with non skid surface.
G. Grease Traps: See Module <15B>. Place grease traps outside of
kitchen, at lowest level of facility (typically, urban sites).
H. Water Lines: Connect water lines to foodservice equipment
through individual water filters when required. Use flexible
lines and quick disconnect connections; see <15B>.
I. Water Filters: Provide water filters at point of use for descal-
ing minerals in equipment such as coffee and tea brewers, ice
machines and boiler base steamers.
J. Gas Regulator Valves: Verify need for regulator valves to ensure
sufficient gas pressure for cooking and heating equipment
operation.
K. Gas Solenoid for Emergency Shut Off: Coordinate with require-
ments of Modules <15B> and <14>.
L. Hand Sinks: See Section 10.4 Code Compliance and Standards,
“Foodservice Health Provisions”.
10.7 Electrical
A. Requirements – General: <15C>
1. Prefer single receptacles to direct electrical connections
where possible.
2. Provide dedicated electrical outlets for P.O.S. and computer
equipment.
3. Use drop cord receptacles from ceiling for island worksta-
tions, banquet plating and holding areas.
4. Conceal utilities within walls. Do not stub out of the floor
or run exposed on the face of walls and ceilings.
B. Lighting Levels / Control: See Module <15C>.
C. Lamps / Fixtures: Interior Design: When lights are exposed

to the guest’s view (such as in Exhibition Kitchens), select
fixtures that are coordinated with the interior design and
support the restaurant concept. <3>
10.8 Property Systems (Data & Telephone)

A. Data Systems: See Module <13A>.
B. Telephone Systems: See Module <13B>. Provide a telephone
in each independent kitchen area.
10.9 Construction Requirements - General

A. Floors: Provide with minimum slip resistance coefficient of
0.6, wet / dry (level floor) and 0.8 wet / dry for ramps.
1. Floor Loading: Comply with governing code. Minimum
live loading is 490 kg / m² (100 lbs / sq. ft).
2. Paver Tile: Comply with Tile Council of America
(TCA) standards.
a. Provide cleanable, 6 x 6 inch (15 x 15 cm) minimum,
vitreous (0.5% to 3% water absorption), square edge
tile of red / gray / brown through body color.
b. Provide mud set installation on concrete subslab
and grout meeting ANSI A118.5 requirements.
3. Seamless Floor: Duraflex or approved equal
4. Concrete: Hard steel troweled and sealed with a heavy
duty sealer designed for vehicle traffic (storage and non
food production areas only that do not receive tile).
B. Steps, Stairs & Ramps: See Module <16> - Loss Prevention.
C. Natural Light: Verify code requirements for natural daylight
in kitchen. Incorporate natural daylight and views into the
plan wherever possible.
D. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR> and <16> for
window, glass / glazing criteria, restricting window open-
ing to 10 cm (4 inch) and for safety glass requirements.
E. Walls:
1. Kitchen Walls: Construction may be masonry or gypsum
board on metal stud system.
a. Gypsum Board: Construct framing on 20 cm (8 inch)
high concrete or concrete masonry unit curbs to con-
trol water seepage into adjacent areas (including bar
dies) from kitchen areas.
b. Construct walls common with dining rooms from
concrete masonry units.
2. Wall Height: Construct kitchen perimeter walls to slab

/ structure above and seal to prevent odor and sound
transmission to adjacent areas.
3. Ceramic Tile (preferred): Follow TCA standards for
product selection and installation.
a. Provide off-white 100 x 100 mm (4 x 4 inches) ce-
ramic tile walls to ceiling or 1.8 m (6 ft) minimum
height from floor with white grout. Include an ac-
cent band of colored tile at eye level. Coordinate
height with equipment and Kitchen Consultant.
b. Where finish walls are exposed to guest view,
provide ceramic tile and design to support restau-
rant concept and interior design.
4. Fire Rated - Fiber Reinforced Finish Paneling (FR-
FRFP): Provide Fire Rated Paneling (FRP) type as ap-
proved by MI and Zurich Services Corporation in areas
of food processing and production, and on kitchen cor-
ridor walls, that require fire rated, sanitary, cleanable
walls.
5. Security: Construct walls for lockable and secure areas
(storage, offices, etc.) to structure above (or provide
equal security barrier of expanded metal lath or welded
wire fabric) to deter unauthorized entry or theft.
6. Reinforcement: Reinforce walls and ceiling to support
wall and ceiling mounted equipment.
7. Wall Thickness: Provide construction of sufficient
thickness to receive recessed wall equipment when
required.
8. Walls Above Walk-In Freezer & Refrigerator Units:
Provide closure panels of same finish as walk-in unit
exterior to close off space above perimeter of units to
ceiling to prevent storage use, prevent excessive loads
on units and to enhance sanitation.
9. Wall Protection: Provide in service corridors, cart
parking, etc. and other similar areas of traffic. Provide
high and low continuous stainless steel channel rails
<8B> or armor metal plates fastened to wall from floor
to 1.2 m (4 ft) high mounted to provide wall protection.
Avoid wood rails.
10. Corner Guards: Provide 10 x 10 cm x 2 m high (4 x 4 inch
x 6 ft), 16 gauge stainless steel at exposed outside wall
corners of interior spaces subject to cart traffic.
11. Wall Finishes at Cooking Lines: Behind BOH cooking

lines, provide 20 gauge stainless steel wall flashing with
lock seams from top of cove base to bottom of exhaust
hood. For wall finishes behind cooking lines of public
areas, when specified by the Interior Designer, obtain
governing health department approval.
F. Ceilings: Provide materials that meet the following criteria:
1. Washable surfaces, but non corrosive
2. Accessible, non corrosive support systems
3. Recessed light fixtures (not surface mounted to ceiling)
4. Fire rated ceiling panels (FRP), accepted by MI, Zurich
Services Corporation and by governing regulations
G. Raceways: Provide 15 cm (6 inch) diameter raceway (PVC,
EMT, or other material required by code) to run soda and
beer lines from bag in box rack to dispenser with easy
sweep bends of 60 cm (24 inch) radius minimum. Run
conduit on underside of slab or above finished ceiling as
appropriate and provide support.
H. Cabling: Use shielded and unshielded cable for PBS / PMS
and P.O.S. systems as required by Modules <13A> and
<13B>.
I. Foodservice Openings: Provide stainless steel trim around
both sides of wall openings to receive pass-through or re-
cessed foodservice equipment.
J. Pass Doors: Provide easy opening, in / out door with vision
panel in high traffic areas between restaurant and kitchen.
10.10 Kitchen Equipment

A. Product Quality: Provide equipment manufacturers’ highest
grade of kitchen equipment designed for heavy duty, com-
mercial, hospitality use.
1. Provide features like casters on cooking equipment,
tables and other items where reasonable for the opera-
tional application.
2. Where utility connections are reasonably accommo-
dated, provide “flexible quick disconnect” connections.
B. Manufacturers: Table 2 includes a comprehensive list of
kitchen equipment. Exact equipment is based on project
requirements. MI accepts equipment from the following
manufacturers:
Table 2 - Equipment Manufacturers
Asia / Pacific Middle East /
Item Americas Europe China Remarks
Region Africa
Receiving
Insect Killer Insect-o-cutor Starkey / Sammic Starkey / Sammic Starkey / Sammic Starkey / Sammic
Mettler Toledo / Mettler Toledo / Mettler Toledo / Mettler Toledo /
Platform Scale Penn Mobile
Soehnle Soehnle Soehnle Soehnle
Pressure Cleaner SMT Karcher / SMT Karcher / SMT Karcher / SMT Karcher / SMT
Edelstahl / Ado Edelstahl / Ado Edelstahl / Ado Edelstahl / Ado
Trench Drain Custom / IMC
Roste Roste Roste Roste
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Hose Reel T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher 15.2 m (50 ft) hose
Air Curtain Curtron / Berner Curtron / Berner Curtron / Berner Curtron / Berner Curtron / Berner
Approximately 9.3
Walk-in Refrigera- Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Desmond /
Kolpak m2
tion Williams UK Williams UK Williams UK Williams UK
(100 sq. ft.)
With soap and towel
Hand Sink Advance Custom Custom Custom Custom
dispenser
Waste Compactor Orwak / Harmony Orwak / Harmony Orwak / Harmony Orwak / Harmony Orwak / Harmony
January 2013
Mount on 100 mm (4
Can Washer Aervoid Aervoid Aervoid Aervoid Aervoid
inch) high curb
1,100 kg (2,500 lb)
Platform Truck Kelmax Kelmax Kelmax Kelmax Kelmax
capactiy
2,500 kg (5,500 lb)
Manual Pallet Jack Dayton Dayton Dayton Dayton Dayton
capacity
Common Equipment (Use in Each Food Handling Area Below)
Tables, Counters, Comply with Section
Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
Sinks, Shelves 10.13
Conply with Section
Hand Sink Advance Custom Custom Custom Custom
10.4
Provide for all ice
machines, steam
Water Filter Everpure Everpure Everpure Everpure Everpure equipment, coffee
| F & B Production
and beverage dis-
pensing items
Halton Capture Jet or
15
Exhaust Ventilator Halton / Gaylord Halton / Gaylord Halton / Gaylord Halton / Gaylord Halton / Gaylord
Food & Beverage Production Facilities - 10
Gaylord ELX
16
Region Africa
Provide pre-plumbed
in all cooking ex-
Fire Suppression
See Module 14 See Module 14 See Module 14 See Module 14 See Module 14 haust hoods, Include
System
as part of kitchen
equipment package
All stainless or brass
Faucets, Sink components, no alu-
Wastes, and minum. Pre-rinse
F & B Production |
T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher
Dishwashing Pre- sprays comply with
rinse Spray Hoses EPAct 2005 6.0 lpm
(1.6 gpm) or lower
Pre-Processing
Pan Rack Cart Cres-Cor / Metro Cres-Cor / Metro Cres-Cor / Metro Cres-Cor / Metro Cres-Cor / Metro
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / 90 kg (200 lbs) mini-
Ice Flaker
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki mum
10 - Food & Beverage Production Facilities
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams

Fish File Refrigerator Traulsen
UK UK UK UK
All stainless steel
Meat Saw Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
January 2013
finish
Hard maple on stain-
Butcher Blocks J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos
less stand
Refrigerator True / Traulsen Reach-in
UK UK UK UK
Air Degerminator Hussman Bioclimatic Bioclimatic Bioclimatic Bioclimatic
Meat Grinder Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
Food Cutter Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
Bench Scale Pelouze
Vacuum Packing
Multivac Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet
Machine
Butcher Bins Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro
Hose Reel T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher T & S / Fisher
Secure storage,
Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro
walk-in

Region Africa
Trench Drain Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
Orange Juicer Citrocasa Citrocasa Zumex Zumex Citrocasa Fully automatic
Storage
Dunnage Rack Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro
5-tiers of stain-
Storage Shelving Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro Metro / Cambro less steel or plated
chrome

Kolpak
Refrigeration System Cold Zone / RDT Copeland / Bock Copeland / Bock Copeland / Bock Copeland / Bock
Garde Manger (Cold Prep)
Plate Stacker Plate Mate Plate Mate Plate Mate Plate Mate Plate Mate
Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe / Halde Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe /
Vegetable Cutter With set of 12 cutters
Halde / Anliker Halde Halde Halde
Scale Pelouze For portioning
January 2013
Bench Scale Pelouze
Automatic with 305
Slicer Hobart Hobart / Univex Hobart / Univex Hobart / Univex Hobart / Univex mm (12 inch) diam-
eter blade
Pacotize Machine Pacojet Pacojet Pacojet Pacojet Pacojet
Blender Vitamix / Blendtec Vitamix / Blendtec Vitamix / Blendtec Vitamix / Blendtec Vitamix / Blendtec
28 liter (30 quart) and
Mixer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
19 liter (20 quart)
Induction Cooker Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs 2.5 kW
Undercounter,
Smoke Oven Alto-Shaam Alto-Shaam Alto-Shaam Alto-Shaam Alto-Shaam portable, hot & cold
capability
| F & B Production
Vacuum Packing
Multivac Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet Multivac / Komet Counter top model
Machine
Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe / Robot Coupe /
17
Food Processor Robot Coupe / Halde
Halde Halde Halde Halde
18
Region Africa
6-10 pan unit, coun-
Combi Oven Rational Rational Rational Rational Rational
ter top model
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / 90 kg (200 lb) capac-
Ice Cuber
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki ity minimum
In-Sinkerator /
Disposer IMC IMC IMC IMC In-sink at prep tables
Salvajor
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Above counter as
Refrigerator True / Traulsen
F & B Production |
UK UK UK UK necessary
Cooler, freezer, sepa-
Kolpak rate finished product
cooler
Trolley Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro Cambro / Metro For vegetables
Vegetable Washer Nilma / Meiko Nilma / Meiko Nilma / Meiko Nilma / Meiko Nilma / Meiko
Nilma / Dito Elec- Nilma / Dito Elec- Nilma / Dito Elec- Nilma / Dito Elec- Nilma / Dito Elec-
Vegetable Dryer
trolux trolux trolux trolux trolux
Juice Extractor Santos / Sanomat Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos
Citrus Juicer Santos Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos Rotor Lips / Santos
January 2013
Vacuum Packing
Machine
Knife Sterilizer Edlund Sofinor / Edlund Sofinor / Edlund Sofinor / Edlund Sofinor / Edlund
Okulen / Euro- Synthetic, anti-mi-
Cutting Board Teknor Apex Okulen / Euroceppi Okulen / Euroceppi Okulen / Euroceppi
ceppi crobial, color coded
Potato Peeler Hobart Hobart / IMC Hobart / IMC Hobart / IMC Hobart / IMC
Bakery (If required)
Bakery Cart Cres-Cor / Metro Blanco Blanco Blanco Blanco
Wooden top with
Bakers Table J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos J. Boos
open base
Ingredient Bin Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid
Rational / Convo- 10 pan capacity
Combi Oven Rational Rational Rational Rational
therm double stack

Region Africa
Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen /
Retarder Proofer Gemini / Doyon
Miwe Miwe Miwe Miwe
Gas fired, full size
wheel in, single rack
capacity, all stain-
Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen / Sweba Dahlen /
Rack Oven Gemini / Doyon less steel, eyebrow
Miwe Miwe Miwe Miwe
exhaust, retarder
proofer, integral
steam, view port

Range Jade / Vulcan MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma 4 open burners
Frymaster / Vul- With self filtering
Fryer MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma
can system
Proofer / Retarder Gemini / Doyon Miwe / Revent Miwe / Revent Miwe / Revent Miwe / Revent
One 5 liter (5 quart)
and one 57 liter (60
quart) with 57 and 28
Hobart / Dito Elec- Hobart / Dito Elec- Hobart / Dito Elec- Hobart / Dito Elec- liter bowls. Provide
Mixer Hobart
trolux trolux trolux trolux with timer, beater,
wire whip, dough
January 2013
arm, dough knife,
and bowl truck
Bread Slicing Ma-
Oliver / Berkel Berkel / Ade Berkel / Ade Berkel / Ade Berkel / Ade
chine
Semi-automatic, table
top, fold-up type,
Dough Sheeter Rondo Rondo / Fritsch Rondo / Fritsch Rondo / Fritsch Rondo / Fritsch reversible, adjust-
able belts, with cutter
capability
Mixer Hobart Rotor Lips / Kolb Rotor Lips / Kolb Rotor Lips / Kolb Rotor Lips / Kolb Planetary type
Mixer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Spiral type
Erika / Fritsch / Roll Erika / Fritsch / Roll Erika / Fritsch / Erika / Fritsch /
Dough Divider Rondo
Fix Fix Roll Fix Roll Fix
Water Chiller Doyon Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska
| F & B Production
Water Meter Doyon Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska Tecnomac / Alaska
Two 2-burner, 2.5
19
Induction Cooker Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE
kW each
20
Region Africa
Blast Chiller/Freezer Irinox Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox
Roller Grill / Roller Grill / Roller Grill / Roller Grill /
Hot Plate Vulcan For pancakes
Neumaker Neumaker Neumaker Neumaker
With pastuerizing
capabilities, floor
Bravo Systems / Carpigiani / Carpigiani / Carpigiani / Carpigiani /
Batch Freezer model, 5 liter (5
Carpigiani Autofrigor Autofrigor Autofrigor Autofrigor
quart) capacity, wash
F & B Production |
down faucet
Carpigiani / Carpigiani / Carpigiani / Carpigiani /
Pasteurizer Carpigiani / Taylor
Autofrigor Autofrigor Autofrigor Autofrigor
Counter top; one 6 kg
Scale Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze
x 0.002 and 20 kg
Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller
Waffle Iron Wells / Carbon
Grill Grill Grill Grill
Whipped Cream
Carpigiani Kolb / Schalagra Kolb / Schalagra Kolb / Schalagra Kolb / Schalagra
Machine
Refrigerator / Freezer True / Traulsen Reach-in
UK UK UK UK
January 2013
Wall Cabinet Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom With sliding doors
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams With room tempera-
Refrigerated Base True / Traulsen
UK UK UK UK ture marble top
Single door, self-
contained with temp
Hardening Cabinet Global Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox Koma / Irinox
range -40C to 21C
(-40F to 70F)
Praline Cabinet Sofinor Sofinor Sofinor Sofinor Sofinor
Chocovision / Chocovision / Chocovision /
Chocolate Warmer Hilliard Chocovision / Jufeba
Jufeba Jufeba Jufeba
Chocolate Tempering Chocovision / Chocovision / Chocovision /
Hilliard Chocovision / Jufeba
Machine Jufeba Jufeba Jufeba

Region Africa
Beverage Storage
Non-corrosive
Storage Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro
chrome, wire type
Cage type with
locks, stainless steel,
Security Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro flat shelf to accom-

modate wine bottles
vertically
Dunnage Rack Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro
Security shelving to
Wine Bottle Storage Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro accommodate wine
bottles horizontally
Keg Storage Racks Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro
Beer Dispensing Micromatic /
By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor
January 2013
System Perlick
Walk-in Refrigera- Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Wil-
Kolpak
tion Williams UK Williams UK Williams UK liams UK
Pot Washing
Or pupler, cone
In-Sinkerator/Sal- mounted in soiled
Disposer IMC IMC IMC IMC
vajor side drainboard of 3
compartment sink
Mechanical Sink
Wells
Agitator
300 mm (12 inch)
Trench Drain Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom wide by length of 3
compartment sink
| F & B Production
Automatic single
tank with clean and
Pot Wash Machine Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
soiled drainboards,
21
high chamber
22
Region Africa
Warewashing
Soiled: “L” shaped,
sink with rack guide,
glass rack shelf, con-
Soiled and Clean
Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom nect to dish machine.
Dish Tables
Clean: Minimum 1.5
m (5 feet), connect to
dish machine
F & B Production |
Or pulper, 5 horse-
In-Sinkerator / power, mounted in
Salvajor sink on soiled dish
table
Vent Ducts Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom Stainless steel
Base size on 70% of
Hobart / Meiko / Hobart / Winter- Hobart / Winter- Hobart / Meiko / rated capacity, con-
Dish Machine Hobart

Winterhalter halter halter Winterhalter veyor or flight type,
with booster heater
Silver Burnishing Room
January 2013
Open top, vibrating
type, 250-300 piece
Burnishing Machine Blakeslee IMC IMC IMC IMC capcity, 204 kg (450
lbs) of steel burnish-
ing balls
Work Table Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom With sink
Ice Production
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Sized for 0.5 kg (1 lb)
Ice Cuber
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki per dining seat
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Approximately 270
Ice Flaker
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki kg (600 lb)
Sized for 150% of
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc /
Ice Bin daily production ca-
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki
pacity of ice machine

Region Africa
Refrigerated Trash Holding
Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Wil-
Walk-in Refrigera- Sized to maintain
Kolpak Williams UK / Williams UK / Williams UK / liams UK /
tion 13C (55F)
Koldtech Koldtech Koldtech Koldtech

Hose Reel T&S T&S T&S T&S T&S
In Room Dining Service
2 door reach-in, 2
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams door glass door roll-
UK UK UK UK in, separate flower
refrigerator
Ice Cuber 180 kgs (400 lbs)
Coffee Brewer Fetco / WMF WMF WMF WMF WMF
January 2013
Franke / WMF /
Espresso Machine WMF / Franke Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Fully Automatic
Schaerer
Crathco / Co- Crathco / Co-
Juice Dispenser Crathco / Cofrimell Crathco / Cofrimell Crathco / Cofrimell
frimell frimell
Microwave Oven Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic
May also use
Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro architect designed
millwork storage
Conveyor Toaster Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory
Trolley HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global For in-room dining
Hot Box HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global HIS Global For in-room dining
Closing Room
Wine Cooler Eurodib Iglu Iglu Iglu Iglu
| F & B Production
Espresso Machine Scanomat / WMF Scanomat / WMF WMF WMF Scanomat / WMF
Refrigerator True / Traulsen With glass doors
23
UK UK UK UK
24
Region Africa
Pool Kitchen
Two vat with self
Fryer Frymaster MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach
filtering system
Roller Grill / Franke / Roller Franke / Roller Top down electric
Salamander Franke Franke / Roller Grill
Franke Grill Grill only
Charbroiler, griddle,
MKN / Ambach / MKN / Therma /
Range Jade / Vulcan MKN / Therma MKN / Therma burner with oven
Therma Ambach
F & B Production |
base
Combi Oven Rational Rational Rational Rational Rational Counter top
Turbochef / Mer- Turbochef / Mer- Turbochef / Mer- Turbochef / Mer- Turbochef / Mer- Programmable, coun-
High Speed Oven
rychef rychef rychef rychef rychef ter top unit
Ice Cream Freezer Taylor Carpigiani Carpigiani Carpigiani Carpigiani
Dipper Well Wells Wells Wells Wells Wells
Conveyor Toaster Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory
January 2013
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Reach-in freezer,
UK UK UK UK roll-in double door
Walk-in Refrigera- Desmond / Williams Desmond / Wil- Desmond / Wil- Desmond / Wil- Cooler, freezer, bev-
Kolpak
tion UK liams UK liams UK liams UK erage cooler
Hobart / Meiko / Hobart / Winter- Hobart / Winter- Hobart / Meiko /
Dish Machine Hobart Single rack
Winterhslter halter halter Winterhalter
Bars
Glass doors, remote
Back Bar Refrigera- Perlick / refrigerated in public
IMC IMC IMC IMC
tor Glastender areas, minimum 2
doors per bartender
32 x 32 x 32 mm (1-
Hoshizaki / Hoshizaki / Kold Hoshizaki / Hoshizaki / Hoshizaki /
Ice Cuber 1/4 x 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 in)
Kold Draft Draft Kold Draft Kold Draft Kold Draft
cube size
Coffee Brewer Franke / Schaerer Franke / Schaerer Franke / Schaerer Franke / Schaerer Franke / Schaerer Fully automatic

Region Africa
Chimbali / La Elektra / La Mar- Elektra / La Mar- Elektra / La Mar- Elektra / La Mar-
Espresso Machine Semiautomatic
Marzocco / Faema zocco / Faema zocco zocco zocco
1.3 liter (44 oz)
Bar Blender Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix
capacity
460 mm (18 inch)
Perlick / IMC / Perlick / IMC / Perlick / IMC / Perlick / IMC / Perlick / wide, with 250 mm
Blender Station
Glastender Eagle Eagle Eagle Eagle (10 inch) blender
shelf
Perlick / Minimum 3 flavor,
Beer Tap Celli / Servend Celli / Servend Celli / Servend Celli / Servend

Glastender drainer below
With speed rail, juice
Perlick /
Cocktail Station Perlick / Eagle Perlick / Eagle Perlick / Eagle Perlick / Eagle wells, and condiment
Glastender
tray
Perlick / Winterhalter / Winterhalter / Winterhalter / Winterhalter / Extra high compart-
Glass Washer
Glastender Meiko Meiko Meiko Meiko ment
Perlick /
Mug Froster IMC IMC IMC IMC Optional
Glastender
Wine Bottle Display Wine Trend / RPI Wine Trend / Iglu Wine Trend / Iglu Wine Trend / Iglu Wine Trend / Iglu
January 2013
Enomatic / Wine-
Wine Dispenser Enomatic Enomatic Enomatic Enomatic
keeper
With integral soap
Perlick / and towel dispenser
Hand Sink IMC IMC IMC IMC
Glastender and splash guards on
both sides
4 Compartment
Perlick /
3 Compartment Sink IMC IMC IMC IMC preferred, with
Glastender
drainboards
Perlick /
Drainboard IMC IMC IMC IMC
Glastender
With holder located
Soda Gun By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor on left side of cock-
tail station
| F & B Production
With cash drawer
POS Terminal / located on front bar
By Owner By Owner By Owner By Owner By Owner
Printer integral with bar
25
design
26
Region Africa
Trash Receptacle Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid At each station
Bar Top Closer Counter Balance Counter Balance Counter Balance Counter Balance Counter Balance
Perlick /
Refrigerator IMC IMC IMC IMC
Glastender
Stainless steel at
Bar Top (BOH) Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom back-of-house service
bars
F & B Production |
For service bar area;
roll-down type, full
Security Gate By Architect By Architect By Architect By Architect By Architect
length of bar, by
architect
Restaurant
Mixer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart 19 liters (20 quarts)
Rollergrill / Top down electric

Salamander Franke / Rollergrill Franke / Rollergrill Franke / Rollergrill Franke / Rollergrill
Franke only
Open burner with
convection base, hot
MKN / Ambach / MKN / Ambach /
January 2013
Range Jade / Vulcan MKN / Therma MKN / Therma top with convec-
Therma Therma
tion base, griddle,
charbroiler
Broiler Montague Montague Montague Montague Montague For steak restaurants
MKN / Ambach / MKN / Ambach / With self filtering
Fryer Frymaster MKN / Therma MKN / Therma
Therma Therma system
Food Warmer Hatco / AP Wyott Hatco / AP Wyott Hatco / AP Wyott Hatco / AP Wyott Hatco / AP Wyott
Wok Range Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po
Combi Oven Rational Rational Rational Rational Rational Counter top
Toaster Hatco Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit
Pasta Cooker Frymaster MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach If required
Induction Cooker Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE If required, 2.5 kW
Mixer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Counter top
Sandwich Unit Re-
True / Randell Delfield / Randell Delfield / Randell Delfield / Randell Delfield / Randell
frigeration

Region Africa
Ice Cream Dipping Silver King / Silver King / Silver King / Silver King /
Kelvinator
Cabinet Delfield Delfield Delfield Delfield
MKN / Ambach /
Steam Kettle Cleveland MKN / Ambach MKN / Therma MKN / Therma
Therma
Range Jade / Vulcan Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Stock Pot
Rice Cooker Panasonic Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai
High Speed Oven

Cleveland / MKN / Cleveland / MKN / Cleveland / MKN / Cleveland / MKN /
Tilting Skillet Cleveland 150 liters (40 gallons)
Therma Therma Therma Therma
Winterhalter / Winterhalter / Winterhalter / Winterhalter /
Dish Machine Hobart
Meiko Meiko Meiko Meiko
Panasonic /
Microwave Oven Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana
Amana
Pizza Oven (hearth) Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone
Pizza Oven, counter
Bakers Pride Miwe Miwe Miwe Miwe If required
top
January 2013
Walk-in Refrigera-
Kolpak Kolpak / Koldtech Kolpak / Koldtech Kolpak / Koldtech Kolpak / Koldtech Cooler and freezer
tion
Refrigeration System Cold Zone / RDT Copeland / Bitzer Copeland / Bitzer Copeland / Bitzer Copeland / Bitzer
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Reach-in,
UK UK UK UK undercounter, upright
Food Pickup Lines
Built-in, for 300 mm
Plate Warmer Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco
(12 inch) plates
Recessed, with space
bars for hotel pans;
Cold Food Pan True / Randell 50 cm x 30 cm (20
UK UK UK UK
x 12 inch) well for
expeditor
| F & B Production
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Drawers under work
UK UK UK UK tops or equipment
27

28
Region Africa
Hatco / Toastmas-
Toaster Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco 6 slot
ter
Dipper Well Wells Wells Wells Wells Wells
Ice Cream Dipping
Kelvinator Kelvinator Kelvinator Kelvinator Kelvinator
Cabinet
5 liter (5 quart),
Mixer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
counter-type
F & B Production |
Trash Receptacle Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid Rubbermaid On each station
Heat Lamp Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco With remote switch
Buffet
UK UK UK UK
Coffee Brewer Fetco WMF WMF WMF WMF
Built-in, flush
Induction Warmer Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs
mounted
Conveyor Toaster Hatco / Savory Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit Hatco / Dualit
January 2013
Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller Neumarker / Roller Heavy duty, dual
Grill Grill Grill Grill type
Heat Lamp Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco
Induction Cooker Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs Cooktek / Inducs 2.5 kW
Heated Counter Top Hatco Berkeley / Hatco Berkeley / Hatco Berkeley / Hatco Berkeley / Hatco
Refrigerated Display Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system /
RPI / Oscartielle
Case Tanaka Tanaka Tanaka Tanaka
Eurolnox / Josef Eurolnox / Josef Eurolnox / Josef Eurolnox / Josef
Heated Display Case RPI / Oscartielle
Holler Holler Holler Holler
Randell / Josef Randell / Josef Randell / Josef Randell / Josef
Chilled Top Atlas / Randell
Holler Holler Holler Holler
Cold Food Pan RPI RPI RPI RPI RPI Insulated ice cooled
Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system / Iglu cold system /
Wine Display Chiller Wine Trend / RPI
Tanaka Tanaka Tanaka Tanaka
Hanson Brass / Hanson Brass / Hanson Brass / Hanson Brass /
Carving Station Hanson Brass
Scholl Scholl Scholl Scholl

Region Africa
Noodle Boiler Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po Yu Po
Induction Cooking
Sambonet / WMF Sambonet / WMF Sambonet / WMF Sambonet / WMF Sambonet / WMF
Pan
Griddle Plate Evo Evo Evo Evo Evo Display
Server’s Station
3.6 m (12 feet) in
Counter
length with sink
Coffee brewer, cap-

pacino machine, iced
Beverage Equipment Fetco Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF tea brewer, water
dispenser, soda dis-
penser
Ice Storage Cambro Cambro Cambro Cambro Cambro
Undercounter reach-
Refrigerator True / Traulsen in, 2 door upright
UK UK UK UK
reach-in
Conveyor Toaster Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory Hatco / Savory One per 5 servers
January 2013
Work Table Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom With sink
POS Terminal /
By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor
Printer
Glass Rack Dolly CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro
For cutlery, clean
Millwork Storage Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
linen, clean glasses
Specialty Restaurant Kitchen
Chinese Kitchen
Deck Steamer Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po
Wok Range Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po
Ring Steamer Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po
| F & B Production
Moon Cake Oven Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po
Duck Roaster Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po
29
Pig Roaster Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po Yue Po

30
Region Africa
Noodle Maker Heng lian Heng lian Heng lian Heng lian Heng lian
Noodle Boiler Yue Po Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit
Towel Warmer Taiji Taiji Taiji Taiji Taiji
Fish Tanks Austmarine Austmarine Austmarine Austmarine Austmarine
Indian Kitchen
Continental In- Continental In-
Continental Indian / Continental Indian / Continental Indian /
F & B Production |
Handy Range dian / Indian Metal dian / Indian Metal
Indian Metal Works Indian Metal Works Indian Metal Works
Works Works
Tawa Griddle dian / Indian Metal dian / Indian Metal
Works Works
Romali Griddle dian / Indian Metal dian / Indian Metal
Works Works
Jumbo / Raj Tan- Jumbo / Raj Tan- Jumbo / Raj Tan- Jumbo / Raj Tan-
Tandor Oven Jumbo / Raj Tandoor
door door door door
January 2013
Idli Steamer dian / Indian Metal dian / Indian Metal
Works Works
Masala Grinder Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln
Pulveriser Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln
Wet Grinder Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln Trident / Lincoln
Japanese Kitchen
Fryer Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai For tempura
Temppayaki Griddle Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai
Rice Cooker Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai Fujimak / Rinnai
Display Case Tanaka / Iglu Tanaka / Iglu Tanaka / Iglu Tanaka / Iglu Tanaka / Iglu Custom for sushi
Yakitori Grill Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Gas
Japanese Range Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Gas
Robatayaki Grill Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Gas
Fish Grill Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Beech / Fujimak Gas

Region Africa
Towel Warmer Taiji Taiji Taiji Taiji Taiji
Italian Kitchen
Pasta Cooker Frymaster MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach
Hearth Oven Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Beech / Woodstone Wood fired
Bain Marie Custom MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach

MKN / Therma / MKN / Ambach / MKN / Ambach /
Range Jade / Vulcan MKN / Therma Open burner
Ambach Therma Therma
2 vat with self filter-
Fryer Frymaster MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma MKN / Therma
ing system
Hatco / APW Hatco / APW Hatco / APW
Food Warmer Hatco / APW Wyott Hatco / APW Wyott
Wyott Wyott Wyott
Imperia / La Mon- Imperia / La Mon- Imperia / La Mon- Imperia / La Mon- Imperia / La Mon-
Pasta Maker
ferrina ferrina ferrina ferrina ferrina
January 2013
Dough Sheeter Doughpro Doughpro / Friul Doughpro / Friul Doughpro / Friul Doughpro / Friul
Deli / Gourmet Counters
High Speed Oven
Panasonic /
Microwave Oven Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana Panasonic / Amana
Amana
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams
Refrigerator Upright glass door
UK UK UK UK UK
Refrigerator RPI / True True True True True Open front type
Miwe / Watchel / Miwe / Watchel / Miwe / Watchel / Miwe / Watchel / Miwe / Watchel /
Baking Oven Display
Winkel Winkel Winkel Winkel Winkel
Blender Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix Blendtec / Vitamix
Slicer Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
| F & B Production
Chocolate Tempering Chocovision / Chocovision / Chocovision /
Hilliard Chocovision / Jufeba
Machine Jufeba Jufeba Jufeba
31
Panini Grill Electrolux Electrolux Electrolux Electrolux Electrolux
32
Region Africa
Specialty Equipment
Churrasco Grill J&R / Beech Beech Beech Beech Beech
Outdoor Portable
Magic Kitchen Bakers Pride Bakers Pride Bakers Pride Bakers Pride Outdoor type
Grill / Broiler
Function Space Kitchen
Roll-in, 1 for every
250 seats
F & B Production |
For combi oven, with
Plate Trolley Rational Rational Rational Rational Rational heat blanket, for
every 84 seats
4 burner, 2 required;
MKN / Ambach /
Range Jade / Vulcan MKN / Ambach MKN / Therma MKN / Ambach griddle; charbroiler;
Therma
salamander broiler
AltoShaam / Rieber / AltoShaam AltoShaam / AltoShaam / Rieber / AltoShaam

Heated Banquet Cart
Carter Hoffman / Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman / Carter Hoffman
AltoShaam / AltoShaam / AltoShaam / AltoShaam / AltoShaam /
Refrigerated Cabinet Mobile
Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman
January 2013
150 or 225 liters (40
or 60 gallons); with
manual tilt mecha-
Cleveland / MKN / MKN / Therma / MKN / Therma /
Steam Kettle Cleveland MKN / Therma nism, hose, tangent
Therma Cleveland Cleveland
draw off, and lid;
Direct steam or gas
fired
Counter top, 10 to 40
liters (2.5 to 10 gal-
Cleveland / MKN / MKN / Therma / MKN / Therma / lons), selfcontained,
Steam Kettle Cleveland MKN / Therma
Therma Cleveland Cleveland electric or steam
heated, table sized to
capture full pour path
150 liters (40 gal-
Cleveland / MKN / MKN / Therma / MKN / Therma /
Tilting Skillet Cleveland MKN / Therma lons); manual tilt
Therma Cleveland Cleveland
mechanism

Region Africa
Sized for full pour
Trench Drain Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom path of steam kettle,
flush mounted
Frymaster / MKN / Frymaster / MKN / Frymaster / MKN / Frymaster / MKN / 2 vat with self filter-
Fryer Frymaster
Ambach Therma Ambach Ambach ing system
With reinforced steel
Bain Marie Table Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
cover for bain marie
Table top, 6 kg x

Scale Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze Pelouze
.0002 digital
Mobile Plate Con-
Traycon Traycon Traycon Traycon Traycon With cover
veyor
Blast Chiller Irinox Irinox / Williams Irinox Irinox / Williams Irinox / Williams
Water Boiler Fetco Zip / Birko Zip / Birko Zip / Birko Zip / Birko
Storage Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro Stainless steel
Pot Rack Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom Ceiling mounted
Vacuum Packing
January 2013
Machine
Low Stock Pot
Jade / Vulcan Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit Yue Po / Profit Stock pot
Range
Coffee Brewer Fetco WMF WMF WMF WMF
Roll-in double door;
Refrigerator True / Traulsen Reach-in single sec-
UK UK UK UK
tion
In-Sinkerator / Minimum 3 horse-
Salvajor power
Dish Machine Hobart Flight type
Aerowerks / Tray- Aerowerks / Nor- Aerowerks / Nor- Aerowerks / Nor-
Conveyor System Aerowerks / Nordien
con dien dien dien
| F & B Production
Glass Washer Hobart
Adamation / More- Adamation / Mo- Adamation / Mo- Adamation / Mo-
33
Silver Burnisher Adamation
lion relion relion relion

34
Region Africa
Glass Rack Dolly Cres Cor / Metro Blanco Blanco Blanco Blanco
Dish Dolly CresCor / Metro Blanco Blanco Blanco Blanco
Function Space Beverage Area
UK UK UK UK
Walk-in Refrigera- Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Wil- Approximately 2.4 x
Kolpak
tion Williams UK Williams UK Williams UK liams UK 3 m (8 x 10 feet)
F & B Production |
Coffee Brewer Fetco Bravillor / WMF Bravillor / WMF Bravillor / WMF Bravillor / WMF
Ice Cuber With bin
Water Fill Station T&S T&S T&S T&S T&S
Beverage Counter Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom

Function Space Pantries
Walk-in Refrigera- Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Desmond / Wil-
Kolpak Cooler and freezer
tion Williams UK Williams UK Williams UK liams UK
January 2013
Rieber / Alto-
Carter Hoffman / Rieber / Alto-Shaam Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam /
Heated Banquet Cart Shaam / Carter
Alto-Shaam / Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman
Hoffman
Ice Cuber With bin
Water Fill Station T&S T&S T&S T&S T&S
Wall mounted system
Coffee Machine Fetco Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF
with carts
Sized for 300 mm (12
Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam /
Heated Banquet Cart inch) plates, mobile,
electric heat
Heat Lamp Hatco Scholl / Hatco Scholl / Hatco Scholl / Hatco Scholl / Hatco
Refrigerated Cabinet Mobile
Queen Mary CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro CresCor / Metro

Region Africa
Storage Shelving Metro Metro Metro Metro Metro Some lockable
Required if not on
Dish Machine Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart same level as main
kitchen
Heated Cabinet Roll-in, single door

Roll-in, single-
Refrigerator True / Traulsen door; reach-in
UK UK UK UK
undercounter
Club Lounge Pantry
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Single door reach-in;
UK UK UK UK single door roll-in
Undercounter com-
Dish Machine Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart Hobart
mercial type
Water Boiler Fetco Zip / Birko Zip / Birko Zip / Birko Zip / Birko
January 2013
Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Manitowoc / Undercounter, low
Ice Cuber
Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki Hoshizaki volume
4 to 6 liters (1 to
1.5 gallons) airpot
Coffee Brewer Fetco Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF
brewer with cord and
plug
Franke / WMF /
Espresso Machine Franke / Scherer Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Fully automatic
Scherer
Induction Cooker Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE 2.5 kW
Programmable, coun-
High Speed Oven Amana Amana Amana Amana Amana
ter top unit
Microwave Oven Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic
Heated Cabinet 2 units
| F & B Production
In-Sinkerator / 1 horsepower mini-
Salvajor mum
35
Wall Shelf Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom Or cabinets

36
Region Africa
3 minimum; hidden
Induction Warmer Spring / Cooktek Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE Cooktek / IE
or undermount
Heat Lamp Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco Hatco Retractable; 3 units
2 stacked glass front
Refrigerator Summit / True IMC IMC IMC IMC
beverage; 2 stacked
Cold Plate RPI / Atlas RPI / Atlas RPI / Atlas RPI / Atlas RPI / Atlas Air circulating
Wine Dispenser Enomatic Enomatic Enomatic Enomatic Enomatic
F & B Production |
Trash Receptacle Franke / Scherer Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF
Ice / Vending
Water cooled,
Ice Cuber selfcontained, push
button dispenser
For bottled and
Vending Machine By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor

canned soft drinks
Housekeeping Dishwashing
Undercounter, high
January 2013
temperature
With sink and pre-
Dish Table & Rack
Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom rinse spray. Glass
Shelf
racks overhead
Employee Dining
Influenced by re-
Cooking Equipment Vulcan Ambach / Therma Ambach / Therma Ambach / Therma Ambach / Therma gional preferences,
see examples below
Turbochef / Turbochef / Turbochef / Turbochef / Turbochef / Programmable, coun-
High Speed Oven
Merrychef Merrychef Merrychef Merrychef Merrychef ter top unit
Menumaster / Menumaster / Menumaster / Menumaster /
Microwave Oven Panasonic
Amana / Sharp Amana / Sharp Amana / Sharp Amana / Sharp
With refrigerated
Equipment Stand Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
drawers
Coffee Machine Fetco WMF WMF WMF WMF
Cold Food Pan Atlas / Randell Randel / Delfield Randel / Delfield Randel / Delfield Randel / Delfield Built-in

Region Africa
FEW / Alto- Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam / Alto-Shaam /
Heated Food Cart
Shaam Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman Carter Hoffman
Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Foster / Williams Double door upright;
UK UK UK UK 2 roll-in
Serving Counter Custom / Atlas Custom Custom Custom Custom With tray slides

Beverage Counter Custom / Atlas Custom Custom Custom Custom
Island type with re-
Salad Bar Custom / Atlas Custom Custom Custom Custom
frigerated cold pan
For cold beverages
Vending Machine By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor By Vendor
and snack items
Recycling Station Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
In-Sinkerator / Minimum 2 horse-
Salvajor power
January 2013
Single tank with
booster heater
Staff Kitchen - Asian
Rice Cooker ---- ---- Rinnai / Fujimak Rinnai / Fujimak Rinnai / Fujimak
Wok Range ---- ---- Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate
Range ---- ---- MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach MKN / Ambach Open burner
Boiling Kettle ---- ---- Groen / Cleveland Groen / Cleveland Groen / Cleveland May follow range
Range ---- ---- Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Stock pot
Steamer ---- ---- Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Chinese only
Afinox / Meal Afinox / Meal Afinox / Meal
Hot Section ---- ----
System System System
Steamer ---- ---- Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Profit / Flamemate Display
| F & B Production
Coffee Brewer ---- ---- Franke / WMF Franke / WMF Franke / WMF
Crathco / Co-
Juice Dispenser ---- ---- Crathco / Cofrimell Crathco / Cofrimell
37
frimell
38
Region Africa
Staff Kitchen -Indian
Jumbo Internation- Jumbo Internation-
Tandor Oven ---- ---- ----
al / Raj Tandor al / Raj Tandor
Continental India
Continental India /
Dosa Grill ---- ---- ---- / Indian Metal
Indian Metal Works
Works
Continental India
Continental India /
F & B Production |
Range ---- ---- ---- / Indian Metal Open burner
Indian Metal Works
Works
Continental India
Continental India /
Idli Steamer ---- ---- ---- / Indian Metal
Indian Metal Works
Works
Continental India
Continental India /
Handy Range ---- ---- ---- / Indian Metal
Indian Metal Works
Works
Milk Warmer ---- ---- ---- Bravillor / Animo Bravillor / Animo
Show Kitchen
January 2013
Moltini / Mon- Moltini / Bonnet / Moltini / Bonnet / European block
Range Moltini / Bonnet Moltini / Bonnet
tague Bohner Bohner systems

10.11 Walk-in Refrigerated / Frozen Storage Units

A. Program: Provide insulated and refrigerated compart-
mentalized storage (complex of units) to house food
products. Provide pass-through units consisting of two
compartments for each food category as follows:
1. Separate general cooler, general freezer, freezer, beer /
wine cooler and dairy cooler
2. Compartment for holding raw product adjacent to
Rough Prep rooms
3. Compartment for holding prepared or finished product
adjacent to Main Kitchen
B. Location: Locate between Pre-Processing Area (Rough
Prep rooms and Cold Prep area) of Main Kitchen.
C. Freezer Facilities: Provide and size according to the following:
• Market study
• Geographic location
• Delivery schedules
• Availability of products
D. Entrance Access: Provide common entrance vestibule with
other storage facilities such as dry, liquor, non food as indi-
cated below in this Section. Requires dedicated storeroom
attendant.
1. Secure space with door and electronic operated lock
with audit record and door contact alarm <16>.
2. Provide double door entrance to accommodate pallet
width.
3. Provide adequate space to store pallets.
4. Desk and chair
5. Computer with PMS / PBS <13A>
E. Walk-in Unit (Coldroom) Fabrication & Construction: Comply
with the Energy Independence Act of 2007.
1. Floor: Depress supporting slab to receive insulation,
minimum R-22, and floor surface to match balance of
Main Kitchen. Provide walk-in floor surface flush with
adjoining kitchen; no ramps or steps. See Figure 2.
2. Walls & Overhead: Foamed in place urethane insu-
lated, minimum R-32, panels
a. Non painted, non corrosive, 20 gauge stainless
steel or aluminum interior and minimum 20 gauge
stainless steel, exterior walls where exposed.
b. Cover exterior walls exposed to kitchen and
work areas with 1.22 m (4 ft) high diamond plate.
Unexposed exterior walls may be aluminum or
galvanized.
c. Enclose space above top of units to structure

above with same panel and finish material as
walk-in unit. Provide trim strips as necessary.
3. Door: Hinged, 0.9 m (3 ft) wide entrance door with
three self closing hinges, observation window with
heater, 1.22 m (48 inch) high diamond kick plate on
both sides and a door locking mechanism for padlock.
Provide heaters and pressure relief ports for freezer
compartments.
4. Thermometer: Computer based with remote audit trail,
viewable, mount at exterior unit entry door.
F. Storage Equipment: Provide the following:
1. Shelving: Non corrosive material such as stainless steel
wire or Metro-Max meeting NSF material and fabrica-
tion requirements.
2. Shelf Units: Four tiers of shelving with 1.6 m (5’-3”)
posts, four leg / post casters and brakes on the two front
casters.
3. First Shelf: Install 25 cm (10 inch) above floor with
equally spaced shelves above.
Figure 2 - Floor Detail
G. Refrigeration System: Use indoor water cooled remote units

(see mechanical condenser / compressor requirements in this
Module).
H. Walk-in Unit Operating Temperatures: Provide for the following
storage functions (may be dependent on local practice for food
separation):
Food Type Operating
Temperature
Produce (Fruits & Vegetables) +5º C (+41º F)
Meat (with cage security shelving) +2º C (+35º F)
Dairy +2º C (+35º F)
Holding / finishing +2º C (+35º F)
Freezer -23º C -10º F)
Beverage (with secure cage shelving) +2º C (+35º F)
Chef box, located in kitchen space +2º C (+35º F)
I. Walk-in Refrigeration Systems:
1. Controls / Alarms: Provide each walk-in compartment with
computer based temperature and A/V alarm system that
provides an audit trail of temperatures. Interconnect with
the Building Automation System (BAS). <15A> Consider
remote monitoring options.
2. Emergency (Backup Operational) Power: Connect walk-in
refrigerators to emergency power source <15C>.
3. Condenser / Compressor Units: Provide water cooled units
for refrigeration compressors of 1 hp or larger:
a. Locate units in a secure room near walk-in refrigeration
compartments.
b. Do not locate above walk-in refrigeration
compartments.
c. Verify that refrigerant line runs do not exceed manu-
facturer’s requirements.
4. Condenser / Compressor Alternate: If water cooled units
are not possible, review with MI. Provide air cooled units
(air cooled units use more energy and require more main-
tenance) as follows: <15A>
a. Locate units in weather protected area within a se-
cure room.
b. Do not locate units above walk-in refrigeration
compartments.
c. Verify that refrigerant line runs do not exceed manu-
facturer’s requirements.
5. Lighting: Provide fluorescent lighting with minimum of
40 foot-candles. Provide three way light switches on timers
for units with multiple entrances.
10.12 Type 1 - Grease Hoods

A. Fire Code Compliance: Application is subject to Marriott
Corporate Fire Protection review and provisions of govern-
ing code (U.S. and Canada) requirements. For specific de-
tails, see the following:
• NFPA 96, NFPA 13 or NFPA 17A
• Module <14> in this Design Standard
• Subject to provisions of governing codes
B. Other Codes & Standards: Provide UL and NSF listed hoods
at production and exhibition cooking in compliance with
NFPA 96.
C. Type 1 - Grease Hood: Provide the following:
1. Type: High velocity, low air volume, energy efficient
hood
2. Filters: High efficiency, UL listed, baffle filters
3. Make-Up Air: Low velocity make-up air discharge; no
internal make-up air or “compensating hoods”
4. Exhaust Air Quantity: 100%
5. Overhang: Extend hood overhang a minimum of 15 cm
(6 inch) beyond equipment.
6. Emission Control: Provide UV-C system for grease re-
duction and to improve hood and duct cleanability. To
avoid burns, provide safety interlock to turn off UV-C
when filters are removed.
D. Exhibition Cooking Hood: In exhibition cooking scenarios,
design for and provide the following:
1. Noise: Eliminate noise that would disrupt customers in
the buffet and dining area. Make-up air through ventila-
tor is not permitted because of fan and air movement
noise.
2. Air Curtain: <15A> Accommodate an air conditioned
air curtain to control air, heat and odor between cook-
ing area (edge of cooking hood) and restaurant area and
customers.
3. Design Coordination: Coordinate hood design with inte-
rior design and restaurant concept.
E. Hood Cleaning:
1. High Grease Applications: Provide self cleaning hoods
for high grease producing applications.
a. Provide recessed mounted control panel to power
hood, wash cycle, UV controls and fan.
b. Locate fire protection system control and moni-
toring components in control panel cabinet when
possible, and make accessible for servicing and
maintenance.
2. Low Grease Applications: At a minimum, use dry

cartridge, high velocity extracting hood for low grease
producing applications. Mount control for lights and
fan on wall.
F. Fire Suppression System: See Module <14>. Provide hood and
duct fire suppression at locations involving food production
cooking that produce grease laden vapors and when wood
or charcoal equipment is provided.
G. Acceptable Hood Manufacturers: Halton “Capture Jet” or
Gaylord ELX type
10.13 Commercial F&B Fixture Materials & Fabrication

A. Materials - General: Comply with NSF Standard for select-
ing commercial food and beverage (F&B) preparation and
cooking area materials and finishes outlined in this Module.
Facilitate ongoing and primary sanitation and cleaning con-
cerns in and around equipment. Provide features like cast-
ers on cooking equipment, tables, and other items where
reasonable for the operational application and where utility
connections can be reasonably accommodated with “flex-
ible quick disconnect” connections.
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 Series 300, extra low car-
bon, non magnetic, austenitic, 18% chromium, 8% nickel,
corrosion resistant
a. Thickness: Tops, tables, counters and sinks, 2.0 mm
(U.S. 14 gauge); shelves, undershelves, tubing, legs
and bracing 1.5 mm (U.S. 16 gauge); exhaust venti-
lators, 1.3 mm (U.S. 18 gauge).
b. Finish: Exposed, #4 commercial finish; unexposed,
#2B
c. Wall Shelves: Provide stainless steel, double wall
shelves above worktables wherever possible.
2. Joint Sealant: Seal joints with silicone; Dow Corning
780; General Electric SE 1200 or approved equal. At heat
producing equipment, seal joints with Hi-Temp silicone
sealant.
B. Fabrication: Comply with NSF Standards No. 2 for fabrication.
1. General: Fabricate kitchen equipment of a single sheet of
metal, if possible.
a. Exposed Surfaces: Free of bolt, screw and rivet
heads
b. Joints & Penetrations: Fabricate to avoid sharp
edges and joints that could damage equipment or
injure users.
2. Welding: Continuous welds, (field welding is acceptable)

Heliarc method
3. Trim: Not an acceptable substitute for accuracy and
neatness
4. Tops, Tables & Counters: Comply with above for metal
thickness and the following:
a. Provide stainless steel fabrication unless
construction is concealed and not in contact with
food, then galvanized steel is acceptable.
b. Provide continuous top fabrication as one piece in-
tegrally welded without butt joints.
c. Framework: Provide continuous galvanized or stain-
less steel angle or channel framework, welded to
stiffen fabrication. In high salt and high moisture en-
vironments, provide all stainless steel construction.
d. Do not use wood (except as required by bakery).
e. Provide drawers in worktables.
C. Plumbing: Avoid back siphoning of water into water system
with the use of check valves, air gaps and vacuum breaks.
D. Electrical: See Module <15C> Provide waterproof wiring, in-
ternally wired within equipment or conduit with appropriate
controls and safety features.
1. Exposed Conduit: Covered
2. Concealed Conduit (in walls & ceiling): Zinc coated
(galvanized)
Kitchen
10.14 Receiving
A. Program: See Module <9>. Provide an area for unloading
products from delivery trucks.
1. Deliveries are received, checked in and weighed by se-
curity and kitchen staff.
2. Large shipments of product are broken down for food
production storage and returns are processed.
3. In warm climates, provide an air conditioned area for
goods waiting to be moved to storage.
B. Bays: 2 bays minimum for truck unloading plus 1 bay for
compactor, container and trash loading in an easily acces-
sible location.
C. Trash Recycling: Provide facilities to separate and store re-
cyclable material if required by governing regulations.
1. Provide for pest control in recycling and waste areas.
2. If provided within the building, locate in a sealed, re-
frigerated room.
3. Provide area for compostable recycling based on gov-

erning jurisdiction.
D. Trash Holding: Provide a refrigerated room with refrigerated
compactor; see more requirements below in this Module.
E. Purchasing Office: See “Purchasing and Receiving Offices”
in Module <9> - Engineering & Maintenance. Provide an
office at Receiving (with view of Receiving Area) to man-
age food purchasing and holding for kitchen.
F. Refrigerated Holding: Provide at larger hotels where receiv-
ing is not close to Commissary Storage due to distance or
floor level difference.
G. Cart & Can Wash: Provide a dedicated area or alcove for
cleaning foodservice carts and equipment.
1. Location: At Receiving area or Pot Washing area
2. Size / Area: 2.4 x 2.4 m (8 x 8 ft), typical
3. Drainage: Provide positive slope to floor drains or
trough drain.
4. Water / Hose & Rack: Provide 15.2 m (50 ft) hose
with adjustable nozzle and hose rack with hot and cold
water. <15B>
5. Provide hand sink.
H. Can Wash: Provide dedicated room equipped with a machine
used to clean and sanitize garbage cans. <9>
1. Location: Adjacent to Receiving (loading dock) area.
Partition or isolate from Cart Wash to avoid contamina-
tion from garbage containers.
2. Size / Area: 2.4 x 2.4 m (8 x 8 ft.) enclosed room with
1 m (3'-6") wide door
3. Water, Hose & Rack: Equip space with hose and hose
rack with hot and cold water. <15B>
I. Entry Doors: Provide controls for prevention of pest
contamination.
1. Include automatic air curtains, door seals, sweeps,
guards and automatic door closers.
2. See Module <15A> for air curtain requirements.
J. Finishes – Receiving Areas:
1. Floors: Concrete, sealed
2. Walls: Concrete masonry, epoxy painted
3. Ceilings: Exposed structure
10.15 Pre-Processing (Commissary)

A. Program: Locate the following pre-processing areas when
market study determines that food and produce is not
available or cost effective in a processed state adjacent to
Receiving area and consistent with the project Facilities
Program; see “Foodservice Process Flow Diagram” above:
• Rough Prep
• Fish / Seafood, Meat & Poultry Prep Areas
• Vegetable, Fruit & Juice Prep
B. Rough Prep: Provide when market study determines that
food and produce arrives in a rough, unprocessed state that
requires cleaning prior to entering the facility preparation
areas.
1. Location: Adjacent to preparation areas.
2. Doors: Provide door widths of 1.2 m (4 ft) or larger to
accommodate bulk material and pallet movement.
3. Features: Provide the following:
a. Continuous 15 cm (6 inch) high concrete curb /
base at perimeter walls
b. Floor trench drain. Slope floor to drain.
c. Prep sink
4. Finishes: Provide the following:
a. Floor / Base: Paver tile floor / concrete curb base
b. Walls: Ceramic tile
c. Ceiling: Exposed, solid deck structure, painted or
food prep type suspended ceiling
C. Fish / Seafood, Meat & Poultry Prep Areas: Separate products
into categories of poultry, fish and meat and transfer into a
dedicated room for processing.
1. Program: Provide dedicated enclosed room for prepar-
ing products for proper storage.
a. Provide dedicated preparation facilities for the
fabrication of meats and seafood and production
of processed meat products.
b. Doors: Provide door widths of 1.2 m (4 ft) or
larger to accommodate bulk material and pallet
movement.
c. To prevent cross contamination, design facilities
to accommodate separate worktable tops, sinks,
cutting boards and refrigerated storage facilities
for meat, poultry and fish.
d. Pork: Provide a separate pork prep room in regions
where dietary restrictions on pork are prevalent.
e. Storage: Products are processed and placed in
holding compartment of appropriate refrigerated
storage room.
2. Location: Adjacent to Walk-in Coolers and Freezers.

3. Equipment: Provide specialized equipment for each
food category to wash, uncrate and prepare product for
storage. See Table 2.
a. Water hose and hose reel with hot and cold water
b. Floor drain
4. Refrigerator: Storage capacity is directly proportional
to the size of the property, banquet facilities and F&B
outlets and availability of products. Provide separate
walk-in refrigerator for storage of bulk and prepared
products.
5. Finishes – Preparation Area:
a. Floor: Paver tile (same as Main Kitchen)
b. Base: Paver tile
c. Walls: Ceramic tile or FR-FRFP
d. Ceilings: Accessible, washable tile on corrosion
resistant grid and supports. See Section 10.9,
“Ceilings”.
10.16 Storage
A. Program : Provide dedicated area within kitchen for storage
of all food items, paper, disposable goods, and food and
beverage related supplies.
• Dry Storage
• Non Food Storage
• Walk-in Refrigerated & Frozen Storage Units
B. Dry Storage:
1. Program: Provide dedicated room to house non refrig-
erated food products. Size facilities according to the
following:
a. Market study
b. Geographic location
c. Delivery schedules
d. Availability of products
2. Location: Provide in secure area adjacent to refriger-
ated storage and storeroom office. Shares common en-
trance vestibule with other storage facilities.
3. Equipment: See Table 2.
4. Entrance Door: 1.07 m (3'-6") wide minimum. Provide
for cart and pallet accessibility. Secure door with elec-
tronic operated lock with audit record and door contact
alarm <16>.
5. Finishes for Dry Storage:
a. Floor: Tile pavers preferred or concrete, sealed
b. Base: Same as walls
c. Walls: Concrete masonry, epoxy painted
d. Ceiling: Accessible tile on corrosion resistant grid

and supports. See Section 10.9, “Ceilings”.
C. Non Food Storage:
1. Program: Provide separate, dedicated areas with stor-
age shelving to house the following non food products:
a. Paper products
b. Disposable wares
c. Banquet and catering equipment
d. China and silver
e. Clean linen
f. Chemical and janitorial supplies
3. Finishes – Non Food Storage:
a. Floor: Concrete, sealed
b. Base: Same as walls
c. Walls: Epoxy paint
d. Ceiling: Accessible tile on corrosion resistant grid
and supports. See Section 10.9, “Ceilings”.
D. Cold Storage: Provide refrigerated storage units to house
food products. See Section 10.11 above.
10.17 Garde Manger (Cold Preparation)

A. Program: Provide dedicated area in Kitchen for the prepara-
tion of cold products and ingredients. Market study deter-
mines space requirements for:
1. Ample storage for smallwares and pans
2. Adequate space for pan rack carts and shelving
3. Conceal trash (not in aisle spaces)
4. Conceal recycling and compostables
5. Dry storage area
B. Equipment: Provide food processing equipment. See Table
2.
C. Features: Provide and accommodate the following:
1. Access to flake and cube ice
2. Area floor drains for cleaning
3. Convenience electrical outlets in work areas
4. Open base prep tables
5. Dedicated space for dessert production including re-
frigerated storage with worktable space. Include refrig-
erated storage above counter as required.
6. Self-contained ergonomic work stations for efficient
production movement and to control cross traffic
7. Self-contained work stations to limit movement and
cross traffic
8. Water source required in preparation areas
D. Finishes for Cold Preparation:

1. Floor: Paver tile (same as Main Kitchen) or seamless
flooring.
2. Base: Paver tile or seamless base.
3. Walls: Ceramic or FR-FRFP (see “Construction
Requirements: “General” & “Walls” above).
4. Ceiling: Accessible tile on corrosion resistant grid and
supports. See Section 10.9, “Ceilings”.
10.18 Bakery
A. Program: Provide bakery based on market conditions.
1. When required, provide dedicated area for the prepara-
tion and production of breads, desserts, pastry, choco-
lates and baked goods.
2. Location: Adjacent to main kitchen Pre-Processing
area
3. Size / Area: Provide space for storage shelving and
bakery carts.
B. Equipment: See Table 2.
C. Specialty Baking Equipment: Provide for the production of
breads. Specialty bread equipment is optional depending
on program. See Table 2.
D. Chocolate / Pastry / Ice Cream Equipment: Provide ice cream,
chocolate and pastry dessert production equipment based
on market study. See Table 2.
E. Finishes for Bakery:
flooring
2. Base: Paver tile or seamless base
3. Walls: Ceramic tile or FR-FRFP
4. Ceilings: Accessible tile on corrosion resistant grid and
10.19 Beverage Storage

A. Program: Provide dedicated, secure area to store liquor,
beer and wine with interior shelving and one entry door.
B. Door: Secure with electronic operated lock with audit re-
cord and door, contact alarm <16>.
C. Dry / Ambient Storage: Provide storage shelving and storage
units. See Table 2.
D. Refrigerated Storage (wine / beer): See walk-in refrigeration
in this Module.
E. Design Temperatures: Maintain the following design bever-

age temperatures:
Beverage Type Temperature
Beer (bottle): 5.5º C (42º F)
Beer (draft): 3.3º C (38º F)
White Wine: 5.5º C (42º F)
Red Wine: 13.0º C (55º F)
21.0º C (70º F)
General Liquor:
(ambient temperature)
F. FF&E: Provide a desk and chair if remote from other storage
areas.
G. Finishes for Liquor Storage: Dry / ambient areas (for refriger-
ated storage, see walk-in refrigeration requirements).
2. Walls / Base: Painted
3. Ceiling: Exposed structure
10.20 Pot Washing

A. Program: Provide equipment for washing and sanitizing
pots and pans in dedicated space.
B. Location: In Main Kitchen close to hot food production line.
May combine area with Warewashing if space and ease of
function permits.
1. Also, may share common clean dish table with
Warewashing in a “U” shaped configuration.
2. Provide pot washing sink (3 compartment required) on
each food handling / production floor at a minimum.
C. Equipment: See Table 2.
D. Features: Provide the following:
1. Drains: Ample floor drainage
2. Cart Space: Cart parking space for soiled pots from
remote foodservice areas
E. Finishes for Pot Washing:
1. Floor: Paver tile
2. Base: Paver tile
3. Walls: Ceramic tile
4. Ceiling: Accessible, washable tile on corrosion resis-
tant grid and supports. See Section 10.9, “Ceilings”.
10.21 Warewashing
A. Program: Provide area for cleaning and sanitizing plates
and utensils for service. See “Pot Washing” above.
Warewashing may be combined with Pot Washing.
B. Location: In Main Kitchen within accessible area to waitstaff
near kitchen entrance from dining room and food pickup
line.
D. Warewasher: Size machine according to seating capacity
of restaurant, banquet areas, and other foodservice areas.
Provide heavy duty stainless steel construction with the
following features.
1. Size: Provide machine based on 70% of rated capacity.
2. Type: Conveyor rack model or flight type depending
on capacity requirement. Efficiency: Use only water
saving and energy saving models using conservation
technology. No reduced speed “water savers.”
3. Booster Heater: Size for 82º to 90º C (180º to 195º F)
hot water rinse for sanitizing.
a. Select most efficient utility to operate booster
heater.
b. Do not provide “low temperature” or chemical
sanitizing machines.
4. Exhaust: Provide with exhaust hoods or directly con-
nect to warewasher vent ducts for removing steam and
condensate.
5. Drying Area: Provide adequate space for drying (mini-
mum three rack lengths).
1. Drains: Ample floor drainage
2. Sink: Provide with waste disposal where permitted
or alternate scrap collector or pulper. Locate between
drop-off and washing machine.
3. Carts: Cart parking for soiled dish dollies and rack dol-
lies. Provide cart parking space for a minimum of 10
dishware items and 4 glasses per seat served.
4. Ample clean service ware storage on mobile racks
(5-SU).
5. Space for two 114 liter (30 gal) garbage containers
F. Finishes for Warewashing:
1. Floor: Paver tile
2. Base: Paver tile

10.22 Silver Burnishing Room

A. Program: If required by the Facilities Program, provide a
separate room with equipment to burnish silver flatware
and hollowware.
B. Location: Adjacent to Main Kitchen and dishwashing but
away from dining or public areas that may be disrupted by
burnishing machine vibration and noise.
C. Storage: Provide shelf space for storage of silverware and
banquet silver service.
D. Burnishing Machine: See Table 2.
E. Finishes – Silver Burnishing Room:
1. Floor: Paver tile; Same as Kitchen area
2. Base: Same as Kitchen area
3. Walls: Concrete masonry, painted
4. Ceiling: Same as Kitchen area
10.23 Ice Production - Main Kitchen

A. Program: Provide dedicated space and equipment, away
from high traffic corridor, for the production and storage
of ice for kitchen use.
B. Equipment: Water cooled, self-contained compressor
system.
1. When selecting, consider low noise, heat gain, ventila-
tion, unit size, height, capacity and efficiency of unit.
2. Verify ceiling height at ice bin location prior to
installation.
C. Ice Machines: Select size and ice bin capacity according to
market study and demand for ice production. Typically,
base on the following per day production capacity at
32º C ambient, 21º C water (90º F ambient, 70º F water)
temperature:
D. Ice Bin: See Table 2.
E. Drainage:
1. Provide 30 cm (12 inch) wide floor grate with non skid
surface and trough in front of and for the length of the
ice bin to capture excess water runoff.
2. Provide funnel drain for cube maker and bin located
outside of traffic circulation path.
F. Finishes for Ice Production:

flooring
3. Walls: Ceramic tile wainscot on concrete masonry;
epoxy painted above
10.24 Trash Holding - Refrigerated

A. Program: Provide dedicated room with refrigeration system
to hold wet waste between pickups in areas where climate
or waste pickup schedules dictate. See “Receiving” in this
Module and Module <9>.
1. Location: Adjacent to Loading Dock at Receiving
2. Size: Base on trash holding and pickup frequency
B. Features: Provide and accommodate the following:
2. Door: Size entrance door to accommodate carts and
trash trucks.
3. Drainage: Slope floor to floor drain.
C. Finishes:
2. Base: Same as walls
3. Walls: Concrete masonry, epoxy painted or ceramic
tile on masonry
4. Ceiling: Exposed structure
10.25 “In Room Dining” Service

A. Program: Provide for delivery of foodservice items to
guestrooms.
1. See Module <8A> and the Guest Services “Call Center”
Design Supplement.
2. Coordinate requirements with RCH’s Call Center
criteria.
3. For properties with 300 rooms or more, RCH recom-
mends separate 3 meal cooking line.
4. Provide space for room service carts and warmers.
B. Workstation: <13> Accommodate P.O.S. terminal, tele-
phone and other computer requirements based on size of
workstation.
C. Staging Area: Provide in Main Kitchen adjacent to Food
Pickup Line (or exhibition kitchen where applicable) that
shares common cooking line.
1. Size / Area: Provide room service area with adequate

space for a minimum of 5 set up tables or carts per 100
guestrooms.
2. Location: Provide adjacent and accessible to Service
Elevator.
3. Holding Boxes: Provide electric, hot holding boxes for
mobile carts. Base quantity on approximately 5 to 8%
of guestroom count. Carts for Middle-Eastern coun-
tries may require up to 12% count. Verify with market
study. Typically, include in 5-SU package.
D. Equipment: See Table 2.
E. Storage:
1. Provide for amenities such as VIP platters and gift
baskets. Include general storage for dedicated Room
Service items such as silverware, trays, coffeepots and
other smallwares.
2. Provide secure area for bottled beverages (preferred),
cans, coffee, espresso and juices (service bar or public
bar access for liquor)
F. Finishes:
flooring.
10.26 Pool Kitchen / Pantry

A. Program: Size to accommodate demand. Provide food ser-
vice from adjacent pool bar and kitchen pantry. Provide
service routing to main kitchen.
1. HVAC: Fully air condition the Pool Kitchen and work
areas to accommodate frequently opened doors.
2. Washing Facilities: Provide for reusable, non breakable
service ware.
3. Refrigeration: Size for ambient conditions.
10.27 Commercial Kitchen Offices

A. Program: Provide (where applicable) dedicated, secure of-
fice space for the Executive Chef and kitchen managers to
administer management tasks and hold private meetings.
1. Size / Area: See the project Facilities Program for the
following office spaces:
2. Location: In Main Kitchen space within view of em-

ployee workstations.
a. Executive Chef: In Main Kitchen space within
view of Employee workstations. Provide adequate
area for a small conference table.
b. Executive Steward: In stewarding area
c. Pastry Chef: In Bakery / Pastry area
d. In Room Dining: In area of In Room Dining
B. Chef’s Office: Include the office space as follows:
1. Size / Area: 10 m2 (100 sq. ft) minimum or larger area
13 m² (140 sq. ft) total for a small conference table if
office is not included with the Closing Facility.
2. Location: Where possible, position adjacent to the
Kitchen preparation area and Administrator’s Office (if
Figure 3 - Office - Sample required).
Layout 3. Communications Opening (no glass): Between Chef’s
and Administrator’s Offices, provide an opening for
communications and operations efficiency.
4. Glass Opening: Provide a window to view preparation
and production areas.
5. Door: Full flush, solid wood and lockable
C. Administrator’s Office: If required by the project Facilities
Program, include the office space as follows:
1. Size / Area: 10 m2 (100 sq. ft)
2. Location: Where possible, locate adjacent to the Chef’s
Office.
D. Other Offices: Comply with the project Facilities Program
and include equipment for office spaces (see below).
Provide an office for each Food & Beverage outlet.
E. Closing Facility: At large banquet and catering properties, the
Chef’s and Administrator’s Offices are integrated into the
Closing Room design to create a Closing Facility as shown
in Figure 4.
1. Access: The Chef’s and Administrator’s Offices are
accessed through the Closing Room (see below) when
provided as a Closing Facility.
2. Location: Where possible, locate the Chef’s and
Administrator’s Offices adjacent to each other.
F. Equipment: Provide the following for office spaces:
• Desk and chairs
• Computer with Internet access <13A>
• Book shelf
• Filing cabinet
• Telephone <13B>
G. Finishes:
1. Floors: Same as Kitchen (or may include carpet)
2. Base: Same as Kitchen
3. Walls: Painted
4. Ceilings: Accessible acoustical tile
10.28 Closing Room

A. Program: If a Closing Room is required by the project
Facilities Program, design the space to showcase the prop-
erty’s culinary expertise while providing the prospective
guest groups with a transparent view of the property’s
back-of-house standards and practices. Also, it provides
the sales and event management team at resort, convention
and group business properties with a strong, competitive
advantage for selling and “closing” group business plans.
1. Size / Area: 10 to 20 m2 (100 to 200 sq. ft); varies by
region.
a. Provide adequate space to accommodate facility
features and equipment.
b. Space may be used for employee “line up.”
2. Location: Position in banquet or production Main
Kitchen, adjacent to the main function space.
a. Provide a clear view of the food production area.
b. Choreograph location and path to demonstrate the
facility’s high standards and quality.
B. Features - Closing Room: Provide the following:
1. Views: Glass window or glass wall with sliding door
to view preparation and production areas (if located in
kitchen area).
2. Countertops: Include granite countertops for displays
and service along two walls.
3. Base Cabinets: Below countertops with cabinets and
shelves for storage.
4. Wine Rack: Position on wall above countertop.
5. Coat Closet: For garment storage with clothes rod,
hangers and shelf above.
6. Table: For 8 persons minimum; position table and chairs
to provide 1.1 m (42 inch) minimum, clear circulation
space to maximize the guest’s view of preparation, pro-
duction and TV monitor.
7. Seating: 8 chairs minimum at table
8. TV: <13C> Flat screen (may include DVD / CD player
unit and cable system connections)
9. Cappuccino Machine: On countertop
10. Refrigerator: With glass display doors
C. Access Control: <16> Provide controlled access.

D. Lighting: Architectural feature down lighting above confer-
ence table.
Figure 4 - Chef’s Office / Closing Room
 Chef’s office
   Flat panel TV
 Glass window or wall with sliding

 glass door
 Table with minimum seating for 8
   Walk-in cooler for wine storage

and service
  Storage and service counter with

  Min. 42” under-counter shelves, cabinets
 Administrator’s office
  Coat closet
 Wine rack
(Kitchen)   Display refrigerator
 






(Kitchen)
Bars
10.29 Bars
A. Program: Provide bars for preparation and serving of bever-
ages in Lobby, In-Room Dining, Restaurant, Outlet Bars
and Club Lounge.
1. Contact RCH for specific project bar layouts, details
and equipment requirements.
2. Service bar location depends on F&B concepts, res-
taurant service volume and access to recreation areas
requiring F&B service.
3. Provide flexible water connections when bar is a curved
configuration.
B. Beverages: Do not provide liquor dispensing systems.
Examples include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Variety of liquor (include 2 varieties of premium call
brands) of each category.
• Assume 25 to 30 bottles on the front bar at each
jockey box.
• Assume an additional 85 to 100 on back bar.
2. Draft beer (minimum 3 varieties). Coordinate beer
tower type and style with Interior Designer for pub-
lic area. Store and refrigerate draft beer kegs remotely
with a maximum of 30 m (100 ft.) beer line run.
3. Assume approximately 200 wines with four bottles
each in storage.
4. Bottled beer
5. Soda and juices
6. Provide stainless steel “tee” tower in Back of House
service bars.
7. Wine rack refrigeration for red / white wine bottles
C. Staffing: General rules for staffing requirements:
1. One bartender per 150 seats for service bars. Bartender
does not serve as cashier for waitstaff.
2. One bartender per 8 bar seats, serves approximately 30
people.
D. Glass Storage:
1. Generally, provide 4 glasses per seat.
2. Hanging stem glassware above front bar is not
acceptable.
E. Beverage Storage: Provide space behind bar for 80 active
bottles at a service bar, 150 at a display bar and 50 at a
pool bar. Provide an equal storage area for backup bottles.
Provide secure liquor storage behind the bar with the

following:
1. Roll down gate to secure entrance to back bar area
2. Locks on cabinet storage for liquor bottles
F. Equipment - General: See Table 2.
1. Ice Cuber: Where beverages are served, provide ice
machine that produces 32 x 32 x 32 mm (1¼ x 1¼ x 1¼
inch) ice cubes.
G. Lobby Bar: Generally, provide for F&B service to public and
guests in Lobby.
1. Equipment for Public Bars: Same (minimum) require-
ments for underbar equipment as noted above with the
addition of drop down drain board for P.O.S. <13> If
kitchen is not easily accessible, a support pantry may
be required.
2. Server’s Station: If service station is not provided with-
in 30 m (100 ft) of bar, provide pantry to accommodate
remote functions. See Server’s Station requirements.
3. Food Pickup Line: If food pickup line is not provided
within 46 m (150 ft) of the bar, provide pantry to ac-
commodate remote functions including limited cook-
ing equipment as required for menu.
H. Restaurant Service, Main Service & Dispensing Bar: Typically,
provide where Lobby Bar is remote from Restaurant.
1. Equipment: See Figure 5.
2. Food Segment: Consider, if appropriate or required, the
integration of a food segment.
3. Wine storage shelving and glass door refrigerator for
wine.
4. Security: Walk-in cooler, liquor storage and tempera-
ture controlled wine storage is lockable and secured as
a unit.
5. Features:
a. Stainless steel bar top
b. Hanging glass storage above bar top
c. Roll down security gate open full length of bar
d. Stainless steel backbar top with backbar refrigera-
tor and lockable cabinet above for liquor storage.
e. Underbar and hand sink
f. Glass storage
g. Cocktail station
h. Blender station with soda gun
i. Under counter dish machine.
j. Espresso machine
Figure 5 - Bar - Example Plan
I. Finishes - Bar / Service Stations: See applicable Modules for

finish materials and coordinate with millwork details and
interior design:
1. Lobby Bar: Module <2>
2. Restaurant Bar: Module <3>
3. Pool Bar: Module <4>
4. Guest Floor Lounge Bar: Module <7C>
Figure 6 - Example: Service Bar Section
Figure 7 - Bar Support - Example Plan
Restaurant
10.30 All Day Dining Restaurant Production Line
A. Program: Provide dedicated area in Main Kitchen for
cooking hot food products for service. For conditions of
designing a separate food production kitchen, see previous
“Space Planning” requirements for “Main Kitchen” in this
Module.
B. Equipment: Provide heavy duty equipment. Consider size of
foodservice, F&B concepts and catering, to select equip-
ment. See Table 2.
C. Specialty Equipment: Provide specialty equipment as neces-
sary to accommodate local practices.
D. Features: Provide and accommodate the following:
1. When an open kitchen is programmed, design cook-
lines as European style or island cooking suites, that
are custom units with one piece top stainless steel flue
risers, chases to bottom of ventilator, tubular overshelf,
extended front ledges and full perimeter towel rail.
Suite is preplumbed, pre-wired and installed on 15 cm
(6 inch) high concrete pad.
2. Low Walls: Separate equipment with a 1.4 m (4’-6”)

high low wall with stainless steel wall flashing or top.
a. Group equipment used for batch cooking on one
side of low wall.
b. Group a’ la carte equipment on one side of low
wall opposite Chef’s Counter (food pickup line).
3. Provide mobile equipment with flexible gas hoses and
quick disconnects (where applicable).
4. Place floor troughs in front of braising pans and wet
applications.
E. Finishes for All Day Dining Restaurant Production:
1. Floor: Paver tile or seamless flooring
3. Walls: Ceramic tile
10.31 Food Pickup Line (Chef’s Counter)

A. Program: Provide counter to assemble and garnish finished
plates for a’ la carte service and assembly of orders for de-
livery to dining tables.
B. Equipment: Provide heavy duty, custom fabricated stainless
steel construction. See Table 2.
C. Location: Provide adjacent to a la carte Cooking Battery.
D. Features / Clearances:
1. Shelving: Maximize amount of open storage shelving in
Chef’s Counter.
a. Provide 15 cm (6 inch) minimum clearance from
floor for cleaning.
b. Provide 28 cm (11 inch) clearance between shelving.
2. Stations: Required for dedicated hot food, cold food and
dessert stations for garnishing and staging of plates for
service.
a. Provide electric outlets for small equipment at
each station.
b. Provide electric outlets at work counters.
3. Aisle Width: 1.1 m (3’-6”) between Chef’s Counter and
cooking line and no more than 1.2 m (4 ft).
4. Point of Sale (P.O.S.):
a. Provide locations for remote printers and a channel
for cabling.
b. Include a built-in shelf to hold the P.O.S. printers
for both front and back of the line. Include electri-
cal outlets.
5. Floor Drains: Provide on chef’s side of counter.
E. Finishes for Food Pick up Line:

1. Floors / Base: Paver tile (same as Main Kitchen)
2. Walls: Same as Main Kitchen
3. Ceilings: Accessible tile on corrosion resistant grid and
10.32 Buffet
A. Planning Requirements: See Module <3>; supports the
Buffet style of meal service.
B. Equipment: Provide appropriate equipment such as built-in
induction units (no solid fuel heated chaffers) and refrig-
eration units.
1. Mount induction unit controls for staff access, but out
of guest view, integrated with millwork, respecting
manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
2. Built-in flush mounted induction units are preferred.
Coordinate with interior designer’s counter top selec-
tion for an “invisible” appearance.
3. Lighting: In addition to ambient lighting, provide dedi-
cated general and accent lighting to highlight buffet
displays and tables.
4. Cooking areas outside of the kitchen require hooded
ventilation.
C. Buffet Design: Coordinate equipment requirements with
foodservice consultant and interior designer to provide a
functional and aesthetically pleasing facility based on the
property size and anticipated use.
1. Provide a method to close buffet area and equipment
(no mobile equipment) from guest view when not in
use.
2. At fixed buffet counters, provide covers or millwork
details to conceal built-in equipment from guest view
when not in use.
Figure 8 - Buffet - Example Plan
10.33 Server’s Stations

A. Program: Provide counters located in the dining areas of
Restaurants to store service items and beverages during
meal periods.
B. Dining Room Station: Provide for beverage service with
P.O.S. equipment, partition baffles and doors (coordinate
design with Interior Designer) to Dining Rooms.
1. Provide one remote service station (within Dining area)
for every 50 dining seats including at least one Wet
Service Station; see Module <3>.
2. Provide doors with double acting hardware and window
that swing with traffic flow and without cross traffic at
this transition point, and in kitchen area.
3. No guest views into service areas and BOH spaces
from public spaces.
4. Lighting of service stations and other foodservice areas
open to public spaces is incandescent.
5. Stone or impervious surface on counter tops. Use stain-
less steel counter tops within BOH areas.
6. Design front-of-house stations similar to the concept of
restaurant design.
D. Features:
1. Provide as focal element in dining space with clean,
simple design.
2. Provide half height wall to partially conceal area from
guest and customer view.
3. P.O.S. Terminals: Include counter space for P.O.S. ter-
minal at each station. Generally, provide 1 terminal for
every 50 seats. P.O.S. is built-in to millwork.
E. Finishes for Server’s Station: See Module <3> Food &
Beverage. Base style and finishes on food and restaurant
concept.
10.34 Specialty Restaurant Kitchen

A. Program: Provide dedicated kitchen for cooking and finish-
ing plates for service in separate specialty themed restau-
rant. Kitchen design and equipment is based on concept
and market.
1. Specialty, remote and secondary restaurants require es-
sentially same functions as a’ la carte kitchen with bak-
ery, garde manger and, meat and fish functions brought
from the central Pre-Processing.
Figure 9- Dry Server Station - Example Plan
2. Requirements for European, Oriental or Specialty

kitchen are designed specifically to comply with the
Brand requirements. Similarly, pool bars, grills, tennis
centers, luaus and other resort facility spaces are cus-
tom designed to meet Brand requirements, following
an established schematic design concept.
B. Design Features: Accommodate and provide the following:
1. Prefer finishing kitchen only, depending on concept,
since food preparation occurs in Main Kitchen.
2. Access to service pathway to transport items from
Main Kitchen and Warewashing areas (or vertical lift
if on separate floors).
Figure 10 - Wet Server Station - Example Plan
Function Spaces
10.35 Function Space Kitchen
A. Program: Provide dedicated area to perform bulk food
preparation for restaurants, banquet and catering func-
tions. Incorporate a rethermalization system using combi
ovens near the point of service and at production areas.
Provide adequate racks for rethermalizing and walk-in re-
frigerator storage.
B. Location: Typically, combine area with Cold Prep. See
Section 10.16. In larger hotels or facilities with remote
Banquet Areas, provide a dedicated Banquet Prep area.
D. Equipment for Ballroom Banquet Pantries: (see Section 10.37)
E. Features: Provide and accommodate the following:
1. Cooking equipment on casters with flexible gas lines
and quick disconnects (where applicable).
2. Maintain a minimum of 15 cm (6 inch) clearance above
floor for equipment and undershelves for cleaning, ex-
cept at plinth (curb) installations.
3. Floor drainage throughout. Provide continuous trench
drains and flush mount grate in front of equipment hav-
ing wet applications such as kettles and tilt skillets..
4. Condensate hoods over bain-maries and other equip-
ment producing high moisture levels.
5. Electric convenience outlets at workstations
F. Finishes – Main Kitchen / Banquet Production:
flooring
10.36 Function Space Beverage Area

A. Program: Provide staging area for production and distribu-
tion of beverages for catering functions. Provide the follow-
ing at the beverage station:
1. Coffee production
2. Cup and saucer storage
3. Roll-in refrigeration with mobile racks for condiments
4. Soiled dish break down station
5. Worktables with sinks
6. Secure liquor and wine room

7. Under counter refrigerator (cakes, flowers etc.)
8. Mobile bar storage as required (1 bar space per 150 guests)
B. Location: Provide staging area adjacent to meeting rooms
that are distant from the Main Kitchen.
D. Finishes - Banquet Beverage Station:
2. Base: Same as walls
10.37 Function Space Pantries

A. Program: Provide dedicated area adjacent to Function space
as required for staging of finished plates and carts being
sent to a catering function.
1. Local market conditions and rethermalization methods
typically drive requirements. If traditional plate and
serve method is used, reevaluate banquet cart types
and quantity.
2. Verify with market study and consider separation of
products.
3. Pantries for remote Meeting Rooms: Size pantries at
14 m² (150 sq. ft) minimum.
C. Dry Storage: Provide the following:
1. Lockable storage for silver (when applicable)
2. Flat shelf storage for chaffing dishes and equipment
D. Warewasher: Share with main kitchen, when on the same
level only.
E. Finishes for Banquet Pantry:
1. Floor: Paver tile or seamless flooring
3. Walls: Epoxy paint
Guest Accommodations
10.38 Club Lounge Pantry
A. Program: Provide limited foodservice pantry adjacent to
adjoining sitting areas in a controlled access lounge.
1. Typically, the Club Lounge is available to guests on the
Club Floor level.
2. Direct access or adjacent to service elevator is desired.
B. Size / Area: Provide to accommodate guest demand and food
concept. Varies by region. See Module <7C>.
C. Design Features:
1. Bar: Provide lockable, cabinet storage for backup liquor
bottles and beer as part of shelving display.
2. Storage: Provide storage area for goods and service
items, dishes, paper goods, silverware, glassware, etc.
3. Breakdown Space: Conceal area from guest view, to
hold soiled plates and glassware.
D. Equipment: See Table 2.
E. Buffet at Lounge: Coordinate with interior design to deter-
mine if a credenza with induction heating is required to
display and serve hot food items. See Table 2 for equipment.
F. Finishes for Club Lounge Pantry: See <GR5> - Typical Finish
Schedule.
10.39 Ice / Vending

A. Program: Provide ice cuber dispenser accessed by employ-
ees for guests; see Module <7B>.
1. Size / Area: Coordinate requirements with Module
<7B>. Verify ceiling height requirements to accommo-
date machine and for installation.
2. Location: One unit per guestroom floor (50 rooms
maximum) in centralized vending space (if applicable)
and / or ice dispensing machine room.
B. Equipment: Provide water cooled, self-contained, condens-
ers for ice cubers. See Table 2.
C. Finishes: See Module <7B>.
10.40 Housekeeping
A. Dishwashing Machine: Provide one Butler’s Pantry on each
guestroom level floor (50 rooms maximum) in a central-
ized location. See Module <7B>.
Employee
10.41 Employee Dining
A. Program: Provide a dedicated dining (cafeteria) facility for
employees. Services offered to be determined by market
conditions with input from RCH.<8B>
1. Size / Area: Coordinate program and design require-
ments with Module <8B> Employee Facilities.
2. Location: Near Employee services (change / shower / toi-
let rooms). Accommodate local daylight requirements.
B. Features: Provide with the following applicable project
Facilities Program design features:
1. Cashier not required
2. Cafeteria style, self-service. Minimum of approximate-
ly 30 linear feet of service line required.
3. Hot food station served by attendant
4. Self-serve salad, dessert and beverage stations
5. Dishroom: Provide when employee dining is not near
other dishwashing facility. Include pass-through shelf
at soiled dishtable with trash receptacle on drop side for
self bussing. Include recycling stations at trash drop.
6. Emergency Power: Provide several electric outlets to
permit limited employee food prep (coffee, sandwiches,
etc.) in an emergency. See Module <15C>
C. Equipment: May be influenced by regional preferences. See
Table 2.
D. Finishes - Employee Dining: See Module <8B>.
10.42 System Coordination

A. General: Coordinate with requirements of other Modules
including:
• 2A Public Spaces
• 3 Food & Beverage
• 7C Club Lounge
• 8 Administration & Employee Facilities
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
11
Laundry & Housekeeping
11A::Laundry Facility
11B:: Housekeeping
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
11A
Laundry Facility
11A - Laundry Facility THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
11A.1 Overview 1
11A.2 Laundry Facility - Design 2
11A.3 Laundry Manager Office 5
11A.4 Soiled Linen Transport, Sorting & Storage 6
11A.5 Linen Chute 7
11A.6 Washing 8
11A.7 Drying 10
11A.8 Flatwork Ironing 11
11A.9 Dry Folding 12
11A.10 Uniform Finishing 13
11A.11 Clean Linen Storage & Linen Carts 13
11A.12 Valet (Garment Shop) 15
11A.13 Uniform Storage & Issue 18
11A.14 Laundry Mechanical Equipment Room 19
11A.15 Wash Chemical Storage & Injection System 21
11A.16 Air Compressor Room 22
11A.17 Clean & Soiled Linen Holding (option) 23
11A.18 Laundry Equipment Standard of Quality 24

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Laundry | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Laundry Facility - 11A
Laundry Facility
11A.1 Overview
A. Objective: When qualified, dependable, high quality
laundry services are not locally available for the property,
provide an on-site washing and finishing facility to
MI Project Contact launder and finish high quality textile hospitality products
Marriott International - “MI” - is the in compliance with Marriott International (MI) Design
corporate entity that manages this Standards. See the project Facilities Program.
Contact the MI Design Manager for the B. Management Strategy: Develop a management strategy and
project specific manager referenced design criteria for each property considering the following
by the term “MI” throughout this factors that impact the on-site facility design:
Module.
1. Potential to cooperatively share laundry facilities with
local MI properties.
2. Potential for a regional MI program to consolidate
laundry capacity and services.
3. Scope and quality of required laundry services.
4. Potential to outsource laundry, valet and uniform programs
if high quality services are available.
5. Business objectives that require on-site laundry
facilities.
6. Availability of the following:
• Acceptable area or region commercial services
• Adequate project space
• Personnel
• Potential for competitive on-site operating costs
C. Design Review: Prepare a design analysis and management
strategy to form the basis for an on-site laundry facility
design, subsequent submissions and reviews by MI.
D. Design Criteria: When the laundry management strategy
requires an on-site Laundry Facility, the following factors
determine the facility’s workload (weight and piece
quantities of textile and clothing items for finishing), space
allocations, equipment sizes, capacities and types.
1. Quantity: Determine the quantity by guest bedrooms,
average annual occupancy and degree of double
occupancy, such as the average guest-nights per
bedroom night.
2. Food & Beverage: Quantity of guests served utilizing
reusable textiles (table clothes, napkins).
3. Function Space: Table and guest quantities utilizing
reusable textiles.
4. Service Level: High thread count and over sized bed
linens; all cotton versus poly-cotton for F&B napery,
duvets and duvet covers, pillow shams, etc.
5. Spa: Expected spa activity (quantity of treatments).
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Laundry 1

6. Recreation: Pool and beach towel quantities,

utilization, and towel size.
7. Uniforms: Quantity and type, dry cleaned versus wet
washed
E. Off-Site Facility: If an on-site laundry is not required, see the
“Clean & Soiled Linen Holding (option)” in this Module.
F. Coordination: Coordinate the utility service requirements,
including MEP (see Module <15>) rough-ins, trenches,
hook-ups, etc., and coordinate with design disciplines,
procurement, installer, contractor, owner and MI.
11A.2 Laundry Facility - Design
A. General: The Design Standards are based on provisions for a
dedicated, full service, on-site Laundry Facility to provide
dependable, continuous, consistent service for guests and
employees in a full service hospitality property.
B. Location: Locate Laundry, Garment Shop and Uniform
Issue room adjacent to each other with suitable adjacencies
for the work flow and connection to the Service Corridor.
1. Position adjacent to Service Corridor and near Service
Elevators and Housekeeping.
2. Locate with clear access to Receiving Area to
accommodate installation and replacement of equipment.
Knock-out panels are an acceptable solution.
3. Provide shaft-ways and interstitial ceiling spaces for
equipment supply air and exhaust ductwork systems.
<15A>
C. Space Design:
1. Avoid triangular or other unusual, inefficient plan
configurations.
2. Provide rectangular spaces to enclose facility components
with maximum 2:1 ratio of length to width.
3. If columns fall within the space, provide area for
an efficient layout to comply with equipment size,
clearance and workflow.
4. Design laundry and equipment locations to
accommodate service access and repair.
D. Area Program: Estimate facility areas based on the following
design criteria and calculated laundry workload:
1. Workload Factors:
a. Business, Urban: 8.2 kg (18 lb.) per occupied
room night
b. Resort (without beach facilities): 10 kg (22 lb.) per
occupied room night
c. Beach Resort & Large Spa Facilities: 12.7 kg
(28 lb.) per occupied room night
2 Laundry | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

2. Workload Calculation: Determine the product in “pounds

per day” (PPD) assuming guestroom quantity at 80%
occupancy utilizing one of the workload factors above, for
example: 300 rooms x 80% occupancy x 8.2 kg (18 lb.) per
room night = PPD of 1,960 kg (4,320 lb.) per day).
E. Laundry Spaces: Utilize the following table for programming
Laundry Facility spaces:
Space Components m2 (sq. ft.)
Laundry Manager and Clerk Offices 16.7 (180)
Soiled Linen Storage and Sorting 0.008 x PPD (0.085 x PPD)
Washing and Finishing 0.04 x PPD (0.425 x PPD)
Clean Linen Storage and Cart Loading 0.012 x PPD (0.13 x PPD)
Garment Shop, Dry Cleaning and Valet 79 (850)
Uniform Storage, Issue and Tailoring 0.005 x PPD (0.05 x PPD)
Mechanical and dedicated laundry water
37 to 74 (400 to 800)
systems
Washing Chemical Storage and Injection
9.3 (100)
Systems
Air Compressors and Refrigerated Dryer 7.4 (80)
Clean and Soiled Linen Holding (if
0.018 x PPD (0.2 x PPD)
laundry is off-site)
F. Service Corridor: 2.4 m (8 ft.) wide minimum without structural
clearance interference that would prevent equipment movement,
installation, maintenance and service.
G. Doors: Provide two, separate access doorways, each a minimum of
2.4 m (8 ft.) wide, from the Laundry area to the Service Corridor.
H. Steps, Stairs, Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> - Loss
Prevention.
I. Acoustic Control: Spring isolate equipment suspended from
structure to prevent sound transmission to adjacent spaces. Do
not locate Laundry under, over or adjacent to guestrooms and
public spaces.
J. Weight & Vibration: Due to equipment weights and vibration,
design reinforced concrete floor slabs for equipment mounting
and coordinate anchorage requirements with laundry equipment
vendor and structural engineer.
1. Slab Thickness: Typically, provide the following:
• 15 cm (6 inch) and thicker slabs for water tanks and steam
boilers
• 30 cm (12 inch) or greater for solid-mounted
washer-extractors
2. Raised & Recessed Floor Slabs: Not allowed.
3. Equipment Floor Supports: Provide sufficient mass to
minimize and dampen harmonic vibration between
laundry equipment and building structure.

K. Slab Waterproofing: When laundry floor slab is above grade,

provide waterproof membrane at troughs and floor drains.
L. Floors: Provide level floors, except slope areas to drains.
M. Walls: Masonry construction, painted finish. Protect outside
corners subject to cart traffic with high impact resistant (such
as stainless steel) corner guards, 10 x 10 x 150 cm (4 x 4 x
60 inch) high.
N. Ceiling Height: 3.6 m (12 ft.) minimum. Verify height based
on equipment size, structural clearance, mechanical space
requirements, maintenance and operations.
O. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR> and <16> for
window, glass / glazing criteria, restricting window opening
to 10 cm (4 inch) and for safety glass requirements.
P. Natural Light: If possible or as required by governing
regulations, provide natural light source.
Q. Corner Guards & Wall Protection: <9> Provide to prevent damage
to corners and walls.
Figure 1 - Laundry Facility Adjacency Diagram
Drying
Mechanical Air Uniform &
& Water Compressor Finishing Finishing
Systems System
Laundry
Manager
& Clerk
Offices
Flatwork
Ironing Washing
Dry
Garment Uniform Folding
Shop, Dry Storage,
Cleaning Issue & Washing Soiled
& Valet Tailoring Chemical Linen Service
Clean Linen Storage Storage Elevator
Storage & Sorting
& Cart
Counter
n Loading Chute
Chut
ut
Receiving
Service Corridor <9> Area
<9>
Employee Locker, Housekeeping

Shower, Change Area <11B>
<8B>

R. Finishes: Provide durable, easy to maintain and cleanable

finishes such as the following:
1. Floor: Sealed concrete or VCT (vinyl composition tile)
2. Base: Painted or vinyl base
3. Walls: Epoxy paint
4. Ceiling: Consistent with the facility (painted or
acoustical tile)
11A.3 Laundry Manager Office
A. Program: For a typical size, on-site Laundry Facility,
provide separate enclosed offices for the Laundry Manager
and clerk.
1. Large Properties: The Laundry Manager may be a
department head.
2. Small Properties (200 rooms maximum): The Laundry
Manager reports to the Director of Housekeeping.
3. Private Offices: In partitioned offices, typically provide
interior view windows to observe laundry work areas.
4. Assistant Managers: If the program requires one or
more Assistant Managers, provide open work area with
office equipment and furniture adjacent to laundry
processing area.
5. Off-site Facility: If the facility is off-site, locate the
Manager / Supervisor office in the Housekeeping
<11B> area; a separate clerk’s office is not required.
B. Location: Where possible, design adjacent to Laundry and
Housekeeping areas for management efficiency.
C. Equipment / Fixtures: Desk, chair, filing cabinets; computer
(PMS / PBS) <13A>; telephone <13B>
D. Finishes:
1. Floor: VCT
3. Walls: Painted

11A.4 Soiled Linen Transport, Sorting & Storage

A. Program: Provide dedicated area for transporting, sorting
and storing linen in carts prior to the washing process.
B. Location: Position the linen delivery, sorting and storage
area inside the door from the Service Corridor, adjacent to
the wash area, on the side of the doorway away from the
finishing area.
C. Transport: Design soiled linen transport to maximize
circulation efficiency and minimize labor costs when
transporting from the soiled linen source to the Laundry
wash area. Soiled linen is delivered to the Laundry by
linen chute or through the Service Corridor <7B> by one
or a combination of the following facility methods:
1. Direct: Linen delivery direct to the Laundry from the
linen chute.
2. Remote: Linen delivery from the linen chute to a
separate room.
3. Service Elevator: Bulk, unsorted linens are transported
in carts to the Laundry.
D. Sorting & Storage: Provide area to sort linen into
classifications suitable to the washing process and to store
linen carts prior to washing.
1. Direct: If the majority of linen is delivered by linen
chute, direct to the laundry area, linen is immediately
sorted into linen carts and stored.
Locate the linen chute, sorting and storage in an
enclosed room constructed of masonry.
2. Linen Chute - Remote: Unsorted linens are deposited
in carts and transported to the Laundry for sorting and
storage.
3. Service Elevator: Bulk, unsorted linens are transported
to the Laundry for sorting and storage.
E. Scale: 1,200 x 1,500 mm (4 x 5 ft.), electronic floor scale.
Provide and position to efficiently weigh carts with unsorted
goods entering the Laundry and sorted goods prepared for
full washer loads.
F. Carts:
1. Bulk Carts: 1,200 x 760 mm or 1,500 x 760 mm (48 x
30 inch or 60 x 30 inch) typical size for unsorted goods.
2. Hamper Carts: 560 to 700 liter (16 to 20 bushel) with
spring-lift platforms and four swiveling castors.

11A.5 Linen Chute

A. Program: Provide a prefabricated metal chute assembly
from guestroom floors above with an outlet to a linen
collection area.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA regulations. See Module
<14> for chute fire protection system requirements.
C. Linen Loading: See Housekeeping Linen Chute in Module
<7B>. Locate loading at each upper floor in an enclosed
housekeeping / linen room with chute access doors only
accessible to employees. Provide access from a fire rated
vestibule.
D. Discharge: Provide chute discharge in a discharge room or
at an area suitable for efficient work flow in sorting area
and to washroom without interfering with housekeeping and
laundry traffic.
1. Mount bottom edge of chute opening 54 inches above
the main laundry room floor with a side discharge; not
from ceiling or overhead.
2. At discharge chute opening, provide a top hinged stainless
steel door with a fusible link.
3. Vent full size chute through roof.
4. Provide a discharge floor area that maintains soiled
laundry away from foot and cart traffic paths. Include
landing space to position a laundry cart with wheel
brakes.
5. When chute enters an enclosed room, provide 2.4 m
(8 ft.) minimum clearance from chute discharge to
opposite wall or wall with door to allow space for
housekeeping employee and one linen cart to avoid
employee entrapment.

11A.6 Washing
A. Program: Provide washing equipment, fixtures and
accessories.
B. Location: Position for direct access from Service Corridor
without passing through adjacent Soiled Linen Storage and
Sorting area.
Include an area near the washers to weigh and stage hamper
carts containing loads for washing.
C. Soak Sink: <15B> Provide two compartment soak sink, with
hand soap and towel dispensers.
D. Eye Wash Station: <15B> <16> Locate near washers.
E. Drain Trench: Provide under or behind washers and size to
accommodate the combined total of washers’ rinse cycle
capacity.
F. Washers:
1. Program: Provide 4 to 6 open-pocket units in a single
bank arrangement, in front of or over the waste water
trench with 115% minimum combined capacity of
hourly washing task (see Laundry Facility, “Workload”
above. Divide the calculated “PPD” by 8 washing hours
per day to calculate hourly task).
2. Consultant: If the daily task (PPD) is expected to exceed
680 kg (1,500 lbs), contact a professional laundry
consultant for a continuous batch tunnel washing
system and requirements.
3. Capacity: Provide washers with clean-dry weight
capacities equal to 113 kg, 57 kg, 23 kg, and 16 kg (250 lbs,
125 lbs, 50 lbs and 35 lbs). If hourly task exceeds 454 kg
(1,000 lbs) per hour, provide 180 kg (400 lbs) capacity
split-pocket washers.
a. Provide one small washer with a capacity equal to 5
to 10% of the hourly task;
b. If 5 or 6 washers are required, provide a second
“mid-size” machine equal to about 10 to 20% of the
hourly task capacity.
c. The remaining 3 to 4 washers are identical and
individually equal in capacity to about 25 to 35% of
the hourly task.

Size laundry washing and drying equipment based on the following

typical guestroom linen and terry attributes:
Double / Double Guestroom
Weight Material
Products Qty.
kgs. (lbs.) Size Type
762 x 1320 mm
Bath Towel 3 6.8/doz (15.0)/doz (30 x 52 inch)
100% cotton
406 x 762 mm
Hand Towel 3 2.0/doz (4.5)/doz (16 x 30 inch)
100% cotton
330 x 330 mm
Wash Cloth 3 0.7/doz (1.5)/doz (13 x 13 inch)
100% cotton
560 x 864 mm 50/50 cotton / poly
Bath Mat 1 4.5/doz (10.0)/doz (22 x 34 inch) blend
1320 mm
(52 inch) sweep, (terry velour) 100%
Robe 1 1 1.8 ea (4.0) ea 19 mm (¾ inch) cotton
sleeves
100% cotton or 100%
Bath Rug 1, 2 1 1.4 ea (3.0) ea
nylon
2080 x 2260 mm
Down Comforter (82 x 89 inch)
T-230, 100% cotton
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Fitted Bottom Sheet 2 0.8 ea (1.8) ea
poly blend
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Flat Top Sheet 2 0.8 ea (1.8) ea
poly blend
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Pillow Case 4 0.1 ea (0.25) ea poly blend
T240 - T270, 60/40
Sheeted Duvet Cover 2 2.0 ea (4.5) ea
cotton/poly blend
¹ Guest Lounge Levels only ² Change at guest checkout
King Guestroom
Weight Material
Products Qty.
kgs. (lbs.) Size Type
762 x 1320 mm
Bath Towel 2 6.8/doz (15.0)/doz (30 x 52 inch)
100% cotton
406 x 762 mm
Hand Towel 2 2.0/doz (4.5)/doz (16 x 30 inch)
100% cotton
330 x 330 mm
Wash Cloth 2 0.7/doz (1.5)/doz (13 x 13 inch)
100% cotton
560 x 864 mm 50/50 cotton / poly
Bath Mat 1 4.5/doz (10.0)/doz (22 x 34 inch) blend
1320 mm
(52 inch) sweep, (terry velour) 100%
Robe 1 1 1.8 ea (4.0) ea
19 mm (¾ inch) cotton
sleeves
100% cotton or 100%
Bath Rug 1, 2 1 1.4 ea (3.0) ea
nylon
2640 x 2260 mm
Down Comforter (104 x 89 inch)
T-230, 100% cotton
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Fitted Bottom Sheet 1 0.8 ea (1.8) ea poly blend
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Flat Top Sheet 1 0.8 ea (1.8) ea poly blend
T300, 60/40 cotton/
Pillow Case 3 0.1 ea (0.25) ea poly blend
T240 - T270, 60/40
Sheeted Duvet Cover 1 1.7 ea (3.8) ea cotton/poly blend
¹ Guest Lounge Levels only ² Change at guest checkout

11A.7 Drying
A. Program: Provide dryers in proximity to washing machines.
B. Location: Directly adjacent to washing equipment in an
enclosure, and if possible, on an outside wall for make-up
air through louvered openings.
1. Allow adequate space at dryer sides to facilitate loading
and unloading activities and staging work.
2. Position in a single bank forming one of two lines of
flow away from washers (flow in second line is flatwork
ironing unit).
C. Enclosure: Provide a tightly enclosed, fire rated dryer space
with at least 610 mm (24 inch) clear service access behind
machines.
1. Access Door: 760 mm (30 inch) wide x 2 m (6’-8”)
high, outward opening door for dryer service.
2. Connections: Coordinate and verify dryer utility
connections <15> with equipment vendor and
coordinate enclosure clearance, access details.
D. Dryers: Provide gas fired dryers with internal lint filtering
screens (no separate lint filter) and fire suppression features.
If high pressure steam is preferred and available, provide
steam heated dryers.
1. Size: Provide sizes to match capacities for each washer.
Typically, a nominal rating of about 150% of the washer
name plate rated capacity, maximum of 57 kg (125 lbs).
For 113 kg (250 lb) open pocket washers and 180 kg
(400 lb) split pocket washers, provide 77 to 86 kg (170
to 190 lb) dryers.
2. Quantity: Provide about two-thirds of the washers
quantity (3 to 4 units total). Generally, provide 2 to
3 units at 77 to 86 kg (170 to 190 lbs) and select 1 or
2 smaller units to match small washer sizes, 23 and/or
34 kg (50 and/or 75 lbs).
E. Tumbler - Supply Air & Exhaust: Provide enclosure for tumblers
of 86 kg (190 lbs.) or less to isolate make-up air and heat
radiation; see Module <15>.
1. Lint Screens: If tumblers do not include internal lint
screens, provide a separate lint collector or filter.
2. Large Capacity Tumblers: For 90 kg (200 lbs) capacity
or greater tumblers, provide supply air duct connection
ports and integral lint filtering devices.

11A.8 Flatwork Ironing

A. Program: Provide flatwork ironing system (feeding device,
ironer and folder).
B. Location: Position and orient the ironing equipment in an
area near washing and drying to facilitate the flow from
washers to clean linen staging and cart packing.
C. Size / Area: Provide equipment perimeter maintenance access
and sufficient space for the ironing unit at:
1. Front: For staging several loaded carts.
2. Rear: For hand folding, stacking and loading finished
goods into clean linen carts.
D. Flatwork Spreader / Feeder: Provide an automatic flatwork
spreader / feeder when the daily task (PPD) exceeds 2,500 kg
(5,500 lbs). Include 3 to 4 feeding stations, a retractable
bridge to facilitate feeding small pieces, individual lane
counters and an automatic grading system.
E. Ironer: Provide a three roll, steam heated, chest type ironer
with 800 to 1,000 mm (32 to 40 inch) diameter rolls.
1. Capacity: Provide equipment to iron 3,300 mm
(130 inch) wide linen pieces.
a. When daily task (“PPD”) exceeds 2,948 kg
(6,500 lbs), provide a four roll unit with same
ironer features.
b. If the space allocation rules in the “Laundry
Program” above cannot be satisfied, provide a
smaller “foot-print” ironer and consider a two
roll, gas heated, roll type ironer.
2. Air & Electricity: Provide with connections for air and
electricity at front and rear ends, for the associated
feeder and folder.
3. Canopy & Exhaust: Include a canopy or hood, a vacuum
exhaust system for 3,300 mm (130 inch) minimum rolls.
F. Folder: Provide four primary folding lanes with two static
bars, one multi-lane small piece accumulator, individual
lane counters, and a lane selector control to enable 1, 2 or 4
primary lanes of folding and 2 or 3 final cross folds.
G. Stackers: If an automatic spreader / feeder is provided,
include one large piece stacker, minimum.
When the daily task (PPD) exceeds 2,948 kg (6,500 lbs),
consider a second stacker to automatically separate king
sheets from queen or double-size sheets when folded.

11A.9 Dry Folding

A. Program: Provide folding tables with one or more automated
small piece folders, and space for moving materials from
drying to storage areas.
B. Location: Adjacent to dryers and ironing equipment with
sufficient area and work space for tables and nearby access
to linen storage, cart packing and the Service Corridor.
C. Work Flow:
1. Fully dried work moves freely to folding area for
finishing, stacking and placement on carts.
2. Finished folded work is joined with finished flatwork
for storage and handling.
3. Provide a second doorway in the vicinity of the dry
folding area with access to the adjacent Service
Corridor.
4. Finished goods exit the facility directly or pass beyond
to clean linen staging and cart preparation area.
D. Folder: When the daily task (PPD) exceeds 2,500 kg
(5,500 lbs), provide an automatic small piece folder for
folding bath and beach towels, hand towels and bath mats.
1. Stack Conveyor: Include a stack conveyor to process
towels and position to return finished stacks to the
operator or away to a cart packing station.
2. Size: 1,200 to 1,800 mm (48 x 72 inch) minimum.
E. Table: Provide a heavy duty folding table with plastic
laminate top, one fixed lower shelf and drawers for supplies.
1. Location: Arrange table so operators may access and
work from both sides.
2. Size: 1,200 x 2,400 mm (4 x 8 ft.)

11A.10 Uniform Finishing

A. Program: If required by the project’s Uniform Program and
the project Facilities Program, provide equipment to finish
wet-washed polyester-cotton employee uniforms.
Uniforms are first, pre-conditioned in dryers, moved freely
and immediately to a garment finishing unit, and exit the
facility to the Uniform Issue room.
B. Location: Adjacent to dryers with doorway, access to the
Uniform Issue room and Service Corridor.
C. Garment Finisher: Gas or steam heated for 75 to 100 uniform
items per hour minimum with automatic feeder and return
rail, and counting mechanism.
D. Garment Racks: Provide at least five nestable garment racks
with swivel castors for staging uniforms on hangers prior
to finishing, after finishing and for temporary storage
before loading into the storage carousel of the Uniform
Issue room.
11A.11 Clean Linen Storage & Linen Carts
A. Program: Provide an area to temporarily store finished
circulating linen carts, pack and stage carts containing
guestroom linen for daily delivery to floor linen closets.
B. Location: Adjacent to the facility’s three finishing areas (dry
folding, flatwork ironing and uniforms) so finished goods
flow freely, directly and immediately to delivery carts,
storage and Service Corridor.
C. Work Flow:
1. Full linen storage carts are moved to clean linen storage
area and arranged in rows. Linen goods are transferred
to linen delivery carts.
2. Delivery carts, containing guestroom linens, exit the
facility to service elevators and to floor linen closets
throughout the property.
3. Specific goods (F&B napery, spa goods, beach and
pool towels, wet washed uniforms, etc.) exit the plant
immediately upon finishing.
D. Bulk Linen Storage Carts: Provide large capacity carts for
collecting and storing finished goods at the flatwork ironer
and dry folding stations.
1. Cart Features: Provide the following:
• Wire mesh or fully enclosed back and sides
• 3 to 4 fixed shelves (including bottom tray)
• 4 large diameter swivel castors at corners, two castors
with swivel locks

• 1,200 to 1,500 mm (48 to 60 inches) long by 600 to

750 mm (24 to 30 inches) wide
• Fabricate from plastic, chrome-plated or stainless steel
or fiberglass.
2. Quantity: Provide one bulk linen storage cart for each
500 lbs. of “PPD”, or portion to enable one-half of a
day’s (24 hour) supply of clean linen storage.
E. Linen Delivery Carts: Provide large capacity linen carts for
distribution of clean guestroom linens to property floor
linen closets.
1. Cart Features: Provide the following:
• With wire mesh or fully enclosed back and sides
• 3 to 4 fixed shelves (including bottom tray)
• 4 large diameter corners castors and two swivel
• 1,200 to 1,500 mm (48 to 60 inch) x 600 to 760 mm long
(24 to 30 inch) wide
• Fabricate from plastic, chrome-plated or stainless steel
or fiberglass.
2. Quantity: Provide enough carts for an entire day’s
guestroom linen supplies to store in the laundry for
night time delivery.
• If linen distribution occurs during the day, provide one
clean linen delivery cart for every 10 guestrooms.
• If distribution occurs at night time when the laundry is
not operating, provide one clean linen delivery cart for
every 6 guestrooms.
• Retrieve, refill and return carts to floor closets when
linen goods are finished in laundry during the day.
F. Scale: Provide a 1,200 mm x 1,500 mm (4 x 5 ft.) electronic
floor scale to weigh finished goods exiting the laundry for
property distribution.

11A.12 Valet (Garment Shop)

A. Program: Provide a separate, well ventilated room for valet
services to include on-site laundering, dry cleaning and
press only services for dry clean only employee uniforms,
staff clothing and guest clothing.
B. Size (approximate): 80 m2 (850 ft2) or base size on a market
study for the uniform program and valet services required
at each property.
On larger properties, international locations and higher
service demands, typically require an on-site facility.
Otherwise, an alternate solution is to manage the majority
of valet services off-site by a qualified by vendor.
C. Location: Immediately adjacent to the Uniform Issue
Room with connectivity to the Service Corridor. Direct
connectivity is not required to the Laundry area (unless as
a convenience) but is typically near the Laundry Facility.
D. Features: See “Laundry Facility - Design” above, for
applicable design features, criteria and include the
following:
1. Entry Door: Provide a single entry with pair of doors
each leaf 1.2 m (4 ft.) wide for adequate clearance
to allow installation, movement and equipment
replacement. Provide single door leaf with locking
hardware to secure doors.
2. Steam: Provide medium pressure steam service (30 to
50 bhp at 85 psi) to equipment from a boiler or steam
generator located in the property’s power plant or
mechanical room.
• If a central steam system is not available, provide a
separate mechanical room (not included in the 80 m2
(850 ft2) with fire rated walls to contain the equip-
ment and water softener.
• Ventilate the mechanical room and provide a shaft-
way flue for the boiler gas exhaust.
E. Table - Check-In, Marking & Sorting: Provide one table with a
HPL top, a fixed lower shelf below, suspended drawers for
supply storage, and a stack of cubicles at the rear top for
sorting folded clothing articles.
1. Table Size: 1,200 x 2,400 mm (48 x 96 inch) with
working surface at 710 to 760 mm (28 to 30 inch) above
the floor.
2. Cubicles: Three rows of 18 stacked cubicles, each at
405 mm (16 inch) wide x 305 mm (12 inch) high x
305 mm (12 inch) deep.

3. Electric: Mount a quadruplex electric outlet on the wall

at either end of the table for appliances placed on the
table’s working surface.
4. Lighting: Provide adequate lighting at table surface and
surrounding areas.
F. Marking Machine: Provide one dry ink or heat seal marking
machine.
G. Spotting Board: Provide one spotting board with steam and
water services, a water spray wand and associated hand
tools and brushes.
H. Dry Cleaning Machine: Provide two, fully automatic, self
contained dry cleaning machines, each with 11 to 12 kg
(25 lbs) or a single machine with 16 to 18 kg (35 to 40 lbs)
capacity.
1. Provide completely sealed to prevent escape of cleaning
fluid vapors, and equip to produce nitrogen supplies to
generate inert operating environs.
2. Features include:
• Button trap
• Containment tray
• Minimum of two solvent bath storage tanks
3. Equip each machine with a refrigerated type cooler
to provide chilled water for solvent recovery and
condensation purposes, or a single cooler to serve both
dry cleaning machines.
4. Solvent type is hydrocarbon unless otherwise directed
by owner, MI or governing authority.
I. Washers & Dryers: Provide two, conventional stacked,
“home-style” washers and dryers for wet washable staff
and guest clothing (wet washable employee uniforms are
processed in the primary laundry equipment).
1. Washer: 7 kg (15 lbs) minimum, each; front load style
2. Dryer: Gas or electricity with lint filter
J. Shirt Finishing Unit: Provide one, single-buck body finishing
cabinet, a sleeve finishing cabinet and a collar-cuff-yoke
press. Equip with a water spray wand and arrange as a
group to facilitate efficient utilization by a single operator.
K. Combination Pants, Coat & Dress Bay: Provide and arrange the
space in a single group, forming a circle or an ellipse with
the puff finisher placed for the utility and legger pressing
and operators for the following equipment:
• Form finisher
• Utility dry clean finishing press with hand-iron and
water spray wand
• Automatic pants top finisher

• Pants legger press with hand-iron and water spray wand

• Triple head puff finishing unit with steam and vacuum
features (no pressing heads)
L. Finishing Board: Provide on “Up-Air” style board with hand-
iron and water spray wand for final touch-ups.
M. High Pressure Steam (option): If space and high pressure
steam are available, provide the following:
1. Laundry Press Unit: One, 1,200 mm (48 inch) tapered
head utility laundry press.
2. Laundry Press. One mushroom head utility laundry
press. (Laundry presses differ from dry clean presses
because the upper platens are not covered and padded,
and utilize higher pressure steam 6.8 to 8.5 bar (100 to
125 psi)).
N. FF&E and Miscellaneous Equipment:
• Desk and chair; filing cabinet; computer (PMS / PBS)
<13A>
• Shirt folder, manual, one
• Garment bagging station, one
• Basket scale to measure loads for dry cleaning machines
• Central vacuum unit servicing six connections
• Damp boxes or saddle carts, four
• Slick rails for temporary staging of in-process garments
• Metal storage cabinet, fire rated to store spotting and
cleaning chemicals
O. House Telephone: <13B> Wall mounted, at one side of the
check-in table.

11A.13 Uniform Storage & Issue

A. Program: Provide an enclosed area to support the property’s
Uniform Management Program for storage, tailoring,
repair and issue of employee uniforms.
B. Location: Locate the room along the Service Corridor,
immediately adjacent to the Garment Shop and close
to, or across the Service Corridor from the Laundry
area and position near the Employee Locker Rooms and
Housekeeping department to maximize operational and
supervisory efficiency.
C. Features: Provide the same design features required for the
Laundry and Garment Shop except for the floor slab.
D. Alcove: Provide a 915 mm (3 ft.) deep alcove off the Service
Corridor, the full width of the Uniform Storage room so
employees may queue at the issue counter without blocking
the corridor.
E. Issue Counter: Provide a counter in the wall separating the
Uniform Room from the Alcove.
1. Size: 914 to 1,524 mm (36 to 60 inch) long on the
corridor side and as long inside the room as other
features may allow.
2. Counter Height: 1,000 mm (40 inch) above the floor
3. Configuration: Project the counter into the alcove at
305 mm (12 inch) and extend into the Uniform Issue
room 765 mm (30 inch).
4. Opening: Size above counter:
a. Length: Same as counter length on alcove side
b. Height: 1,220 to 1,525 mm (48 to 60 inch)
c. Security: Provide a metal roll-up door or sliding
glass panels to secure the room when not occupied.
5. Cart Space: Below the counter, inside the Uniform
Room, provide space for hamper carts for collection of
soiled clothing articles.
6. Finish: HPL or seamless aluminum sheet counter
surface
7. Lighting: See Module <15C>.
F. Door: 915 mm (36 inch) wide, immediately adjacent to the
Issue Counter, with outward swing into corridor and hinge
side away from the counter.
G. Tailoring Station: Inside the door and on the room side
opposite the issue counter, and provide a 1.5 m (5 ft.) wide
by 3 m (10 ft.) deep space to place two sewing stations
(tables with sewing and button machines, and chairs).
1. Design the Uniform Issue room and Alcove at 3.5 to
4.1 m (11'-6" to 13'-6") wide minimum.

2. For the double-tier uniform storage carousel space,

design a portion of Uniform Issue room narrower than
the 3 m (10 ft.) depth required for the tailor station.
H. Uniform Storage Carousel: Provide one, double-tier carousel
with remote positioning selector. Size carousel large
enough to provide hanging slots equal to or exceeding
twice the guestroom count.
I. Equipment:
1. Sewing Machine: One with work table and chair
2. Button Machine: One with work table and chair
3. Seal Marking Machine: One dry ink or heat seal ma-
chine to apply identification mark or label on employee
uniforms.
J. Telephone: Provide a wall house phone at end of the Issue
Counter. <13B>
K. Electrical: <15C> Provide duplex wall outlets for the
following:
1. Sewing stations, two
2. Marking machine at end of Issue Counter
11A.14 Laundry Mechanical Equipment Room
A. Program: Provide a dedicated, enclosed (2 hour fire rated)
Laundry Mechanical Equipment Room to accommodate
the water systems equipment components and, if required,
the Laundry and Garment Shop steam generating systems.
Configure to efficiently serve laundry process equipment
(washers, dryers, ironer, etc.).
1. Size: Provide from 37 to 74 m2 (400 to 800 ft2) based on
the extent the equipment program.
2. Location: Adjacent to laundry wash area and with an
exterior wall for equipment installation or replacement,
and boiler supply air requirements.
B. Equipment Access: Provide access ways and wide doorways,
2.4 m (8 ft.) minimum or removable wall panel systems
that lead directly from grade access into the Mechanical
Room.
C. Features: See the project Facilities Program and “Laundry
Facility - Design” above for applicable Mechanical Room
design features and criteria.
D. Water Storage Pits: Provide one or two sub-floor concrete
water storage pits based on the programmed laundry usage
considering the following:
• waste water heat recovery and reclamation system
• rinse water reuse system

1. Trench: Provide each pit with direct connection to a

corresponding trench positioned beneath or behind
bank of washers.
2. Containment Curb: 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 inch) curb
at floor surface, covered with removable galvanized or
stainless steel diamond plate and access panel.
3. Construction: Provide monolithic reinforced concrete
construction.
4. Waster Water Pit: Net capacity size required to contain
a volume equal to a one-half hour supply of waste water
from washers (in gallons) at 20% of the “PPD” value,
where the volume of pit above the inlet from the trench
that is not utilized for storage, results in considerably
less than the pit’s gross volume.
5. Reuse Water Pit: Net capacity size to contain a volume
equal to a one-hour supply of rinse water from the
washers (in gallons) at 10 to 15% of the “PPD” value.
6. Drains: Provide 150 mm (6 inch) overflow drains in
each pit wall at an elevation just above the inlet pipes.
If two pits are planned, position adjacent to each other
with the demising wall and overflow from the rinse
water pit to the waste water pit (but not the reverse).
7. Tanks: Provide above floor tanks with equal capacity
if water storage pits are not practical. Washer drain
trenches empty into small catchments equipped with
sump pumps to supply water to tanks.
E. Drain Boxes: Provide 2 to 3 pre-fabricated floor drain
boxes to capture waste and equipment drain flow in the
Mechanical Room.
1. Size: 450 mm (18 inch) cubed with 102 to 150 mm (4 to
6 inch) drain, and steel grate covers, field cut, to accept
incoming drain lines from equipment connection
points.
2. Option: Provide pre-cast concrete drain boxes rather
than fabricate on site.
3. Connection: Connect drains from drain boxes beneath
the floor with overflow drains from the water storage
pits and direct to the building’s sanitary waste system.

11A.15 Wash Chemical Storage & Injection System

A. Program: Provide a secure, enclosed and well ventilated
space for storage of washing chemicals and provisions for
liquid chemical injection equipment as typically provided
by a chemical vendor.
B. Location: Position close to the laundry washers with close
access to the Service Corridor entrance at the soiled end
of the laundry facility to allow unimpeded movement of
chemical barrels (utilizing a barrel cart) from the corridor
into the store room.
C. Features: See the “Laundry Facility - Design” above for
applicable Chemical Storage Room design features, criteria
and provide the following features:
1. Ceiling Height: 2.75 m (9 ft.)
2. Entry Door: 915 mm (3 ft.) wide x 2 m (6'-8") high and
equip with locking hardware.
3. Tubing Access: Provide a 150 mm (6 inch) diameter
opening through the storeroom wall for plastic tubing
between the injectors and the laundry washers. Line
the opening with a collar (such as a length of 150 mm
(6 inch) diameter PVC pipe).
4. Floor Drains: Not required. (prevents chemical spills
into the sanitary waste system).
5. Containment curbs: Not required.
D. Equipment & Fixtures:
1. Eye Wash Station. See Module <16> Loss Prevention
and <15B>.
2. Water Mixing Valve: Thermostatic
3. Shelving: Provide fixed metal wall shelves above the
barrel storage area.

11A.16 Air Compressor Room

A. Program: Provide air compressor equipment in a secure,
enclosed and well ventilated space for compressed air
service for the Laundry and Garment Shop equipment.
B. Location: Provide in a location appropriate for laundry
equipment connections and operations such as flatwork
folder, small piece folders and, if required, the dryer
enclosure.
Do not position air compressors in the Laundry Mechanical
Room where the space contains steam generating
equipment.
C. Features: See the “Laundry Facility - Design” above for
applicable Air Compressor Room design features, criteria
and provide the following features:
1. Enclosure: Provide compressor room with high acoustic
control, minimum of STC 60.
2. Ceiling: 2.75 m (9 ft.) high AFF with acoustical tile
3. Entry Door: 0.91 m (3 ft.) wide with a lock
4. Floor Drain: Provide 13 mm (½ inch) diameter copper
drain lines from equipment (each compressor, air dryer
and receiver tank) condensate connections to floor
drains.
D. Air Compressors: Provide one to two, rotary style, air cooled
air compressors.
1. Line Pressure: 5.8 to 6.8 bars (85 to 100 psi) nominal
2. Size: 10 hp (7.5 kW). If more than one flatwork ironing
system or small piece folder is provided, increase the
compressor sizes to 20 hp (15 kW) or larger.
E. Air Dryer: Provide one, refrigerated compressed air dryer
sized to serve air compressors.
F. Air Receiver Tank: Provide one, 755 liters (200 gallon) or
larger compressed air receiver tank with pressure gauge.
Air flows from the compressor, through the dryer before
entering the receiver tank.
G. Filters: Provide in-line particulate and moisture filters with
automatic condensate drains.
H. Air Outlets: Provide compressed air outlets and short length
of hose and nozzle at ironers, dryers and valet.

11A.17 Clean & Soiled Linen Holding (option)

A. Program: If the property does not require an on-site
Laundry Facility, provide a secure room for the following:
1. Soiled Linens Storage: For products awaiting delivery
to an off-site service.
2. Clean Linen Return Storage: For products received
from an off-site laundry.
3. Cart Area: For loading and staging the property’s linen
for delivery.
B. Location: Position holding room close to the Receiving Area
and adjacent to the Service Corridor with access to support
spaces, such as Housekeeping, Garment Shop and Uniform
Issue room to provide efficient operations and supervision.
C. Holding Room: Provide the same general design criteria,
features, clearance (except floor slab thickness and
reinforcement), etc. as required for laundry facilities where
appropriate. See “Laundry Facility - Design” above
D. Carts: Provide for linen delivery. See “Clean Linen Storage
& Linen Carts” above.

11A.18 Laundry Equipment Standard of Quality

A. Equipment Standard of Quality: The following list establishes
an example for the level of quality, construction, features,
etc., required for Laundry equipment:
Equipment Manufacturer
Air Compressor Ingersol Rand; Kaeser; Quincy
Air Vacuum (garment shop) Rema; Cissell Dryset
Boilers and Steam Generators Cleaver-Brooks; Fulton; Miura
Carousel, Uniform Storage White Conveyors; Railex
Cart / Hampers Meese; CR Daniels; ChemTainer;
Tingue-Brown; Metropolitan Wire
Computer System, Production Data Chicago Dryer CHILinc
Conveyor, Flat-Bed Hy-trol or equal
Dry-Cleaning Machines Multimatic; Columbia; Forenta;
Firbimatic
Dryers, less than 200 lbs Milnor; Cissell; Huebsch; American
Dryer Corp; Unimac
Dryers, 200 lbs or larger Challenge, Lavatec, ADC; Braun /
Norman
Folder, Sheet Chicago Dryer Skyline; Lavatec;
Jensen; Braun Omega
Folder, Shirt Forenta; Uni-Press
Folder, Towels Chicago Dryer Air Chicago; Braun
Sigma; Jensen; Kannegiesser
Form Finisher Cissell; Forenta
Garment Bagger Bishop-Freeman
Garment Finisher Colmac; Leonard Automatics
Garment Rack, nestable Astechnologies; Atlanta Rail &
Conveyor
Heat Seal & Marking Machines Texmark; Natmar; Thermopatch
Ironer, flatwork, gas-heated roll- Chicago Dryer Imperial 232
type
Ironer, flatwork, steam-heated Chicago Dryer; Braun; Jensen,
chest-type Lavatec
Ironer, flatwork, thermal-oil heated Chicago Dryer Century PH
chest-type
Pants Top Finisher Cissell; Ajax; Forenta
Press, Collar-Cuff-Yoke Forenta, Uni-Press; Ajax
Press, Pants Legger Cissell; Ajax, Forenta
Press, Shirt Body Cabinet Forenta; Uni-Press; Ajax
Press, Shirt Sleeve Cabinet Forenta; Uni-Press; Ajax
Press, Utility Dry Clean Finishing Forenta; Hoffman; Uni-Press; Ajax
Press, Utility Laundry Finishing Forenta, Ajax
Puff Finisher Forenta; Cissell
Scale, Basket Newhouse Specialty, Bishop Freeman

Equipment Manufacturer
Scale, Electronic Platform Toledo; Richardson; Cardinal
Sewing & Button Machines Chandler
Sheet Spreader / Feeder Chicago Dryer King Edge; Braun;
Jensen
Sink, Soak E.L. Mustee; Durastone
Slick Rail White Conveyor; Speed Check
Spotting Board Cissell; Forenta
Up-Air Finishing Board Uni-Press; Hi-Steam
Washers, 135 lbs or less Milnor; Unimac; Washex
Washers, greater than 135 lbs Milnor, Washex, Braun, Lavatec
Washers, home-style, and dryers Speed Queen, Maytag
Water Systems, vented Kemco Systems; Ludell; Thermal
Engineering of Arizona

including:
• 7B Guestroom Corridors / Support
• 11B Housekeeping
B. Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP) Coordination: See
Module <15>.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
11B
Housekeeping
11B - Housekeeping THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
11B.1 Overview 1
11B.2 Programmed Spaces & Areas 2
11B.3 Systems Coordination 6

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Housekeeping | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Housekeeping - 11B
Housekeeping
11B.1 Overview
A. Program: Provide Housekeeping Facilities to support the
property’s high standards of guest service.
MI Project Contact 1. Location: Locate in BOH area adjacent to Laundry
Marriott International - “MI” - is the for management efficiency and, as near as possible,
corporate entity that manages this to Service Corridor and Service Elevator to minimize
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. travel by housekeepers.
project specific manager referenced 2. Size / Area: Comply with the following or as required
by the term “MI” throughout this by the Facilities Program.
Module. a. Size / Area: 120 m² (1,200 sq. ft.)
b. Doors: Access space through pair of 0.9 x 2 m
(3 ft. x 6'-8") doors adjacent to Issue Counter.
c. Ceiling Height: 2.4 m (8 ft.) minimum.
Figure 1 - Housekeeping Facilities Adjacency Diagram
Service Elevators
Maintenance to Guestrooms
<9>
Employee
Cafeteria
<8B>
Housekeeping &
Laundry
Training Room
Employee
Locker Room
Back-of-House Corridor
Men
Uniform Issue
Employee
Locker
Room
Women Security & Fire Control Room
<16> <14>
HR
<8A> Ramp / Employee Entry
Truck Dock 1
Receiving Truck Dock 2

<9>
Trash
Can Wash / Dry

Temporary Storage
Temporary Storage
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Housekeeping 1

11B.2 Programmed Spaces & Areas

A. Programmed Spaces: Accommodate the functions as outlined
in the project Facilities Program and as illustrated for the
following spaces:
Space Size:
Private Open
(see example plan) m² sq. ft.
Director of Services 9.3 100 X
Housekeeping Manager 7.4 80 X
Housekeeping Supervisor 4.5 48 X
Issue Counter (length) 1.8 6 X
Bulk Storage 42.0 450 X
Lost and Found 6.0 64 X
Glass washing see example plan
Cleaning Equipment 7.4 80 X
Cleaning Chemical Station see example plan
Housekeeping Laundry 9.0 96 X
Uniform Distribution <11A> see Laundry
B. Steps, Stairs, Ramps & Slip Resistance: See Module <16> -

Loss Prevention.
C. Windows & Safety Glass: See Modules <GR> and <16>
D. Management Offices:
1. Director of Services: Typically, located in Laundry area
to serve as Laundry Manager. If Laundry is off-site, the
Director of Services is located in Housekeeping.
2. Housekeeping Manager: Enclosed office area for the
management of housekeeping activities, generally
located convenient to housekeeping entrance.
Housekeeping Manager generally reports to the
Director of Services.
a. Vision Panel: Provide glass vision panel to per-
mit visual supervision of housekeeping activities
while providing acoustical privacy.
b. Office: May be combined with the office of
Director of Service (Laundry Manager), espe-
cially when there is no on-site central laundry.
c. Equipment: Desk, chair, filing cabinets, PMS
<13A>, telephone. <13C>
3. Housekeeping Supervisor: Position reports to
Housekeeping Manager and is responsible for man-
aging the logistics of housekeeping assignments and
activities.
a. Locate adjacent to Issue Counter.
b. Open area with desk, chair and PMS <13A>, tele-
phone <13B>.
2 Housekeeping | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Figure 2 - Housekeeping Facilities Example Plan

4. Finishes:
a. Floor: Vinyl composition tile
b. Base: Resilient base
c. Walls: Painted
E. Open Space: Provide a common area where housekeepers meet
for line up and receive housekeeping assignments and supplies.
1. Issue Counter: Pass through work counter at service
corridor to facilitate distribution of housekeeping
assignments and supplies.
a. Size: 1.8 m (6 ft.) long; 1.1 m high and 1 m deep
(3'- 6" x 3 ft.) open to Service Corridor.
b. Counter: High pressure laminate top finish and
open adjustable shelving below.
c. Queuing Area: 1 m (3'-3") deep alcove for full
length of Issue Counter on Service Corridor side.
2. Alcove: On housekeeping side, 1.7 m wide (5'-6")
alcove adjacent to Issue Counter for housekeeping
basket carts.
3. Overhead Rolling Steel Door: Clear head height of
2 m (6'-8"); lockable rolling metal shutter, mounted on
Housekeeping side of opening.
4. Clip Board Space: Wall area convenient to entrance for
mounting clipboards for housekeeping staff; one clip-
board for every 15 rooms.
5. Equipment:
a. Telephone: Wall mounted house phone located in
the open space <13B>
b. Computer (PMS / PBS): See Module <13A>
c. PMS (systems applications): See Module <13A>
F. Secured Bulk Storage: Provide an enclosed, secured area for
storing and controlling reserve housekeeping materials,
bulk supplies, and guest room related equipment:
1. Enclosure: Enclose area with solid partition or wire mesh
partition. Extend partition to underside of structure.
2. Door: Lockable and under the control of the Housekeeping
Manager / Supervisor.
3. Amenity Assembly: Provide counter work area and
bulk storage for assembling guestroom amenity (soap,
shampoo, etc.) baskets for distribution to housekeeping.
4. Open Shelving: Provide full height metal shelving 0.6 m
(2 ft.) deep with 0.9 m (3 ft.) aisles for storing reserve
linens, pillows, cots, guestroom equipment and bulk
housekeeping supplies and equipment.

G. Lost & Found: Provide a separate enclosed and secured area,

room or closet in Housekeeping to store Guest items turned in
as Lost and Found. <16>
At larger hotels, Lost and Found may be located at the Security
Office. At small hotels, Lost and Found is typically managed in
Housekeeping. Verify location with MI.
1. Partition: Wire mesh or solid partition enclosure with framed
door to secure space. Extend partitions to structure above.
2. Door: Framed door; secure with magnetic encoded card
electronic operated lock with audit record. <16>
H. Housekeepers Storage Cleaning Equipment: Provide an enclosed
room for storing and securing cleaning equipment and supplies
(vacuums, floor care, carpet cleaning machines, mops, buckets,
etc.).
1. Mop Sink: Include to allow convenient servicing of cleaning
equipment.
2. Shelving: Provide shelving for storage of equipment and
supplies.
I. Linen Storage: Provide a secure room with shelving to store linen
and terry materials. May be included in Bulk Storage.
J. Glass Washing: Provide a work area to wash guestroom
glassware. Facility is independent of kitchen dish washing to
avoid disruption to food services. Within the open work area,
1. Glass Washer: Under counter, rack type in center of plastic
laminate counter top with open shelving below.
2. Work Surface: 0.6 x 2.4 m (2 x 8 ft.).
3. Utility Sink: 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 inches) built into counter
top.
K. Cleaning Chemical Station: Provide an area for the bulk storage
and distribution of cleaning chemicals to include the following:
1. Cleaning Chemical Station: A proprietary combination and
distribution system for bulk storage, mixing and refilling
cleaning chemical dispensers used by housekeepers.
2. Eye Wash Station: <15B> <16> Centrally locate for shared
availability for housekeeping activities.
L. Housekeeping Laundry: Provide a small capacity laundry
to provide limited guest laundry service and to service
housekeeping uses. Include the following features:
1. Provide utility clothes washer and dryer with adjacent 0.6 m
deep x 1.2 m long (2 x 4 ft.) plastic laminate faced work
counter.
2. Provide ironing and sewing areas for limited guest service.
3. If an on-site laundry and dry cleaning facility is available,
the location of the housekeeping laundry may be adjusted to
share facilities.

M. Sewing / Valet: Typically, located in the Uniform Issue area

<11A>. Locate in housekeeping if Uniform Issue area is
limited or off-site.
Uniform Distribution: See Laundry <11A>. At properties
without on-site laundry and dry cleaning, uniform
distribution may be managed within housekeeping.
N. Finishes:
1. Floor: Concrete, sealed or epoxy painted
2. Walls: Epoxy Painted
3. Ceiling: Exposed (not painted)
O. FF&E: Provide free standing furniture. See <GR5>
11B.3 Systems Coordination
including:
• 11A Laundry / Valet Facility

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
12
Elevators & Escalators
12 - Elevators & Escalators THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
12.1 Overview 1
12.2 Common Elevator Features 3
12.3 Fire & Emergency Control 5
12.4 Passenger Elevators 6
12.5 High Speed Elevators 10
12.6 Shuttle Elevators 11
12.7 Service Elevators 12
12.8 Freight Elevators 15
12.9 Escalators 16

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Elevators | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Elevators & Escalators - 12
Elevators & Escalators

12.1 Overview
A. Program: Provide efficient passenger and service elevators
to support property operations and a high level of guest
services.
MI Project Contact B. Code Compliance: Design, construct and install elevators
Marriott International - “MI” - is the and escalators in compliance with standards, criteria and
corporate entity that manages this references in this Module including the following:
Contact the MI Design Manager for the 1. ASME A17.1 American Standard Safety Code
project specific manager referenced for Elevators and Escalators, current edition and
by the term “MI” throughout this supplements enforced by governing jurisdictions.
Module.
2. Other governing codes, ordinances, laws, etc. applicable
to elevators and escalators.
3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and equal
standard or government regulation for persons with
disabilities.
4. This Design Standard is not intended to negate
governing codes or laws. When standards conflict,
resolve with MI.
C. Elevator Performance: Provide performance analysis to
support recommendations for the quantity, type, speed and
capacity of passenger and service elevators and escalators
to meet the requirements of this Module.
D. Circulation Planning: Coordinate elevator performance
analysis with the following circulation requirements:
1. Lobby: When Lobby, Public and Function areas are
located on more than one floor, vertical circulation
is provided by a combination of grand stairs, public
circulation stairs, escalators and shuttle elevators.
2. Street Entry: When the property street entry is not on
the same floor as the Lobby or Function area, shuttle
elevators and escalators are typically provided to
transport property and function guests from street level
to the Lobby or Function area.
3. Shuttle Elevators: Plan shuttle elevators serving public
access areas (parking structure, street entry, etc.) to
deliver passengers directly to the lobby / reception area
or public circulation area without access to guest floors
and to allow passive, visual access control for guests.
4. Beach / Pool: Provide a dedicated beach / pool elevator
at a long guestroom wing to avoid requiring guests to
return to the central elevator bank.
5. Multiple Building Wings: Consider providing elevator
service at remote wings.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Elevators 1

6. Remote Amenities: Provide an elevator at building

wings that provide access to remote amenities and
to avoid requiring guests to return to a central lobby
elevator.
7. Function Areas: Plan circulation so those guests
arriving and leaving the Function area do not overload
the passenger elevators.
8. Multi-Use Projects: In order to maintain property
operational and control access, do not share property
elevators with other occupancies as determined by the
Loss Prevention Review Process <16> – review with
the MI representative.
E. Elevator Technology: Evaluate suitability and potential cost
savings using manufacturers’ machine room-less (MRL)
systems for applications no more than approximately 10
stories in height.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide conveyance equipment
from one of the following. Review other providers with MI
representative.
• Kone Inc.
• Mitsubishi
• Otis Elevator Company
• Schindler Elevator Corporation
• ThyssenKrupp
Acceptable Manufacturer shall provide service office or
service route within 80 k (50 miles) of the project location
or provide a service organization with a 60 minute response
to service request.
2 Elevators | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

12.2 Common Elevator Features

A. Dimensions: Comply with ADA Accessibility Regulations
for minimum dimensions effecting person with disabilities.
B. Control Types: Provide the following for Passenger and
Service Elevators:
1. Traction: Group operation, microprocessor controlled
with AC Variable Voltage, Variable Frequency (VVVF)
drive.
2. Hydraulic: Selective, collective, microprocessor con-
trolled with AC electronic soft starting.
C. Hydraulic Elevators:
1. Buried Systems: Confirm soil corrosiveness or rock
content when considering installation of hydraulic
elevators.
2. Unit Protection: Protect buried hydraulic jack units
with sealed PVC outer casing.
3. Oil / Electric Line Protection: Avoid locating oil and
electric lines underground. If required, enclose in PVC
pipe.
4. Oil Cooling: Provide equipment designed for a
minimum of 80 up-starts per hour.
a. If higher usage is anticipated, design for 120 up-
starts per hour or provide oil cooling system.
b. Confirm with manufacturer if oil cooling is
required because of high anticipated up-starts and
provide the oil cooling system.
D. Loss Prevention (LP): See Module <16>.
1. Emergency Medical Evacuation: Size at least one
elevator cab and door opening to accommodate
stretcher movement from each floor. See code for
stretcher requirements.
2. Controlled Access: See elevator cab controls for elevator
control unit (ECU); non-emergency access.
3. Elevator Monitoring Panels: Provide to monitor elevator
service from the Security Office <16> and Call Center
<8A>.
E. Related Construction: Provide ladders, separator and
support beams, associated angles and equipment including
building structural support elements for elevator equipment
reactions for a complete system installation. Provide and
coordinate requirements for the following:
1. Machine Room: For HVAC, see Module <15A>.
a. Door / Frame: 107 cm (3'-6") wide door, hollow
steel door and frame with paint finish.

b. Floor / Base: Steel trowelled concrete, hardened,

stained and sealed; painted masonry base.
2. Sump Pit & Cover, Pump, Drains: Required, see Module
<15B>.
3. Service Electric & Outlets: See Module <15C>.
F. Exterior Application: Avoid using exterior elevators exposed to
weather. Provide stainless steel with required nickel content
for salt air conditions.
G. Cab Interior Design: See separate requirements for passenger
and service elevators, and example diagrams and finish notes
in this Module that are conceptual and intended to define the
minimum quality level.
H. Cab & Ceiling Lighting: <15C> Provide power, cab lights and
emergency lighting as required by code; see example diagrams
and finish notes in this Module.
1. Ceiling: Design and provide cove and ceiling lighting for
a minimum of 10 foot-candles controlled by dimmers; set
to 5 foot-candles minimum.
2. Ceiling Light: As required by Interior Design.
3. Emergency Lighting: Provide in lighting cove.
I. Cab Controls & Indicators: See specific passenger and service
elevator requirements in this Module below and include the
following:
1. Operating Panels: Provide white plastic, internally
illuminated operating buttons with 15 mm (⅝ inch) floor
numerals.
2. Controlled Access: Provide operator programmable
electronic elevator control unit (ECU) <16> to match
guestroom system that registers calls for selected floors Hallway Floor Controls
when activated.
3. Car Position Indicator: Small digital readout located in or Provide custom pol-
above operating panel. ished brass call button
J. Hallway Floor Controls & Indicators: Provide hallway call buttons plate for the push but-
and hall lanterns in elevator foyers and vestibules. ton station.
1. Push Button Station: One hall push button station for each
bank of elevators.
2. Locations: Mount call buttons at 107 cm (42 inch) on center
above floor and hall lantern faceplate top edge aligned with
top of hoistway entrance frame head.
K. Hoistway Entries: See the example diagrams for passenger and
service elevators, and finish notes in this Module.
L. Elevator Signage: Identify ADA requirements, coordinate
and review elevator signage with MI Interior Design and the
graphics package. <GR> See Module <7A> for floor numbering.

M. Cab Ventilation: Provide cab ventilation for the comfort of

occupants and to exhaust heat from lighting.
1. Natural Ventilation: Provide natural cab ventilation as
required by code, at top and floor of cab.
2. Exhaust Blower: Provide a quiet, exhaust blower at the
cab ceiling.
N. Elevator Shaft Pressurization: See Module <15A> for criteria.
12.3 Fire & Emergency Control
A. General: See Module <14> for fire protection and life safety
standards.
B. System Controls: Coordinate with governing regulations for
the following elevator system fire and emergency control
features.
1. Fireman’s Phone Jacks: When required, provide in cab.
2. Emergency Keys: Provide key operated terminal
access switches at top and bottom floors for access to
top of car and elevator pit. Locate key switch in elevator
jamb immediately below floor identification plate.
3. Fireman’s Lock Boxes: Identify regulatory
requirements. When required, provide lock box and
coordinate its location with MI Design Managment and
the Interior Designer.
4. Emergency Entry: Where allowed by governing
authority, provide access keyways in hoistway doors at
each floor served. Do not include emergency side exit
in car enclosures unless required by governing code.
5. Emergency Exit: In elevator cab ceiling, provide
a personnel exit hatch that does not interfere with
lighting. Coordinate lighting with the ceiling design
and comply with code dimensions.
C. Fire Command & Function Panel: <14>
1. Locate panel in Fire Command Room or Security
Office in compliance with governing authority. Provide
remote monitor panel at Call Center.
2. Elevator Recall & Firefighters’ Operation: Provide
Phase 1 Designated Level and Alternate Level Recall,
Shunt Trip and Phase 2 Firefighters’ In-Car Operations
in compliance with current ASME A17.1.
D. Emergency Intercom / Telephone: Provide 2-way, ADA
compliant, emergency intercom / telephone. Mount
integral with operating panel (not in a telephone cabinet).
1. Connection: Connect intercom telephone to Call Center
or Security Office <16> for 24 hour, 7 days per week
monitoring.

2. Speaker: Conceal intercom / telephone speaker from

passenger view.
3. Instructions: Mount intercom / telephone instructions
as required by governing code and review with MI.
4. Operation: Activate intercom / telephone by pressing
alarm button or dedicated “telephone” button in cab
station.
E. Emergency Electrical Systems: See Modules <14> and <15C>
for standby power and emergency electrical requirements.
Comply with governing code. Connect elevators, control
rooms and control room ventilation to standby power.
F. Emergency Instructions: In passenger elevator cabs and
lobbies, provide signage consistent with governing codes.
1. Confirm signage design and location with MI <GR>.
2. Identify signage location on Interior Design documents.
12.4 Passenger Elevators
A. Program: Provide passenger elevator system for guests and
public use.
1. Incorporate accessibility features as required by gov-
erning code and regulations, and this Module.
2. Also, see “Shuttle Elevators” hereafter.
B. Planning Guide: Provide a minimum of 2 passenger
elevators.
1. Typically, provide one elevator for each increment of
100 guestrooms for low and mid-rise guestroom towers.
2. Additional elevators may be required when serving:
a. Guestroom Towers: More than 20 floors.
b. Large Function Areas: Above or below the
property entrance floor.
c. Guest Amenity Areas: Remote from the guest-
room tower.
C. Destination Dispatch (DD) Control: When desirable for
improving elevator calls at lobby by reducing passenger
wait time, consider Destination Dispatch (DD) control
systems (available from major elevator companies).
The DD controls, rather than the typical up and down
buttons in the elevator lobby, have passenger call
registration terminals to provide higher elevator service
quality when the following building and passenger elevator
design conditions exist:
1. Multiple Function Space Floors: When conference and
meeting rooms are on multiple floors.

Exterior Elevation: Major, Minor & Guest Public Areas

n Entry Door
q Guest & Minor Public Areas:
Frame: 14 gauge steel; baked
enamel finish
Major Public Areas:
Frame: 14 gauge steel; applied
n p 16 gauge bronze or brass,
embossed finish doors / frame
o o Hall Call Buttons:

Follow code requirements for type
7’- 0”
p Floor Indicator: Raised number and
5’- 0”
in Braille; comply with code
q Hall Lantern: Up and Down indica-
3’- 6”
tors with audible signals, 1 for up, 2
for down at each floor. Provide
integral digital car position indicator
at principle public level
Front Elevation, Interior n Cab Floor Finish: Hard surface such as

selected stone for Lobby
s
o Electrical Service:
Convenience Outlet
t
varies
p Interior Doors and Side Panels:

Stainless steel; No. 4 brushed finish,
u
1’- 0”
minimum
r Other finishes: Bronze, brass
q Certificate Notice: (on engraved

plate) “Certificate is on file in
Engineer’s Office”
r Operating Panel: Provide latest

q technology available in the market,
such as touch screen; controlled
access with electronic - proximity
7’- 0”
card reader (except service elevators)

compatible with Guestroom system
(Note: Floor #13 typically not used in
the U.S., #4 in China)
3.7 ft.
s Ceiling: Decorative, coffered ceiling

p design; coordinate material selection
o with entry Lobby interior design.
n Perimeter cove lighting
t Overhead Ceiling Space: Paint flat

black or as appropriate for ceiling
design
u Lighting: Decorative lighting -

Note: The images above are diagramatic. Coordinate coordinate with entry Lobby
cab design with entry Lobby interior design. interior design

2. Elevators not Serving Same Floors: When groups of

elevators do not serve the same floors. Example, only two
elevators of a four car group service the lower level parking
structure.
3. Group of Four Elevators or More: When there is a group of
four elevators or more.
4. Comparison Study & Recommendations: Provide a full
comparison study by the project elevator consultant to
show performance of DD compared to standard passenger
elevator call system and recommendations for DD control
system.
D. Performance Criteria: Design passenger elevators to handle the
highest demand. The following criteria are intended for a high-
rise building with a central elevator lobby:
Passenger Elevator Selection Criteria
Speed
Floors Served Machine Type
m/sec. fpm
2 to 3 (0.63 to 0.75) 125 to 150 Hydraulic
2 to 3 (065 to 0.75/1.00) 100 to 200 MRL
3 to 10 (1.00 to 1.75) 200 to 350 Traction / OHMR / MRL
7 to 13 (1.75) 350 Traction / OHMR
13 to 15 (1.75 to 2.50) 350 to 500 Traction / OHMR
15+ (2.50+) 500+ Gearless / OHMR
MRL = Machine Roomless
OHMR = Overhead Machine Room
1. Design passenger elevator performance with a calculated
average interval of no more than 45 seconds during periods
of heavy 2-way traffic. Minimum handling capacity of 12%
of guest population, with 1.75 occupants per guestroom in
five minutes at 100% occupancy.
2. Adjust occupants per guestroom based on property use;
verify with MI.
3. At property over 700 guestrooms use 2.0 occupants per
guestroom.
4. Assume ballroom is full with a local function.
E. Location: Central to guestrooms served.
1. Visible from front desk at Lobby.
2. Do not open elevators directly on guest corridors.
3. Provide a vestibule or foyer to define a waiting area.
4. Serve parking, if present, with separate shuttle elevators
per Loss Prevention Review process <16>
F. Sizes (Passenger):
1. Capacity: 1600 kg (3,500 lbs.); in addition to special
interior finish material loads, such as wood paneling,
millwork, tile and stone.

2. Hoistway Entrance: 1070 x 2140 mm (3'-6" x 7'-0")

minimum; center opening doors.
3. Cab: 2030 x 1650 mm (6'-8" x 5'-5") inside dimensions
with 2900 mm (9'-6") cab height to accommodate a
2400 mm (8'-0") light trough.
G. Cab Controls & Indicators: See “Common elevators features above”.
Operating Panels: Provide two, custom designed operating panels,
one on each side at front of cab.
H. Cab Interior Design: Coordinate passenger elevator cab design
with interior design and architectural character of the public
spaces served. Cab configurations may require custom designs.
See the example diagrams and finish notes in this Module that
represent the quality level.
1. Enclosure: Steel shell with polished architectural bronze, CDA
alloy 280 trim, millwork., and door panels with etched pattern..
2. Floor: 20 mm (¾ inch) tongue and groove plywood to receive
thinset 10 mm (⅜ inch) tile, or stone or marble.
Cab Controls 3. Interior Walls: Millwork panels comply with code require-
Fabricate control panels ments for flame spread and smoke development. Fabricate cab
from bronze metal or wall panels so that wall panels can be easily removed for main-
20 mm (¾ inch) hinged tenance and replacement without disassembling the cab.
wood panel with extend- 4. Passenger Grab Rail: 3.8 cm (1½ inch) diameter, polished brass,
ed buttons. decorative rail and supports.
5. Identification Labels: Manufacturer's identification labels not
Use polished brass trim permitted in cab.
ring for mounting in wood 6. Ceiling: Fabricate ceiling and lighting fixtures so lighting and
panels internally illumi- fixture components are easily accessed for maintenance and re-
nated operating buttons. placement without disassembly of ceiling components.
a. Provide lighting fixture with support and power for an
11 kg. (25 lb.) fixture in center of ceiling.
7. LCD T.V.: Accommodate a digital signage screen in each car
<13A> <13C>.
I. Hoistway Entries: See the example diagrams and coordinate the
following finishes with Interior Design.
1. Public Floors: Polished architectural bronze with etched pat-
tern and threshold as selected by Interior Designer.
2. Guestroom Floors: Factory painted 14 gauge steel; provide
with 2 color painted scheme plus a gold stripe on doors..
3. Sills: Provide bronze entrance sills on all levels.
4. Provide polished brass signage on light stippled brass back-
ground unless a contrasting background is required.
5. Accessibility markings on passenger elevator door jambs
are raised polished brass floor numerals on a stippled black
background and placed in compliance with interior design
and accessibility regulations.

12.5 High Speed Elevators

A. Program: In tall buildings, high speed elevators are typically
considered for higher performance. High speed elevators
travel between 300 to 500 mpm (1000 to 1600 fpm) and
require special design considerations to minimize noise,
vibration and good ride quality.
1. Configuration: Same as passenger elevators for size,
capacity, cab interiors, lighting, ventilation, access, etc.
2. Quantity: Provide quantity necessary to meet
performance criteria, but no less than two elevators in
each location.
B. Application: Provide high speed elevators when elevators pass
through an express zone of 20 or more floors without stops.
To provide acceptable ride quality, comply with elevator
manufacturer’s recommendations and the following design
criteria:
1. Roller Guides: Heavy duty roller guides not to exceed
350 rpm.
2. Car Slings: Extended car slings with side stiles not less
than 5 m (16 ft.).
3. Cab Walls: Double insulate cab walls to minimize ride
noise.
4. Rails: 8.4 kg (18.5 lb.) minimum main guide rails and
6.8 kg (15 lb.) minimum counterweight guide rails.
5. Rail Brackets: Guide rail brackets with heavy duty
connecting fish plates.
6. Wire Rope Compensation: With tie down sheaves in
pit.
7. Wind Shrouding: Locate on top and bottom of car.
8. Hoistway Size: Consider oversized hoistways to reduce
air noise and vibration.
C. Performance Criteria: For high speed elevators, comply
with the project elevator consultant recommendations and
passenger elevator criteria.

12.6 Shuttle Elevators

A. Program: Provide passenger elevators designed to shuttle
people between the street Entry, Lobby, Function floors
(but not connecting to guestroom floors) and parking.
1. Configuration: Same as Passenger Elevators above
for size, capacity, cab interiors, access, etc. unless MI
dictates other project requirements.
2. Quantity: Provide quantity necessary to meet
performance criteria, but no fewer than two in each
location unless provided for disabled person access
only.
B. Application: Typically, shuttle elevators serve floors that
are accessible to guests and the public (but not guestroom
floors) such as the following:
1. Street Lobby to property Lobby.
2. Parking structure, if present, to Lobby.
3. Lobby to Function areas, Ballrooms and Meeting
Rooms (typically a grand or public staircase also
connects these floors).
4. Accommodate people with disabilities.
C. Performance Criteria: Provide shuttle elevators in compliance
with the following:
1. Street Entry to Lobby: Base quantity on same criteria
used to determine number of guest passenger elevators
plus 20% additional for visitors (minimum of 2
elevators).
2. Parking Structure to Lobby: Base quantity on handling
10% of parking population estimated at 1.3 persons per
parking space on elevators during 5 minutes of heavy
2-way traffic with average interval not exceeding
60 seconds (minimum of 2 elevators if stairs not
accessible).
3. Function Area to Lobby: Transport a Ballroom full of
guests to the entry Porte Cochere within 30 minutes.
a. Estimate elevator occupancy at 15 sq. ft. per oc-
cupant in Ballroom and 35 sq. ft. in Meeting
Rooms (minimum of 2 elevators). This criteria is
not used for fire exit capacity; see Module <14>.
b. If an open public or grand stair connects the
Ballroom directly to the Lobby, 50% of the
capacity can be assigned to the stair.
D. Vestibules: Provide separate vestibules or foyers at shuttle
elevator stops that open to Lobby. Where possible, provide
passive observation by locating the passenger circulation
and shuttle elevator in view of the Lobby Front Desk.

12.7 Service Elevators

A. Program: Provide service elevators for Guestroom service,
Housekeeping, F&B service and facility maintenance.
1. Service Operation: Consider providing a dedicated
service elevator to Guestrooms at large properties
where service operations <11> may interfere with
service elevator capacity for general housekeeping or
if service elevator is remote from room service. <10>
2. Food Service: <10> Verify that food service equipment
(banquet equipment, portable service bars, etc.) required
to be transported on service elevators are sized to fit
through the elevator door and within the elevator cab.
B. Planning Guide: Typically, provide a minimum of one
service elevator for low and mid-rise guestroom towers.
1. Additional service elevators may be required when
serving:
a. Guestroom Towers: more than 20 floors.
b. Large Function or Exhibit Areas: above or below
support areas.
c. Service Areas: remote from the guestroom tower.
2. Minimum of 2 elevators at each bank in areas of the
world where service and parts are not immediately
available and passenger elevators cannot serve as
backup.
C. Performance Criteria: The highest demand on the guestroom
service elevators is in the morning with staff start up and
room service.
Verify adequacy of “quantity” established by given rules
based on calculations using the following criteria.
Service Elevator Selection Criteria
Floors Speed
Machine Type
Served meter / second fpm
2 to 4 1.00 200 Hydraulic / MRL
4 to10 1.00 to 1.75 200 to 350 Traction / MRL /OHMR
7 to 13 1.75 350 Traction / OHMR
13 to 15 1.75 to 2.50 350 to 500 Traction / OHMR
15+ 2.50+ 500+ Gearless / OHMR
MRL = Machine Roomless
OHMR = Overhead Machine Room
1. Calculation: Provide service elevator performance

with an average interval of 60 seconds or less during a
five minute period when 150% of the average, during
an hour of high demand occurs per Service Elevator
Calculation Data below.

Service Elevator Calculation Data

Function One-Way Trips
Room Service, up / down 150
75 x 2
(assume 25% rooms served) (up w/ food, down w/ staff only)
Room Service cart pickup 20% x 150 30
(assume 20% of service trips)
15 housekeepers, up only 15
4 housekeeping, up / down 4x2 8
4 repair persons, up / down 4x2 8
8 bellmen, up / down 8x2 16
4 supervisors, up / down 4x2 8
2 miscellaneous, up / down 2x2 4
Total for heavy 60 minutes 239 trips
Heavy 5 minute period (125% x 239) / 12 = 25 trips
Assume that loading and unloading of staff person or staff person plus their load
(cart) averages 6 seconds per trip.
2. Staff / Cart Movement: Trips shown for staff and cart

movement are for heavy hourly service for a 300 room
property (for different property sizes, extrapolate the
values shown):
D. Location: Centrally located to guestrooms served.
1. Adjacent to main BOH service corridor near room
service, Housekeeping and Engineering.
2. Provide vestibule or foyer prior to opening on guestroom
corridor.
E. Sizes: The following is the preferred service elevator
minimum sizes.
1. Capacity: 2000 kg (4,500 pounds). Verify with MI the
ASME A17.1 Code Class ‘C’ loading design if required
for designated service elevators.
2. Cab Inside Clear: Approximately 1700 width x
2400 mm depth (5'-8" x 8'-0").
3. Cab Height Inside: 2900 mm (9'-6") minimum.
4. Doors: 1220 mm wide x 2400 mm high (4'-0" x 8'-0"),
side opening.
F. Controlled Access: Provide programmable, electronic card
sensor to match guestroom system that allow registration
of cab calls for selected floors when activated.
G. Limited Service: Consider use of passenger elevator (capacity
and cab size) with interior cab features for service at
secondary locations used primarily for service personnel.
H. Cab Interior Design: See service elevator diagram and notes.
1. Car Enclosure: Steel shell with stainless steel No. 4
front returns.

Figure 2 - Service Elevator Cab - Example Diagram




 
2900 (9’-6”)
 

 
Notes: Service Elevator Cab

 Floor Finish: Aluminum diamond plate, slip resistant.
 Side Walls & Panels: Rigidized stainless steel.
 Doors (Interior) & Side Panels: Stainless steel, No. 4
brushed finish.
 Door Opening: 122 cm (4 ft.) Wide x 240 cm (8 ft.) High.
 Overhead: Stainless steel (no suspended ceiling).
 Exhaust Grille: Stainless steel grille with exhaust fan by
elevator manufacturer.
 Lighting: 61 x 122 cm (24 x 48 inch) fluorescent fixture, recessed
flush with overhead and protective cover on cab top.
 Handrail: 3.8 cm (1 ½ inch) diameter stainless steel; mount
82 cm (32.4 inches) above cab floor.
 Bumper Rail: Stainless steel flat bar; mount 33 cm (13 inches)
to center of rail from cab floor.
 Operating Side Panel: Provide certificate frame, floor
indicator, operating panel per ADA height requirement and
convenience electric outlet.

2. Cab Interior: Rigidized stainless steel walls; provide

side rails.
3. Door Types for Cab / Hoistway Entrances: 2 speed,
side opening, stainless steel door with No.4 finish.
4. Flooring: Aluminum, slip resistant with diamond plate
surface pattern.
5. Overhead: Stainless steel (no suspended ceiling).
6. Lighting: <15C> 61 x 122 cm (24 x 48 inch) fluorescent,
recessed fixture.
7. Exhaust Grille: Flush mounted, stainless steel grille and
exhaust fan unit in overhead per elevator manufacturer.
I. Hoistway Entries: See the example diagrams for service
elevators and include the following:
1. Entry Doors & Frames: 14 gauge, brushed stainless
steel, factory finish.
2. Sills: Stainless steel or nickel silver entrance sills on
all floors.
12.8 Freight Elevators
A. Program: Provide when required to transport exhibit
materials from grade to a large ballroom or exhibit space
at a different floor.
1. Location: Where receiving / loading dock is at a
different floor than function areas or service corridor.
2. Doors: Provide vertical biparting door configuration
for freight elevators.
B. Size: Capacity and platform size determined by project
requirements but not smaller than service elevators.
1. Capacity: Verify application of ASME Class loading
requirements with MI.
2. Overhead Clearance: Provide overhead cab clearance
of 3 m (10 ft.) minimum.

12.9 Escalators
A. Program: Consider escalators in combination with stairs
and elevators when entrances, lobbies and large ballroom /
meeting areas are in high traffic locations, at different floors
or located above or below the main property arrival floor,
and where stairs alone are not a practical and convenient
means for vertical circulation.
1. Size: 102 cm (40 inches); step (tread) width
2. Speed: 90 to 100 fpm
B. Location: Position escalators in a logical path of travel for
guest and public, not as the area focal point, and to avoid a
commercial appearance.
C. Features:
1. Balustrades: Transparent for freestanding units
2. Trim / Side Panels: As selected by Interior Design.
3. Finish Material: Stainless steel and bronze
4. Safety: See “Escalator Example” diagram in this
Module.

Figure 3 - Escalator Section - Example Diagram
L = A + 4765 (15’ - 7 5/8”) = +/- 1 (1/4”) (</ = G)


A = H x 1.732 = 2190 (7’ - 2 1/4”)
264 (1
(10 3/8”)
(TYP)
SOFFIT GUARD
8
”)
January 2013
Q
QD
-7
2’
MIN.. 8”
0 (7 7/8”)
200
7(
78
+/- 1/4”
1’ - 3 3/4”)
4
6”)
22134 (7’ - 0”)
1000099 (3’ - 3 3/4”) 898 (2’ - 11 7/16”)

5/1
MINIMUM CLR RE’Q
1
2489 (8’ - 2”)
-1
264 (10
1 3/8”)
7(2’
89
ESCALATOR NOTES
H =
Balustrade: 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) clear tempered, float glass without mullions. 30o

Deck Covers: 2.0 mm (14 gauge) stainless steel, satin finish.

 Step Skirt Panels: 1.6 mm (16 gauge) stainless steel, satin finish or as selected by Interior De-
sign with fire resistant sound deadening backing.
PIT DEPTH
09 (3’ - 3 3/4”)
Dimensions: Shown dimensions vary with manufacturer.
| Elevators

1009
11000 (3’ - 7 5/16”)
Safety Devices: Broken chain; over speed governor; non-reversing device; safety brake; emer- 2197 (7’ - 2 1/2”)

gency stop buttons; handrail shut off switch; under step lighting at escalator exit and entry, skirt 4300 (14’ - 1 5/16”) PIT
17
deflection devices and other requirements of A17.1 Code.
Elevators & Escalators - 12
12.10 System Features

A. General: Coordinate the location and finishes of guest visible
mechanical, electrical, fire & safety and elevator system
devices. See the applicable Modules referenced below for
additional requirements.
B. Telephone: <13B> Locate phone / intercom in elevator cabs
for emergency communication.
C. Mechanical: <15A> Coordinate the following with HVAC
requirements:
1. Car: Vent cab per governing code.
2. Elevator Machine Room: Provide ventilation and
cooling per Module <15A>.
3. Elevator Hoistway: Provide ventilation.
D. Electrical / Lighting: <15C> Provide the following:
1. Electrical Service:
a. GFIC Outlets: Locate in cabs, elevator pits
and elevator machine room for service and
maintenance.
b. Standby Power: Connect to elevator for emergency
return, standby power functions and power to
elevator machine rooms.
2. Lighting: See applicable characteristics, switching and
lighting levels in Module <15C>.
a. Cab interior; connect to emergency power.
b. Elevator Machine Room: Mount ceiling
fluorescent strip fixtures with wire cage guards.
c. Elevator pit.
E. Coordination: Coordinate with requirements of other
Modules including:

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
13
Property Systems
13A:: Information Technology Infrastructure
13B:: Telecommunications
13C:: Audio / Visual
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
13A
Information Technology
Infrastructure
13A - Information Technology Infrastructure THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
13A.1 Engagement Process 1
13A.2 Wired LAN 4
13A.3 Wireless LAN 6
13A.4 Cellular Phone Coverage 9
13A.5 Convergence 10
13A.6 Network Components 11
13A.7 Cable Termination Points 11
13A.8 Computer / Telecom Room 14
13A.9 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) 21
13A.10 Property Facilities 23
13A.11 Property Systems 30
13A.12 Continental Contacts 31

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B IT | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Information Technology Infrastructure - 13A
IT Infrastructure
13A.1 Engagement Process
A. Project Contact: Marriott International (MI) Continental
Technology Representatives (CTR) are assigned to projects
by the Continental Vice President Information Resources.
MI - Marriott International
1. The CTR is the primary contact regarding technology,
(includes all Brands) providing interpretation and additional information for
CTR - Continental Technology clarification of the technology design direction.
Representative 2. Contact information is located at the end of this Module.
IR - Information Resources
IT - Information Technology B. Brand Essentials: This Module defines the essential
requirements and recommendations for computer based
integrated technology required to operate a MI property.
Continental Technology Brand Operational Standards provide governance for Brand
Representative (CTR) specific technologies.
At the initiation of the project design, C. IR Continental Supplement: In order to concisely address
contact the CTR to outline system continental conditions, project variables and the fast pace
requirements based on the project
location, site, operations and regional
of technology change, an IR Continental Supplement and
systems. detailed network requirements document may be provided to
define MI requirements for physical infrastructure, cabling,
system specifications and related criteria. MI provides the
MI Project Contact current edition of the IR Continental Supplement and assists
Marriott International - “MI” - is the with customizing the continental requirements to the project.
Brand and all MI hospitality Brands. D. IR Updates: The technology requirements are current as of
Contact the MI Design Manager for the the publication date. However, due to the length of project
project specific manager referenced design and construction schedules and the fast pace of tech-
Module.
nology change, updates are required. Verify that the project
conforms to the then current brand and technology standards
to avoid procurement of obsolete or inappropriate equip-
ment and systems that are unable to support the property
opening.
E. Multi Use Projects: This Module defines systems for a single
use, stand alone project such as a hotel or residence. When the
project includes more than one building type and ownership,
consult with CTR to determine the appropriate degree of
technology integration or separation.
F. Design Review: In order to verify compliance with Standards
and design intent, establish a review schedule with CTR.
Review the proposed cabling, network equipment, power
and space planning design documents during the design
phases prior to construction contract award in order to
minimize changes.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | IT 1

G. Industry Standards:
1. General: Materials and equipment utilized in the
property’s cable plant are manufactured, installed and
tested as specified in the latest editions of applicable
publications, standards, rulings and determinations of
the following industry standards.
2. Testing / Labeling: Standards for post-installation
inspection and testing of cabling plant, cable labeling
standards and documentation are covered in the IR
Continental Supplement and the Global Property
Network Standards.
3. Standard Priority: If there are conflicts between data in
Tables 1 & 2 and the industry standards, the industry
standards govern.
4. Reference Standards:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
b. Telecommunications Industry Association /
Electronics Industry Alliance (TIA / EIA)
• TIA / EIA-568-A-B, Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
• TIA / EIA-568-B.3-1, Optical Fiber
Cabling Components Standard: Addendum
1 - Additional Transmission Performance
Specifications for 50 / 125 micron Optical Fiber
Cables
• TIA-492AAAC, Detail Specification for
850-nm Laser Optimized, 50-micron Cladding
Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode
Optical Fibers
• TIA / EIA-569-A, Commercial Building
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
• TIA / EIA-606 The Administration Standards
for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Building
• TIA / EIA-607 Commercial Building
Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
c. American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM)
d. Building Industry Consulting Services
International (BICSI)
e. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
• FCC Part 15 (addresses electromagnetic
radiation).
• FCC Part 68 (connection of premise equipment
and wiring to the network)
2 IT | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

f. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

g. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE) 802.3ae, Media Access Control (MAC)
Parameters, Physical Layer and Management
Parameters for 10Gb / s Operation
h. National Electric Code (NEC)
i. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA)
j. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA
70) m. Underwriters Lab (UL) n. Governing
Building Codes
H. Payment Card Industry (PCI): The PCI Data Security
Standard is a mandatory global set of requirements for
any organization that stores, processes or transmits credit
card data.
For more information about PCI DSS, see the following
website:
https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/security_standards/
Failure to comply may lead to financial penalties. Many of
the 200+ requirements dictate the functionality required
of infrastructure and how it is installed, configured and
maintained and the details pertaining to physical security
and access to external networks.
The CTR liaisons with MI Information Security group
to ensure that the current requirements are implemented
for new projects. When evolving standards impact the
Design Standards, the CTR informs the project developer
and the MI Project Manager about required amendments
to implement the PCI compliant solutions for the new
opening.
I. Physical:
1. Future Planning: MI strongly recommends discussing
methods of future proofing the property’s network
installation with CTR to reduce future retrofit cost.
2. As-Built Assessment: CTR reviews “as-built”
conditions versus documented design plans and
identifies corrective measures necessary if IT
requirements are not resolved.

13A.2 Wired LAN

A. Cable Types: Two general cable types are utilized for data
and voice networking:
1. Copper
2. Fiber
B. Cable Selection: The commonly used cable types utilized at
MI Branded hotels and associated distance limitations are
outlined in Table 1.
Table 1 - Characteristics of Copper & Fiber
Cable
Specification Distance Limitations Comments
Type
Copper Category 5e 90 m (295 feet) from patch panel to outlet Category 5e is the minimum standard for 10 / 100
or higher Mbps Ethernet unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
[8 conductor / 4 pair, 24 gauge] LAN drops and
patch cables. Owner may elect to implement UTP
cabling of a higher grade such as Category 6 at
their discretion or based on product availability in
market.
Shielded or plenum rated cabling is utilized as
dictated by governing code or applicable standards
as outlined previously in this Module.
Fiber Multimode Distance limitations vary depending upon the Used when distance limitations for copper cabling
light source used, the light source wavelength are exceeded but distance limitations do not
(850 nm or 1310 nm), the fiber characteristics (50 warrant use of single mode fiber.
μm / 125 μm fiber or 62.5 μm /125 μm fiber)* and The fiber connector type is determined by the
potentially the speed of the connection (e.g., 100 connector types supported by the equipment
Mbps, 1 Gbps, 10 Gbps). vendor on the connected equipment.
In general, if there is a difference in the distance
limitations for 50 μm / 125 μm vs. 62.5 μm
/125 μm multimode fiber, the 50 μm / 125 μm
multimode fiber covers a longer distance.
Consult specifications for equipment
manufacturers devices that are connected to the
fibers.
* First number specified is the diameter of the core
(in micrometers); the second number specified is
the diameter of the cladding (in micrometers) for
devices connected by the fiber.
Fiber Single mode Distance limitations vary depending upon the Typically provided when distance limitations for
light source wavelength (1310 nm or 1550 nm) multimode fiber are exceeded. However, single
utilized in the equipment. Light sources that mode fiber is also used in Passive Optical Networks
operate at 1310 nm are typically used for short (PON) and DAS Networks without regard to
to moderate distance applications, while light distance.
sources that operate at 1550 nm wavelength are The fiber connector type is determined by the
typically used for long distance applications. connector types supported by the equipment
Consult equipment manufacturers specifications vendor on the connected equipment.
for devices that are connected to the fiber.
Cable Length Calculations: When estimating cable lengths and limitations, make certain that the vertical (floor-to-floor) component
of the distance is included.

1. Computers, access points, P.O.S. and other networked

equipment are typically supported by copper Ethernet
cabling. See Tables 2 & 3.
2. Questions regarding the appropriate use of cable types for
horizontal or vertical backbone cabling, etc. are addressed
during the design review process.
C. Cable Design & Management
1. Certification: Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD) certifies cabling designs. Proof of
Figure 1 - Patch Panel - design certification is presented to CTR when submitted
Examples for design review during the construction document phase.
2. Acceptance: CTR accepts the final design and placement
of cable.
3. Provide twisted pair patch cables complying with the same
standard as the station cabling.
4. Patch Panels:
a. At IDF locations, provide a CTR accepted horizontal
and vertical wire management system.
b. Avoid installations with more than two patch panels
in succession.
• Leave room in the rack immediately following the
two patch panels for network switches.
• When provided in twos, provide a wire manager,
one on each end, to border both.
c. Terminate cables at patch panels in
an orderly and logical fashion.
d. Provide cable labeling scheme consistent with the
Global Property Network Standard (GPNS).
• Guest Room Patch Panel Labeling Scheme: (Room
#) (Sequential Ethernet port within room) Example:
500 02 (Room 500, 2nd Ethernet port in room).
• Wall Plate Labeling Scheme: (Floor # and IDF let-
ter) (Sequential Ethernet port in room) Example:
4A 02 (IDF 4A, 2nd Ethernet port in room).
5. Documentation: Place copies of connecting documentation
within each distribution closet on wall mounted slot for
easy access and protection. Provide master documentation
(soft and hard copy) for all locations to CTR for future
reference and filing.
6. Cable Management: Provide Velcro type tie wraps
(preferred), screws, cross-connect cable, support hardware,
etc. and necessary components for complete cable
management.
7. Cable Length Calculations: When estimating cable lengths
and limitations, make certain that the vertical (floor-to-
floor) component of the distance is included.

13A.3 Wireless LAN

A. General: Wireless LANs are required to provide guests
with Internet access in guestrooms, public areas (Function
Areas, F&B, Lobby, Pools, Fitness, etc.) and employees
with access to business applications in public and back
of house areas required to support business applications.
Contact your CTR for project guidance. LAN engineering
is required for VoIP access to business applications.
B. Site Surveys:
1. Conduct two mandatory wireless site surveys by a
qualified, CTR acceptable, wireless integrator to
ensure adequate signal throughout the project coverage
area. Depending upon the size of the property, the
initial desktop survey can be performed using a
passive (application generated) survey of signal and
noise statistics. The second physical survey must be
conducted following the completion of the wireless
installation.
a. Initial Desktop Survey:
• Conduct the initial survey by computer model-
ing based on construction documents.
• Identify architectural and structural elements
that obstruct or diminish wireless signal
strength.
• Conduct survey prior to completion of the low
voltage drawing.
b. Physical Survey:
• Conduct the second survey on site following
substantial completion of the exterior building
envelope (roof and walls) and interior partitions
to account for the impact of building materials
(drywall and windows) and sources of EMI /
RFI signal strength.
• Provide details on items not yet installed in-
volving water and large metal objects.
• Consider the presence of special coatings or
materials (e.g., UV) on windows if the interior
wireless access points are intended to provide
coverage of exterior areas.
• Physical Survey Report: Include the following
information:
• Map of signal, noise and user performance
• Coverage by SSID
• Power level by access point
• The physical survey provides frame data
rates, packet retries and error rates.

C. Power Over Ethernet (POE): Power is provided to the

wireless access points through the use of POE [IEEE
standard 802.3af].
1. The current standard for POE is outlined in the IEEE
802.3at standard.
2. When POE is utilized, there is an impact on the LAN
switch models / modules used and therefore on the LAN
switch infrastructure cost.
3. The use of POE may impact power and cooling requirements
for the IDF / MDF where POE switches are located.
D. Wireless Access Point Antennas: There are many available types
of antennas used with wireless access points.
• Ensure the appropriate antenna types are provided for the
specific areas (e.g., wireless access points located outside
utilize antennas designed for exterior use).
• Ensure the Design Team is aware of the antenna dimensions
so they can provide the appropriate space in the design.
• Contact the CTR for specifications of accepted Wireless
Access Point Antennas in compliance with the Glob a l
P r o p e r t y Ne t wo r k St a n d a r d s (GPNS).
E. Wireless Standards: Summarized in Table 2. Wireless access
points at MI properties support 802.11a / b / g / n. Detailed
wireless standards are defined in the current version of GPNS
802.11 Wireless Requirements.
F. Wireless Access Points Installation / Configuration:
1. Install wireless coverage on guestroom floors as determined
by the Wireless Modeling and Surveys. This typically
equates to a ratio of one traditional wireless access point
for a maximum of 6 guestrooms assuming a stick frame
construction.
A Note About Wireless Access 2. Where dense construction materials are provided, a ratio
Points
of 4 guestrooms or less for each access point may be
In converged networks, all wireless
access points are considered capable required. Consult the CTR for site specifics.
of carrying associate back office 3. Ideally, locate access points centered in the guestroom
traffic, regardless of their physical corridors, on ceilings or walls.
location at the property.
4. If providing an access point incorporated into a wallplate
network switch (such as Motorola 6511, Ruckus 7025 or
equivalent), provide minimum of one device for each
guestroom.
5. Secure wireless access points (for example, in locked
cabinets or in lockable covers) that carry from physical
access by unauthorized personnel.

G. Wireless Connectivity to Outlying Buildings: Wireless

alternatives to wired connections to outlying buildings (golf
shops, beach bars, pool side, food outlets, maintenance
buildings, etc.) can be explored with CTR on a case by case
basis.
H. Acceptable Wireless Vendors: Acceptable vendors are defined in
the current version of the Global Property Network Standard
(GPNS).
Table 2 - Wireless LAN Standards
Wireless Maximum Frequency Range # Channels / Compatibility Comments
Standard Speed Non-
overlapping
IEEE 802.11a 54 Mbps 5 GHz • Shorter range 12 / 8 • Incompatible with • Use of regulated frequency
than 802.11b and 802.11b or 802.11g band prevents signal
802.11g interference from other
• Signal more devices
likely to be • 100 Mbps Ethernet
obstructed by connection between switch
walls, floors, etc. and access point adequate
than 802.11b and
802.11g
IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz • Better range 11 / 3 • Incompatible with • Use of unregulated
than 802.11a 802.11a frequency band means that
• 802.11b clients appliances (e.g., microwave
compatible with ovens, cordless phones, etc.)
802.11g access points can cause interference
• 100 Mbps Ethernet
(at 11 Mbps) connection between switch
and access point adequate
IEEE 802.11g 54 Mbps 2.4 GHz • Better range 11 / 3 • Incompatible with • Use of unregulated
than 802.11a 802.11a frequency band means that
• 802.11b clients appliances (e.g., microwave
compatible with ovens, cordless phones, etc.)
802.11g access points can cause interference
• 100 Mbps Ethernet
(at 11 Mbps) connection between switch
and access point adequate
IEEE 802.11n Over 2.4 GHz • Best signal 11 / 3 • Incompatible with • More resistant to signal
100 Mbps & range 802.11a interference from outside
per 5 GHz • Utilizes • 802.11n clients sources; May interfere with
frequency Multiple Input are compatible with nearby 802.11 b/g based
band Multiple Output 802.11 b/g access networks
• Power injectors for 802.11n
(MIMO) points at the relative access points adhere to
technology speed of those 802.3at that requires more
to improve standards power than the 802.3af
performance and • 802.11 b/g clients standard that applies to
capacity are compatible with power injectors for 802.11 a,
most 802.11n access b, and g access points. This
points and any CTR may affect Ethernet switch
acceptable 802.11n model / module selection and
access point power

13A.4 Cellular Phone Coverage

A. General: Multi- carrier cellular service with 3G / 4G network
coverage is required in all public areas, administrative
areas, guestrooms, meeting areas, and residences.
Good cellular phone coverage is frequently a consideration
when meeting planners and guests select a property.
Lack of good coverage is costly in terms of lost revenues
A Note About Cellular Phone
Coverage Quality from discerning guests.
Good external cellular coverage does B. Distributed Antenna System (DAS): (or similar alternative)
not in any way guarantee good in- Provide DAS in properties where in-building cellular
building coverage. While proximity
to a carrier’s tower is a major factor, a
coverage from one or more of the major cellular carriers
property’s size, the building materials servicing the hotel’s geographic area is marginal or there
used to construct it (e.g., steel, is a strong desire to consolidate wireless technology used
reflective or hurricane glass), and the
technology used by the carrier can by property staff (e.g., utilize a single handheld device for
greatly impact the degree of RF signal two-way radio, paging and cellular).
penetration into the building. 1. Reference: For a high-level overview of the DAS
technology, space / power / HVAC requirements, other
considerations, and case studies, consult the Hotel
Technology Next Generation document. This document
can be obtained from the CTR.
2. Impact of Installation Timing on Cost: The cost to
install DAS technology during initial construction is 10
to 15% less than retrofitting an existing building with
DAS. Since each property is unique, each property
must be assessed by a CTR accepted, qualified wireless
integrator to provide accurate capital costs.
3. Head-End Equipment: For DAS installations, provide
approximately 28 m2 (300 sq. ft.) of space per carrier.

13A.5 Convergence
A. General: MI’s converged network services, GPNS, offers
owners an opportunity to implement a more streamlined
low voltage cable plant and potentially eliminate various
cables.
Technologies that support converged services are chang-
ing rapidly and individual network solutions vary from
supplier to supplier, and may vary by specific application.
MI’s Hotel Technical Networking Specification are fully
outlined in GPNS documentation available by contacting
your CTR.
Only MI certified LAN Service Providers may be utilized
to deploy and support a converged LAN. Contact your
CTR for a list of the certified LAN Service Providers in
your market.
B. Advantages: Deploying converged networks provides:
1. Simplified network and vendor management
2. Improved network security
3. Greater flexibility
C. Implications: The deployment of a converged network
impacts the following:
• Switch functionality
• Switch model selection
• Switch module selection
• Switch / switch module quantities
• Switch configuration
• Cabling types and quantities
• Power requirements in computer room / MDF / IDF
• Cooling requirements in computer room / MDF / IDF
• Generator / UPS requirements
• Increased technical knowledge of IT personnel support-
ing infrastructure
A Note About
Converged Network Switches
In a converged network, all switches at the
property are considered capable of carrying
Associate back office traffic, including those that
service guestrooms and public areas.

13A.6 Network Components

A. Router: MI provides a router that meets PCI Data
Security Standards and MI Standards.
1. The router provides the property with a connection
to MI’s data center and is managed by MI or an MI
assigned entity.
2. The router is installed in the Computer / Telecom Room.
3. In certain locations, provide a MPLS connection by a
MI assigned entity. Consult the CTR for information.
B. Switches: Obtain switch standards from the CTR. The
Owner is responsible for purchasing switches that comply
with MI specified Standards. Do not procure non-accepted
switch models. The approved network provider or property
systems manager is responsible for installing, configuring
and maintaining switches.
1. LAN Switches: Comply with MI Standards. Discuss
switch functionality requirements with the CTR and
verify that funds are budgeted in compliance with
Section 13A.5: Convergence.
2. Source: Purchase network switches through accepted
network providers. Obtain an accepted supplier list
from the CTR.
13A.7 Cable Termination Points
A. General: Table 3 provides information on the minimum
number of cabling access point or “drops” needed per area
to meet current IT infrastructure requirements. This table
serves as a guideline based on general IT demand and
usage by area. The CTR assists in determining the actual
number of points necessary based on projected usage or
utilization of each area.
B. Growth: It is extremely important to ensure that sufficient
cabling is installed to permit growth, particularly in back-
office and administrative areas.
A growth factor of 20% is required for the cabling backbone
(MDF to IDF connections). Installing sufficient cabling for
growth during initial construction is a minimum of 50%
less expensive than installing additional cabling at a later
date (the “pay as you go” model).
Locations vary based on project design, construction
and equipment layouts. The following are typical cabling
locations. Contact the CTR to clarify property specifics
and required cabling locations not listed.

Table 3 - Network Cabling and Power Outlet Termination Points Calculation

Calculation for Minimum # of Termination Points Examples of Equipment
Location
Network Connections Power Outlets Used
Back-of-House
Administrative Offices 4 per workplace 4 per workplace Computer, Phone, Printer, Fax
Computer, P.O.S., Phone,
Call Center communication center 6 per desk 6 per desk
Printer, Fax, Key Encoder
2 additional per counter* (extra to
Commercial Kitchen* 2 per counter P.O.S. Printer, Phone
office space)
Receiving Area 4 per workplace 4 per workplace Computer, Phone, Printer, Fax
4 additional in area for networked
Engineering* 4 in area Monitoring Equipment
equipment* (extra to office space)
4 additional in area for networked
Housekeeping / Laundry* 4 in area Uniform Management System
equipment* (extra to office space)
Housekeeping Stores on floor 2 per area 2 per area Phone
Phone, Computer, Time
Employee Dining 4 in area for networked equipment 4 in area
Clock, P.O.S.
Employee Dining Kitchen 2 in area for networked equipment 2 in area Phone
n+4 for the seating capacity of the 2 each for the seating
Training Room Computers, Phone, Printer
room capacity of the room
6 additional for networked IP VSS, Networked
Security Office* 4 additional
equipment* (extra to office space) Equipment, Encoder
Employee Entrance 4 data per location 4 per location Time Clock locations
Front of the House
Computer, Phone, Printer,
Front Desk workspace 7 per station 7 per station Key Encoder, Credit Card
Terminal & Printer
Computer, Phone, Printer,
Concierge workspace 6 per station 4 per station
Encoder
Bell Man workspace 3 per station 2 per station Computer, Phone, Printer
P.O.S. Terminal Computer,
Restaurant Hostess 5 per station 5 per station Phone, Printer, Credit Card
Terminal
Restaurant P.O.S. Station 5 per station 5 per station
Printer, Credit Card Terminal
Bar 5 per work area 4 per work area Phone, Credit Card Terminal,
Printer
Service Bars 4 per work area 4 per work area
Phone, Printer
6 per work area (extra to office 6 per work area
P.O.S., Phone, Printer, Gift
Retail Shop space) (additional for Bank Card (additional for Bank
Card Terminal
Terminals) Card Terminals)
2 additional per work area* (extra to 2 additional per work
Spa*
office space) area
6 per station (additional for Bank
Spa Front Desk 6 per station
Card Terminals)
Boarding Pass Printing: 1 per PC,
Business Center & Guest Business 1 per printer 2 additional per work
Guest Use: 1 per PC, 1 per printer Computer, Phone, Printer
areas* area
Communal table: 1 per table
7 per work area* (extra to office Computer, Phone, Printer,
Guest Floor Lounge Reception* 6 per work area
space) Encoder

Specialty Locations
Calculation for Minimum # of Termination Points

Location Examples of Equipment Used
Network Connections Power Outlets
Ballroom, Meeting & Boardrooms Refer to Event Space Design and CTR Phone, Computer, Networked
Equipment
Guestroom Minimum 6 per room however may Individual quad (4)
require more pending room features. outlets behind TV Wardrobe, Refrigerator, TV, PI.
Minimum - One Cat 5e or higher
stand, desk and bedside at bedside with RJ45 jack for
table analog telephone; two Cat 5e
or higher at desk with one RJ45
and one locally accepted phone
jack (such as RJ45 for PI or
phone); One Cat 5e or higher at
TV on RJ45; and One coaxial
cable behind TV. May require
additional cables for suite
phones, Energy Management, in
Room Control, etc.
Computer Room 4 per work station
+ as determined by specification 4 per work station
Wireless Access Connection as determined during the wireless survey

Digital Signage Most digital signage requirements conform with standard Some digital signage locations
Ethernet cabling requirements. However, for some specialty require coaxial television
locations there are vendors that still require a low skew cable feeds in addition to twisted
to carry video. Consult with your digital signage vendor prior pair. Review digital signage
to finalizing plans for digital signage cable pulls. Consider design with your audio
requirements for elevator / lift signage data points. visual consultant for cabling
requirements.
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Connection as determined by closed-circuit television See Module 16 for Video
requirements Surveillance System (VSS);
coordinate requirements with
this Module.
Audio Visual (A/V) Determined during the AV requirements. (many systems use IP See Module 13C; coordinate
for distribution) A/V requirements with this
Module.
Phone Only Locations - See Module <13B>

Guest Elev. Lobby - all floors Conference Rooms General Area Storage
Service Elev. Lobby - all floors Aerobics Room Purchasing / Receiving
Fire / Engineering Command
House Telephones Exercise Room Rooms
Lobby Lounge House Telephone Receiving Area Elevator Machine Room
Men’s Lounge Spa (House
Lobby Lounge Pantries Telephone)
Women’s Lounge Spa (House
Guest Floor Lounge House Tel. Banquet Storage Tel.)
Pool Telephone Employee Lounge Store Rooms
Spa Reception Area Employee Locker Room Loading Dock
* Termination points required in addition to the number of ports specified in “Administrative Offices” specified termination points.
Identify additional areas based on the building diagrams.

13A.8 Computer / Telecom Room

A. General: The Computer / Telecom Room design revolves
around the care and maintenance of the service equipment.
B. Functional Requirements: Provide the following:
1. Safe and secure location for server, PBX, computer and Figure 2 - Computer / Telecom
networking devices. Room - Server Racks
2. Stable and uninterrupted power required to maintain
equipment.
3. A temperature and humidity controlled environment
within the parameters indicated to operate the
equipment.
4. Connectivity to other devices inside and outside of the
Computer / Telecom Room.
5. Secure Storage: Provide a safe and secure area, 2.5 m x
3 m (8 x 10 ft) for equipment storage.
C. Location:
1. Avoid locating Computer / Telecom Room against outside
wall and exterior windows to avoid unauthorized access.
2. Account for flooding and locate above the flood plain
or storm surge level; always above the building ground
floor.
3. Avoid locations under housekeeping, kitchens,
guestroom water pipes and areas that are prone to water
flooding.
4. Avoid locating utility plumbing, heating sources and
systems adjacent to this room that present a risk to the
normal operations of a Computer / Telecom Room.
5. Avoid locations within 10 m (33 feet) of water pipes,
except for fire sprinklers.
Figure 3 - Work Station
6. Locate away from sources of electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference
(RFI) such as electrical transformers, copiers, radio
transmitters, sources of microwave transmissions,
electrical motors, electronic ballasts, etc.
D. Room Design:
1. The preferred design is a single room with two main
sections; one section for computer equipment and one
section for vendor supported equipment such as MATV,
telephone lines, DAS, etc. This arrangement simplifies
operational maintenance and provides ease of use in
converged networks.
2. Standards listed in this Module apply to Computer /
Telecom Room, regardless of room design.
3. The telecom equipment and property computer
equipment are secured in the following ways:

a. Connectivity: If it is not possible to locate the telecom

and computer equipment in the same room, provisions
for connectivity between the rooms, via conduit, are
required. Provide accessible conduit end points of
sufficient size to allow for future additional cabling.
b. Separation: Some local jurisdictions require the tele-
com equipment be separate from the primary guest
systems. If the property’s computer equipment and
telecom equipment are located in the same room con-
tact your CTR for local segregation requirements.
c. Security / Access Control:
• Provide access doors to the Computer / Telecom
Rooms with a interrogative lock system (see
Module <16>) with audit trail (such as magnet
stripe or a RFID type lock). PCI standards require
audit logs for 90 days. If locks with a 90 day log
can not be procured, then purchase locks with audit
logs that are downloadable to a PC.
• Provide Video Surveillance System (VSS) camera;
Module <16>. Place camera such that it has a clear
view of individuals accessing and working in the
facility. Purchase VSS camera system with 90 days
video storage. Position camera so video can clearly
identify a person entering and exiting the computer
room and install the camera so it is tamper proof.
• Avoid unnecessary ceiling and floor penetrations
into the Computer / Telecom Room. When cable
runs are complete, firestop penetrations through
fire rated wall and floor assemblies and through
acoustic rated walls and floors.
Figure 4 - Computer / Telecom Room for 200 Room Property - Example
Min. 0.9 m (3’-0”)

Computer / Telecom Room Features
 Server Racks (4 shown in diagram)
 Work Station 
 Raised Floor

d. Doors: Figure 5 - Cable Tray - Example

• Width: Use 1.1 m (3'-6") door to allow for
equipment. Do not use split doors.
• Provide with swing action, self closing mecha-
nism, and hinged on the interior.
• Provide with perimeter dust seals to maintain a
dust free environment.
e. Floors, Walls & Roof:
• PCI Standard: Provide solid walls, concrete or
masonry, on all four perimeter walls extending
continuous from floor slab to structure above
and sealed to avoid unauthorized access to
room. If room includes an exterior wall, an ad-
ditional wall may be required. Figure 6 - Raised Floor
• Do not permit floor and roof openings that could System - Example
provide computer room access or circumvent
security systems and access controls.
f. Window & Wall Openings: No external windows
and other openings are permitted within Computer
/ Telecom Room unless governing codes require
natural daylight or ventilation.
g. Ramp: Provide ramp if raised floor grade change
is required.
4. System Manager’s / Information Resources Field
Associate’s (IRFA’s) Office: Locate external to the
Computer / Telecom Room.
a. Work Stations: Provide space for four standard
Figure 7 - Server Racks -
work stations with continuous counter and acces-
Example
sible overhead storage cabinets.
b. System Manager’s / IRFA’s Office: If adjacent
to Computer / Telecom Room, separate from
equipment area by soundproof window and door
that limits office noise exposure to 90 dBA.
Discuss details with the CTR.
E. Size / Area:
1. Raised floor to ceiling requires at least 2.4 m (8 feet) to
allow for the standard 42U racks.
2. Provide adequate space and access clearance for
equipment and personnel. Verify area and location
during design programming phase.
3. The example layout of the Computer / Telecom Room
is shown in Figure 4 and Figure 8.

Figure 8 - Computer / Telecom Room for 300 to 500 Room Property - Example Plan.

Computer / Telecom Room Features
  System Manager’s / IRFA’s Office
 4 Standard Work Stations
Computer Room   Observation Window
 Ramp (only for raised floor)
 Cable Tray
 Raised Floor
 HVAC Unit
Min. 1.2m (4’-0”) 
Example floor plan requires adjustment based

 on property size, equipment requirements, and
governing codes.





F. Features:
1. Flooring:
a. Provide a raised floor with antistatic removable tiles
tightly installed to avoid dust penetration [20 cm
(8 inches) above sealed concrete slab].
b. Prior to installing the raised floor system, paint the
concrete subfloor with epoxy paint or quality deck
paint to reduce concrete dusting and flaking.
c. If a raised floor is not possible, cover floor with anti-
static flooring.
d. Provide adequate drains below raised floor and non-
raised floor areas. Slope floor to allow proper drain-
age and avoid standing water.
e. Provide grill tiles for air flow at locations designated
for racks.
2. Rack Systems:
a. Racks securing property systems are locked at all
times. Computing equipment is located in lockable
racks.
b. The minimum distance between rack rows is 1.2 m
(4'-0″) and in front and back of doors at least 0.9 m
(3'-0″) free space. Racks allow for free-flow of air
from front to back.
c. Place computer and telecom equipment in separate
racks.
d. If a raised floor is not possible, install ladder racks for
cable management within the room.
e. Consult CTR to assist with planning of rack layouts
to optimize space and to provide inter-connectivity of
racks and systems.
3. Walls:
a. Design and provide exterior, above and below grade, wall
construction that prevents moisture penetration.
b. Paint all interior walls.
c. Cover telecom portion of the room with 19 mm
(¾ inch) thick fire retardant plywood for:
• The Telephone Company (Telco) Network / PTT
(Post, Telephone, & Telegraph)
• Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE)
• Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
• Main Distribution Frame (MDF)

Figure 9 - Air Flow Diagram

Hot Air
HVAC Unit Front Equip Back Equip Front

Rack Rack
Air
Cool Air Cooo Air
Coo
Cool
Raised floor ventilation concept shown. Solid floor concept is similar.
G. HVAC System Requirements: Room HVAC is designed per Module

<15>.
1. Provide air conditioning to maintain room at constant
temperature of 20° C (70° F) ± and a humidity of 50% or
less.
2. Air conditioning system is dedicated to the Computer /
Telecom Room and is separate from other building systems.
3. Design: Provide 2 air conditioning units sized to handle
65% of the peak load so that the maintenance or short term
failure of one unit will not affect equipment performance.
4. Controls: Provide air conditioning system with a humidity
and temperature gauge connected to the Building
Automation System (BAS).
5. Air conditioning is designed so the airflow flows from the
front of the rack to the back. See Figure 9.
6. Detector: Provide moisture detection sensors connected to
the BAS.
7. Backup Power: <15C> Connect air conditioning system to
backup power, separate from Computer / Telecom Room
power.
H. Electrical:
1. Provide high and low voltage power for racks. Contact the
CTR for specifics.
2. Power for the Computer / Telecom Room is a dedicated
feed from the emergency distribution switchboard through
one or more UPS units, treating and backing up the feed
for 15 to 20 minutes. This feeds a circuit breaker panel
board within the Computer / Telecom Room. Optional
“whole room” UPS is recommended.
3. Provide a separate power circuit for utility appliances.
Provide three to four convenience outlets for appliances
(i.e. vacuum cleaners, fans, etc.) and label accordingly.

4. Refer to the IR Continental Supplement and contact the

CTR for additional specifications on power receptacle
deployment for:
• Raised floor design
• Aerial cabling design
5. Provide dedicated power with an isolated ground.
6. Circuit breaker panel for Computer / Telecom Room is
dedicated to the room.
7. Provide the Telephone Utility demarcation point with
a ground for network facilities. Install an accessible
route between the external demarcation point and the
Computer / Telecom Room to allow for additions.
I. Grounding:
1. Provide proper grounding in accordance with TIA /
EIA-607 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding
Standard, the current National Electrical Code and
applicable governing codes.
2. Grounding is required for racks, cabinets, raceways,
cable trays and associated hardware that have the
potential to act as a current carrying conductor.
J. Lighting: Provide rooms with emergency lighting systems.
See Module <15C>.
K. Fire Protection & Life Safety:
1. For Fire Protection & Life Safety measures, see Module
<14>.
2. Provide wire basket guards over fire sprinklers to avoid
accidental contact and discharge.
3. At larger Computer / Telecom rooms, consider providing
an accepted, dedicated water mist sprinkler system to
minimize water damage to equipment.

13A.9 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

A. General: IDF Closets house the wiring and electronic
equipment used to connect user work stations to the MI
communications network.
• These closets are designed and intended for the intra-
building distribution of centrally managed telephone,
data communications and video services and are not
used to support other building utilities. Locate closets
so station wiring adheres to the distance limitations
imposed by the Ethernet standards.
• Locate IDF Closets with direct access from public or
back of house areas and not in guestrooms or other areas
where access might disturb guests.
• Locate closets away from dust producing areas such as
laundry, linen closets and other potential areas of towel
lint and fibers.
• Secure room with a mortise interrogative lock system
(see Module <16>) with audit trail (such as magnet
stripe or a RFID type lock) and compatible with the
guestroom system. PCI standards require audit logs for
90 days. If locks with a 90 day log are not available, then
provide locks with audit logs that are downloadable to
a PC.
B. Dimensions:
1. Size: IDF Closets serving up to 100 outlet locations are
1.8 x 2.4 m (6 x 8 ft.) minimum.
2. If more than 100 outlet locations are anticipated, the
IDF Closet is sized on a case by case basis.
3. Ceilings: 2.7 m (9 ft.) minimum in height; false ceilings
not allowed.
4. Door: 0.9 m (3 ft.) wide and 2 m (6′-8″) high minimum,
open outward, with an electronic lock.
C. Interior Finishes:
1. Dust: Provide interior finishes to minimize dust.
2. Light: Provide light colored finishes to enhance lighting.
3. Walls: Solid, concrete or masonry walls are preferred.
D. Lighting:
1. Minimum: 550 Lux (50 foot-candles), measured 0.9 m
(3 ft.) above the floor.
2. Location: Install at 2.6 m (8′-6″) above floor at ceiling.
Avoid wall mounted fixtures.
E. Electric Power:
1. Power is rack mounted.
2. Electric circuits for network switches are supported by
the UPS and property standby generator. Consult with
the CTR for local / continental specifics.

3. Labeling: Clearly mark service panel location and breaker

positions.
4. Grounding: Provide access to the main building grounding
electrode.
5. Backup Power: Supplied by building standby power
system. See Module <15C>.
6. Additional Electric Power: May be required; determined
in the review process.
F. Environment:
1. Temperature and Humidity: Maintain temperature between
10° C and 27° C (50° F and 80° F) with 30% to 75% relative
humidity, non condensing.
2. Continuous Operation: The ventilation system for the
IDF Closet operates continuously and is monitored by the
Building Automation System (BAS). Dedicated cabling to all RJ45
3. Ventilation: Provide exhaust ventilation to dissipate heat jacks is required. No looping
generated by the equipment. An IDF serving 32 guestrooms or daisy chaining of structured
cabling permitted
may produce 5,000 BTU / hr. Actual requirements vary
depending on the project. Contact the CTR for specific
network design.
4. Capacity: If the IDF Closet serves a large number of
rooms, more than one floor or additional equipment, a
corresponding increase of ventilation or cooling capacity
is required.
G. Closet Penetrations:
1. Floor: For vertically stacked closets, provide a minimum
of two 100 mm (4 inch) penetrations per closet.
2. Bushed Sleeve: Provide at each penetration. Bushed sleeve
extends 25 mm (1 inch) above floor.
3. Location: Penetrations are clustered in the specified closet
stack.
4. Conduit: Penetrations for horizontal conduit or cable tray
runs that use ceiling pathways are near ceiling level.
5. Additional Penetrations: May be needed depending on the
density of network devices required.
H. Closet Linkage:
1. Multiple IDF Closets: Closets are interconnected by
horizontal cable pathways when multiple IDF Closets are
on a single floor.
2. Drop Ceiling: If used, the IDF Closets are linked using
cable ladder that is 300 mm (12 inch) wide and 100 mm
(4 inch) deep.
3. Conduit Radius: Conduits entering the closet through a
90 degree bend from either floor or ceiling have a bend
radius of 0.46 m (18 inch) for 50 mm (2 inch) inside
diameter (ID) or less.

4. Conduits with greater than a 50 mm (2 inch) ID have a

radius ten times the conduit ID.
5. Pull Cords: Provide in all conduits.
I. Fire Protection & Life Safety: See Module <14>. Provide
wire basket guards over fire sprinklers to avoid accidental
contact and discharge.
13A.10 Property Facilities
A. Main Lobby: The central meeting area of the property. Based
on the design of the space, when the lobby or adjacent
lounges have guest seating areas, provide ample power
outlets at each seating space for guests to ‘plug in’ their
equipment.
Install power outlets not directly visible to guest, but easily
accessible. In addition, provide wireless Property Internet
(PI) throughout the entire space.
B. Guestroom Layout: A generic guestroom cabling guide
follows; contact the CTR for Brand specific requirements.
1. Cabling:
a. Category 5e or higher cabling supports the fol-
lowing systems:
• Voice Services - 1 RJ45 termination per tele-
phone (desk, bedside, bathroom, suite living
room)
• PI connectivity - consult CTR for project
requirements.
• Digital TV / IP TV - consult CTR for project
requirements.
• Wireless Internet Access Point
• Mini bar controls (option)
• Environmental controls (option)
b. Provide COAX and Ethernet cable for TV
• Guestroom
• Suite
• Bathroom (option)
c. Guestroom cable specifications follows the generic
building cabling outlined in Section 13A.2: Wired
LAN.
• Guestroom Generic Cabling: Class Category
5e or higher.
• Guestroom outlets home run from the
Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF).
• Cables terminate in Category 5e or higher RJ45
jacks with connections to follow the TIA / EIA-
568-A Standards.

Figure 11 - Guestroom Technology Layout & Desk Mounted Connectivity Panel - Example
1
Set top box
Mini bar E
Closet (Option)
Main T
3
See Suite Configuration Below
F
A
B
Note: This plan illustrates a generic
C guestroom. See Module <7> for example
D
4
guestroom configurations and see the
Bathroom
Set top box
RJ45 Socket (Female) Suite Configuration

RF connector A
B
Embedded in desk or fi
f xed on wall; coordinate with interior design. C
D
Connectivity Panel
Continued from Above
Volume control on the wall (required if bathroom LCD and sett top box are not installed)
A
Set top box
Telephone RJ45 Cable (Male)
1 x Cat 5e or higher cable for each telephone port,r back to fl
f oor IDF directly.
Second cable
a f r kitchen wall phone in Suites.
fo
See other drawings fo f r detailed cable type and connectors.
B PC Internet Services
Consult the CTR for continental / market requirements.
1 x 5e or higher cabl
a e, connect directly from port back to fl
f oor IDF data
patch panel. Use second cable for Suites. Required In Wall Cables Standard Room
C Digital / IP TV Services RJ45 Cable (Male) Option In Wall Cable
a s
Consult the CTR for continental / market requirements. Connectivity Cabl
a es
f oor IDF data
patch panel.
Second cable
a f r Suites (in some markets, VOD services may not be legal
fo 1 Interconnecting cables supplied by set top box vendor.
or available).
2 See other drawings fo
f r detailed cable type and connectors
D TV Services COAX Cable (Male)
f r TV / DVD / Stereo / Connectivity Panel / STB etc.
fo
(only if required locally or by vendor)
1 x COAX back to provider head end fr f om main TV . 3 Stereo / DVD per market reque
q st.
1 x COAX from main TV to replication TV . 90 m (295 feet) distance limitation for Cat 5e or higher
4
Continue to Suite if app
a licable. cable from socket to guestroom IDF data patch panel or to
E See other drawings fo f r detailed cable type and connectors guestroom wallplate switch location.
Wireless Internet Service
a e back to floor IDF data patch panel.
Internet & WiFi Phone Access Point (not shown) Notes:
Point (5e or higher for
f AP and / or antenna) wireless coverage fo f r rooms. This drawing is limited to the IT requi
q rements. For other power
Equipment placement point must be outside guestroom with requirements such as housekeeping and decorative lamps, refe f r to
sufficient space around equipment to avoid interfere
f nce and have electrical and interior design drawings. Also, refer to interior design fo
f r
easy service access. All cables located away from any in-place f rniture layout.
fu
electric
t al or non-ethet rnet
r cabli
a ng, plumbing or similar piping /
- Speakers shown in this diagram are for entertr ainment purpos
r es only.
conduit
d .
Emergency Announcement speaker for f Lifef Safety
f not shown.
F Mini bar (option) RJ45 Cable (Male) - See the “Guest Room Writing Desk IT Confi f guration Diagram” for
f oor IDF data more details.
patch panel.

Figure 12 - Connectivity Panel (optional)
2. Connectivity Panel (optional): Consult with the CTR and

see Module <7> to verify the criteria for providing optional
guestroom Connectivity Panels as defined by the Brand
Figure 10 - Connectivity Panel and property location.
(optional) The Connectivity Panel is easily accessible and convenient,
an all-in-one multimedia hub, providing guests with
multiple audio / video inputs to interface their personal
electronic devices with the in-room technologies (such as
the TV).
a. Connectivity Elements on the Connectivity Panel are:
• Power (based on individual country laws, provide
multi adapter where allowed by law)
• Audio / Video (A / V): Audio is stereo PC RGB
MP3 connectivity (MP3 / 4 / x player, iPod)
• HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) -
enhanced solution: Recommended
• USB - enhanced solution: Recommended
• Data: Recommended
• For availability of some elements, refer to
Continental Supplement for specifications.
• Provide auto-sensing connectivity (such as to
automatically enable the TV to switch to the remote
device when plugged in).
b. Location at Desk:
• Place the Connectivity Panel on the desk or wall
in proximity to the desk where the guest has easy
access to the Connectivity Panel components.

• Consider placement so that it is not obtrusive, but

easily located and usable by guests.
c. Installation:
• Deep flush box required to accommodate the cable
and connector with a minimum depth of 5 cm
(2 inch).
• Installation must not compromise cable bending
radius.
• Wall Rating: Verify and maintain wall fire and
acoustical rating at wall penetrations between the
TV and desk.
• Specifications: Contact the CTR for installation
specifications and details.
• Cable Length: Verify maximum cable length
for solutions deployed. Provide 0.61 m (2 ft.)
service cable loop at the TV for easy and flexible
connections.
d. Cabling Planning:
• Ensure the length does not exceed manufacturer’s
stated maximum dimensions - especially for USB
/ HDMI cables.
• Provide the appropriate cable type.
• The conduit in the wall accommodates the cables
(in some cases multiple conduits are installed).
e. Connectivity Panel Planning: Configure power outlet
access to allow for simultaneous usage of large
electronic accessories and transformers.
C. Front Desk, Concierge & Bellstand: Because of the different
computer equipment design and constantly changing form
factor of computers, printers and peripherals, contact the CTR
for the current millwork document for equipment sizes before
finalizing dimensions and the desk design.
1. Provide locations for the following technology Figure 13 - Guest Relations
related components. See Module <2> Desk - Example
• Computer
• Keyboard & mouse
• LCD screen monitor
• Printer
• Key encoder
• Credit card terminal
• Credit card printer
• Phone (Depends on PBX hardware vendor. Contact
the CTR)
• Other (such as parking equipment)
2. Locate the equipment out of sight from the guest,
but easy accessible and in a good workable location for
employees.

3. Monitor: Provide a 45 degree viewing angle for the

LCD screen.
4. Ventilation: Provide ample airflow around the following
components:
• LCD screen
• Printer
• Computer (most computer designs utilize front to
back or side to side equipment cooling).
5. Design: Provide ample, dedicated space (to prevent
overheating and to allow for installation) and appropriate
locations for the following:
• Keyboard: Locate with ample adjacent space for left
as well as right handed mouse operations.
• Monitor: Standard LCD (space used accommodates
a minimum 19 inch standard LCD screen).
• Station: One computer per station.
• Equipment: Space to accommodate CTR specified
PC.
• Cables: Accommodate ample space at the back of
the connected equipment. Locate for easy access and
connection point that is integrated into millwork.
• Standby Power: Local UPS connected to the com-
puter, monitor and other critical equipment. Review
with CTR for requirement based on country situation.
• Printer: Large laser printer per station utilizing printers
with 2 paper trays added with access to front and back
to change paper and toner and clear paper jams.
6. Cable Tube: Provide a cable tube from the top of the desk
(monitor, keyboard, mouse) to the computer equipment, UPS
location in the lower desk to properly arrange cables.
7. Power: Provide a minimum of 7 power outlets above
the work counter of the desk for all devices (monitor,
key encoder, credit card terminal and others) and at the
computer location (computer, UPS).
8. Dot Matrix Printers: Provide an additional location for
dot matrix printers in locations where fiscal facturas /
Fapio are a governmental requirement.
9. RJ45 Cable Termination Points: Provide per station as
outlined in Section 13A.7: Cable Termination Points.
• Locate termination points at the upper half of the
desk, out of guest sight, and located where the cables
can be connected to key card encoder, credit card
terminals, phones and other devices.
• Termination points are also located at the lower half
of the desk for computer and printer access.

D. P.O.S. Restaurant:
1. Provide location for the following technology related
components. Discuss with CTR for details.
Figure 14 - P.O.S.
• P.O.S. Terminal
Restaurant - Example
• LCD Touch Screen
• P.O.S. Slip Printer
• P.O.S. Fiscal Printer
• Credit Card Terminal (option)
• Cash Drawer (option)
• Phone
2. Locate the equipment out of guest sight, but easily
accessible and in a good workable location for the
employees. Locate away from heat and moisture
sources.
3. Ensure ample airflow or cooling around the computer.
Most computer designs utilize front to back or side to
side equipment cooling.
4. Provide ample space for cables at the back of the
connected equipment.
5. Provide a cable tube from the top of the desk (monitor,
keyboard, mouse) to the computer equipment, UPS
location in the lower desk to properly arrange cables.
6. Provide a minimum of 6 power outlets above the work
counter of the desk for various devices (monitor, key
encoder, credit card terminal, etc.) and at the computer
location (computer, UPS).
7. Provide space for a local UPS connected to the computer,
monitor and other critical equipment.
8. Provide RJ45 cable termination points per station as
outlined in Section 13A.7: Cable Termination Points.
9. Locate termination points out of guest sight and at
a location where the cables are connected to P.O.S.
terminal, credit card terminals, phones and other
devices without being visible to the guests.
E. Property Internet (PI):
1. PI: A property system service that provides guests
with PI connectivity from their personal computer
equipment to access the Internet from the guestroom
or public spaces.
Obtain an MI approved guest PI service provider from
the CTR’s approved provider list.
2. Network Connections: The CTR provides detailed
network documentation for active network components
and software, and requirements for wired and wireless
connections.

a. Module addresses
<13>Property
Table 13A-4, low Matrix
Systems voltage cabling require-
ments in order to support the active components.
b. Design low voltage cable plant considering all
Ethernet network systems for guests, employees,
telephones, wireless access points, cellular signal
enhancement equipment and building systems.
3. Standards & Resources:
a. CTR Representative: Consult with the CTR
representative to obtain the IR Design Supplements
(Property Internet Brand Strategy Standard) that
include relevant project documentation, active
networking equipment standards and current
accepted vendor list.
• IR Design Supplements include relevant infor-
mation specifically for MI’s low voltage cabling
requirements.
• The CTR assists with design, budget estimat-
ing, and procurement of the active network
system components.
b. Building Industry Consulting Service International,
Inc (BICSI): Comply with the design principles, de-
sign and implementation for the in-building Ethernet
service network.
c. Consultant: MI recommends engaging a qualified
hospitality industry technical design specialist
who is a Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD) with BICSI.
F. Audio / Visual Facilities: See Module <13C>
G. Loss Prevention: See Module <16>

13A.11 Property Systems

A. Systems Matrix: The following Property Systems Matrix,
indicates systems required or recommended for MI properties.
Equipment size, location, power requirements and BTUs are
current as of the publication of this document. Check with the
CTR to ensure information is current and appropriate to meet
property IT specifications.
Property Systems Matrix
X = Required Location
Applicable Above Equipment Power Va
O = Optional On Property Property
“Marriott Residences
Note: This list is not (non-membership)”
Computer Room
Low End Server

Marriott Hosted
Marriott Hotels
complete, but shows the
Telecom Room
most common systems in
High Server
the property. Contact MI
for additional systems.
Other
BTU
ASP
Function
Va
File & Print Server x x x x 550 1800
Authentication Server x o x x 520 1700
Property Management System x o x x x 1100 3600
(PMS)
Interface Servers x o x x 1140 3400
Sales & Catering System x x x x 550 1800
Reservation Systems x o x
Revenue Management System x o x
Accounting System x x x x x 550 1800
Time Keeping System x x x x x 550 1800
Human Resources System x x x x x 550 1800
Payroll System x x x x x
Key Card System x o x x 520 1700
Credit Card Interface System x x x x x
Spa Management System x x x 550 1800
Point of Sale System x o x x 550 1800
Retail Inventory System x x x x 520 1700
Food & Beverage Inventory o x x x 520 1700
System
Club Membership System x x 550 1800
Engineering Management x o x x x 550 1800
Depends
Building Management o o x o x on System
Depends
Golf Management System o x o x on System
Guest Recognition / Response x x x
System
Digital Signage o o x x 520 1700
Music Management System o o x x 520 1700
Depends
On Demand Video System x x on System
Depends
Property Internet (PI) x o x on System
Concierge Systems x x x x 520 1700
Phone System (PBX / Voice Depends
x x x
Mail) on System
Call Accounting System x x x x x 520 1700
Document Archiving x o x x 520 1700

13A.12 Continental Contacts

Marriott International Continental Technology Representatives
(CTR) are assigned to projects by the Continental Vice Presidents
of Global Information Resources. The contact information for the
Continental Vice President of Global Information Resources is as
follows:
Figure 15 - Global Continents
Global Continents AMERICAS
Welch, Pat – CVPIR
+ 1 617 510 5577
+ 1 781 735 0503
Patricia.Welch@Marriott.com
ASIA PACIFIC
Bookallil, Martin – CVPIR
+ 852 2192 6000
+ 852 2192 6060
Martin.Bookallil@Marriott.com
Hawaiian EUROPE
Islands included Tattersfield, John – CVPIR
in + 44 20 7012 7358
Americas + 44 20 7012 7369
Continent John.Tattersfield@Marriott.com
MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA

Ibrahim, Waleid – CVPIR
+ 971 56 603 2610
+ 971 44407740
Waleid.Ibrahim@Marriott.com

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
13B
Telecommunications
13B - Telecommunications THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
13B.1 System Description 1
13B.2 PABX Telephone System 2
13B.3 Telephone Extensions 3
13B.4 Other Communication Systems 4
13B.5 Telephone System Equipment Room 5
13B.6 Acronyms / System Criteria & Guidelines 7
13B.7 Systems Criteria & Administrative Telephone Guidelines 8

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Telecom | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Telecommunications - 13B
Telecommunications
13B.1 System Description
A. Telecommunications: MI criteria requirements for
telecommunications focus on three functional areas;
telephone system, voice mail system and call accounting
system.
Continental Technology
Representative (CTR)
1. Quality: Each system shall be a "state of the art"
processor based system configured and designed for
At the initiation of the project design,
contact the CTR to outline system the hospitality industry.
requirements based on the project • PBX System: Provide to support traditional
systems.
proprietary digital telephones, industry standard
analog telephones, proprietary IP telephones and SIP
based IP telephones.
MI Project Contact • Telephones: Meet governing regulatory requirements
Marriott International - “MI” - is the such as those provided by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) related to hearing aids worn by
Contact the MI Design Manager for the hearing impaired guests.
project specific manager referenced 2. Coordination: Systems shall be compatible and be able
by the term “MI” throughout this to interface with each other, and with the Property
Module.
Management System (PMS). <13A>
3. Approvals: The PMS and the Telecommunications
Systems require MI acceptance for use in the country of
installation. The PBX shall also be compatible with the
Public Switched Network in the country of installation.
B. Administrative Telephone Guidelines: The telephone system
guidelines listed in this Module identify specific telephone
station requirements in each functional space within the
property.
1. The guidelines define a "typical" system, therefore
quantities vary based on the size, design and specific
property program.
2. Variations may be required due to operational "customs"
in a particular country and the project’s competitive
marketplace.
3. Customizing the guidelines for a property is performed
in consultation with MI Operations and the CTR <13A>.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Telecom 1

13B.2 PABX Telephone System

A. General: Design system to accommodate property require-
ments for complete guest, administrative and property
operations.
1. CTR confirms availability of adequate telephone
service, service connection location, and name and
address of telephone operating company representative.
2. The Owner purchases the PABX telephone system.
3. See Module <13A>, Section 13A.7 for additional
information.
4. Design Documents: Design Team documents include
space, power, conduit and environmental requirements
coordinated with equipment suppliers.
5. Requirements: MI provides the Owner’s Systems
Consultant with detailed telephone system requirements.
B. Telephone Equipment Room: See <13A>, Section 13A.8.
Provide a dedicated space within the Computer Room
or a dedicated room for telephone equipment, UPS
(uninterrupted power source), and backboard. Consult the
CTR for specific Continent requirements and provide the
following:
1. Adequate room size for planned and related equipment.
2. Submit to MI for acceptance an equipment room
drawing that defines the coordinated equipment plan. A
diagram that defines the preferred layout is referenced
in Module <13A>.
C. Guestrooms: Provide the telephone extension line at the
guestroom writing desk and bedside. Contact the CTR for
the Brand specific telephone line requirements.
1. Provide telephones with volume control handsets and
text telephones as required by governing accessibility
regulations.
2. Mount accessible phones at required mounting height
and clearance.
D. Suites: Provide phone types at the following locations:
• Desk: cordless phone
• Bedside: corded phone
• Pantry: corded wall phone
E. Public Phones (if available): Comply with Interior Design,
finish requirements, ADA requirements and the following:
1. Conduit and electrical power to each phone and proper
back panel housing.
2. Locate one house phone at pay phone enclosure and
provide a house phone jack immediately below the
counter.
2 Telecom | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

3. Verify phone height for chair operation.

4. See Module <2> for “Public Telephones”.
F. Function Spaces: In meeting facilities and pre-function
areas, provide telephone jack outlets.
1. Locate phone jacks in wall base, grouped with other
media facility connections.
2. Provide jacks with direct in-line access (to bypass
operators), when requested by guests.
13B.3 Telephone Extensions
A. General: The system installer prepares a listing of the
property telephone extensions.
1. Contact the CTR <13A> for detailed extension plan.
2. Installer walks the property with property pre-opening
team and designates room names, staff position for each
phone, pager, fax machine and modem connection.
B. Extensions: The following is a representative listing of
major extension groups:
• 9 = Outside Line
• 0 = Operator
C. Guestrooms: Use 3 to 4 number guestroom number for the
main guestroom phone line.
• Dial 7 or 8 before the number for calling room to room
• Provide direct dial buttons on guestroom phones for
various guest services.
• 2000 = House Phones
• 2400 = Lounge
• 2500 = Fitness Center
D. Offices & Services: Use a four digit dialing plan with the actual
numbering determined by the individual property design
and DID number availability from the Local Exchange
Carrier.
• 5000 = Executive Offices
• 5100 = Sales and General Offices
• 5200 = Accounting
• 5300 = Human Resources
• 5400 = Quality / Training
• 5500 = Security Office
• 5555 = Security Hot Line
• 5600 = Front Desk, Concierge, Bell Captain
• 5700 = Retail / Guest Services
• 5800 = Housekeeping / Laundry
• 5900 = Engineering

E. Food & Beverage / Banqueting: Use a four digit dialing plan

with the actual numbering determined by the individual
property design and DID number availability from the
Local Exchange Carrier.
• 6000 = Restaurant Reservations / Business Center
• 6100 = Banquet Services / Pre-function
• 6200 = Stewarding / Pantries
• 6300 = Lobby Lounge & Bars
• 6400 = Restaurants
• 6500 = Exterior F&B
• 6600 = Room Service
• 6700 = Kitchens
13B.4 Other Communication Systems
A. Equipment - General: Provide other communications equipment
that may include, but not limited to, the following:
• Radios
• Pagers
• VOIP Wireless telephones <13A>
• Cellular Telephones: Commercially available with push
to talk capability <13A>
B. Radios:
1. System Frequency: UHF, VHF, DCT or other accepted
frequency within the country of installation.
2. Control Base Station: Provide desktop microphone
and locate in Security Office <16>.
3. Channels: Four channels minimum to address
the property departments (Security, Engineering,
Housekeeping, etc.) and one channel for emergency
calls transmitted to all channels at once. At larger
properties provide additional channels as needed by
other departments.
4. Repeaters: Locate centrally, two or more repeaters,
power splitter, two antennas (one on roof, and one in
engineering shop) and provide one repeater with paging
capabilities. More repeaters may be required based on
the property design.
C. Portable Radios: 2-way portable radios.
1. Consult with CTR to determine quantity based on
property size and use by Security, Engineering and
Housekeeping.
2. Designate for Security, Engineering and Housekeeping
and provide departments with pager backup.
3. Provide electrical outlets at each department recharging
station.
4. Provide under Operating Supplies & Equipment (OS&E).
D. Pagers / Mobile Handphones: Provide under OS&E.

13B.5 Telephone System Equipment Room

A. Program: See Module <13A>, Section 13A.8 for additional
information. Provide for telephone system equipment, voice
mail system, call accounting system, (UPS) battery backup
system, maintenance terminals, cable / wire terminations
for systems and patch panel.
B. Size / Area: The property size determines requirements, for
example, room sizes may vary as follows:
Number of Guestrooms Equipment Room Size
300 Rooms 2.7 x 4.9 m (9 x 16 ft.)
500 Rooms 2.7 x 5.8 m (9 x 19 ft.)
750 Rooms 2.7 x 6.7 m (9 x 22 ft.)
D. Location: No farther than 305 m (1,000 ft.) from attendant
consoles and above the water table, flood plain and away
from water and moisture sources.
E. Room Environment: Provide a computer room like
environment and locate in close proximity to, or within the
Computer / Telecom Room <13A> <15A>.
1. Design room free from radio frequency interference
including x-ray equipment, hand held transceivers,
radar, radio, microwave, TV transmitters, electrical
transformers etc. unless specifically designed to work
in conjunction and proximity of telephone equipment.
2. To prevent interference from electromagnetic or static
fields, locate the telephone equipment cable risers and
chases away from major electrical equipment such as
large motors, elevator equipment rooms, transformers,
electronic ballasts, etc.
3. Design space as relatively dust free and moisture proof.
4. Avoid locating water pipes in room. Provide drainage
for water cooled air conditioning system properly
routed away from the room. Do not locate room at base
of, or immediately adjacent to, vertical plumbing risers.
5. If in-room entertainment equipment (such as a movie
system) is located in telephone room, provide more
space, power and comply with room environmental
requirements described above.
F. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Provide one wall, the length
of the room (longer dimension wall, if rectangular), with
clear space, unbroken by doors, windows, vents, etc. for
placement of MDF.
1. MDF Backboard: 19 mm (¾ inch) plywood (one side
finished) with one coat of fire retardant paint or as
required by governing code.

2. Mount MDF backboard on clear wall and attach to

furring strips offset 10 cm (4 inch) from wall on 60 cm
(24 inch) centers.
G. Floor: Provide anti-static, vinyl composition tile to eliminate
uncontrolled ground paths and electrostatic charges.
1. Never use carpeting on floor.
2. Prefer, 20 cm (8 inch) high, accessible computer floor.
Design access floor system to support 113 kg / 900 cm²
(250 lbs. / sq. ft.) minimum load.
3. When access floor is not provided, mount telephone
system on 24 cm (9.5 inch) raised concrete pad above
the lowest floor level.
H. Fire Protection: See Module <14>. Obtain acceptance from
Marriott’s Fire Protection Department for applicable fire
protection requirements in room. Provide wire basket
guard on fire sprinklers.
I. Lighting: <15C> Provide adequate lighting for illumination
of telephone equipment and backboard area.
1. Provide 323 Lux (30 foot-candles) minimum at floor
level.
2. Connect power for emergency lighting to standby
power.

13B.6 Acronyms / System Criteria & Guidelines

A. Acronyms: The following are typical acronyms used in this
Module and others of this Design Standard. <GR>
1. ACD (Automatic Call Distributor): Telephone
System feature or functionality that allows calls to be
automatically answered and routed based on predefined
set of instructions. Calls are typically queued and
receive delayed announcements informing status of
calls and are connected to staff when available.
2. CDR (Call Detail Recording): Feature in the telephone
system that keeps track of and reports information
on outgoing phone calls. Information such as, “what
telephone line originated the call?; what number was
dialed?; how long the call took?; what is date and time
call was made?”
3. CTR: Continental Technology Representative.
4. DDI (Direct Dialing Inward): Ability to allow callers
outside of the property to reach specific internal PABX
extension line without being transferred by PABX
operator.
5. DID (Direct Inward Dialing): Same feature and
meaning as DDI.
6. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency): Also known
as, "Touchtone", a push button method of dialing as
opposed to a rotary dial.
7. ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): A
standard based digital service for both voice and
data applications provided by telephone companies
throughout the world.
8. RMATS (Remote Maintenance and Testing System):
Provides the telephone system maintenance provider
with the ability to access the telephone system from a
centralized test center via modem or the Internet.
9. SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording): Has the
same meaning as CDR.

13B.7 Systems Criteria & Administrative Telephone Guidelines

Table 1 - Systems Criteria Outline
PABX
Features / Capabilities:
Alphanumeric display administrative telephones and console for guest name display
Variable auto wake up with audit trail printer
ACD with statistical report package and printer
Acceptable interface to Marriott’s Property Based System (or Property Management System) and integration
with check-in / check-out, room status, guest name, etc.)
CD interface for music on hold. Provide interface to support various music sources such as CD, tape, A/V
equipment, etc
Automatic Route Selection
Integrated Message Waiting via PABX software
Call Detail Recording output to Call Accounting System and to PMS hospitality interface
Redundant CPU above 300 lines
1 hour Battery Backup (when supported by emergency power)
Single Digit Access to designated guest services
Call Waiting Required
DTMF Dialing (Touchtone)
Hotel / Motel Software
Flexible Dialing Plan room number extension number correlation
Compatible with digital trunking T1, E1, ISDN Basic and Primary rate
System Announcement Capability - ACD, Attendant Queue, etc.
Paging System Interface
6 Party Conference
Traffic Measurement Capability - trunks & consoles
System Alarms for fault management
Power Conditioner.
Compatible with all network supervisory trunk signaling
Power failure transfer capability
DID or DDI for selective administrative telephones.
Acceptable Systems: Consult your CTR for current accepted systems


Call Accounting System
Flexible Surcharging - multiple pricing levels (guest / administrative)
Accepted interface to Marriott’s Property Management System (PMS) / Call Accounting interface (CDR)
Administrative reports
1 hour UPS (when supported by emergency power) <15C>
Duration and distance pricing
Rate table updates
Itemized mini-bar posting to PMS or PBS
Powerful call charge calculation
Multiple & flexible charging schemes
Required
Able to handle complex rate structures through “code mapping”
Multiple and separate rate table per telephone Carrier
On-line checking of phone calls made (guest & administrative extensions)
Number of PABX lines supported is software definable to match all PABX extensions
Customized reports
Supports “home language” characters
End of day reports with user selectable call types with re-printing options
Summary month end reports
Call record storage - one year
Auto-scheduling of end of day reports
Acceptable Systems: Consult your CTR for current accepted Call Accounting Systems
Voice Mail System

Accepted interface to Marriott’s Property Management System (PMS)
Multiple language capability
Lodging software with a simplified guest interface
Full featured administrative mailboxes
Remote access password protected
Text message notification
Personalized greetings for guest and administrative mail boxes Required
Number of mailboxes in system shall support designated PABX extensions in the system
Size of mailbox is administered in system software
Customized voice prompts to instruct guests in voice & text message retrieval
Software definable limit to length of messages
Software definable “revert to live person” to escape from voice mail
Auto Attendant with voice menus
Acceptable Systems: Consult your CTR for current accepted Voice Mail Systems


Voice Wiring: See additional requirements in Module <13A> and the related supplement.
Voice Wiring - four twisted pair Cat 5e station wiring to each telephone or device (jack)
Voice Riser and house cable sized to support 2 active pair per guestroom or administrative telephone + 25%
growth. Required
Voice House cable servicing ballroom sized to support 6 active pairs per jack + 50% growth.
Patch panels for voice connections in ballroom and meeting rooms.
Data Wiring: (see additional requirements in Module <13A> and the related Supplement)
Wiring for Property Internet (PI) - four twisted pair Cat 5e cable (EIA/TIA) installed per the Ethernet Stan-
dard to each guestroom and designated meeting spaces. On the device end, terminate the cable in a RJ45 jack
per the TIA / EIA-568-B termination spec at the desk location and behind TV locations in each guestroom or Required
in the designated location in meeting spaces and on a patch panel in the IDF closet. Backbone wiring from the
IDF to the server location follows the applicable Ethernet standard. See Module <13A> and Supplement.
Structured cabling for administrative LAN system to maximize resources and provide flexibility. See Modules
<13A> and <13B> and Supplements for administrative data wiring for the PMS / PBS, P.O.S., & LAN require- Required
ments.
Guestroom Lines & Telephones
One PABX extension line to each Guestroom with 2, single line telephones per room, one at the desk and one at
the nightstand. Both telephones pick up the same single PBX extension line. If appropriate, provide a cord-
less “master and slave” unit where a version is available for the telephone handset model. Consult the CTR for
Brand specific requirements. At JW Marriott, the desk phone is cordless.
Ritz-Carlton
Guest Lounge g Levell and d Suite
i rooms only,l provideid 2,
onetwo li
line telephones;
cordless ltelephone
h one cordless
at desk,dla telephone
at the
h desk
d with
k andd a tele-
cord atl th
the
pother
honelocation
with cord at athe
and otherwall
corded location.
phone
p Provide
at suiteapantry.
pcorded wall phone
y Suites yp at ysuite
typically havepantry. Suites
3 or more typically
telephones
p have
p 3 orgmore
depending on Required
telephones depending in the suite size. Premium suites and some markets may require a bathroom phone.
the suite size.
Integrated message waiting lamp & speed dial buttons for guest services.
Guestroom dialing instructions and disclosure information on telephone faceplate as required by governing
authority such as the FCC or PUC (Public Utility Commission).
Guestroom Telephones: Consult your CTR for continental specific list of accepted guestroom telephone models.

Table 2- Administrative Telephone Guidelines

Consult the CTR for property specific locations
Private
Telephone
Typical Required Outside
Wiring Cat 5e
Locations Equipment or Telephone Type Scope PABX Central
four pair as a
(Quantity) Extension Office
minimum
Line
Front Office Areas
Lobby House Tels. Analog Desk Telephone 4 Yes
Front Desk IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 per station Yes
Analog Lines For Credit Card Verification
Front Desk Machine. See CTR for local credit card 1 per station Yes
terminal.
Concierge/Hospitality Desk IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes ( DID)
Concierge/Hospitality Desk 1 Yes
Machine
Front Office IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes (DID)
Rooms Control IP / Digital Telephone with Display 2 4 pair per device Yes
Rooms Control 2 Yes
Machine
Cashier Office IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes
Counting Room Analog Single Line Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Group Coordinator IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes
Group Check in Desk IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes
Front Office Fax Analog Line for Fax Machine 1 Yes Yes
Bell Stand IP / Digital Telephone with Display 2 Yes
Minimum of
PABX Operator or Guest IP / Digital PABX Console or ACD terminals PABX type
2+1
Services Call Center as defined per project dependent
per 200 rms
Guest Services Director IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes
Call Center Office IP / Digital Telephone with Display 2 Yes
Hotel Pilot Fax Analog Line for Fax Machines 2 4 pair per device Yes Yes
1 per Shift
Shift Manager IP / Digital Telephone with Display Yes
Mgr


Private
Telephone
Wiring Cat 5e
four pair as a
minimum
Line
Back of House Areas
Security IP / Digital Telephone with Display 2 Yes (DID)
Service Elevator Lobby Analog House Telephone 1 per floor Yes
Housekeeping IP / Digital Telephone with Display 3 Yes
Analog Single Line Wall Telephone
Engineering 1 Yes
(Carpenter Shop)
Engineering IP / Digital Telephone with Display 3 Yes (DID)
4 pair per device
1 per staff
Human Resources IP / Digital Telephone with Display Yes (DID)
member
Parking Office IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 Yes
Ballroom Service Corridors Analog Wall Telephone 2 Yes
Banquet Storage Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Audio / Visual Storage Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Sound Equipment Room Music On Hold Interface NA 4 pair NA
Two Single Line Wall Telephones and outside
Fire Command Room 2 Yes Yes (2)
private lines for digital dialer
4 pair per device
1 per staff
Purchasing IP / Digital Telephone with Display Yes
member
F &B Areas
IP / Digital Telephone with Display per Res-
Specialty Restaurants 1 per Stand Yes
taurant Maitre “D” stand
Analog Line at each P.O.S.Terminal for credit 1 per
Specialty Restaurants card verification. Consult your CTR for local Yes
terminal
requirements.
Hostess Stand in all restau-
In-door Cordless Phone 1 per stand Yes
rant outlets
Chef’s Office IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 per office Yes (DID)
Room Service IP / Digital Telephone with Display 2 Yes

Analog Line at each Point of Sale Terminal
Kitchen Point of Sale 1 per
for credit card verification. Typically required Yes
Terminal terminal 4 pair per device
for International sites
Dry Food Storage Analog House Telephone 1 Yes
Main Food Production Line Analog House Telephone 1 Yes
Service Bar Analog House Telephone 1 Yes
Cold Prep Analog House Telephone 1 Yes
Kitchen Offices IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1 per office Yes
Bakery Analog Wall Telephone 1
Garde Manger IP / Digital Telephone with Display 1
Liquor Storage Analog House Telephone 1 Yes


Private
Telephone
Wiring Cat 5e
four pair as a
minimum
Line
F &B Areas (continued)
Analog House Telephone (or pay phone), wall
Loading Dock 1 Yes
mounted
Lobby Bar IP / Digital Telephone with display. 1 Yes
Analog Line at each Point of Sale Terminal 1 per

Lobby Bar Point of Sale for credit card verification. Consult your CTR Yes
terminal
for local requirements.
IP / Digital Telephone with display at Hostess
Restaurant s / Cashier per Restaurant. Typically required 1 Yes
for international sites.
4 pair per device
Analog Line at each Point of Sale Terminal 1 per
Restaurant s for credit card verification. Consult your CTR Yes
terminal
Analog Line for credit card verification and

Service Bars Analog Wall Telephone. Consult your CTR 1 per location Yes
Public Telephones / House 1 per Yes (Pay

Wall Telephones NA
Telephone Restaurant Tel Lines)
Administrative Offices
1 per staff
Accounting IP / Digital Telephone with display Yes (DID)
member
Dir of Revenue Mgmt IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes (DID)
Controller /
IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Office Yes (DID)
Assistant Controller
Controller Analog Line for modem 1 Yes (DID)
1 per staff
Reservations IP / Digital ACD Telephones with display Yes (DID)
member
IP / Digital Telephone with display, ACD
Reservations Mgr. 1 Yes (DID)
Terminal and Report Printer
General Manager IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 4 pair per device Yes (DID)
General Manager Single line Desk House telephone 1 Yes (DID)
Resident Manager. /
IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes (DID)
Director of Operations
F&B Mgr. IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes (DID)
Catering Mgr.’s, Sales Mgr.’s IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Mgr. Yes (DID)
Dir. of Marketing IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes (DID)
Receptionist IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes


Private
Telephone
Wiring Cat 5e
four pair as a
minimum
Line
1 per staff
Secretaries / Assistants IP / Digital Telephone with display Yes (DID)
member
Fax Machine Analog Line for fax machine 1 Yes (DID) Yes
Convention Sales / Services,
IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Mgr. Yes (DID)
Event Management 4 pair per device
Dir of Public Relations IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Mgr. Yes (DID)
Guest Recognition Manager IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Mgr. Yes (DID)
Dir of Business Travel IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per Mgr. Yes (DID)
Public Space
Analog Single Line Wall Telephone and
Meeting Rooms 1 per room 4 pair per jack Yes
duplex jack per room
Analog Single Line Wall Telephone per
Ballroom 1 per division 4 pair per device Yes
divisible area
Six multifunction RJ45 jacks per divisible 25 pair per 6
area or Salon to support voice or data jacks or (6) 4
Ballroom 1 per division Yes
connections. Telephone jacks per divisible pair cables per
area jack
Analog Single Line Wall or Desk House
Guest Elevator Foyer 1 per floor 4 pair per device Yes
Telephone per floor
Patch panel
size = 2 x
quantity of
Patch panel each telephone cable to terminate telephone
Ballroom & Meeting Rooms
in IDF on panel jacks in
ballroom
& meeting
rooms
IP / Digital Telephone receptionist, office,
Business Center 1 per location Yes
conference room, boardroom
Business Center Analog Line for fax and PC modems 1 per location Yes
Wall Pay Telephones or House Telephones variable per Yes (Pay
Public Telephones NA
when public telephones are not available property size 4 pair per device Tel. lines)
Assembly & Pre-Function variable per
Analog Desk Telephones Yes
Areas property size
Coat Room Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Conference Registration IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes
Retail Space (Concession) Requirements vary per contract variable conduit only NA Yes
Guest Floor Lounge IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes
Guest Floor Lounge, Guest

Indoor Cordless Phone 1 4 pair per device
Lounge Level
Yes
Guest Floor Lounge, Guest
House Telephones 2
Lounge Level


Private
Telephone
Wiring Cat 5e
four pair as a
minimum
Line
Computer Room
RS232C Interface between Telephone and
PBS or PMS Interface 1 NA
PBS or PMS
RS232C CDR / SMDR Output to Call
Call Accounting Interface 1 4 pair per device NA
Accounting System
Voice Mail Interface Voice Mail system 1 NA
MI Router Analog Line (Loop Start Telephone Co Lines) 1
House Telephone Analog Wall Telephone 1 4 pair per device Yes

Miscellaneous Areas
Housekeeping Room Analog Wall Telephone 1 per floor Yes

4 pair per outlet
Valet Analog Wall Telephone 1 per location Yes
Guest Wing Remote Entry Analog House Telephone 1 per location Yes
IP / Digital Telephone with Display

Fitness Center 1 per location Yes
Receptionist and Offices
Telephone Equipment Room PABX RMATS Line 2 Yes (2)
Elevators Elevator Telephone 1 per elevator Yes
Exercise Room Analog Single Line Wall Telephone 1 Yes
IP / Digital Telephone with display at Point of
Gift Shop & Office Sale Terminal and analog line for credit card 2 per location Yes
terminal, if required.
Analog Single Line Desk Telephone for Pool
Pool (Indoor) 1 Yes
Attendant
4 pair per device
Pool (Indoor) Analog Single Line Wall Telephones 1 Yes
Pool (Outdoor) Indoor Cordless Phone 1 Yes
Pocket Paging
Analog Line 1 Yes
System (Beepers)
In-Room Movie Video Analog Line for Modems (Loop Start
2 Yes (2)
System Telephone Co. Lines)
IP / Digital Telephone with display at Point of
Golf Pro Shop 1 per location Yes
Sale Terminal and analog line for credit card.
Golf Pro Shop Office IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per location Yes (DID)
Pool Bar (Outdoor) Analog Desk Telephone 1 Yes
Analog Line at each Point of Sale Terminal
Pool Bar (Outdoor) 1 per location Yes
for credit card verification
Pool Deck (Outdoor) Weatherproof Phone Jacks 2 Yes
IP / Digital Telephone with display and ana- 4 pair per outlet
Spa Reception
log line for credit card terminal, if required.
2 Yes (DID)


Private
Telephone
Wiring Cat 5e
four pair as a
minimum
Line
1 per work
Spa Reservations IP / Digital Telephone with display Yes (DID)
station
Spa Offices IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 per office Yes (DID)
1 per work
Spa Admin Area IP / Digital Telephone with display Yes (DID)
station
IP / Digital Telephone with display and ana-
Spa Retail Shop 2 per location Yes (DID)
log line for credit card terminal, if required.
Spa Juice Bar IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 4 pair per outlet Yes
Spa Prep Kitchen Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Spa Dispensary IP / Digital Telephone with display 1 Yes
Men’s Lounge Analog Desk House Telephone 1 Yes
Women’s Lounge Analog Desk House Telephone 1 Yes
Cardio Room Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes
Exercise Room Analog Wall Telephone 1 Yes

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
13C
Audio / Visual
13C - Audio / Visual THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
13C.1 Overview 1
13C.2 Acoustics 2
13C.3 A / V Systems - General 4
13C.4 Systems Infrastructure 5
13C.5 Background Music (BGM) 10
13C.6 Digital Signage & Displays 13
13C.7 Master Antenna Television System 15
13C.8 Food & Beverage (F&B) Systems 17
13C.9 Entertainment Lounge Systems 19
13C.10 Fitness Center Systems 19
13C.11 Spa Systems 20
13C.12 Event Space Systems 22
13C.13 Systems Coordination 36

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B A/V| January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Audio / Visual - 13C
Audio / Visual
13C.1 Overview
A. Program: Provide audio and visual systems to enhance
the sound and information system environs for guests,
customers and employees in public, recreation, function,
guest accommodations and specific BOH spaces.
Continental Technology
Representative (CTR) B. Standards: Comply with the following industry standards:
At the initiation of the project design,
1. InfoComm & NSCA: Design sound systems in
contact the CTR to outline system compliance with accepted best practices published by:
requirements based on the project • InfoComm International (InfoComm)
systems. • National Systems Contractors Association (NSCA).
2. Cabling: Install infrastructure cabling in compliance
with manufacturers’ recommendations, NEC, BICSI,
MI Project Contact NFPA and accepted best practices as published by the
Marriott International - “MI” - is the International Communications Industries Association
(ICIA / InfoComm) and NSCA)
Contact the MI Design Manager for the C. Abbreviations & Definitions:
project specific manager referenced • BICSI: Building Industries Communications Systems
Module. Institute
• DRM: Digital Rights Management
• DSP: Digital Signal Processing / Processor
• HD: High Definition (video or television)
• HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface
• MATV: Master Antenna Television System
• NAB: National Association of Broadcasters
• NEC: National Electric Code
• NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
• PPV: Pay-per-view System
• SD: Standard Definition (video or television)
• UL: Underwriters Laboratories
D. Coordination: Coordinate requirements of this Module with
other Design Standard Modules relating to:
• Architectural acoustics, Module <6>
• Guestroom entertainment, Module <7A>
• Computer systems, Module <13A>
• Telecommunications, Module <13B>
• Electric Power, Module <15C>
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013

|A/V 1
13C.2 Acoustics
A. Acoustical Planning: Acoustic characteristics and interior
design of event spaces are essential to creating successful
function spaces and providing guest satisfaction.
1. Noise Criteria (NC): Measure and calculate the
background noise levels expressed as NC, a mechanical
noise level indicator that only includes the energy or
frequency sound pressure levels between 125 Hertz and
4,000 Hertz and ignores noises outside of this range even
though they are within hearing range.
2. Background Noise: Reduce excessive background
noise, reverberation, echoes and unwanted sound from
adjacent spaces that interferes with the guests’ ability to
decipher the spoken word, comprehend sound delivery
and minimize audience stress.
Maximum Levels of Background Noise:
• Ballrooms: NC 35
• Meeting Rooms & Boardrooms: NC 30
3. HVAC Systems: <15A> Design HVAC systems to
minimize unwanted background noise into event
spaces.
• Do not locate noisy HVAC devices in ceiling spaces
and on event space roofs.
• Select quiet supply diffusers in compliance with
ASHRAE guidelines for noise control.
B. Reverberation Times:
1. Sound Energy: Measure in seconds (RT60) for sound
energy to decay 60 dB from its original energy level.
2. Average Reverberation Time - Maximums:
a. Ballrooms: RT 60 = 1.2 seconds, with combined
salons and average between 500 Hz and 4,000 Hz.
b. Meeting Rooms: RT 60 = 0.8 seconds.
3. Cause: Interior space volume effects reverberation. Large
rooms with high reverberation create potential problems.
4. Acoustical Treatment: Control reverberation with the
proper balance of absorptive, diffusive and reflective
surface treatments. Provide on wall surfaces from chair
rail to 3.6 m (12 ft.) AFF or higher. Coordinate wall
finishes with the project’s acoustical consultant and
Interior Design.
2 A/V| January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

C. Echoes: Large, acoustically reflective (hard) surfaces,

particularly in event spaces, create echoes.
1. Properties: When the distance between the sound
source and the reflective surface increases, the echo
becomes more distinct.
• Large rooms are susceptible to echo problems.
• Live bands and productions with staging and high-
level portable sound systems exacerbate echo prob-
lems because speakers direct much of the sound
energy toward side and rear walls.
2. Absorptive Surfaces: Provide wall surfaces that are
properly designed with diffusive and absorptive
elements to reduce or eliminate echoes.
D. Acoustic Isolation: See Module <6>. Isolate the acoustically
controlled area from adjacent spaces such as public and
service corridors, and other adjacent noise producing event
spaces. Provide a high sense of privacy for guests attending
meetings in function spaces.
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Determine sound
isolation quality of architectural elements (walls, doors,
operable partitions, etc.) by STC rating.
• Design conditions, such as large architectural ele-
ments require high STC to compensate for vibro-
acoustic element behavior.
• Large operable partitions require higher STC than
smaller partitions for the same installed performance.
2. Noise Isolation Class (NIC): Provide NIC field tests to
evaluate and document completed project spaces and
the effectiveness of architectural elements, demising
fixed walls and partitions, and operable partitions.
3. Pass Doors: Not permitted in operable partitions, due
to acoustical seal compromises and door maintenance
and operation issues.

|A/V 3
13C.3 A / V Systems - General

A. Audio:
1. Background Music: Audible instrumental music
(no words or lyrics), played at low-level, to provide
auditory cues and subtle accompaniment to guests
throughout public spaces such as lobby, circulation,
assembly, activity areas, hallways and corridors, but
not in guestroom corridors.
2. Foreground Music: More dynamic in character and
entertainment quality than background music and may
include music with lyrics. Typically played at higher
audible levels in food and beverage venues, event
spaces and activity areas.
3. Customized Music Services: Or “music styling”,
offering the following:
• customized programming or music channel playlists
• a means of changing tempo and / or genre of music
according to different times in the day - also known
as “day-parting”
4. Sound Reinforcement: Provides amplification system
for voice and music sources and from A/V programs
such as computers, video, audio tapes, etc. Provide in
event spaces and entertainment areas and designated
activity areas.
B. Digital Signage & Way-Finding: An “electronic reader board”
or “visual information system”.
1. Digital Signage: Provide to manage and display
information relating to events, food and beverage, and
property activities through various visual displays in
public circulation and assembly / event spaces.
Utilize to provide flight information at airport
properties, for general property and local area
information, and to promote food and beverage venues
and special amenities (spa, golf, club and public events,
etc.) at resorts.
2. Way-finding: Provide to assist guests with event space
locations, schedules and information.
• Locate larger flat-panel displays at entries and
decision points along the guests’ journey to event
spaces.
• Provide small door-side displays at or near event
space entry doors.

C. Guestroom Entertainment Systems: Provide television

programming (local, satellite and premium cable channels),
music, property information (events, F&B, information
and local “barker” channel), interactive games and pay-
per-view programming.
If required by the property, provide programming from
related facilities (convention centers, airports, universities),
etc.
13C.4 Systems Infrastructure
A. Equipment Rooms: Provide dedicated, secure rooms to
accommodate sound system equipment.
1. Sound System: Locate in a dedicated space on same
event space floor with primary door opening to the
service corridor. See example Figure 1 for room plan.
a. Except for property LAN and telecommunications
service IDFs, do not locate other system equipment
in the sound system equipment rooms.
b. Contain sound and telecommunications equipment
in totally enclosed and lockable steel equipment
cabinets.
c. If equipment room serves A/V and
telecommunications equipment, separate the
equipment with a fence and lockable door to
protect the telecommunications equipment while
maintaining access to A/V equipment.
Figure 1 - Sound System Equipment Room - Example Plan
Notes: A/V Telecom A/V Heat Load: 7,000 BTU /
1 Floor standing equipment racks for

main A/V systems 7
6
2 Electrical contractor provides three, 20A
3' - 0"
isolated ground circuits for each rack.

Flex into top of each rack using liquid- 5
tight non-metallic conduit without
2 2
compromising integrity of isolated
(Back) (Back) (Back)
ground.
3 Exact location of A/V equipment racks 3 4 1 1
shall be coordinated with field
conditions. (Front) (Front) (Front)
4 Data / Telecom rack furnished by A/V
contractor. Data / Telecom wiring, 7
patch panels and other equipment by
4' - 0"
Data / Telecom contractor. 8

5 A / C power panel
6 Chemically charged ground rod
7 Convenience quadraplex power
outlet
8 House phone

|A/V 5
d. Do not allow equipment in ceiling space that requires

maintenance, adjustment, service and may leak or
produce condensation.
e. When event spaces are remote from the equipment
room, provide a large touch screen control panel in
a secure enclosure in the service corridor associated
with the equipment rooms.
f. Not intended for portable A/V equipment storage, but
may serve as department offices.
g. Features: Provide the following:
• Sealed floor
• Painted walls
• Fluorescent lights
• Lay-in ceiling
h. HVAC: Provide an enclosed air conditioned, secure
room. Design to maintain a temperature between 10˚
to 27˚ C (50˚ to 80˚ F) with 30% to 75% relative hu-
midity, non-condensing; see Module <15A>.
2. MATV System Rooms: Provide headend equipment in an
enclosed, air conditioned, secure room.
a. Room Locations: Coordinate the following with
Modules <13A> <13B>.
• When the property utilizes antennas to receive the
off-air programming, locate the headend equipment
room within a 61 m (200 ft.) run of cable from the
equipment to antennas.
• If the property utilizes local cable for the off-air
local programming, locate the headend equipment
room near the A/V equipment room or near / in the
property’s computer equipment room.
• Co-locating the MATV headend with the property
computer and / or telephone equipment is
acceptable.
• If the headend is not located in the Communications
Room, provide ethernet links from the MATV to
the Communications Room.
b. HVAC: Design to maintain a temperature between
10˚ to 27˚ C (50˚ to 80˚ F) with 30% to 75% relative
humidity, non-condensing; see Module <15A>.
3. Control Room: Provide an A/V control room above the pre-
function guest entry (mezzanine floor) to accommodate
technicians operating the systems for events as follows:
a. In high end projects that anticipate a high volume of
social activities.
b. Where a ballroom is small for the anticipated
programmed events.

c. Provide operable windows to the ballroom space so

technicians may hear the event.
B. Systems Distribution:
1. Raceways: Provide pathways, including conduit, pull
boxes and cable trays to contain and manage the A/V and
telecommunications cabling. See Figure 2 example A/V
Infrastructure Diagram.
a. Accessible Raceway: Provide to permit maintenance
and cabling infrastructure upgrades to accommodate
future requirements.
b. Protection: Provide raceway elements to physically
protect cables, accommodate servicing and
replacement, and provide electromagnetic shielding
to minimize system interference.
2. Conduit:
a. Location: Provide conduit from sound system
input and control devices. Extend conduit from the
device backbox above the cable tray so the cable is
continuously protected.
b. Flexible Conduit: Not permitted. Provide ferrous and
thin wall or rigid conduit.
c. Sweep Bends: Provide conduit serving network cabling
with “sweep bends” to permit ready maintenance and
installation of future fiber optic cabling.
3. Cable Trays: Provide cable trays to collect cables from
input, control devices and from speakers. Route cable trays
to equipment room.
Figure 2 - A / V Infrastructure Diagram
A/V LEGEND
C CONTROL
S SPEAKER
I/O INPUT

|A/V 7
Figure 3 - Cable Tray Wiring Distribution - Example Detail
a. Location: Attach cable trays to wall or center support

to permit easy system cable maintenance, additions
and upgrading
b. Dividers: Provide cable trays with ferrous dividers to
separate circuit levels.
c. Example: See Figure 3 Cable Tray Wiring Distribution
- Example Detail.
4. Open Wiring: Utilize accessible ceiling space for speaker
and control circuits only. Support open wiring with “J”
hooks at 1.5 m (5 ft.) on center maximum.
C. Power & Grounding Service: Provide power for the sound
system A/V equipment racks and electric outlets in the Sound
Equipment Room from a dedicated single phase, same phase
isolated ground panel (the “Technical Systems Power Panel”).
1. Power Panel: Equip with an isolation transformer and a
Faraday shield, derived neutral and isolated ground tied
back to the main building ground grid with a dedicated,
large gauge cable. See Figure 4 Technical Systems Power
and Grounding Diagram - Example.
2. Main Sound System Audio Ground: Provide a dedicated
high quality, chemically charged, non-sacrificial technical
ground to provide an impedance to earth of less than 5 ohms
(such as Lyncole Industries XIT ground rod). Equivalent
grounding schemes may be considered if performance is a
proven equivalent for the required system.

Figure 4 - Technical Systems Power and Grounding Diagram - Example
9m
3. UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply: Equip the sound

system with a UPS to protect the programming and control
and the DSP systems settings. Amplifiers are not connected
to UPS.
4. Electric Power Outlets: Provide adjacent to sound system
input plates and A / V network connector panels in event
spaces.
D. Fire & Life Safety Alarms: <14>
1. Coordination: Sound systems can produce high sound
levels that may prevent guests from hearing fire and life
safety system announcements. The sound system is a
completely independent system not associated with nor
connected to the fire alarm and life safety systems, and
does not transmit fire and life safety alarms and messages.
2. System Shut Off: In the event of a fire or life safety alarm,
design the sound system to deactivate, utilizing shunt-trip
breakers or latching power contactors in the equipment
rack.

|A/V 9
E. Telecommunications: <13B>
1. System Interconnections: Provide connections to
telephone services, tie lines and A/V network patchbays.
2. Property Internet (PI): Provide PI connections and a
variety of telecommunications services (house phone,
DID, POTS, T-1, ISDN etc.). Patch the services into the
A/V network to serve guests’ requirements.
3. Adapters: Provide for network RJ45 connections as
four phone circuits.
4. Internet (PI) Connection: <13A> Provide to control
system for remote monitoring, operation and
maintenance.
13C.5 Background Music (BGM)
A. System - General: Distribute music to public spaces such as
lobby, circulation, event / assembly and activity areas.
1. Location: Co-locate equipment with the main event
space equipment, where possible.
Where impractical to completely centralize the
systems, interconnect the remote equipment with the
central equipment to accommodate centralizing the
BGM sources to centralize the systems master control.
2. Quality: Provide commercial quality equipment,
materials and components designed for continuous use.
Consumer quality components are not acceptable.
3. Standards: Comply with manufacturers’ recommenda-
tions and accepted industry standards as published by
ICIA / InfoComm and NSCA.
B. Features & Functions:
1. Music Sources: Originate BGM for public circulation
and assembly spaces from a subscription service.
a. Deliver subscription music services through
telephone, PI, cable, or satellite. On-site BGM
sources utilizing media such as cassettes, tapes
and CDs are not permitted.
b. Provide “day-parting” BGM programming so
property management can pre-arrange music
changes according to time of day. Programming
changes occur automatically and do not require
operator intervention or action.
c. Provide BGM systems dedicated for event
spaces from a minimum of three, independently
selectable, music channel subscription services so
each event space, salon or room may select from
the sources. Also, provide a line-level input on the
patch panel to permit accepted auxiliary music
sources.

d. Provide BGM systems for food and beverage areas.

Include one independent, dedicated music channel
from the subscription service. Each F&B area can
select from the primary property background music
sources.
2. Controls: Provide independent music volume controls for
each distinct property area.
a. Location: Provide controls at the primary equipment
rack or locally. Where local control is appropriate,
conceal controls from public view.
b. Example: Front desk area local control to permit
staff to adjust the volume at night. Controls are
automatically reset to a pre-defined volume level and
music source before morning activities begin.
3. Speakers:
a. Types: Speaker types vary according to the architec-
ture and interior space design. Interior spaces may
utilize an array of ceiling speakers, self-contained
speakers, planter speakers, etc.
b. Conceal speakers wherever possible while providing
consistent, low-level BGM coverage.
C. Areas Served by BGM: Provide a continuum of low-level BGM as an
aural cue for guests throughout the public assembly and circulation
spaces.
1. Acoustic Zones: As a design principle, ensure that guests
are not able to hear more than one music source at any
time, in public spaces.
2. “Buffer” Zones: Provide quiet areas or water feature
sounds to acoustically isolate an area to accomplish the
buffer effect. Example areas are food and beverage venue
entrances and courtyard / outdoor activity areas.
3. Locations: Provide low-level BGM to the following areas:
a. Public assembly and circulation areas - not guestroom
corridors.
b. Lobby and front desk areas with independent volume
control behind front desk.
c. Porte Cochere: Same programming as lobby area.
• At busy urban sites, where traffic noise is significant,
no BGM is required.
• In porte cochere less than 6.1 m (20 ft.) high,
provide speakers or conceal in planters or adjacent
landscaping.
d. Public Restrooms: Same programming as adjacent
areas. Typically, speakers are tapped to provide a lower
volume than speakers in adjacent circulation area.

|A/V 11
e. Elevator Lobbies:
• Main Floors: Same programming as adjacent
lobby and circulation areas.
• Guestroom Floors: Provide only in high-rise
projects. Do not locate speakers within 12.2 m
(40 ft.) of guestroom entrance doors.
f. Retail Areas: Same programming as adjacent
lobby and circulation areas.
• Provide each retail space with an independent
volume control.
• In themed retail areas (example golf shops,
spa shops), provide program selections from a
dedicated subscription music source in addition
to volume control.
g. Pre-function Areas: Same programming as the
adjacent lobby and circulation areas. See Event
Spaces, below for other requirements.
h. Courtyards – Indoor: Conceal speakers in planters
or landscape areas.
• When a functional part of an adjacent food and
beverage or activity venue is provided, design
and connect system speakers to the venue’s
BGM / foreground music sound system with
independent volume controls.
• Guests are not to hear more than one music
source at any time in public areas. Provide
through interconnecting program switches or
through control system programming. Utilize
buffer zones to accomplish this effect.
i. Courtyards - Outdoor: Conceal speakers in
landscape areas.
• When a functional part of an adjacent food and
beverage or activity venue is provided, design
and connect system speakers to the venue’s
BGM / foreground music sound system.
• Provide a local input to feed the courtyard
sound system with tie lines to the central sound
system room.
j. Outdoor Circulation Areas: Conceal speakers in
landscape areas.
k. Bridges or Walkways to Adjacent Facilities:
Conceal speakers in landscape areas, under
bridges and in overhead covered structures.

13C.6 Digital Signage & Displays

A. System - General: Provide an “electronic reader board” or
“visual information system” or “electronic way-finding
system” to manage and visually display event information,
food and beverage, and property activities.
Design the electronic way-finding system display specific
and unique to each property and distinct from the digital
signage displays, where provided, to promote property
services and activities.
1. Headend: Provide a “headend” system component
that accepts and manages information, various visual
displays throughout public circulation and assembly
areas to present information.
2. Flat Panel Screen Displays: Provide large, flat panel
system displays with non-glare or anti-glare viewing at
key guest circulation junctures.
3. Door Side Graphic Displays: Provide small flat panel,
door side, graphic system displays, integrated with the
signage and locate at entrances to each event space room.
4. Property Information: Provide at least one channel
for general property information and distribute only
to guestroom televisions. Consult with the CTR for
property specific requirements.
B. Features & Functions: Display information relating to meetings
and events including name, time and event location. Large
displays show meetings occurring or currently scheduled
for each day. Door side displays show meeting information
specific to the related event space.
1. Advanced Features: If required, provide features that
may include graphics displays, client logos and full
motion video on large and door side displays.
2. Property LAN: Connect the system to the property
LAN so programming and control is performed from a
designated computer in the administration area.
3. PMS: Provide an interface with the digital signage and
displays to the property management system (PMS) to
permit automated posting of events and interconnect to
the property television distribution system to provide
meeting information to guestroom televisions. Consult
the CTR for specific interface requirements and available.

|A/V 13
C. Displays:
1. Locations: Provide large displays for directional
information at each public area floor for anticipated guest
traffic from elevators and to and from main property
entrances and event spaces. Locate displays to minimize
traffic retracing and backtracking.
2. Large Displays: Provide commercial quality flat panel
LCD displays with frames or bezels with non-glare or
anti-glare protective glass.
a. Determine large displays quantities through
analysis of property configurations. Provide
sufficient displays so the 19 mm (¾ inch) minimum
character height, a dwell time of 10 seconds for
each information “page”, and a full day’s event
information display, the maximum wait time
to view the event information does not exceed
30 seconds.
b. Recess displays in a wall shadow box detail, or
provide displays with a decorative bezel to integrate
with the interior architecture and adjoining finish.
Provide adequate display device ventilation, and
maintain the wall fire rating where mounting the
display.
c. Decorative framing or enclosure provides flexibil-
ity in display size to accommodate future displays
with slightly different overall dimensions.
d. Provide independent control of overhead speakers
near large displays so programming that includes
an audio signal is transmitted to the display area
without interference from other local sound
system programming.
3. Door Side Displays: Provide door side, flat panel
graphic displays at each public entrance to each event
space.
a. LCD: Provide 38 cm (15 inch) (diagonal measure)
displays. Provide frames or bezels with non-glare
or anti-glare protective glass.
b. Mount displays on walls in the same or similar
manner as required for large displays including
accommodating different display sizes.

13C.7 Master Antenna Television System

A. System - General: Provide an RF television distribution system
throughout the property public spaces and guestrooms for
delivery of television programming.
1. Programming: Coordinate with <13A> and <13B> for
cable and broadcast television programming delivery
systems for guestroom entertainment.
2. Infrastructure for MATV: Provide analog and digital RF
and digital IP network infrastructure for guestroom and
public area entertainment.
• Does not include data service or high-speed internet
access for guests.
• Design for digital television (DTV) and high definition
television (HDTV) programming.
3. Distribution System: Design MATV to receive and deliver
local, satellite, premium and locally originated television
programming.
B. Features & Functions:
1. Television Channel Sources: Provide programming
from multiple signal sources to provide programming
redundancy to minimize single source failure and the
impact to guests. Contact the CTR for specific channel
requirements for the property location.
a. Provide for reception of local broadcast programming
from major networks such as CBS, NBC, ABC,
FOX, PBS and other significant regional channels.
b. Provide reception of premium channels such as
HBO, CNN, ESPN, Disney, etc. Programming may
be from local cable, from satellite or from the pay-
per-view programming vendor.
c. Provide pay-per-view programming, video
information system programming, special channel
programming (Spa, Golf, etc.), interactive gaming
and local programming.
d. Contact the CTR for Pay-Per-View criteria for
specifics and other MATV system infrastructure
requirements.
e. Provide equipment and modulation for a minimum
of 3 in-house property channels and distribute
channel content in full HD resolution.
2. Headend Processing: Design a relatively fail safe headend.
a. Combine individual, active single channel and pass
band components through a passive combiner to
prevent failure of the active component affecting
other components in the system.

|A/V 15
b. Provide single channel processors that accommodate

digital high-definition for off air channels.
c. Design for adjacent channel cable operation with 100
active channels.
d. Provide frequency-agile adjacent channel modulators
for locally originated video channels.
3. Distribute MATV signals to the following areas:
a. In public areas, electronically block premium and
pay-per-view channels.
b. Business center
c. Food and beverage areas (including executive lounge)
d. Recreation spaces (and spa when applicable)
e. Retail areas
f. Event space equipment rooms (coordinate with A/V
systems)
g. Guestrooms (salons and bedrooms in suites)
h. Executive / Sales offices
i. Employee dining
j. Engineering (for television service)
4. Public Area Distribution: Home-run to MATV distribution
equipment located in central Sound Equipment room.
5. Guestroom MATV Distribution: Provide broadband (not
split-band) distribution system with 1 GHz bandwidth,
capacity for 100 active channels and provisions for future
channel capacity. Consult with the CTR for property
specific criteria.
a. Signal Level: + 5dBmv (+/-3 dBmv) minimum, at any
tap, on any channel.
b. Amplifiers: Provide system with no more than one
amplifier between MATV headend’s passive channel
combiner and any guestroom tap. Design amplifiers
for digital signal distribution and equip with sub-
return amplifiers.
c. Protection: Provide system with trunks, drops and
risers so failure of any single active device does not
affect more than 20% of guestrooms.
d. Distribution: Daisy-chain the system up to 16 rooms
(maximum) on any single riser, or configure the
system with homeruns to each guestroom tap.
e. Cable: Provide double shielded cable with 100% bonded
foil shield, 60% aluminum or tinned copper braid over
foil and rated for digital signal distribution.
f. Connectors: Full-cycle hex-crimp type
g. Splitters & Taps: Fully shielded, directional and
designed to pass sub-channel return signals. Tap
value is 7 dB minimum. Self-terminating or resistive
taps are not permitted.

13C.8 Food & Beverage (F&B) Systems

A. Sound (Audio) - General: Provide background and foreground
music entertainment in F&B <3> areas to complement the
atmosphere developed by interior design and operator.
1. Local Controls: Provide in each area and in each venue.
2. Location: Where practical, co-locate equipment for
background music with the main event space sound
systems.
3. Controls: In each area with BGM, provide local controls
for staff access only and conceal controls from public
view.
• Locate controls in the controlled space so staff can
hear sound adjustments.
• Provide program control selection and volume
control.
4. Background Music (BGM): Provide dedicated BGM
channel from the subscription music service for themed
entertainment and F&B areas. Do not provide local
music inputs, such as CD or iPod/MP3 players.
5. Other Requirements: Consider more advanced A/V
entertainment requirements. See the applicable Brand
Food & Beverage Concept Report for specifics.
B. Features & Functions: Coordinate with Module <3>.
1. Three Meal a Day & Fine Dining Restaurants: Provide
BGM throughout seating areas.
2. Private Dining: If a seating section is designated for
Private Dining, provide a local speaker level volume
control for that area.
3. Lobby Lounge / Bars: Provide BGM and foreground
music throughout the seating areas.
a. Provide zoned local volume controls and a music
source selection control behind the bar.
b. If television entertainment is required, provide
sufficient televisions to permit most of the seated
patrons to view a video display without having to
turn away from their table guests.
Provide current technology, professional quality
displays with non-glare or anti-glare viewing
surfaces and third-party RS232 and Ethernet
(cable) control.
c. Provide a digital media server and control system
with satellite / television tuners behind the bar and
connect to sound system.
d. Locate a touch screen control panel behind bar
and at host stand.

|A/V 17
4. Piano Bars: When a piano is included in a lounge or bar

area concept, provide a contact microphone in the piano to
provide live sound to the system.
a. Control Panel: Provide a small control panel located
at, on, or near the piano that includes a switch to turn
on / off the local background or foreground music and
a volume control to adjust the level of piano music.
• Control activation causes the music to ramp up or
down over a 10 second period, not simply to switch
on and off.
• Provide an identical panel as described above
behind the bar to permit bartender to control
volumes from piano and BGM and foreground
music sources.
b. Piano, Vocalist & Combo: When piano entertainment
is anticipated to include a vocalist or small combo,
provide one or two more microphone jacks for the
piano microphone.
• Provide a small, portable sub-mixer located at the
piano to permit the combo musicians to sub-mix
their instruments.
• Provide bartender panel with three volume controls;
one for the piano, one for the vocalist and one for
other instruments.
• When a piano is located near a F&B venue, provide
the piano as a music selection for each venue.
• Provide the piano with a digitally controlled player
piano.
5. Snack Bars: Provide BGM and / or foreground music from
the central control room. Provide same programming as
adjacent activity or circulation spaces with local volume
controls.
6. Pool Bars: Provide BGM and / or foreground music with
the main programming source located at the central control
room. Provide zoned local volume controls and source
selection controls behind the bar.
a. When the pool complex is significant, provide a
dedicated feed and channel from the central music
server with a local control panel to permit adjusting
the music server for this area.
When this feature is included, interconnect adjacent
activity area sound systems so the same music
programming is played throughout the pool area.
b. Locate and contain A/V equipment serving pool areas in
an enclosed, air conditioned, clean, dry and secure space
or provide a self contained, environmentally sealed and
conditioned equipment rack for the system equipment.

13C.9 Entertainment Lounge Systems

A. Sound & Video - General: See Modules <3>, <6> and specific
property Food & Beverage Concept report for requirements.
13C.10 Fitness Center Systems
A. Sound & Video - General: Provide BGM (background music)
and foreground music to complement the guest activities in
various Fitness Center <4> areas.
1. Volume Controls: Provide for each activity area.
2. Location: When practical, co-locate the BGM
equipment with the main event space sound systems.
Alternately, locate BGM equipment in a staff lounge,
telecom equipment closet or administrative office
associated with the Fitness Center areas.
3. Controls: Provide each activity area with music with
local controls accessed only by staff and conceal
controls from public view.
• Locate controls within the controlled space so staff
can hear sound adjustments.
• Provide controls for music program selections and
volume control.
1. BGM Locations: Provide low-level BGM in the
following Fitness Center areas:
a. Entry Areas & Circulation Corridors: Provide to
welcome the guest to the fitness area. If a recep-
tion desk is included, volume controls for pool,
reception and locker rooms are located behind the
desk.
b. Locker Rooms: Provide on the same channel as
the entry area and locate controls at the Fitness
Center reception desk.
c. Indoor Pool Areas: Provide locate controls at the
area reception desk.
d. Outdoor Pool Areas: Conceal speakers in sur-
rounding plants. If a pool snack bar is provided,
connect speakers system to pool snack bar sound
system and locate controls behind the reception
area desk.
2. Aerobics & Weight Rooms: Provide BGM and
foreground music and televisions. Provide foreground
music as an independent, selectable music channel
from the subscription service.
a. Provide wall mounted volume and source controls
to permit music selections by guests.

|A/V 19
b. Provide three to six, easily viewable by guests,

current technology, flat screen television monitors
for guests utilizing aerobic machines and exercise
area.
Equip televisions with a non-glare or anti-glare
viewing surface and an FM radio transmitter for
sound.
c. Equip aerobic exercise equipment (elliptical
machines, treadmills, steppers, etc.) with
individual television monitors and personal head /
ear phone jacks.
d. Connect exercise equipment monitors and area
flat panel televisions to the MATV system.
13C.11 Spa Systems
A. Sound & Video - General: See Module <4> and the Spa Design
Standard for specific spa information and design criteria.
1. Background Music (BGM) & Foreground Music:
Provide to complement guest activities in various spa
areas.
2. Volume Controls: When practical, co-locate the
equipment for BGM in each activity area with the main
event space sound systems.
3. Controls: Provide each activity area with music with
local controls accessed only by staff and conceal
controls from public view.
• Locate controls within the controlled space so staff
can hear sound adjustments.
• Provide controls for music program selection and
volume control.
4. Dedicated Television Information Channel: If the
property is equipped with a Spa, provide a dedicated
television information channel distributed to
guestrooms via the guestroom entertainment system.
Provide channel programming that originates from the
Spa Manager’s office.
5. Other Requirements: If the Spa Programming Report
requires expanded A/V technologies for the A/V
system then, for example, provide digital art distributed
throughout the Spa areas, personal listening pods, etc.
1. BGM Locations: Provide programming source from
a commercial music subscription service for the low-
level BGM in the following Spa areas:
a. Entry Area & Circulation Corridors: Provide
to welcome guests to the Spa and reinforce the
environmental quality.

• Locate volume controls for the entry, circulation

corridors, pool and locker rooms behind the
Spa reception desk.
• Locate throughout guest circulation corridors
to mask sounds from treatment rooms.
• Alternately, provide low-level “nature or
organic” sounds from a digital music source.
b. Meditation Areas: Provide with a dedicated music
source. Alternately, provide low-level “nature or
organic” sounds from a digital music source.
c. Outdoor Areas: Conceal speakers in surrounding
planting. Locate controls behind the reception
desk or in a nearby service area.
d. Locker Rooms: Provide from the entry area
music channel and locate volume controls at the
reception desk.
e. Wet Areas: Locate throughout the wet activity
areas including whirlpool, plunge, indoor pool
and wet treatment rooms. Provide self contained,
water and weather resistant speakers.
f. Retail Areas: Locate volume controls at the
cashier area. Provide from the adjacent entry or
corridor music channel.
g. Juice Bar Area: Locate music volume controls
behind the bar service area. Provide from the
adjacent activity or corridor music channel.
2. Treatment Rooms: Provide BGM from a commercial
music subscription service with stereo ceiling speakers
and wall mounted music controls in each treatment
room.
a. Provide music volume control and music selection
from at least six channels of stereo BGM. Include
auxiliary music input to permit music input from
personal devices.
b. Alternately, provide a six channel, low-power FM
transmission or WiFi system designed to provide
wireless music service throughout the Spa.
• Provide each treatment room with a MP3 / CD-
radio or WiFi receiver having presets adjusted
to the Spa music channels.
• Provide the radio with input to accept signals
from personal players such as an iPod or similar
devices.

|A/V 21
13C.12 Event Space Systems

A. A / V - General: Provide sound reinforcement systems that
accept signals from microphones and A/V program sources
to evenly distribute high fidelity, high-level, full frequency
response sound throughout an audience and listening area.
1. Sound Systems: Provide built-in sound reinforcement
systems for spoken word and reproduction of recorded
audio program for each event space (such as ballroom
section or salon and meeting room) with over 93 m²
(1,000 sq. ft.) of floor space or when combined with
an adjacent spaces is equal to or larger than 93 m²
(1,000 sq. ft.). Provide input plates, controls and an
array of ceiling speakers for event spaces.
2. Passive A/V Network Tie Line Connections: Provide
for event spaces that do not require built-in sound
systems.
3. Control Systems: Digitally programmable with an
exclusive user interface for sound system functions.
a. Provide a system interface with the property’s
management system that allows staff to monitor
and control A/V systems through computers and
mobile devices on the management network.
b. Locate system control panels at main equipment
rack and in each event space.
4. Processing (for sound systems): DSP based (digital
signal processing) that provides mixing, routing,
equalization, leveling, combining and other sound
processing functions.
B. Pre-function Areas: Provide system capacity to play
background and foreground music throughout during
reception events.
1. Provide interconnection to adjacent areas for event
spaces with overflow functions.
2. Locate system controls in adjacent event spaces.
3. Zone the systems to permit assigning program sources
for any of the adjacent event spaces.
C. Ballrooms:
1. Sound Reinforcement: Provide independent, high-
level, high intelligibility sound reinforcement systems
in each Ballroom and Salon.
a. Voice Reinforcement: The primary purpose of
reinforcement system is to amplify the spoken
word.
b. Music System: The secondary purpose is to pro-
vide foreground music and playback of recorded
A/V programs and for background music.

c. Live Music: The system is not intended as the primary

sound reinforcement for live musical entertainment.
2. Input / Output Plates: Provide in-room controls, A/V
network connectivity and ceiling speakers.
3. Projector Mounts: Provide in each center salon a ceiling
mounted, manually retractable, projector mount, to
accommodate portable projectors, and position to serve
the primary object wall. Built-in projectors and projection
screens are not required.
a. Extend connectors from projector mount to the front
of the room’s A/V input plate.
b. Include connections for power and video signals to
the retractable projector mount and extend the con-
nections to the input plate located on the salon object
wall.
c. Provide input connections for AVNet tie lines utilized
with portable transmitter / receiver pairs to route ana-
log or digital signals to the projector. The transmitter
provides audio program signal break-out to feed the
built-in room sound system.
d. Provide multiple retractable projector mounts in sa-
lons that have multiple object walls. Projector mounts
may serve as hang points and retractable feature light-
ing supports, when properly specified and labeled for
live equipment loads.
4. Recording Facilities: Provide at equipment racks on a
recording panel equipped with XLR-3M jacks (one per
Ballroom, Salon or Meeting Room) and on the patchbay.
Provide recording outputs that are transformer isolated
from the DSP output and not equalized.
D. Meeting Rooms: Equip with built-in sound systems and tie line
plates as required for Ballrooms.
1. Projection Screens: Provide built-in, electrically operated
projection screens and manually retractable projector
mounts and position to serve the primary object wall.
a. Type: At a minimum, provide HD aspect ratio, and
where practical, may be dual-aspect ratio screens.
b. Connectors: Extend connectors from the projector
mount to front of the room’s A/V input plate.
• Where cable distances from wall plates to projec-
tor mounts or displays are less than 10.7 m (35 ft.),
input connections include digital video and audio
program signal break-out to feed the built-in room
sound systems.
• For longer distances, provide AVNet tie lines with
portable transmitter / receiver pairs as required
above for Ballroom projector mounts.

|A/V 23
2. Built-in Projectors: Not required.

3. Power, Data & Phone: If room design requires, provide floor
pockets for electric power, data and telecommunications
connections. Contact the MI Representative for project
requirements.
E. Breakout Rooms: Typically, rooms smaller than 93 m²
(1,000 sq. ft.) with fixed walls (no operable partitions). Provide
each room with a tie line plate as required for Ballrooms and
Salons.
F. Boardrooms: Typically, with fixed walls (no operable partitions)
and a fixed table. One end wall is designated as the “object
wall” or front of the room.
1. Technology: Provide “HD video teleconference ready”
with interconnections with telecommunication services,
and pre-wire for multiple microphones at the table.
2. Projection Screen: Provide built-in, electrically operated
screen with aspect ratio of 16:9 at the object wall and a
corresponding manually retractable projector mount.
3. Connectors: Extend connectors from the projector mount
to front of the room’s A/V input plate.
a. Where cable distances from wall plates to projector
mounts or displays are less than 10.7 m (35 ft.), input
connections include digital video and audio program
signal break-out to feed the built-in room sound
systems.
b. For longer distances, provide AVNet tie lines with
portable transmitter / receiver pairs as required above
for Ballroom projector mounts.
4. Built-in Projectors: Not required.
5. Sound: Provide a built-in sound system with features and
functions required for Ballroom and Salons.
6. Inputs: Provide inputs for digital video, audio, network,
telecommunications and convenience outlets built into the
table. Provide sound system inputs for flat panel display at
the front of the room and built into the table.
7. Visual Display: Provide a concealed large flat panel display
and locate at the front wall of the room.
a. Equip with upgraded front-firing built-in speakers
and multiple inputs. Extend inputs to the Boardroom
table and to the front wall of the room.
b. Provide with non-glare or anti-glare viewing surface.
c. Conceal the display utilizing one of the following
methods; retractable millwork doors, “art-screen”
frames, or lifts that retract display into credenza or
millwork.

G. A / V Features & Functions: Provide event space A/V (sound and

visual) display systems to fully support effective meeting
activities. Provide a robust built-in system to deliver high-
level sound reinforcement, program signals distribution and
to integrate with and complement portable equipment and
systems.
1. Inputs - General: See Figure 5.
a. Equip with two active microphone level inputs (XLR-
3FD connectors), one passive audio tie line (XLR-
3FD connector), an MATV jack (“F” connector).
b. Terminate active microphone inputs with a 1.6 K ohm
resistor on the back of the input plate jack to minimize
input noise.
c. Integrate input plates with A/V network features
described below.
d. Provide input plates designed to conceal and protect
connectors when not in use. Typically, utilize a
millwork panel or wall-box enclosure.
Figure 5 - A/V Input Plate with Integrated A/V Network Connections
2. Input / Output Plates & Tie Line Plates: See Figure 6.

a. Location: Locate at the “object walls” and at various
locations on the peripheral of fixed walls.
Position to serve cables to the most commonly used
head table, podium, stage, platform and lectern loca-
tions without placing cables past, or over public or
service entrance doors.
b. Quantity: Equip each event space with at least one
input / output and A/V network connectivity plate.
• Equip large salons with tie line plates in the room’s
front and rear to minimize, wherever possible, A/V
cabling runs in front of doorways and guest traffic
areas to minimize tripping and aesthetic issues.
• See “A/V Network & Tie Lines” and Figure 5.

|A/V 25
Figure 6 - Ballroom A/V Device Layout - Floor Plan
3. Accessibility: Ensure that the input / output plates and

controls are located on the wall to meet ADA compliance
and are accessible when portable platforms are utilized.
4. Processing: Provide management and manipulation
methods for sound system signals utilizing input jacks in
event space salons and from auxiliary sources (such as
music sources) to the ceiling speakers. Processing elements
include patchbays, digital signal processing, monitoring
and amplification.
5. Patchbays: Provide for event space sound systems. Active
input circuits are “normalled” through the patchbays to the
DSP inputs. Normalled jacks also intermediate between
the DSP outputs and following amplifier inputs. Tie lines
“dead-end” on patchbays.
a. Provide commercial duty, Mil spec, 6 mm (¼ inch)
TRS type or “Bantam TT” type patchbays with
mechanical or solder connections. Insulation
displacement or “punch-down” connections are not
acceptable.
b. Equip active DSP system inputs that appear on the
patchbay (normalled through input circuits and inputs
from auxiliary sources) with protective isolation
transformers between the patchbay and the DSP
inputs. Phantom power is not provided by the DSP
systems and assume phantom power is external to the
built-in systems.
c. Provide normalled amplifier inputs through the
patchbay. Associated DSP outputs do not appear on
the patchbay.

d. Equip patchbays with internal accessories including

phase reversers, line-to-mic pads, isolation
transformers, ground lifts and sufficient mults to
allow by-passing processing components from the
input circuits to the amplifier inputs.
e. Provide a means to bypass failed DSP or control
systems, a patchbay design requirment.
• Provide sufficient patchpoints, mult jacks, and
patchcords to permit bypassing the DSP and
restore full sound system performance by patching
from an in-room input, through the mults, and into
the amplifier inputs.
• Design the system to minimize the number of patch-
cords required to perform this control function.
f. Provide patchbays with bussed shields that serve as
the Uni-Point ground for the sound system processing.
See Figure 4 Power and Grounding Diagram.
g. See example Figure 7 A/V Signal Flow Diagram.
6. Digital Signal Processing (DSP): Provide commercial duty,
programmable DSP components with single central device
or distributed processing device functions.
a. Performs mixing signal functions from input panels
and auxiliary signal source including signals from the
background music service.
b. Provides level control for system inputs and outputs.
c. Combines channels of associated Ballroom salons,
meeting rooms and / or Pre-function areas.
d. Electronically disable or secure front DSP panel
controls behind mechanical covers. Does not require
and does not permit user interface or direct DSP unit
manipulation.
e. Provide bandpass equalization of sound signals from
the inputs and equalization of signals to speakers.
f. Provide music signal leveling from BGM sources.
g. Programming does not include automatic mixing or
gating functions.
7. Amplification: Provide sound reinforcement for each
channel.
a. Provide commercial duty, convection cooled and
design to drive 70 Volt constant voltage speaker
circuits.
b. Provide single or multi channel devices.
8. Monitoring: Provide auditory monitoring at the equipment
rack for each amplifier channel speaker level output.
a. Provide one line level monitoring channel with its
input on the patchbay.
b. Design for a headphone to monitor signals.

|A/V 27
Figure 7 - A / V Signal Flow Diagram

9. Output Controls: Wire the speakers in zones relating to

event space head table areas.
a. Individual speaker zones may be turned on or off using
the control system. Provide this function through the
DSP control system and multiple amplifier channels.
b. Alternately, when the controlled zone quantities
exceeds three, provide relays to turn off speaker zones
and minimize the patchcord quantities to restore
performance in the event of DSP or control system
failure as indicated above.
c. See “Fire & Life Safety Alarms”.
10. Programming: See “Document Submittal” requirements
below.
11. Control System: Equip event space sound systems with an
overall control that provides local and central control of the
sound systems basic functions.
a. Design for exclusive staff and guest interface with the
processing equipment. Direct access to the processing
is not required, accommodated or permitted.
b. Provide browser based IP access via the internal
property network and via property internet (PI)
access. Include monitoring and sound systems control
functions.
c. Develop and design user the interface screens, system
functionality and logic through an iterative process
involving the project’s design consultant. Anticipate
a DSP control system programming revision three
months following the property opening.
12. Central Control Panel:
a. Provide a large 30 cm (12 inch) diagonal measure,
minimum, color LCD touch screen control panel for
overall system functions.
b. Provide system functions on a touch screen. Interface
does not require the user to provide a pointing device
or keyboard for system operational functions.
c. When event spaces are remote from the equipment
room, provide a large touch screen control panel in
a rugged protective enclosure in the service corridor
associated with these rooms.
13. In-room Local Controls: Equip each event room, ballroom
area or salon with a dedicated sound system and provide
with an in-room control panel near the entrance from the
service corridor.
a. Location: When a service vestibule is included, pro-
vide the control panel in the vestibule within a pro-
tective enclosure not visible to guests in Ballroom,
Salons and Meeting Rooms.

|A/V 29
Where a salon or Meeting Room does not have a

service vestibule, locate the in-room control panel
behind a protective and concealing millwork detail.
b. Control Features:
• Design controls to give access to specific system
functions to staff and to meeting planners (as
desired by the staff), but with a means to secure
controls to prevent access or operation by unau-
thorized persons.
• Provide security control by electronic, electro-
mechanical or only mechanical means.
• Provide micro-processor based user interface to
the digital signal processing system. Also, pro-
vide extended functions including selection of
lighting presets.
• Provide intrinsically rugged units with installa-
tion that is relatively impervious to damage from
physical contact from carts, chairs, etc., typically
utilized in event spaces.
• Provide an illuminated, programmable LCD
display, push button and / or rotary controls
to provide user interface and system status
information.
• Accommodate mobile technology to provide
staff with system control.
c. Programming: See “Document Submittal”
requirements below. See the project A/V Supplement
for specific, parametric control system functional
and programming requirements.
14. Speakers: Provide an array of flush, high quality ceiling
speakers, evenly spaced to provide high intelligibility,
low distortion, wide frequency response, wide dynamic
range and even direct sound coverage (+/- 2dB @ 4kHz)
throughout the event spaces seating and audience areas.
a. Sizes: Ceiling speakers sizes vary according to
ceiling height. Typically, provide smaller speakers
in low ceilings and larger speakers in high ceilings.
• Ceilings up to 3 m (10 ft.) high, provide 10 to
15 cm (4 to 6 inch) full range speaker assemblies.
• Ceilings between 3 and 5 m (10 and 16 ft.),
provide 20 cm (8 inch) coaxial two-way speaker
assemblies.
• Ceilings between 5 and 7 m (16 and 20 ft.),
provide 30 cm (12 inch) coaxial two-way ceiling
speakers and equip with 60 to 75 degree constant
directivity high frequency transducers.

• Ceilings above 6 m (20 ft.) high, provide special

electro acoustical modeling and high power
speakers having a high degree of dispersion pattern
control.
b. Power: Provide constant voltage system (70.7 or
100 Volts) signal distribution to speakers. Provide
high quality transformers with 6 dB headroom allow-
ance in component sizing.
c. Protection: Equip speaker assemblies with non-
resonant backboxes and / or enclosures to protect
each speaker.
d. Grills: Provide speaker grills with minimum of
66% open area and 24 mm (3/32 inch) minimum
perforation holes.
e. Support: Attach speakers to building structure and
not from suspended ceiling system.
f. Quantity: Determine speaker quantities by the
spacing requirements above. Evenly space ceiling
speakers for each event space, meeting room, or
ballroom and salon based on the overall area, divided
by (floor-to-ceiling dimension), squared.
g. Spacing: Space speakers to average 0.8 times the
floor to ceiling height dimension with the ratio of the
closest and furthest spacing between any two adjacent
speakers not exceeding 1:1.5.
h. Zoning for Control: Provide individual zones of
speaker control to permit turning off speakers
above head tables and platforms, when necessary.
This controls feedback and improves system gain.
See Figure 8 Ballroom Speaker Layout and Zone
Circuiting - Example Ceiling Plan.
15. A/V Networks (A/V Net) & Tie Lines: Provide
interconnecting cabling between and among the event
spaces, associated Pre-function, activity areas and
appropriate communication “points of presence” in the
facility such as television headend rooms, telephone
equipment rooms, computer rooms, the loading dock,
business center, A/V department operations office, etc.
a. Provide multi-mode fiber and shielded Category 6
network cabling.
• Provide minimum of four A/V optimized Ethernet
circuits, terminated on RJ45 connectors and two
multi-mode fiber interconnecting cables terminated
on specialized A/V connectors (Neutrik FiberCon).
• Certify tie line performance to meet BICSI
standards for design and performance for the
Figure 13C-8
required cabling type.

|A/V 31
Figure 8 - Ballroom Speaker Layout and Zone Circuiting - Example Ceiling Plan
b. Land tie lines on plates in each event space.

• Equip with at least one plate and provide large
spaces with at least two plates.
• Integrate connections with the A/V input / output
plates.
• See Figure 5 Example A/V Input Plate detail.
c. Provide tie line plates adjacent to hang points in the
ceiling or integrate with retractable hang points.
Provide at least one ceiling tie line plate in each small
salon and at least two in each large salon.
d. Provide two AVNet Category 6 tie line plates in floor
pockets (when provided).
e. Run tie lines back to primary A/V equipment
room serving the associated event spaces. Land on
patchbays located in equipment racks.
f. Verify with the MI Representative to determine if
Ballroom, Salons and Meeting Rooms require floor
pockets for power, data and telecommunications
connections.
g. Design the network to serve event spaces including
breakout rooms and areas that are not equipped with
built-in A/V or sound systems.
h. Design connectors on plates and protect from damage
from physical contact from carts, chairs, feet, etc.

i. Provide a stainless steel, lockable, and weather tight

media connection panel at the property receiving area
for interconnectivity to local and national television
production vehicles for special events. Provide the
following features:
• Six RJ45 Ethernet jacks for A/V tie lines
• Six fiber optic jacks for multi-mode fiber
• Two fiber jacks for single mode fiber
• Two SMPTE Fiber tie lines for large Ballrooms
more than 930 m2 (10,000 sq ft)
• Ten balanced audio jacks
16. Portable A/V Equipment: Provide a complement of portable
equipment that supports the built-in systems.
a. Include microphones, cables, projectors, flip charts,
theatrical lighting systems, portable high-level sound
systems, projection screens, production mixers for
audio and video, cameras, adapters, video graphics
displays, computers, etc.
b. Develop a project specific list for portable A/V and
lighting equipment requirements. Include interfaces,
receivers and transmitters required for analog and
digital video and audio sources to work with the
AVNet system.
H. Document Submittals: Upon project completion and acceptance,
submit the following to the property management.
1. Technical Manuals: Provide documentation as follows:
a. Block Diagrams: Detailed functional block diagrams
that illustrate as-built conditions.
• Identify each equipment item by manufacturer and
model number, label alpha numerically contractor
furnished controls, relays, patch panel jacks, and
similar devices.
• Reference the designations on fabrication drawings,
patch panel details and related instruments.
b. Fabrications: Detailed as-built drawings of contractor
fabrications. Illustrate the mechanical and electrical
construction, with manufacturer’s part numbers and
values for components.
c. Rack Elevations: Final rack elevation drawings.
d. Manufacturer’s Literature: Descriptive literature and
performance specifications, operating manuals, and
servicing information.
e. Control Settings: Schedule of nominal control settings
for proper system operation.
f. Test & Measurements: Documented data gathered
during systems tests and commissioning.

|A/V 33
g. Systems Operating Instructions: Describe

the functions, operation and maintenance for
each installed system. Write the instructions
in full detail in language sufficiently clear for
comprehension by non technical persons.
h. Troubleshooting Guide: System operator’s
procedures to follow in the event of an apparent
equipment failure, written in logical outline
format.
i. Terms & Conditions: Restatement of the systems
warranty terms and conditions and schedule of
manufacturer’s warranties covering parts and
labor for the provided equipment.
j. Programming: Submit to the property
management, a legal copy of the authoring
software and unrestricted license and an archival
electronic copy of the uncompiled operating code
when submitting the record (as-built) documents
for system programs.
2. User’s Manuals: Provide documentation as follows:
a. Systems Operating Instructions: Describe each
provided system, specifically the functions,
operation, and maintenance. Write the instructions
in full detail and in language sufficiently clear for
comprehension by non technical persons.
b. Control Settings: Schedule of nominal control
settings for proper system operation.
c. Troubleshooting Guide: Operator’s procedures
to follow in the event of an apparent equipment
failure, written in logical outline form.
d. Block Diagrams: Simplified as-built block
diagrams with alpha numeric references to
controls, relays, patch panel jacks and other
similar devices.
e. Terms & Conditions: A restatement of the system
warranty terms and conditions. Describe the
terms of manufacturers’ warranties, that extend
beyond the one year provisions of the system
warranty.
f. Document Revisions: Submit within four weeks
of final system acceptance, four complete sets
of corrected and revised pages and drawings to
update the operating and maintenance manuals
described above to reflect adjustments and
changes to the system during the final testing and
acceptance.

I. Warranties: Provide complete systems, products and

materials warranties to include the following:
1. Product Replacement: Guarantee to repair and replace
defects in products, materials, workmanship and
performance of provided systems and the defective and
comprising elements at no additional cost.
2. Temporary Replacement: Provide temporary
replacement equipment when repairs to defective
equipment and products cannot be completed within
24 hours.
a. Provide temporary labels matching original
labeling nomenclature.
b. Replace temporary items with original product
following repair.
c. Replace equipment and product items that exhibit
similar failures three times within the warranty
period.
d. Replace equipment and products that exhibit
failures three times within the warranty period
with new equipment and product at no cost.
3. Remedy Response: Respond with remedy to requests
for service within 24 hours of the request.
a. Provide the property management with a telephone
number and an e-mail address to request services
at any time.
b. Response requirement applies from the date of the
A/V consultant’s recommendation of the system
acceptance and continues for the following 365
consecutive days.
c. Warranty remains in effect for a period of one
year from the date of system acceptance, except
for equipment and products under manufacturer’s
warranties that exceed the one year warranty
period to remain in effect beyond the one year
system warranty period.

|A/V 35
13C.13 Systems Coordination

including:
• 1 Site / Building Exteriors
• 2 Public Spaces
• 4 Recreation Facilities
• 5 Retail Spaces
• 7A Guestrooms & Suites

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
14
Fire Protection & Life Safety
14 - Fire Protection & Life Safety THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
14.1 General Requirements 1
14.2 Definitions 2
14.3 Codes, References & Standards 2
14.4 Systems Testing 3
14.5 Submittals 5
14.6 Automatic Sprinkler, Water Mist & Standpipe System 6
14.7 Fire Alarm 10
14.8 Mechanical Smoke Control Systems 13
14.9 Type 1 - Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression 16
14.10 Emergency Electrical Systems <15> 17
14.11 Elevator Recall & Firefighters’ Operation <12> 17
14.12 Central Control Station (Fire Command Room) 18
14.13 Means of Egress 18
14.14 Facility Requirements 20
14.15 Example Diagrams 20
14.16 Fire Alarm System Sequence Matrix 24

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Fire & Life Safety | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Fire Protection & Life Safety - 14
Fire Protection & Life Safety

14.1 General Requirements
A. Application:
1. Marriott International (MI) Fire Protection and Life
Safety (FLS) Design Standards govern MI owned,
managed and franchised Brand properties.
2. The FLS Design Standards include design standards,
performance criteria, reference standards and life
safety process verification that define a comprehensive
fire protection program. Coordinate requirements with
other Modules and in particular <10>, <12> and <15>.
3. Application of these Standards to a specific project
requires a design analysis. For example, a project’s
qualification as either a low-rise or high-rise building
will significantly affect the elements of a project’s fire
protection and life safety program.
4. When a MI property is integrated with or interconnected
with another building, the building shall provide
protection equal to the fire protection and life safety
standards required for the MI property, as defined by
FLS on a case-by-case evaluation.
B. Systems: Provide the following functional systems in
compliance with the listed performance criteria:
• Automatic Sprinkler / Standpipe System
• Fire Alarm
• Mechanical Smoke Control
• Type 1 - Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression
• Emergency Electric Systems
• Elevator Recall & Firefighters’ Operation
• Central Control Station (Fire Command Room)
• Means of Egress & Facility Requirements
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Fire & Life Safety 1
14.2 Definitions
A. Low-Rise Building: A building that does not qualify as a
High-Rise Building as defined below. (C)
B. Low-Rise Building Smoke Control: See Section 14.8 for
buildings more than 6 stories and special conditions.
C. High-Rise Building: A building where the floor of an
occupiable story is greater than 23 m (75 ft.) above the
lowest level of fire department access.
D. Back-of-House (BOH): Includes areas such as employee
spaces, employee restrooms, laundry, offices, work areas,
commercial kitchens, storage areas, shops, etc.
E. Guestroom: The term “guestroom” includes suites,
residences, serviced apartments, interval ownership, etc.
14.3 Codes, References & Standards

A. Application: Current edition of associated references are
the basis for FLS Design Standards and are applicable to
all MI managed, owned and franchised properties.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: The
Life Safety Code - NFPA 101 is the basis for FLS Design
Standards. Compliance with NFPA 101 is required in
addition to the codes required by the governing authority.
Comply with the following:
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (except Chapter 43 and “horizontal exits”
are not permitted)
NFPA 13 Standards for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 Standpipe Systems
NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 20 Centrifugal Fire Pumps
NFPA 24 Private Fire Service Mains
NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows
NFPA 82 Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handling Systems and
Equipment
NFPA 88A Parking Structures
NFPA 90A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
NFPA 92 Smoke Control Systems
NFPA 96 Ventilation and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations
NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems
NFPA 750 Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
NFPA 1142 Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting
C. Elevator & Escalator Safety Code: Current ASME A17.1 edition

and supplements.
2 Fire & Life Safety | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listing: Provide UL listed

materials, appliances and equipment.
E. Governing Regulations: Comply with governing laws,
codes, regulations and MI Design Standards, including
MI requirements that exceed or are more stringent than
governing laws, codes and regulations. If governing
requirements conflict with MI’s Design Standards, contact
FLS for resolution.
F. Tents & Temporary Structures: Comply with MI’s policy
titled “Tents and Temporary Structures” as published on
the Marriott Global Source.
14.4 Systems Testing

A. Application: Before a property is occupied, the fire
protection and life safety systems shall be fully operational,
contractor tested and acceptance obtained from FLS.
In order to obtain MI’s acceptance, the fire protection and
life safety systems shall be operated by the contractor under
simulated emergency conditions in the presence of FLS
personnel and the contractor shall demonstrate compliance
with MI’s Standards.
B. Automatic Sprinkler, Water Mist & Standpipe System (Section 14.6):
1. Contractor shall flush and pressure test system.
2. Contractor shall demonstrate compliance by testing
water flow and tamper switches.
3. Fire pump shall be tested and certified by the manufacturer.
4. Underground mains flushed and tested.
C. Fire Alarm (Section 14.7):
1. Contractor shall pretest and operate system without
trouble lights exhibited.
2. Contractor shall demonstrate compliance by testing all
devices and appliances, auxiliary functions, initiating
alarms, and verifying that proper point address and
supervision appear on alarm panel.
D. Mechanical Smoke Control (Section 14.8):
1. Balance Report: Prior to testing smoke control systems,
HVAC systems shall be contractor tested and balanced.
Test and balance report shall be available.
2. Smoke Exhaust: Public area, atrium and guestroom
corridor smoke exhaust systems shall be operational
and tested to clear “cold smoke” so that exit signs are
visible within 10 minutes of activation without smoke
migration to other areas.
3. Stair Pressurization: Test and operate the system,

concurrently with the smoke exhaust system, to confirm
design pressures and door opening force.
E. Type 1 - Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression (Section 14.9):
1. Contractor shall pretest all coordinated components by
activation of hood and duct suppression system control
unit.
2. Contractor shall demonstrate compliance by operating
initiating devices, activating coordinated alarms, gas,
electric and hood supply air fan shut off.
F. Emergency Electrical Systems (Section 14.10):
1. Generator shall be operational and tested to
automatically activate upon loss of normal incoming
power and to provide standby and emergency service
to operate emergency lighting and specified systems.
2. Battery standby power and UPS systems providing
emergency power and lighting shall be fully operational.
G. Elevator Recall & Firefighters’ Operation (Section 14.11): Elevator
Phase 1 Designated Level and Alternate Level Recall and
Phase 2 Firefighters’ In-Car Operation Features shall be
fully tested in compliance with ASME A17.1.
H. Central Control Station (Fire Command Room) (Section 14.12):
Panels, indicators, controls and systems shall be operational,
tested and accepted.
I. Means of Egress (Section 14.13): Facilities for means of egress
shall be operational and unobstructed.
14.5 Submittals
A. Submittal Requirements: Prior to system installation or
modification, submit one hard-copy of drawings, plus
accompanying materials and documentation of the
following for review and acceptance to:
1. Marriott Fire Protection & Life Safety:
a. Drawings Scale: Not less than the following:
• International Projects: 1:100 scale.
• Domestic (U.S. / Canada): ⅛ inch = 1 ft. scale.
b. Floor Plans: Show areas and rooms exiting,
exit capacity, occupant load diagrams and fire
resistance ratings.
c. Fire Alarm: System diagrams, shop drawings,
equipment product sheets, voltage drop and
battery calculations and sequence of operation
matrix.
d. Automatic Sprinkler & Standpipe: System shop
drawings, hydraulic calculations, and equipment
product sheets, fire pump test curve, and controller
and transfer switch equipment sheet.
e. Type 1 Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression:
<10> Equipment product sheets and drawings
indicating cooking equipment, hood and
suppression system.
f. Emergency Power: Plans for emergency lighting
and exit signs, and information on the emergency
power provided.
g. Smoke Control: System shop drawings, sequence
of operations, riser diagrams and calculations
(space volumes, air changes, make-up and exhaust,
fan and equipment flow capacities, and locations).
2. Zurich Services Corporation - MI Managed Properties
Only:
a. Automatic Sprinkler & Standpipe: System shop
drawings, hydraulic calculations and equipment
product sheets.
b. Construction Drawings: Set of construction (con-
tract) drawings.
B. Mailing Addresses:
1. Marriott International, Inc.; Marriott Fire Protection &
Life Safety, Dept. 52/924.36; 10400 Fernwood Road;
Bethesda, MD 20817
2. Zurich Services Corporation, Mr. Dale Seemans, 611
Nemours Ln., Woods of Louviers, Newark, DE 19711.
14.6 Automatic Sprinkler, Water Mist & Standpipe System

A. System Application: Provide MI properties with a complete
hydraulically designed combination, automatic sprinkler
and standpipe system or HI-FOG water mist system or
Minimax Minifog EconAqua and standpipe system, zoned
by floor.
1. Building Footprint: Sprinkler building areas within
building “footprint”, including canopies required by
NFPA 13.
2. Parking Structures: Provide sprinkler protection,
unless greater than 50% of perimeter is open to exterior
air and not under any portion of the building.
3. Ballrooms & Exhibit Halls: Design the sprinkler
system in compliance with Ordinary Hazard Group 1.
4. Ancillary Buildings: Provide sprinkler protection for
ancillary buildings that are occupied, have a significant
content value or have a significant impact on business
interruption if damaged as determined by FLS review.
Examples include:
• Golf Clubhouse
• Golf Maintenance Building
• Golf Car Storage Building
• Occupied thatched roof buildings
• Pool buildings with lockers or F&B
Small structures (less than 9.3 m2 (100 sq. ft.)) located
more than 9 m (30 ft.) from other buildings do not
require sprinkler protection. Examples include:
• Gazebos
• Golf Comfort Stations
• Golf Weather Protection Stations
• Beach Shade Structures
5. Utility Spaces: Provide complete sprinkler protection
in electrical, mechanical, telephone and computer
rooms.
6. Loading Docks and Truck Bays: Provide sprinkler
protection. If subject to freezing, provide dry pipe system.
7. Freezer & Cooler Boxes: Protect with dry type
sprinklers supplied from area wet pipe sprinkler system.
8. Guestroom Closets & Pantries: Sprinklers are not
required in clothes closets, linen closets and pantries
within hotel guestrooms where the area does not exceed
2.2 m2 (24 sq. ft.) and where the least dimension does
not exceed 0.9 m (3 ft.) or within Residences where
the area does not exceed 1.1 m2 (12 sq. ft.). Closets and
pantries with washer, dryer, water heater, mechanical
or electrical equipment require sprinklers.
9. Guestroom & Residence Bathrooms: Sprinklers are not

required if bathroom is less than 5.10 m2 (55 sq. ft.).
Regardless of bathroom area, sprinklers are required when
combustible tubs, or shower and tub surrounds (plastic /
fiberglass) enclosures are provided.
10. Coastal Areas: If the project is within 16 km (10 miles) of
the coastline, provide exterior galvanized pipe and fittings
with corrosion resistant sprinklers for wet pipe and dry
pipe sprinkler systems in unconditioned spaces.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Standards: NFPA 13 (not NFPA 13R), 14, 1142 and 20.
2. Water Source: Perform flow tests and document. Provide
dependable source of water quantity and pressure from
municipal water main or from on site cistern or tanks if
municipal water is not available.
3. Safety Factor: Provide a 10% hydraulic safety factor up
to a maximum of 0.7 bar (10 psi) for automatic sprinkler
system and water mist system.
4. Pressure Reducing Valves: In order to minimize adjustment
and maintenance, design system within maximum pressure
of 12 bar (175 psi) without use of pressure reducing valves. If
pressure reducing valves are necessary, obtain acceptance
and specific design requirements from FLS.
5. Control Valves: Provide the following:
a. Supervisory Signal Initiating Device (tamper switch):
Provide for each control valve.
b. Security: Secure valves in the open position with the
applicable methods in the following areas:
• Public Areas: Within public view or access, secure
with chains or wire cables and provide keyed-alike
locks.
• Back of House: Behind locked doors or access pan-
els, under control of the building engineer, secure
with plastic or wire seals.
c. Check Valves: Provide check valves at floor control
valves as required to eliminate false activation of
sprinkler waterflow alarms on other floors.
6. Water Flow Switches: Provide retardant type. Initiate
alarm signal between 30 and 60 seconds.
7. CPVC Pipe & Fittings: If provided, install in compliance
with manufacturer’s specifications. Use chemically
compatible materials that contact pipes and fittings.
8. Water Reservoir: Where fire protection and domestic water
systems share a common water reservoir (tank, cistern,
etc.), locate the domestic water connection at the reservoir
above the water level reserved for the fire system to avoid
depleting the fire system by domestic use.
9. Fire Pumps: Locate fire pump drivers, fire pumps, fire

pump controllers and fire pump power supplies (normal
and standby) above the 100 year flood elevation and above
the maximum anticipated hurricane storm surge elevations.
Comply with NFPA 20 for design and installation.
10. Zoning: Zone each floor / story separately at a minimum.
See section 14.15 for example diagrams.
a. Low-Rise Buildings: Provide each zone with a control
valve, flow switch and tamper switch monitored by the
fire alarm system.
b. High-Rise Buildings: Connect guestroom and resi-
dential zone sprinkler piping to 2 risers at each floor
interconnected with a control valve, flow switch and
tamper switch at each riser.
c. Attic Spaces: Provide dedicated zone for attic spaces,
separate from floor below.
11. Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC): Refer to
NFPA 13 for requirements.
C. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems: Provide for habitable spaces such
as guestrooms, guestroom corridors, restaurants, ballrooms,
meeting rooms, public and back-of-house areas. Route wet
pipes in heated spaces.
1. Heat tape and insulation is not considered “freeze protected”
and is not acceptable.
2. Antifreeze (liquid) systems are not permitted.
D. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems: Provide in attic and unheated areas
to avoid the possibility of freezing.
1. Dry type sprinklers supplied from the wet pipe sprinkler
system may be provided in small unheated areas.
2. Antifreeze (liquid) systems are not permitted.
3. Use internally galvanized steel pipe throughout the dry
sprinkler system.
4. Design for dry valve trip test that provides water to the
remote inspector test and drain assembly within 60 seconds
after activation of inspector’s test valve.
5. Provide system with valve, trim, tank mounted compressor
with a secured switch, control and test valves, gauges,
pressure and high / low air pressure switches and
appropriate drains.
E. Inspector’s Test & Drain Assembly: See section 14.15 for example
diagrams.
1. Drain Pipe: Provide continuous hard pipe (steel or CPVC)
to exterior at ground level in a location where discharge
will not damage exterior pavement or landscaping.
2. Access: Visible and readily accessible in back-of-house area
or stairwell.
3. Location: Do not locate in finished areas (guestroom,

guest corridor, etc.).
4. Low Rise Buildings: Locate at farthest (remote) end of
zone (not in guestrooms) with continuous hard pipe drain
to exterior.
Sprinkler zones with dead end mains or more than one
remote end, provide inspector’s tests and drains at each
dead end main and remote end.
5. High Rise Buildings:
a. Guestroom & Residential Floors: Locate at each riser
(interconnected system), continuous hard pipe drain
to exterior.
b. Non-guestroom Floors: With one control valve, locate
at remote end of zone, continuous hard pipe drain to
exterior.
c. Sprinkler zones with dead end mains or more than
one remote end, provide inspector’s tests and drains
at each dead end main and remote end.
F. Sprinklers: Fast response / quick response 57° to 77° C (135° to
170° F) throughout guest and public areas. Concealed (cover
plate) sprinklers are not permitted. Regardless of sprinkler
type or listing, provide 0.10 minimum discharge density for
light hazard areas. Exceptions where listed for a particular
application are as follows:
Room / Space Sprinkler Type Temp. Rating
Quick Response - ventilated 100° C (212° F)
Attic Systems Quick Response - unventilated 141° C (286° F)
Quick Response - ventilated 100° C (212° F)
Dry Pipe Systems (unoccupied spaces)
Quick Response - unventilated 141° C (286° F)
68° to 77° C
Mechanical / Electrical Quick Response (155° to 170° F)
Quick Response - corrosion 100° C (212° F)
Balcony (combustible) resistant, dry, side wall
Quick Response - corrosion
Porches 100° C (212° F)
resistant, dry, side wall
68° to 77° C
Parking Structures Quick Response (155° to 170° F)
Elevator Machinery Quick Response 100° C (212° F)
Swimming Pools Quick Response - corrosion 68° to 77° C
(indoor) resistant (155° to 170° F)
Sauna / Steam Rooms Quick Response - corrosion 141° C (286° F)
Laundry Dryer Plenum resistant
Walk-in Coolers / Quick Response - dry pendant 74° C (165° F)
Freezers
79° to 107° C
Commercial Kitchens Quick Response (175° to 225° F)
68° to 77° C
Storage Quick Response (155° to 170° F)
G. Sprinkler Coordination:
1. Install sprinklers with the manufacturer’s minimum
allowable projection from the wall or ceiling.
2. Coordinate locations of sprinklers at guestrooms and
public areas to avoid location conflicts (such as crown
moldings, HVAC grilles, ceiling fans).
3. In corridor ceilings, generally, position sprinklers along
centerline of corridor width.
4. In ceilings with acoustical tiles, position sprinklers in
center of tiles.
14.7 Fire Alarm

A. Requirements: Provide entire building with a central fire
alarm system from MI’s qualified equipment vendors. See
section 14.16 for the Fire Alarm System Sequence Matrix
Coordinate with <15>.
1. Standard: NFPA 72.
2. System: Provide a fully point addressable intelligent
system (all alarm initiating and supervisory devices
individually addressable) in all buildings.
3. Supervising Station Service: Provide a remote
supervising station service for Marriott properties that
receives and records operation signals of the circuits
and devices, and notifies the local fire department when
a general alarm is activated.
4. Campus Style Sites: Provide point addressable
intelligent networking that reports to the continuously
attended property location.
5. Testing: Provide the following at the Fire Alarm
Control Panel (FACP).
a. Individual disconnect buttons for testing purposes:
• Audible appliances and visual strobes (sounder
base and guestroom hearing impaired strobe
shall function upon guestroom smoke sensor
activation)
• Door hold open mechanisms
• Elevator recall
• Air handlers
b. Alarm sensitivity testing capability at FACP.
6. Exterior & Unconditioned Areas: Provide NEMA 4X
rated devices and appliances (weatherproof, corrosion
resistant) listed for exterior exposure.
B. System Smoke Sensors (Detectors):

1. Guestrooms, Suite Rooms and other Sleeping Units: Provide
24 Volt system smoke sensors with sounder bases to meet
the following:
a. Photoelectric type sensor.
b. Sounder Base: Provide minimum audible alarm of
85 dBA at 3 m (10 ft.); minimum of 75 dBA “at the
pillow”.
c. Activation of room system smoke sensor to
immediately and automatically sound an alarm (three
pulse temporal pattern) within the room of incident
and annunciate as a supervisory signal.
d. System smoke sensor normal and emergency power is
provided by the FACP.
e. In suites and other mixed sleeping spaces, provide the
following:
• System smoke sensors in each separate sleeping
room, living rooms convertible to sleeping and
areas providing access to the corridor doorway.
• Simultaneously activate multiple smoke sensor
sounder bases located within the same suite or unit.
f. To minimize unwanted alarms, avoid locating smoke
sensors near the kitchen or bathrooms.
g. Locate smoke sensors at the highest ceiling area in
the room.
2. Public Areas, Corridor & BOH Areas: Provide system
smoke sensors where:
a. Required by governing code.
b. Smoke exhaust is required in compliance with the
other requirements of this Module.
3. Duct System Smoke Sensors: Provide duct system smoke
sensors as required by NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. Provide
remote test switch and indicator light accessible from floor
level.
C. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detectors: Install CO detectors with
sounders. Connect to the FACP and annunciate as a supervisory
signal.
1. General: Provide in rooms and areas containing fuel
burning appliances and equipment.
2. Fireplaces: Provide detector in areas containing fuel
burning (including wood) fireplaces.
D. Manual Pull Stations: At Reception Desk only, unless required
in other locations by applicable codes.
E. Firefighter Communication Systems: Comply with governing
code requirements.
F. Alarm Notification Appliances: Provide audible notification

appliances (speakers, mini-horns, horns, or sounder bases
of system smoke sensors listed for general and local
evacuation) and visual notification strobe lights in locations
according to the following:
1. Guestroom, Suite Rooms & other Sleeping Units: Provide
audible appliances in each sleeping room. In properties
with separate multiple sleeping spaces, such as suites
and apartments, provide in each sleeping room.
2. Hearing Accessible Designated Guestrooms, Suites,
or Residential Units: Provide audible alarm appliances
and visual alarm strobes.
a. Arrange strobes to flash in each room or area,
within direct line of sight from bed pillows, and
bathroom when the following occurs:
• System smoke sensors and (CO) detectors in
rooms or units activate.
• Building fire alarm notification alarms activate.
b. Strobe Light Rating:
• 177 candela - within 61 cm (24 inch) from the
ceiling.
• 110 candela - more than 61 cm (24 inch) from
the ceiling.
3. Public Areas, Corridors & BOH: Provide audible and
visual notification appliances.
G. Emergency Occupant Notification:
1. Low-Rise Buildings: Automatic alert tone (three pulse
temporal pattern).
2. High-Rise Buildings & Assembly Spaces Over 300
Occupants: Continuous cycle alert tone and automatic
prerecorded voice message with manual voice
communication override.
H. Annunciator: Provide point address to indicate floor, specific
location, device and type of alarm. Provide annunciators in
areas monitored 24 hours by property employees (Security,
AYS, PABX room, Reception Desk) in locations acceptable
to Marriott and governing authority.
I. Door Hold Open Mechanism: Automatically release doors in
affected zone when an alarm is activated. See “Means of
Egress” section in this Module.
14.8 Mechanical Smoke Control Systems

A. Application: Provide an engineered mechanical smoke
control system including public area smoke exhaust and stair
pressurization for egress stairs. Coordinate smoke control
system requirements with Module <15>.
B. Systems & Locations: Design for the following mechanical
smoke control systems:
• Smoke exhaust - public areas
• Smoke exhaust - guestroom corridors
• Pressurization - egress stairs (including transfer enclosures)
C. Standards: NFPA 92
D. Building Configuration:
1. Low-Rise Buildings: Mechanical smoke control is
required in buildings more than 6 stories, regardless
of height. Smoke control may also be required in other
low-rise buildings if FLS judges that fire department
access is limited or exiting is not adequate.
2. High-Rise Buildings: Mechanical smoke control is
required.
3. Atrium: Consult FLS for atrium smoke control
requirements.
E. Acceptance: Obtain FLS acceptance for entire smoke control
systems design, sequences of operation and air quantities.
F. System Configurations:
1. Zones: Each space is treated as an individual fire /
smoke zone.
2. Capacity: In spaces requiring smoke exhaust, provide a
minimum of 8 air changes per hour.
a. In larger spaces such as atriums and exhibit halls,
increase the air change rates.
b. Consult with FLS on project specific criteria.
3. Makeup Air: Provide makeup air for each smoke
exhaust zone.
4. Ducted System: Provide hard ducted smoke exhaust
from each smoke zone. Return air plenums and slot
diffusers are not permitted for smoke exhaust systems.
5. Dampers: Provide motor operated, low leakage,
automatic reset, dampers for smoke exhaust systems.
Manual reset dampers are not allowed.
G. Public Areas: Provide hard ducted, mechanical smoke
exhaust from each smoke zone in lobby, atriums,
restaurants, pre-function areas, ballrooms, meeting rooms
greater than 32.5 m² (350 sq. ft.), exhibition halls and other
assembly occupancies.
Sequence of Operation - Public Areas:

1. Signal: The smoke exhaust system is initiated automatically
by a signal from the fire alarm panel when an area smoke
sensor is activated.
2. Smoke Exhaust Fan: Discharge damper fully opens. The
fan starts and provides 100% exhaust to exterior.
3. HVAC System - Confined Areas: In zones where makeup
air is not readily available (ballroom, meeting room, etc.),
the return damper of the HVAC system serving the smoke
zone closes and the supply fan reduces to 50% outside air.
4. Other Zones: Supply, return and exhaust fans for HVAC
systems in other zones remain in normal operating mode.
H. Guestroom Corridors: Centrally locate on each floor a dedicated
mechanical smoke exhaust riser with normally closed smoke
dampers on each floor.
1. Capacity: Size each roof mounted smoke exhaust fan to
simultaneously serve corridors of three floors.
2. Distance: 30 m (100 ft.) maximum horizontal distance
between supply and exhaust risers. This arrangement
ensures smoke moves in direction opposite of guests
traveling to a means of egress.
3. Activation: Activate automatically by area smoke sensors
and by floor water flow switches (independent of each
other).
4. Zones: If smoke doors divide corridor into two or more
sections, provide independent exhaust inlet in each section.
5. Sequence of Operation - Guestroom Corridors:
a. Smoke exhaust system is initiated by a signal through
the fire alarm panel from either a corridor smoke sen-
sor or sprinkler flow switch.
b. Upon activation, normally closed smoke exhaust
damper on floor of incidence opens and dampers are
closed on remaining non-incidence floors.
c. Discharge damper fully opens and the smoke exhaust
fan starts.
d. Guest corridor and guestroom DAOS (Dedicated
Outside Air System) continues to operate in normal
mode.
e. If applicable, secondary guest corridor pressuriza-
tion fans start (sized for a minimum capacity of 6 air
changes per hour supply air to each floor) and guest
corridor and guestroom DAOS is turned off.
f. Guest Tower Area: Exhaust fans, including those
serving vending rooms and electrical rooms, continue
to operate in normal mode.
I. Stair Pressurization: Automatically activate and mechanically

pressurize egress stair enclosures in compliance with
NFPA 101.
1. System Configurations: The following are approximate
stair enclosure heights and typical design arrangements for
fans and ducts:
a. 10 Stories: Single induction point
b. 10 to 20 Stories: One fan at top and one at bottom
c. 20 or More Stories: One or more supply fans ducted
through stair with supply registers located every third
floor.
2. Fan:
a. Type: Provide fan with variable frequency drive con-
trolled by multiple pressure differential sensors by
means of a discriminator.
b. Capacity: Size fans to provide a balanced 470 l/s
(1,000 cfm) per door.
c. Supply Damper: Motor operated, low leakage
3. Design Pressure: Provide pressure differential sensors
to measure the difference across doors of not less than
2.5 N m2 (0.05 inch w.c.).
4. Doors: 13.50 kg (30 lbs.) maximum opening force across
doors into egress stairs.
5. Sequence of Operation - Stair Pressurization:
a. Initiation: System is initiated by a signal from the fire
alarm panel due to activation of either a public space
(excluding guestrooms) smoke sensor or sprinkler
flow switch.
b. Dedicated Smoke Sensor: In areas without full area
smoke detection, provide smoke sensor within 3 m
(10 ft.) of stair enclosure exit doors to activate system.
c. Supply Damper: Upon activation, supply damper
fully opens and stairwell pressurization fans start.
J. Back-of-House Areas: Provide smoke control only where required
by governing authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Smoke Control Panel: Provide a smoke control panel for manual
control of equipment that is part of the smoke control system
with Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA) and pilot lights (one switch
and lights for each AHU, fan and damper).
1. Location: Position the smoke control panel at the location
of the main fire alarm panel.
2. Power: Provide internal power source for manual operation
of all equipment. Provide voltage same as fire alarm system.
3. ‘Hand’ Position: Manually activates all equipment into
smoke control mode.
4. ‘Off’ Position: Shuts down the equipment and returns

all dampers to their normal mode.
5. ‘Automatic’ Position: Allows system to operate in
normal building mode, or in smoke control mode upon
receipt of a signal from the fire alarm panel.
L. Supply Duct Smoke Sensors:
1. Location: Provide downstream of air handling units
over 945 l/s (2,000 cfm).
2. Operation: Smoke sensor shuts down AHU upon
sensing smoke and annunciates at fire alarm panel, but
does not activate smoke exhaust system.
M. Fire Alarm Matrix: See “Fire Alarm System Sequence Matrix”
at end of this Module for sequence of operation.
14.9 Type 1 - Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression

A. Application: Provide fire suppression system for hoods and
ducts at food production cooking locations that produce
grease laden vapors. Coordinate fire suppression system
function and design with Modules <10>, <15B> and
<15C>.
B. Suppression System: Provide Ansul “Piranha” dual agent
suppression system.
C. Sequence of Operation: The hood and duct fire suppression
system control units initiate the following:
1. Alarm Signal: Send fire alarm signal to FACP.
2. Gas: Automatically activate solenoid to turn off gas to
affected cooking lines.
3. Power: Automatically turn off power to cooking
appliances, lighting and hood makeup air handler,
except exhaust fan continues to operate.
14.10 Emergency Electrical Systems <15>

A. Standards: NFPA 110, NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 101
B. System Requirements: Provide standby power for emergency
power and lighting in the event of loss of normal incoming
electrical service.
• Transfer from one power source to another must take no
longer than 10 seconds.
• See Module <15> for backup operational power loads to
maintain property operations.
C. Emergency Lighting: Provide emergency lighting for code
required egress, property operations and safety, as follows:
• Exit signs
• Egress paths and stairs
• Exterior exit door discharge
• Meeting Rooms, Ballrooms, Exhibit Halls
• Restaurants, Lounges
• Public stairs and steps
• Telephone Equipment Room
• Mechanical, electrical and elevator rooms
• Public toilets
• Fire Pump / Sprinkler Riser Room
• Kitchens (commercial F&B preparation areas)
• Laundry
• Reception Desk
• Employee Cafeteria / Breakroom
• Employees lockers and toilets
• Fitness Center
• Engineering / Maintenance Office
• Administrative Office area
• PABX & AYS Room
• Security Office
• Parking Structure
• Indoor Pool room
• Spa Treatment Rooms
• Fire Command Room (high-rise building)
14.11 Elevator Recall & Firefighters’ Operation <12>

A. ASME A17.1: Provide Elevator Phase 1 Designated Level and
Alternate Level Recall, Shunt Trip and Phase 2 Firefighters’
In-Car Operations in compliance with ASME A17.1; see
Module <12>.
14.12 Central Control Station (Fire Command Room)

A. High-Rise Buildings: Provide at a location acceptable to the
governing authority. <15>
14.13 Means of Egress

A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 101, The Life Safety Code,
except “horizontal exits” are not permitted.
B. Guestroom Areas Corridors: <7> Comply with the following:
1. Exits: 2 or more remote exits
2. Dead-End Corridor Limit: 15.24 m (50 ft.)
3. Common Path Limit: 15.24 m (50 ft.)
C. Assembly Spaces: <3> <6>
1. Occupant Load Factors:
a. Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms & Exhibit Halls: 0.65 m²
(7 sq. ft.) per occupant
b. Restaurant, Lounges & Boardrooms: 1.4 m²
(15 sq. ft.) per occupant
2. Design Requirements:
a. Dead-End Corridor Limit: 6.10 m (20 ft.)
b. Common Path Limit: 6.10 m (20 ft.)
c. Panic & Fire Exit Hardware: Provide hardware on
assembly occupancy doors where occupant loads
are greater than 100 persons and on doors in the
paths of travel to the exterior exit discharge.
d. Remote Exits: Occupant loads greater than 50 per-
sons, using the above occupant load factors, requires
two or more remote exits. Distance between the
nearest edges of remote exits is a minimum of one
third the greatest diagonal dimension of the space.
e. Door Hold Open Mechanism: On entry doors (not
BOH service doors) to assembly rooms <6> greater
than 32.5 m2 (350 sq. ft.), provide electro-magnetic
door hold open mechanism connected to the fire
alarm system and electrical service <15> to hold
doors open and to automatically release doors when
an alarm is activated.
f. Operable Partitions: Doors in operable partitions
do not qualify as exits.
g. Commercial Kitchen Areas: Egress paths through
Kitchens do not qualify as exits.
h. Banquet Chairs: Provide a fastening device on
banquet chairs to connect chairs to each other
in rows to prevent individual chair displacement
from blocking rows and aisles during emergency
egress from assembly occupancies with more than
200 persons.
D. Egress Capacity:
1. Stairways: 7.6 mm (0.3 inch) width per person
2. Doors, Level Components & Ramps: 5 mm (0.2 inch)
width per person
E. Multi-Use Exits: Avoid sharing stairs and exit corridors
with other properties (office, retail, residence, etc.). If
unavoidable, submit and obtain acceptance from FLS of
alternate facilities that safeguard the property operational
and security integrity. <1>
F. Exterior Exit Path: Provide the required width for the exit
capacity but not less than 90 cm (3 ft.), hard surfaced
walkway leading to a public way.
G. Evacuation Signage: <GR> Provide in guestrooms <7> and
other rooms and spaces as directed by FLS.
H. Exit Discharge: Discharge one half of all exits directly to the
building exterior.
I. Doors: Do not lock stair doors and exit doors from either
side. Doors to the exterior must allow for exit access but
may be designed to prevent entry from the exterior.
J. Stair Handrails: At a minimum, provide handrails on both
sides of stairways. See Module <16>.
14.14 Facility Requirements

A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Fire resistance ratings of walls,
doors, shafts, stair enclosures, floor / ceiling assemblies
and flammability ratings of furnishing, carpeting, curtains
and wall finishes shall comply with NFPA 101.
B. Operable Windows: <16> Where operable windows are
utilized, provide windows with window manufacturer’s
safety stops integral with window frame to restrict opening
to 10 cm (4 inch) maximum width.
1. See governing code for other restrictions.
2. Provide with manufacturer’s “key” for maintenance.
C. Fireplaces: Obtain FLS acceptance of custom fireplaces.
D. Linen & Trash Chutes: <7> Comply with NFPA 82, NFPA
101 and NFPA 13.
1. Chute Vent: Provide (full size) a minimum of 90 cm
(3 ft.) above the roof line.
2. Construction: Provide metal, prefabricated,
manufactured chute within a fire rated shaft.
3. Loading Door: Protect chute openings with a fire rated
loading door, located within a service opening room
(vestibule).
4. Room Enclosure: Construct the service opening room
(vestibule) with fire rated enclosure and door.
5. Sprinkler: Install a sprinkler above the top service
opening of the chute, above the lowest service opening,
and above service openings at alternate levels in
buildings over two stories in height.
14.15 Example Diagrams

A. General: The following schematic diagrams are provided
to illustrate the systems described in this Module.
• Figure 1: Isometric of Typical Zoned Low-Rise Sprinkler
System
• Figure 2: Detail: Inspector’s Test & Drain Assembly
• Figure 3: Isometric of Typical Interconnected High-Rise
Sprinkler System
• Figure 4: Floor Control Valve, Inspector’s Test Assembly &
Fire Hose Station
• Figure 5: Typical Interconnected High-Rise Sprinkler
Riser Diagram
Figure 1 - Isometric of Typical Zoned Low-Rise Sprinkler System
Check Valve
Control Valve with Tamper Switch
OS&Y Valve with Tamper Switch Combined

Sprinkler /
Alarm Valve Standpipe
Riser
Pressure Gauge Hard Pipe
Drain
Flow Detector
Inspector’s Test & Drain Assembly
Fire Hose Valve
See Figure 2
Figure 2 - Detail: Inspector’s Test & Drain Assembly

 Hard pipe drain from floor above (steel or CPVC)
 From end of remote branch line for each zone
 Inspector sightglass
 Inspector’s test and drain assembly with 1.33 mm

(½ inch) orifice in readily accessible location
  
 Continuous hard pipe (steel or CPVC) to exterior
 45° El  
 Smooth bore corrosion resistant outlet

Figure 3 - Isometric of Typical Interconnected High-Rise Sprinkler System
Check Valve
OS&Y Valve with Tamper Switch
Alarm Valve
Pressure Gauge
Flow Detector
Fire Hose Valve
See Figure 4
Figure 4 - Floor Control Valve, Inspector’s Test Assembly & Fire Hose Station

Flow Detector
Fire Hose Valve
Combined Sprinkler /
Standpipe System
Figure 5 - Typical Interconnected High-Rise Sprinkler Riser Diagram
Looped Connection
Roof Level
(Typical) Roof Hose
Connection
10th Level
9th Level
8th Level
Combination
Sprinkler /
7th Level Standpipe Riser
6th Level
5th Level
4th Level
3rd Level
2nd Level
1st Level
Drain Drain
Pump
Fire Dept.
By-Pass
Connection Dependable
Water Supply
Test
Header Fire Pump
Jockey Pump
Check Valve Alarm Valve Inspector’s Test & Drain Assembly
Control Valve with Tamper Switch Pressure Gauge Fire Hose Valve
OS&Y Valve with Tamper Switch Flow Switch
14.16 Fire Alarm System Sequence Matrix
Elevator Lobby smoke detectors - Designated
Type 1 - Grease Hood & Duct Fire Suppression

General Notes:
Guestroom System Smoke Sensors (3)

• Reference numbers are shown in parenthesis (1) for
“Notes / Notations” indicated below and in headings
Emergency Generator Signals (9)

Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switches
Dry Sprinkler Pressure Switches
Low / High Air Supply Switches

to the right.
Level or Alternate Level (2)

System Heat Detectors (7)
• Fire alarm system devices are point addressable.
System Smoke Sensors (1)
Carbon Monoxide Signals

• On campus style properties, provide point address-
Fire Pump Signals (8)

Manual Pull Stations
Duct Smoke Sensors

Waterflow Switches
able intelligent networking reporting to continuously
attended property location.
• Sprinkler system water flow and tamper switch alarms
are annunciated on the FACP.
FACP: Display an audible / visual alarm. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Remote Annunciator: Display an audible / visual alarm. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Audible / Visual Alarms: Activate audible / visual strobe
appliances on affected floor. (5)
X X X X X X
Assembly Doors and Fire Doors: Release magnetic door
holders on affected floor.
X X X X
Stairwell Pressurization: Automatically activate
pressurization.
X X X X X
Smoke Exhaust: Automatically activate exhaust system in
X X X X
affected zones. (4) (4)
Guestroom Audible Alarms: Activate alarms in rooms on
affected floor. (5)
X X X X X X
Guestrooms Audible / Visual Signals: Activate both signals in

hearing impaired guestrooms on affected floor. (5)
X X X X X X
Local Audible Alarms: Activate audible alarms only in rooms

X X
containing alarm. (6)
Guestroom Local Audible / Visual Signals: Activate both
X X
signals only in hearing impaired guestroom containing alarm. (6)
Air Handlers: Automatically shut off associated air handlers. X
Cooking Area Gas / Electric: Automatically shut off associated
cooking line gas & electric and makeup air handler.
X
Elevator Phase 1 Designated Level and Alternate Level Recall,
Phase 2 Firefighters’ In-Car Operation.
X
Notes / Notations:
(1) System smoke sensors not located in guestrooms.
(2) Provide Elevator Phase 1 Designated Level and Alternate Level Recall, Shunt Trip Function and Phase 2 Firefighters’
In-Car Operation in compliance with ASME A17.1, Elevator Code.
(3) Guestroom Smoke Sensors: Provide photoelectric type, with sounder base (minimum ratings of 85 dBA, with 75 dBA
“at the pillow”). In suites, multiple sensors shall activate simultaneously.
(4) Water flow alarms shall not activate smoke control exhaust fans where smoke control zones and fire sprinkler zones do
not correspond.
(5) Fire alarms shall activate only on floor of alarm. Governing authority may require additional zoning.
(6) Carbon monoxide detectors in guestrooms, public and BOH areas shall activate an alarm in the guestroom and rooms of incident
and at the fire alarm control panel.
(7) Heat detectors are not recommended since fire sprinklers serve the same function.
(8) Provide “fire pump run” and “fire pump fault” supervisory signals from controller to the FACP, as a minimum.
(9) Provide “generator run” and “generator fault” supervisory signals to the FACP.
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
15
Mechanical / Plumbing / Electrical
15A::Mechanical Systems
15B:: Plumbing Systems
15C:: Electrical Systems
Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
15A
Mechanical Systems
15A - Mechanical Systems THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
15A.1 General Requirements 1
15A.2 Building Cooling & Heating Load Calculations 2
15A.3 HVAC System Requirements 3
15A.4 Central Cooling Plant 5
15A.5 Central Heating Plant 10
15A.6 Piping Systems 12
15A.7 Air Side Systems 16
15A.8 Ductwork 25
15A.9 Mechanical Smoke Control Systems 27
15A.10 Fuel Oil System 27
15A.11 Commercial Food & Beverage (F&B) Production 28
15A.12 Laundry 30
15A.13 Building Automation System (BAS) 31
15A.14 Building Commissioning 38

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Mechanical | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Mechanical Systems - 15A
Mechanical Systems
15A.1 General Requirements
A. Design Criteria: This Module establishes minimum Marriott
International (MI) requirements and is not intended to provide
complete design solutions to project specific situations.
MI Project Contact B. Codes & Standards:
Marriott International - “MI” - is the 1. Deviations: Submit in writing, proposed deviations
corporate entity that manages this from systems, equipment or manufacturers required by
Contact the MI Design Manager for the these Standards and obtain MI Engineering acceptance.
project specific manager referenced For deviations that alter operating costs, submit a
by the term “MI” throughout this complete computer simulated life cycle cost analysis
Module.
so that negative impacts are reflected in the operating
Pro-Forma.
2. Governing Regulations: Comply with governing laws,
requirements conflict with MI’s Design Standards,
contact MI Engineering for resolution.
3. Documentation: Clearly identify on the design drawings
submitted for MI Engineering review and comment,
systems and equipment required by this Module and
provided by the contractor.
4. Zurich Global: Fired pressure vessels, boilers, boiler
tanks and their safety trains (controls that include
combustion safeguards, safety shutoff valves, over
temperature protection and pressure relief valves)
require Zurich Global approval.
C. Building Pressures: Design building air systems to maintain
positive pressure, maintain environmental requirements
(temperature and humidity) and ensure guest comfort.
1. Minimum outside air intake quantities shall exceed
building exhaust quantities by 10% on a floor-by-floor
basis. Provide complete airflow matrix showing supply,
return, exhaust, and outside air quantities on each
HVAC floor plan.
2. In high-rise buildings, consider “chimney or stack
effects” and the resulting infiltration. The use of entry
vestibules, with a revolving door will significantly
reduce stack effect. See Module <2A> for application
of architectural requirements at Lobby entrance.
D. Equipment Selection: Select and provide equipment,
components and specified materials rated for applicable
service, environment, temperatures and pressures.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Mechanical 1

Design and select outdoor equipment for project specific

conditions complete with factory applied corrosion resistant
coatings. Do not provide equipment designed for indoor use
at outdoor locations.
E. Fire Protection & Life Safety: See Module <14>.
F. Environmental Requirements: Design and select equipment
to maintain indoor temperature and humidity levels in
compliance with Table 1 – Environmental / Ventilation
Requirements at the end of this Module. Provide supply air
and ventilation air (conditioned outside air) to each space
based on heat gain / loss calculation and occupancy.
G. Dimensions, Sizes & Measurements: In this Standard,
conversions from English to metric (SI) units are
approximate. Verify, coordinate and confirm product and
material dimensions for required design applications.
15A.2 Building Cooling & Heating Load Calculations
A. Reference: Current edition of American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Handbook of Fundamentals and equivalent governing
standard.
B. Method: Utilize the Cooling Load Temperature Difference
(CLTD) as defined in ASHRAE or equivalent governing
standard.
C. Design Conditions: Utilize the ASHRAE 1% Cooling dry
bulb and mean coincident wet bulb temperatures and
the 99.6% Heating dry bulb temperature, or equivalent
governing standard.
D. Review: Obtain MI Engineering acceptance of load
calculations, psychometric analysis and equipment selections
prior to beginning the design process.
E. Procedures: Prepare performance calculations for purposes
of selecting project central plant equipment.
1. Capacity of central cooling plant is based on building
block loads including the following conditions:
a. Ballroom, Meeting Room & Pre-function
Occupancy: Assume load at one person per 0.93 m²
(10 sq. ft.) for block cooling load purposes.
b. System provides sufficient capacity to meet peak
cooling loads but must be capable of operating ef-
ficiently at part load conditions without excessive
amounts of spare capacity.
c. Central Heating Plant: Assume no credit for solar
heat gain or internal heat gain (such as people,
lights or appliances) in the design of space heating
system and selection of equipment.
2 Mechanical | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

15A.3 HVAC System Requirements

A. General Design Parameters:
1. Design the HVAC (Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning) system to be cost effective, quiet and
energy efficient.
2. Design system to be fully automated and allow for easy
maintenance by local service personnel.
3. Provide sufficient clearances, door access and
routing in compliance with manufacturers’ minimum
requirements, to allow routine maintenance, and removal
and replacement of system components, including tubes.
4. Use common clearances for service of equipment to
minimize overall room dimensions.
5. Access to mechanical spaces may only be in non-public
areas.
6. Locate louvers and exterior mechanical equipment
away from vantage points of public and guest view.
7. Utilize linear slot diffusers for supply and return in
public spaces. Coordinate with MI Interior Design.
Return slot diffusers are not permitted for smoke
control systems.
8. Avoid placement of access panels in public spaces.
Where required, coordinate location and design with MI
Interior Design.
B. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ):
1. High IAQ is a critical component of guest comfort and
is achieved through the proper design of building air
systems.
2. Provide air quality, including filtering and humidity
control in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1
2007 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and
ASHRAE Standard 55 2010 Thermal Environmental
Conditions for Human Occupancy, or equivalent
governing standard.
3. Provide special consideration to spaces such as
commercial cooking areas, fitness centers, pools, spas
etc. to ensure proper environmental conditions and to
avoid odor migration to surrounding areas.
4. Design rooms containing refrigeration equipment in
compliance with ASHRAE Standard 15 or equivalent
governing standard. Provide visual alarm outside the space
and connect to Building Automation System.
C. Energy Efficiency: MI has adopted a significantly aggressive
environmental policy. At a minimum, design the HVAC
systems in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1, 2010
Energy Efficiency in Buildings or equivalent governing
standard.

1. Cost Analysis: Provide a complete computer simulated

life cycle cost analysis for renewable energy options and
alternate HVAC systems and equipment considered for
implementation.
2. Energy Options & Sources: Evaluate the following
renewable energy options and alternate energy sources
with MI Engineering with respect to application,
practicality and cost effectiveness.
a. Renewable Energy Options: Investigate
renewable energy options including free cooling,
heat recovery, thermal storage, solar power, solar
hot water and swimming pool heat, wind power,
geothermal cooling and heating and deep water
cooling.
b. Alternate Energy Sources: Based on project
geographic location, consider alternate energy
sources such as electric, gas, oil and alternate
HVAC systems including two pipe fan coils with
electric heat in guestrooms.
D. Noise Criteria:
1. Design systems and select mechanical equipment to
minimize the transmission of sound and vibration.
2. Isolate ductwork, piping and equipment suspended
from structures.
3. Select equipment, air distribution systems and air
devices to not exceed the following NC (Noise Criteria)
or RC (Room Criteria) levels:
Back-of-
Space Guestrooms Public House
Maximum NC or NC / RC 30 NC / RC 35 NC / RC 40
RC Level 
Hertz (Hz) NC / RC db NC / RC db NC / RC db
31.5 - / 55 - / 60 - / 65
63 57 / 50 60 / 55 64 / 60
125 47 / 45 53 / 50 57 / 55
250 41 / 40 46 / 45 51 / 50
500 35 / 35 40 / 40 45 / 45
1000 31 / 30 36 / 35 41 / 40
2000 29 / 25 34 / 30 39 / 35
4000 28 / 20 33 / 25 38 / 30
8000 27 / - 32 / - 37 / -
4. Select cooling towers to maintain sound level of 45 dB

or lower at a distance of 15 m (50 ft.). Perform acoustic
analysis when cooling towers are located near to
guestrooms or guest areas.

15A.4 Central Cooling Plant

A. Design Considerations: MI requires a central cooling plant
for its energy and operating efficiency. The plant consists
of high efficiency water cooled chillers with a variable-
primary flow, or primary-secondary chilled water pumping
system, variable speed condenser water pumping system
and cooling towers. Accessories include expansion tanks,
SpiroVent Water and Dirt Separator and chemical water
treatment system.
1. Service: Plant supplies chilled water to central station
air handling units (AHUs) in public and back of house
spaces and fan coil units (FCUs) in guestrooms.
2. Location: Strategically locate chiller plant to minimize
pipe and conduit runs, preferably at grade to facilitate
maintenance. Locate chiller plant above water table
and protect from flooding.
3. Flanges & Valves: Provide blind flanges and valves
in chilled water system for connection to temporary
equipment.
4. Bypass: Provide bypass with control valve for minimum
chiller flow in the event of either a chiller or variable
frequency drive (VFD) failure.
5. Other Systems: For systems other than central chilled
water, consult with MI Engineering for acceptance.
B. Chillers:
1. Type: Electric water cooled centrifugal (>300 tons) or
rotary screw chillers (<300 tons) with factory mounted
starters and microprocessor controls. Chillers utilize
either R123 or R134a refrigerant.
2. Quantity: Minimum of two, piped in parallel. A single
chillers with dual compressors is not acceptable.
3. Capacity Selection: When two chillers are provided,
select each at 65% of peak load. For projects with peak
load greater than 1,600 tons, select three chillers at
40%.
4. Controls: Manufacturer’s factory mounted chiller plant
optimization package including complete control of
chillers, chilled water pumps, condenser water pumps,
and cooling towers with contact point for external
connection to Building Automation System (BAS).
5. Efficiency Range: Centrifugal chillers shall not exceed
0.54 kW/ton at full load. Screw chillers shall not exceed
0.68 kW/ton at full load. Specify NPLV part load
efficiencies.

6. Water Temperatures: Chilled water supply 5.5° C (42° F)

and return 12.2° C (54° F). Consult MI Engineering for
higher temperature difference applications.
7. Mounting: Install chillers on 15 cm (6 inch) reinforced
concrete pads with spring isolators. Provide flexible pipe
connectors at inlets and outlets of each chiller to isolate the
piping system.
8. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): Provide VFD on one
chiller in variable-primary flow system.
9. Chiller System Heat Recovery: In projects that require
heating hot water for reheat or a constant domestic hot
water load, utilize condenser heat recovery. Comply with
the following options:
a. Rotary Chiller: Provide a rotary chiller with the con-
denser dedicated to pre-heating domestic hot water.
• Chiller Load: Control by the domestic hot water de-
mand to provide condenser water between 43° and
60° C (110° and 140° F). Optimize the water tem-
perature and flow for maximum efficiency of the
pre-heat system.
• Automatic Operation: Provide appropriate heat
exchangers, pumps and controls.
b. Condenser Water Bundle: Provide an auxiliary
condenser water bundle to the lead chiller that
provides a separate circuit for HVAC reheat where
required for dehumidification.
• Select the auxiliary condenser size, temperatures
and flow for maximum efficiency.
• Provide appropriate pumps and controls for
automatic operation.
10. Region Requirements: Consult with MI Engineering to
determine regional requirements:
a. In some regions, air cooled screw chillers may be ap-
propriate and are required to have multiple refriger-
ant circuits. Provide high efficiency chillers rated at
1.18 kW/ton with copper condenser tubes, fins and
factory applied corrosion resistant coating.
b. Redundancy: Based on geographic location,
availability of factory trained local service personnel
and spare parts, redundant chillers, pumps and
cooling towers may be required.
11. Controls: Provide a standalone chiller plant optimization
package by the chiller manufacturer to control chillers,
pumps, cooling towers and valves with an interface to the
Building Automation System (BAS).
12. Preferred Manufacturers: Trane, Accepted Manufacturers:
Carrier, York and McQuay

C. Cooling Towers:
1. Quantity: Same as chillers
2. Type: Induced draft type
• Stainless steel and / or fiberglass construction with drift
eliminators
• VFDs for air side control
• Premium efficiency motors
• Electronic water level control
• Basin heaters (if required to prevent freezing)
• OSHA approved access ladders and platforms
• 2 cells minimum, with fully independent cells so one
cell is drained for repair while the other is operating.
3. Sizing: Capacities meet the chillers selected at ASHRAE
0.4% Evaporation wet bulb temperature, or equivalent
governing standard. Deviation requires MI Engineering
acceptance.
4. Water Temperatures: Condenser water supply 29° C (85° F)
and return 38° C (100° F).
5. Piping: Connect cooling towers in parallel and provide
full line size bypass with automatic 3 way valve for use
when condenser water temperatures drop below minimum
requirements of chiller manufacturer.
6. Isolation: Mount cooling towers on structural steel rail
supports with spring vibration isolators. Provide flexible
pipe connectors at inlets and outlets of each tower to isolate
the piping system.
7. Separator: Provide system with SpiroVent Dirt Separator.
8. Region Requirement: Consult with MI Engineering for
regional requirements.
a. Where appropriate for ambient conditions, design
chilled water system with waterside economizer
containing plate and frame heat exchangers selected
at 1° C (2° F) approach with flow rates and pressure
drops the same as one chiller.
b. Where ambient wet bulb temperature is exceptionally
high, consult chiller manufacturer for specifications
of chillers using higher temperature condenser water
supply.
c. Consider use of sea water for condenser water with
parallel titanium plate and frame heat exchangers
selected at 1° C (2° F) approach.
9. Accepted Manufacturers: BAC, Marley, Evapco, and Pro
Tech

D. Pumps for Chilled Water System:

1. Design: Perform accurate system head calculations with
prudent but not excessive consideration of safety factors to
eliminate operation in an overload condition and eliminate
excessive differential pressures across valves.
2. Preferred Pump Manufacturer: Grundfos
3. Type: Centrifugal base mounted, 1,450 rpm at 50 hz (1,750
rpm at 60 hz) pumps with premium efficiency motors.
a. Provide either in-line, end suction long / short cou-
pled pumps, between 1750 to 3500 rpm with high ef-
ficiency motors.
b. Provide with built-in or external VFD supplied by
pump manufacturer.
c. Provide pumps to operate in the following modes:
• constant pressure
• proportional pressure (calculated)
• proportional pressure (measured)
• temperature control
• input of external set point or control signals.
4. Chilled Water Pumps: Provide one variable speed (VFD)
chilled water pump set for each chiller and one VFD pump
for standby with piping and valves for cross connection
to other pumps with automatic line size shutoff valve and
suction diffuser.
In order to achieve the highest possible yearly efficiency,
evaluate the quantity of pumps on a case by case basis and
not limited to one pump.
For example, run 3 pumps at 50%-50%-50% instead of two
pumps at 100%-100%.
5. Condenser Water Pumps: Provide one condenser water
pump for each chiller and another pump for standby with
piping and valves for cross connection to other pumps.
a. Provide each condenser water pump with a VFD for
balancing, and control, automatic line size shutoff
valve, and suction diffuser.
b. Provide a multi-pump system to satisfy flow for each
chiller and incorporate a stand-by pump that provides
emergency flow for the chillers.
c. Pump energy is optimized at system flows and stand-
by pump may be utilized for general use allowing for
equal wear time same as for duty pumps.
6. Piping:
a. Provide automatic line size shutoff valve and suction
diffuser on pump suction.
b. Provide full size valve and blind flange in chilled
water supply and return for connection of temporary
chiller in the event of a failure.

7. Mounting: A Victaulic valve assembly consisting of a

MasterSeal butterfly valve with a Series 779 venturi
check valve may be provided in grooved piping systems.
a. Provide three Victaulic flexible pipe couplings or
flexible pipe connectors at suction and discharge
of each pump to isolate the piping system.
b. Install pumps on 10 cm (4 inch) high concrete
housekeeping pads with concrete inertia bases
and spring isolators.
c. Concrete inertia bases are not required when
pumps are mounted on a slab on grade.
E. Water Cooled Refrigeration Equipment:
1. Connect coolers, freezers and ice machines to separate
condenser water system with closed circuit cooling tower.
2. Locate remote compressors in a fully conditioned
mechanical room.
3. Provide each unit with water supply of 0.1 l/s (1.5 gpm)
per hp.
4. Backup Power: <15C> Connect coolers, freezers, cooling
tower and pumps to backup power from standby power
source.
F. Condensate: Provide air handling units (AHUs) and fan coil
units (FCUs) with a condensate recovery system piped to
cooling towers for makeup water.
G. Multi-Use Facilities: Individually meter chilled water to each
occupancy. Consult MI Engineering for project specific
requirements.

15A.5 Central Heating Plant

A. Design Considerations: MI requires a central heating plant
for its energy and operating efficiency. The plant consists
of high efficiency, gas fired, hot water boilers with a
hydraulically separate primary and secondary hot water
pumping system with “bridge”, expansion tank, SpiroVent
Air and Dirt Separator and shell and tube heat exchangers
for heating hot water, double wall heat exchangers for
domestic hot water, laundry and commercial cooking area
systems.
B. Service: Plant supplies heating hot water to central station
AHUs in public and back of house spaces and FCUs in
guestrooms.
C. Location: Strategically locate heating plant to minimize
pipe and conduit lengths, but not within a conditioned
area, preferably at grade to facilitate maintenance. Locate
heating plant equipment above water table and protect
from flooding.
D. Boilers:
1. Type: Modular gas fired with stainless steel heat
exchangers. Fire tube boilers are not allowed.
2. Sizing: 2,000,000 Btuh input, required to meet
simultaneous peak load for building heating and outside
makeup air unit reheat.
3. Quantity: Minimum of two, piped in parallel.
4. Efficiency: Minimum 90%
5. Water Temperatures: Primary hot water supply loop
maximum 82° C (180° F). Design with return water
temperature sufficient to eliminate the possibility of
condensation in non-condensing boilers.
6. Water Circulation: To prevent thermal shock,
provide minimum continuous flow through boilers at
operating conditions to comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Pipe so automatic valves do not
bypass water around boiler.
7. Mounting: Install boilers on 10 cm (4 inch) reinforced
concrete pads.
8. Region Requirements: Consult with MI Engineering to
determine requirements.
a. In areas where winter temperatures are below
0° C (32° F), connect boiler plant, controls and
pumps to backup power. <15C>
b. Redundancy: Redundant boilers, heat exchangers
and pumps may be required based on geographic
location and availability of factory trained service
personnel and spare parts.

9. Controls: Manufacturer’s standalone digital based

microprocessor with lead and lag control, circulating pump
controls, boiler and burner staging and contact points
for external connection to Building Automation System
(BAS).
10. Accepted Manufacturers: Lochinvar, RBI, AO Smith, and
GasMaster
E. Pumps for Heating Hot Water System:
1. Design: Perform accurate system head calculations with
prudent but not excessive consideration of safety factors to
eliminate operation in an overload condition and eliminate
excessive differential pressures across valves.
2. Type: Centrifugal base mounted, 1,450 rpm at 50 hz
(1,750 rpm at 60 hz) with premium efficiency motors.
a. Primary Hot Water Pumps: One constant speed and
volume for each boiler and another pump for standby
with piping and valves for cross connection to other
pumps. Provide pumps with VFD for balancing and
control.
b. Secondary Hot Water Pumps: Multiple zoning
consisting of a minimum of two pumps (one standby)
for each of the following systems; FCUs, AHUs,
domestic hot water system and laundry hot water
system.
• Equip pumps with variable frequency drives and
premium efficiency motors rated for inverter duty.
• Locate pressure sensors in most remote areas of
the building served by the central heating hot water
system.
3. Sizing: Select for maximum efficiency, a minimum of
10% larger than calculated brake horsepower with flows to
match equipment.
4. Piping: Provide line size shutoff valve and suction diffuser
on pump suction.
5. Mounting:
a. Provide 3 Victaulic flexible pipe couplings or flexible
pipe connectors (braided stainless) at suction and
discharge of each pump to isolate the piping system.
b. Install pumps on 10 cm (4 inch) high concrete
housekeeping pads with concrete inertia bases and
spring isolators.
c. Concrete inertia bases are not required when pumps
are mounted on a slab on grade.
F. Stairwells: Provide heating in stairwells to maintain a minimum
indoor temperature of 5° C (40° F).

G. Front Entrance Vestibule: Provide radiant heaters in vestibule

to maintain a minimum indoor temperature of 10° C
(50° F). See Module <2A>.
H. Front Entrance: Provide radiant or floor slab heat at outdoor
Bell Stand where winter temperatures consistently drop
below 0° C (32° F). See Module <2A>.
I. Receiving Area: Provide radiant heating panels where winter
temperatures drop below 0º C (32° F). Provide circulating
fans in hot climates.
J. Multi-Use Facilities: Individually meter heating hot water
to each occupancy. Consult MI Engineering for project
specific requirements.
15A.6 Piping Systems
A. Water Treatment: Provide complete automated water
treatment system to prevent premature pipe failure, loss
of efficiency and heat transfer in chilled water, condenser
water and heating hot water systems. Install corrosion
coupon racks during construction.
1. Water Analysis: Obtain a complete, current water
analysis from the water authority during the design
process.
a. Address issues of corrosion, scale formation,
biological growth and suspended solid matter.
b. If a complete current water analysis is not avail-
able, obtain a water sample to submit to a labora-
tory acceptable to MI Engineering.
2. Chilled Water System: Design a complete automatic
shot feeder system with bulk chemical storage for cor-
rosion inhibitors and antimicrobials.
3. Condenser Water System: Provide a complete automatic
system with the following:
a. Total dissolved solids meter with flow through cell
b. Chemical proportioning pump
c. Solenoid controlled adjustable flow bleed valve
d. Automatic blow down and bulk chemical storage
for:
• Corrosion inhibitors
• Deposit disbursements
• Antimicrobials
• pH adjustment chemicals
4. Heating Hot Water System: Provide a complete
automatic shot feeder system with bulk chemical
storage for corrosion inhibitors and antimicrobials.
5. Provide makeup meters for condenser water and heating
hot water systems.

6. Preferred Manufacturer: NALCO

7. Water Quality: Meet the following criteria for the water
treatment system.
HVAC
Treatment
Water Type of Protection Minimum Requirements
Type
System
Chilled Automatic Rust Prevention pH 8.0 to 9.0
Water Dosing & Scaling NTU less than 20
Precaution Total Dissolved Solid (mg/L) less than 250
Iron (ppm) less than 1.0
Copper (ppm) less than 0.1
Heating Automatic Rust Prevention pH 8.0 to 9.0
Hot Water Dosing & Scaling NTU less than 20
Precaution Total Dissolved Solid (ppm) less than 2500
Iron (ppm) less than 0.2
Copper (ppm) less than 0.2
Silicon (ppm) 15 to 25
Nitrite (ppm) 500 to 1000
Condenser Automatic Scaling, pH 7.0 to 8.5
Water Dosing Rusting, NTU less than 20
Bacteria Total Dissolved Solid (mg/L) 300 to 3,500
& Scum Iron (ppm) less than 2.0
Prevention Copper (ppm) less than 0.1
Bacteria Less than 106 npml
B. Pipe Material: Provide the following:
1. Chilled Water and Heating Hot Water System Types:
a. Schedule 40 black steel (welded, screwed or grooved)
b. Type “L” copper
c. Aquatherm polypropylene piping systems
2. Condenser Water System Types:
a. Schedule 40 black steel (welded, screwed or grooved)
b. Type “L” copper
c. Aquatherm polypropylene piping systems
d. Schedule 40 CPVC. CPVC is limited to piping of less
than 75 mm (3 inch). Do not provide CPVC for out-
door piping.
3. Galvanized Pipe: Not permitted for HVAC systems.
4. Di-electric Unions: Provide for connections of different
materials. Victaulic Style 47 dielectric waterway fittings
are acceptable.
5. Solder for Copper: 95 / 5, tin / antimony solder
C. Pipe Sizing: Size water piping based on the following:
1. 50 mm (2 inch) and Smaller: 1.2 m/sec (4 fps) maximum
velocity in chilled, hot and condenser piping
2. 50 mm (2 inch) and Larger: 2.4 m/sec (8 fps) maximum
velocity in chilled, hot and condenser piping
3. Pressure Drop: 11.96 kPa (4 ft of water column) per 30.5 m
(100 ft.) maximum pipe pressure drop in any system.

D. Pipe Supports: Provide clevis or Uni-Strut trapeze hangers

with spacing for steel or copper piping system supports
based on pipe diameter. Provide supports on both sides of
changes in direction and at both sides of valves and fittings.
1. 50 mm (2 inch) and Smaller: 1.8 m (6 ft.) maximum
2. 50 mm (2 inch) to Less than 150 mm (6 inch): 3 m
(10 ft.) maximum
3. 150 mm (6 inch) and Larger: 4.5 m (15 ft.) maximum
4. Hangers: Provide clevis or Uni-Strut trapeze hangers
with maximum spacing of 1.2 m (4 ft.) for PVC piping.
5. Riser Clamps: Provide copper coated, steel riser clamps
for use with copper pipe at floor penetrations.
6. Hanger Shields: Provide at each hanger for insulated
piping.
E. Pipe Insulation: Provide continuous insulation for piping
systems as follows:
1. Chilled Water Supply, Return and Condensate Drains:
Closed cell elastomeric thermal insulation of thickness
based on pipe diameter as follows:
a. 18 mm (¾ inch) Pipe: 18 mm (¾ inch) minimum
b. 25 mm (1 inch) to 50 mm (2 inch) Pipe: 25 mm
(1 inch) minimum
c. 50 mm (2 inch) and Larger Pipe: 38 mm (1½ inch)
minimum
2. Fiberglass Insulation: Not permitted on cold water
systems.
3. Heating Hot Water Supply and Return: Insulate piping
with 38 mm (1½ inch) minimum thick fibrous glass
insulation with vapor barrier.
4. Seams & Joints: Continuously glued with insulation
contact adhesive.
5. Exterior Chilled Water Piping: Not recommended but
where required, insulate with Armacell ArmaTuff UV
resistant exterior insulation and cover with continuous
aluminum jacket.
6. Valves & Fittings: Insulate as required above and cover
with one piece, PVC, molded jacket covers.
7. Freeze Protection of Condenser Water System: Where
required by environmental conditions, and drain down
is not possible, provide electric heat trace and insulate
condenser water piping same as required above for
chilled water outdoor piping.
8. Accepted Manufacturers: 3M Venture Clad Zero Perm
Vapor Barrier Jacket, Owens Corning Vapor Wick,
Johns Manville.

F. Valves: Design the piping distribution system with valves

located to permit repairs without shutting down more than one
piping riser at a time.
1. Location: Where possible, locate balancing, isolation and
shutoff valves over back-of-house areas to allow remote,
accessible service not visible to guests.
2. Shutoff Valves: Provide shutoff valves for each piece of
piped equipment to permit replacement, and allow accessible
service and repair without disturbing other equipment that
is not dependent on operation of the serviced equipment.
a. Types and Locations: Provide full port ball valves or
butterfly valves with stainless steel stem offset from
the disc centerline for full 360 degree seating for the
following applications:
• In supply and return piping to equipment and on
both sides of 2 way control valves to permit service
and replacement.
• In chilled water supply, chilled water return, hot
water supply and hot water return lines at the base
of risers (including fan coil risers).
• At major branch takeoffs for isolation of systems.
b. Gate Valves: Not allowed for shut off duty.
3. Control Valves: Provide in the following:
a. AHUs: 2 way modulating control valves on air handling
units; 3 way control valves on AHUs at the end of major
branches.
b. FCUs: 2 way control valves on fan coil units; 3 way
control valves on FCUs at the end of the risers.
c. Sizes: Provide 2 way control valves to handle
differential pressure without blow by.
G. Strainers: Provide strainers with drain valve at each air
handling unit coil for drain down and at the base of each return
riser.
H. Thermo Wells: Provide at both sides of equipment and at
temperature control devices.
I. Equipment Connections: Provide connections at the following
locations:
1. Flanged or Screwed Unions: On both sides of AHUs and 2
way control valves. Unions are not required on installations
provided with grooved mechanical joint couplings.
2. Di-Electric Unions: At connections of dissimilar metals
J. Piping Identification: Provide the following:
1. Plastic Nameplates: Identify air handling units, pumps,
heat exchangers, tanks, chillers, cooling towers, water
treatment devices and control panels.

2. Brass Tags: Identify small devices, including in-line

pumps and valves.
3. Plastic Pipe Markers: Snap-on type with directional
flow arrows for chilled water, condensate drain, heating
hot water and domestic hot water piping.
4. Spacing: 6 m (20 ft.) minimum, both sides of each wall
penetration and at each change in direction.
15A.7 Air Side Systems
A. Design Considerations: Provide air conditioning in habitable
Public and Back-of-House spaces.
1. AHU Design: Provide complete information for AHUs
on the design documents including maximum design
outside air quantities, supply air dry bulb and wet bulb
temperatures.
2. Load Calculation Criteria: Select AHUs with greater
than 50% outside air quantity using the ASHRAE
(or equivalent governing standard) 0.4% Evaporation
wet bulb and mean coincident dry bulb temperatures.
Select AHUs with 50% outside quantities or less using
the ASHRAE (or equivalent governing standard)
0.4% Cooling drybulb and mean coincident wet bulb
temperatures.
3. Zoning: Zone air handling systems by type of
occupancy, solar orientation and time of operation to
allow shutdown of equipment or reset of temperature
when heating and cooling is not required.
4. Commercial Cooking Areas & Laundries: Provide
individual constant volume AHUs.
5. Rooftop Units: If required, locate immediately above
conditioned space with a minimum two 90 degree
elbows on supply and return duct to minimize noise
transmission.
6. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems: Use VAV systems
to serve areas with similar occupancies and hours of
operation but different load conditions (ballrooms,
multiple retail shops, gift shops and administrative
offices).
7. AHU Locations: For ease of access and maintenance,
do not install AHUs above ceilings. Locate AHUs in
mechanical rooms or mechanical mezzanines.
8. Mechanical Rooms: Do not utilize as return air
plenums. Hard duct outside air and return air to AHUs.
9. Condensate: Connect AHU condensate drains to
condensate recovery system.

10. Outside Air Intakes: Locate a minimum of 10 m (30 ft.)

above grade and away from public and accessible areas.
<1> <16>
11. Region Requirements:
a. Tropical Climates: Provide separate AHUs for pre-
conditioning outside air.
b. Preheat Coils: Provide on air handling units in cold
climates to prevent freezing chilled water coils.
c. Run Around Coils: Provide for reheat.
d. Coastal Areas & Corrosive Environments: Provide
coils with copper fins mechanically bonded to copper
tubes. Provide factory applied corrosion protection
for HVAC equipment and ductwork.
e. Contact: Consult with MI Engineering for project
specific requirements.
B. Public & Back-of-House AHUs:
1. AHU Type: Provide factory packaged modular vertical
or horizontal type draw through low pressure constant
volume or VAV units with premium efficiency motors.
2. Consult MI Engineering regarding corrosion and hurricane
resistant equipment for projects located in coastal regions.
3. Fabrication: Double wall construction with 50 mm (2 inch) for
indoor and 100 mm (4 inch) for outdooor locations, closed cell
insulation and positive drain type stainless steel drain pan.
4. Components: Provide the following:
a. Supply fan with double width, double inlet air foil fan
b. Hot water preheat coil with modulating 2 way valve
c. Chilled water cooling coil with modulating 2 way
valve
d. Hot water heating coil with modulating 2 way valve
e. Energy efficient reheat for humidity control (either
waste heat or desiccant wheel)
f. Combination filter and mixing boxes with low velocity
filters, motorized dampers and automatic temperature
controls
5. Return Fan: Provide with motor operated dampers on
return, outside air and relief air ducts, when required for
air side economizer.
a. Select fan with capacity to match supply air.
b. Consider use as smoke exhaust fan if capable of
exhausting a minimum 8 air changes per hour in smoke
exhaust mode. Use of 2 speed motor is acceptable to
operate fan at high speed in smoke exhaust <14> mode.
6. Freeze Stats: Provide freeze stats to protect coils from freezing
by shutting down fans and closing outside air dampers when
temperature at coils drops to 5° C (40° F).

7. Sensors: Show sensor locations on the drawings and

a. Connect direct digital sensors to the BAS with temper-
ature and humidity control in the following locations:
• Lobbies
• Restaurants
• Lobby Bars
• Ballrooms
• Meeting Rooms and Boardrooms
• Pre-function Corridors
• Executive Offices
b. Sensors in Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms and
Boardrooms with set point digital display and local
control to permit occupants to select temperature
from 20 to 24.5° C (68 to 76° F).
c. Back-of-house sensors are similar to public space
sensors without display, and are only set through the
BAS.
8. VAV Systems:
a. Sensors: Locate static pressure sensor at last VAV box
and high pressure limit switch at AHU.
b. Duct: For accurate sensing of velocity pressures on
box controller, provide straight duct at inlet of VAV
box with length equal to 4 times the inlet diameter.
c. VAV Box Location: Locate in mechanical plant rooms
or above accessible ceilings with catwalks, preferably
in back of house areas for service and maintenance.
Where heat is required, outfit VAV boxes with hot
water heating coils with modulating 2 way control
valves.
d. Equip VAV type AHUs with variable frequency
drives and premium efficiency motors rated for
inverter duty.
9. Selection Criteria:
a. Design Supply Rate: Minimum of 6 air changes per hour
b. Cooling Coil: Maximum air velocity of 3 m/sec (500 fpm)
c. Heating Coil: Maximum air velocity of 3 m/sec (500 fpm)
d. Fans: Air foil type fans with premium efficiency motors
10. Accepted Manufacturers: Trane, Carrier, York, Sinko,
AAF and McQuay

C. Public Spaces: Comply with the following design criteria

for Lobbies, Restaurants, Lobby Bars, Ballrooms, Meeting
Rooms, Boardrooms and Pre-function Corridors:
1. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors: Provide sensors to control
outside air quantities in areas where there are large changes
in occupancy, as noted above except Boardrooms. Evaluate
application with MI Engineering.
2. Fan Powered Variable Air Volume (FPVAV): Provide
systems with hot water reheat coil and variable speed
drives.
3. Air Distribution: Size ducts for quiet airflow without noise
or whistle. Provide linear supply slot diffusers. Coordinate
appearance with MI Interior Design.
4. Ductwork: Plan duct locations to avoid passing through the
wall above operable partitions. <6>
5. Acoustics: Minimize return air through acoustical
partitions and, if penetrations are required, fabricate sound
traps with two 90 degree acoustically lined elbows.
6. Plenums: Do not use supply air plenums. Return air
plenums are acceptable, except when the space is within a
smoke exhaust zone <14>.
7. Pre-Cool Mode: Provide ability to pre-cool function rooms
below 20° C (68° F) on request.
Figure 1- Ballroom (Public Space) Ductwork Schematic
Return Air
Service
Supply Air
Prefunction

D. Indoor Pool:
1. Type: Provide packaged dehumidification type heat
pump unit that rejects heat back into the pool. Design and
construct unit for pools with reheat for proper temperature
and humidity control.
2. Condensation: Provide supply air to wash windows and
skylights to prevent condensation.
3. Return Air: Provide hard ducted.
4. Remote Monitoring: Provide manufacturer’s factory
controls for monitoring the unit, including refrigerant
pressures.
5. Corrosion Protection: Keep unit’s vital components,
including the blower motor, out of the corrosive process
air stream. Fully dip air coils exposed to the pool air to
ensure 100% corrosion protection. Pre-coated finish stock
is not acceptable.
6. Blowers: Direct drive with VFD for supply air balancing.
Belts are not acceptable.
7. Accepted Manufacturers: Seresco, Desert Aire, Dectron
and Poolpak
E. Guestroom & Guest Corridor Dedicated Outside Air System (DOAS):
Provide DOAS unit to supply guest corridors and guestroom
makeup air. Locate temperature and humidity sensors in one
typical guest corridor.
1. Type: Double wall rooftop units with foam or ceramic
insulation or specifically manufactured for economical
cooling, dehumidifying, heating and reheating 100%
outside air. Equip with energy recovery and a VFD
controlled by static pressure sensors located in the vertical
riser, and set at 3.4 kPa (0.5 inch w.c.)
a. Provide unit capable of maintaining space conditions
of 24°C (75°F) 50% RH with less than 65 grains of
moisture per pound of dry air at all load conditions
and comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 or equiva-
lent governing standard.
b. Reheat: Provide full modulating reheat to maintain
constant discharge temperature during cooling and
dehumidification season. Do not use electric coils for
reheat. Utilize recovered energy for reheat.
2. Guestrooms Supply Ventilation:
a. Type: Provide Zone Register Terminal (ZRT-1-4-120)
manufactured by American Aldes (www.americanal-
des.com) in the entry vestibule ceiling.
b. Integrate operation of ZRT with digital guestroom
control system to shut off airflow when the guestroom
is unoccupied and automatically supply a regulated
volume of 17 l/s (35 cfm) when occupied.

3. Corridors: Provide a minimum ventilation rate of 2 air

changes per hour with preferably vertical ducts and
horizontal distribution system on each floor. Do not use
ceiling hung fan coil units.
4. Mechanical Smoke Exhaust Mode: During smoke exhaust
mode, makeup air system and toilet exhaust system operate
as normal. See smoke exhaust system requirements for
guest corridors in Module <14>.
5. Remote Monitoring: Provide manufacturer’s factory
monitoring of AHU, including refrigerant pressures.
6. Process Air: Locate DOAS vital components out of the
process air stream. Fully dip air coils to ensure 100% of
the coil is protected.
7. Blower and Motor: Direct drive with VFD for supply air
balancing. Belt driven motors are not acceptable.
8. Winter Heating: Provide fully modulating hydronic heat,
SCR controlled electric heat or gas-fired hydronic heat
to maintain a constant discharge air temperature during
heating season.
9. Preferred Manufacturer: Aaon, national account contact,
Tom Whiteley, (443) 832-1657 or e-mail tom.whiteley@
havtech.com. Accepted Manufacturers: Trane TOAU,
DesertAire, Advantix, Seresco, and SolutionAir
F. Guestroom FCUs: <7A>
1. Sizing: Provide the larger of either 46 m2 (500 sf)/ton or
140 l/s (300 cfm) fan coil.
2. Location: Position FCU supply air to avoid blowing directly
on the bed. Coordinate supply grille, return grille and access
panel placement with MI Interior Design.
3. Type:
a. Components: Provide the following:
• Four pipe, vertical stack or concealed horizontal
that allows the guest to choose between heating and
cooling. Based on regional climate data, electric
heat may be acceptable. Consult MI Engineering
for acceptance.
• Chilled water cooling coil with 2 way valve
• Hot water heating coil with 2 way valve
• Hayes Fluid Controls Measurflo automatic flow
control valves on chilled water return and hot
water return
• Integral epoxy coated insulated drain pan, filter
return and foil faced insulation
b. Suites: Multiple, vertical stack, four pipe fan coil units.
Provide one unit for each room or space.

c. Guest Floor Lounge: Air handling units or multiple

horizontal fan coil units discharging toward exterior
wall with hard ducted return air.
d. Bathrooms: In large 4 and 5 fixture bathrooms and
bathrooms with solar gain from windows, provide
supply air to the bathroom from the fan coil unit.
4. Horizontal FCU: Based on project specific requirements,
horizontal FCU’s located above the entry vestibule ceiling
may be used. If provided, return air is hard ducted. Provide
full size access panel in entry vestibule to allow for
complete maintenance access to the FCU.
5. Guestroom Automation System:
a. Digital Thermostat: Provide with the following
features:
• occupancy sensor - built-in
• entry door switch
• lighting control - integrated
• central network control
• RF switch at exterior sliding door (if applicable)
• on / off make-up air damper control
b. Location: Coordinate location of thermostat with MI
Engineering. Typically, mount on guestroom side of
bathroom wall.
c. Accepted Manufacturers: Inncom, Telkonet, Crestron,
Schneider
6. Shut off Valves: Provide full port ball valves for shut off on
chilled water and hot water coil connections.
7. Condensate: Do not connect fan coil unit condensate drains
to plumbing fixtures. Hard pipe to condensate recovery
system.
8. Accepted Manufacturers: International, Trane, Sinko and
Envirotech
G. Ventilation: Provide mechanical ventilation to non-habitable
spaces to maintain a minimum winter temperature of 13° C
(55° F) and maximum summer temperature of 32° C (90° F)
unless specified elsewhere in this Module.
H. Supplemental A/C:
1. Provide chilled water fan coil unit for primary cooling with
backup direct expansion (DX) split system air conditioning
units connected to backup operational power <15C> to
provide 24 hour air conditioning for PMS computer room,
telephone equipment room and elevator machine rooms;
coordinate with Modules <13A> <13B> <12>

2. Provide high efficiency DX split systems (with a minimum

EER of 12.0) for Pastry / Chocolate Room, Meat / Fish
Room, Garde Manger, Beverage Storage to maintain 15° C
(59° F) and Refrigerated Trash Room to maintain 13° C
(55° F); coordinate with Module <10>.
I. Elevator Shafts: Contact MI Engineering for project application.
1. Pressurization: Pressurize elevator shafts to maintain
minimum of 25 kPa (0.10 inch w.c.) and maximum of
67 kPa (0.25 inch w.c.).
2. Heat: Provide heating to maintain a minimum supply
temperature of 7.2° C (45° F).
3. Standby Power: <15C> Connect fan to standby power.
4. Dampers: See “Ductwork” in this Module.
J. Exhaust Systems:
1. Type & Location: Provide exhaust fans with premium
efficiency motors as follows:
• Pool Equipment Rooms
• Toilet Rooms
• Vending Rooms
• Maintenance Shops
• Locker Rooms
• Electric Rooms
• Commercial Cooking Area Hoods
• Bars
• Laundries
• Employee Cafeteria
• Other areas producing odors, fumes and excessive heat.
2. Guestroom Tower: Total exhaust is typically 236 to
378 l/s (500 to 800 cfm) per floor. Provide exhaust at the
following:
• Service Elevator Lobby
• Laundry Chute Room
• Housekeeping
• Vending
• Electrical Rooms
• Electrical Rooms with transformers require cooling to
maintain 27° C (80° F)
3. Refrigeration Compressor Room: Provide a minimum
exhaust of 470 l/s (1,000 cfm) or sufficient airflow to
maintain a maximum 32° C (90° F).
4. Parking Structure Exhaust: Provide exhaust of 0.7 l/s/m2
(1.5 cfm/sf) minimum, controlled by carbon monoxide
sensors. Provide a minimum of one sensor per 700 m2
(7,500 sq. ft.).

K. Guest Bathroom Exhaust:

1. Type: Provide ceiling mounted Zone Register Terminal
(ZRT-1-4-120) manufactured by American Aldes in the
shower compartment controlled by the light switch and
subducted into vertical sheet metal exhaust risers to roof
mounted exhaust fans.
a. Set each ZRT to shut off airflow when the light switch
is off. Automatically regulate the airflow at 24 l/s (40
cfm) when the light switch is off
b. Where sub-ducts are not allowed, install motor
operated fire / smoke damper at shaft wall.
c. Coordinate access panel location and appearance with
MI Interior Design.
2. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans: Design with VFD sized at
50% of the total exhaust quantity on the riser controlled
by static pressure sensor located in the vertical riser, set at
3.4 kPa (0.5 inch w.c.).
3. Exhaust Air Heat Recovery: Provide from guest corridor
and guestroom makeup air system.
L. Combustion Air: Provide in compliance with manufacturer’s
requirements and governing codes for gas and oil fired
appliances including boilers, pool heaters and laundry dryers.
1. Cold Climates: Provide unit heaters for general space
conditioning.
2. Fan Operation: If provided by a fan, interlock fan and intake
damper with boiler controls to ensure proper supply of
combustion air prior to boiler and equipment firing.
M. Fans:
1. Type: Centrifugal, except parking structure fans may be
propeller fan with premium efficiency motors.
2. Commercial Cooking Area Hood Exhaust Fans: <10> High
velocity discharge at 13 m/sec (2,500 fpm) with drain plug
and removable stainless steel drain pan.
a. Mount on roof and direct exhaust away from outside
air intakes to prevent reentry of contaminated air into
building.
b. Position fans so entire cooking area exhaust system is
under negative pressure.
c. Outdoor Installation: Provide fans with weather resis-
tant finish and weather guard motor.
3. Dampers: Provide with motor operated dampers that
automatically close when the fan is off.
N. Air Curtains: Provide for the entire length of doors that open to
the Receiving Area.

15A.8 Ductwork
A. Requirements:
1. Type: Low and medium velocity galvanized sheet
metal constructed in compliance with Sheet Metal and
Air conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA) Standards.
2. Joints: Seal supply and return ductwork joints and
seams with hard-cast duct sealant.
2. Connectors to Supply Diffusers: Medium pressure
rated, externally insulated, spiral wound, flexible duct
with a maximum length of 2.4 m (8 ft.) is permitted.
Flexible duct is not allowed on return and exhaust
systems.
3. Sizing: To minimize airborne noise and ensure space
noise criteria are met, size ductwork for maximum duct
velocity as follows:
a. 10 m/sec (2,000 fpm): Main supply ducts
b. 7.5 m/sec (1,500 fpm): Branch ducts, and return
and exhaust systems
c. 4 m/sec (800 fpm): Ducts serving room terminal
air devices
d. Duct Friction Loss: Not to exceed 0.7 kPa
(0.10 inch w.c.) per 30.5 m (100 ft.) of duct
4. Turning Vanes: Provide in rectangular elbows greater
than 45º.
5. Duct Option: Ductwork downstream of terminal devices
may be Knauf Koolduct or Mansville Superduct RC.
6. Vertical Risers: Construct from sheet metal and run
sheet metal risers in fire rated shaft enclosures. Shaft
enclosures without sheet metal risers are not permitted.
B. Outdoor Ductwork: Not recommended, but when necessary
provide as follows:
1. Roof: Locate bottom of duct a minimum of 450 mm
(18 inch) above roof to permit servicing roof area.
2. Access: Provide steps over ductwork for access to roof
areas and roof mounted systems.
3. Insulation: Encapsulate with 3M Venture Clad Zero
Perm vapor barrier jacket and Venture Tape or Armacell
ArmaTuff, UV resistant outdoor insulation.
4. Protection: Provide corrosion resistant coating on
outdoor equipment, including electrical.
5. Uni-Strut: Not permitted outdoors.
C. Pools: Fabricate ductwork from stainless steel at indoor
pool and pool bromine and chlorine storage room.

D. Sewage Ejection & Grease Trap Rooms: Design exhaust system

for negative pressure with fans located at remote end of the
system and discharge to building exterior.
E. Exhaust Outlets: Position exhaust outlets 6 m (20 ft.)
minimum away from outside air intakes and operable
windows except for the following:
1. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Locate fan outlet minimum of
15 m (50 ft) away from outside air intake.
2. Fireplaces: Locate wood burning fireplace outlets 15 m
(50 ft.) minimum from outside air intakes and operable
windows.
F. Acoustic Lining: Provide closed cell elastomeric insulation that
is non-fibrous and resists bacterial growth, with impervious
face to permit cleaning.
G. Dampers:
1. Provide motor operated, low leakage dampers in the
following locations:
a. For openings in the elevator shafts and machine
rooms (dampers normally closed). Provide control
by the fire alarm system to open dampers under
emergency conditions.
b. On supply and exhaust systems to automatically
close when the systems or spaces served are not
in use.
2. Provide fire dampers and fire / smoke dampers <14>
where required, to meet fire ratings of floors, walls and
ceiling systems. Provide 200 x 200 mm (8 x 8 inch),
framed, hinged, lockable access doors at fire dampers.
Coordinate locations with MI Interior Design.
3. Provide balancing dampers for each supply and return
riser, registers and diffusers. Where possible, locate
balancing dampers in ceiling space over back-of-house
areas where remote servicing is accomplished out of
guest view.
4. Splitter Dampers: Avoid use of multiple splitter dampers
in individual duct systems.
5. Volume Dampers: Provide in branch ducts at connection
to main duct.
H. Flues: Provide factory built, double wall gas flue / vent for
each boiler and fireplace vented to outdoors.

15A.9 Mechanical Smoke Control Systems

A. General: See Module <14> for smoke control systems,
zones, locations and coordinate requirements with HVAC
and ductwork in this Module.
15A.10 Fuel Oil System
A. Type: Provide complete automatic fuel oil system for
standby power generator. <15C>
B. Location: Install double wall, fiberglass fuel oil tanks above
ground with spill containment enclosure and fuel oil fill at
street level. In ground tanks are not acceptable. Skid tanks
are preferred.
C. Controls: Provide each tank with the following:
• Remote electronic level gauges
• Leak detection and monitoring equipment
• Interstitial monitoring
• Overfill protection
D. Pumps: If a skid tank is not required, provide duplex fuel
oil pump sets to transfer fuel to day tanks.
E. Fuel Storage: Size fuel oil tanks based on 24 hours fuel oil
storage capacity for standby power generator.
1. High Risk Areas: For properties in high risk areas
(hurricane regions) provide a minimum of 72 hours
storage capacity.
2. Remote Properties: On island and remote properties,
size fuel oil tanks based on 7 days storage capacity for
standby power generator at full load.
3. Acceptance: Obtain acceptance from MI Engineering.

15A.11 Commercial Food & Beverage (F&B) Production

A. Air Conditioning: Provide air conditioning with a separate
HVAC unit that remains negative with respect to
surrounding areas.
1. Supply Air: Locate devices so cool air is directed away
from “hot food” serving areas.
2. Return Air: Provide hard ducted return system. Plenum
ceilings are not permitted in food production areas.
B. Type 1 - Grease Hood: See Module <14> for cooking hood
and duct fire suppression system at food production
cooking equipment that produces grease laden vapors, and
coordinate requirements with Modules <10>, <15B>, <15C>
and this Module. Provide the following:
1. Standard: Comply with NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control
and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
2. Hood Control System: Provide Melink Intelli-Hood®
or Halton Marvel® system for food cooking hoods to
automatically reduce the speed of the exhaust fan and
control outside and return air dampers during idle and
non-cooking periods to save fan energy and conditioned
air.
The system does the following:
a. Includes the I/O (input and output) processor, key-
pad, temperature sensors, optic sensors, variable
frequency drives (VFDs) and cables.
b. Automatically turns the hoods on / off based on
temperature or a time of day schedule.
c. Varies the hood fan speeds based on both the heat
and smoke load to ensure optimal hood perfor-
mance and energy savings.
d. Automatically adjusts the temperature span to en-
sure optimal energy efficiency.
e. Automatically recalibrates the optics at start-up to
ensure optimal energy efficiency.
f. Provides additional inputs and outputs to allow
compatibility with other equipment and devices
such as HVAC systems and cooking appliances.
g. Provides remote access capability via modem for
monitoring and diagnostics.
3. Hood Exhaust Duct: Provide dedicated exhaust duct
and fan for exhaust hoods. Do not combine hood
exhaust ducts with other exhaust systems (warewashing,
laundry, fireplace, building, etc.).
a. Solid Fuel Burning: At cooking appliances utilizing
solid fuel (wood, charcoal, etc.), provide ductwork
with spark arrester, separately ducted to building
exterior.

b. Type: Black steel, 1.46 mm (0.057 inch) minimum

thickness or stainless steel, 1.14 mm (0.045 inch) mini-
mum thickness ductwork with welded joints.
• Slope duct back to the hood, with welded drip proof
seams.
• Galvanized steel duct is not acceptable. Flamebar
BW11 & Unifax Fyrewrap are acceptable alternates.
c. Cleanouts & Access Doors: Provide at maximum spac-
ing of 3.6 m (12 ft.) in horizontal and at every floor of
vertical riser. Locate at base of vertical riser, at every
change in direction and at sprinklers.
d. Fire Rated Enclosure: Provide a minimum 2 hour fire
rated duct enclosure from the point where the duct
exits the cooking area (wall or ceiling) and to the point
where the duct exits the building (exterior wall or roof).
e. Insulation: Provide 50 mm (2 inch) minimum, calcium
silicate or high temperature fiberglass insulation, test-
ed and approved for the application, with all-service
jacket on entire length of grease exhaust duct.
f. Sizing: Based on velocity of 7 m / sec (1,500 fpm) to
10 m / sec (2,000 fpm) to prevent grease from accu-
mulating in ducts and to ensure grease not trapped in
hood filters is exhausted away from the building.
g. Dampers: Not permitted in grease exhaust systems.
4. Exhibition Cooking Hood:
a. Exhaust Air Quantity: 100%
b. Air Curtain: Provide an air conditioned air curtain to
control air, heat and odor between cooking area (edge
of cooking hood), restaurant area and customers.
5. Hood Exhaust Fans: High velocity discharge at 13 m / sec
(2,500 fpm) with drain plug and removable stainless steel
drain pan.
a. Mount on roof and direct exhaust away from outside
air intakes to prevent reentry of contaminated air into
the building.
b. Position fans so entire cooking exhaust system is
under negative pressure.
c. Exhaust Outlets: Position cooking area exhaust out-
lets at least 7.6 m (25 ft.) away from outside air in-
takes such that prevailing winds carry vapors away
from the building and intakes.
C. Dishwasher Exhaust Duct: Provide separate, dedicated, welded
stainless steel or aluminum exhaust duct, sloped back to
equipment for drainage of condensation. Run duct directly to
building exterior.

D. Walk-in Refrigeration:
1. Air Exhaust: 94 l/s (200 cfm) minimum to maintain
compressor room temperature below 32º C (90º F).
2. Unit Exhaust: Provide each unit with exhaust of 470 l/s
(1000 cfm) per hp minimum to maintain the compressor
room below 32º C (90º F).
E. Refrigerated Trash Holding: Size cooling cquipment
compressor and evaporator coil to maintain 13° C (55° F)
to support water cooled evaporator coil similar to type
required for walk-in complex.
15A.12 Laundry
A. Coordination: See Module <11A> for Laundry Facility
criteria and applicable design requirements.
B. HVAC: Design and provide the HVAC (and air conditioning)
systems for the Laundry and Garment Shop to maintain a
temperature of 78º F (25º C) or less.
C. Facility Features: Provide the following:
1. Diffusers: Locate adjustable type ceiling mounted
diffusers for cooling within 2.7 m (9 ft.) of work stations.
2. Dryers: If dryer enclosure is located adjacent to an
exterior wall, provide louvers for combustion air and
size to prevent significant negative pressure in the
enclosure when dryers operate. If dryer enclosure is not
on an exterior wall, provide an outside air supply fan
equal to the total tumbler exhaust volume.
3. Flatwork Ironer Vacuum Exhaust Air Duct:
a. Provide dedicated, welded stainless steel exhaust
duct and slope back to equipment for condensa-
tion drainage. Run duct directly outdoors.
b. Equip ducts exceeding 7.6 m (25 ft.) in overall
length with in-line booster fans having a capacity
equal to the equipment exhaust capacity.
c. Do not combine vacuum exhaust duct with other
ductwork systems.
D. Valet:
1. Provide individual FCU with thermostat over each
work station.
2. Provide medium pressure steam service as required
by manufacturer to the Valet equipment from a boiler
or steam generator located in the Laundry Mechanical
Room.
E. Air Compressor Room: Provide ventilation and exhaust to
maintain a temperature of 30º C (86° F) or less.

15A.13 Building Automation System (BAS)

A. System Requirements: Provide a BAS with the following:
1. HVAC Scheduling, Operation & Optimization: The
BAS provides automatic scheduling, operation and
optimization of major HVAC systems to provide
the most cost effective property operation while
maintaining guest comfort and property sustainability.
a. BAS maximizes property efficiency providing
alarms of critical conditions to Operation
employees.
b. Obtain the Partial Sequences and Points Lists
from MI Engineering.
2. Control System: Provide a peer to peer network of digital
control panels and operator workstations.
a. Design the control system so each mechanical
system operates under standalone control.
b. At each digital control panel, provide an operator
interface display to display parameters and set
points in the property’s equipment rooms.
3. Operator Workstation: Provide a personal computer (PC)
in the Engineer’s office with a color monitor, mouse and
keyboard. The PC is the user interface for building areas
and systems utilizing dynamic color graphics.
4. Direct Digital Control (DDC): Integrate the BAS with
the DDC temperature control system that is provided,
engineered, installed and warranted by the same BAS
Manufacturer.
DDC technology provides the functions necessary for
the project’s systems control.
5. Network: Provide communications between control
panels and workstations through a high speed network.
a. Network nodes are peers.
b. Provide a modem or network communications
card for remote access to the system.
B. Monitoring & Controls: BAS monitors and controls the
following systems except guestrooms:
1. Central Cooling Plant: Includes chillers, pumps and
cooling towers (monitor only)
2. Central Heating Plant
3. Air Handling Systems: Includes Guestroom and Guest
Corridor makeup air unit, Back-of-House AHUs, and
Public Space AHUs
4. Commercial Cooking Hood: Exhaust fans and makeup
air units

5. Critical non-HVAC Systems: Includes the following:

• cistern water level
• domestic hot water systems
• outdoor lighting
• electric meters
• gas meters
• walk-in coolers and freezers
• water feature pumps
• water treatment plant
• sewage treatment plant
• swimming pool filtration
C. Applications: Consult MI Engineering for Sequence of
Operations and Points Lists that are supplements to this
Module.
D. Preferred Manufacturers: Automated Logic. Accepted
Manufacturers: Trane, Siemens, Schneider Electric,
Johnson, and Honeywell

Table 1 – Environmental / Ventilation Requirements
Design Temperatures &
Relative Humidity Maximum
Occupancy
Lighting Load
Space Cooling m²/Person Outside Air Remarks
Heating Watts/m²
Module
°C (°F) (ft²/Person)
°C (°F) (watts/ft² )
%RH
Provide supply and exhaust of 7.5 l/s/

Parking
1 - - - - - m 2 (1.5 cfm/sf) minimum controlled by
Structures
carbon monoxide sensors.

Main Entrance 24°C (75°F) 21°C 3.8 l/s/person + 0.3 l/s/m 2

3 (30) 43 (4) -
& Lobby 50% RH (70°F) (7.5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf)
2A Provide conditioned supply air into

each restroom. Keep toilets under
24°C (75°F) 21°C
Public Toilets - - - negative pressure with respect to
50% RH (70°F) surrounding public areas. Exhaust
quantity 10 l/s/m 2 (2 cfm/sf) minimum.
Business 24°C (75°F) 21°C 3.8 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2

2B 4.6 (50) 75 (7)
Center 50% RH (70°F) (7.5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf)
January 2013
1.0 (10) or
Lounges & 24°C (75°F) 21°C 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 Individual temperature control in each
3 number of 54 (5)
Restaurants 50% RH (70°F) (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) Private Dining Room.
seats
Keep under negative pressure with
Exercise Area 24°C (75°F) 21°C 10 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 respect to surrounding public areas.
4 (45) 32 (3)
/ Spa 50% RH (70°F) (20 cfm/person + 0.6 cfm/sf) Provide dedicated HVAC unit or
combine with locker room unit only.
Locker / 24°C (75°F) 21°C respect to surrounding public areas.
- Exhaust required -
Dressing Areas 50% RH (70°F) Provide dedicated HVAC unit or
combine with exercise area or spa unit.
4 Provide 47 l/s (100 cfm) exhaust in
Sauna &
- - - - ceiling plenum above each sauna and
Steam Rooms
steam room.
Provide individual temperature control
Treatment 24°C (75°F) 21°C
- 100 % exhaust 32 (3) and 100% exhaust in each treatment
| Mechanical
Rooms 50% RH (70°F) room.
27°C (80°F) 27°C 2.4 l/s/m 2 (0.48 cfm/sf) Keep under negative pressure with
Indoor Pool 32 (3) respect to surrounding public areas.
33
65% RH (80°F) outside air
Mechanical Systems - 15A
Provide separate HVAC unit.

34
Occupancy
Lighting Load
Heating Watts/m²
Module
%RH
24°C (75°F) 3.8 l/s person + 0.6 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature control
5 Retail 21°C (70°F) 4 (45) 75 (7)
50% RH (7.5 cfm/person + 0.12 cfm/sf) in each shop.
Mechanical |
24°C (75°F) 3.8 l/s person + 0.6 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature sensor
Pre-Function 21°C (70°F) 1 (10) 54 (5)
15A - Mechanical Systems
50% RH (7.5 cfm/person + 0.12 cfm/sf) connected to BAS.
Provide individual temperature sensor

24°C (75°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2
Ballrooms 1 (10) 54 (5) connected to BAS with local occupant
50% RH (70°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) control in each Salon.
24°C (75°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature sensor
Meeting
2 (15) 54 (5) connected to BAS with local occupant
6 Rooms 50% RH (70°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) control in each Meeting Room.
24°C (75°F) 21°C 2 (15) or num- 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature sensor
Boardrooms 54 (5) connected to BAS with local occupant
50% RH (70°F) ber of seats. (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) control in Board Room.
24°C (75°F) 21°C Keep under negative pressure with

Service
January 2013
10 (100) 0.3 l/s/m 2 (0.06 cfm/sf) 32 (3) Meeting Spaces but positive with
Corridors 50% RH (70°F)
respect to Banquet Kitchen.
Hard duct 100% outside air into each
Guestrooms & 24°C (75°F) 23°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 guestroom. Provide supply air into
7A 2 persons -
Suites 50% RH (74°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) large 4 & 5 fixture guest bathroom and
bathrooms with exterior exposure.
Guestroom
24°C (75°F) 21°C 2 air changes per hour Supply 2 air changes per hour
Corridors
- 11(1) minimum.
& Elevator 50% RH (70°F) 100% outside air 100% outside air
Foyers
Ice Machine 21°C
- 170 m3 / hour (100 cfm) exhaust - Water cooled ice machines
Rooms (70°F)
7B 24°C (75°F) 18°C Exhaust as required to maintain
Linen Room - Exhaust required -
50% RH (65°F) conditions.
Service 24°C (75°F) 21°C Provide 94 l/s (200 cfm) exhaust in
- Exhaust required 32 (3)
Elevator Foyer 50% RH (70°F) foyer to keep negative to guest corridor.
Exit Stairs - 5°C (40°F) - - -

Occupancy
Lighting Load

Watts/m²
Heating
Module
%RH
Provide individual temperature controls

Guest Floor 24°C (75°F) 21°C 2 (15) or num- 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 in Lounge, Meeting Room and Pantry.
7C 32 (3)
Lounge 50% RH (70°F) ber of seats (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) Provide hood exhaust in Pantry if
required.
Administrative 24°C (75°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature controls
8A 10 (100) 43 (4)
Facilities 50% RH (70°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) in offices. Provide exhaust as required.
January 2013
Employee 24°C (75°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2
10 (100) 32 (3) Provide exhaust where required.
Facilities 50% RH (70°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf)
8B Keep under negative pressure with

Employee 24°C (75°F) 21°C 1 (10) or num- 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 respect to surrounding areas. Provide
32 (3)
Cafeteria 50% RH (70°F) ber of seats (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) exhaust for grease hood and dishwasher
if applicable.
24°C (75°F) 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 Provide individual temperature
Engineering &
21°C (70°F) 10 (100) 43 (4) controls in offices. Provide exhaust for
Maintenance 50% RH (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) workshops as required.

Refrigerated 13°C (55°F) 13°C (55°F)
- Exhaust required - respect to surrounding areas. Provide
Trash Room 50% RH 50% RH individual temperature control.
9
Provide air curtains at each entrance
from receiving dock into building.
| Mechanical
Receiving Provide radiant heating panels in Re-
- - - - -
Area ceiving Area at locations where winter
temperatures drop below 0º C (32° F).
35
Provide circulating fans in hot climates.
36
Occupancy
Lighting Load
Heating Watts/m²
Module
%RH
Commercial
27°C (80°F) 21°C 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 Keep under negative pressure with
Kitchens
5 (50) 32 (3) respect to surrounding areas.
Mechanical |
(F&B 50% RH (70°F) (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) Operate dishwasher exhaust 24 / 7
production)
15A - Mechanical Systems
15°C (59°F) 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 See applicable program requirements in
Cold Prep &
- 5 (50) 32 (3) Module <10>. Provide individual split
Vegetable Prep 50% RH (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) system connected to BAS.
21° to 24°C
Provide individual temperature control
Dry Storage (70° to 75°F) - - - 32 (3)
connected to BAS.
50% RH
Meat / Fish / 15°C (59°F) 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 respect to surrounding areas. Provide
10 Poultry / Pork - 5 (50) 32 (3)
50% RH (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) individual split system connected to
Prep Area
BAS.
January 2013
Pastry / 15°C (59°F) 3.8 l/s person + 0.9 l/s/m 2 respect to surrounding areas. Provide
Chocolate - 5 (50) 32 (3)
50% RH (7.5 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sf) individual temperature control
Room
connected to BAS.
Red Wine 13°C (55°F) Provide individual split system

- - - 32 (3)
Storage 50% RH connected to BAS.
Beverage 21°C (70°F) Provide individual temperature control

- - - 32 (3)
Storage 50% RH connected to BAS.

Occupancy
Lighting Load
Heating Watts/m²
Module
%RH


27°C (80°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.6 l/s/m 2 (5 cfm/
11A Laundry /Valet 3 (30) 32 (3) respect to surrounding areas. Provide
50% RH (70°F) person + 0.12 cfm/sf) spot cooling over each valet station.
24°C (75°F) 21°C 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 Keep under negative pressure with
11B Housekeeping 5 (50) 32 (3)
50% RH (70°F) (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) respect to surrounding areas.
Provide split systems with individual

Elevator 24°C (75°F) 21°C
12 - - - temperature controls. Ventilation not
Equip. Rooms 50% RH (70°F) required.
January 2013
Provide two computer room a/c units
Computer 21°C (70°F) 2.5 l/s person + 0.3 l/s/m 2 sized at 65% of total equipment load.
- 10 (100) 43 (4)
Room 50% RH (5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sf) Connect a/c units to emergency backup
power.
IDF - - -
13 Provide 24 hour conditioning.
Design system to maintain Provide IDF supply and exhaust based
Sound temperature between 10° to on specific project requirements but
- 0.3 l/s/m 2 (0.06 cfm/sf) -
Equip. Room 27° C (50° to 80° F) non- typically 1.5 kW (5,000 Btuh/hr) per
condensing. guestroom floor. Connect a/c units to
Dimmer emergency backup power.
- -
Equip. Room
Mechanical,
Electrical, 24°C (75°F) 21°C Split system a/c unit for main telephone
15 Telephone - 0.3 l/s/m 2 (0.06 cfm/sf) -
50% RH (70°F) room, on emergency backup power.
Rooms &
Closets
| Mechanical
24°C (75°F) 21°C Provide individual temperature control
16 Security - - 43(4)
50% RH (70°F) connected to BAS.
37
15A.15 Building Commissioning

A. Overview: Perform commissioning on building systems
and include required equipment pre-start and start-up
checklists and verification checklists.
1. Efficiency: The primary goal of commissioning is to
produce a building with service systems that function,
in all respects, according to the design intent.
Properly commissioned systems function at maximum
efficiency, and minimize energy consumption and
operating costs.
2. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): A critical occupant comfort
component achieved through proper building system
design, installation and commissioning.
3. Temperature: Maintaining thermal comfort for
employees and guests, produces a high level of occupant
satisfaction. To achieve this, it is essential to implement
a commissioning process that tests, verifies, adjusts,
calibrates and documents functional and environmental
performance of systems and equipment outlined in this
Module, prior to occupancy.
4. Documentation: Provide operating and maintenance
(O&M) manuals, highlighted cut sheets, Record
“As-Built” Documents and equipment and system
warranties.
B. Commissioning Agency: MI recommends that the owner
obtain an independent project commissioning agency
(not associated with and without contractual relationship
with the electrical, HVAC, plumbing, prime or general
contractor) to independently implement and monitor the
commissioning process.
C. Sign Off: MI Engineering does not provide final sign off on
the completed building until the commissioning process is
complete and required documents are submitted.
D. Coordination: See “Building Commissioning” in Modules
<15B> and <15C> and coordinate requirements with this
Module.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
15B
Plumbing Systems
15B - Plumbing Systems THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
15B.1 General Requirements 1
15B.2 Sanitary System 2
15B.3 Storm Water Drainage System 3
15B.4 Domestic Water 4
15B.5 Facility Requirements 10
15B.6 Piping Systems 12
15B.7 Laundry 16
15B.8 Plumbing Fixtures, Accessories & Trim 17
Table 1 - Plumbing Fixture Schedule & Requirements 19
Table 2 - Plumbing Requirements 23
15B.9 Building Commissioning 24

Module Organization
Organization
• This
• This Module
Module isis aa part
part of
of an
an integrated
integrated series
series of
of 17
17 Modules.
Modules.
• Coordination
• Coordination with
with information
information from
from other
other Modules
Modules isis required.
required.
• The
• The reference
reference symbol <XX> isis used
symbol <XX> used to
to indicate
indicateaaModule
Modulereference
referencethat
that
includes related
includes related information.
information.
Marriott Confidential
Ritz-Carlton Confidential&&Proprietary
ProprietaryInformation
Information
The
The contents
contents ofofthe
theDesign
DesignStandards
Standardsareare
confidential andand
confidential proprietary to the
proprietary to
Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company,
Marriott International, L.L.C.
Inc. and andbemay
may not not be reproduced,
reproduced, disclosed,
disclosed, distributed
distributed or usedthe
or used without without the permission
express express permission of an authorized
of an authorized representa-
representative of
tive of Ritz-Carlton.
Marriott.
Copyright, the Ritz-Carlton
Copyright, Hotel Company,
Marriott International, Inc.,L.L.C., unpublished
unpublished material.
material. All rights
All rights reserved.
reserved.
B Plumbing | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Plumbing Systems - 15B
Plumbing Systems
15B.1 General Requirements
A. Design Criteria: This Module establishes minimum Marriott
International (MI) requirements and is not intended to
provide complete design solutions to project specific
MI Project Contact situations.
Marriott International - “MI” - is the B. Codes & Standards:
corporate entity that manages this 1. Deviations: Submit in writing, proposed deviations from
Contact the MI Design Manager for the systems, equipment or manufacturer required by these
project specific manager referenced Standards and obtain MI Engineering acceptance. For
by the term “MI” throughout this deviations that alter operating costs, submit a complete
Module.
computer simulated life cycle cost analysis so that negative
impacts are reflected in the operating Pro-Forma.
requirements conflict with MI’s Design Standards
4. Sanitation: Comply with sanitation standards to safeguard
the water supply, drainage and food service equipment
<10>. Provide appropriate plumbing system traps, indirect
drains with air gaps, vacuum breakers, backflow preventer,
check valves, flow restrictor and valves.
C. Base Plumbing System Design Reference: Design systems in
compliance with American Society of Plumbing Engineers
(ASPE) standard and the governing authority and application of
good engineering practices to provide a safe, low maintenance,
energy efficient, cost effective installation.
D. Dimensions, Sizes & Measurements: In this Standard,
conversions from English to metric (SI) units are approximate.
Verify, coordinate and confirm product and material
dimensions for required design applications.
E. Energy Eﬃciency: MI has adopted a significantly aggressive
environmental policy. At a minimum, design plumbing systems
in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 2007, Energy
Efficiency in Buildings or equivalent governing standard and
governing energy code.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Plumbing 1

1. Provide a complete computer simulated life cycle cost

analysis for alternate plumbing systems and equipment
considered for implementation.
2. Evaluate each alternate with MI Engineering with respect
to application, practicality and cost effectiveness.
3. Investigate the use of alternate or renewable energy options,
including solar hot water and swimming pool heat.
15B.2 Sanitary System
A. System Requirements: Provide entire facility with complete
sanitary waste and vent system connected to a public sanitary
system with a means of conveying sewage. Each fixture in the
system is vented to the atmosphere to provide protection of trap
seals against siphonage and gas leak due to positive pressure,
to promote rapid and quiet flow of waste, and to ventilate the
sanitary system to reduce corrosion.
1. Private Sewage Disposal System: Provide when public
sanitary sewers are not available.
2. Disposal Methods: For methods of disposal, obtain
approval by government authority having jurisdiction.
3. Guest Bathroom Floor Drains: Unless required by governing
codes, guest bathroom floor drains are prohibited.
a. Where floor drains are required, provide Trap Guard
by ProSet Systems to eliminate potential for methane
gas entering bathroom and guestroom.
b. In Asia / Pacific properties, provide floor drains.
c. At accessible roll-in showers, provide a secondary
floor drain outside the shower area.
4. Vertical Sanitary Risers: Provide clean out with access
every 3 floors minimum, 2 per riser.
5. Waste Water: Indirect connect the following to the sanitary
sewer:
• Cooling tower drain
• Water softener backwash
• Pool filter backwash
• Whirl Pool filter backwash
6. Sewage Ejectors: When required, provide duplex
submersible sump pump system with each pump sized
at 65% of peak load. System includes control panel for
alternating pumps, pump failure alarm and high water
level. Connect sewer pumps to backup power <15C>.
7. Food & Beverage Production Facilities: <10>
a. Indirect Waste: Provide for kitchen equipment
as required by governing code or recommended
by equipment manufacturer. Provide with air gaps
equal to 2 times the drain pipe diameter to prevent
back siphonage and contamination.
2 Plumbing | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

b. Direct Waste: Provide as appropriate for the

fixture.
c. Hand Sinks: Connect to direct waste.
d. Funnel Floor Drains: Provide for low volume indirect
waste. Place in easily accessible locations for service.
e. Recessed Floor Sinks: Provide for high volume indi-
rect waste.
f. Exhaust Ventilator: Conceal water wash drain lines
in walls and extend to building drains.
B. Region Requirement: In areas of high water costs, collect
guestroom showers, bath and lavatories and circulate
to a “gray” (non-potable) water reclamation plant for
use in landscape irrigation, cooling tower make-up and
possibly water closet flushing. The minimum standards for
gray water are 10 mg/l BOD, 15 mg/l COD and 10 mg/l
suspended solids.
C. Aqua Recycle on Laundries: <11A> Kemco
15B.3 Storm Water Drainage System
A. System Requirements: Provide a complete, quiet storm
water drainage system connected to a public storm sewer,
without storage, for the entire facility including the
following drains:
• Roof
• Balcony
• Planter
• Fountain
• Surface area
• Subsurface water
B. Drainage Requirements:
1. Overflow: Design roof system with hard piped overflow
system. Do not use roof scuppers for overflow.
2. Disposal: When public storm sewers are not available,
discharge storm water at points of safe disposal
acceptable to government authority having jurisdiction
for water pollution control.
3. Region Requirement: May consider storage of storm
water for irrigation systems.
C. Subsurface Water: During the design process, address the
presence of subsurface water.
1. Foundation Drain System: Install to prevent uplifting
of building slabs by hydrostatic pressure or to prevent
wet slab and wall conditions.
2. Permit: Pumping and discharge of subsurface water
into municipal storm sewers is preferred, but may
require governing authority permission.

3. Storage: Consider capturing and reusing subsurface

water for irrigation and similar applications.
4. Sump Pumps: Provide duplex submersible sump pump
system:
a. Size: Design each pump at 65% of peak load.
b. Motors: Premium efficiency
c. Control Panel: For alternating pumps
d. Pump Failure Alarm
e. High Water Level Alarm
f. Emergency Power: Connect to backup operational
power. <15C>
15B.4 Domestic Water
A. General Requirements:
1. Potable Water: Provide to every fixture throughout the
facility in compliance with, at a minimum, the U.S.
Safe Drinking Water Act or the following Table.
Contaminations Maximum Concentration
Arsenic 0.05 mg/l
Barium 1.0 mg/l
Cadmium 0.01 mg/l
Chloride 100 mg/l
Chromium 0.05 mg/l
Copper 1.0 mg/l
Cyanide 0.005 mg/l
Iron 0.3 mg/l
Lead 0.01 mg/l
Manganese 0.05 mg/l
Mercury 0.02 mg/l
Nitrate 10 mg/l
Selenium 0.01 mg/l
Silver 0.05 mg/l
Sulfate 250 mg/l
Zinc 5.0 mg/l
Total Trihalomethanes 0.1 mg/l
Endrin 0.002 mg/l
Undane 0.004 mg/l
Methoxychlor 0.1 mg/l
Toxaphene 0.005 mg/l
2.4-D 0.1 mg/l
2,4,5-TP (Silvex) 0.001 mg/l

3. Domestic Hot and Cold Water: Provide throughout to

fixtures such as lavatories, sinks, tubs, showers, eye wash,
can wash, and laundry and kitchen fixtures.
4. Vacuum Breakers: Provide on fixtures where cross
connection to or siphon from non-potable system is
possible.
5. Double Check Valve Backflow Preventer: Provide on
connections to non-potable water systems such as chillers,
cooling towers, boilers, pools, and irrigation systems.
6. Metering: In areas where sewer charges can be avoided,
provide separate water meters for HVAC make-up,
irrigation systems and swimming pools.
7. Food & Beverage Production Facilities: To avoid back
siphoning of contaminates into water system, provide
check valves, air gaps and vacuum breaks.
B. Water Analysis: Obtain a complete and current water analysis
from the governing water authority stating that the potable
(drinkable) water supplied to the property, complies with
requirements of the health authority having jurisdiction and
the U.S. Safe Drinking Water Act or the potable water table
above. If the water analysis is not available, obtain a water
sample and submit to a laboratory accepted by MI.
C. Cisterns: Provide in areas where water supply reliability is
not dependable. Consult with MI Engineering to determine
applicability of this requirement and application of the
following provisions:
1. Cells: Minimum of 2 cells with means of closing off each
side for maintenance without interrupting the property
water supply. Provide each cell with a lockable cover.
2. Lining: Non-porous material such as ceramic tile or PVC.
3. Capacity:
a. General: Minimum of 380 liters (100 gal.) storage per
guestroom for properties without laundry
b. Laundry: Minimum of 570 liters (150 gal.) per guest-
room for properties with a laundry
c. Resorts: Minimum of 760 liters (200 gal.) per guest-
room for resorts
D. Water Conditioning:
1. Hot Water: Condition hot water when hardness exceeds
170 ppm (10 grains) or more per gallon.
2. Kitchen & Laundry: Provide hot water conditioning if water
analysis indicates more than 119 ppm (7 grains) per gallon
hardness.

3. Hardness: Submit lab test results of the domestic water

analysis.
a. Over 119 ppm (7 grains) provide Watts OneFlow
system for Laundry and Kitchen hot water as an
alternatives to “typical” water softening.
b. Over 170 ppm (10 grains) provide Watts OneFlow
for all hot water.
c. If typical water softening equipment is utilized,
provide a Cla-Val 20-01 blending valve to main-
tain maximum 51 to 68 ppm (3 to 4 grains) of
hardness to protect the piping systems.
E. Hot Water:
1. General Requirements:
a. Storage Tanks: Provide two cement lined storage
tanks and a minimum of two water heaters or heat
exchangers. Tank type heaters or “immersion coils”
are not acceptable.
b. Hot Water Return: Provide complete hot water return
throughout the entire system with balancing (flow
control) valves at the end of every branch or riser. At
a minimum, circulate 0.06 l/s (1.0 gpm) through each
hot water riser so that hot water reaches every fixture
within 10 seconds of flow initiation.
c. Heat Trace: Not allowed for hot water return
systems.
2. Digital Re-circulating Valve (DRV): Provide DRVs for
the following hot water system applications:
• Systems with a maximum simultaneous de-
mand (MSD) less than or equal to 3.8 l/ sec
(60 gpm), provide one DRV40R-BS-DS.
• Systems up to 7.2 l/sec (115 gpm), provide
two DRV40R-BS-DS in parallel or one
DRV80R-BS-DS.
• Systems up to 14.5 l/sec (230 gpm), provide two
DRV80R-BS-DS in parallel.
a. Accepted Manufacturer & Model: Armstrong
Model DRV40R-BS-DS or DRV80R-BS-DS, The
Brain™; contact Ryan Bloss; tel. (269) 279-3158
or e-mail: rbloss@armstronginternational.com
b. Features: Provide DRVs with the following:
• +/- 2F temperature control
• Automatic shut-off of inlet hot water flow upon:
+ Cold water supply failure
+ Power Failure
+ 2nd Level over temperature error

Figure 1 - Digital Re-circulating Valve (DRV) - Diagrams

• Setpoint: Programmable setpoint, hi/lo temp

alert.
• Integral Serial Port: Provide for BrainScan® –
Building Automation Systems (BAS), interface
for Bacnet™, LonWorks™ and Web
• Modbus: Provide Direct interface with BAS
<15A> utilizing Modbus protocols.
c. Pre-piped Digital Mixing Center (DMC): Consider
fully pre-piped DMC models (DMC40-BS-DS,
DMC40-40-BS-DS, DMC80-BS-DS, DMC80-80-
BS-DS, DMC80-80-80BS-DS).
d. Testing: Pipe and pressure test the complete
installation including isolation valves, strainers,
mixed return flow indicator, check valves,
thermometers and mixed outlet water sensor
required by manufacturer.
3. Pumps: Provide for domestic hot water re-circulation.
a. Wet rotor circulator pumps with integrated VFD
permanent magnet (or ECM motors) and pre-
programmed system controls
b. Duplex configuration with integrated controls that
allow pump alternation on alarm and time.
c. Pump automatically adjusts its speed to maintain
desired hot water system return temperature.
d. Preferred Manufacturer: Grundfos
4. Water Temperatures: Provide hot water temperatures
as follows:
a. Guestrooms, Kitchen Hand Sinks & Other Areas:
Minimum 57º C (135º F) storage and 53º C (128º F) at
point of connection to any fixture and as required by
governing codes.
b. Kitchens: Provide 60º C (140º F) for preparation, pot
sinks, warewashing machines and general kitchen
use.
c. Booster Heaters: Coordinate with kitchen and food
service consultant for requirements at dishwasher
and pot sink.
d. Laundry Washers: 74º C (165º F).
5. Guestrooms & Kitchen Hot Water Sizing:
a. Capacity: Provide a minimum of two double
wall, heat exchangers or fuel fired water heaters,
each capable of recovering 15 liters (4 gal.) per
guestroom per hour at 55º C (100º F) rise plus
required gallons per hour recovery based on
actual kitchen equipment selections and any
special requirements for banquet facilities.

b. Design: Interconnect heaters and tanks in a

“reverse return” arrangement.
c. Gas Fired Water Heaters: Provide with sealed
combustion chambers with direct venting of ex-
haust and combustion air. Minimum efficiency is
85%. Tank type heaters are not accepted.
d. Storage Tanks: Provide two cement lined storage
tanks sized at 38 liters (10 gal.) per guestroom,
plus required gallons based on actual kitchen
equipment selections and any special requirements
for banquet facilities.
Provide each tank with 4 connection “nozzles”:
• One for hot water outlet
• One for cold water inlet and hot water
recirculation
• One for outlet to heaters
• One for return from heaters
6. Laundry Hot Water Sizing: <11>
a. Capacity: Provide one heat exchanger or water
heater capable of recovering required liters
(gallons) per hour based on actual laundry
equipment selections.
b. Storage Tank: Provide one cement lined storage
tank sized at required liters (gallons) based on
actual laundry equipment selections.

15B.5 Facility Requirements

A. Accessible Fixtures: Provide ambulatory and accessible
fixtures and hardware as required by government
regulations, governing codes, but as a minimum, provide
in compliance with ADA.
B. Kitchen (Commercial F&B) Plumbing: <10>
1. Plumbing Piping: Conceal in kitchen areas within
walls. If concealed installation is not possible, use
stainless steel or chrome plated pipe covers in prep and
production areas. Do not stub out from floor or expose
piping on face of walls and ceiling.
2. Piping Connections:
a. Design piping connections to equipment at
the highest elevation possible but not less than
150 mm (6 inch) above the floor to provide clear-
ance for cleaning.
b. Function Space Kitchen: Provide flexible gas
lines and quick disconnects (where applicable) for
cooking equipment on casters.
3. Domestic Water Lines: Connect to kitchen equipment
through individual water filters when required by
equipment manufacturer. Use flexible stainless steel
lines with quick disconnect connections.
4. Choose utility based on the following:
a. Use natural gas when available.
b. If municipal gas service is not available, provide
central liquid petroleum tank size for one week
capacity of gas with pressure as required for the
equipment served.
c. Provide combination of utilities to reduce impact
of utility system failure.
d. Prefer induction in buffet areas.
5. Gas: Comply with NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
Do not use or store gas bottles or containers larger than
1.1 kg (2½ pounds), normally used for portable warmer
and cookers within building.
6. Walk-in Refrigeration System:
a. Condenser / Compressor Units: Provide each unit
with a water supply of 0.1 l / s (1.5 gpm) per hp at
21º C (70° F).
b. Do not use domestic, potable water for cooling.
Provide recirculating system.

C. Type 1 Grease Hoods: <10> Provide the fire suppression system

<14> to perform the following actions when activated
(coordinate with Modules <15A>, <15C> and this Module):
1. Alarm Signal: Send to fire alarm control panel (FACP).
• Position the solenoid as close to the appliance as practi-
cal to minimize gas supply when activated.
• Locate the solenoid reset in an accessible area.
D. Grease Traps: <10>
1. Design: Drain main kitchen areas with both a grease
waste and a non-grease waste system. Connect floor
drains, pot sinks, and dish washers to grease waste
system. Connect all other fixtures, including grinders
and disposal waste machines, to non-grease waste
system.
2. Location: Locate grease traps outside building in a
serviceable location, preferably near the Receiving
Area, but as close to the grease source as possible.
3. Remote Kitchen Areas: Equip with small cast iron
interceptors located in Back-of-House areas for easy
cleaning and maintenance.
4. Standard: Design grease traps in accordance with
governing code or ASPE with cleanouts at the entry
and exit. Vent grease trap individually through the roof.
E. Trash & Can Wash: <10>
1. Hot and Cold Water: Provide for wash down at
Receiving Area.
2. Drains: Provide floor and trench drains in the loading
dock and trash compactor area. Route drains through
the grease trap.
F. Swimming Pools & Water Features: Verify that pools (indoors
and outdoors), and site and building water features
are provided with appropriate water supply, filtration,
circulation, treatment, aeration and drainage.

15B.6 Piping Systems

A. Design Pressures:
1. Design: Zone system to maintain between 275 kPa and
550 kPa (40 and 80 psi) at fixtures.
2. Zone: Provide a maximum of 9 floors in pressure
zones. Utilizing pressure reducing valves in domestic
water systems at each floor is prohibited. When
required, install two in parallel with shut off valves for
maintenance.
3. System Pressure: Maintain through a factory
manufactured and tested automatic triplex booster
pump system with premium efficiency motors sized
at 50% - 50% - 20% split with variable frequency
drives. Pump controller sequences pumps based on
flow readings from a flow sensor with back-up pressure
switch.
4. Booster Pump System: Connect to operational standby
power <15C>.
B. Pipe Material:
1. Domestic Water Pipe:
a. Exterior Water Mains: <1> Cement lined ductile
iron, minimum diameter 75 mm (3 inch).
b. Inground / Below Grade: Type “K” copper or
PVC grades SDR 21 or 26, depending on pressure
requirements.
c. Galvanized Pipe: Not permitted for domestic
water systems (mains, below grade or interior).
d. Interior Distribution: Type “L” copper with no-
lead solder or “ProPress” joints and copper fit-
tings. Accepted alternatives include:
• Flowguard Gold CPVC piping systems
• Corzan CPVC piping systems
• Stainless steel piping and fittings with pressure
ratings equivalent to Type “L” copper
• “PEX” Piping: Provide only for final distribu-
tion in guestroom bathrooms (no joints be-
tween the manifold and fixture). Comply with
ASTM F876 / F877, NSF 61, 5006 chlorine re-
sistance rating and 60 day minimum UV rating.
• Accepted Manufacturers: VEGA and Uponor

2. Storm & Sanitary Sewer:

a. Cast iron pipe and fittings are required for wet systems
with piping larger than 50 mm (2 inch). Galvanized
pipe is not permitted.
b. Schedule 40 PVC Piping: Acceptable for vent piping,
underground waste piping (provide PVC materials
and joint cement compatible with waste temperatures
encountered), and 50 mm (2 inch) for sanitary piping.
Foam Core PVC is not accepted.
3. Natural or LP Gas: Schedule 40 black steel with screwed or
welded fittings or Type “L” copper.
4. Gas Piping Installation: Do not conceal piping in walls
and non-accessible ceilings. Install gas piping only in
accessible locations and surface mount at kitchen hoods.
Limit gas pressure inside building to 2 psi maximum.
C. Pipe Sizing: Do not exceed 2.4 m/s (8 fps) maximum velocity
in the domestic water system. Do not exceed 1.2 m/s (4 fps)
maximum velocity in the hot water return system.
D. Pipe Supports: Provide clevis or Uni-Strut trapeze hangers with
maximum spacing for copper or cast iron piping system supports
based on pipe diameter and provide supports on both sides of
changes in direction and at both sides of valves and fittings.
1. 50 mm (2 inch) & Smaller: 1.8 m (6 ft.) maximum
2. 65 mm (2.5 inch) to Less than 150 mm (6 inch): 3 m (10 ft.)
maximum
3. 150 mm (6 inch) & Larger: 4.5 m (15 ft.) maximum
4. PVC Piping: Provide clevis or Uni-Strut trapeze hangers
with maximum spacing of 1.2 m (4 ft.).
5. Hanger Shields: Provide at each hanger for insulated piping.
6. Floor Penetrations: Provide steel riser clamps (copper coated
for copper pipe) at each floor. Provide cork and rubber
isolation pad between clamp rings and floor structure.
E. Pipe Insulation: Provide continuous insulation systems for
domestic water piping as follows:
1. Cold Water & Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: Inside
building, provide flexible elastomeric thermal insulation of
thickness based on pipe diameter as follows:
a. 18 mm (¾ inch) Pipe: 18 mm (¾ inch) minimum
b. 25 mm (1 inch) to 50 mm (2 inch) Pipe: 25 mm (1 inch)
minimum
c. 65 mm (2.5 inch) & Larger Pipe: 35 mm (1½ inch)
minimum
2. Hot Water Supply, Return & Recirculating Piping: Provide
fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier of thickness same
as cold water piping.

3. Seams & Joints: Continuously glue insulation with

contact adhesive.
4. Pipe Jacketing: Provide protective preformed jacket
covers for insulated piping at the following locations
and where required by design:
• PVC Jacketing: Exposed in mechanical rooms and
where piping is less than 1.8 m (72 inch) above finish
floor.
• One Piece PVC Jackets: Provide for indoor valves and
fittings.
• Aluminum Jacketing: Provide at outdoor piping with
double seal, water tight joints utilizing Venture foil faced
adhesive tape. Aluminum jacketing is an acceptable
alternative in mechanical rooms.
F. Disinfection of Potable Water System: First, flush the entire
water system with clean, potable water until dirty water
does not appear at all outlets. Continue with the following
flushing requirements:
1. Disinfection Solution: Once flushed per above, close
valves, fill the entire domestic water system with a
water / chlorine solution containing a minimum of 50
parts per million (50 mg/l) and retain solution in system
for 24 hours minimum.
2. Chlorine Purging: After retaining the solution in the
system for 24 hours, flush the system with clean potable
water until the system is purged of chlorine. Repeat the
flushing procedure until contamination is eliminated
from the system and the disinfection is verified by a
bacteriological examination and tests.
G. Valves: Design the piping system with valves located to
permit repairs without shutting down more than one piping
riser at a time. Where possible, locate balancing, isolation
and shut-off valves over Back-of-House areas to allow
remote, accessible service that is not visible to public and
guests.
1. Shut-off Valves: Provide full-port ball valves or
butterfly valves for all pipe sizes and for the following:
a. At the base of hot water and cold water risers
b. In supply and return piping to equipment to per-
mit service and replacement.
c. In domestic hot water return line on both sides of
the flow control valve at top of each riser.
d. At major branch takeoffs for isolation of systems.
e. Provide gas shutoff valve at each piece of kitchen
equipment.
f. Gate valves are not allowed.

2. Balancing (Flow Control) Valves: Provide with

memory stops and measuring ports to calibrate pressure
drop and water flow at each piece of equipment and at
each hot water return riser. Do not use ball valves for
balancing.
3. Pressure Regulators & Shock Absorbers: Provide on
branches serving ice machines, dishwashers and laundry
equipment. Provide shock absorbers in locations accessible
for service and maintenance.
4. Gas Pressure Regulating Valves: <10> <11A> Install
to regulate gas pressure at the point of entry to the
building and at kitchen and laundry equipment based
on requirements of actual equipment selected. In
earthquake areas, provide automatic shut-off gas
solenoid valve.
a. Install regulators and valves in an accessible
location, not above ceilings.
b. Outfit regulators with full size piped vent to
exterior of building.
H. Piping Connections: Provide di-electric unions at connections
of dissimilar metals.
I. Piping Identification: Provide the following:
1. Plastic Nameplates: Identify pumps, heat exchangers,
tanks, water treatment devices and control panels.
2. Brass Tags: Identify small devices, including in-line
pumps and valves.
3. Plastic Pipe Markers: Snap-on type with flow arrows
for gas, domestic cold water, domestic hot water and
hot water return piping.
J. Air Vents: Provide the following:
1. Manual Type: Place at system high points.
2. Automatic Type: Place at system high points above
inaccessible ceilings and hard-piped to nearest floor
drain.
K. Thermo Wells: Provide on both sides of all equipment and at
temperature control devices.
L. Pressure Regulators & Shock Absorbers: Provide on branches
serving ice machines, dishwashers, laundry equipment and
at toilet rooms with flush valves. Locate shock absorbers
accessible for service and maintenance.

15B.7 Laundry
A. Facility Features: Provide the following:
1. Eye Wash Station: See Module <16>. Provide one in the
chemical storage room and one near washers.
2. Lint Screens: Install 12 mm x 12 mm (½ x ½ inch)
expanded metal lint screens in trench drains. Locate
screens and design to fully protect the trench, for easy
removal and daily cleaning.
3. Floor Drains: Provide floor drains in the laundry
mechanical room, garment shop, boiler room and air
compressor room. Provide area and laundry washer
trenches with drains leading to storage pits. Slope
trench bottoms to drain at center or one end.
B. Water Reclamation & Reuse Systems:
1. Waste & Rinse Water: Evaluate cost to determine if
water reclamation and rinse water reuse systems are
recommended. Review with MI Engineering.
2. Waste Water Heat Recovery: Provide a waste water
heat recovery system when a waste water reclamation
system is not provided.
C. Wash Chemical Storage & Injection System: Provide 20 mm
(¾ inch) hot and cold water lines connected through a
thermostatic mixing valve to a single 20 mm (¾ inch) wall
mounted valved outlet.
D. Water Quality Requirements: Comply with the following:
Parameters Upper Limit

NTU 1
pH 6.5 to 7.7
Total Hardness (CaCO3) (mg/L) Less than 150
Iron Content (ppm) Less than 0.1
Copper Content (ppm) Less than 0.2
Total Dissolved Solid (mg/L) Less than 300
Total Coliform (CFU/100ml) 0

15B.8 Plumbing Fixtures, Accessories & Trim

A. General: Provide commercial grade fixtures, faucets and
trim.
B. Eye Wash Stations: <16> Provide eye wash fixtures where
chemicals are mixed, dispensed or handled and used in
concentrated form.
1. Locations: The following are example locations:
• Swimming & Whirl Pool Equipment Room storage and
handling <4>
• Engineering maintenance and shop areas <9>
• Kitchen warewashing <10>
• Laundry chemical storage and handling <11>
• Housekeeping (cleaning chemicals) <11>
• Other locations where chemicals are provided as noted
above.
2. Fixture Type: Provide permanent (not reservoir type
that requires maintenance, testing and regulation
burdens), foot operated, non-shower type fixtures in
compliance with OSHA standards.
3. Plumbing: <15> Connect fixtures to piped plumbing
system with tepid water supply and drain.
C. Fixture Trim:
1. Toilet Supply: Chrome plated angle stop valve, wall
flange, and braided stainless steel supply line
2. Lavatory Supply: 12 mm (½ inch) angle supply, wall
flange, chrome plated and braided stainless steel supply
line.
3. Lavatory and Sink Traps: 17 gauge, chrome plated
brass with wall flange and no clean-out
4. Accessible Lavatory Trap Insulation Kit: Handi Lav-
Guard Model 102 & 105 white, self fastening, flexible,
vinyl insulation covers for drain traps and supply piping
with accessible angle valve insulation cover
5. Shower Drain: 50 mm (2 inch) diameter with 100 mm
(4 inch) square perforated grid strainer, chrome finish
Provide without manufacturer’s name or symbol visible.

Table 1 - Plumbing Fixture Schedule & Requirements

Kohler
Fixture Item / Number Item / Description Model
Provide flush toilets that exceed 800 MaP test. Dual flush toilets are not
Toilet (Water Closet)
permitted
Fixture: 5 lpf (1.28 gpf), wall hung, 55 mm (2⅛ inch)
diameter fully glazed trap, vitreous china, siphon
jet elongated bowl, 40 mm (1½ inch) top spud, Kingston
white. Provide carrier with horizontal and vertical
adjustments.
Toilet, Public
Seat: Heavy duty solid plastic, elongated, open front, Stronghold
stainless steel posts and check hinge, white.
Flush Valve: Automatic with 1½ inch top spud Wave
coupling, wall and spud flanges, chrome plated.
Fixture: 5 lpf (1.28 gpf), wall hung, vitreous china,
2⅛ inch diameter fully glazed trap, siphon jet elongated
bowl, 40 mm (1½ inch) top spud, white. Minimum seat Kingston
height of 17 inch. Provide carrier with horizontal and
Toilet, Public, BOH, vertical adjustments.
Accessible
Seat: Heavy duty solid plastic, elongated, open front, Stronghold
stainless steel posts and check hinge, white.
Flush Valve: Automatic with 40 mm (1½ inch) top
Wave
spud coupling, wall and spud flanges, chrome plated.
Fixture: Floor outlet, 55 mm (2⅛ inch) diameter fully
glazed trap, rim height 420 mm (16½ inch) with close
coupled tank, vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated Cimarron
Toilet, Guestrooms & bowl, bolt caps, white, with polished chrome trip lever
Typical Suites 5 liter (1.28 gallon) flush.
Seat: Ergonomic, heavy-duty solid plastic, elongated,
closed front with cover, stainless steel posts and Brevia
check hinge, white.
Toilet, Guestrooms, Fixture: Same as standard guestroom P1B Toilet Cimarron

Accessible Seat: Same as standard guestroom. Brevia
Fixture: Floor outlet, 55 mm (2⅛ inch) diameter fully

P1D Toilet, Suites, glazed trap, comfort height, one piece, water saver, Cimarron
Ritz-Carlton & VP tank type, vitreous china elongated bowl, chrome One Piece
finish trip level, with ergonomic matched seat and
cover, white.
Fixture: Vitreous china for deck mount fitting,
integral filler and overflow, flushing rim and spray, San Tropez
white
Bidet, Guestrooms & Suites
Fitting: Deck mounted, lever handle trim, pop-
up drain, polished chrome finish with traditional Kallista
handles.


Kohler
Lavatory
Fixture: 53 x 43 cm (21 x 17 inch) overall, Caxton
undercounter, vitreous china, front overflow, white.
Faucet: Proximity operation, battery powered (DC),
Lavatory, Public & single spout, cast brass body and spout, with 0.1 l/sec Hybrid Touchless
Lavatory, Public, Accessible (1.5 gpm) vandal resistant aerator, and thermostatic
mixing valve.
Drain: 30 mm (1¼ inch), 17 gage open grid strainer ***
and tailpiece, chrome plated.
Fixture: 53 x 36 cm (21 x 17 inch) overall,
undercounter, rectangular shape, vitreous china, front Ladena
Lavatory, Guestroom & overflow, white color.
Suite & Accessible Faucet: 13 cm (5¼ inch) spout; 20 to 40 cm (8 to
16 inch) centers, cast brass body and spout, with Kallista
aerator, pop-up drain.
Fixture: 51 x 46 cm (20 x 18 inch), wall hung with
10 cm (4 inch) centers, concealed arms, front Greenwich
overflow and backsplash, white. Provide with
adjustable, floor supported concealed arm carrier.
Lavatory, Back of House &
Lavatory, Back of House, Faucet: Proximity operation, battery powered (DC),
Accessible single spout, cast brass body and spout, with 0.1 l/sec Hybrid Touchless
(1.5 gpm) vandal resistant aerator, and thermostatic
mixing valve.
Drain: 30 mm (1¼ inch), 17 gage open grid strainer ***
and tailpiece, chrome plated.
Urinal
Urinal, Public & Wall hung white vitreous china with 0.5 liter Bardon
Urinal, Public, Accessible (0.125 gallon) per flush automatic flush valve. Tripoint Touchless
Urinal, Back of House &

Urinal, Back of House,
Wall hung white vitreous china with 0.5 liter Bardon
(0.125 gallon) per flush automatic flush valve. Tripoint Touchless
Accessible
Sink
Fixture: 61 x 51 cm (24 x 20 inch) enameled cast iron,
with wall hanger and stainless steel rim guard, white Bannon with
with 75 mm (3 inch) acid resistant enameled cast iron Trap
Sink, Service “P” trap with grid strainer.
Faucet: Wall mounted service faucet, vacuum
breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail Kinlock
hook, chrome plated.
Fixture: 61 x 61 x 25 cm (24 x 24 x 10 inch) molded
stone, 75 mm (3 inch) stainless steel combination Whitby
dome strainer and lint basket.
Sink, Mop (Floor Mounted)
Fitting: Wall mounted service faucet, vacuum
breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail Kinlock
hook, chrome plated.


Kohler
Fixture: 38 x 38 x 23 cm (15 x 15 x 9 inch) deep

undercounter, 18 gage stainless steel, fully under Vault
coated.
Sink, Bar (Guestroom) Fitting: 38 cm (15 inch) gooseneck spout, 5.70 l/

min (1.50 gpm) flow restrictor, aerator, lever handles, HiRise
polished chrome finish.
Strainer: Perforated grid chrome strainer with 302
DuoStrainer
stainless steel chrome plated tailpiece.
Fixture: 58 x 44 x 24 cm (23 x 17.5 x 9.5 inch) 18
Undertone
gauge stainless steel, undermount
Sink, Kitchen (Pantry)
Fitting: Single lever, high arch spout, 8.3 l/min
Forte
(2.20 gpm), aerator, polished chrome finish
Factory fabricated shower receptor / base with integral drain; see Module 7A
Shower
- Guest Bathroom
Shower Fixtures
Fixture / Enclosure: As accepted by MI ***
Shower Valve: Pressure balanced valve with
Rite Temp
screwdriver stops.
Shower Trim: vandal-proof, faceplate, with one piece
Kallista
arm and flange.
Shower, Guestrooms, Suites
and Fitness Center Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome
Kallista Hand
plated flexible hose, shower head, swivel connector, Shower
hook, supply ell, in-line vacuum breaker.
Shower Head: Multi-function, 0.19 l/s (2.5 gpm);
2-way diverter valve. Consult RCH for shower Kallista
criteria.
Rite Temp
screwdriver stops.
Shower Trim: Lever handle, vandal-proof, faceplate. Kallista
Shower, Accessible Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome

Guestrooms & plated flexible hose, shower head, swivel connector, Kallista Hand
Suites and Fitness Center 61 cm (24 inch) long slide bar, supply ell, in-line Shower
vacuum breaker.
Shower Head: Multi-function, 0.19 l/s (2.5 gpm);
2-way diverter valve. Consult RCH for shower Kallista
criteria.
Seat: As approved by MI ***


Kohler
Rite Temp
screwdriver stops.
Shower, Employee Shower Trim: Lever handle, vandal-proof, faceplate,
adjustable spray shower head, 0.19 l/s (2.5 gpm) flow
Coralais
restrictor, with one piece arm and flange, polished
chrome finish.
Rite Temp
screwdriver stops.
Shower Trim: Lever handle, vandal-proof, faceplate,
Coralais
Shower, Employee, polished chrome finish.
Accessible Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome
plated flexible hose, shower head, swivel connector,
Forte Hand shower
61 cm (24 inch) long slide bar, supply ell, in-line
vacuum breaker, chrome finish.
Seat: As approved by MI ***
Provide tubs with below floor rough-in drains so that the tub well and
Bathtubs .
bathroom floor are at the same elevation
Fixture: 168 x 81 x 42 cm (66 x 32 x 16 inch) deep,
recess bath, enameled cast iron, slip resistant surface, Maestro
white.
Valve: Pressure balanced valve with screwdriver
Rite Temp
stops, handle deck mount, vandal-proof faceplate, Kallista
diverter valve, tub filler spout.
Bathtub, Guestroom
Tub Waste and Overflow: Solid brass 1½ inch,
17 gage drain with tailpiece, lift and turn stopper, ***
chrome finish.
Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome
Kallista Hand
supply ell, in-line vacuum breaker.
recess bath enameled cast iron, slip resistant surface, Maestro
white.
Rite Temp
stops, lever handle deck mount, vandal-proof Kallista
faceplate, diverter valve, tub filler spout.
Bathtub, Accessible
Guestroom Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome
Kallista Hand
Tub Waste and Overflow: Solid brass 1½ inch,
17 gage trip lever drain with tailpiece, pop-up Clearflo
stopper, chrome finish.
Bathtub Seat: By Architect ***


Kohler
recess bath, enameled cast iron, slip resistant surface, Caribbean
white.
Rite Temp
stops, handle deck mount, vandal-proof faceplate, Kallista
diverter valve, tub filler spout.
Bathtub, Suite
Tub Waste and Overflow: Solid brass 40 mm
(1½ inch), 17 gage drain with tailpiece, lift and turn ***
stopper, chrome finish.
Hand Shower Assembly: 152 cm (60 inch) chrome
Kallista Hand
Sinks
*** Verify manufacturer and model with MI.

Table 2 - Plumbing Requirements

Module Space CW HW Gas Remarks
Provide the following fixtures, systems, devices and equipment:
Irrigation system and drainage for live plant areas.
Hose bibs at Porte Cochere area, entry and sidewalk for wash down.
1 Site / Building Exterior X Box hydrants 30 mm (1¼ inch) at 61 m (200 ft.) on center for parking lot,
and 30 mm (1¼ inch) box hydrant for feature water pool and fountain
wash down.
Entrance / Lobby X Irrigation system and drainage for live plant areas.
Public Toilets Floor drains under toilet partitions.
X X
Water hammer arrestors at flush valves.
2 Janitors Closet X X Service sink.
X
Business Center
Lounges X X X Irrigation system and drainage for live plant areas.
Exercise Room X
Steam Generator Room X Water connection and floor drain.
Hose Bibs:20 mm (¾ inch) at 23 m (75 ft.) on center for deck wash down.
4 Indoor Pool X X
Floor drains around pool deck and under toilet partitions in restrooms.
Sump pit, hose bib, floor drain, make-up water connection, and gas
Pool Equipment Room X X
connection for heaters.
Outdoor Recreation X Hose Bibs: 20 mm (¾ inch) at 61 m (200 ft.) on center for wash down.
Ice Machine X Water connection and floor drain with air gap.
7B Washing machines service sink, floor drain and wall box.
Housekeeping / Linen X X X
Glass washer make-up water and floor drain.
Guest Floor Lounge
7C X X Coffee station; sink; floor drain
Pantry
Admin. Offices X X Coffee Station; sink
Service Corridors X Ice Machine: Water connection and floor drain with air gap.
First Aid / Nurse X X Sink: Small for hand washing.
8 Employee Lockers X X Janitor’s Closet: Service sink.

Floor Drains: Locate under toilet partitions.
Employee Toilets X X Hose Bibb: 20 mm (¾ inch) under lavatories.
Water Hammer Arrestors: At flush valves.
Employee Dining X X X
Telephone Equip X X Eye Wash Station: Locate per governing authority.
Wall Hydrant: 20 mm (¾ inch) for wash down.
Receiving Dock X
9 Drains: Domed type in dock trench drain.
Wall Hydrant: 20 mm (¾ inch) hot and cold water.
Can Wash X X
Drains: Domed type in floor.
Heat Tracing: Insulate and heat trace condensate lines in freezers /
coolers.
Ice Machines: Water connection and floor drain with air gap.
10 Kitchens X X X
Gas Valve: Gas pressure regulating valve on incoming line.
Gas Shut-Off: Automatic gas solenoid valve with manual reset under
exhaust hood to shut-off gas to appliances in fire condition.
Water Hammer Arrestors: At quick closing water valves.
Floor Drains: Domed type in depressed areas at 3.1 m (10 ft.) on center.
11A Laundry X X X Washing Machines: 20 mm (¾ inch) hose bibb.
Dryers: Gas connection to dryers.
Folders: Compressed air.

15B.9 Building Commissioning

1. Efficiency: The primary goal of commissioning is to
produce a building with service systems that function,
in all respects, according to the design intent. Properly
commissioned systems function at maximum efficiency,
and minimize energy consumption and operating costs.
2. Water Supply: Adequate and timely water supply is a
critical component for guest satisfaction and is achieved
through the proper design, installation and commissioning
of building systems.
3. Maintenance: Maintaining adequate domestic water
and plumbing systems for staff and guests, produces
a high level of occupant satisfaction. To achieve this,
it is essential to implement a commissioning process
that tests, verifies, adjusts, calibrates and documents
the functional performance of the domestic water
and plumbing systems and equipment outlined in this
“As-Built” Documents and equipment and systems
warranties.
contractors) to independently implement and monitor the
C. Sign Oﬀ: MI Engineering does not provide final sign off on
<15A> and <15C> and coordinate requirements with this
Module.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
15C
Electrical Systems
15C - Electrical Systems THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
15C.1 General 1
15C.2 Power - Incoming Service 2
15C.3 Distribution 2
15C.4 Devices 4
15C.5 Emergency Electrical Systems 7
15C.6 Fire Alarm System 11
15C.7 Fire Command Room (Central Control Station) 11
15C.8 Lightning Protection 11
15C.9 Lighting 12
15C.10 Aircraft Warning Lights 19
15C.11 Table 3 - Lighting Criteria 19
15C.12 Building Commissioning 23

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Electrical
Electrical || January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Electrical Systems - 15C
Electrical Systems
15C.1 General
A. Design Criteria: This Module establishes minimum MI
requirements and is not intended to provide complete
design solutions to project specific situations.
MI Project Contact B. Codes & Standards:
Marriott International - “MI” - is the 1. Deviations: Submit in writing, proposed deviations
corporate entity that manages this from systems, equipment or manufacturer required by
these Standards and obtain MI Engineering acceptance.
project specific manager referenced For deviations that alter operating costs, submit a
by the term “MI” throughout this complete computer simulated life cycle cost analysis
Module. so that negative impacts are reflected in the operating
Pro-Forma.
2. Compliance: Comply with governing codes, and the
current editions of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 72, NFPA
101.
MI requirements that exceed or are more stringent
than governing laws, codes, regulations. If governing
requirements conflict with MI’s Design Standards
C. Design Considerations:
1. General: Provide an energy efficient electrical system
requiring minimum maintenance and a high level of
safety within budgeted costs.
2. Reliability: Provide a system design, equipment
selection, and a property operating environment that
permits quick and easy maintenance with little or no
down time and a high degree of reliability.
3. Equipment: Locate to provide a minimum impact to
architecture and interior finishes.
4. Interior: Locate equipment in an interior weather
protected space unless an exterior location is absolutely
necessary. Do not provide equipment designed for
interior use at exterior locations.
D. Fire Protection & Life Safety: See Module <14>.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Electrical 1

15C.2 Power - Incoming Service

A. Type: Provide electrical service underground from utility
company transformers and terminating in a secure, main
service switchboard located in the main electrical room with
access limited to authorized personnel.
B. Sizing: Compute service capacity in compliance with
governing standards.
C. Transformers: NEMA TP-1 high efficiency dry type. If oil
filled transformers are used, locate them in protected area
outside of building or in power company vaults.
15C.3 Distribution
A. General:
1. Throughout Building: Typically, with either bus duct
or cables to sub-distribution panels for lighting, power
outlets, appliance circuits and mechanical equipment.
2. Tower Distribution Riser: Typically, vertical to sub-
distribution panels located every floor.
B. Switchboards & Panels:
1. Main Switchboard: Provide breakers with single main
disconnect switch, GFPE (ground fault protection
equipment) and transient voltage surge suppression
(TVSS) protection.
2. Spares: Provide 15% spare capacity on switchboards.
3. Surge / Lightning Arrestors: On each service, provide
surge suppressors and lightning arrestors.
4. Sub-distribution Panelboards: Circuit breaker type with
thermal magnetic breakers or electronic trip breakers
(magnetic only breakers are not allowed). Provide
separate panels for light and power.
5. Panelboards: Where possible locate within 30 m (100 ft.)
of its loads, but not in pool equipment rooms. Do not
locate panelboards, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. in
public spaces.
6. Region Requirement: If required, locate guestroom load
centers as directed by MI, coordinated with the interior
design.
C. Shunt-Trip: See “Type 1 Grease Hoods” in this Module.
D. Feeders:
1. Conductors: Copper cable in cable trays or conduit.
Aluminum 1/0 gauge or larger for non-rotating
equipment. Place in conduit when installed in concrete
slabs and masonry walls.
2. Feeder Size: Comply with governing standards and
NEC.
2 Electrical | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

E. Branch Circuits:
1. Conductors: Copper
2. Loads: Calculate with maximum loading of conductors at
75% of connected or calculated load, whichever is greater.
3. Circuits: Provide circuits that serve only single
guestrooms and suites. Do not share circuits with
other guestrooms and suites. Serve typical guestrooms
with two 20 A circuits and one 20 A circuit for guest
bathroom.
a. Generally, provide horizontal circuiting from
panel boards.
b. Provide individual circuits for service appliances
and mechanical equipment, where required by the
load.
c. In suites and special rooms, circuit as required.
F. Wiring - General:
1. Within Building: Copper wiring. Feeders serving
non-rotating equipment greater than 1/0 gauge may be
aluminum.
2. Wiring Distribution: Four wire color coded grounded
system. Provide non-continuous grounded systems,
such as cable trays or conduits, with separate ground at
less than 25 Ohms to ground.
G. Rated Cable: Provide specified rated cable for Property
Based System (PBS) <13A>, Point of Sale System (P.O.S.)
<13A> and Audio/Video (A/V) System <13C>. Cable type
requirements (shielding, rating, and conduit enclosure) are
defined in Module <13> and subsequent Modules.
H. Computer Conduit Raceways: Provide 50 mm (2 inch) diameter
raceway (PVC, EMT or code approved protection material)
for run of computer grade conduit from P.O.S. units to
computer system room with easy sweep bends of 46 cm
(18 inch) radius minimum.
Install and support conduit on underside of slab or above
finished ceiling as appropriate.

15C.4 Devices
A. Power Outlets: Commercial grade rated in all areas. Provide
weatherproof device covers in exterior locations.
1. Public Spaces: 20 amp rated located at lamp locations
and for cleaning at 8 m (25 ft.) radius.
2. Guestrooms: Provide the following:
a. One GFI outlet at each vanity bowl.
b. One fully accessible outlet in entry for housekeep-
ing services.
c. One outlet for each appliance (coffee maker, re-
frigerator, etc.); certain appliances may require
separate circuits.
d. One outlet for each portable guestroom lamp.
e. At desk and bedside, provide sufficient outlet
quantities for guest use.
f. Provide power outlets for other electrical
accessories.
3. Guest Corridors: <7B> Maximum of three outlets per
circuit, located every 15 m (50 ft.) along corridor walls.
4. Administration Areas: <8A> Maximum of five outlets
per circuit, located at desks and work areas for electronic
equipment, convenience and lamps.
5. Food & Beverage Production Facilities: <10>
a. Banquet Service: <6> <10> At large meeting and
event areas serviced by mobile banquet cabinets,
provide single outlet on dedicated circuit on both
corridor walls, every 1.8 m (6 ft.), 1.2 m (4 ft.)
above finished floor, within 15 m (50 ft.) of service
entrances.
b. Mobile Banquet Cabinets: At kitchen staging
and holding areas, provide outlets at 1.8 m (6 ft.)
intervals 1.2 m (4 ft.) above floor or at ceilings.
c. Ceiling Outlets: Provide at island workstations,
banquet plating and holding areas.
d. Preparation Areas: Provide ample power outlets
on separate circuit.
e. Non-service Line Areas: Provide single outlet on
dedicated circuit every 3 m (10 ft.).
f. Voltages: Power voltages vary. Confirm voltages
available for project site and review with MI
Engineering for acceptance.
g. Electric Panels: Provide panels outside of main
kitchen areas.
h. Disconnects: Provide disconnects to avoid
interference with kitchen equipment locations and
not behind equipment below exhaust hoods.

i. Waterproof Wiring: Provide internally wired within

equipment or in conduit with appropriate controls and
safety features.
j. Conduit: Zinc coated (galvanized). Cover and
concealed exposed conduit in walls and ceilings.
6. Laundry: Provide the following:
a. Power Outlets: With polarized ground fault
interrupters (GFI), spaced liberally throughout spaces
and where appropriate.
• Provide power outlets on wall at the two sewing
stations and on wall at end of the Issue Counter for
a marking machine.
• Mount outlets on the flatwork ironer and at small
piece folder. Provide a junction box on ceiling
above the folder.
b. Flexible Connections: Connect high voltage electrical
to flatwork spreader / feeder, the flatwork folder and
small piece (towel) folder utilizing generous length of
flexible cord fitted with twist lock plug so equipment on
castors are movable for floor cleaning purposes without
disconnecting machines.
7. Mechanical Areas: Located within 8 m (25 ft.) of
mechanical equipment in mechanical rooms and on roofs.
8. Exterior of Building: GFI protected outlets, locate around
building for landscape trimming, generally in the vicinity of
exit doors at Porte Cochere and major landscape areas.
9. Live Entertainment Areas: Provide power at locations
programmed to accommodate live entertainment or public
events. Provide NEMA 3R, 60 amp, 3 phase and other
necessary 20 amp, convenience outlets.
10. Exterior Events: <6> Provide NEMA 3R, 60 amp, 3 phase
and other necessary 20 amp, convenience outlets.
11. Ballroom / Meeting Rooms: <6> Maximum of two outlets
per 20 amp circuit, located for convenience every 8 m (25 ft.)
along wall with one on each side of a door.
a. Provide 200 amp, 3 phase, disconnect with pin and
sleeve cable receptacle (company switch) for each
large ballroom section and one 60 amp, 3 phase outlet
for Ballroom salons.
b. Provide method of routing electrical distribution wiring,
from service corridor into ballroom sections, through
concealed audio / video <13C> and electrical connection
panels and in flush mount floor boxes.

Table 1 - Event Power Matrix

Space m2 Description
(sq. ft.) Voltages vary by country
< 74 & > 37 m 2 1PH outlets – 20A each, at 15 ft. intervals
(> 400 & < 800 1PH, 208V, 60A twist lock outlet located on the service corridor wall
sq. ft.)
1PH outlets - dedicated 20A each, at 4.5 m (15 ft.) intervals
> 74 m 2
(> 800 sq. ft.) 1 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlet located on the service corridor
wall
1 PH outlets - dedicated 20A each, at 4.5 m (15 ft.) intervals
> 139 m 2
(> 1500 sq. ft.) 2 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlets located on the service corridor
wall
> 465 m 2 Each Salon, 1 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlet located in the Salon
(> 5000 sq. ft.) on the back wall with decorative cover
1 - 3PH, 208V, 200A service disconnect with company switch located in
the service aisle with pass through for cables
1PH outlets - 20A located to match hang point grid above ceiling with
access
Each Salon, 1 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlet located in the Salon
on the back wall with decorative cover
1 - 3PH, 208V, 800A service disconnect located in the service aisle with
> 929 m 2 pass through for cables
(> 10,000 sq. ft.) 1PH, 208V, 30A and 2 each 1PH outlets - 20A each power outlets lo-
cated in floor boxes per 186 m 2 (2000 sq. ft.) (locations depend on shape
of room and booth configurations). Boxes include phone and Cat 5 cable.
Install two 60 x 60 x 60 cm (2 x 2 x 2 ft.) floor boxes centrally located
with four 7.5 cm (3 inch) conduits that run to the service aisle or adja-
cent electrical room to facilitate additional power runs, data / telecom
cable, water, sewer, compressed air and other appropriate utilities.
Coordinate location with MI Engineering.
> 1858 m 2 1PH outlets - dedicated 20A each, at 4.5 m (15 ft.) intervals
(> 20,000 sq. ft.)
1PH outlets - 20A located to match hang point grid at ceiling
Each Salon, 1 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlet located in the Salon
on the back wall with decorative cover
2 - 3PH, 208V, 1200A service disconnect located in the service aisle
with pass through for cables
> 1858 m 2 1 - 3PH, 208V, 30A and 2 each 1PH outlets - 20A each power outlet lo-
(> 20,000 sq. ft.) cated in floor boxes per 186 m (2000 sq. ft.) (locations depend on shape
2
of room and booth configurations). Boxes include phone and Cat 5 cable.
Install two 60 x 60 x 60 cm (2 x2 x2 ft.) floor boxes centrally located
with four 7.5 cm (3 inch) conduits that run to the service aisle or adja-
cent electrical room to facilitate additional power runs, data / telecom
cable, water, sewer, compressed air and other utilities. Coordinate loca-
tion with MI Engineering.
Prefunction
Space 1 - 3PH, 208V, 60A power lock outlet in central locations per 232 m 2
(2500 sq. ft.)
Outdoor Space 1 - 3PH, 60A power lock outlet and 2 - 20A outlets
> 74 m 2 Concealed
(> 800 sq. ft.)

B. GFI Outlets: Provide GFI protection as required by code and

at locations near water including, but not limited to:
• within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of sinks and lavatories
• guest bathrooms
• pool areas
• employee shower areas
• outlets for portable appliances in kitchen areas
• exterior locations
Provide GFI devices in color to match device plates.
C. Switches: Commercial grade rated. Provide rocker type
switches in guestrooms and where visible to guests.
D. Finishes & Colors:
1. Outlets & Switches: Provide in color to match device
plates selected by Interior Design.
2. Device Plates: Coordinate color and finish with Interior
Design including guestrooms <7A>, except provide
stainless steel plates (with ground) for kitchen <10>
outlets.
15C.5 Emergency Electrical Systems
A. Standards: NEC 70 / NFPA 70 and NFPA 110. <14>
B. General Requirements: Design and provide emergency
electrical systems for standby power to emergency power
and lighting.
1. Comply with applicable standards for design of
electrical circuits and equipment to automatically
supply, distribute and control electricity for lighting
and power when normal incoming power is interrupted.
2. Provide emergency “backup” operational power to
maintain property operation in the event of loss of
normal incoming power service.
3. Coordinate electrical service design with Module <14>
requirements and provide electrical power equipment
to meet the project design requirements for emergency
electrical systems.
C. Region Requirements: Prior to beginning design, obtain and
review with MI, a 2 year grid history showing number and
duration of power outages.
In geographical areas with electrical service reliability
issues, provide generators with the capacity to supply
100% of facility power requirements.

D. Standby Power Source / Generators: Provide one or more units as

follows:
1. Type: NFPA Type 10 diesel engine driven generator,
rated to restore power in 10 seconds to provide standby
and backup operational loads as determined by MI.
Provide with synchronization of automatic reset for main
disconnects and automatic transfer switches to activate
generator upon loss of normal incoming power service.
a. Power delays greater than 10 seconds are not
permitted.
b. Verify that location of generator exhaust fumes and
noise will not disrupt occupied areas, public areas
and guestrooms. Do not locate near building intakes.
2. Mounting: Comply with manufacturer’s mounting
requirements to eliminate vibration.
3. Access: Locate and secure to limit access to authorized
personnel only.
4. Cooling: Do not use condenser or domestic water systems.
5. Fuel Oil Storage: See Module <15A> for generator fuel oil
system requirements.
E. Emergency Electrical System Distribution: Provide standby power
for the following:
1. Standby Power Load: <14> Electrical systems required by
governing code and Module <14> fire protection and life
safety systems.
2. Backup Operational Power Load: Electrical systems for
security <16> and property operations.
3. Standby Power Source: Provide applicable power source
equipment and devices such as generator and battery pack
for standby and backup operational power where indicated
in Figure 1 and Table 2.
F. Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS): <13> <16> Sealed units,
usually supplied with or included for critical operations
systems dedicated to computer, communications, security, etc.
Provide electrical circuits and outlets for local connection of
UPS units.
G. Emergency Lighting: <14> Design and provide with a control
system having the capability to turn on selected lighting
to predetermined levels (without central or distributed
intelligence) for emergency egress within public spaces,
guestroom corridors, occupied areas, back-of-house, etc., and
in exit access corridors, stairs and at exterior of exit discharge.

Figure 1 - Emergency Electrical System – Single Line Diagram
NORMAL STANDBY BACKUP

INCOMING FIRE PROTECTION & OPERATIONAL
POWER LIFE SAFETY POWER
SYSTEMS POWER
MAIN
SWITCHBOARD
AUTOMATIC
TRANSFER
SWITCH
AUTOMATIC
TRANSFER
SWITCH
STANDBY
POWER
SOURCE
STANDBY BACKUP
POWER (OPERATIONAL)
POWER
LOAD LOAD

Table 2 - Emergency Electrical System Distribution

Standby Power to: <14> Backup Operational Power to:
Food Production & Kitchen:
Fire Pumps: Electric fire pump and jockey • Walk-in freezers and refrigerators <10>
pump • Kitchen power outlets
• Cooking equipment
Smoke Control System: (including panels),

exhaust fans, stairwell and elevator shaft
Building Automation System (BAS).
pressurization fans and Type 1 grease hoods
<10>
Elevators: Minimum one service and one Sewage plant, ejectors and sump pumps
guest elevator serving all floors with power
transferable to selected elevators
Elevator emergency return and firemen’s
service and elevator machine room air Central fuel fired heating plant
conditioning
Fire Alarm System <14> Domestic water plant
Systems & Work Stations:

• Telephone, IDF power, PBX, security, VSS,
computer (PMS / PBS, P.O.S., Call Accounting,
MARSHA Systems), PI, charging stations, etc.
• HVAC at Computer / Telecom Rooms
Lighting (operational emergency):

• Porte Cochere
• Front Desk
Lighting (emergency egress): • Public Toilets
• Telephone Equipment Room
• Exit signs (including from assembly spaces
• Mechanical, Electrical Rooms
and direction to exits) • Elevator Equipment Rooms
• Egress paths and stairwells (including • Near the fire alarm monitoring panels
ballrooms, meeting rooms, restaurants, • Fire pump / sprinkler riser room
public spaces, guestroom corridors, occupied • Employees lockers and toilets
spaces, back-of-house areas, etc.) • Spa / Exercise Room
• Exterior exit door discharge • Engineering / Maintenance Office
• Public stairs and steps • Administrative Offices
• Central Control Station <14> (Fire • PABX / PBX Room
Command Room) in high-rise building • Security Office
• Parking Structure
• Guestrooms: Power entry light from the • Pool lighting
corridor emergency circuit.
Critical Power: To permit basic property operations
during loss of power. Provide several power outlets
at the following:
• Porte Cochere
• Front Desk & outlets for equipment
• Employee Dining
• Engineering
• Housekeeping
• Security

15C.6 Fire Alarm System

A. Coordination: See Module <14> - Fire Protection and Life
Safety for applicable electrical criteria. Coordinate fire
suppression system design and function with Modules
<10>, <14>, <15A> <15B> and this Module.
B. Type: Fully point addressable intelligent system (all
alarm initiating and supervisory devices individually
addressable) or activation of zoned smoke control system
and for required reprogramming, with printer in the Central
Control Station <14> (Fire Command Room).
C. Type 1 - Grease Hoods: <10> Provide the fire suppression
system to perform the following actions when activated:
1. Alarm Signal: Send to fire alarm control panel (FACP).
15C.7 Fire Command Room (Central Control Station)
A. High-Rise Buildings: <14> Provide at a location approved by
the fire department containing the following:
1. Fire Alarm System: Fire alarm system control and
annunciation panels
2. Communications Service Panels and Controls: Fire
department 2 way telephone communications service
panels and controls
3. Voice Fire Alarm System: Panels and controls
4. Smoke Control: Smoke exhaust and stairwell pressur-
ization control panels and annunciators
5. Elevator Annunciators: Elevator floor location and
operation annunciators
6. Standby Generator Annunciator Panel: Indicators for
standby generator status
7. Stairway Door System: Controls for automatic stairway
door unlocking system
8. Fire Pump Indicators: Fire pump status indicators
9. Fire Department Phone: Telephone for fire department
use with controlled access to public telephone system
15C.8 Lightning Protection
A. Standard: Provide for total building protection and install in
compliance with UL (Master Label), Zurich and governing
codes.

15C.9 Lighting
A. Design Considerations:
1. Service and Access:
a. Locate lighting fixtures to enable reasonable access
for service and re-lamping.
b. Locate ground mounted exterior fixtures to en-
able reasonable access for service and re-lamping.
c. Locate master dimmer control in air conditioned,
protected, non-public areas.
2. Circuiting: Provide separate zones for wall washers,
down lights, emergency exit, and decorative fixtures.
3. Lighting Levels: Design lighting systems to provide
foot-candle (lux) levels in compliance with Table 3 -
Lighting Requirements at the end of this Module.
B. Types:
1. Public Spaces: Lighting in restaurant areas, guest
corridors, stairwells and public toilets is generally,
compact fluorescent downlights, wall sconces and
halogen decorative light fixtures.
2. Function Areas: See lighting fixture types below in this
Module for criteria.
3. Guestroom Lighting: 2700 degree Kelvin compact
fluorescent spiral type lamps with color rendering
index (CRI) of 85 and instant on, no flicker ballasts and
lamps. Downlights are CFL or LED.
4. Suite Lighting: Obtain MI review and acceptance.
5. Guestroom Bathroom Lighting: Damp location
rated downlights over tub and shower, CFL or LED
downlights over vanity sink, and paired wall sconces
flanking the vanity. If room size dictates, provide a
decorative downlight fixture at center of room. Provide
two level lighting control in the bathroom.
6. Back-of-House Lighting: Generally fluorescent lighting
is designed by the electrical engineer.
7. Food & Beverage: Provide the following:
a. Recessed mounted fixture and lens flush with
ceiling
b. Shatterproof sheaths
c. Fluorescent lamp (Back of House)
d. Removable, washable plastic lens
C. Function Areas - Lighting Fixture Types: The selection of the
appropriate combination of fixtures and controls for event
venues can assure that the events are supported with the
desired visual setting.

The following is a summary of the design issues and

generic types of lights that are provided in event spaces.
1. Design: Ideally, lighting designs and fixture selections
are managed by an experienced lighting consultant
or electrical engineer with extensive experience with
hospitality functions. However, event management
guidance on how areas function is an important design
element and cannot be ignored.
2. Multipurpose Design: When event areas are intended
to serve multiple purposes (Ballrooms used as
exhibit space, Exhibit Hall used for banquets, etc.) a
combination of lighting systems and controls may be
appropriate.
3. Lamp Selection: Many light fixtures offer the choice
of incandescent or fluorescent lamps. Incandescent
lamps are preferred for the quality of the light in
decorative fixtures. Fluorescent lamps are selected for
light quantity and energy efficiency. Generally, a good
lighting design is a compromise of types based on their
intended use.
4. Track Lighting: Provide at Ballroom subdivides to
increase flexibility in customizing lighting settings to
highlight specific parts of the room and head tables.
5. Separate Down Light Zones: A lighting zone is a group
of lights powered on one circuit. The number of zones
is dependent upon the number of different fixture types
and locations within a room.
a. Down light zone controls are used to prevent
excessive light spill onto projection screen or to
accent buffets.
b. While increasing flexibility, this option still re-
quires planning and identification of the most
common placement of screens and buffets.
c. This option may require adding a new control
zone to the room, and in pre-set systems, may re-
quire adding a zone to the control station.
6. Scenes. Typical meeting area control systems have four
scene presets, in addition to a work light (full on and
off). A scene is a combination of lighting groups that
create the lighting effect desired for functions such as
banquets, meetings, slide shows, etc. More scenes may
be necessary in larger Ballrooms or spaces that have
intense video or theatrical use.

Figure 2 - Boardroom Lighting - Typical Plan
Compact Fluorescent
/ LED Downlight Boardroom & Meeting Room
Lighting Controls
Fluorescent Cove
Wall Sconce 2 button wall

control
Chandelier 4 button wall
control
1 Lighting Cove
1 2 Service Corridor
D. Boardrooms & Meeting Rooms:

1. Compact fluorescent down lights, dimmed (and zoned).
2. LED or compact fluorescent wall sconces, dimmed.
3. Four scene plus on / off preset / control station with black-
out capability.
E. Prefunction:
1. Provide chandeliers, dimmed.
2. Wall sconces, dimmed.
3. Compact fluorescent / LED down lights, dimmed.
4. Cove lighting (fluorescent double staggered tube or LED),
dimmed.
F. Ballrooms:
1. Provide chandeliers, dimmed.
2. Wall sconces, dimmed.
3. Compact fluorescent / LED down lights, dimmed.
4. Cove lighting (fluorescent double staggered tube or LED),
dimmed.
5. Track lights for head table locations, dimmed.
a. Track Lighting Flexibility: Large Ballroom subdivides
have either 2 sets of track lighting to provide flexibility
in customizing lighting settings to highlight specific
parts of the room or “two-circuit” tracks to allow
flexibility in activating individual lights within a
track. Provide sufficient light heads to avoid damage
by excessive removal and installation.
b. Ballroom: Four scene (minimum) plus full on and off,
preset / control station, remote controlled with black-
out capability.
Revised: April 2009

Figure 3- Ballroom Lighting Control Locations - Example Diagram
Main dimmer control
Dimmer wall control
• Equip each subdivided space with fully dimmable

system.
• Locate recessed dimmer control station at public

entrance and service corridors.
• Zone the lighting so that head table locations are

individually controlled.
• Decorative chandeliers and sconces, cove light-

ing and track lighting are individually controlled
Figure 4 - Salon Lighting - Typical Plan
•High Wattage Multi Compact

Fluorescent
Compact Fluorescent
Fluorescent Cove
Wall Sconce
Chandelier
2 1 Lighting Cove
2 Track for Operable
Partition
Revised: April 2009

Table 3 - Lighting Control Design for Meeting Spaces

Functional Lighting Control Type Rationale
Area
Preset wall station controls In the Ballroom area, simple recall of preset scenes is
• Backlit and engraved
• 4 scene (min.) recall with raise, lower and off appropriate, when controls are properly labeled.
Infrared handheld control Handheld control empowers the clients to have full control of
• 4 scene (min.) recall with raise, lower and off their environment.
• Communicate to infrared ceiling sensors.
Partitioning capability using wall station or ceiling Partition controls allow the individual and combined rooms
mounted sensors. to function appropriately.
Override zone control from back of the house When A/V person is available, they may want to have the
In room programming jacks and handheld ability to alter scene or zone settings, or to look at the facility
Grand Ballroom programmer when processor based systems are used. remotely.
salons &
Jr. Ballroom When additional stage lighting is used in Ballroom for
specific events, the audio / visual technician requires the
salons DMX control capability by theatrical stage board for ability to patch architectural lighting to the stage board
all architectural lighting when required. for large events. When the stage board is disconnected,
architectural lighting returns to its last selected scene.
The locations of the head table and food displays and other
table presentations move from one event to the next.
Circuit and zone lighting in Ballroom areas to ac- Property requires the ability to turn individual light zones
commodate maximum flexibility of space. on and off in the appropriate parts of the Ballroom without
affecting the entire Ballroom.
Provide occupancy sensors to communicate directly with the
Occupancy sensors lighting control system to ensure that lights are turned off or
to a pre-programmed night light.
Wall box-mounted manual dimmers or include as a
defined area within the Ballroom dimming system. This area requires flexibility of lighting for multiple events
Provide astronomic time clock control for after hours and functions.
Prefunction light level settings.
Photo sensors Where daylight is present, integration with photo sensors

adjusts electronic light levels to save energy.
Multi-zone preset control requirements are similar to
Ballroom requirements. Meeting Rooms integration In the Ballroom area, simple recall of preset scenes is
is not required with the Ballroom, but is considered if appropriate, when controls are properly labeled.
it supports project cost savings.
Preset wall station controls Simple recall of preset scenes is appropriate, when controls are
• Backlit and engraved properly labeled.
• 4 scene (minimum) recall with raise, lower and off
Infrared handheld control Handheld control empowers clients with full control of their
• 4 scene (minimum) recall with raise, lower and off environment.
• Communicate to infrared ceiling sensors.
Meeting Rooms Partitioning capability using wall station or ceiling Partition controls allow the individual and combined rooms
mounted sensors. to function appropriately.
Circuit and zone lighting in Meeting Room areas to The locations of the head table can move from one event to
accommodate maximum flexibility of space. the next.
Provide occupancy sensors to communicate directly with
the lighting control system to ensure that lights are turned
off or to a pre-programmed night light setting when space is
Occupancy Sensors unoccupied.
Occupancy sensors are only operational in the late to morning
hours so there is no chance lights operate inappropriately
while the space is occupied by customers.
Amphitheater/ Preset wall station controls with ability to
High Tech communicate, as required, to shades, screens, System is simple to use for multiple, relatively untrained users.
Meeting Area projectors, and other equipment.

G. Lighting Controls & Switching:

1. Back-of-House:
a. Office: Locally switched
b. Corridors: Dual level switching
c. Occupancy Sensors: Provide in back-of-house offices
and storage rooms.
Light Switching: d. Dual Lamp Fluorescent Fixtures: Provide with built
Provide dimmer in occupancy sensors to cycle off one lamp.
switches on all e. Mechanical Rooms: Do not provide occupancy
guestroom lighting. sensors.
2. Public Toilets and Fitness Center: Keyed switch, local
3. Public Area: Dimmer controlled
4. Exterior, Site and Parking Lot: Photocell or timeclock.
Connect to Building Automation System (BAS).
5. Electric Rooms: Locate dimmer modules in electric rooms
with cooling.
H. Lighting Control Quality: Provide lighting control systems that
are safe, reliable, perform flawlessly and look good.
1. Safety: System conforms to codes and industry standards
(AIC & SCCR) and provides fail-safe operation.
2. Performance: System operates quietly and consistently
regardless of power input and lighting type variables.
3. Reliability: System operates without property maintenance
on a continuous 24 hour / 7 day a week schedule supported
by factory service and backup.
4. Aesthetics: Visible components are uniform in design,
color and finish with intuitive, backlit, engraved controls
and graphics.
5. Design Standards: Successful events require a high quality
lighting control system that is defined in this Design
Standard.
I. Energy Efficiency: Unnecessary energy consumption can erode
revenue, may be limited by governmental authorities and,
increasingly, is a social and marketing concern.
However, simplistic efforts to conserve energy, such as
reducing lamp wattage (quantity of light) or switching lamp
types (quality of light) may seriously degrade the quality of the
event environment.
Successful means to conserve energy without affecting the
quality of the event environment (or possibly improving it) are
as follows:
1. Photo sensors that reduce or eliminate artificial lighting
when daylight is available. Ideally, one time clock in the
Building Automation System (BAS) controls all zones
rather than multiple systems that are difficult to maintain.
2. Occupancy sensors and time clock integration that switch
lights off when not in use.

3. Control provides the appropriate level of zones, scenes and

dimming so only the lighting and energy required, is used.
4. Lamp types that are selected for high lumen output
(quantity) with minimum energy that maintain the correct
color of light (quality).
J. Energy Regulations & Incentive
The following references and authorities may either dictate,
encourage or provide reference standards to promote energy
conservation:
1. Regulations:
• Governing Codes. Many regions have energy codes
requiring efficient lighting and controls.
Codes are typically based on IECC model or ASHRAE /
IESNA 90.1 standard.
2. Energy Law:
a. ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1-2001 Energy Efficiency
Standard regulates the amount of power allocated to
lighting.
b. NECA / IESNA500 Series National Electrical
Installation Standards (NEIS)
3. Incentives:
a. AH & LA Good Earth Keeping Program: Supports
property operations in assessing current energy
performance, setting goals and tracking savings.
b. EPA’s Energy Star Program: Marriott, an Energy Star
partner since 2001, has embarked on an ambitious,
company wide mission to improve the environment
and control costs in partnership with its property
owners and franchisees.
• As part of the program, properties receive the com-
pany’s Energy Conservation Program Resource
Guide.
• Property engineers and general managers have
completed the company’s Energy Conservation
Program training.
c. Government Tax Breaks: Governments provide
funding in the form of tax deductions for installing
energy efficient commercial lighting systems.
4. LEED: Provides a national guideline for what constitutes
a green building. The following are various methods
available to acquire LEED points through lighting and
lighting controls:
• Dimming and switching
• Personal lighting controls
• Occupancy sensors
• Automated window treatments

15C.10 Aircraft Warning Lights

A. Standard: Comply with governing airport authority.
15C.11 Table 3 - Lighting Criteria
The legend and general notes are applicable to Table 3.
Legend Notations
S = Locally switched
ML = Multi-level
T = Timer (time clock, photocell, BAS)
OS = People sensor (do not control nightlights)
S2 = Two level switched
D = Dimmer controls
PS = Panelboard switched
Measure lighting levels 76 cm (30 inch) above finish floor.

Table 4 – Lighting Criteria

Min. Lux Lighting Type
Module Remarks: Provide the following
Space (FC) Switch LED/
No. equipment and fixtures:
Maintained Halogen Fluor
Generally, applies to walks, driveways, park-
ing lots, service areas, steps and ramps.
Site areas - general 11 (1) T Photocell and timeclock
Typically, HID light sources
Pathways 11 (1) T
Walkways 11 (1) T
Parking Lot 11 (1) T
1 Parking Structure 54 (5) T Vehicle traffic routes
Parking Structure - 11 (1) T Minimum – general areas
general
Landscaping 22 (2) T Protected by GFI. Photocell and timeclock
Flag Poles 54 (5) T Photocell and timeclock
Photocell and timeclock.
Building Exterior 215 (20) T Highlight building architectural features
Or Entry Canopy; photocell and timeclock
Porte Cochere 161 (15) T X Wall washing, sparkle or accent lighting.
Entry 161 (15) D X Same at Entry Canopy
4 scene preset remote dimmer with panel at
Entrance / Lobby 161 (15) D X Front Desk
Open Stair 310 (30) D X Grand stairway and other heavy use stairs
Front Desk 310 (30) D X
2 Luggage Room 269 (25) OS X
Public Toilets 215 (20) OS
Vanities 310 (30) OS X X with night lights
430 (40) Provide varied lighting levels appropriate to
Business Center S X
161 (15) task - work areas vs. lounge area.
Low voltage and adjustable accent lighting
Restaurants 215 (20) D X may be used. Four scene preset dimmer
Include control panel at Main Cashier.
Four scene preset dimmer. Include control
Lobby Lounge 161 (15) D X panel at Beverage Bar.
3
Low voltage and adjustable accent lighting
Specialty may be used.
215 (20) D X
Restaurants Four scene preset dimmer. Include control
panel at Maitre’d Stand.
Entertainment Lounge 215 (20) D Four scene preset dimmer with panel at Bar.
Exercise Room 538 (50) OS X

269/538 Provide individual dimmer controls in each
Spa D X
(25/50) Treatment Room.
comply with
4 Pool lamps on GFI and emergency backup
Pools governing S X power; see Module <4>.
code
Outdoor Recreation 22 (2) T Typically, HID light sources
Indoor Recreation varies OS X
Halogen task lighting at cashier and wall
display areas
5 Retail 377 (35) D X X Track lights (75 W) accent lighting on
dimmers
Cashier lighting on emergency backup power


Pre-function 161 (15) D X X
Coat Room 161 (15) OS X
Banquet Storage 161 (15) OS X Recessed fixtures
Low brightness fixtures with 45 degree angle

shielding
6 Halogen, metal halide and LED
Ballrooms 430 (40) D X X Each subdivided space, equip with fully
dimmable system.
Locate recessed dimmer control station at
public entrance and service doors.
Provide individually controlled head table
Meeting Rooms 430 (40) D X X light.
Decorative chandeliers and sconces,
incandescent, cold cathode and track lighting
Conference Rooms 430 (40) D X X are individually controlled.
See Module Lighting provided by table, floor and wall
Guestrooms S X X
<7A> fixture lamps.
Type as shown in <7A> in bath, toilet, over or
7A next to tub and shower. Based on room size,
Guestroom Bath 323 (30) S X X
provide decorative fixture at center of room or
cove lighting.
Bath Vanity 431 (40) S X X Halogen at vanity, side wall sconces
Halogen at guestroom door downlights and
Guest Corridors 108 (10) S X X
wall sconces
Guest Elevator Lobbies 108 (10) S X X Decorative halogen and wall sconces
Service Elevator 108 (10) PS X Single 32 W, 1.2 m (4 ft.); vandal proof tube
Lobbies
7B
Ice Dispenser 108 (10) PS X X Consistent with corridors and elevator lobbies
Housekeeping / Linen 377 (35) OS X Recessed fluorescent
Valet Closet 323 (30) S X
Exit Stairs 215 (20) PS X Single 32 W, 1.2 m (4 ft.) vandal proof tube
7C Guest Floor Lounge 161 (15) S X X
Primarily fluorescent lighting; design by

Admin Offices & Work 431 (40) OS X X design team engineer and coordinate with
Spaces
architect.
Design by design team engineer and coordi-
Circulation - Corridors 108 (10) PS X X
8 nate with architect.
Includes Employee lockers, toilet rooms
and cafeteria. Primarily fluorescent lighting
Employee Facilities 377 (35) OS X X
designed by design team engineer and
coordinated with architect.


Engineering - 377 (35) OS X X Same as above.
Maintenance
9 Over Benches 538 (50) OS X
Service Areas 431 (40) T X X
Receiving 431 (40) T
538 to 754
Food Production S X X
(50 to 75)
215 to 430
Dry Storage OS X
(20 to 40) See Module <10> for local, dual level
10
Refrigerated switching, lighting levels and motion sensors.
215 (20) OS X X
Storage
General Storage 215 (20) OS X
Primarily fluorescent lighting designed by

Laundry 538 (50) OS X X design team engineer and coordinated with
architect.
Washing 538 (50) OS X
Same for general lighting of Housekeeping
Housekeeping 538 (50) OS X X
and Laundry areas.
11 Ironing 538 (50) OS X X
Pressing 538 (50) OS X X
Inspection 538 (50) OS X X
Sewing 644 (60) OS X
Linen Storage 377 (35) OS X X
12 Elevators 108 (10) PS X
15 MEP – Utility Areas 377 (35) OS X X

For spaces not identified above, provide 377 lux (35 fc) minimum.

15C.12 Building Commissioning

1. Efficiency: The primary purpose of commissioning
is to produce a building with service systems that
function, in all respects, according to the design intent.
Properly commissioned systems function at maximum
efficiency, and minimize energy consumption and
operating costs.
2. Electric Service: Adequate and reliable electrical
service is a critical component for guest satisfaction
and is achieved through the proper design, installation
and commissioning of electrical systems.
3. Maintenance: Maintaining adequate electrical service
for staff and guests, produces a high level of occupant
satisfaction. To achieve this, it is essential to implement
a commissioning process that tests, verifies, adjusts,
calibrates and documents the functional performance
of electrical systems and equipment outlined in this
“As-Built” Documents and equipment and systems
warranties.
contractors) to independently implement and monitor the
C. Sign Off: MI Engineering does not provide final sign off on
<15A> and <15B> and coordinate requirements with this
Module.

Hotel Design
Standards
JANUARY 2013
Module
16
Loss Prevention
16 - Loss Prevention THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels
Contents
16.1 Overview 1
16.2 Risk Assessment 2
16.3 Access Control 6
16.4 Safety - Features & Design Elements 11
16.5 Security Facilities 19
16.6 Security Systems, Equipment & Design 21

Module Organization
WLYHRI5LW]&DUOWRQ
B Loss Prevention | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
THE RITZ-CARLTON® Hotels Loss Prevention - 16
Loss Prevention
16.1 Overview
A. Objective: Develop a Loss Prevention (safety and security)
Program that meets the needs of individual and diverse
properties. The reduction of losses by mitigation or
elimination of associated risk factors both enhances guest
and employee safety and enjoyment of the facility and
maximizes owner revenue retention.
B. Loss Prevention Review: A Loss Prevention (safety and security)
Program is developed by conducting a comprehensive Loss
Prevention (LP) Review that is initiated with a project
specific risk assessment that guides the implementation of
access control, safety, facilities and security measures.
Loss Prevention Program
This Module is organized by the following sections:
Loss Prevention • Risk Assessment process
Review • Access Control
• Safety - Features & Design Elements
• Security Facilities
Module 16
Minimum
Risk Assessment • Security Systems, Equipment & Design
t Threat Assessment
Requirements t Vulnerability Assessment C. Standards Application: Marriott International (MI), Global
t Access Control
t Safety Features
t Mitigation Measures Safety and Security Technical Services develops and
t Security Facilities manages the Loss Prevention Program for MI Brands.
t Security Systems This Module outlines processes and elements to develop
Functional
Requirements comprehensive safety and security measures:
1. MI Managed Properties: This Module defines the
process for MI. Deviations from MI’s LP Review
Governing process and minimum requirements of Module 16
t Laws
tCodes
Design require MI Global Safety and Security Technical
Review
tRegulations Services acceptance.
2. Franchise Properties: Since MI does not manage a
franchisee’s operations, the franchisee shall determine
Proj
o ect Design the most effective method to develop proper measures
and select systems that coincide with the operations.
This Module is only intended as a guide for franchisee’s
management to assist in developing proper measures
based on a franchisee’s unique methods of operations
such as, personnel, staffing levels, technology,
operational policies and experience.
D. Regulation Coordination: Comply with and integrate governing
laws, codes and regulations with the Loss Prevention
Program. If conflicts arise, notify MI’s Global Safety and
Security Technical Services for resolution. See Module
<GR1> section “Code & Regulation Compliance”.
Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Loss Prevention 1
16.2 Risk Assessment

A. Objective: The Risk Assessment forms the basis for
identifying the potential risk through analyzing the potential
threats and hazards and the vulnerabilities associated with
the property’s assets (buildings, guests, employees, assets)
and selecting the appropriate measures to mitigate or
eliminate the risk.
B. Risk Assessment: Includes issues such as the following:
1. Access control to the grounds, parking facility, recreation
facilities, buildings, public space, guestrooms, back of
house space, etc.
2. Access control of utilities, data center, roof and exit
stairs
3. Location of air intakes
4. Site parking and facilities lighting
5. Potential clientele for example; political figures,
controversial groups
6. Proximity and association to high risk enterprises, for
example; embassy, government buildings
7. Risks associated with crime and terrorism
8. Changes in elevations resulting in fall hazards
C. Functional Requirements: A report summarizes the findings
of the Risk Assessment. The Functional Requirements
report states the safety and security objectives required to
reasonably mitigate or eliminate the risk associated with
the property.
D. Design Integration: Design and implement safety and
security measures that incorporate requirements of Module
<16> and fulfill the safety and security objectives of the
Functional Requirements.
1. Design Review: This process reviews the submittals
listed below (section 16.2,D.2), specific design
modifications, equipment and systems proposed to
comply with the minimum requirements of Module
<16> and the functional requirements. <GR>
a. MI Managed Properties: MI Global Safety and
Security Technical Services conducts this review
and acceptance, or change, as required.
b. Franchise Properties: (see section 16.1,C.2
“Franchise Properties” above) the franchisee is
responsible for conducting an LP Design Review.
2. Submittals: At a minimum, provide the following data
during the design and construction process:
2 Loss Prevention | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.
a. Intrusion Detection Alarm System: Locate equip-

ment on drawings and show in a matrix format
and indicate if alarm device is integrated with the
VSS.
b. Video Surveillance System (VSS): Locate equip-
ment on drawings, provide a riser diagram and
show in a matrix format to include a brief ex-
planation for each surveillance camera function
(for example; identify persons exiting door # 103;
identify suspicious activity within porte cochere).
c. Communication Systems: Two-way radios, inter-
com, inspection tour recording.
d. Access Control Features: For example; electronic
locks, vehicle barriers.
e. Access Control Systems: Indicate locations of
electronic locks, vehicle barriers, personnel
screening locations with equipment.
f. Blast Mitigation: If required, indicate locations of
blast mitigation features for example; glass film,
reinforced columns, walls, blast wall.
g. Manufacturer’s Drawings: Submit cut sheets and
product technical data.
h. Security Office Design: Submit floor plan.
i. Shipping, Receiving & Storage Areas: Submit
floor plans.
E. High Level Threat Condition: Threat assessments may indicate
a property is within an area that has a moderate to high
level of risk of terrorist activity.
1. Measures: Within these areas, measures may be
implemented to mitigate potential acts against the
property. Types of measures vary with the type of
potential threat.
2. Considerations: Mitigation measures may include the
following:
a. Building Setback: Provide separation, 30 m
(100 ft.) or more preferred, between the building
and vehicle access.
b. Stationary Barriers: Natural or man made barriers
designed to prevent unauthorized vehicles from
entering the building setback area.
c. Vehicle Checkpoint: Provide devices to control
access and provide the opportunity to screen
vehicles for explosives when vehicles enter and
exit the building setback area at guest and service
entries.
Provide the following checkpoint devices:

• Operable barriers (designed to physically stop
large moving vehicles)
• Video Surveillance Systems (VSS)
• Telephone
• PMS / LAN connection
d. Pedestrian Checkpoints: Provide to screen
personnel and parcels for weapons and explosives
at guest and employee entrances.
• Metal detectors
• X-ray machine and explosive detectors
• Video Surveillance System (VSS)
• Telephone
• PMS / LAN connection
e. Collapse Mitigation: Building design to mitigate
progressive structure collapse due to explosions.
f. Utility Safeguards: Design facilities to comply
with seismic standards that safeguard primary
utilities (natural gas, fire protection water, electric,
etc.) in the event of large explosions.
g. Blast Fragment Mitigation: Design building com-
ponents (glass, walls, column, etc.) to mitigate the
possibility of an explosion creating projectiles of
building components.
h. Video Surveillance System (VSS): Provide exte-
rior pan-tilt-zoon (PTZ) cameras to identify sus-
picious activity and terrorist surveillance. Provide
fixed cameras in all elevators <12>.
F. High Level Threat Condition “Red”: When the Risk Assessment
indicates the property is in an area of high threat level (known
as threat condition “Red”) in addition to incorporating
applicable measures listed above for moderate to high level
threat conditions, the following are required for properties
located in threat condition “Red” areas.
1. Inspection Points: Provide appropriate space, equipment
and stand-off distance for inspection for personnel,
vehicles and materials entering the property as follows:
a. People: Prior to entering the building, provide
walk through metal detectors at inspection points
to screen guests, patrons, vendors (their employees
and business associates) and property employees.
b. Materials: Provide accepted x-ray machines to
screen materials entering the premises, including
guest luggage, personal belongings and property
supplies.
c. Vehicles & Receiving Area Screening: Provide

sniffing dogs or devices equivalent or better than
General Electric (GE) Safran “Hardened Mobil
Trace” detectors -
• at vehicle inspection points and -
• to screen materials and parcels at receiving area
2. Dog Kennel: If sniffing dogs are employed, either by
property management or a service contractor, provide
facilities to humanely accommodate dogs on property,
away from guest view.
a. Planning Criteria: Provide each vehicle entrance with
dogs and handlers depending on traffic conditions.
• Plan for approximately 2 dogs per shift at each
vehicle entrance.
• Shift duration is determined by frequency of
traffic. During high peak traffic a shift may be 2
to 3 hours. In areas with high heat and humidity,
shifts are shorter.
b. Working Area: Provide the following for dogs on
duty:
• Shade and protection from weather conditions
• Potable water
c. Kennel Location: Near Security Office or BOH area.
• Do not locate near guest areas.
• Provide shade and protection from extreme tem-
peratures and weather conditions.
• Provide acoustical separation from adjacent rooms
d. Kennel:
• Enclosures: Provide one cage per dog.
• Cage Size: 120 W x 300 D x 150 cm (4 W x 10 D
x 5 ft) high
• Provide an area for exercise when dogs are not
working.
• Provide facilities for preparing food and water.
• Provide handlers with access to lounge and bath-
room facilities.
e. Kennel Features:
• VSS: Provide to mitigate tampering with dogs.
• Ventilation: Avoid exhaust or other fumes in the
kennel areas.
• Floor: Hard surface or wood floor with drains and
hose bib for sanitation. Avoid glazed floor tiles.
• Potable Water: Provide access to water 24 hours a
day.
• Storage: Provide for food, bedding, cleaning and
training supplies.
• Lighting: Well lit kennel and working areas.
• First Aid Kit

• Air Conditioning: Consider in high heat and
humid regions.
• Dog Pool: Consider in high heat and humid
regions.
3. Vehicle Barriers: Provide accepted hydraulic or electric
vehicle barriers at vehicle entry and exit inspection
points providing there is a sufficient stand-off distance
between the property building and vehicle inspection
point.
4. Blast Mitigation: Provide accepted measures on glass
walls and windows at public areas to mitigate the ability
of an explosion to propel glass projectiles.
5. Video Surveillance Systems (VSS): Provide cameras at
the following locations:
a. Elevators (Lifts): Install in passenger and service
elevator cabs to identify occupants and the floor
they entered and exited.
b. Inspection Points: Locate at each inspection point
to observe inspection activity and to identify per-
sons entering.
6. Elevators: <12> Provide programmable, key card
controlled access at each guest floor.
16.3 Access Control
A. Application: Access Control provides selective limits and
constraints on the property, facilities and individual rooms.
1. Methods: Access is typically controlled or monitored
with the aid of a physical constraint or equipment such
as a storage cabinet lock, an electronic door lock, VSS
or a door vision panel.
a. Receiving areas and lobbies are examples of areas
with monitored access.
b. Guestrooms and equipment storage rooms are ex-
amples of access controlled by equipment.
2. Location: The Security Office is the primary location
for managing access control and security systems.
The telephone operators or Call Center may serve as a
secondary monitoring location.
3. Site & Building Access: Provide site access controls on
the property and within the property buildings.
B. Gatehouse: <1> If required by the Project Facilities Program
or Risk Assessment Functional Requirements (may include,
residential and community facilities), provide a property
entrance gatehouse to control ingress and egress.
1. Access Control Points: Integrate with video surveillance

camera, where applicable, and provide the access control
software.
2. Access Control Alarm: Activate video surveillance camera
for ease of monitoring.
C. Parking Structures: <1> Provide facilities, measures and
access controls based on the Risk Assessment Functional
Requirements.
D. Pools & Recreational Areas: <4> To mitigate access by
unauthorized persons, provide controlled access at the
perimeter of swimming pool, and whirl pool deck areas and
recreation areas. To avoid access conflicts, avoid means of
egress paths from the building to the exterior through the pool
area.
E. Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning (HVAC): <15A> Locate
outside air intakes in areas that mitigate the possibility of
contamination.
F. Utilities: Secure and control access for site utilities including
but not limited to the following:
• Water
• Gas
• Electric
• Telephone
• Generators
G. Vehicles: Based on the Risk Assessment, evaluate the need for
vehicle standoff or checkpoints.
H. Electronic Lock System: Provide an electronic lock system per the
following:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide system from one of the
following:
• Kaba (Saflok / Ilco)
• ASSA ABLOY Hospitality (VingCard)
• ONITY - United Technologies Corporation
2. Lock Technology:
Standard: RFID (radio-frequency identification); prox-
• Preferred:
imity activated providing operational benefits.
• Standard: Multi-technology (magnetic stripe card and
smart card).
3. System Components, Devices & Locations:
a. Entry Locks: At Guestroom entries, guest facili-
ties and back of house doors as scheduled below for
Electronic Lock System.
b. Mini-terminal, Room Controller: One per the
following:
• Front Desk, Check-in Station
• Concierge Desk
• Guest Floor Lounge

• Front Office at Rooms Control
• Security Office
c. Card Encoders: At each mini-terminal plus system
PC.
d. System PC Control: Computer Room. <13>
e. Card Readers: At P.O.S. stations.
f. Cabling: Install a cable from the system PC to the
wall mounted electronic card reader outside the em-
ployee entrance door.
4. Guestroom Entry Locks: Review locking schemes with MI
and the interface with the PMS <13A>. Locks consists of
the following:
• Stand-alone battery operated ANSI standard mortise
• Automatic Dead Bolt (ADB)
• 2.5 cm (1 inch) dead bolt length
• 1.9 cm (¾ inch) latch length
• Accessible type lever handles
• Faceplate and trim
• No exposed fasteners
• Electronic operated lock with audit trail and minimum
of 500 recalls
• No master hard key cylinder
5. Utility Entry Locks: Provide for Public Spaces and BOH
doors having similar features as the guestroom entry locks
excluding the automatic dead bolt.
6. Remote Access Readers (RAR): Provide RARs at locations
where locks cannot mount on door or where fail-safe
passage (emergency ingress) is required:
a. Access Devices:
• Access Reader: Mounted on adjacent wall.
• Power Supply (Overhead): Design for specified
door latch.
• Electric Strike: Design for specified door.
• Electronic Locks: Design for specified door.
• Magnetic Lock: Design for specified door.
• Motion Detector: Design for specified doors with
magnetic locks.
• Panic Exit Device, Electrified Mechanical: Design
for specified door.
• Fire Alarm Signal: Route to specified door.
• Supplemental Equipment: As required by system
design or regional conditions.
b. Locations: For RAR doors and as dictated by individual
property requirements:
• Fitness Center (where utility locks are not provided)
• Swimming Pool
•Remote guest entrances

•Guest Floor Lounge
•Business Center (where utility locks are not provided)
•Employee entrance (where utility locks are not
provided)
• Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms (where utility locks
are not provided)
7. Elevator Control Unit (ECU): <12> Provide at passenger and
service elevators.
8. Electronic Lock System - Locations: Provide at the following
locations:
Parking Structure Vestibule - type per LP Review <1>
Luggage Room <2>
Fitness Center Reception Area <4>
Banquet Beverage Storage <6>
Ballroom and Meeting Rooms - per LP Review <6>
A / V Storage <6>
Banquet Storage <6>
Guestrooms & Suites <7A>
Suite Pantry <7A>
Guestroom corridor door entering service elevator area <7B>
Guest floor linen storage room <7B>
Guest floor linen chute room <7B>
Roof Access enclosure <7B>
Guest Safe Deposit Room <8>
Counting Room <8>
Executive Offices staff entry <8>
Front Office Support accessed from the front desk area -
<8>
electronic access or push-button combination door lock
Nurse – First Aid / Exam Room <8>
Contract Service Storage (out sourced contractor) <9>
Ancillary Receiving Storage <9>
Guest Package Storage <9>
Maintenance Shop <9>
Liquor Storage <10>
Dry Storage <10>
Bulk Refrigerated Storage if applicable <10>
Silver Storage <10>
Housekeeping / Linen Bulk Storage <11>
Guest Floor Lounge <12>
Computer Room <13A>
Telecom Equipment <13B>
MATV System Room <13C>
Sound System Equipment Room <13C>
I. Other Lockable & Secure Spaces: Provide controlled access to the

following:
Ballroom and Meeting Rooms - per LP Review <6>
Guestroom Balcony / Patio & Terrace Doors - primary and
<7A>
secondary lock
Guest Safe Deposit Viewing Room door with remote door release <8A>
Receiving Area - provide doors / gates to secure from pedestrian
<9>
and vehicular access
Food Production Facilities / Kitchens <10>
Service Bars <10>
Storage Cages <10>
Exterior Doors - securable, latching hardware, NFPA approved
<14>
for that application.
J. Door Vision Panels & Viewports: Provide enclosed areas with
visual access at doors for the following locations:
Restaurant Service Entrance <3>
Food Production Storage (Cold Room) Walk-In-Unit <3>
Ballroom <6>
Guestroom; viewports with privacy cover <7A>
Guestroom floor Ice Dispensing and Vending <7B>
Guest Laundry <7B>
Cashier’s Area <8>
Counting Room <8>
Guest Safe Deposit Room <8>
K. Elevators: <7B> <12> Comply with the following:
1. Emergency Medical Evacuation: Size elevator cab and door
openings to accommodate stretcher movement from each
floor. See governing code for stretcher requirements.
2. Mixed-Use Projects: Do not share guestroom floor elevators
with other building occupancies.
3. Parking: Passenger elevators serving parking structures are
not to access Guestroom floors.
16.4 Safety - Features & Design Elements

A. Loss Prevention & Safety Information: Provide safety
information signage at the following locations and at areas
identified by the Risk Assessment Functional Requirements.
See signage and graphics in Module <GR2>
• Fitness Center
• Swimming Pools
• Sauna
• Steam Room
• Whirl Pools
• Guestrooms
• Guestroom Balconies
• Outdoor Recreation Facilities
1. Parking Structures: <GR2> <1>
a. Pedestrian: Coordinate vehicle signage with
pedestrian and overall project signage planning
requirements.
b. Low Clearance: Provide signs to warn drivers of
low clearance areas.
2. Evacuation Plan: Provide guestroom evacuation plan
with American Hotel Lodging Safety Tips signage on
room side of entry door. <GR2> <7A> <14>
3. Innkeeper’s Statute: Provide governing authority’s
innkeeper’s statute on room side of entry door.
B. Slip Resistance: Provide the following minimum static
coefficient of friction for slip resistant walking surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: 0.6 wet or dry
2. Ramps: 0.8 wet or dry
3. Parking Structure Ramps: <1> 0.8 wet or dry, as
appropriate to the slope, climate and function, and as
required by governing codes
4. Stair & Step Treads: 0.6 wet or dry
C. Change in Elevation: Comply with accessibility design
requirements, regulations, governing codes and the following
for stairs, steps, ramps, guard rails, handrails, etc.
1. Exit Stairs: Comply with Module <14> Fire Protection
& Life Safety Design Standards.
2. Exterior Stairs: <1> If stairs are required at walkways,
provide a minimum of three risers.
3. Steps & Stairs: Make steps and stairs apparent and easy
to use with the appropriate application of the following
elements:
a. Steps: Avoid one and two riser stairs - use ramps or
flight of stairs with three risers minimum.
b. Tread Depth: 28 cm (11 inch) minimum.
c. Slip Resistance: Provide slip resistant step and

stair treads; see criteria above.
d. Nosings: Identify tread edge for full width of stair
tread.
e. Riser Height: 10 cm (4 inch) minimum and 17.8 cm
(7 inch) maximum.
f. Contrast: Change floor color or materials to identify
stair location.
g. Headroom: 2.03 m (6′-8″) minimum.
h. Handrails: At a minimum, provide graspable
shaped handrails at both sides of stairs. Design
and fasten to resist a minimum force of 0.73 kN/m
(50 lbs./lf) and a single concentrated force of
0.89 kN (200 lbs.) applied in any direction.
i. Guard & Rail Assembly: Protect open areas at
stairs and stair runs with guard and rail assembly;
see design criteria below.
j. Lighting: Provide general illumination to identify
stairs.
k. Stair Lights: Provide step lights or tread edge lights
(if appropriate).
4. Guard & Rail Assembly: Provide guard and rail
assembly protection at the following areas:
a. Balconies: <7A> At open sides of balconies
b. Stairs: See “Steps & Stairs above.
c. Open Floors / Walkways: At open area level changes
to prevent a person from accidentally stepping or
walking off the upper floor.
d. Site / Parking / Retaining Walls: In areas accessible
to the public, provide guard and rail assemblies on
open sides where the level exceeds 76 cm (30 inch);
integrate with landscaping.
e. Design Criteria: Provide for the following:
• Height: 107 cm (42 inch).
• Openings: Required to restrict the passage of a
10 cm (4 inch) diameter ball.
• Bottom Rail: 5 cm (2 inch) maximum above floor.
• Design to restrict climbing.
• Design and fasten to resist a minimum force
of 0.73 kN/m (50 lbs./lf) and a single concen-
trated force of 0.89 kN (200 lbs.) applied in any
direction.
• Design intermediate rails and panels to resist a
horizontal load of 0.22 kN (50 lbs.) per 0.093 m2
(1 sq. ft.).
5. Ramps: Provide where required by governing code and

accessibility regulations.
a. Handrails: <2> If slopes are steeper than 1:20, provide
graspable shaped handrails. Use design criteria as
required for stairs above.
b. Rise: Do not exceed 77 cm (30 inch).
c. Exterior Ramps: <1> When changes in elevation
are required at walkways, accommodate whenever
possible by ramps with slopes sufficiently shallow so
that handrails are not necessary.
d. Interior Ramps: <2> Maximum slope is 1:12 or 8%.
e. Slip Resistance: Provide slip resistant ramps; see
criteria above.
D. Walkway, Doorway & Circulation Widths: Design the following
features to allow easy access for people and services.
1. Corridors & Aisles: <7> Generally guest area aisles and
corridors require a minimum width of 1.5 m (5 ft.).
a. BOH Areas: <8> <9> <10> <11> Back-of-House
personnel service corridors are typically larger
requiring 2 m (6.5 ft.) minimum for circulation with
paths capable of accommodating pallet size deliveries.
b. Banquet Service Corridors: <6> <8> Provide mini-
mum of 3 m (10 ft.) clear width.
2. Door Widths: Provide door sizes with minimum widths as
follows:
a. Personnel Circulation: 0.91 m (3 ft.)
b. BOH Service Circulation: 1.07 m (3.5 ft.) for moving
materials, equipment, housekeeping carts and laundry
carts.
c. Equipment Movement: 0.91 m (3 ft.) each door of door
pairs at locations requiring equipment movement for
Queen Marys, hot boxes, boiler equipment, etc.
d. F&B Refrigerated & Frozen Unit Storage: <10> Door
pairs to accommodate pallet width.
3. Pool Decks & Terraces: <4>
a. Paths to Pool: 1.5 m (5 ft.) wide
b. Rescue Access: Deck width not less than 1.22 m (4 ft.)
at entire perimeter.
c. Whirl Pools: Separate from swimming pool mini-
mum width of 1.22 m (4 ft.).
4. Parking Sidewalks: <1> Provide 1.5 m (5 ft.) minimum
width sidewalks for primary circulation routes, and 1.22 m
(4 ft.) minimum width for secondary routes.
5. Traffic Circulation Features: <1> Provide proposed

property traffic and parking analysis for MI’s acceptance.
a. Sizes / Widths: Provide 2-way circulation with 90 degree
parking in the following minimum widths:
Single Lane Driveways 3.6 m (12 ft.)
Two-Way Drives 7.0 m (24 ft.)
Curb-to-Curb 19.5 m (64 ft.)
Wall-to-Wall 19.5 m (64 ft.)
b. Service / Delivery Entrance: Provide controlled ser-
vice access designed to minimize vehicular conflict
with pedestrians.
E. Bathrooms: Provide slip resistant bathroom floors and bathing
facilities.
1. Bathroom Floors: Minimum of 0.6 (wet / dry) static
coefficient of friction.
2. Bathing Facilities: Comply with ASTM F462 slip resistance,
static coefficient of friction standard for bathtubs, shower
floors and receptors.
F. Grab Bars: In guest bathrooms <7>, to mitigate slip and falls in
bathtubs, mount a 60 cm (24 inch) grab bar at bathtub “wet
wall”. Set vertically at 107 cm (42 inch) AFF to center of
grab bar and securely fasten to withstand minimum of 113 kg
(250 lbs.) force in any direction.
G. Safety Glass & Glazing: See Module <GR> for general glass and
glazing applications and other Modules where designs and
assemblies include glass and glazing. Provide Safety Glass &
Glazing in compliance with the U.S. Consumer Product Safety
Commission (CPSC) and governing codes at the following
locations:
1. Human Impact: Provide tempered or laminated safety glass
at locations subject to human impact. Examples include:
• Doors and sidelights
• Full height windows (without guard rails or curbs)
• Balcony and patio doors and windows
• Shower enclosures and glass doors
• Bathtub surround and screens
• Room dividers and doors
• Mirrors (safety backing)
2. Skylights: In skylight and overhead assemblies above
occupied spaces, provide laminated glass. If tempered
glass, provide screening below skylight to prevent glass
from falling on occupied areas.
3. Reference: U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission,
Title 16 - Commercial Practices, Chapter II - Consumer
Product Safety Commission, Part 1201 - Safety Standard
for Architectural Glazing Materials.
H. Operable Windows: Limit window operation to 10 cm

(4 inch) maximum opening with manufacturer’s restrictive
safety stop integrated with the window fabrication (unless
prohibited by code). Provide with manufacturer’s “key” for
maintenance operation.
I. Emergency Response: Provide the following system devices
and equipment to alert occupants and employees to an
emergency condition and allows them to mitigate the
situation.
1. Shut Off: <4> Provide shut off devices in the following
locations:
a. Steam & Sauna Rooms: Provide high temperature
shut off device in steam rooms and saunas.
b. Whirl Pool: Provide emergency stop button to
shut off whirl pool jets and pump. Locate control
adjacent to 15 minute timer outside of reach from
persons in the pool.
2. Eye Wash Stations: <15B> Connect units to tepid
water pipe and drain systems. Reservoir types are not
allowed. Install permanent units where chemicals are
mixed, dispensed and used in concentrated form at the
following locations:
• Swimming / Whirl Pool Equipment Room <4>
• Maintenance Shop <9>
• Laundry Facilities <11>
• Housekeeping Chemical Station <11>
• Commercial Kitchen Warewashing <15B>
3. House Telephones: Provide telephones for guests and
employees per Administrative Telephone Guidelines
<13B>including the following locations:
• Lobby Area
• Fitness Center
• Swimming Pool
• Guest Laundry
• Receiving Area
• Remote outdoor recreation facilities
4. Emergency Electrical Systems: <15C> Provide
emergency power for standby and backup electric
power loads.
a. Standby Power: <14> Maintains standby power for
required Fire Protection and Life Safety systems.
b. Backup Power: Maintains backup power for prop-
erty Operations and Security per project and LP
requirements.
Figure 1 - Fire Pit (Outdoor) Example Diagram
Flame Circumference
24” Min.
Stones, Loose
Laid Fill Between
Ledge & Flame
Notice
Do Not Leave
Do Not Leave
Do Not Leave
Unattended
Unattended
Children
Children
Notice
Notice
Children
Unattended
O CY
UT GE E
SH ER TIC
N
FF
EM NO
NOTICE
12” 9” EMERGENCY
Max. Max. SHUT OFF
Gas Line
50,000 BTU
Emergency
Maximum Flame
Shut Off Switch
Gas fuel
3” Min. from
central gas
24” Min.
fuel system
Locate gas valve and ignition

switch behind a lockable Pull Station or
door panel Mushroom Style
Push Button
J. Water Safeguards: Design water features and facilities to ensure

water quality, and avoid splashing and spillage issues. Employ a
consultant familiar with the proposed water features and facility
designs.
1. Decorative Fountains & Ponds: <2> Design with sufficient
horizontal dimension to prevent water splashing on adjacent
walkways.
2. Swimming Pool / Whirl Pool: <4> Design and construct pool
details, outlets, pumps and equipment to prohibit hazards that
cause tripping, slipping, or suction entrapment of hair and
people.
a. Filtration: Provide separate systems for the pool, whirl
pool and water features.
b. Pool Suction Outlets: To avoid entrapping people in
pool suction outlets, comply with the provisions of the
governing authority and the U.S. “Virginia Graeme Baker
Pool and Spa Safety Act” that include features such as:
• Outlets Covers (grates): Provide with anti-entrapment
devices or systems.
• Suction Outlets: Two outlets located at least 92 cm
(3 ft.) apart or an unblockable outlet.
• Safety Vacuum Release System (SVRS): SVRS or
other automatic pump shut off system.
c. Rescue Assistance: Provide a minimum of 1.22 m (4 ft.)
deck area at the perimeter of swimming and whirl pools.
3. Steam Room: <4> Position steam nozzle to avoid contact burns
to occupants.
K. Open Flame Features (Outdoor): To mitigate potential risks associated
with open flame features (fire pits, bowls, features, etc.), incorporate
the following safeguards.
• Pipe the feature’s gas fuel from the property’s central gas fuel
system.
• For outdoor use only - UL approved components.
• 50,000 BTU maximum flame.
• Gas valve and ignition switch behind lockable panel adjacent to
and within line of sight of the open flame.
• Emergency shut off, readily visible and accessible.
• Automatic gas shut off, when flame is extinguished.
• Design with stormwater drain.
• No structure, coverings or decorative elements above the area
defined by a 3 m (10 ft.) radius from the center of the open flame.
• Safety signage and graphics.
• Approval of fire and building agency having jurisdiction.
L. Fireplaces: Provide the following safeguards at fireplace locations:

1. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detector: Locate detector in room
with fireplace including a sounder, connected to the fire
alarm control panel; see Module <14>. Exceptions; all
electric fireplaces.
2. Control Access: Equip fireplace opening with a mesh barrier
(such as iron or steel mesh) on a raised platform or other
means to prevent guests and children from access to the fire
area and hot surfaces.
3. Wood Burning Fireplaces: Properly store wood in a dry and
protected space, and away from heat and flame. Remove
and dispose of ash in non-combustible containers.
4. Timer: Provide a timer to automatically turn off fireplace
after a reasonable time (usually 30 minutes). Exceptions;
wood burning and public area fireplaces.
5. Venting: Vent fuel burning fireplaces to the exterior. Vent-
less, fuel burning fireplaces are not accepted for sleeping
rooms and other similar confined areas. Exceptions; all
electric fireplaces.
6. Signage & Graphics: Provide the following safety signage
and graphics for guest operated fireplaces:
a. Safe operation of the fireplace
b. Caution regarding presence of children
c. Timer operation
7. Approvals: Provide fireplace units and construction that are
certified by an independent agency and code authority.
M. Electrical: Provide emergency electrical service duplex outlets
connected to the backup power source; see Module <15C>.
N. Lighting: <15C> Lighting is an important aspect of access control
and safety management. Provide lighting types in compliance
with the Design Standard lighting levels and criteria.
1. Light Levels: The following locations require “average
maintained” light levels. High risk areas may require higher
levels per LP review.
• Site Areas <1>
• Walkways <1>
• Parking Structures <1>
• Building Entry Areas <1>
• Back-of-House (BOH) <8> <9> <10> <11>
• Outdoor recreation facilities <4>
2. Public Restrooms: Provide lighting controls at remote
electric panel board. <15C>
3. Parking Lots / Driveways: Locate light poles to minimize
the need for impact protection. Do not block or obstruct
illumination source with trees.
O. Rooftop: Comply with O.S.H.A. fall protection requirements.
16.5 Security Facilities

A. Security Office: Provide a Security Office for monitoring the
property, Back-of-House (BOH) areas, entering employees,
deliveries, inspecting packages, controlling products and
materials entering BOH corridors, storing facility products
and materials, issuing employee identification badges, key
cards and hard keys.
1. Back Door Program: At smaller properties, consult
MI Global Safety and Security Technical Services to
determine if the Security Office can be minimized by
augmenting security technology.
2. Location: Adjacent to Receiving Area and employee
entrance where security monitors BOH entry of
employees, visitors, vendors, maintenance and service
providers, etc. and Receiving Area.
a. If possible, within view of employee time clock,
alcove area, adjacent to service corridor.
b. Near Receiving storage area with accessibility to
pallet jacks.
3. Deliveries: Provide Security Dispatcher with ability to
monitor delivery personnel making deliveries through
Receiving Area.
4. Facility Features: Securable and climate controlled
spaces.
a. Entry: Via a dutch door. Provide a waterproof
perimeter door seal if in or near a wash-down area,
such as receiving / loading areas.
 Figure 2 - Security Office Example
  

 
 


 Monitoring Station
 Employee Entrance 
 Security Supervisor
 Office & Holding Room
 Receiving Entrance
 Receiving / Loading Dock
b. Window: Include fixed and one sliding glass win-

dow from office to exterior dock area and sliding
window to employee entrance area.
c. VSS Monitoring: Design central monitoring console
to allow security personnel to monitor cameras, em-
ployee entrance and Receiving Area simultaneously.
d. Alarm Monitoring: Accommodate alarm systems
noted below.
e. Office / Holding Room: 4.6 m² (50 sq. ft.) minimum
area with direct access from Security Office that
doubles as an office and serves as a holding / storage
area for parcels.
f. Lost & Found: <11> Typically in Housekeeping,
otherwise locate in or near Security Office.
5. Security System Components: In the Security Office,
provide the following components and associated
devices:
a. Video Surveillance System (VSS)
b. Alarm Systems:
• Intrusion Detection / Alarm
• Remote Fire Alarm Annunciator <14>
• Elevator Monitoring Panel <12>
• Generator Low Fuel Warning <15C>
c. 2-Way Radio System
d. Intercom
e. Emergency Notification System
f. Inspection Tour Recording System
g. Electronic Lock System PC and Encoder
B. Call Center: <2> <8> Provides the Security Office with a
secondary monitoring station having the following:
• VSS Cameras
• Intrusion Detection Alarm
• 2-Way Radio Dispatch
• Intercom
• Fire Alarm Annunciator <14>
• Building Automation System (BAS) alarms <15>
• Elevator Monitoring Panel <12>
16.6 Security Systems, Equipment & Design

A. Video Surveillance System (VSS): The general purpose of the
VSS is asset protection. The Loss Prevention Review may
also employ the VSS to mitigate risks associated with
crimes against persons.
1. Monitoring: The Security Office is the primary location
for monitoring the VSS. The property Call Center
operators serve as a secondary monitoring location
unless determined otherwise by the Risk Assessment
Functional Requirements.
2. System Requirements: Comply with the following:
a. Custom Console: Organize equipment with finish
to match Security Office, Dispatcher area.
b. Supplemental Equipment: Provide as required by
system design and regional conditions, such as
additional cameras.
c. Motion Sensor: Provide with integrated detection
and alarm alert feature. Provide capability to
coordinate with the intrusion detection system.
d. VSS Integration: Only allowed on the MI LAN
when authorized by MI Information Resources
per Information Resources Standard GFS-SE005.
e. Covert Cameras: Not permitted without written
authorization by MI Risk Management and MI
Internal Investigations.
f. Imitation (dummy) Cameras: Not permitted.
g. Backup Operational Power: <15C> Required for
continuous operation.
3. VSS Components & Devices: May employ the
following:
a. Color Digital Cameras
b. Color Megapixel Cameras:
• Fixed
• 180 degree
• 360 degree
c. IP Digital Color Cameras
d. Auto Dome Systems: Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) / auto
focus / self-contained units
e. Fixed Cameras: Auto iris / manual zoom
f. Thermal Outdoor Cameras
g. Camera Dome Enclosures: Required for cameras
in pubic locations and some BOH locations.
h. Monitors: LCD; color, 66 to 81 cm (26 to 32 inch)
or larger if specified.
4. Digital Video Recorder:

a. Range of Frames per Second: No less than 15 fps /
channel with a maximum of 30 fps / channel
b. Resolution: 2 CIF 704 x 240 NTSC minimum per
channel
c. Storage: 30 days minimum
d. Transfer Ability: Transfer streaming video to a media
device such as DVD, CD, etc.
e. Video Management System (VMS): Provide for sys-
tems with more than 32 cameras. If live monitoring
is required, provide intelligent software to alert dis-
patcher to predetermined activities.
B. VSS Devices & Locations: Maximize camera views as indicated for
location and evaluate possible view obstruction such as soffits,
chandeliers and lighting levels:
1. Lobby: <2> View lobby activity, full view of front desk,
reception, identify persons entering and exiting the
guestroom and public space elevators.
2. Front Desk: <2> Fixed camera at rear of front desk wall to
identify guests and observe activity at the desk.
3. Retail Shop: <2> <5> View P.O.S. activity.
4. Public Entry Foyer: <2> Identify persons exiting.
5. Public / Meeting Space Elevator Foyers: To identify persons
entering and exiting the elevators.
6. Luggage Storage: <2> Identify persons and luggage exiting
room.
7. Guest Safe Deposit Boxes: <2> <8> Identify employees
accessing guest safe deposit boxes from the safe.
8. Drop Safe: <8> Identify employee safe deposit boxes and
cashier drop safe activity.
9. Receiving Area: <9> <10> View activity in Receiving
Area. Provide second camera located to identify persons
exiting the BOH corridor onto the Receiving Area.
10. Employee Entrance: <8> Identify persons entering and
exiting.
11. Exit Stairs: <7B> Cameras with ability to identify persons
exiting the perimeter exit doorways (interior cameras).
12. Computer Equipment Room: <13A> Identify persons
accessing PMS system.
13. Back-of-House: <8> <9> Provide at perimeter egress doors
to identify persons exiting (interior cameras).
14. Critical Assets: Provide at other locations with valuable
assets such as at ATMs, valuable artwork and cash handling
locations.
15. Security Office, Dispatcher: Provide the following:

a. Monitor: 66 to 81 cm (26 to 32 inch)
b. Digital DVR recorder located in a lock box at
Computer Room
c. Keyboard controller
16. Call Center: Provide the following:
a. Monitor: 66 to 81 cm (26 to 32 inch)
b. Keyboard controller
17. Supplemental Equipment: Provide as required for property
design and regional conditions.
18. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide equipment from one of
the following:
• Tyco Integrated Security
• Pelco by Schneider Electric
• GE
• Bosch
C. Intrusion Detection / Alarm System
1. Application:
a. Intrusion Alarm Panel: Integrate with access control
and video surveillance system for ease of investigation.
b. Live & Recorded Video: Display automatically on the
access control workstation when intrusion alarms are
detected.
c. Recorded Video: Bookmark with the intrusion alarm
information for ease of future investigation.
2. System Alarms: Not audible locally; locate in Security
Office and Call Center <2>; monitored 24 hours by trained
personnel.
3. Devices & Locations:
a. Contact Alarm (Module): Perimeter exterior doors;
Human Resources; critical Back-of-House doors,
Shipping / Receiving and Storage, Liquor Storage and
roof.
b. Duress / Panic Alarm: Provide at the following locations:
• Front Desk
• Front Office Workroom
• Executive Office Reception
• GM Office
• Cashiers Office
• Human Resource Reception and Director Office
• Nurse Office
• Payroll
• Guest Floor Lounge
• Spa Reception Desk
• Public P.O.S. (cash handling) areas
• Saunas and Steam Room (mushroom style).
c. Motion Detector: Ceiling in Cashier’s Office.
d. Alarm Zone Module: Each contact, duress / panic and

motion alarm point; required for each door alarm,
duress / panic alarm and motion detector location.
e. System Printer: Near Security Dispatcher and in Call
Center.
f. System Control Communication Panel: Security
Office.
g. Alpha Numeric Keypad: Security Office (dispatcher)
and remote Call Center. Computer based graphic
central integration system required if more than 50
door contacts.
h. Supplemental Equipment: As required by system
design or regional conditions.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
• Radionics
• Tyco Integrated Security
D. Radio System (2-way): <13B> Multi-frequency, UHF or VHF,
2-way radio system utilized by property’s security employees
for routine and emergency communication.
1. Reception: Design system without dead areas within the
building, the building exterior and property site.
2. Devices & Location: Provide the following devices in the
Security Office:
a. Repeater: Design to eliminate dead areas.
b. Antenna: System designed specifically for project by
an equipment manufacturer.
c. Portable Radios: Issued to employees.
d. Desktop / Wall Controller:
• Security Office
• Engineering Office
• Call Center
• Fire Command Room
e. Supplemental Equipment: Provide as required by
system design or regional conditions.
3. Backup Operational Power: <15C> Required for continuous
system and repeater operation.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Motorola
E. Intercom: Provide remote, flush mounted units; hard wired to
base stations.
1. Intercom System: Integrate with the access control
system that provides graphical user interface, intercom
station location identification and remote door unlocked
functionality.
The intercom master station provides accessible door or
gate control from designated buttons on master station.
2. Remote Intercom Device Locations: Verify with MI’s LP

requirements for intercom locations; typically include the
following:
• Employee Entrance
• Receiving Area
• Parking Structure Elevator Foyer
3. Master Intercom: Control base station (multiple unit
capacity).
a. Master Station: Security Dispatcher.
b. Sub-Master Station: Call Center; Front Desk if re-
quired by the Loss Prevention Review.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Aiphone Corporation
F. Wireless Emergency Notification System: Wireless handheld
system. <13B>
1. Carried by designated employees assigned to emergency
response duties.
2. Design system without dead spots.
3. Manufacturers: Provide from one of the following:
• Motorola
• Nextel
• Spectra Link
G. Inspection Tour Recording System
1. Documentation: Electronic date and time stamped security
employee patrol documentation system.
2. Tour Recording System Devices & Locations:
a. Patrol Management System Software: Security Office
b. Wand Home Base: Security Office
c. Control Unit: Security Office
d. Wands: Portable
e. Batteries: Nicad
f. Wand Holster: Portable
g. Location Identifiers: Approximately 100 at strategic
checkpoints throughout the property as established
by Regional Director of Loss Prevention.
h. Supplemental Equipment: As required by system de-
sign or regional conditions.
i. Manufacturer: Time Keeping Systems - Guard-1.
H. Property Safes: In order to safeguard cash and property, provide
the following:
1. Guestroom Safes: See Module <7>
2. Safe Deposit Boxes: See Module <8>
3. Cashier House Safe: See Module <8>
4. Deposit Safe: See Module <8>
5. Manufacturer: Amphion
I. Electronic Key Management: Automates key distribution

functions utilizing an electronic key cabinet.
1. Allows employees to access keys without security
personnel involvement.
2. Allows preset keys only to be removed.
3. Removes ability to remove individual keys due to
tamperproof key rings.
4. Generates predefined reports on key usage.
5. Vendor: Morse Watchman or equal
J. Visitor Management: Provides an automated visitor
management solution that handles the following:
• Registration
• Scanning of identification
• Photo taking as necessary
• Printed authorized visitor passes with pertinent
information
• Customized check-in process
• Vendor: Lobby Guard or equal
A. Reference: Coordinate with requirements of other Modules.
• 1 Site / Building Exteriors
• 2 Public Spaces
• 4 Recreation Facilities
• 5 Retail Spaces
• 7A Guestrooms & Suites
• 9 Engineering & Maintenance Facilities
• 11A Laundry Facility
• 11B Housekeeping

Ritz-Carlton Design Standards 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ritz-Carlton Design Standards 2013

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ritz-Carlton Design Standards 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Ritz-Carlton Hotels

Ritz-Carlton Hotels Design Standards

Revised: January 2013

January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C

GR1.3 Design Standards 5 Administration

GR1.6 Code & Regulation Compliance 7

GR1.8 Green and Sustainable Design 9

GR1.9 Building Materials, Products and Equipment 10

GR1.10 Design Review Process Model 11 Design Review

GR1.12 Design Phase Administration 15

GR1.13 Design Brief 16

GR1.14 Concept Design Phase Requirements 17

GR1.15 Schematic Design Phase Requirements 18

GR1.16 Design Development Phase Requirements 19

GR1.17 Construction Documents Phase Requirements 20 Construction Phase

GR1.19 Turnover Schedule 22

GR1.20 Project Close Out Requirements 24

GR1.21 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations 26

B Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 1

2 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR1.1 Concept of Ritz-Carlton Hotels

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 3

4 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR1.4 Project Application

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 5

• Lobby Lounge & Signature Bar

6 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

D. Dimensions, Sizes & Measurements: Conversions from

GR1.6 Code & Regulation Compliance

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 7

1. Current Editions: MI uses current editions of codes and

8 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Within the United

GR1.8 Green and Sustainable Design

The International Tourism Partnership

Energy Star Rated Products - for hotel brands worldwide

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 9

GR1.9 Building Materials, Products and Equipment

10 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 11

Figure 1 - Design Review Process

PHASES MILESTONES & TASKS

x Design Development Formal Presentation

Construction Documents x Review – 30-50%

12 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR1.11 Preliminary Design Phase

Figure 2 - Design Process - Diagram

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 13

3. Design Phase Submittal: At each phase of the design

14 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

GR1.12 Design Phase Administration

Category 1 Extraordinary site and building

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 15

E. Updates: At each design phase formal presentation, provide

GR1.13 Design Brief

16 Overview | January 2013 Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C.

5. Site Features: Identify opportunities to integrate and

GR1.14 Concept Design Phase Requirements

Copyright, The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. January 2013 | Overview 17